Product Selection Guide Whole Book

PRODUCT
SELECTION GUIDE
15th Edition
Programmable
Programmable
PROGRAMMABLE AUTOMATION CONTROLLERS

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACES
MOTION CONTROLLERS
SERVOMOTORS AND AMPLIFIERS
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
ROBOTS
COMPUTERIZED NUMERICAL CONTROLS
ENERGY MANAGEMENT
Computerized SOFTWARE
LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
www.MEAU.com
Support ................................................................................................ 3
IQ Platform............................................................................................ 8
QS Safety PAC ....................................................................................... 80
Distributed I/O ....................................................................................... 87
WS Safety Controller ............................................................................. 127
L Series Programmable Logic Controllers .................................................... 131
FX Family .......................................................................................... 149
Human Machine Interfaces ...................................................................... 183
Motion Controllers ................................................................................ 209
Servomotors and Ampliiers .................................................................... 233
Variable Frequency Drives ...................................................................... 397
Robots .............................................................................................. 459
Computerized Numerical Controls ............................................................. 477
Energy Products and Solutions ................................................................. 523
Software ............................................................................................ 533
Low Voltage Switchgear ......................................................................... 543
Demonstration Kits ............................................................................... 549
Index ................................................................................................ 551
Stock Product: Stock product is product MEAU makes every effort to have on hand for immediate shipment. There may
be instances when we are out of stock due to unexpected large requirements. All stock product will be indicated in this
book by an “S” in the Stocked Item columns/rows.
Non-Stock Product: Non-stock product is product supplied on an “as-needed” basis. Standard lead times of 12 – 16
weeks apply, product is non-returnable and non-cancelable. Product listed as non-stock may change to stock product
subject to increases in sales and usage. All non-stock product will be indicated in this book by a dash “-” in the Stocked
Item columns/rows.
Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Table of Contents I

Support
Technical Assistance
USA / Canada Toll Free: 1 (800) 950-7781

Monday-Friday 7:00 AM - 7:00 PM Central
24/7 USA / Canada Toll Free: 1 (888) 701-7999

After 7:00 PM Central time and weekends (P.O. needed if part shipment is required. Fulfillment fee applies. For Non-ESSP customers, this is a
paid service requiring a purchase order or credit card.)
International Support: +1 (847) 478-2100

(Select Option 2 for Technical Support, then Option 2 for Industrial Automation) Monday-Friday 7:00 AM - 7:00 PM Central
Website: www.meau.com/contactus • Email: tsg@meau.com
Extended Support and Service Programs (ESSPSM)

With a sharp focus on the human element, Mitsubishi Electric Automation offers world class training, 24 /7/365 support options, on-site
consultation and application development assistance to ensure profitable manufacturing operation and processes.
Mitsubishi Electric Automation offers three levels of Support & Service Programs, as well as custom support programs to assist you in
maximizing your support, and preserving machine uptime while maintaining your budget.
ESSPSM Silver ESSPSM Gold ESSPSM Platinum
Priority Phone Support No hold priority. 7:00 AM - 7:00 PM CST 24/7/365 priority with parts fulfillment* 24/7/365 priority with parts fulfillment*
Application Support On-site - 10 hours On-site - 15 hours On-site - 20 hours
Training*** 2 Seats / 12 days each 2 Seats / 20 days each 2 Seats / Unlimited
Up to 10% on Application Support, Up to 20% on Application Support, Up to 30% on Application Support,
Additional Discounts
Service & Training*** Service & Training*** Service & Training**
*After regular business hours, parts fulfillment will be invoiced at standard pricing plus Service Fee. (quoted separately).
**For pricing, quotation, and plan details, please contact the Technical Support Group at (847) 478-2532 or email training@meau.com. All pricing is based on annual charges.
***Regularly scheduled classes per schedule posted on www.meau.com/training
On-Site Support
Put our experience to work for you! Our engineers have the know-how to understand
your application and provide the critical support your business needs. Whether you
need a single engineer for the day or a staff of engineers stationed at your facility,
Mitsubishi Electric Automation has the solution.
Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Support and Services 3

n SUPPORT AND SERVICES
Mitsubishi University
Mitsubishi University provides many levels of training on different Industrial
Automation products offered by Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc. These courses
focus on key needs of each customer category, as listed below.
Standard Product Training

Mitsubishi Electric Automation’s classes provide practical, hands-on,
product-oriented, customer-paced training which can be used the
moment the student walks out of the class. We offer a wide range
of training over various products. Information about our classes is
on-line at www.meau.com/training. You will find a complete list of
class descriptions, custom training, current training schedules with
pricing, and class registration procedures.
Standard Classes Offered

Programmable Logic Controllers Operator Interfaces Motion Control & Servo Robots
PLC Basics (GX Works2) GOT1000 and GT Works3 Motion Basics Robot Basic Programming
FX Series Advanced D75/D77 Positioning Robot Repair Training
Safety Systems Networking MR-MQ100 Controller Robot Basic Maintenance Training
L Series Advanced CC-Link Networking QD77/LD77 Advanced Positioning
A Series Transition CC-Link IE Networking FX Series Pulse Positioning Maintenance & Troubleshooting
A Series PLC Ethernet Networking PLC Maintenance (GX Developer)
MELSECNET/H Networking Variable Frequency Drives PLC Maintenance (GX Works2)
Software MES Introduction D700/E700 Micro Drives GOT1000 Maintenance (GT Works2)
GX Works2 Programming MES Interface F700 Inverters QD75 Maintenance
GX Works2 Structured Programming MES Interface IT
MELSOFT Navigator
MT Works2 Programming
For a complete listing of current courses visit www.meau.com/training/industrial_automation

More detailed course outlines are available at www.meau.com in the Training section.
Custom Training
Mitsubishi Electric Automation is one of the few automation product and solution providers worldwide that offers customer-specific
“customized” training based on your application requirements. Contact one of our professional trainers to discuss your training needs.
Email training@meau.com or call our training coordinator at (847) 478-2532.
4
Mitsubishi University Classes
Length of Class and
Course Name Course Description
Prerequisite
This course will familiarize the student with the A Series family of PLC products and the software needed to configure, make
changes, and maintain a complete PLC system. This class will be taught using the A1SH PLCs and GX-Developer software.
3 Days
A Series PLC
Prerequisite • None A Series Hardware; Networks; Programming Equipment; Numbering Systems; System Configuration; Sequence Instructions;
Developing Programs; Timers and Counters; Basic Instructions; Application Instructions; Troubleshooting; Parameters;
Documentation
This course is a half-day seminar which will introduce the concepts and issues involved in the transition of the legacy A Series
PLC platform to the Q Series Automation Platform. This class is a half-day instructor-led presentation of the topics and tools, as
1 Day well as a discussion of the available resources to assist with the transition process. After lunch is an open question and answer
A Series Transition
Prerequisite • None session for students to discuss specific issues.
Transition Overview; Affected Equipment; Upgrade & Conversion Tools; Converting Systems; Network Conversion
This course will teach the engineer who needs to configure, start up, and troubleshoot CC-Link networks. Issues from network
2 Days topology to communication programming are covered. This class will utilize both FX and Q Series network master modules, and
CC-Link Networking Prerequisite • GX Works2 includes remote I/O modules, inverter communication boards, servo amplifiers, and intelligent slave modules.
Programming Network Introduction, CC-Link Network, Hardware Introduction, Configuring FX Series Master, Inverter Communications,
Servo Communications, Configuring Q Series Master, Intelligent Devices, Standby Master
This course demonstrates the setup, operation, and troubleshooting of the CC-Link IE networks. This includes CC-Link IE
2 Days Control and CC-Link IE Field.
CC-Link IE Networking Prerequisite • GX Works2
Programming Network Overview; CC-Link IE Overview; CC-Link IE Modules; CC-Link IE Control; CC-Link IE Field; Standby Master;
Troubleshooting
This course will familiarize the attendee with the QD75, QD77, LD75 and LD77 families of motion control modules and the
2 Days software needed to configure, make changes and maintain a motion system.
D75/D77 Positioning Prerequisite • GX Works2
Programming Module Introduction; GX Works2 Configuration; Module Configuration; Module Control; Diagnostics; Origin Point; Positioning
Tables; Positioning Profiles; Speed Control Profiles; Dedicated Commands; Advanced Positioning
This course will introduce the FR-D700 and FR-E700 series of variable frequency drives. It will give the student a
thorough knowledge of the hardware, parameters and troubleshooting of the D700 and E700. This class is taught using
2 Days both inverter models.
D700/E700 Micro Drives
Prerequisite • None
AC Motor Theory; VFD Theory; Braking, Loads; Hardware Review; Parameters; Troubleshooting; Stand Alone Options;
Harmonics, Noise and Microsurges; Key Features
2 Days This class is solely focused on Ethernet within Mitsubishi’s structure. This class is for the advanced user and we will learn
Ethernet Networking Prerequisite • GX Works2 Networking, system configuration, protocols, modeling, and advanced applications.
Programming Topologies, O S I modeling, Hardware, Practical Lessons, Practice Applications
This course will introduce the FR-F700 Series of variable frequency drives. It will give the student a thorough knowledge of the
2 Days hardware, parameters and troubleshooting of the F700. This class is taught using the F720.
F700 Inverter
Prerequisite • None Inverter Product Lineup; Installation; Wiring Connections; Keypad; Parameter Settings; Troubleshooting; Built-in PLC;
FR-Configurator Setup Software
This class will explain and demonstrate some of the higher end functionality of the FX Series controllers. This class is taught
2 Days with the FX3U and FX3UC controllers and GX Developer programming software.
FX Series Advanced
Prerequisite • None High Speed Counters; File Registers; Data Tables; ASCII Text; Serial Communications; Parallel Link; N:N Networking;
Inverter Communications
This course will familiarize the student with the motion control capabilities of the FX Series family of PLC products and the
software needed to configure, make changes to, and troubleshoot a motion control system based on the FX Series controllers.
FX Series Pulse 2 Days This class will be taught using the FX3U PLCs, MR-J3-A servos, and GX Developer and MR Configurator software packages.
Positioning Prerequisite • None
FX Series Hardware Review; Pulse Control Addresses; Connections; Basic Servo Configuration; Zero Return (Homing);
Positioning Commands; Table Positioning
This course is designed to introduce the various hardware platforms within the GOT1000 family, the programming software
3 Days GT Designer3, and the special functions of the GOT1000 products.
GOT1000 and GT Works3 Prerequisite • GX Works2
Programming Introduction to GOTs; GOT1000 Family Overview; Communication Options; GT Designer3 Basics; Screen Design Basics;
Switches and Lamps; Basic Screen Objects; Graphs; Alarms; Recipes; Monitoring Functions
This course will instruct the attendee on identifying the GOT1000 Series hardware. Using software tool GT Designer2 to install/
upgrade Boot OS, Communication Driver and Extended Function OS. Understand basic modification and troubleshooting of
GOT1000 Maintenance 1 Day GOT projects.
(GT Works2) Prerequisite • None
Introduction to GOTs; GOT1000 Family Overview; Communications Options; GT Designer2 Basics; Screen Design Basics; Basic
Screen Objects; Alarms; Monitoring Functions
This course will guide the student through the operation of GX Works2 and the programming of Mitsubishi PLCs using ladder
3 Days logic. It includes programming, diagnostics, and software features.
GX Works2 Programming Prerequisite • PLC Basics iQ Works Introduction; GX Works2 Introduction; Creating a Project, Online Operations; Program Documentation; PLC
(GX Works2) Parameters; Timers & Counters; Basic Instructions; Special Addresses; Mathematics; GX Works2 Utilities; Intelligent Modules;
Additional Commands; Multiple Programs; Project Revision Tracking; Project Security
This course demonstrates and explains advanced programming topics related to structured programming. This class covers the
3 Days additional programming languages of Structured Ladder, Structured Text, and Sequential Function Chart.
GX Works2 Structured
Prerequisite • GX Works2
Programming
Programming Label Programming; Structured Projects; Structured Ladder; Structured Text; Sequential Function Chart; Function Blocks;
Libraries; Arrays and Structured Data Types
2 Days This course demonstrates the advanced features of the L Series CPU, including built-in I/O, positioning, counting,
L Series Advanced Prerequisite • GX Works2 and data logging.
Programming Built-In Inputs and Outputs; Pulse Positioning; High Speed Counters; Display Module, Data Logging
Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Support and Services 5

n SUPPORT AND SERVICES
Mitsubishi University Classes
Length of Class and
Course Name Course Description
Prerequisite
This course is designed to introduce the user to the systems that the MES Interface and the MES Interface IT modules use
1 Day and operate within. The basics of the eco system, OPC, enterprise computing are covered.
MES Introduction Prerequisite • GX Works2
Programming Product Introduction, MES Eco System, MES Interface IT Introduction, Demonstration Equipment, OPC Introduction,
Support Overview, Application Examples, Enterprise Computing, Quick Start Guide
1 Day This course builds on what is learned in the MES Interface Introduction course. This course is designed for people who have
MES Interface Prerequisite • MES working knowledge of OPC and Eco systems and have limited knowledge of the Mitsubishi MES Interface module.
Introduction QJ71MES96 Installation, Basic Troubleshooting, Diagnostics, Programming, Configuration
2 Days This course is designed for the advanced IT and MES module knowledge user. The Student will learn commissioning the
MES Interface (IT) Prerequisite • MES MES module and the GOT operator Interface along with system diagnostics.
Interface (Intermediate) Advanced Applications, Advanced Troubleshooting, Diagnostics, Security, Commissioning, GOT Connectivity
This course will introduce the basic concepts required to understand servo based motion and motion controllers. Servo and
1 Day motor theory are discussed, as well as applications and control theory.
Motion Basics
Motor and Servo Theory, Applications and Sizing, Motion Controllers, Programming Basics
This course will introduce the MR-MQ100 1.5 axis motion controller and the programming methods. The student will learn
the controller architecture, programming, and create sample applications using the MR-MQ100 controller and the
3 Days MT Developer2-MQ programming software.
MR-MQ100 Controller Prerequisite • Motion
Basics MR-MQ100 Introduction, MT Developer2 Basics, Memory Structure, Motion SFC Introduction, Motion SFC Programming,
Virtual Mode Introduction, Virtual Mode Programming, Registration Function, Cam Function, Application Examples,
GOT1000 Connection
2 Days This course demonstrates the setup, operation, and troubleshooting of the MELSECNET/H network.
MELSECNET/H Networking Prerequisite • GX Works2 Network Overview; MELSECNET/H Overview; Parameters; Routing; Cyclic Communication; Transient Communication;
Programming Remote I/O; Additional Functions; Troubleshooting
1 Day This course is designed to teach the usage of MELSOFT Navigator and system labels.
MELSOFT Navigator Prerequisite • GX Works2
Programming Introduction; MELSOFT Navigator; System Labels
This course will familiarize the attendee with the motion controllers and MT Works2 software. This course focuses on the
4 Days Motion Control CPU and programming.
Prerequisite • Motion
MT Works2 Programming
Basics, GX Works2 Hardware Introduction; Getting Started; MT Developer2 Introduction; Sequence Processor; Memory Structure; Origin Point;
Programming Motion SFC Introduction; MT Works2 Tools; Positioning Profiles; Motion SFC Examples; Virtual Mode Introduction; Virtual
Mode Programming; Cam Programming; CPU Integration; Dedicated Instructions; Advanced Concepts
This course will introduce the concepts of PLCs, as well as provide an introduction to the components of the various
1 Day Mitsubishi PLC families. Basics of PLC design, assembly, and addressing are covered. This course also includes an
PLC Basics (GX Works2) introduction to the ladder logic programming language.
PLC Hardware; Numeric Data Handling; System Addressing; Programming Software; Ladder Logic Basics
This course will familiarize the attendee with the components of a PLC. Identify the memory addresses for inputs and
outputs. Understand the basics of ladder logic. Use of the troubleshooting tools in GX Developer. How to make basic
PLC Maintenance 2 Days program changes. Identify and replace modules in the PLC.
(GX Developer) Prerequisite • None
PLC Hardware; Numeric Data Handling; System Addressing; Basic Ladder Logic; GX Developer Basics; Online Operations;
Intelligent Modules; Special Addresses; PLC Parameters; GX Developer Utilities; Hardware Maintenance
This course will familiarize the attendee with the components of a PLC. Identify the memory addresses for inputs and
outputs. Understand the basics of ladder logic. Use of the troubleshooting tools in GX Works2. How to make basic program
PLC Maintenance 2 Days changes. Identify and replace modules in the PLC.
(GX Works2) Prerequisite • None
PLC Hardware; Numeric Data Handling; System Addressing; Basic Ladder Logic; GX Works2 Basics; Online Operations;
Intelligent Modules; Special Addresses; PLC Parameters; GX Works2 Utilities; Hardware Maintenance
This course will familiarize the attendee on how to configure a motion module and the servo parameters. Build motion
control tasks and downloading of motion tables. Execute motion control tasks. Diagnose and troubleshoot systems using the
1 Day motion module.
QD75 Maintenance
Module Introduction; Software Configuration; Module Configuration; Module Control; Diagnostics; Origin Point;
Positioning Profiles
1 Day This course will familiarize the student with the synchronous control functions of the QD77 and LD77 families of motion
QD77/LD77 Advanced control modules.
Prerequisite • D75/D77
Positioning
Positioning Synchronous Control; Synchronous Configuration: Synchronous Operation; Cams
This course will familiarize the student with the Mitsubishi robot products and the software needed to configure, make
3 Days changes, and maintain a robot system. This class will be taught using the RV-3S robot and RT Toolbox software.
Robot Basic Programming
Prerequisite • None Robot Operation, Robot Construction and Maintenance, Controller Functions, Teach Box Menus, Offline and Online
Programming, Basic Troubleshooting
This course has been designed to explain the basic maintenance structure of the Mitsubishi Robots through lecture and
Robot Basic Maintenance 1 Day hands on practice. Upon completion of this course, operative employees will have a fundamental understanding of the
Training Prerequisite • None Mitsubishi Robot system. They will be able to perform routine maintenance and basic troubleshooting on the Mitsubishi
robot system.
This course is an in depth look at the maintenance structure of the Mitsubishi Robot. It includes complete removal and
3 Days reinstallation of multiple joints on the robot. This will give the individual a greater understanding of the internal workings of
Robot Repair Training the Mitsubishi robot and allow them to have the ability to properly troubleshoot any issue that may arise on the robot. Upon
Prerequisite • None completion of this course, operative employees will have a fundamental understanding of the Mitsubishi robot system and
should be able to troubleshoot and maintain a complete robot system.
2 Days This course will introduce the Q Safety Controller, Safety Relays, CC-Link Safety, and WS Safety Controller.
Safety Systems Prerequisite • PLC Basics MELSEC QS Component Overview; Safety I/O Connectivity; CC-Link Safety; System Status and Monitoring; Safety Control;
(GX Works2) Safety Relay Modules; Safety Addition to Servo and VFD; Safety Application Examples; WS Controller
6
Programmable Automation Controller
iQ Platform 16-4096
P E R FOR M A N C E
QS Safety PLC 12-1024
I/O
iQ Platform ............................................................................................................................................................................ 8
MELSEC QS Safety ............................................................................................................................................................... 80
Stock Product: Stock product is product MEAU makes every effort to have on hand for immediate shipment. There may be instances when we are out
of stock due to unexpected large requirements. All stock product will be indicated in this book by an “S” in the Stocked Item columns/rows.
Non-Stock Product: Non-stock product is product supplied on an “as-needed” basis. Standard lead times of 12 - 16 weeks apply, product is
non-returnable and non-cancelable. Product listed as non-stock may change to stock product subject to increases in sales and usage. All non-stock
product will be indicated in this book by a dash “-” in the Stocked Item columns/rows.
Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Programmable Automation Controller / PAC 7

IQ Platform
n PROGRAMMABLE AUTOMATION CONTROLLER / PAC
iQ Platform
Multiple CPU System Configuration

C Ethernet cable
(customer supplied)
*
A
RS-232 cable USB cable
(customer supplied)
F PC (GX Works2)
Battery for
FRONT
BAT
MPG
ACFAIL
RIO
FRONT
BAT
MPG
ACFAIL
RIO
FRONT
BAT
MPG
ACFAIL
RIO
F
QCPU (Q6BAT)
Memory card
Sequence Motion CNC Robot WINCPU

CPU CPU CPU CPU
PC card adapter Memory card
F
Main base unit
* E
B D*
C
Extension cable Power supply module I/O, Intelligent function modules
Extension base unit
C
*Minimum Requirements
Modular CPUs ............................................................................................................................................................................. 9

Base Units ................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
iQ Platform Base Units .......................................................................................................................................................... 20
Q Series Base Units ............................................................................................................................................................... 20
DIN Rail Adapters .................................................................................................................................................................. 20
Extension Base Units and Connection Cables ............................................................................................................................. 21
Power Supply Modules ............................................................................................................................................................... 21
I/O and Intelligent Function Modules .......................................................................................................................................... 23
Digital Input Modules ............................................................................................................................................................ 23
Combination I/O Modules ...................................................................................................................................................... 24
Digital Output Modules .......................................................................................................................................................... 25
Analog Input Modules ........................................................................................................................................................... 27
High Speed Analog Input Modules ........................................................................................................................................ 28
Combination Analog Modules................................................................................................................................................ 33
Analog Output Modules ......................................................................................................................................................... 34
HART Interface Module ......................................................................................................................................................... 38
Temperature Control Modules ............................................................................................................................................... 40
High Speed Counter Modules ................................................................................................................................................ 45
Interrupt Modules.................................................................................................................................................................. 48
Positioning Modules.............................................................................................................................................................. 49
Serial Communication Modules............................................................................................................................................. 52
Network Modules ........................................................................................................................................................................ 55
e-F@ctory ................................................................................................................................................................................... 72
MES Solution .............................................................................................................................................................................. 74
Accessories ................................................................................................................................................................................. 76
8
A. Modular CPUs
The iQ Platform unifies all of the Mitsubishi Electric automation • System configuration and PLC/Motion/HMI programming using
disciplines into a one-of-a-kind modular Programmable Automation iQ Works
Controller (PAC). Based on the multi-CPU architecture of the • Backward compatibility with Q Series programs and parameters
renowned Q Series Automation Platform, the iQ ultra high-speed
dual-bus back plane allows the iQ to be the only PAC to integrate • Multiple program processing
individual Sequence, Motion, CNC, and Robot control onto a single • Selectable 8 or 32-axis high-speed fiber optic motion
rack. The iQ Platform is ideal for multi-discipline systems, requiring controller CPUs
at least one sequence CPU. Users can expand their configuration • Selectable 16-axis C70 CNC controller CPU
with existing Q Series I/O and intelligent modules, providing the iQ
• Selectable vertical or horizontal type robot controller CPUs
Platform customized flexibility without the cost of new development
or double-stock. • Infinite I/O and intelligent function module customization
possibilities
Key Features: • Minimal hardware footprint
• Up to 4 CPUs total, including one sequence CPU; Motion, CNC, • Certified by UL, cUL, CE (as indicated), as well as DNV, ABS,
and Robot CPUs available RINA, BV, LR and NK shipping approvals for all Q Series products
• Large 4096 I/O capacity and as low as 9.5ns instruction
processing, with selectable CPU program size
• Selectable built-in Ethernet sequence CPUs, enabling program
upload/download, monitoring, debugging, SNTP, and FTP
functionality via Ethernet
iQ Platform CPU Configuration

iQ Base Units: Q35DB, Q38DB or Q312DB
Power
CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Supply
Q03UDCPU
CON0 CON0 CON0 CON0 CON0 CON0 CON0 CON0 CON0

MODE
RUN
ERR.
20 30 USER 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
BAT.
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
BOOT
15
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
10 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
15
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
PULL
USB
RS-232
1st CPU 2nd – 4th CPU

QnU Sequence CPU QnU Sequence CPU; 3 Max. QD Motion CPU; 3 Max.
Q03UDECPU Q03UDECPU Q172DCPU
Q04UDEHCPU Q04UDEHCPU Q173DCPU
Q06UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU SQ Robot CPU; 3 Max.
Q10UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q172DRCPU
Q13UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU C70 CNC CPU; 2 Max.
Q20UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q173NCCPU-S01
Q26UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU C CPU, MES IT, or WinCPU; 3 Max.
Q50UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q12DCCPU-V
Q100UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU QJ71MES96IT
Q10WCPU-W1-E
Process CPU Process CPU
Q02PHCPU Q02PHCPU Q10WCPU-W1-CFE
Q06PHCPU Q06PHCPU
Q12PHCPU Q12PHCPU
Q25PHCPU Q25PHCPU

iQ Platform CPUs
iQ Platform QnU “Universal” Sequence CPUs
The QnU CPUs bring high-end sequence control to the Mitsubishi • Vastly increased data storage and non-volatile program memory
PAC lineup and are required in every iQ system. These CPUs are most • Utilizes dedicated high-speed CPU-only communication bus with
effective when used in conjunction with other iQ Platform CPUs such other iQ CPUs
as Motion, Robot, CNC, PC and C Language controllers. However, they
can also be used in Q Series configurations to increase performance • Backward compatibility with Q Series CPUs, I/O and Intelligent
and functionality. Modules; QnU CPUs can be configured in single-CPU and / or
standard Q Series CPUs
Key Features: • Built-in Ethernet port for increased accessibility and ease-of-use
• World-leading processor execution speeds as low as 9.5ns • USB (Mini-B) connection to CPU for rapid program
per instruction upload/download
• Significantly enhanced arithmetic and data processing (sorting,
floating point, etc.)
Required Manuals
Model Number Description Included with CPU? Stocked Item
SH(NA)080483 QCPU Users Manual No -
SH(NA)080485-ENG QCPU Users Manual (Multiple CPU Systems) No -
SH(NA)080807-ENG QnUCPU Users Manual No -
SH(NA)080809-ENG QCPU Programming No -
SH(NA)080811-ENG QnUCPU Users Manual (Ethernet Communication) No -
Note: Many of these manuals are available by free download from our website, www.meau.com
Built-In
Model Number Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU
Ethernet
Stocked Item S S S - S - S - -
Processing LD X0 20ns 9.5ns
Speed
(Sequence
MOV D0 D1 40ns 19ns
Instruction)
Program Capacity (*1, *2) 30k steps 40k steps 60k steps 100k steps 130k steps 200k steps 260k steps 500k steps 1000k steps
Memory Program Memory (Drive 0) 120 kB 160 kB 240 kB 400 kB 520 kB 800 kB 1040 kB 2000 kB 4000 kB
Capacity Standard RAM (Drive 3) 192 kB 256 kB 768 kB 1024 kB 1280 kB 1536 kB 1792 kB
(*1) Standard ROM (Drive 4) 1024 kB 2048 kB 4096 kB 8192 kB 16384 kB
Max. Program Memory 124 252 (*3)
Number Standard RAM 4 files
of Files
Stored Standard ROM 256 512
Memory Card Interface Yes
Max. I/O Device Points 8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF)
Max. Physical I/O Points 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF)
No. of Device Points Set in PLC parameters
File Registers Available
Data Transmission Speed 100/10Mbps
Communication Mode Full-duplex / Half duplex
Specs. of Ethernet Functions Program upload/download, remote monitor/maintenance, HMI connection, FTP server, SNTP
Built-In
Ethernet Max. Distance Between Hub
100m (328.08 feet)
Port CPU and Node
Module Max. No. of 10BASE-T Cascade connection: Four stages maximum
(*4) Connectable
Nodes 100BASE-TX Cascade connection: Two stages maximum
Number of Connections (*5) 16 for MELSOFT connection and MC protocol, 1 for FTP
Communication Ports USB (Mini-B), RS-232 / Ethernet USB (Mini-B), Ethernet
5VDC Internal Current Consumption 0.33A (*6) 0.39A (*7) 0.50A
Base Unit Slots Occupied 1
Weight (kg) 0.22 0.24
Notes:
1. The unit of the file size stored in the memory area varies depending on the CPU module. For more details, refer to the QCPU User’s Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
2. The maximum number of executable sequence steps is shown. (Program capacity) - (File header size (default: 34 steps)). For details, refer to the QCPU User’s Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals).
3. The CPU module can only execute up to 124 programs, though more may be stored.
4. Applies to QnU CPUs with built-in Ethernet ports only.
5. Indicates the total number of TCP/IP and UDP/IP protocols.
6. The current value consumption of the built-in Ethernet part version is 0.46A
7. The current consumption of the built-in Ethernet port version is 0.46A.
10
Model Number Built-In Ethernet Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU
Stocked Item S - S - S
Processing LD X0 1.9ns
Speed
(Sequence
MOV D0 D1 3.9ns
Instruction)
Program Capacity (*1, *2, *3) 30k steps 40k steps 60K steps 130k steps 260k steps
Program Memory (Drive 0) 120 kB 160 kB 240 kB 520 kB 1040 kB
Memory Card RAM (Drive 1) -
Memory Card SD (Drive 2) Depends on the SD memory card (SD or SDHC type) used. (Max. 32GB)
Memory Standard RAM (Drive 3) Without
Capacity 192 kB 256 kB 768 kB 1024 kB 1280 kB
Extended SRAM Cassette
(*1) Standard RAM (Drive 3) With
Capacities of the memory in the module and extended SRAM cassette. (The maximum capacity of an extended SRAM casette is 8MB)
Extended SRAM Cassette
Standard ROM (Drive 4) 1025.5 kB 2051 kB 4102 kB
CPU Shared Memory 32 kB
Program Memory 124 (*4) 252 (*4)
Max. Memory Card SD Root directory: 512 files (maximum); Subdirectory: 65534 files (maximum)
Number Memory Card SDHC Root directory: 65535 files (maximum); Subdirectory: 65534 files (maximum)
of Files Standard RAM With or Without
Stored 323
an Extended SRAM Cassette
Standard ROM 256
Max. I/O Device Points 8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF)
Data Transmission Speed 100/10Mbps
Specs. of Communication Mode Full-duplex/Half-duplex
Built-In Max. Distance Between Hub
100m
Ethernet and Node
Port CPU Max. No. of 10BASE-T Cascade connection: Up to four bases (*5)
Module Connectable
(*4) Nodes 100BASE-TX Cascade connection: Up to two bases (*5)
Number of Connections (*6) 16 for a total of socket communication, MELSOFT connection, and MC protocol, and 1 for FTP
5VDC Internal Current Consumption 0.58A (only CPU module), 0.6A (with an extended SRAM cassette)
Weight (kg) 20
Notes:
1. The maximum number of executable sequence steps is obtained by the following formula.
2. Program size – file header size (default: 34 steps)
3. When the QnUD(H)CPU or QnUDE(H)CPU is replaced with the QnUDVCPU, the number of steps in the program may change (increase or decrease)
4. Data in the CPU shard memory cannot be latched. Data in the CPU shared memory is cleared when the programmable controller is powered on or the CPU module is reset.
5. This is the number of connectable modes when a repeater hub is used. For the number of connectable nodes when a switching hub is used, contact the manufacturer of the switching hub used.
6. The number is a total of TCP/IP and UDP/IP.

iQ Platform Motion CPUs
The iQ Platform unifies four key fields of automation, one being Key Features:
servo motion. The iQ Motion CPUs combined with MR-J3 servos • Accelerated communication speed over a freely designated
deliver the highest level of speed and precision with tight integration expanded range of inter-CPU shared memory
to interdisciplinary automation control. Exploiting the high-speed
inter-CPU communication bus, servo movement can be scattered • Additional clutch control functionality
seamlessly throughout Sequence, Robot, and CNC operations. • Faster processing for improved multi-axis support
For more details on associated Motion products, please see the • Up to 32 axes per CPU, 96 axes per system
Motion Controllers product section. • MR-J3-B Servo and SSCNETIII benefits, including noise free,
50Mbps, fiber optic communication, and active auto-tuning
Required Manuals
Model Number Description Included with CPU? Stocked Item
IB(NA)0300133-A QD Users Manual No S
IB(NA)0300134-A QD Common Manual No S
IB(NA)0300136-A QD Real Mode Manual No S
IB(NA)0300137-A QD Virtual Mode Manual No S
IB(NA)0300135-A QD SFC Programming Manual No S
Model Number Q173DCPU Q172DCPU

Stocked Item S S
Number of Control Axes Up to 32 axes Up to 8 axes
0.44ms / 1 to 6 axes; 0.88ms / 7 to 18 axes

SV13 0.44ms / 1 to 6 axes; 0.88ms / 7 to 8 axes
1.77ms / 19 to 32 axes
Operation Cycle (Default)
SV22 0.44ms / 1 to 4 axes; 0.88ms / 5 to 8 axes
Manual Pulse Generator Operation

Possible to connect 3 modules
Function
Synchronous Encoder Operation Function 12 modules max. 8 modules max.
Number of SSCNET III Systems (*1) 2 systems 1 system
Q172DLX: 4 modules usable; Q172DEX: 6 modules usable Q172DLX: 1 module usable; Q172DEX: 4 modules usable
Motion Related Interface Module
Q173DPX: 4 modules usable (*2) Q173DPX: 3 modules usable (*2)
Internal Current Consumption (5VDC) [A] 1.25 1.14

Mass (kg) 0.33 0.33
Notes:
1. The servo amplifiers for SSCNET cannot be used.
2. When using the incremental synchronous encoder (SV22 use), you can use above number of modules. When connecting the manual pulse generator, you can use only 1 module.
Synchronous Encoder
Synchronous Encoder
Type Manual Pulse Generator
Serial Absolute Incremental
Model Number Q172DEX Q173DPX
Stocked Item S S
Q173DCPU 12 modules 12 modules 3 modules
Q172DCPU 8 modules 8 modules 3 modules
12
iQ Platform CNC CPU
The Q173NCCPU enables entry level CNC Control to be integrated • Up to 16 axes with 4 simultaneously controlled axes per CPU,
with Sequence, Motion, and Robot automation systems. Also known 2 CPUs per system
as the C70 Series CNC Controller, an iQ CNC CPU system uses multi- • 16.8k Block/min processing speed
purpose GOT1000 HMIs and on-rack I/O cards to minimize TCO on
CNC line solutions. • Streamlined production with reduced Tact Time and host
information system linkage
For more details on associated CNC products, please see the CNC • Uses GOT1000 HMI and iQ rack-based I/O card interfaces
product section.
• SSCNETIII benefits, including noise free, 50Mbps, fiber optic
Key Features: communication
• Accelerated communication speed over the inter-CPU
shared memory
Required Manuals
Model Number Description Contents Included with CPU? Stocked Item
IB1500261 C70 Connection Manual Covers Q173NCCPU installation and connections Yes (PDF format) -
IB1500267 C70 Instruction Manual Covers screen operation for C70 Yes (PDF format) -
Describes the various signal interfaces and functions
IB1500263 C70 PLC Interface Manual required when creating sequence program of PLC CPU to Yes (PDF format) -
operate C70
IB1500269 C70 Programming Manual (Machining Center System) Covers programming for machining centers Yes (PDF format) -
IB1500275 C70 Programming Manual (Lathe System) Covers programming for lathe systems Yes (PDF format) -
IB1500265 C70 Setup Manual Covers setup Yes (PDF format) -
IB1500259 C70 CPU Module Q173NCCPU Specifications Manual General and functional specifications Yes (PDF format) -
Q173NCCPU-S01
CNC CPU Specifications
Machining Center Type Lathe Type
Stocked Item S S
Number of Control Axes 16
Maximum Number of Simultaneous Control Axes 4
Maximum Number of Spindles 7 4
Maximum Number of PLC Axes 7
Maximum Number of Part Systems 7 3
Control Unit 1µm / 0.1µm
Interpolation Processing Performance 16.8k Block/min
Max Feed Rate 1000m/min
Note: If used, the Q173SXY CNC Safety I/O module requires programming by GX Developer (unavailable with GX Works2).
iQ Platform Robot CPU Key Features:

The new Q172DRCPU Robot controller combines faster processing • Capable of controlling up to 3 robots per system
speed and enhanced motion control, providing superior flexibility and • Base Unit (one slot per CPU)
performance when designing robotic work cells.
• Both vertically articulated and SCARA robots can be
For more details on associated Robot products, please see the Robot configured on a single platform
product section. • Single programming software package for all robot types
SCARA Robots for iQ • Versatility through shared iQ networking, I/O, and intelligent
modules
Axes / Max. Position Repeatability
Max. Z Axis • Improved cycle times through inter-CPU shared memory bus
Model Number Degrees Reach X-Y Stk
Payload Stroke Z J4
(*1, *2) of Radius Composite Item
(kg) (mm) (mm) (deg.) Vertically Articulated Robots for iQ
Freedom (mm) (mm)
RH-3SQHR3515-_ 4 3 350 150 ± .01 ± .01 ± .01 - Max.
Model Axes / Max. Position
Reach Stocked
RH-6SQH3520-_ 4 6 350 200 ± .02 ± .01 ± .02 - Number Degrees of Payload Repeatability
Radius Item
(*1, *2) Freedom (kg) (mm)
RH-6SQH4520-_ 4 6 450 200 ± .02 ± .01 ± .02 - (mm)
RH-6SQH5520-_ 4 6 550 200 ± .02 ± .01 ± .02 - RV-2SQ-_ 6 2 504 ± .02 -
RH-12SQH5535-_ 4 12 550 350 ± .02 ± .01 ± .03 - RV-3SQJ-_ 5 3.5 641 ± .02 -
RH-12SQH7035-_ 4 12 700 350 ± .025 ± .01 ± .03 - RV-3SQ-_ 6 3.5 642 ± .02 -
RV-6SQ-_ 6 6 695 ± .02 -
RH-12SQH8535-_ 4 12 850 350 ± .025 ± .01 ± .03 -
RV-6SQL-_ 6 6 902 ± .02 -
RH-18SQH8535-_ 4 18 850 350 ± .025 ± .01 ± .03 -
RV-12SQ-_ 6 12 1086 ± .05 -
RH-20SQH8535-_ 4 20 850 350 ± .025 ± .025 ± .025 -
RV-12SQL-_ 6 12 1385 ± .05 -
RH-20SQH8545-_ 4 20 850 450 ± .025 ± .025 ± .025 -
Notes:
RH-20SQH10035-_ 4 20 1000 350 ± .025 ± .025 ± .025 - 1. Includes arm, drive unit, CPU, arm to drive unit cable set, and CPU to drive unit cable set.
RH-20SQH10045-_ 4 20 1000 450 ± .025 ± .025 ± .025 - 2. -_ Indicates additional specifications for UL, clean, and oil mist types. Please contact MEAU.
Notes:
1. Includes arm, drive unit, CPU, arm to drive unit cable set, and CPU to drive unit cable set.
2. -_ Indicates additional specifications for UL, clean, and oil mist types. Please consult with MEAU

Options for iQ Robots
Model Number Description Notes Stocked Item
R32TB Standard Teach Pendant, 7m Cable Basic Teaching and Operation S
R32TB-15 Standard Teach Pendant 15m Cable Basic Teaching and Operation -
Teach Pendants
R56TB Enhanced Teach Pendant 7m Cable Advanced Function Pendant S
R56TB-15 Enhanced Teach Pendant 15m Cable Advanced Function Pendant S
RT-TOOLBOX 2 C1 Robot Programming and Setup SW-Light Version Without Simulation Tool S
RT-TOOLBOX 2 LT-C1 Robot Programming and Setup SW With Simulation Tool S
Software
MELFA-VISION-C1 Vision Interface and Setup SW Tool Compatible with Cognex “In-Sight” sensors S
MELFA-WORKS-C1 Advanced Design and Integration SW Tool Add on to Solid Works Required S
2A-RZ365 Pneumatic Hand Interface Sink Type S
Hand Interface Card
2A-RZ375 Pneumatic Hand Interface Source Type S
1E-VD01 1 Valve Set with Connection Cable (Sink) RV-2 -
1E-VD01E 1 Valve Set with Connection Cable (Source) RV-2 S
1E-VD02 2 Valve Set with Connection Cable (Sink) RV-2 -
1E-VD02E 2 Valve Set with Connection Cable (Source) RV-2 S
1S-VD0_-02 Valve Set with Connection Cable (Sink) RV-3, 6 S
Solenoid Valve Sets 1S-VD0_E-02 Valve Set with Connection Cable (Source) RV-3, 6 S
(*1) 1S-VD0_-01 Valve Set with Connection Cable (Sink) RV-12 S
1S-VD0_E-01 Valve Set with Connection Cable (Source) RV-12 S
1S-VD0_M-04 Valve Set with Connection Cable (Sink) RH-6 S
1S-VD0_ME-04 Valve Set with Connection Cable (Source) RH-6 S
1S-VD0_M-03 Valve Set with Connection Cable (Sink) RH-12, 20 S
1S-VD0_ME-03 Valve Set with Connection Cable (Source) RH-12, 20 S
1E-GR35S Hand Output Cable 8-Connection, RV-2 S
1S-HC30C-11 Hand Input Cable 12-Connection, RV-2 S
1S-GR35S-01 Hand Output Cable 4-Connection, RV-3, 6, 12 S
Hand I/O Cables
1S-HC25C-01 Hand Input Cable 8-Connection, RV-3, 6, 12 S
1S-GR35S-02 Hand Output Cable 4-Connection, RH S
1S-HC35C-02 Hand Input Cable 8-Connection, RH S
1N-ST0602C Φ6 - 1 Connection RV-12 S
1N-ST0604C Φ6 - 2 Connections RV-12 S
1N-ST0606C Φ6 - 3 Connections RV-12 S
1N-ST0608C Φ6 - 4 Connections RV-12, RH-6, 12, 20 S
Hand Curl Tube 1E-ST0402C Φ4 - 1 Connection RV-2, 3, 6 S
1E-ST0404C Φ4 - 2 Connections RV-2, 3 S
1E-ST0408C-300 Φ4 - 4 Connections, 300 mm RH-6 S
Note 1: _ = number of valves (1-4)
14
iQ Platform PC Controller (WinCPU)
The iQ Platform combines several key automation disciplines Key Features:
including the ability to integrate an industrial PC and its environment • Integration of multiple technologies in a single platform
on this hardware platform. The iQ PC (WinCPU) is design to
compress your hardware architecture and manage your automation • High-speed communication and data sharing over the backplane
system while taking full advantage of benefits of a PC. This flexible • Embedded Windows software architecture
solution is ideal for a wide range of applications including many • Solid State PC hardware architecture
nontraditional machine designs. Users can leverage all the benefits of
each discipline and merge them into a seamless control system that
far exceeds any control expectation
Model Number Q10WCPU-W1-E Q10WCPU-W1-CFE

Stock S S
Number of Slots Occupied 2 slots
CPU Intel® Atom™ Processor N450 1.66GHz
Chipset Intel® ICH8M
L1 Cache Instruction 32KB + Data 24KB
Memory L2 Cache 512KB
Main Memory 1GB (3.3V 200-pin DDR2 SO-DIMM DDR667Socket x 1)
Controller N450 built-in
Video RAM Main memory shared
Video
CRT I/F Analog-RGB 15-pin HD-SUB connector
Resolution 1,400 x 1,050 @60Hz (16 million colors)
Serial I/F RS-232C-compliant: 1ch (9-pin D-SUB connector) baudrate: 50 - 115200bps
I/F 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-TRJ-45 connector × 2
LAN
Controller Intel 82574L
CF Card Slot CF CARD Type I (Only for the memory card of IDE connection) Indication: access LED (green) × 1 (*1, *2)
CF Card - 4GB CF Card included
Built-in SSD (*3) Built-in flash drive 4GB
USB I/F USB2.0-complicant 5ch (front 3ch, bottom 2ch) Transfer rate: 480Mbps Supply power: +5V each channel 0.5A max. (*4)
Watch Dog Timer 2ch Time-up period: system WDT 20msec - 2sec, user WDT 10msec - 10sec
Terminal block [1, 2] Input for shutdown (current drive input) Terminal block [3] Output to notify shutdown completion (open
General I/O
collector output) Terminal block [4] Output to nofity the start of watch dog timer (open collector output)
Lithium battery backup life: 10 years or more (when no power input, at 25°C) The real-time clock is accurate within
RTC/CMOS
±3 minutes (at 25°C) per month
Indication RDY (green), B.RUN (green), ERR. (red), USER (red), BAT. (orange), EXIT (green), CF/SSD (green)
Control Reset PUSH switch, DIP switch 4-pole, DIP switch 6-pole, 3-position toggle switch
Supported OS Windows® Embedded Standard 2009
DC5V Internal Current Consumption 3.0A (Max.) (This does not include the current consumption by any peripheral devices (such as the CF Card and USB device))
Dimensions (W X D x H) [mm] 55.2 x 115.0 x 98.0 (Excluding protrusions)
Weight (g) 440 450 (Including CF card, Fittings and screws to fix a CF card)
Notes:
1. When power is on, you can not push in / pull out a CF card. Memory card is supported but other purposes are not supported.
2. Access LED shows the access of both a CF card and built-in SSD.
3. Built-in SSD is used as OS space. SSD has rewritable life (1 million times). For details, refer to “Built-in SSD” of “Chapter 5 Each Component Function”
4. Current capacity shows the maximum value the connector supports. But the actual value is limited because the total current cannot exceed the capacity of the power supply module. Therefore the actual
available value may be less than 0.5A.

C Language CPU
The C Language CPU can be added to an iQ Platform or Q Series coniguration and allows experienced C programmers to create custom
control programs using VxWorks (sold separately). This product is only meant for the advanced user. The Q12DCCPU-V is the hardware
base for the MES Interface IT e-F@ctory solution, and is included within the QJ71MES96IT Model Number. It is also the hardware base for
the iQ Platform’s Ethernet/IP scanner, EIP4CCPU.
Model Number Q12DCCPU-V

Stocked Item S
Certiication UL • cUL • CE
Endian Format (Memory Layout) Little endian
User File Standard RAM 3Mb
Capacity (For
User File CompactFlash Card Up to 8 Gb
Storage
Work RAM (for OS, Driver, User Program Execution) 128 Mb
Battery Backed-up RAM 128 kB
Operating System (*1) VxWorks Version 6.4
Software
Programming Language C language (C/C++)
Number of Channels 2 channels (same speciication for CH1 and CH2 )
Interface (*2) 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Ethernet Number of Cascaded Stages Up to 4 (10BASE-T)/Up to 2 (100BASE-TX)
10BASE-T/ Maximum Segment Length (Distance
100BASE-TX 100m (328.08 feet)
Between Hub and Node)
Auto negotiation function (automatically recognizes 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX); Auto-MDIX function
Supported Function
(automatically recognizes straight or crossing cable)
Transmission Speed 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps
Transmission Distance Up to 15m (49.21 feet)
RS-232 7/0.127_P HRV-SV outside diameter: 8.5mm (0.33 inches) or larger
Recommended Cable
(Oki Electric Cable Company, Limited Specify the number of pairs in_.)
Connector Applicable to External
Round connector (10-pin)
Wiring
Transmission Speed 12Mbps (Full Speed Mode: FS)
USB Connector Mini-B
Other Electric Characteristics USB 2.0
Supply Power Voltage 3.3V ±5%
CompactFlash Supply Power Capacity Up to 150mA
Card Card Size TYPE I card TYPE II card is not allowed. I/O cards, such as a modem card are not allowed.
Number of Card Slots 1
Number of I/O Points (Number of Points Accessible to
4096 points (X/Y 0 to FFF)
Actual I/O Modules)
5VDC Internal Current Consumption 0.93A
Weight (kg) 0.24
Notes:
1. For the development environment (personal computer), refer to the following manual. C Controller Module User’s Manual (Utility Operation, Programming)
2. The C Controller module differentiates 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX according to the target device.
16
Process and Redundant CPUs
Q Series Process Control CPUs

These CPUs include a wide variety of process control functions • Process alarm functions related to high, low and deviation process
optimized to the task of controlling large scale, complex continuous and manipulated variable values
processes where downtime is not an option. This allows a Q Series • Tracking functions to allow smooth transfer between manual and
system to fully address the needs of users outside of the scope of automated control
traditional discrete control applications.
• Hot swappable modules
Key Features: • Increased functionality in Version C or later (S/N 07032x)
• 52 process control instructions added to standard instruction set - SFC active step comment readout instruction
• Floating point math coprocessor dedicated to floating point and - Increased multiple CPU shared memory flexibility
process control operations - 1/1000 second resolution timestamp capability
• Autotuning PID with 2 degrees of freedom (responds to both set - Store sampling trace data in Standard RAM
value and disturbance)
- Power supply error detection function
• Compensation functions to allow loop modeling closer to the
actual process
Required Manuals
Model Number Description Contents Included with CPU? Stk Item
Overview, structure and combinations of process control, instructions,
data used for process control instructions, how to execute PCI, execution
QnPHCPU/QnPRHCPU (Process
condition switching and functions, instruction list, how to read instruction
SH(NA)080316 Control Instructions) Programming No (purchase separately) -
list, I/O control instructions, control operator instructions, compensation
Manual
operator instructions, arithmetic operation instructions, comparison
operation instructions, auto tuning, error codes, appendices
Process Control CPUs

Model Number Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU
Stocked Item S S S -
Sequence Control
Relay symbol language, logic symbolic language, MELSAP3 (SFC), MELSAP-L, Function block and structured text (ST)
Programming Dedicated Language
Language Process Control
FBD for process control (*1)
Language
Processing LD X0 34ns
Speed (Sequence
Instruction) MOV D0 D1 102ns
Program Capacity (*2, *3) 28k steps 60 kB 124k steps 252k steps
Program Memory
112 kB 240 kB 496 kB 1008 kB
(Drive 0)
Memory Capacity Standard RAM (Drive 3) 128 kB 256 kB (*4)
Item
Standard ROM (Drive 4) 112 kB 240 kB 496 kB 1008 kB
CPU Shared Memory 8 kB
Program Memory 28 60 124 252 (*5)
Maximum No. of
Standard RAM 3 (*6)
Stored Files
Standard ROM 28 60 124 252
Memory Card Interface Yes
Max. I/O Device Points 8192 points (X/Y0 to 1 FFF)
Communication Ports USB (Type-B), RS-232
Weight (kg) 0.20
Notes:
1. PX Developer is required for programming by FBD.
2. The unit of the file size stored in the memory area varies depending on the CPU module. For details, refer to the QCPU User’s Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
3. The maximum number of executable sequence steps is as shown. (Program capacity) - (File header size (default 34 steps)). Refer to the QCPU User’s Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
4. CPU shared memory is not latched.
5. The CPU module can only execute up to 124 programs.
6. Extended by the upgraded functions of the CPU module.

Q Series Redundant CPUs
These CPUs take the process control capabilities of the Q Series • Low cost of ownership; most parts are interchangeable with
process CPUs and add full hot-backup capability by using dual standard Q Series systems
redundant CPUs. Use this system in applications where downtime • Redundant power supply option
cannot be tolerated for reasons of safety, equipment damage, financial
loss, interruption of service, or regulatory compliance. • Redundant MELSECNET/H control level network provides link to I/O
stations at up to 25Mbit/s
Key Features: • Over 50 process control related instructions (same as Q Process CPUs)
• Prevent controller downtime with dual redundant CPUs (control and • Most I/O may be hot swapped
back-up). Any failure of the control CPU causes immediate transfer • Increased functionality in Version D or later (S/N 07032x)
of control to the back-up, preventing system failure or interruption. - SFC active step comment readout instruction
• Synchronize up to 100,000 words of process data between CPUs - Increased multiple CPU shared memory flexibility
per scan
- 1/1000 second resolution timestamp capability
• Switchover time typically around 40ms, insuring
“bumpless” transfer - Store sampling trace data in standard RAM
• CPUs reside on physically separate racks, allowing control CPU to - Power supply error detection function
be replaced while back-up maintains system operation
Required Manuals
Use same manual set as shown for Q Series Process CPUs, plus the manual listed below.
Model Number Description Contents Included? Stocked Item
Overview, System Configuration, Tracking cable, Procedure for starting

QnPRHCPU User’s Manual up a redundant system, Redundant system functions, Redundant system
SH(NA)080486 No (purchase separately) -
(Redundant System) networks, Programming cautions, Troubleshooting, Processing time for
redundant systems
Redundant CPUs
Model Number Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU
Stocked Item S -
Sequence Control Dedicated
Programming Relay symbol language, logic symbolic language, MELSAP3 (SFC), MELSAP-L, function block and structured text (ST)
Language
Language
Process Control Language FBD for process control (Programming by PX Developer)
Processing LD X0 34ns
Speed (Sequence
Instruction) MOV D0 D1 102ns
Processing Speed
Tracking Execution Time
(Redundant Device memory 48k words: 10ms; Device memory 100k words: 15ms; QnPRHCPU User’s Manual (Redundant System)
(Increased Scan Time)
Function)
Program Size 124 steps 252 steps
Program Memory (Drive 0) 496 kB 1008 kB
Standard RAM (Drive 3) Size of the installed memory card (2MB max.)
Memory Size
Standard ROM (Drive 4) 496 kB 1008 kB
Max. Number of Program Memory 124 252
Files Stored Standard ROM 124 252
Max. I/O Device Points (*1) 8192 points (X/Y0 to 1FFF)
Max. Physical I/O Points (*2) 4096 points (X/Y0 to FFF)
Max. CPUs Mounted 1 (multiple-CPU configuration is not available)
0 (All non-redundant modules are mounted on the remote I/O station (the maximum number of modules that can be mounted
Max. Extension Base
on a remote station is 64))
Max. Remote I/O Points 8192 points (up to 2048 points per station)
Number of Steps 124 ksteps 252 ksteps
Program Capacity
Number of Programs 124 252 (*3)
Redundant configuration of the entire system, including the CPU, the power supply, and the base unit. Hot standby system for
the control and standby systems online module change both backup and separate mode available. Large-capacity data tracking:
Functions Compatible With Redundant System
Large-capacity device data transfer (100 kwords) from the control system to the standby system. Network system compatible
with redundant system: Switchover in case of MELSECNET/H or Ethernet module malfunction or network wire disconnection.
Control Cycle 10 ms -/control loop (Can be set for each loop)
Loop Control
Number of Control Loops No limit (*4)
Specs.
Main Functions 2-degree-of-freedom PID control, cascade control, automatic tuning function, feed forward control
Online Module Replacement The I/O, analog, temperature input, temperature control, and pulse input modules can be replaced (on a remote I/O station)
RAS
Output In Case Of Error Stop Clear or output retention can be designated for each module
Communication Ports USB (Type-B), RS-232
Modules Mountable On Main Base Unit Network modules for the Q series can be mounted (Ethernet, MELSECNET/H, and CC-Link only)
Programming Software GX Developer, PX Developer
5VDC Internal Current Consumption 0.89
Weight (kg) 0.30
Notes:
1. Total number of the I/O points on the main base unit, which are directly controlled from the CPU module, and the I/O points controlled as remote I/O by the remote I/O network.
2. The number of I/O points on the main base unit, which are directly controlled from the CPU module.
3. The max. number of files that can be executed is 124. Two SFC/MELSAP-Ls are available, one of which is a program execution control SFC.
4. The number of control loops is restricted by the combination of the device memory capacity (128 kwords/loop used) and the control cycle.
18
Q Redundant CPU Parts
Stock
Product Name Model Overview
Item
Q12PRHCPU Max. I/O device points: 8192 (physical I/O points: 4096), program capacity: 124 ksteps S
Redundant CPU Module
Q25PRHCPU Max. I/O device points: 8192 (physical I/O points: 4096), program capacity: 252 ksteps -
QC10TR 1m cable for tracking S
Tracking Cable
QC30TR 3m cable for tracking -
Q38RB Q series I/O mounting main base: Number of power supply slots: 2, number of CPU slots: 1, number of I/O slots: 8 S
Base Unit For Redundant
Q68RB Q series I/O mounting extension base: Number of power supply slots: 2, number of I/O slots: 8 -
Power Supply Systems
Q65WRB Q series I/O mounting extension base: Dual Q Bus Inputs, Number of power supply slots: 2, number of I/O slots: 5 S
Power Supply Module For Redundant
Q64RP 100 to 120/200 to 240VAC input, 5VDC, 8.5 A output -
Power Supply Systems
Communication and Networking Module Version Information For Compatibility With Redundant Systems
Product Name Model Number Overview Version Stock Item
For MELSECNET/H dual optical loop interface module (compatible with SI and QSI)
QJ71LP21-25 S
control / normal / master stations
MELSECNET/H QJ71LP21S-25 -
control / normal / master stations, equipped with an external power supply
Master Module
For MELSECNET/H dual optical loop interface module (compatible with GI) control /
QJ71LP21GE -
normal / master stations
QJ71BR11 For MELSECNET/H coaxial single bus interface module control / normal / master stations S
QJ72LP25-25 S
remote I/O stations (*1)
MELSECNET/H
For MELSECNET/H dual optical loop interface module (compatible with GI) remote I/O
Remote I/O Module QJ72LP25GE Function version “D” -
stations
or later
QJ72BR15 For MELSECNET/H coaxial single bus interface module remote I/O stations S
QJ71E71-B2 Ethernet interface module (10BASE2) -
Ethernet
QJ71E71-B5 Ethernet interface module (10BASE5) -
Interface Module
QJ71E71-100 Ethernet interface module (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T) S
For dual optical loop interface board (compatible with SI and QSI) control / normal
Q81BD-J71LP21-25 -
MELSECNET / H Board stations (*1)
For Personal Computers Q80BD-J71LP21G For dual optical loop interface board (compatible with GI) control / normal stations (*1) -
Q81BD-J71BR11 For coaxial single bus interface board control / normal stations (*1) S
QJ71GP21-SX For CC-Link IE Control, dual-loop fiber control stations S
CC-Link IE Control
QJ71GP21S-SX For CC-Link IE Control, dual-loop fiber with redundant power control stations -
Note:
1. The boards must be used in combination with the attached driver package SW0DNC-MNETH-B[90K] or later version.
Sample Configurations
Non-redundant power supply configuration
Install a module with the
same module name into
the same slot.
System A - System B -
Control System Standby System
QJ71E71
Q35B Q35B QJ61BT11
Tracking cable QJ71LP21
Q12PRHCPU
Q61P
Redundant power supply configuration

Make Redundant Power Make Redundant Power
supply module redundant supply module redundant
System A - System B - Standby

Control System System
Q38RB Q38RB
Tracking cable
Q63RP/Q64RP Q63RP/Q64RP
(Two modules mounted on Q38RB) (Two modules mounted
on Q38RB)

B. Base Units
The base unit (sometimes called a base rack) is the foundation of Q Series systems. All CPU modules are installed on it, along with a power
supply, I/O and special function modules. Besides providing physical support to the component modules, the base unit enables communication
and power distribution between modules. The base unit can either be directly bolted to a panel, or mounted via DIN rail. In the case of DIN rail
mounting, the DIN rail Adapters must be used. Base units accommodate between 3 and 12 modules. For systems that require more modules
than be accommodated on the base unit, an extension base unit is required. These connect to the base unit via extension cables.
Required Manuals
• General specs
• CE compliance information
QCPU(Q mode) CPU Module User’s • Installation
IB(NA)0800061 No (included with base units) -
Manual (Hardware) • Safety requirements
• Power supply wiring
• Overview of system parts
• PSU specs
• CPU H/W specs
• Base Unit specs
QCPU (Q Mode) User’s Manual
• Memory Card specs
SH(NA)080483 (Hardware Design, Maintenance and No (purchase separately) -
Inspection)
• Installation
• Maintenance and inspection
• Troubleshooting
iQ Platform Base Units

The high speed iQ base units utilize a secondary inter-CPU bus to share more data at faster speeds between up to 4 iQ CPUs.
Non-iQ CPUs may be used on the base unit, but will not increase in performance.
Model Number Q35DB Q38DB Q312DB
Stocked Item S S S
Certification UL • cUL • CE
Expansion Slots
5 8 12
(Excluding 1st CPU Slot)
Applicable I/O and Intelligent
Q Series/iQ modules
Function Modules
Dimension (W x H) mm (in) 245 x 98 (9.65 x 3.86) 328 x 98 (12.92 x 3.86) 439 x 98 (17.30 x 3.86)
Weight (kg) 0.32 0.41 0.54
Accessories 4- M4 x 14 base unit mounting screws
Q Series Base Units

Model Number Q33B Q35B Q38B Q38RB Q312B
Stocked Item S S S - S
Number of Expansion Slots
3 5 8 8 12
(Excluding 1st CPU Slot)
Applicable I/O and Intelligent
Q Series/iQ Platform
Function Modules
Redundant Power Supply Slot No No No Yes No
Dimension (W x H) mm (in) 189 x 98 (7.45 x 3.86) 245 x 98 (9.65 x 3.86) 328 x 98 (12.92 x 3.86) 439 x 98 (17.30 x 3.86)
Weight (kg) 0.21 0.27 0.36 0.47 0.47
Accessories 4- M4 x 14 base unit mounting screws
DIN Rail Adapters

Use these Adapters in situations where mounting of a base or extension unit on a DIN rail is required.
Note: DIN rail mounting is not recommended in locations where high vibration or mechanical shock exists.
Required Manuals
• CPU H/W specs
• PSU specs
• Base Unit specs
SH(NA)080483 (Hardware Design, Maintenance and No (purchase separately) -
Inspection)
• Installation
• Troubleshooting
DIN Rail Mounting Adapters

Type Applicable Base or Extension Base Stocked Item
Q6DIN1 Q38B, Q38DB, Q312B, Q312DB Q68B, Q612B S
Q6DIN2 Q35B, Q35DB Q65B, Q00JCPU-S8, Q00UJCPU S
Q6DIN3 Q33B, Q52B, Q55B, Q63B -
20
C. Extension Base Units and Connection Cables
Use extension base units (also known as extension racks) in systems that require more modules than can be accommodated on the main
base unit. Extension base units are available with a slot for an additional power supply (Q6_B) or without (Q5_B). Use Q6_B extension bases
in systems where the current supplied by the base unit power supply is insufficient for the whole system. Up to 7 extension base units may
be connected to the base unit, allowing a total of 8 bases. The 8 base units may be extended over a distance of up to 13.2 m (43.28 ft). The
maximum number of installed modules is 64. If your system requires more modules or greater distances, consider using a network to link the
system together. See the network section for more details.
Required Manuals
• General specs
QCPU (Q mode) CPU Module • Installation
IB(NA)0800061 No (included with base units) -
User’s Manual (Hardware) • Safety requirements
• Power supply wiring
• Overview of system parts
• CPU H/W
• PSU specs
• Base Unit specs
SH(NA)080483 (Hardware Design, Maintenance No (purchase separately) -
and Inspection)
• Installation
• Troubleshooting
Extension Base Units

Model Number Q52B Q55B Q63B Q65B Q68B Q68RB Q612B Q65WRB (*1)
Stocked Item S S - S S - S S
Certification UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE
Number of Expansion Slots 2 5 3 5 8 8 12 5
Power Supply Module Slot No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Redundant Power Supply Slot No No No No No Yes No Yes
106 x 98 189 x 98 189 x 98 245 x 98 328 x 98 439 x 98 439 x 98 439 x 98
Dimensions (W x H) mm (in)
(4.18 x 3.86) (7.45 x 3.86) (7.45 x 3.86) (9.65 x 3.86) (12.92 x 3.86) (17.30 x 3.86) (17.30 x 3.86) (17.30 x 3.86)
Weight (kg) 0.14 0.23 0.23 0.28 0.38 0.49 0.48 0.52
Note:
1. The Q65WRB has dual Q Bus inputs for Local Extension I/O support in Redundant Systems.
D. Power Supply Modules

Power supply modules always fit on the left hand end of a rack. All base racks (Q3_B) must include a power supply, as
do powered extension racks (Q6_(R)B). We offer PSU to address worldwide AC voltage standards and DC power.
Model Number Q61P Q61P-D Q62P Q63P Q64PN Q63RP Q64RP

Stocked Item S - S S S - -
Certification UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE - -
Applicable Base Units Q3_DB, Q3_B, Q6_B Q3_RB, Q6_RB
100 to 120VAC/
100-240VAC 100-240VAC
Input Power Supply 100-240VAC +10%/-15% 24VDC +10%/-15% 24VDC +30%/-35% 200 to 240VAC
+10%/-15% (+10%/-15%)
(+10%/ -15%)
Input Frequency 50/60Hz ±3Hz - 50/60 Hz ±5% 50/60 Hz ±5% 50/60 Hz ±5%
Input Voltage Distortion Factor 5% or less - Within 5% Within 5% Within 5%
Max. Input Apparent Power 105VA - 160 VA 65W 160VA
Inrush Current 20A within 8ms 100A within 1ms 20A within 8 ms 150A within 1ms 20A within 8ms
Rated Output 5VDC 6A 3A 6A 8.5A 8.5A 8.5A

Current 24VDC - 0.6A - - - -
External Output Voltage - 24VDC ±10% - - - -
Permissible Instantaneous Power
Within 20ms Within 20ms Within 10ms Within 20ms Within 10ms Within 20ms
Failure Time
LED indication (lit LED indication and LED indication (Normal operation:
Operation Indication LED indication (lit at 5VDC output)
at 5VDC output) power light ON (green) Error: OFF (red))
Weight (kg) 0.31 0.39 0.33 0.40 0.60 0.47
Base Unit PSU Slots Occupied 1 2

Extension Cables for Extension Base Units
These cables are used to link main base units to extension base units.
They are available in a variety of lengths from 0.45m (1.48 ft.) to 10m (32.8 ft.).
Model Number QC05B QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B

Stocked Item S S S S S S
Certifications CE CE CE CE CE CE
Cable Length (m (ft)) 0.45 (1.48) 0.6 (1.97) 1.2 (3.93) 3 (9.84) 5 (16.39) 10 (32.79)
Weight (kg) 0.15 0.16 0.22 0.40 0.60 1.11
Required Manuals: Same as Base Units listed on previous page.
Q Series Tracking Cable for QnPRH System

These cables are used to link redundant QnPRH CPU systems to insure data and programs are always
synchronized between the two processors.
Model Number QC10TR QC30TR
Stocked Item S -
Cable Length m (ft) 1.0 (3.29) 3.0 (9.87)
Weight (kg) 0.15 0.28
Required Manuals: Same as Base Units listed on previous page.
RS-232 Communication Cable

Model Number SC-Q
Stocked Item S
Cable Length m (ft) 3 (9.84)
Connection Type RS-232 Connection: 9 pin DSUB to Q Series front port connection
*Note Also compatible with ST Series I/O head station (see Distributed I/O section of this guide.)
22
E. I/O and Intelligent Function Modules
QX10 QX28 QX41 QX42 QX70 QX71 QX72 QX80 QX81
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F
QX41 QX42 5/12VDC QX71 QX72 QX81
24VDC DISPLAY DISPLAY
24VDC 1.2 / 3.3mA 5/12VDC 24VDC
4mA
4mA F L 1.2/3.3mA F L
0 0 0 0 4mA
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
Digital Input Modules 2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5
4 4 4 4
6 6 6 6
5 5 5 5
Digital input modules provide the CPU interface for monitoring on/off
7 7 7 7
8 6 8 6 8 6 8 6
9 7 9 7 9 7 9 7
A 8 A 8 A 8 A 8
voltage signals in your system.

B B B B
9 9 9 9
C C C C
A A A A
D D D D
E
B E
B E
B E
B
F C F C F C F C
- +
COM D COM D COM D NC D
NC NC NC
E E E COM E
Key Features:
100VAC 100VAC 5/12VDC
1.2mA
8mA60Hz
7mA50Hz
F 8mA60Hz
7mA50Hz
F 3.3mA
F 24VDC F
4mA
• Sense commonly used AC and DC voltages

• Negative/positive common types • Established A Series connectors (FCN/D-sub type) on 32 and 64
I/O modules for compatibility with existing A Series terminal block
• 16, 32 or 64 inputs per module, depending on module type
(A6TBXY type) installations
• 1-70ms software selectable input filter response time (via
If you need to monitor varying signal levels of voltage or current,
GX Works2) for adjusting input response. This avoids the effects of
please refer to the analog input modules section. If you need to
noise on the inputs
monitor digital signals that change their state rapidly (more than
• DC input short circuit protection approximately 10 Hz, depending on program scan time), then
• Internal optoisolation consider using high-speed counter modules.
• Removable terminal blocks
Required Manuals
Specifications and wiring diagrams for all
SH(NA)080042 I/O Module Type Building Block User’s Manual No (purchase separately) -
Q Series digital I/O modules
Input Modules
Model Number QX10 QX28 QX40 QX40-S1 QX40H QX41 QX41-S1
Stocked Item S - S S - S -
Input Type AC AC DC positive common (sink)
No. of Input Points 16 8 16 16 16 32 32
100-120VAC 100-240VAC 24VDC +20%/
Input Voltage +10%/-15%, +10%/-15%, 24VDC +20%/-15% -15%, ripple ratio: 24VDC +20%/-15%
50/60Hz ±3Hz 50/60Hz ±3Hz within 5%
17 (@200
VAC/60Hz)/ 14
(@200 80@100
Input Current (mA) 8 4 6 4
VAC/60Hz)/
VAC/50Hz) 7
(100 VAC/50Hz)
15@100VAC, 10@100VAC, 0.1/0.2/0.4/0.6/1 .04/.10/.25/ 0.1/0.2/0.4/0.6/1
OFF-ON 1/5/10/20/70 (*1) 1/5/10/20/70 (*1)
50/60Hz 50/60Hz (*1) .50/.95 (*1) (*1)
Response Time (ms)
20@100VAC, 20@100VAC, 0.1/0.2/0.4/0.6/1 .04/.10/.25/ 0.1/0.2/0.4/0.6/1
ON-OFF 1/5/10/20/70 (*1) 1/5/10/20/70 (*1)
50/60Hz 50/60Hz (*1) .50/.95 (*1) (*1)
Crimping
Connection Type Screw Terminals Screw Terminals Screw Terminals Screw Terminals FCN x 1 (*2) FCN x 1 (*2)
Terminal
Points/Common 16 8 16 16 8 32 32
Maximum 5VDC Current Consumption (mA) 50 50 50 60 80 75 75
Weight (kg) 0.17 0.2 0.16 0.2 0.16 0.15 0.15
Notes: See notes next page.
Model Number QX41-S2 QX42 QX42-S1 QX70 QX70H QX71 QX72

Stocked Item - S S S S S -
DC positive/
DC positive/ DC positive/negative common
Input Type DC positive common (sink) negative common
common (sink) (sink/source)
(sink/source)
5/12VDC
Input Voltage 24VDC +20%/-15% 5VDC +20%/-15% 5/12VDC +20%/-15%
+20%/-15%
Input Current (mA) 6 4 4 1.2 / 3.3 3 1.2 / 3.3 1.2 / 3.3
0.1/0.2/0.4/0.6/1 .04/.10/.25/
OFF-ON 1/5/10/20/70 (*1) 1/5/10/20/70 (*1) 1/5/10/20/70 (*1) 1/5/10/20/70 (*1)
(*1) .50/.95 (*1)
Response Time (ms)
0.1/0.2/0.4/0.6/1 .04/.10/.25/
ON-OFF 1/5/10/20/70 (*1) 1/5/10/20/70 (*1) 1/5/10/20/70 (*1) 1/5/10/20/70 (* 1)
(*1) .50/.95 (*1)
Crimping
Connection Type FCN x 2 (*2) FCN x 2 (*2) FCN x 2 (*2) Screw Terminals FCN x 1 (*2) FCN x 2 (*2)
Terminal
Points/Common 32 32 32 16 8 32 32
Maximum 5VDC Current Consumption (mA) 75 90 90 55 80 70 85
Weight (kg) 0.15 0.18 0.18 0.14 0.14 0.12 0.13
Notes: See notes next page.

Input Modules (Continued)
Model Number QX80 QX80H QX81 QX81-S2 QX82 QX82-S1 QX90H
Stocked Item S S S - S - S
Input Type DC negative common (source)
24VDC (+20/-15%,
Input Voltage 24VDC +20%/-15% 24VDC +20%/-15% 24VDC +20%/-15% ripple ratio within 24VDC +20%/-15% 24VDC +20%/-15% 5VDC +20%/-15%
5%)
Input Current (mA) 4 6 4 6 4 4 6
.04/.10/.25/.50/.95 .05/.15/.3/.55/1.05 .04/.10/.25/.50/.95

OFF-ON 1/5/10/20/70 (*1) 1/5/10/20/70 (*1)
Response (*1) (*1) (*1)
Time (ms)
.04/.10/.25 /.50/.95 .15/.2/.35/.6/1.1 .04/.10/.25 /.50/.95
ON-OFF 1/5/10/20/70 (*1) 1/5/10/20/70 (*1)
(*1) (*1) (*1)
Minimum On Voltage/
19VDC/3mA 13V or higher/3mA 19VDC/3mA 15VDC/3mA 19VDC/3mA 19VDC/3mA 3.5V or higher/3mA
Current
Maximum Off Voltage/
11VDC/ 1.7mA 8V or lower/1.6mA 11VDC/ 1.7mA 5VDC/ 1.7mA 11VDC/ 1.7mA 9.5VDC/1.5mA 1V or lower/1mA
Current
Connection Type Screw Terminals Crimping Terminal D-Sub (*3) D-Sub FCN x 2 (*2) FCN x 2 (*2) Crimping Terminal
Points/Common 16 8 32 32 32 32 8
Maximum 5VDC Current
50 80 75 75 90 90 80
Consumption (mA)
Weight (kg) 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.18 0.18 0.14
Notes:
1. Set response time by parameters in GX Works2. Default is 10ms (0.2ms for -S1 versions). Input and output response times cannot be set independently.
2. 40 pin FCN connector. Supplied separately. See “I/O Wiring Connectors” for ordering information.
3. 37 pin D-sub connector. Supplied separately. See “I/O Wiring Connectors” for ordering information.
Combination I/O Modules QH42P

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
QX48Y57
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
QX41Y41P
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Combination input/output modules allow both input and output points to be combined in a single module. This
8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FUSE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F
24VDC4mA QY42P 24VDC4mA QX41Y41P
offers the chance to reduce the number of I/O modules, enabling a more compact system in some applications.
DISPLAY DISPLAY
12/24VDC 12/24VDC
0.1A F L 0.1A F L
0
1 0
2 1
3 2
4
3
5
4
6
7
5
- +
COM 6
Required Manuals L
L
L
L
8
A
9
B
7
8
9
A

C
L
D
B
L
L
E C
I/O Module Type Building Specifications and wiring diagrams for all
D
- +
COM
E

24VDC4mA
12/24VDC F
Block User’s Manual Q Series digital I/O modules

0.5A
Combination I/O Modules

Model Number QH42P QX41Y41P (*1) QX48Y57
Stocked Item S S S
Input Type DC positive common (sink)
No. of Input Points 32 32 8
Input Voltage 24VDC +20%/-15%
Input Current (mA) 4
Response Time OFF-ON 1/5/10/20/70 (*2)
(ms) ON-OFF 1/5/10/20/70 (*2)
Minimum On Voltage/Current 19VDC/3mA
Maximum Off Voltage/Current 11VDC/1.7mA
Points/Common 32 32 8
Output Type Sink transistor
No. of Output Points 32 32 7
Load Voltage 12-24VDC +20%/-15%
Maximum Load Current 0.1A/pt, 2A/common 0.1A/pt, 2A/common 0.5A/pt, 2A/common
Response Time OFF-ON 1
(ms) ON-OFF 1 (rated resistive load)
External Supply Voltage/Current 12-24VDC +20%/-15%/15mA (24VDC)/common
Protection Thermal and short circuit Thermal and short circuit Fused (4A), with blown fuse detection
Points/Common 32 32 7
Connection Type FCN (*3) FCN (*3) Screw Terminals
130 130 80
Consumption (mA)
Weight (kg) 0.2
Notes:
1. The QX41Y41P has consecutive I/O addressing, unlike the QH42P, and is meant to replace A Series I/O blocks.
2. Set response time by parameters in GX Works2. Default is 10ms (0.2ms for -S1 versions). Input and output response times cannot be set independently.
3. 40 pin FCN connector. Supplied separately. See “I/O Wiring Connectors” for ordering information.
24
Digital Output Modules
QY10 QY18A QY22 QY40P QY41P QY42P
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
QY41P QY42P
12/24VDC DISPLAY
12/24VDC
Digital output modules provide the CPU interface for turning devices in your system on and off
0.1A F L
0 0 0 0 0.1A
L L L L
1 0 0 1 0 1 0
L L L
L 2 1 L
1 1 L 2 1 L 2 1
under program control.

L
3 2 2 L
3 2 L
3 2
4 2 4 4
L 3 L 3 L 3 L 3
5 5 5
L 4 4 L 4 L 4
6 3 6 6
L L L L
7
5 5 7
5 7
5
L L L
L 8 6 L
4 6 L 8 6 L
8 6
9 7 7 9 7 9 7
Key Features:
L L L
L
A 8 L
5 8 L
A 8 L
A 8
B B B
L 9 9 L 9 L 9
C 6 C C
L L L
A L
A A A
D D D
L L L
• Relay (contact), sink and source transistor plus triac outputs to handle all common devices
E
B 7 B E
B E
B
L L L L
L
F C C L
F C L
F C
COM D NC D COM D D
NC NC
24VDC E 24VDC
E 100VAC
E COM
E
12VDC
• 16, 32 or 64 outputs per module, depending on module type

240VAC F 240VAC
2A F 240VAC F 24VDC F
2A 0.6A 0.1A
QY50 QY68A QY70 QY71 QY80 QY81P

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
• Thermal and short-circuit protection on some modules

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F 8 9 A B CDE F
FUSE FUSE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FUSE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
QY71 QY81P
5/12VDC FUSE
0 16mA 12/24VDC
• Internal optoisolation
L 0 L L 0
L 0 0.1A
1 0 0 1 0 1 0
L L L
1
L 2 1 L 1 L 2 1 L 2 1
L
3 2 2 L
3 2 L
3 2
2
4
3 L 3 4
3 4
3
• Removable terminal blocks

L L L
5 5 5
L 4 3 4 L 4 L 4
L 6 L L 6 6
L
7
5 5 7
5 7
5
L L L
8 6 4 6 8 6 8 6
L L L L
7 7 7 7
• Established A Series connectors (FCN/D-sub type) on 32 and 64 I/O modules for

9 9 9
L L L
L
A 8 5 8 L
A 8 L
A 8
L
B B B
L 9 9 L 9 L 9
C 6 C C
L L
A A A L
A
compatibility with existing A Series terminal block (A6TBXY type) installations

L
D D D
L L L
E
B B E
B E
B
L 7 L L
F C L C F C F C
L L L
- +
D NC
D D COM D
COM COM
E E E E
• If you need to produce varying signal levels of voltage or current, please refer to the analog
NC 12VDC
12VDC 5/12/ 5VDC
24VDC F 24VDC F 12VDC F 24VDC F
0.5A 16mA 0.5A
2A
output modules section.
Model Number QY10 QY18A QY22 QY40P QY41P QY42P

Certification UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE
Output Type Relay Isolated Relay Triac Sink Transistor Sink Transistor Sink Transistor
No. of Output Points 16 8 16 16 32 64
Load Voltage 24VDC/240VAC 24VDC/240VAC 100-240VAC, +5% 12-24VDC, +20/-15% 12-24VDC, +20/-15% 12-24VDC, +20/-15%
Maximum Load Current 2A/pt, 8A/common 2A/point 0.6A/pt, 4.8A/common 0.1A/pt, 1.6A/common 0.1A/pt, 2.0A/common 0.1A/pt, 2.0A/common
OFF-ON 10 10 1 1 1 1
Response
Time (ms) 1ms+0.5 cycle
ON-OFF 12 12 1 (rated resistive load) 1 (rated resistive load) 1 (rated resistive load)
(rated resistive load)
12-24VDC (+20/-15%) 12-24VDC (+20/-15%) 12-24VDC (+20/-15%)
External Supply Voltage/Current N/A N/A N/A
10mA 10mA 10mA
N/A; use surge N/A; use surge Thermal and Thermal and Thermal and
Protection RC surge suppressor
suppressor suppressor short-circuit short-circuit short-circuit
All points
Points/Common 16 16 16 32 64
interdependent
Connection Type Screw Terminal Screw Terminal Screw Terminal Screw Terminal FCN (*1) FCN x 2 (*1)
430 240 250 65 105 150
Consumption (mA)
Weight (kg) 0.22 0.22 0.4 0.16 0.15 0.17
Model Number QY50 QY68A QY70 QY71 QY80 QY81P QY82P

Stocked Item S S - - S S S
Certification UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE
High current sink Independent sink/
Output Type Sink Transistor Sink Transistor Source Transistor Source Transistor Source Transistor
Transistor source Transistor
No. of Output Points 16 8 16 32 16 32 64
12-24VDC, 5-24VDC, 5-12VDC, 5-12VDC, 12-24VDC, 12-24VDC, 12-24VDC,
Load Voltage
+20/-15% +20/-10% +25/-10% +25/-10% +20/-15% +20/-15% +20/ -15%
0.5A/pt, 4.0A/ 16mA/pt, 256mA/ 16mA/pt, 512mA/ 0.5A/pt, 4A/ 0.1A/pt, 2A/ 0.1A/pt, 2A/
Maximum Load Current 2A/pt, 8A total
common common common common common common
OFF-ON 1 3 0.5 0.5 1 1 1
Response
Time (ms) 1 (rated resistive 1 (rated resistive 1 (rated resistive 1 (rated resistive
ON-OFF 10 (resistive load) 0.5 (resistive load) 0.5 (resistive load)
load) load) load) load)
12-24VDC 5/12VDC 5/12VDC (+25/ 12-24VDC 12-24VDC 12-24VDC
External Supply Voltage/Current N/A
(+20/-15%) 20mA (+25/-10%), 90mA -10%), 170mA (+20/-15%) (+20/-15%) (+20/-15%)
Thermal and Thermal and
Protection Fuse (4A) N/A Fuse (1.6A) Fuse (1.6A) Fuse (4A)
short-circuit short-circuit
All points
Points/Common 16 16 32 16 32 64
interdependent
Connection Type Screw Terminal Screw Terminal Screw Terminal FCN Screw Terminal D-sub (*1) FCN x2
80 110 95 150 80 95 160
Consumption (mA)
Weight (kg) 0.17 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.17 0.15 0.15
Note:
1. Supplied separately. See “I/O Wiring Connectors” for ordering information.

I/O Terminal Blocks and Covers A6CON1, A6CON2, A6CON3, A6CON4
The 16 point Q Series I/O modules terminal blocks and covers are available separately.
Use these to replace original parts or to prepare wiring harnesses.
Model Number Description Stocked Item
A6CON1E, A6CON2E, A6CON3E
Q Series I/O terminal block assembly (screw terminals, cover
K08H07500150 -
door and label)
K08H07500151 Q Series I/O terminal block cover door and label only -
I/O Wiring Connectors

For the modules listed in the preceding I/O module sections, where connection type is given as “FCN” or “D-sub”, use the following connectors:
Model Number Certification Number of Pins Wiring Type Connector Type Stocked Item
A6CON1 UL • cUL 40 Solder FCN S
A6CON2 UL • cUL 40 Crimp FCN S
A6CON3 UL • cUL 40 IDC FCN S
A6CON1E UL • cUL 37 Solder D-Sub S
A6CON2E UL • cUL 37 Crimp D-Sub -
A6CON3E UL • cUL 37 IDC D-Sub -
A6CON4 - 40 Solder FCN -
Note: A6CON4 has a bidirectional cable clamp which allows installation depth to be reduced.
Remote Terminal Blocks

For QXx1, QXx2, QYx1 and QYx2 type I/O modules, the following remote terminal blocks can be used to make I/O connections.
Required Manuals
Specifications and wiring diagrams for all Q Series digital
SH(NA)080042 I/O Module Type Building Block User’s Manual No (purchase separately) -
I/O modules
Connector / Terminal Block Converter Modules

Model Number Details Dimensions (W x H x D) Applicable Models Stocked Item
QX41, QX41-S1, QX42,
A6TBXY36 32 point terminal block (standard type) 120 x 78.5 x 52 QX42-S1, QY41P, QY42P, S
QH42P, QX41Y41P
A6TBXY54 32 point terminal block (2-wire type) 155 x 78.5 x 52 LY41NT1P, LY42NT1P, -
LY41PT1P, LY42PT1P
QX41, QX41-S1, QX42,

A6TBX70 32 point terminal block (3-wire type) 190 x 78.5 x 52 -
QX42-S1, QH42P, QX41Y41P
A6TBX36-E For source type input modules (standard type) 120 x 78.5 x 52 QX81 S
A6TBY36-E For source type output modules (standard type) 120 x 78.5 x 52 QY81P S
A6TBX54-E For source type input modules (2-wire type) 155 x 78.5 x 52 QX81 -
A6TBY54-E For source type output modules (2-wire type) 155 x 78.5 x 52 QY81P -
A6TBX70-E For source type input modules (3-wire type) 190 x 78.5 x 52 QX81 -
Remote Terminal Block Cables

Use the following cables to make connections between Q Series / iQ I/O modules and the terminal blocks listed above.
Model Number Details Weight (kg) Applicable Models Stocked Item
AC05TB 0.5m (19.69 in), for sink modules 0.17
AC10TB 1 m (39.37 in), for sink modules 0.23
AC20TB 2 m (78.74 in), for sink modules 0.37 S
AC30TB 3 m (118.11 in), for sink modules 0.51 A6TBXY36, A6TBXY54, A6TBX70
AC50TB 5 m (196.85 in), for sink modules 0.76
AC80TB 8 m (314.96 in), for sink modules (common current not exceeding 0.5A) 1.2 -
AC100TB 10 m (393.7 in), for sink modules (common current not exceeding 0.5A) 1.5 -
AC05TB-E 0.5m (19.69 in), for source modules 0.17
AC10TB-E 1 m (39.37 in), for source modules 0.23
A6TBX36-E, A6TBY36-E, A6TBX54-E, S
A6TBY54-E, A6TBX70-E
AC50TB-E 5 m (196.85 in), for source modules 0.76 -
Notes:
• “-E” cables use DSUB connectors, non “-E” cables use FCN connectors.
• The number of connectable I/O points is 32 for all connector/terminal block convertor modules. Two connector/terminal block converter modules and two
cables for connector/terminal block converter modules are required for 64-point I/O modules.
26
Analog Input Modules Q64AD
RUN
ERROR
Q68ADV
RUN
ERROR
Q68ADI
RUN
ERROR
Analog input modules provide an interface to the CPU for sensing • Fast conversion (80 microseconds/channel)
V+ 1 V+ 1 I+
1
C C
C V- 2 H V- 2 H I- 2
H 1 1
1
I+ 3 V+ 3 I+ 3
C C
SLD 4 H
2
V- 4 H
2
I- 4
variable real world levels of voltage and current signals. These signals
V+ 5 V+ 5 I+ 5
C C
• High accuracy (± 0.1%)

C V- 6 H
3
V- 6 H
3
I- 6
H
2 I+ V+
7 7 I+ 7
C C
SLD H V- H I-
8 4 8 4 8
are converted into digital values by the modules for use in programs.
V+ V+ I+
9 C 9 C 9
C V- H V- H I-
H 10 5 10 5 10
3 I+ V+ I+
• High resolution (1 part in ±16,000 or 14 bits)

11 C 11 C 11
SLD H V- H I-
6 6
12 12 12
V+ V+ I+
This enables the CPU to process variable signals such as pressure,

V-
13 C
H
13 C
H I-
13
C V-
H 7 7
4 I+
14 14 I+
14
V+
C C
SLD 15 H V-
15 H I- 15
8 8
16 16 16
• Switchable resolution (1 part in ±4000, 1 part in

A.G. A.G. A.G.
speed and flow. For modules able to sense temperature, please refer
17 17 17
(FG) (FG) (FG)
18 18 18
A/D
0-±10V A/D A/D
0-20mA 0-±10V 0-20mA
to the temperature input modules section. ±12,000 and 1 part in ±16,000)

• Averaging function
Key Features:
• Module temperature drift compensation
• Module set-up via menus in GX Works2; no programming required
• Maximum and minimum value hold
• Voltage and current inputs, or exclusively voltage or current input
• 4 and 8 channel input versions
Required Manuals
Covers Q64AD, Q68ADV, Q68ADI and Supplied as PDF with
SH(NA)080055 Analog-Digital Converter Module User’s Manual -
GX Configurator-AD GX Configurator-AD
IB(NA)0800034E Analog-Digital (Converter Module User’s Manual (Hardware)) Basic Information on Q64AD, Q68ADV, Q68ADI Yes -
Analog to Digital Converter Modules

Model Number Q64AD Q68ADV Q68ADI
Stocked Item S S S
Certiication UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE
Number of Analog Input Points 4 points (4 channels) 8 points (8 channels) 8 points (8 channels)
Voltage -10 to 10VDC (input resistance value 1MΩ) -
Analog Input
Current 0 to 20mADC (input resistance value 250Ω) - 0 to 20mADC (input resistance value 250Ω)
Digital Output 16-bit signed binary (Normal resolution mode: -4096 to 4095, high resolution mode: -12288 to 12287, -16384 to 16383
Normal Resolution Mode High Resolution Mode
Analog Input Range
Digital Output Value Max. Resolution Digital Output Value Max. Resolution
0 to 10V 0 to 4000 2.5mV 0 to 16000 0.625mV
0 to 5V 0 to 4000 1.25mV 0 to 12000 0.416mV
Voltage 1 to 5V 0 to 4000 1.0mV 0 to 12000 0.333mV
I/O Characteristics Max. Resolution
-10 to 10 -4000 to 4000 2.5mV -16000 to 16000 0.625mV
User Range Setting -4000 to 4000 0.375mV -12000 to 12000 0.333mV
0 to 20mA 0 to 4000 5μA 0 to 12000 1.66μA
Current 4 to 20mA 0 to 4000 4μA 0 to 12000 1.33μA
User Range setting -4000 to 4000 1.37μA -12000 to 12000 1.33μA

Ambient Temperature 0 to 55°C Ambient Temperature 0 to 55°C
Analog Input Range Ambient Ambient
Without Temperature Without Temperature
With Temp. Drift With Temp. Drift
Temp. Drift 25±5°C Temp. Drift 25±5°C
Compensation Compensation
Compensation Compensation
0 to 10V
Accuracy (Accuracy of Digital Output -10 to 10 ±0.3% (±48 digit) ±0.4% (±64 digit) ±0.1% (±16 digit)
Value Relative to Maximum Value) (*1) Voltage 0 to 5V
1 to 5V
±0.3% (±12 digit) ±0.4% (±16 digit) ±0.1% (±48 digit)
User Range Setting
0 to 20mA ±0.3% (±36 digit) ±0.3% (±48 digit) ±0.1% (±12 digit)
Current 4 to 20mA
User Range Setting
Conversion Time 80 μs/channel (When temperature drift compensation is provided, time is 160 μs longer, regardless of the number of channels used.)
Absolute Max. Input Voltage: ±15V, current: ±30mA
Insulation System Across I/O terminals and PLC power supply: Photocoupler insulation; Across channels: No insulation
I/O Device Points Occupied 16 points (I/O allocation: 16 intelligent points)
Connection Terminal 18-point terminal block
Internal Current Consumption (5VDC) (A) 0.63 0.64 0.64
Weight (kg) 0.18 0.19 0.19
Note:
1. “Digit” indicates a digital value. ±4 digit means that the digital value 1000 will vary between 996 and 1004.

High Speed Analog Input Module
Key Features:
• High speed conversion (20µs/channel)
• Easy configuration and monitoring via GX Works2
• High resolution (1/20000)
• High accuracy (±0.1%)
• Logging of 10000 data per channel
• Flow amount integration function
• Digital clipping function
Required Manuals
SH(NA)080987 High Speed Analog Digital Converter Module User’s Manual Covers Q64ADH Yes S
High-Speed Analog Input Module

Model Number Q64ADH
Stocked Item S
Number of Analog Inputs 4 points (4 channels)
Digital Output -20480 to 20479 (-32768 to 32767 when using the scaling function)
Voltage 10 to 10VDC (Input resistance 1MΩ)
Analog Input
Current 0 to 20mADC (Input resistance 250Ω)
Analog Input Range Digital Output Value Maximum Resolution

0 to 10V 500µV
0 to 5V 0 to 20000 250µV
1 to 5V 200µV
Voltage -10 to 10V -20000 to 20000 500µV
1 to 5V (Extended mode) -5000 to 22500 200µV
I/O Characteristics Maximum Resolution (*1)
User Range Setting -20000 to 20000 219µV
0 to 20 mA 1000nA
0 to 20000
4 to 20 mA 800nA
Current 4 to 20V (Extended Mode) -5000 to 22500 800nA
User Range Setting -20000 to 20000 878nA
Ambient
Accuracy (Accuracy Temperature Within ±0.1% (±20 digit)
Relative to Maximum 25 ±5°C
Analog Output Value) Ambient
(*2) Temperature Within ±0.2% (±40 digit)
0 to 55°C
Conversion Speed (*3, *4, *5) High speed: 20μs/channel; Medium speed: 80μs/channel; Low speed: 1ms/channel
Absolute Maximum Input Voltage: ±15V, Current: 30mA (*6)
Offset / Gain Setting Count (*7) Up to 50000 times
Isolation Method Between I/O terminals and programmable controller power supply: photocoupler isolation; Between input channels: no isolation
Dielectric Withstand Voltage Between I/O terminals and programmable controller power supply: 500VACrms for 1 minute
Insulation Resistance Between I/O terminals and programmable controller power supply: 500VDC 10MΩ or higher
Number of Occupied I/O Points 16 points (I/O assignment: Intelligent 16 points)
Connected Terminal 18-point terminal block
Applicable Wire Size 0.3 to 0.75mm²
Applicable Solderless Terminal R1.25-3 (solderless terminals with sleeve are not usable)
Internal Current Consumption (5VDC) 0.52A
Weight (kg) 0.18
Base Unit Slots Occupied 1 slot
Notes:
1. For details on the I/O conversion characteristics, refer to the following. I/O conversion characteristic of A/D conversion in the Users Manual.
2. Except when receiving noise influence.
3. The default value is 20μs/channel.
4. The logging function can be used only in the middle speed (80μs/channel) or low speed (1ms/channel).
5. The flow amount integration function can be used only in the low speed (1ms/channel).
6. This is a momentary current value which does not cause damage to internal resistors of the module. The maximum input current value for constant application is 24mA.
7. If the number of offset/gain settings exceeds 50000 times, an error occurs.
28
Isolated Analog Modules Q64AD-GH
RUN
ERR.
ALM
For some applications, it is essential that there is channel-to-channel isolation between analog inputs or outputs. These V+
1
2
modules provide galvanic isolation between each channel so there is no common connection from one channel to any other.
C V-
H
3
1 I+ 4
SLD
5
V+
6
C V-
H 7
2 I+
8
SLD
V+ 9
C V- 10
H
3 I+ 11
SLD 12
V+ 13
C V-
H 14
4 I+
15
SLD
16
A/D 17
-10 10V 18
0 20mA
Required Manuals
Channel Isolated High Resolution Analog-Digital Converter Module Covers Q64AD-GH, Q62AD-DGH and Supplied as PDF with
SH(NA)080277 S
User’s Manual GX Configurator-AD GX Configurator-AD
Q64AD-GH Channel Isolated High Resolution Analog-Digital
IB(NA)0800223 Basic information on Q64AD-GH Yes S
Converter Module
8 CH Analog Module (Isolated Analog)

Model Number Q68AD-G
Stocked Item S
Number of Analog Inputs 8 points (8 channels)
Digital Output 16-bit signed binary (normal resolution mode: -4096 to 4095, high resolution mode: -12288 to 12287, -16384 to 16383)
Voltage -10 to 10VDC (Input impedance 1ΩM or more)
Analog Input
Current 0 to 20mADC (Input resistance 250Ω)

Input Analog Input Range Digital Output Maximum Digital Output Maximum
Value Resolution Value Resolution
0 to 5V 2.5mV 0 to 1600 0.625mV
0 to 5V 0 to 4000 1.25mV 0.416mV
0 to 1200
1 to 5V 1.0mV 0.333mV
Voltage 1 to 5V (Expanded Mode) -1000 to 4500 1.0mV -3000 to 13500 0.333mV
I/O Characteristics Maximum Resolution
-10 to 10V 2.5mV -16000 to 16000 0.625mV
-4000 to 4000
User Range Setting 0.375 -12000 to 12000 0.333mV
0 to 20 mA 5µA 1.66µA
0 to 4000 0 to 12000
4 to 20 mA 4µA 1.33µA
Current 4 to 20V (Expanded Mode) -1000 to 45000 4µA -3000 to 13500 1.33µA
User Range Setting -4000 to 4000 1.37µA -12000 to 12000 1.33µA
Reference Accuracy ±0.1%; Normal resolution mode : ±4digit (*2); High resolution mode (0 to 10V, -10 to 10V): ±16digit (*2)
Accuracy (Accuracy (*1) High resolution mode (Other than the above ranges): ±12digit (*2)
Relative to Maximum
Analog Output Value) Temp. Coefficient
±71.4ppm/°C (0.00714%/°C)
(*3)
Conversion Speed 10ms / channel
I/O Device Points Occupied 16 points
Insulation
Isolated Part Isolation Method Dielectric Strength
Resistance
Between I/O Terminal and Programmable 500VAC rms,
Isolation Specifications
Controller Power Supply 1min. 500VDC 10MΩ
Transformer Isolation
1000VAC rms, or more
Between Analog Input Channels
1min.
Connector Type A6CON1 or A6CON4

Weight (kg) 0.16
Notes:
1. Accuracy of offset/gain setting at ambient temperature
2. “digit” indicates a digital value.
3. Accuracy per temperature change of 1°C Example: Accuracy when temperature changes from 25 to 30°C ±0.1% (reference accuracy) + 0.00714 %/°C (temperature coefficient) x 5°C (temperature change
difference) = 0.1357%

High Resolution Analog Module (Isolated Analog Input Channels)
Model Number Q64AD-GH
Stocked Item S
Number of Analog Input Points 4 points (4 channels)
Voltage -10 to 10VDC (Input resistance 1MΩ)
Analog Input
Current 0 to 20 mADC (Input resistance 250Ω)
Digital Output 16-bit signed binary (-32768 to 32768); 32-bit signed binary (-65536 to 65536)
Maximum Resolution Digital Digital

Analog Input
Input Output Value Output Value
Range 32-BIt 16-Bit (32-Bit) (16-Bit)
0 to 10V 156.3µV 312.6µV
0 to 5V 78.2µV 156.4µV
1 to 5V 62.5µV 125.0µV 0 to 64000 0 to 32000
Users Input Range
Voltage 47.4µV 94.8µV
I/O Characteristics Maximum Resolution (Uni-Polar)
-10 to 10V 156.3µV 312.6µV
-64000 to -32000 to
Users Input Range 64000 32000
47.4µV 94.8µV
(Bi-Polar)
0 to 20 mA 312.5nA 625.0µV
4 to 20 mA 250.0nA 500.0µV
Current 0 to 64000 0 to 32000
Users Input Range
151.6nA 303.2µV
(Uni-Polar)
Accuracy (Accuracy Reference Accuracy (*1) ±0.05%; Digital output value( 32 bit): ±32 digit (*2); Digital output value (16 bit): ±16 digit (*2)
Relative to Full-Scale) Temp. Coefficient (*3) ±71.4 ppm / °C (0.00714% / °C)
Conversion Speed 10ms / 4 channels
Absolute Maximum Input Voltage: ± 15V; Current: ± 30mA
Withstanding Voltage Isolation Method Between I/O terminal and PLC power supply: Photocoupler insulation; Between analog input channels: transformer isolation
Dielectric Strength 1780VAC ms / 3 cycles (elevation 2000m)
Isolation Voltage Between I/O terminal and PLC power supply: 500VDC 20MΩ more
Connected Terminal 18 points terminal block
Applicable Solderless Terminals R1.25-3 (A solderless terminals with sleeves cannot be used)
Internal Current Consumption (5VDC) 0.89 A
Weight (kg) 0.20
Notes:
1. Accuracy when consistent at some temperature within the ambient temperature (to 55°C)
2. “Digit” indicates a digital output value.
3. Accuracy per temperature change of 1°C. Example: Accuracy when temperature change from 25 to 30°C. 0.05% (reference accuracy + 0.00714% / °C (temperature coefficient) x 5 °C
(temperature change difference) = 0.0857%
30
Q62AD-DGH
RUN ALM
ERR.
Isolated Analog Input Module with Signal Conditioning Function

CH1
P
1
I/CHK+
2
CHK-
3
4
5
6
7
CH2 8
P
9
I/CHK+
10
CHK-
11
12
13
14
IN 15
24VDC
16
17
FG
18
4~20mA
Required Manuals
Channel Isolated High Resolution Analog-Digital Converter Covers Q64AD-GH, Q62AD-DGH and Supplied as PDF with
SH(NA)080277 -
Module User’s Manual GX Configurator-AD GX Configurator-AD
Channel Isolated High Resolution Analog-Digital Converter
IB(NA)0800224 Basic information on Q62AD-DGH Yes -
Module (with Signal Conditioning Function)
Isolated Analog Input Module with Signal Conditioning Function

Model Number Q66AD-DG
Stocked Item S
Number of
Input 6 points (6 channels)
Analog Input
Specification
Analog Input 4 to 20 mADC (Input resistance 250Ω)
Connecting Supply Voltage 26 ±2VDC
Section
with 2-Wire Maximum
Supply Power 24mADC
Transmitter Supply Current
Specification
Short-Circuit
Available; Limit current: 25 to 35mA
Protection
Check Terminals Available
Digital Output 16-bit signed binary (normal resolution mode: -96 to 4095, high resolution mode: -288 to 12287)

Analog Input Range Digital Output Maximum Digital Output Maximum
I/O Characteristics Maximum Resolution 0 to 20mA 5µA 1.66µA
0 to 4000 0 to 12000
4 to 20mA 4µA 1.33µA
4 to 20mA (Expanded Mode) -1000 to 4500 4µA -3000 to 13500 1.33µA
User Range Setting 0 to 4000 1.37µA 0 to 12000 1.33µA
Reference
±0.1% (Normal resolution mode: ±4 digit; High resolution mode: ±12 digit) (*2)
Accuracy Accuracy (*1)
(Accuracy Relative to Full-Scale) Temp.
±71.4 ppm / °C (0.00714% / °C)
Coefficient (*3)
Conversion Speed 10ms / channel
Dielectric Withstand
Isolated Part Insulation Method Isolation Voltage
Voltage
Between I/O Terminal and Programmable
500VAC rms, 1min
Insulation Controller Power Supply
Transformer 500VDC 10MΩ
Between Analog Input Channels Isolation 1000VAC rms, 1min. or more
Between External Power Supply and Analog Input 500VAC rms, 1min

Connector Type A6CON4
External Power Supply 24VDC +20%, -15%; Ripple, spike within 500mVp-p; Inrush current: 5.0A, within 400µs; 0.36A
Weight (kg) 0.22
Notes:
1. Accuracy of offset/gain setting at ambient temperature
3. Accuracy per temperature change of 1°C. Example: Accuracy when temperature changes from 25 to 30°C 0.1% (reference accuracy) + 0.00714 % / °C (temperature coefficient) x 5°C
(temperature change difference) = 0.1357%

High Resolution Isolated Analog Input Module with Signal Conditioning Function
Model Number Q62AD-DGH
Stocked Item S
Certification CE
Number of
Input 2 points (2 channels)
Analog Input
Specification
Analog Input 4 to 20 mADC (*1) (Input resistance 250Ω)
Connecting Supply Voltage 26 ±2VDC
Section
With 2-Wire Maximum
Supply Power 24mADC
Transmitter Supply Current
Specification
Short-Circuit
Available; Limit current: 25 to 35mA
Protection
Check Terminals Available
Digital Output 16-bit signed binary (-768 to 32767); 32-bit signed binary (-1538 to 65535)
Maximum Resolution Digital

Analog Input Digital Output
Output Value
Range 32-BIt 16-Bit Value (16-Bit)
(32-Bit)
I/O Characteristics Maximum Resolution 4 to 20mA 250.0nA 500.0nA
User range 0 to 64000 0 to 32000
151.6nA 303.2nA
Setting
Reference
±0.05%; Digital output value( 32 bit): ±32 digit; Digital output value (16 bit): ±16 digit (*3)
Accuracy (Accuracy Relative to Accuracy (*2)
Full-Scale) Temp.
±71.4 ppm / °C (0.00714% / °C)
Coefficient (*4)
Isolated Part Insulation Method Dielectric Strength Isolation Voltage
Between I/O Terminal and PLC Power Supply Photocoupler Insulation

Insulation 1780 VAC rms / 3
500 VDC 10MΩ or
Between Analog Input Channels Transformer Isolation cycles (elevation
more
2000m)
Between External Power Supply and Analog Input Transformer Isolation

External Power Supply 24VDC +20%, -15%; Ripple, spike within 500mVp-p; Inrush current: 5.5A, within 200µs; 0.19A
Weight (kg) 0.19
Notes:
1. User range setting is 2 to 24mA.
2. Accuracy of offset/gain setting at ambient temperature. Q62AD-DGH needs to be powered on 30 minutes prior to operation for compliance to the specification (accuracy).
3. “Digit” indicates a digital output value.
4. Accuracy per temperature change of 1°C.
Example: Accuracy when temperature change from 25 to 30°C. 0.05% (reference accuracy + 0.00714% / °C (temperature coefficient) x 5 °C (temperature change difference) = 0.0857%
32
Combination Analog Module
Model Number Q64AD2DA
Stocked Item S
Voltage -10 to 10VDC (input resistance value 1MΩ)
Analog Input
Current 0 to 20mADC (input resistance value 250Ω)
Normal resolution mode:-96 to 4095, -4096 to 4095, -1096 to 4595
Digital Output
High resolution mode:-384 to 16383, -288 to 12287, -16384 to 16383, -3288 to 13787
Analog Input Range
Digital Output Value Max. Resolution Digital Output Value Max. Resolution
0 to 10V 2.5mV 0 to 16000 0.625mV
0 to 5V 0 to 4000 1.25mV 0 to 12000 0.416mV
I/O Characteristics Voltage 1 to 5V 1.0mV 0 to 12000 0.333mV
Maximum Resolution -10 to 10V -4000 to 4000 2.5mV -16000 to 16000 0.625mV
1 to 5V (Extended Mode) -1000 to 4500 1.0mV -3000 to 13500 0.333mV
0 to 20mA 5μA 1.66μA
0 to 4000 0 to 12000
Current 4 to 20mA 4μA 1.33μA
4 to 20mA (Extended Mode) -1000 to 4500 4μA -3000 to 13500 1.33μA
Analog Input Range Ambient Ambient Ambient Ambient

Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature
0 to 55°C 25 ±5°C 0 to 55°C 25 ±5°C
0 to 10V
±0.4% (±64 digit) ±0.1% (±16 digit)
Accuracy (Accuracy of Digital Output -10 to 10
Value Relative to Maximum Value) (*1) Voltage 0 to 5V
1 to 5V
±0.4% (±16 digit) ±0.1% (±4 digit)
1 to 5V (Extended Mode)
±0.4% (±48 digit) ±0.1% (±12 digit)
0 to 20mA
Current 4 to 20mA
4 to 20mA (Extended Mode)
Conversion Time 500 μs/channel

Absolute Maximum Input Voltage: ±15V, current: ±30mA (*2)
Number Of Analog Output Points 2 points (2 channels)
Digital Input Normal resolution mode: -96 to 4095, -4096 to 4095; High resolution mode: -288 to 12287, -16384 to 16383
Voltage -10 to 10VDC (External load resistance: 1MΩ)
Analog Output
Current 0 to 20mADC (External load resistance: 600Ω)

Analog Output Range Digital Input Maximum Maximum
Digital Input Value
Value Resolution Resolution
0 to 5V 1.25 mV 0.416 mV
0 to 4000 0 to 12000
I/O Characteristics Maximum Resolution Voltage 1 to 5V 1.0 mV 0.333 mV
-10 to 10V -4000 to 4000 2.5 mV -16000 to 16000 0.625 mV
0 to 20 mA 5µA 1.66µA
Current 0 to 4000 0 to 12000
4 to 20 mA 4µA 1.33µA
Ambient Temperature
Analog Output Range
0 to 55°C 25 ±5°C
Accuracy (Accuracy With Respect To 0 to 5V

Maximum Analog Output Value) Voltage 1 to 5V ±0.3% (±30mV) ±0.1% (±10mV)
-10 to 10V
0 to 20 mA
Current ±0.3% (±60 μA) ±0.1% (±20 μA)
4 to 20 mA
Conversion Speed 500 μs/channel

Absolute Maximum Output Voltage: 12V Current: 21mA
Output Short Circuit Protection Available
I/O Device Points Occupied 16 points (I/O assignment: Intelligent 16 points)
Connected Terminals 18 points terminal block
A/D conversion part, D/A conversion part: R1.25-3 (Solderless terminals with sleeves are unavailable.)
Applicable Solderless Terminal
External power supply 24VDC, FG terminal connection: Not available
External Supply Power 24VDC 15%; Ripple, spike 500mVP-P or less; Inrush current: 2.5A 150μs or less; Current consumption: 0.19A
Weight (kg) 0.23
Notes:
1. A1: The selection ranges and accuracies have the following relationships.
Temperature Range
Ambient Temperature
Pt100 and JPt100 : -20 to 120°C Pt100 : -200 to 850°C JPt100 : -180 to 600°C
0 to 55°C ±0.3°C ±2.125°C ±1.5°C
25 ±5°C ±0.096°C ±0.68°C ±0.48°C
The conversion speed is a period from when a temperature is input and converted into a corresponding digital value until the value is stored into the buffer memory. When two or more channels are used, the
conversion speed is “40ms number of conversion enabled channels”.
2. For output in the case of disconnection detection, select any of “Value immediately before disconnection”, “Up scale (maximum value of measured temperature range + 5% of measured temperature range)”,
“Down scale (minimum value of measured temperature range - 5% of measured temperature range)” or “Given value”.

Analog Output Modules Q62DAN
RUN
ERROR
Q64DAN
RUN
ERROR
Q68DAVN
RUN
ERROR
Q68DAIN
RUN
ERROR
Analog output modules allow the CPU to convert digital • High resolution (1 part in ±16,000 or 14 bits) 1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
program values to real world analog current or voltage

4 4 4
• Switchable resolution (1 part in ±4000, 1 part in

5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7 7
signals. These can then be used to control actuators whose

8 8 8
±12,000 and 1 part in ±16,000)

9 9 9
10 10 10
11 11 11
properties vary between set limits, such as valve openings,

12 12 12
13 13 13
• Variable offset/gain
14 14 14
15 15 15
speed control, extension distance, etc.

16 16 16
17 17 17
18 18 18
• Synchronous output function establishes output

Key Features: changes on a set timebase
• Module set-up via menus in GX Works2; • Output hold/clear function
no programming required • Output test when CPU is in STOP mode
• 2, 4 and 8 channel versions
• Fast conversion (80 microseconds/channel)
• High accuracy (±0.1%)
Required Manuals
Digital-Analog Converter Module Covers Q62DAN, Q64DAN, Q68DAVN, Q68DAIN Supplied as PDF with
SH(NA)080054 -
User’s Manual GX Configurator-DA GX Configurator-DA
D/A Converter Module Users’ Basic information on Q62DAN, Q64DAN, Q68DAVN,
IB(NA)0800321E Yes -
Manual (Hardware) Q68DAIN
Model Name Q62DAN Q64DAN Q68DAVN Q68DAIN

Stocked Item S S S S
Number Of Analog Output Points 2 points (2 channels) 4 points (4 channels) 8 points (8 channels)
Digital Input 16-bit signed binary (normal resolution mode: -4096 to 4095, High resolution mode: -12288 to 12287, -16384 to 16383)
Voltage -10 to 10VDC (External load resistance value: 1KΩ to 1MΩ) -
Analog Output 0 to 20 mA DC (External load
Current 0 to 20 mA DC (External load resistance value: 0Ω to 600Ω) -
resistance value: 0Ω to 600Ω)
Analog Output Range Maximum Maximum
Digital Input Value Digital Input Value
Resolution Resolution
0 to 5V 1.25 mV 0.416 mV
0 to 4000 0 to 12000
1 to 5V 1.0 mV 0.333 mV
I/O Characteristics, Voltage -10 to 10V 2.5 mV -16000 to 16000 0.625 mV
Maximum Resolution
User Range -4000 to 4000
0.75 mV -12000 to 12000 0.333 mV
Setting
0 to 20 mA 5µA 1.66µA
0 to 4000 0 to 12000
4 to 20 mA 4µA 1.33µA
Current
User Range
-4000 to 4000 1.5µA -12000 to 12000 0.83µA
Setting
Accuracy (Accuracy Ambient Temp. Within ± 0.1 % (Voltage: ±10 mV, Current: ± 20µA)
With Respect To 25 ±5°C
Maximum Analog Ambient Temp.
Output Value) Within ± 0.3 % (Voltage: ± 30 mV, Current: ± 60µA)
0 to 55°C
Conversion Speed 80µs/channel
Output Short Circuit Protection Available
Connected Terminals 18-points terminal block
FG terminal: R1.25-3, 1.25-YS3, RAV1.25-3, V1.25-YS3A;
Applicable Solderless Terminal R1.25-3 (A solderless terminal with sleeve cannot be used) Other terminals than FG: R1.25-3 (A solderless terminal with sleeve
cannot be used)
24VDC + 20 %, -15 %
Ripple, spike 500 mV P-P or less
External Supply Power Inrush current: 2.5 A, Inrush current: 2.5 A, Inrush current: 2.5 A, Inrush current: 2.5 A,
within 250µs within 260µs within 230µs within 230µs
0.15 A 0.24 A 0.20 A 0.27 A
Internal Current Consumption (5VDC) 0.33 A 0.34 A 0.38 A 0.38 A
Weight (kg) 0.19 0.20 0.20 0.20
34
D/A Converter Module
Model Number Q64DAH
Stocked Item -
Number of Analog Output Points 4 points (4 channels)
-20480 to 20479
Digital Input When Using the Scaling
-32768 to 32767
Function
Voltage -10 to 10VDC (external load resistance 1kΩ to 1MΩ)
Analog Output
Current 0 to 20mADC (external load resistance 0Ω to 600Ω)
Analog Output Range Digital Value Maximum Resolution

0 to 5V 250μV
0 to 20000
1 to 5V 200μV
Voltage
-10 to10V 500μV
I/O Characteristics, Maximum Resolution (*1) -20000 to 20000
User range setting 333μV
0 to 20mA 1000nA
0 to 20000
Current 4 to 20mA 800nA
User range setting -20000 to 20000 700nA
Accuracy Ambient Temperature 25 ±5°C Within ±0.1% (voltage: ±10mV, current: ±20μA)
(Accuracy for
the Maximum
Value of Analog Ambient Temperature Within ±0.3% (voltage: ±30mV, current: ±60μA)
Output Value) 0 to 55°C
(*2)
Conversion Normal Output Mode 20μs/channel
Speed Wave Output Mode 50μs/channel, 80μs/channel
Number of Offset/Gain Settings Up to 50000 counts
Output Short Protection Protected
Between I/O terminals and programmable controller power supply: photocoupler isolation; Between output channels: no
Insulation Method
isolation; Between external power supply and analog output: transformer isolation
Between I/O terminals and programmable controller power supply: 500VAC rms for 1 minute; Between external power supply
Dielectric Withstand Voltage
and analog output: 500VAC rms for 1 minute
Number of Occupied I/O Points 16 points (I/O assignment: 16 points for intelligent)
24VDC +20%, -15% 24VDC +20%, -15%
Ripple, Spike 500mVP-P or
Ripple, spike 500mVP-P or lower
External Power Lower
Supply Inrush Current: 4.3A, 1000μs
Inrush current: 4.3A, 1000μs or shorter
or Shorter
Current Consumption: 0.18A Current consumption: 0.18A
Weight (kg) 0.19
Notes:
1. For details on the I/O conversion characteristics, refer to the following. I/O conversion characteristic of D/A conversion ( Page 26, Section 3.2.2)
2. Except when receiving noise influence. Warm up (power on) the module for 30 minutes to satisfy the accuracy shown in the table.

Q62DA-FG
RUN ALM
Isolated Analog Output Modules with Output Monitor C

ERR.
V+
1
COM1
H 2
1 I+
3
4
5
6
7
8
V+
C
9
COM2
H 10
2 I+
11
12
13
14
IN 15
24VDC
16
17
(FG) 18
D/A
-12~12V
0~22mA
Required Manuals
Channel Isolated Digital-Analog Converter Module Supplied as PDF with
SH(NA)080281 Covers Q62DA-FG/GX Configurator-DA S
Q62DA-FG/GX Configurator-DA GX Configurator-DA
IB(NA)0800277 Channel Isolated Digital-Analog Converter Module Q62DA-FG Basic information on Q62DA-FG Yes S
Model Number Q62DA-FG

Stocked Item S
Number of Analog Outputs 2 points (2 channels)
Digital Input 16-bit signed binary (-12288 to 12287, -16384 to 16383)
Voltage -12 to 12VDC (External load resistance 1k to 1MΩ)
Analog Output
Current 0 to 20 mADC (External load resistance: 0 to 600Ω); 0 to 22 mADC
Digital Input Maximum

Analog Output Range
Value Resolution
0 to 5V 0.416mV
0 to 12000
1 to 5V 0.333mV
Voltage -10 to 10V -16000 to 16000 0.625mV
I/O Characteristics Maximum Resolution User Range Setting 2 0.366mV
-12000 to 12000
User Range Setting 3 0.183mV
0 to 20 mA 1.66µA
0 to 12000
Current 4 to 20 mA 1.33µA
User Range Setting 1 -12000 to 12000 0.671µA
Reference Accuracy
Accuracy (Accuracy within ±0.1%; (Voltage: ±10mV, Current: ±20µA)
(*1)
Relative to Maximum
±80 ppm / °C (0.008% / °C)
(*2)
Resolution 12 bit
Output Monitor Reference Accuracy (*1) ±0.2%
Temperature Coefficient (*2) ±160ppm / °C (0.016% / °C)
Output Short-Circuit Protection Available
Insulation
Resistance
Between I/O Terminal and Controller Power Supply Photocoupler Insulation
Isolation Specifications 1780VAC rms / 3
500VDC 10MΩ
Between Analog Output Channels Transformer Isolation cycles (elevation
or more
2000m)
Between External Power Supply and Analog Output Transformer Isolation

External Power Supply 24VDC +20%, -15%; Ripple, spike within 500mVp-p; Inrush current: 5.2A, within 300µs, 0.3A
Weight (kg) 0.20
Notes:
1. Accuracy of offset/gain setting at ambient temperature Q62AD-DGH needs to be powered on 30 minutes prior to operation for compliance to the specification (accuracy).
2. Accuracy per temperature change of 1°C.
Example: Accuracy when temperature change from 25 to 30°C. 0.1% (reference accuracy + 0.008% / °C (temperature coefficient) x 5 °C (temperature change difference) = 0.14%
36
Model Number Q66DA-G
Stocked Item S
Number of Analog Outputs 6 points (6 channels)
Digital Input 16-bit signed binary (normal resolution mode:-4096 to 4095; high resolution mode: -12288 to 12287, -16384 to 16383)
Voltage -12 to 12VDC (External load resistance 1k to 1MΩ)
Analog Output
Current 0 to 20 mADC (External load resistance: 0 to 600Ω); 0 to 22 mADC (*3)

Input Analog Input Range Digital Input Maximum Digital Input Maximum
0 to 5V 1.25mV 0.416mV
0 to 4000 0 to 12000
1 to 5V 1.0mV 0.333mV
Voltage -10 to 10V 2.5mV -16000 to 16000 0.625mV
I/O Characteristics Maximum Resolution
User Range Setting 2 -4000 to 4000 .075mV 0.400mV
-12000 to 12000
User Range Setting 3 0.375mV 0.210mV
0 to 20 mA 5µA 1.66µA
0 to 4000 0 to 12000
Current 4 to 20 mA 4µA 1.33µA
User Range Setting 1 -4000 to 4000 1.5µA -12000 to 12000 0.95µA
Reference Accuracy
Accuracy (Accuracy within ±0.1%; (Voltage: ±10mV, Current: ±20µA)
(*1)
Relative to Maximum
±80 ppm / °C (0.008% / °C)
(*2)
Conversion Speed 6ms / channels
Resolution 15-bit
Temperature Coefficient (*2) 0.008% / °C
Insulation
Resistance
500VAC rms,
Between Output Terminal and Controller Power Supply
1 min.
Transformer 1000VAC rms, 500VDC 10MΩ
Between Analog Output Channels
Isolation 1 min. or more
500VAC rms,
Between External Power Supply and Analog Output
1 min.
Connected Terminal 40-pin connector

External Power Supply 24VDC, +20%, -15%; Ripple, spike within 500 mV p-p; Inrush current: 4.8A, within 400µs; 0.22A
Weight (kg) 0.22
Notes:
1. Accuracy of offset/gain setting at ambient temperature Q66DA-G needs to be powered on 30 minutes prior to operation for compliance to the specification (accuracy).
2. Accuracy per temperature change of 1 °C
Example: Accuracy when temperature changes from 25 to 30 °C
0.1% (Reference accuracy) + 0.008%/ °C (temperature coefficient) x 5 °C (temperature change difference) = 0.14%
3. The following indicates the external load resistance when output current is 20mA or more.
22mA
20mA
Output
current
500 600
External load resistance

HART Interface Module
The Q Series HART® Interface I/O Modules provide total access Key Features:
to process data and device diagnostics from over 1000 HART • 8 channel 4-20mA I/O modules (traditional or HART enabled
enabled field devices. The system is designed to use the 4-20mA 4-20mA devices), up to 512 channels on a single Process CPU
(or 0-20mA) control signal from traditional analog devices as
well as the 4-20mA and digital process data from HART devices, • HART Digital Communications combines high speed control
allowing up to 5 (1 analog, 4 digital process variables) control (4-20mA) with access to multivariable process data
points on a single 2-wire connection. • Compatible with HART revisions 5, 6 and 7
• Configuration of field devices via an industry standard FDT
frame application
• Reduces integration time and device setup through
standardized interfaces
Model Number ME1AD8HAI-Q

Stocked Item -
Current 0 to 20 mA DC • 4 to 20 mA DC
Absolute Maximum Input ± 30 mA
Analog Input Input Resistance 250Ω
Short-Circuit Protection Available
Primary Filter Hz (3 dB), HART signal is 1200 Hz with 1 mAP-P
Digital Output 16-bit signed binary (–768 to 32767)
Analog Input Digital Output Maximum

Range Value Resolution
I/O Characteristics, Maximum Resolution
0 to 20 mA 625.0 nA
0 to 32000
4 to 20 mA 500.0 nA
Accuracy (Relative to Digital Output Value) (*1) ±0.15% (±48 digit) (*2)
Cycle Time 80 ms (Independent to the number of used channels)
Between the I/O Terminals
Photocoupler insulation
and PLC Power Supply
Insulation Method
Between Analog Input
Non-insulated
Channels
HART Modem FSK Physical Layer, multiplexed
HART Functions Protocol Revision 6 support • 4 Process variables support (PV, SV, TV, QV) • FDT/DTM support
Number of I/O Occupied Points 32 points (I/O assignment: Intelligent 32 points)
External Wiring Connection System 18-points terminal block
Refer to the HART specification for more details. The external power supply voltage of the ME1AD8HAI-Q should be
Applicable Wire Size
enough for correct operation of the analog transmitter. (*3, *4)
Applicable Solderless Terminals R1.25-3 (Solderless terminals with sleeves cannot be used)
Voltage 24VDC (+20%, -15%); ripple, spike within 500mVP-P
External Supply Power Current (A) 0.3
Inrush Current 5.5 A within 200 μs
Online Module Change Not supported
Internal Current Consumption (5VDC) (A) 0.32
Weight (kg) 0.19
Notes:
1. ME1AD8HAI-Q needs to be powered on 30 minutes prior to operation for compliance to the specification (accuracy).
3. Use case:For distances up to 800 m, the wire size of 0.51 mm diameter with 115 nF/km cable capacitance and 36.7 ⁄/km cableresistance can be applied.
4. Refer to the calculation example shown in section 4.4.2 (External wiring).
38
Load Cell Input Module
Model Number Q61LD
Stocked Item S
Number of Analog Inputs 1 point (1 channel)
Digital Output 32-bit signed binary; 0 to 10000
Analog Input Range (Load Cell Rated Output) 0.0 to 1.0mV/V, 0.0 to 2.0mV/V, 0.0 to 3.0mV/V
Digital Output Maximum Weighing Maximum

Analog Input Range
Value Capacity Output Value Resolution
I/O Characteristics Maximum Resolution Load Cell 0 to 1.0mV/V 0.5µA
Rated 0 to 2.0mV/V 0 to 10000 -99999 to 99999 1.0µA
Output 0 to 3.0mV/V 1.5µA
Accuracy (Accuracy Relative to Maximum

Nonlineality: Within ±0.01%/FS (Ambient temperature 25°C); Zero drift: Within ±0.25µV/°C RTI; Gain drift: Within ±15 ppm/°C
Analog Output Value)
Conversion Speed 10ms
Accuracy (Accuracy Relative to Analog Input
Nonlineality: Within ±0.01%/FS (Ambient temperature 25°C ); Zero drift: Within ±0.25µV/°C RTI; Gain drift: Within ±15 ppm/°C
(Load Cell Rated Output) of a Module)
Connected Terminal 18 point terminal block
Applicable Solderless Terminals R1.25-3 (A solderless terminal cannot be used)
External Power Supply 24VDC +20%, -15%; Ripple, spike within 500mVp-p; Inrush current: 5.2A, within 300µs, 0.3A
Weight (kg) 0.17
Isolated Thermocouple Input Modules

Model Number Q68TD-G-H01 Q68TD-G-H02
Stocked Item S S
Number of Analog Inputs 8 channels + cold junction compensation channels / 1 module
Temperature Conversion
16-bit signed binary (-2700 to 18200)
Analog Output Value
Scaling Value 16-bit signed binary
Thermocouple Compliance Standards JIS C1602-1995, IEC 60584-1 (1995),IEC60584-2 (1982)
Conversion Speed (*1) 320ms/8 channels 640ms/8 channels
Resolution 12 bit
Temperature Coefficient (*3) ±160ppm / °C (0.016% / °C)
Insulation
Resistance
Between thermocouple input channel and 500VACrms for
Transfer Isolation
programmable controller power supply 1min 500VDC 10MΩ
1000VACrms for or more
Between thermocouple input channels Transfer Isolation
1min
Between cold junction compensation channel and
No Isolation - -
programmable controller power supply
Connected Terminal 18 point terminal block

Connector Type A6CON4 (*4)
Internal Current Consumption (5VDC) 0.49A 0.65A
Weight (kg) 0.18 0.22
Notes:
1. The conversion speed indicates the maximum time from when the input temperature changes until the measured temperature value of buffer memory is batch-updated.
2. To satisfy with the accuracy, a warm-up (power distribution) period of 30 minutes is required.
3. Calculate the accuracy in the following method. (Accuracy) = (conversion accuracy) + (temperature characteristic) (operating ambient temperature variation) + (cold junction temperature compensation
accuracy) An operating ambient temperature variation indicates a deviation of the operating ambient temperature from the 25 ±5°C range. Example: When using the thermocouple B (refer to User Manual)
with the operating ambient temperature of 35°C and the measured temperature of 1000°C, the accuracy is as follows. (2.5°C)+(0.4) (35 -30 °C)+(1°C)= ±5.5°C
4. Dedicated cable and terminal block available; FA-CBL05Q68TDG and FA-LTB40TDG (non-stock)

High Resolution Isolated Input Thermocouple Module
Q64TDV-GH
RUN
ERROR
Thermocouple input modules are a specialized version of the more general-purpose analog input modules.
1
R
T
D
2
3
4
These modules are designed to accept the specialized voltage signals generated by a wide variety of
5
SLD
6
SLD
7
standard thermocouples. This allows the temperatures monitored by thermocouple sensors to be converted
CH1+
8
CH2+
9
1-
10
2-
11
into digital values for use in CPU programs.

CH3+ 12
CH4+ 13
3-
14
4-
15
SLD
16
SLD
17
• Set channel thermocouple type individually

18
Key Features:
(FG)
Q64TDV
-GH
• Fully isolated inputs prevent interference between input signals • Disconnection detection
• Microvolt input capability for compatibility with load cell applications • Increase conversion speed by disabling unused channels
• 16 bit resolution • Three data processing methods
• Module set-up via menus in GX Works2; no programming required • Offset/gain setting
• 4 channels • Out of range warning
• Supports K, E, J, T, B, R, S and N type thermocouples • Pt100 cold junction compensation
Required Manuals
Thermocouple Input Module Channel Isolated
Covers Q64TD, Q64TDV-GH and
SH(NA)080141 Thermocouple/Micro Voltage Input Module User’s Manual Supplied as PDF with GX Configurator-TI -
GX Configurator-TI
Q64TD Q64TDV-GH GX Configurator-TI
Thermocouple Input Module Channel Isolated
IB(NA)080155 Thermocouple/Micro Voltage Input Module User’s Manual Basic information Q64TD, Q64TDV-GH Yes -
(Hardware) Q64TD, Q64TDV-GH
Model Number Q64TDV-GH

Stocked Item S
Certification CE
Number of Channels 4 channels
Temperature
16-bit, signed binary (-2700 to 18200: Value to the first decimal place x 10 times)
Conversion Value
Output Micro Voltage
16-bit, signed binary (-25000 to 25000)
Conversion Value
Scaling Value 16-bit, signed binary
Standard With Which Thermocouple
JIS C1602-1995
Conforms
Usable Thermocouples B, R, S, K, T, E, J, N
Cold Junction Temperature
±1.0 °C
Compensation Accuracy
Micro Voltage Input Range -100mV to +100mV (input resistance 2MΩ or more)
Micro Voltage Input Accuracy ±0.2mV (at 25°C ambient) ±0.8 mV (0-55°C ambient)
Thermocouple Input B: 0.7°C • R,S: 0.8°C • K,T: 0.3°C • E: 0.2°C • J: 0.1°C • N: 0.4°C
Resolution
Micro Voltage Input 4µV
Sampling Period 20ms/channel (*1)
Conversion Speed Sampling period x 3 (*2)
Number of Analog Input Points 4 channels + Pt100 connection channel/module
Wire Break Detection Yes (Each channel independent)
Connection Terminals 18-point terminal block
Applicable Crimping Terminals R1.25-3 R1.25-3 (A solderless terminals with sleeves cannot be used)
Weight (kg) 0.25
Notes:
1. A period until a thermocouple input value/micro voltage input value is converted into a temperature measurement micro/value voltage conversion value.
2. A period until a thermocouple input value/micro voltage input value is converted into a temperature measurement value/micro voltage conversion value and the resultant value is stored into the buffer memory.
The conversion speed is a delay time that occurs during sampling processing. It is independent of averaging processing. Example: When two channels are enabled for conversion (Conversion speed) = (sampling
period) x 3 = (20ms x 2 channels) x 3 = 120 ms.
40
RTD Input Module
RTD input modules offer an alternative to thermocouple input • Supports Pt100 and JPt100 devices
modules. These work with platinum resistance temperature device • Disconnection detection
(RTD) sensors. Note that RTD sensors are typically a narrower
temperature range than that offered by thermocouples. • Increase conversion speed by disabling unused channels
• Three data processing methods
Key Features:
• Offset/gain setting
• Out of range warning
• 4 channels
Required Manuals
SH(NA)080142 Thermocouple Input Module User’s Manual Covers Q64RD and GX Configurator-TI Supplied as PDF with GX Configurator-TI -
Thermocouple Input Module User’s Manual
IB(NA)0800156 Basic information on Q64RD Yes -
(Hardware)
Model Number Q64RD

Stocked Item S
Temperature Conversion 16-bit, signed binary data (-2000 to 8500: Value to the irst decimal place x10 times);
Output Value 32-bit, signed binary data (-200000 to 8500000: Value to the third decimal place x1000 times)
Usable Platinum Temperature-Measuring Resistors Pt100 (JIS C1604-1997, IEC 751 1983), JPt100 (JIS C1604-1981)
Measured Temperature Pt100 -200 to 850°C
Range JPt100 -180 to 600°C
Pt100 -20 to 120°C / -200 to 850°C
Range Changing
JPt100 -20 to 120°C / -180 to 600°C
Ambient Temperature
±0.25% (accuracy relative to full-scale value)
0 to 55°C
Accuracy (*1)
Ambient Temperature
±0.08% (accuracy relative to full-scale value)
25 ± 5°C
Resolution 0.025°C
Conversion Speed 40ms/channel (*2)
Number of Analog Input Points 4 channels/module
Temperature Detecting Output Current 1mA
Wire Break Detection Yes (each channel individually) (*3)
Applicable Crimping Terminals 1.25-3 R1.25-3 (Sleeved crimping terminals are not useable)
Weight (kg) 0.17
Notes:
1. The selection ranges and accuracies have the following relationships.
Ambient Temperature Pt100 and JPt100 : -20 to 120°C Pt100 : -200 to 850°C JPt100 : -180 to 600°C
0 to 55°C ± 0.3°C ± 2.125°C ± 1.5°C
25 ± 5°C ± 0.096°C ± 0.68°C ± 0.48°C
2. The conversion speed is a period from when a temperature is input and converted into a corresponding digital value until the value is stored into the buffer memory.
When two or more channels are used, the conversion speed is “40ms x number of conversion enabled channels”.
3. At wire break detection, the temperature conversion value right before wire break occurrence is held.

Isolated RTD Input Modules
Model Number Q64RD-G
Stocked Item S
Temperature Conversion 16-bit, signed binary data (-2000 to 8500: Value to the irst decimal place x10 times);
Output Value 32-bit, signed binary data (-200000 to 8500000: Value to the third decimal place x1000 times)
Usable Platinum Temperature-Measuring Resistors Pt100 (JIS C1604-1997,IEC 751 1983), JPt100(JIS C1604-1981), Ni100Ω (DIN43760 1987)
Measured Temperature Pt100 -200 to 850°C
Range JPt100 -180 to 600°C
Pt100 -20 to 120°C /0 to -200°C / -200 to 850°C
Range Changing
JPt100 -20 to 120°C /0 to -200°C / -180 to 600°C
Pt100/JPt100 (-20 to 120 °C) ±70ppm/°C (±0.0070%/°C)
Accuracy (*1) Pt100/JPt100 (0 to 200°C) ±65ppm/°C (±0.0065%/°C)
(Accuracy Relative to
Pt100/JPt100 (-200 to
Maximum Value of ±50ppm/°C (±0.0050%/ °C)
Selection Range) 850°C)
Pt100/JPt100 (-60 to 180°C) ±70ppm/ °C (±0.0070%/ °C)
Resolution 0.025°C
Conversion Speed 40ms/channel (*2)
Speciic Isolated Area Isolation Method Dielectric Withstand Voltage Isolation Resistance
Between Temperature-Measuring
Isolation Resistor Input and Programmable Photocoupler Isolation 10MΩ or more using
Controller Power Supply 1780VrmsAC/ 3 cycles
500VDC isolation
(Altitude 2000m)
Between Temperature-Measuring resistance tester
Transformer Isolation
Resistor Input Channels
Temperature Detecting Output Current 1mA

Applicable Crimping Terminals 1.25-3 R1.25-3 (Sleeved crimping terminals are not useable)
Weight (kg) 0.20
Notes:
0 to 55°C ± 0.3°C ± 2.125°C ± 1.5°C
25 ± 5°C ± 0.096°C ± 0.68°C ± 0.48°C
2. The conversion speed is a period from when a temperature is input and converted into a corresponding digital value until the value is stored into the buffer memory.
When two or more channels are used, the conversion speed is “40ms x number of conversion enabled channels”.
3. For output in the case of disconnection detection, select any of “Value immediately before disconnection”, “Up scale (maximum value of measured temperature range + 5% of measured temperature range)”,
“Down scale (minimum value of measured temperature range – 5% of measured temperature range)” or “Given value”. Refer to User Manual.
42
Isolated RTD Input Modules
Model Number Q68RD3-G
Stocked Item S
Temp. Conversion Value 16-bit, signed binary data (-2000 to 8500)
Output
Usable Platinum Temperature-Measuring Resistors Pt100 (JIS C1604-1997,IEC 751 1983), JPt100 (JIS C1604-1981), Ni100 (DIN43760 1987)
Pt100 -200 to 850°C
Measured Temperature
JPt100 -180 to 600°C
Range (*1)
Ni100 -60 to 180°C
Pt100 (-200 to 850°C) ±0.8°C (Ambient temperature: 25± 5°C), ±2.4°C (Ambient temperature: 0 to 55°C)
Pt100 (-20 to 120°C) ±0.3°C (Ambient temperature: 25± 5°C ), ±1.1°C (Ambient temperature: 0 to 55°C)
Pt100 (0 to 200°C) ±0.4°C (Ambient temperature: 25± 5°C ), ±1.2°C (Ambient temperature: 0 to 55°C)
Conversion Accuracy
JPt100 (-180 to 600°C) ±0.8°C (Ambient temperature: 25± 5°C ), ±2.4°C (Ambient temperature: 0 to 55°C)
(*1, *2)
JPt100 (-20 to 120°C) ±0.3°C (Ambient temperature: 25± 5°C), ±1.1°C (Ambient temperature: 0 to 55°C)
JPt100 (0 to 200°C) ±0.4°C (Ambient temperature: 25v 5°C ),± 1.2°C (Ambient temperature: 0 to 55°C)
Ni100 (-60 to 180°C) ±0.4°C (Ambient temperature: 25± 5°C), ±1.2°C (Ambient temperature: 0 to 55°C)
Resolution 0.1°C
Conversion Speed 320ms/8 channels (*3)
Number of Analog Input Points 8 channels
Dielectric Withstand Isolation

Speciic Isolated Area Isolation Method
Voltage Resistance
Between RTD Input and Programmable

Isolation 500VACrms for 1min. 500VDC
Controller Power Supply Transformer
10MΩ or
IsolatIon
more
Between RTD Input Channels 1000VACrms for 1min.

Connection Terminals 40-pin connector
Weight (kg) 0.20
Notes:
0 to 55°C ± 0.300°C ± 1.615°C ± 1.140°C
25 ± 5°C ± 0.090°C ± 0.533°C ± 0.390°C
Ambient Temperature Pt100 and JPt100 : -0 to 200°C Pt100 : -60 to 180°C

0 to 55°C ± 0.470°C ± 0.450°C
25 ± 5°C ± 0.145°C ± 0.135°C
2. Accuracy in ambient temperature and wire resistance when the offset/gain setting is set. Accuracy per 1-degree temperature change. Example: Accuracy for the case of changing
from 25 to 30°C 0.04% (Reference accuracy) + 0.0070%/°C (Temperature coefficient) x 5°C (Temperature difference) = 0.075%
3. The conversion speed is a period from when a temperature is input and converted into a corresponding digital value until the value is stored into the buffer memory. When two or
more channels are used, the conversion speed is “40ms x number of conversion enabled channels”.
4. For output in the case of disconnection detection, select any of “Value immediately before disconnection”, “Up scale (maximum value of measured temperature range + 5% of
measured temperature range)”, “Down scale (minimum value of measured temperature range -5% of measured temperature range)” or “Given value”. Refer to User Manual.

Temperature Control Modules
Temperature Controller modules are specialized modules that are Key Features:
intended for closed loop control of temperature in process control • Module set-up via menus in GX Works2;
applications. They accept either thermocouple or RTD input devices. no programming required
The modules incorporate programmable PID algorithms to allow
the modules to maintain set temperatures independently of the CPU • Auto-tuning PID capability simplifies configuration
programs. The modules also provide outputs that operate under • Four PID loops per module
control of the PID algorithms to maintain control of heaters. • Reset Feedback (RFB) limiter to suppress
overshooting at startup or an increase in set value
• Resolution of 0.1°C or 0.1°F
• Sensor disconnection detection on certain modules
Required Manuals
Covers Q64TCTTN, Q64TCTTBWN, Q64TCRTN, Supplied as PDF with
SH(NA)080989 Temperature Control Module User’s Manual -
Q64TCRTBWN and GX Configurator-TC GX Configurator-TC
Q64TCTT and Q64TCTTBW User’s Manual Basic information on Q64TCTT and Yes (Q64TCTT and
IB(NA)0800120 -
(Hardware) Q64TCTTBW Q64TCTTBW only)
Q64TCRT and Q64TCRTBW User’s Manual Basic information on Q64TCRT and Yes (Q64TCRT and
IB(NA)0800121 -
(Hardware) Q64TCRTBW Q64TCRTBW only)
Model Number Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN

Stocked Item S - - -
Certification UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE
Control Output Transistor output
Number of Temperature Input Points 4 channels/module
Usable Thermocouples/Platinum R, K, J, T, S, B, E, N, U, L, PLII, R, K, J, T, S, B, E, N, U, L, PLII,
Pt100, JPt100 Pt100, JPt100
Temperature-Measuring Resistors W5Re/W26Re W5Re/W26Re
Ambient Temp. 25°C ± 5°C Input range width x (±0.3%)
Accuracy
Ambient Temp. 0°C to 55°C Input range width x (±0.7%)
Ambient Temp. 0°C to 55°C Within ±1.0°C - Within ±1.0°C -
Cold Junction
Ambient Temp. -100°C
Temperature Within ±2.0°C - Within ±2.0°C -
to -150°C
Accuracy
Compensation Ambient Temp. -150°C
Within ±3.0°C - Within ±3.0°C -
to -200°C
Sampling Period 0.5s/4 channels (constant independently of the number of channels used)
Control Output Period 1 to 100s
Input Impedance 1MΩ
Input Filter 0 to 100s (0: Input filter off)
Sensor Compensation Value Setting -50.00 to 50.00%
Operation at Sensor Input Disconnection Upscale processing
Temperature Control System PID ON/OFF pulse or 2-position control
PID Constant Setting Setting can be made by auto tuning
PID Constant Proportional Band (P) 0.0 to 1000.0% (0: 2-position control)
Range Integral Time (I) 0 to 3600s
Derivative Time (D) 0 to 3600s (set 0 for PI control)
Dead Band Setting Range 0.1 to 10.0%
Output Signal ON/OFF pulse
Rated Load Voltage 10 to 30VDC
Max. Load Current 0.1A/point, 0.4A/common
Transistor
Max. Inrush Current 0.4A 10ms
Output
Leakage Current at OFF 0.1mA or less
Max. Voltage Drop at ON 1.0VDC (TYP) 0.1A 2.5VDC (MAX) 0.1A
Response Time OFF-ON : 2ms or less, ON-OFF : 2ms or less
The following current sensors of URD, Ltd.: CTL-12-S36-8 (0.0
Heater Current Sensor (*) -
Disconnection to 100.0A, CTL-6-P-H (0.00 to 20.00A)
Detection Input Accuracy - Input range width (±1.0%)
Specs. Number of Alert Delays - 3 to 255
32 points/2 slots (Default I/O assignment:
Number of Occupied I/O Points 16 points/slot (I/O assignment: 16 intelligent points)
16 free points + 16 intelligent points)
Connection Terminal 18-point terminal block Two 18-point terminal blocks
Applicable Crimping Terminal R1.25-3, 1.25-YS3, RAV1.25-3, V1.25-YS3A
Internal Current Consumption (A) 0.29 0.33
Weight (kg) 0.20 0.30
Note: Use only URD’s current sensors. In North America contact URD via www.urdamerica.com
44
High Speed Counter Modules QD62
A
B
DEC.
FUNC.
CH1 CH2
FUSE
These modules provide a capability for the CPUs to sense high • Up to 0.5MHz count frequency (depending on model)
frequency pulse trains as would be found in motion control and similar • 32 bit count range
applications. Typically these modules would be linked to encoders to
provide a closed loop of position sensing on a motion axis. • Single phase and quadrature input
• Preset count functions (linear, ring, sample, periodic)
Key Features: • Built-in outputs for direct actuation of external processes
QD62
• Module set-up via menus in GX Works2; • CW/CCW detection

no programming required
• External selection of count function capability
Required Manuals
Covers QD62, QD62E, QD62D and GX
SH(NA)080036 High Speed Counter Module User’s Manual Supplied as PDF with GX -
Configurator-CT
High Speed Counter Module User’s Manual
IB(NA)0800059 Basic information on QD62, QD62E, QD62D Yes -
(Hardware)
Model Number QD62-H01 QD62-H02

Stocked Item - -
Number of Occupied I/O point 16 I/O points
Phase 1-phase input, 2-phase input
Count Input
ON / OFF
Signal 5/12/24VDC, 2 to 5mA
Characteristics
Counting Speed
1-phase input 50kPPS; 2-phase input 50kPPS 1-phase input 10kPPS; 2-phase input 7kPPS
(Max) (*1)
Counting Range 32-bit signed binary (-2147483648 to 2147483647)
Type UP/DOWN Preset counter + Ring counter function
Counter 100 142
Minimum Count
Pulse Width
(Duty Ratio 50 50 (Unit:µs) 71 71 (Unit:µs)
50%)
(1-phase input) (2-phase input)
Rated Input
External Voltage
5/12/24VDC, 2 to 5mA
Input ON / OFF
Characteristics
Comparison
32-bit signed binary
Range
Setting value < Count value
Comparison
Setting value = Count value
System
Comparison Setting value > Count value
Output Number of
2 points/channel
Points
Output Rating Transistor (sink type)
External Supply
12/24VDC 0.5A/point; 2A/common
Power
5VDC Internal Current
0.30
Consumption (A)
Weight (kg) 0.11
Note:
1. Counting speed is affected by pulse rise and fall time. Possible counting speeds are shown in the following table. Note that a miscount may occur if the D62-H01 counts a pulse larger than t=50μs. In
this case, use the QD62-H02.

High Speed Counter Modules
Model Number QD62 QD62E QD62D QD63P6
Stocked Item S S S -
Compatible Encoder Types (*2) (*3) Open collector type/CMOS Open collector type/CMOS Line driver type Open collector type/CMOS
500k (200k to 500kPPS)
200k (100k to 200kPPS) 200k (100k to 200kPPS)
200k (100k to 200kPPS)
Counting Speed Switch Setting 100k (10k to 100kPPS) 100k (10k to 100kPPS)
100k (10k to 100kPPS)
10k (10kPPS max.) 10k (10kPPS max.)
10k (10kPPS max.)
Number of Channels 2 channels 6 channels
Phase 1 phase input, 2 phase input
Rated Input Voltage 5/12/24VDC (positive or negative common) EIA Standard RS-422-A
Count Input 6.4 to 11.5 mA at 5VDC
ON / OFF Characteristics 5/12/24V; 2 to 5mA Differential line driver level (*1)
Signal
Counting Range 32-bit designated binary (-2147483648 to 2147483647)
Type UP/DOWN preset counter + ring counter functions
Rated Input Voltage 5/12/24VDC (positive or negative common) 5/12/24V (*2) 5V
External Input
ON / OFF Characteristics 5/12/24V; 2 to 5mA 6.4 to 11.5mA
Comparison Range 32-bit designated binary (-2147483648 to 2147483647)
Comparison System Set value < count value, set value = count value, set value>count value
Number of Points 2 points/channel Internal I/O
Comparison
Output Transistor (Sink)
Transistor (Source) 12/24VDC Transistor (Sink)
Output Rating 12/24VDC 0.5A/point 2A/ -
0.1A/point 0.4A/common 12/24VDC 0.5A/point 2A/common
common
External Supply Power Voltage range: 10.2 to 30V, current consumption: 8mA (typ @24VDC) -
32 points (I/O assignment: 32
I/O Device Points Occupied 16 points (I/O assignment: 16 intelligent points)
intelligent points)
5VDC Internal Current Consumption (A) 0.30 0.33 0.38 0.59
Weight (kg) 0.11 0.12 0.15
Notes:
1. Japan Texas Instruments product model Am26LS31 or equivalent.
2. Insure encoder output voltages are compatible with the module’s input specifications.
3. TLL output type encoders cannot be used with the QD62, QD62E, and QD62D.
High Speed Counter Modules

QD62-H01 QD62E
Counting Speed Switch Setting 1 Phase Input 2-Phase Input Counting Speed Switch Setting 200kPPS 100kPPS 10kPPS
t=5µs or less 50PPS Rise/Fall time Both Phases 1 and 2
t=50µs 5kPPS t=1.25µs or less 200kPPS 100kPPS 10kPPS
t=500µs - t=2.5µs or less 100kPPS 100kPPS 10kPPS
t=25µs or less - 10kPPS 10kPPS
QD62-H02 t=500µs - - 500PPS
Counting Speed Switch Setting 1 Phase Input 2-Phase Input
QD62D
t=5µs or less 10kPPS 7kPPS
Counting Speed Switch Setting 500kPPS 200kPPS 100kPPS 10kPPS
t=50µs -
Rise/Fall time Both Phases 1 and 2
t=500µs 500PPS 250PPS
t=0.5µs or less 500kPPS 200kPPS 100kPPS 10kPPS
t=1.25µs or less 200kPPS 200kPPS 100kPPS 10kPPS
QD62
t=2.5µs or less - 100kPPS 100kPPS 10kPPS
Counting Speed Switch Setting 200kPPS 100kPPS 10kPPS t=25µs or less - - 10kPPS 10kPPS
Rise/Fall time Both Phases 1 and 2 t=500µs - - - 500PPS
t=1.25µs or less 200kPPS 100kPPS 10kPPS
Note: Inputting a waveform with a long rise/fall time may cause a false input. Use a waveform
t=2.5µs or less 100kPPS 100kPPS 10kPPS within the permissible rise/fall time.
t=500µs - - 500PPS QD63P6
Counting Speed Switch Setting 200kPPS 100kPPS 10kPPS
Rise/Fall time Both Phases 1 and 2
t=500µs - - 500PPS
46
Multi-Function Counter/Timer Module
QD65PD2
Model Number
Differential input DC Input
Stocked Item S
Number of Occupied I/O Points 32 points (I/O assignment: Intelligent, 32 points)
1 Multiple 10kpps/100kpps/200kpps/500kpps/ 1Mpps/2Mpps
Counting
2 Multiples 10kpps/100kpps/200kpps/500kpps/ 1Mpps/2Mpps/4Mpps
Speed Switch 10kpps/100kpps/200kpps
Setting (*1) 10kpps/100kpps/200kpps/500kpps/ 1Mpps/2Mpps/
4 Multiples
4Mpps/8Mpps
Phase 1-phase input (1 multiple/2 multiples), 2-phase input (1 multiple/2 multiples/4 multiples), CW/CCW
Count Input
EIA Standards RS-422-A, differential line driver level
Signal Signal Level (øA, øB) 5/12/24VDC, 7 to 10mA
(AM26LS31 [manufactured by Texas Instruments] or equivalent)
Counting Speed (Max)
8Mpps (4 multiples of 2 phases) 200kpps
(*2, *3)
Format Count, subtraction count; Linear counter format, ring counter format; Preset/replace function, latch counter function
1-phase input (1 multiple/2 multiples), CW/CCW 1-phase input (1 multiple/2 multiples), CW/CCW
0.5 s 5 s
0.25 s 0.25 s 2.5 s 2.5 s
(Minimum pulse width in (Minimum pulse width in

2 multiples of 1 phase: 0.25µs) 2 multiples of 1 phase: 2.5µs)
Counter 2-phase input (1 multiple/2 multiples/4 multiples) 2-phase input (1 multiple/2 multiples/4 multiples)
Minimum Count 0.5 s 20 s
Pulse Width (Duty

Ratio 50%)
0.25 s 0.25 s 10 s 10 s
0.125 s 5 s
(Minimum pulse width in (Minimum pulse width in

4 multiples of 2 phases: 0.125µs) 4 multiples of 2 phases: 5µs)
Comparison Range 32-bit signed binary

Comparison System Setting value < Count value; Setting value = Count value; Setting value > Count value
Comparison
In-Range Output Setting value (lower limit value) ≤ Count value ≤ Setting value (upper limit value)
Output
Not-In-Range Output Count value < Setting value (lower limit value), Setting value (upper limit value) < Count value
Interrupt Equipped with a coincidence detection interrupt function
EIA Standards RS-422-A, differential line driver level (AM26LS31
Phase Z 5/12/24VDC, 7 to 10mA: 2 points
[manufactured by Texas Instruments] or equivalent): 2 points
External Input Function 5/12/24VDC, 7 to 10mA: 2 points
Latch Counter 5/12/24VDC, 7 to 10mA: 2 points
General Input 24 VDC, High Speed: 7 to 10mA, 2 points, Low Speed: 3mA, 4 points
Coincidence Output
Transistor (sink type) output: 2 points 12/24VDC 0.1A/point, 0.8A/common
(High Speed)
External
Coincidence output
Output Transistor (sink type) output: 6 points 12/24VDC 0.1A/point, 0.8A/common
(Low Speed)
General Output Transistor (sink type) output: 8 points 12/24VDC 0.1A/point, 0.8A/common
Measurement Item Pulse width (ON width/OFF width)
Pulse Measurement
100ns
Measurement Resolution
Measurement Points 2 points/channel
Number of Output
8 points (max. 16 steps/point)
Points
Control Cycle 1ms
Cam Switch
Difference Between
Each Output Duration 100μs or less
in a Channel
Coincidence Output
DC and up to 200kHz
PWM Output (High Speed)
Frequency Coincidence Output
DC and up to 2kHz
Range (Low Speed)
Duty Ratio Any ratio (Can be set by 0.1μs)
5VDC Internal Current Consumption (A) 0.23
Applicable Wire Size 0.3mm² (22 AWG) (A6CON1 and A6CON4), 0.088mm² to 0.24mm² (24 to 28 AWG) (A6CON2)
Applicable Connector for External
A6CON1, A6CON2, A6CON4
Wiring (Sold Separately)
External Dimensions (H x W x D) mm 98 x 27.4 x 90
Weight (kg) 0.15
Notes:
1. Counting speed switch setting can be done using the switch setting.
2. Note that the count may be done incorrectly by inputting pulses whose phase difference is small between the phase A pulse and phase B pulse. To check the input waveform of the
phase A pulse and phase B pulse, or to check phase difference between the phase A pulse and phase B pulse, refer to User’s Manual
3. The counting speed is affected by the pulse rise/fall time. The number of pulses that can be counted depending on the counting speed is listed below. Note that the count may be
done incorrectly by counting pulses with long rise/fall time.

Interrupt Modules
Although Q Series I/O modules are designed to offer very Key Features: QI60
fast responses to input signals, some applications need a

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 A B CDE F
• 16 input points
shorter response than these modules can offer. In these 0
0
• Response time adjustable over the range 0.05ms to 1ms

1
1
cases, use the QI60 interrupt module. This offers response

2
3 2
4
3
5
4
times as rapid as 50 microseconds for very fast event • 24VDC positive common connection
6
7
5
8 6
7
capture. For more sophisticated applications, the QD60P8-G

9
A 8
Required Manuals:
B
9
C
A
offers isolated input capability together with averaging,

D
E
B
The QI60 is covered in the Q Series CPU manuals

F C
- +
COM D
scaling and sampling functions.

NC
E
24VDC F
6mA
Model Number QI60

Stocked Item S
Number of Input Points 16 points
Rated Input Voltage 24VDC (+20/-15%, ripple ratio within 5%)
Rated Input Current Approx. 6mA
ON Voltage/ON Current 19V or higher/3mA or higher
OFF Voltage/OFF Current 11V or lower/1.7mA or lower
Set Value (*) 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.6 1
Typ 0.05 0.15 0.30 0.55 1.05
Response Time ON-OFF
Max 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.60 1.20
(ms)
Typ 0.15 0.20 0.35 0.60 1.10
OFF-ON
Max 0.20 0.30 0.50 0.70 1.30
Common Terminal Arrangement 16 points/common (common terminal: TB17)
External Connections 18-point terminal block (M3 x 6 screws)
Applicable Crimping Terminal R1.25-3 (sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used)
5VDC Internal Current Consumption (mA) 60 (TYP. all points ON)
Weight (kg) 0.20
Note: Set via software.
Isolated Interrupt Module

Manuals
Channel Isolated Pulse Input Module
SH(NA)080313 Covers QD60P8-G Supplied as a PDF with GX Configurator-CT -
(QD60P8-G) User’s Manual
Channel Isolated Pulse Input Module User’s
IB(NA)0800229 Basic information on QD60P8-G Yes -
Manual (Hardware) QD60P8-G
Model Number QD60P8-G

Stocked Item S
Certiication CE
Counting Speed Switch Settings 30kpps 10kpps 1kpps 100pps 50pps 10pps 1pps 0.1pps
Count Input Phase 1-phase input
Signal Signal Level 5VDC / 12 to 24VDC
Counting Speed (Max.) 30kpps 10kpps 1kpps 100pps 50pps 10pps 1pps 0.1pps
Sampling pulse number: 16-bits binary values (0 to 32767); Accumulating count value: 32-bits binary values (0 to 99999999)
Count Range
Input pulse value: 32-bits binary values (0 to 2147483647)
Count Type Linear counter method, Ring counter method
Counter
Minimum Count Pulse

Width (Duty Ratio 50%)

Weight (kg) 0.17
* Counting speed is affected by pulse rise and fall time. Note that if a pulse that has a large rise and/or fall time is counted, a miscount may occur.
48
Positioning Modules
One of Q Series’ strengths is the ability to integrate positioning directly onto your system. If a Q Series motion CPU is not
required, the following modules provide a range of alternative positioning control capabilities in a range of formats.
Key Features: • 4 axis linear interpolation
• Module set-up via menus in GX Works2; • Circular interpolation
no programming required • Variety of control schemes (point to point, fixed feed, speed,
• One, two and four axis versions available speed/position and position/speed)
• Open collector, differential driver and SSCNET versions available
• 4MHz output capability
Required Manuals
Covers GX Configurator-QP for all Q Series
SH(NA)080172 GX Configurator-QP Version 2 Operating Manual Supplied as PDF with GX Configurator-QP -
motion control modules (P/D/M)
IB(NA)0800063 QD75P/D1N, 2N and 4N Users’ Manual (Hardware) Basic information on QD75P/D1, 2 and 4 Supplied with QD75P/D1, 2 and 4 -
SH(NA)080058 QD75PN/QD75DN Positioning Module User’s Manual Covers QD75P/D 1, 2 and 4 No (purchase separately) -
Positioning Control Modules QD75D1N QD75D2N QD75D4N

RUN AX1 RUN AX1 RUN AX1
AX2 AX2
AX3
ERR ERR ERR AX4
Model Number QD75P1N (*1) • QD75D1N QD75P2N (*1) • QD75D2N QD75P4N (*1) • QD75D4N AX1
AX1
AX2
AX3
AX4
AX1
AX2
Stocked Item - S S
Number of Control Axes 1 axis 2 axes 4 axes
2-, 3-, or 4-axis linear
2-axis linear interpolation;
Interpolation Function No interpolation 2-axis circular
2-axis circular interpolation
interpolation
Control Unit mm, inch, degree, pulse QD75P1N QD75P2N QD75P4N
RUN AX1
Parameters, positioning data, and block start data can be saved on flash ROM
RUN AX1 RUN AX1
AX2 AX2
AX3
ERR AX4
Backup
ERR ERR
(battery-less backup). AX1

AX1
AX2
AX3
AX4
AX1
AX2
PTP control: Incremental system/absolute system

Speed-position switching control: Incremental system/absolute system (*2)
Positioning System
Position-speed switching control: Incremental system
Path control: Incremental system/absolute system
In absolute system
• -214748364.8 to 214748364.7( m)
• -21474.83648 to 21474.83647(inch)
• 0 to 359.99999(degree)
• -2147483648 to 2147483647(pulse)
In incremental system
• -214748364.8 to 214748364.7( m)
• -21474.83648 to 21474.83647(inch)
Position Range • -21474.83648 to 21474.83647(degree)
Positioning • -2147483648 to 2147483647(pulse)
In speed-position switching control (INC mode) / position-speed switching control
• 0 to 214748364.7( m)
• 0 to 21474.83647(inch)
• 0 to 21474.83647(degree)
• 0 to 2147483647(pulse)
In speed-position switching control (ABS mode)
• 0 to 359.99999(degree)
0.01 to 40000000.00(mm/min); 0.001 to 2000000.000(inch/min);
Speed Command
0.001 to 2000000.000(degree/min); 1 to 4000000(pulse/s)
Acceleration/Deceleration Process Automatic trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration
Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1 to 8388608 (ms) Four patterns can be set for each of acceleration time and deceleration time
Sudden Stop Deceleration Time 1 to 8388608 (ms)
Protective Degree IP2X
External Wiring Connection System 40-pin connector
Applicable Wire Size 0.3mm2 (AWG#22) or less (for A6CON1, A6CON4), AWG #24 (for A6CON2)
Applicable Connector for External Devices A6CON1, A6CON2, A6CON4 (Sold separately)
Max. Output Pulse QD75D1N, QD75D2N, QD75D4N: 4Mpps
Max. Connection Distance Between Servos QD75P1, QD75P2, QD75P4: 2m; QD75D1, QD75D2,QD75D4: 10m
Online Module Change Disabled
I/O Device Points Occupied 32 points/slot (I/O assignment: intelligent)
QD75P1N: 0.29A QD75P2N: 0.30A QD75P4N: 0.36A
5VDC Internal Current Consumption
QD75D1N: 0.43A QD75D2N: 0.45A QD75D4N: 0.66A
Weight (kg) 0.15 0.15 0.16
Notes:
1. QD75P represents the open-collector output system, and QD75D represents the differential driver output system.
2. In speed-position switching control (ABS mode), the control unit available is “degree” only.

Positioning Module with Built-in Counter Function

Model Number QD72P3C3
Stocked Item -
Number of Control Axes 3 axes
Interpolation Function No (Artificial linear interpolation by concurrent start is available.)
Control Unit Pulse
Backup No
Positioning System PTP (Point to Point) control, speed control
Position Range -1073741824 to 1073741823 pulses
Positioning Speed Command 1 to 100000 pulses/s (*1)
Acceleration/Deceleration Process Trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration
Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1 to 5000 ms
Applicable Connector for External Devices A6CON1, A6CON2, A6CON4 (Sold separately)
Max. Output Pulse 100 kpps
Weight (kg) 0.16
Note:
1. When the “speed limit value” setting is 100000 (pulse/s) (25-pulse units), set the “speed command” value in multiples of 25. If other values are set, the value will be change to a multiple of 25.
Positioning Module with Deviation Counter and D/A Counter

Model Number Q64DAH
Stocked Item -
Number of Occupied I/O Points 48 points (I/O assignment: empty 16 points and intelligent 32 points)
Number of Control Axes 1 axis
Capacity 1 data
Positioning Data
Setting Method Sequence program
Mode Position control mode; Speed-position control switch mode
Position control mode: Selectable from absolute system or incremental system; Speed-position control switch mode:
System
Incremental system
Position Command -2147483648 to 2147483647 (pulse) (signed 32-bit binary)
Speed Command 1 to 4000000 (pulse/s)
Positioning Acceleration Automatic trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration
Automatic Acceleration/
Acceleration time: 2 to 9999 (ms); Deceleration time: 2 to 9999 (ms)
Deceleration Time
In-Position Range 1 to 20479 (pulse)
Backlash Compensation None
Error Correction Function None
Speed Command Output 0 to ±10VDC (Adjustable to set in the range of ±5 to ±10VDC)
Positioning Pulse Frequency Open collector: 200kpulse/s; TTL: 200kpulse/s; Differential output: 1Mpulse/s
Feedback Pulse Connectable Encoder Type Open collector, TTL, or differential output
Input Multiplication Setting The number of input feedback pulses can be multiplied by 4, 2, 1, or 1/2
With OPR address change; An OPR method and OPR direction can be set through the intelligent function module
OPR Control
switch setting
JOG Operation JOG operation can be started by inputting a JOG start signal
M Function None
External Supply Voltage/Current Terminal Block No external power supply
External Dimensions (H x W x D) mm 98 x 55.2 x 90
Weight (kg) 0.20
Starting Time Absolute system: 1.2ms (same for two-phase trapezoidal positioning); Incremental system: 1.2ms (same for two-phase
(From a Start Request to Analog Output Start) trapezoidal positioning); JOG operation: 1.2ms; OPR (near-point dog method): 1.2ms; OPR (count method): 1.2ms
50
Basic Positioning Control Modules QD70P4 QD70P8
For applications not requiring the level of sophistication offered by our QD75P/D/M modules, consider the
RUN AX1 RUN AX5 AX1
AX2 AX6 AX2
AX3 AX7 AX3
ERR. AX4 ERR. AX8 AX4
QD70P4 and P8 modules. These modules offer four and eight axis control from a single module. All basic
QD70P8
CON1 CON2 CON1
motion control capabilities for non-coordinated axes are offered.

Key Features:
• Multiple axes controlled by a single module to minimize slot occupancy on the rack QD70P4
• Multiple modules may be installed on a Q Series rack, giving control over dozens of axes
• Start 8 axes simultaneously, with very short (0.1ms) delay
• Variety of axis control schemes (point to point, speed/position switching control)
Required Manuals
SH(NA)080171 QD70 Positioning Module User’s Manual Covers QD70P4, QD70P8 and GX Configurator-PT Included with GX Configurator PT as PDF -
IB(NA)0800169 QD70P User’s Manual (Hardware) Basic information on QD70P4 and QD70P8 Supplied with QD70P4 and P8 -
Model Number QD70P4 QD70P8

Stocked Item S S
Certification UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE
Number of Control Axes 4 axes 8 axes
Interpolation Function No
Control Method PTP (Point To Point) control, path control (linear only), speed-position switching control
Control Unit Pulse
Data Backup No
PTP control : Incremental system/absolute system
Positioning Control Method Speed-position switching control : Incremental system
Path control : Incremental system/absolute system
Absolute system: -2147483648 to 2147483647 (pulse)
Positioning Positioning Control Range Incremental system: -2147483648 to 2147483647 (pulse)
Control Speed-position switching control: 0 to 2147483647 (pulse)
Speed Command 0 to 200000 (pulse/s)
Acceleration/Deceleration Processing Trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration
Accel./Decel. Time 0 to 32767 (ms)
External Device Connection Connector A6CON1, A6CON2 (option), A6CON4
Pulse Output Method Open collector output
Max. Output Pulse 200kpps
Max. Connection Distance Between QD70 and Drive Unit 2m (6.56 feet)
External 24V Current Consumption (24VDC) 0.065A 0.12A
I/O Device Points Occupied 32 points (I/O assignment: Intelligent function module 32 points)
Weight (kg) 0.15 0.17
Q Series / V680 Series RFID Interface Module

The RFID interface module is mounted on a Q Series platform enabling communication with Omron V680 Series RFID systems.
Model Number EQ-V680D1 EQ-V680D2
Stocked Item - -
V680-HA63A+V680-HSoo; V680-HA63B+V680-HSoo
Manufactured by Omron Corporation Connectable Antenna V680-HA63A+V680-HSoo; V680-HA63B+V680-HSoo
V680-H01-V2
No. of Connectable Antennas 1 antenna 2 antennas
No. of Occupied IO Points 32 points (IO assignments: 32 intelligent module points)
Data Transfer Volume 2,048 bytes, maximum
Internal Power Supply Current Consumption 5VDC
0.42A 0.52A
(Supplied From Inside the Programmable Controller)
External Power Supply Current Consumption 24VDC
0.25A 0.37A
(20.4 to 26.4VDC)
External Power Supply Connection Terminal 2-point terminal block
Wire Standard Heat Resistant PVC Insulated Wire; JIS C 3316 HKIV,JIS C 3317 HIV, UL 758 Style No.1007or1015
Temperature Rating Minimum 75°C
Wiring
Voltage Rating 300V to 600V
Recommendations
Conductors Wire Size AWG18 (0.75mm², 0.9mm²)
Conductors Metal Stranded copper
Compatible Crimp Contact Lugs 1.25-3, R1.25-3
Outer Dimensions (H x W x D) mm 98 x 27.4 x 106.5
Weight (kg) 0.2 0.2

Serial Communication Modules
Serial communication modules provide a way to link the Q Series system to third party systems that offer
standard serial RS-232 or RS-422/485 communication ports. Examples of typical connections include
modems, scales, bar code readers, printers and marquee displays. The modules can be regarded as
communication co-processors, as they support a variety of dedicated communication functions that are
accessed via special CPU instructions. These functions reduce the amount of specialist communications
programming required.
Key Features:
• Module set up via software without programming
• Many pre-made protocols built-in to the configuration software
• Protocol function block allows complex communication protocols to be configured without any
programming. Library of preset function blocks available to communicate with third party devices
• Debugging function allows communication signals to be monitored and packet data to be examined
• 230,400 bps communication speed; run both serial ports on the module at 115,200 bps simultaneously
• Use as a duplicate CPU programming port (offers full CPU port capabilities, including program upload/
download, device monitoring, etc)
• Use preset MC (MELSEC Communications) or user defined protocols
• Two communications ports per module, each operable independently
• Remote system management and maintenance via third party modems
• Multi-drop communications between multiple systems via RS-422/485 ports
• Available with two RS-232 ports, or RS-232 + RS-422/485 ports
Note: The Q Series Ethernet communication modules (QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2 and QJ71E71-100) also use the MC protocol.
Required Manuals
Serial Communication Module User’s Manual Basic information on QJ71C24N and

IB(NA)0800008 Supplied with QJ71C24N and QJ71C24N-R2 -
(Hardware) QJ71C24N-R2 modules
Covers basic programming information
Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module
SH(NA)080006 for QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2 and GX Included with GX Configurator-SC as PDF -
User’s Manual (Basic)
Configurator-SC
Covers using the QJ71C24N and
Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module
SH(NA)080007 QJ71C24N-R2 module in various practical No (purchase separately) -
User’s Manual (Application)
applications
Reference guide to the MC Protocol used by
Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol
SH(NA)080008 the QJ71C24N and QJ71C24N-R2 (and also No (purchase separately) -
Reference Manual
used by Q Series Ethernet modules)
Guide to using the GX Configurator-SC utility
SH(NA)080393 GX Configurator-SC Version 2 Operating Manual Included with GX Configurator-SC -
software
52
Model Number QJ71C24N QJ71C24N-R2 QJ71C24N-R4
Stocked Item S S S
Certification UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE
RS-422/485-compliance
CH1 RS-232-compliance (D-sub 9P) RS-232-compliance (D-sub 9P)
(2-piece plug-in connector socket block)
Interface
RS-422/485-compliance RS-422/485-compliance
CH2 RS-232-compliance (D-sub 9P)
(2-piece terminal block) (2-piece plug-in connector socket block)
Communication Method Full duplex communication/half duplex communication
Synchronization Method Start-up synchronization method
50 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600

14400 19200 28800 38400 57600 115200 230400
Transmission Speed
• Transmission speed 230400 bps is available for only CH1. (Not available for CH2)
• Total transmission speed of two interfaces is available up to 230400 bps
• Transmission speed of up to 115200 bps for each interface is available when two interface are used simultaneously
Start Bit 1
Data Bit 7/8
Data Format
Parity Bit 1 (vertical parity) or none
Stop Bit 1/2
MC Protocol Processes one request during installed PLC CPU END processing. Number of scans that must be processed/number of link scans
Communication depends on the contents of the request
Access Cycle Nonprocedural Protocol

Communication
Sends each time a send request is issued. Can receive at any time.
Bidirectional Protocol
Communication
Parity Check For all protocol, select odd/even by the parameter when there is an error
Error Detection
Sum Check Code Select by the parameter for MC protocol/Bidirectional protocol. Select by the user frame for non-procedure protocol.
RS-232 RS-422/485
DTR/DSR (ER/DR) Control • -
RS/CS Control • -
Transmission Control CD Signal Control • -
DC1/DC3 (Xon/Xoff) Control, DC2/
DC4 Control • •
• DTR/DSR signal control and DC code control are selected by the user
RS-232 1:1 1:1 -
Line Configuration
RS-422/485 1:1, 1:n, n:1, m:n - 1:1, 1:n, n:1, m:n
Max. Transmission RS-232 15m (49.2 ft.) 15m (49.2 ft.) -
Distance (Overall
Distance) RS-422/485 1200m (4592.4 ft.) (overall distance) - 1200m (4592.4 ft.) (overall distance)
I/O Device Points Occupied 32 points per slot (I/O assignment: Intelli: 32 points)
Applicable Connector for External Wiring 9 pin D-sub (male) screw type -
5VDC Internal Current Consumption 0.31A 0.26A 0.39A
Weight kg (lbs) 0.20 (0.44)
Compatible Modem Specifications

Telephone Line Public Line/Private Line/Cellular Phone ISDN
Connection Line Analog 2-wire type ISDN line
Initialization Hayes AT command-compatible product Hayes AT command-compatible product
Communication Standard V.34/V.32bis/V.32/V.22bis/V.22/V.21V.fc, 212A/103
Error Correction Class 4, class 10 compatible, V.42 compatible V.110 (B-channel circuit exchange, D-channel packet switching)
Data compression Class 5 compatible, V.42bis compatible
Others Should be able to exercise flow control (RS/CS control) and have independent control of DR (DSR) signal.
* When using a cellular phone, it is recommended to use a modem whose error correction function supports MNP class 10.
Note that communications may not be made depending on the line status.

Intelligent Communication Modules
The modules offer a higher-level alternative to the QJ71C24 and QJ71C24-R2. The QD51 and QD51-R24 can
run their own BASIC programs, allowing complex communications based tasks to be handled separately of
the other CPUs on a Q Series system.
Key Features:
• Runs AD51H-BASIC
• Can run two tasks simultaneously
• Can use external hard disks of connected peripherals
• Range of communications options supported
Required Manuals
QD51/QD51-R24 Corresponding Intelligent Communications Supplied with QD51 and
IB(NA)0800130 Basic information on QD51 and QD51-R24 -
Module User’s Manual (Hardware) QD51-R24
Q Corresponding Intelligent Communication Module
SH(NA)080089 Covers the QD51 and QD51-R24 No (purchase separately) -
User’s Manual
SH(NA)080090 AD51H-BASIC Programming Manual (Command Manual) Covers AD51H-BASIC commands No (purchase separately) -
AD51H-BASIC Programming Manual Covers debugging, multi-tasking and
(Program Manual, Compilation Manual) compilation features of AD51H-BASIC
Model Number QD51 QD51-R24

Stocked Item - -
Programming Language AD51H-BASIC
Program memory: 64 kB/2 tasks (Capacity of task 1 + capacity of task 2 ≤ 64 kB); Common memory: 8 kB;
Internal Memory
Buffer memory: 6 kB; Expanded register: 1024 points (2 kB); Expanded relay: 1024 points
I/O to / From PLC CPU Input 26 points, output 23 points
Memory Protection Yes, (Flash ROM write protectable)
Communication Port QD51 : RS-232 2ch; QD51-R24 : RS-232 1ch, RS-422/485 1ch
Communication System Full-duplex
Synchronization System Synchronous
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400;
Transmission Speed (bps)
Usable when the total transmission speed of two channels is within 38400bps.
Data Format Start bit: 1; Data bit: 7 or 8; Parity bit: Even, odd, none; Stop bit: 1 or 2
DTR/DSR (ER/DR) control: Available for RS-232 only; RS/CS control: Available for RS-232 only;
Transmission Control
CD signal control: No; DC1/DC3 (Xon/Xoff) control: Yes; DC2/DC4 control: No
Clock Function No
Power Failure Compensation No
Storage of User Program onto ROM No (only program area data is stored onto flash ROM)
Console IBM PC/AT personal computer
Multi-Task Debugging Possible (using debugger)
Line Configuration RS-232:1:1; RS-422/485:1:1, 1:n, n:1, m:n
Transmission Distance RS-232: Max. 15m (49.18 ft.); RS-422/485: Max. 1200m (3934.43 ft.) (overall distance)
I/O Device Points Occupied 32 points (1 slot occupied) (I/O assignment: Intelligent)
Internal Current Consumption (5VDC) (A) 0.26 0.31
Weight (kg) 0.2
54
Overview of Networks Enterprise Level PC - Controller
When choosing a network solution a number of criteria may come into play.
Topology, bus speed, communications distance, redundancy, data transfer
capabilities, the number of nodes the network can support, deterministic PC - Controller
Control Level
capabilities, cost, ease-of-use, third party support to name just a few.
Controller - Controller
But most importantly, will it work well within your specific application?
When developing our family of network products, we’ve taken all these Device Level
Controller - Device
(HMI, I/O, VFD, Servo, etc.)
factors into consideration - assuring users, all the necessary features and
capabilities are packaged into the network product they have selected.
Sensor Sensors,
From top to bottom in the network hierarchy, from open architecture

Valves,
Level etc.
protocols to seamless engineered systems, from sensor to enterprise level,

we offer a host of powerful network solutions for users to choose from. While bus speed is a critical factor in measuring performance,
The one common denominator with all Mitsubishi Electric network products there are several other reasons why Mitsubishi Electric network
is unmatched performance. In relative performance data comparisons, solutions excel over others. Easy connectivity, seamless
all our network solutions meet, exceed or dramatically outperform most integration, synergistic performance characteristics of a
competitive networks available on the global market today. Mitsubishi Electric controlled network and above all else -
maximum levels of uptime without sacrificing performance or
productivity. Whether you have an entire factory floor or just an
individual machine to network, you’ll find Mitsubishi Electric’s
expansive range of network options to be the superior choice.
Enterprise Level
Specifications Ethernet (100base-TX) Ethernet (10base-T) Ethernet (10base-5) Ethernet (10base-2)
Network Level Enterprise Enterprise Enterprise Enterprise
Architecture Star (via hub) Star (via hub) Bus Bus
Communications Media Cat. 5 (UTP/STP) Cat. 5 (UTP/STP) via AUI transceiver Coax
Transmission Speed 100Mbit/s 10Mbit/s 10Mbit/s 10Mbit/s
Two levels of cascade connections Four levels of cascade connections
Number of Stations 100/segment 30/segment
via hubs via hubs
Maximum Distance (m) 100/segment 100/segment 500/segment 185/segment
Remote I/O N/A N/A N/A N/A
Control Level
Specifications CC-Link IE Control CC-Link IE Field MELSECNET/H
Network Level Control Control and Device Control
Architecture Loop Bus/Loop/Star (via hub) Bus/Loop
Communications Media Fiber Cat. 5 Fiber/Coax
10/25Mbit/s (depends on
Transmission Speed 1Gbit/s 1 Gbit/s
module used)
Number of Stations 120 120 64 (fiber)/32 (coax)
Maximum Distance (m) 66,000 12,000 30,000 (fiber)/500 (coax)
Remote I/O No Yes Yes
Note: MELSECNET/H is backwards compatible with MELSECNET/10. CC-Link IE was formerly known as MELSECNET/G.
Device Level
Specifications CC-Link DeviceNet PROFIBUS-DP MODBUS/TCP MODBUS/RTU
Network Level Device Device Device Device Device
Architecture Bus Bus Bus Star (via hub) Bus
Communications Media STP Thick/thin trunkline STP Cat. 5 (UTP/STP) STP
12Mbit/s (depends on
Transmission Speed 10Mbit/s (all devices) 0.5Mbit/s 100Mbit/s 115kbps
devices used)
Number of Stations 64 64 60 64 64
1200/segment (extend up to
Maximum Distance (m) 500 1200 100 1200
13.2km with repeaters)
Remote I/O Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Sensor Level
Specifications CC-Link/LT AS-i
Network Level Sensor Sensor
Architecture Bus Star, bus or tree
Communications Media Dedicated mechanically keyed cable
Transmission Speed 2.5Mbit/s 172kbit/s
Number of Stations 64 31
Maximum Distance (m) 700 100
Remote I/O Yes Yes

Ethernet Enterprise Level Network Modules QJ71E71-100
RUN
INIT.
OPEN
SD
ERR.
COM.ERR.
100M
RD
QJ71E71-B5
RUN
INIT.
OPEN
SD
ERR.
COM.ERR.
RD
QJ71E71-B2
RUN
INIT.
OPEN
SD
ERR.
COM.ERR.
RD
Typically Ethernet is used to link shop-floor systems to higher level IT systems for SCADA
(Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition) monitoring, maintenance, and similar functions. The
Q Series Ethernet modules provide a method of linking automation systems to existing standard LAN 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
10BASE 5
infrastructures throughout a plant.

12V
+ 12
12G
Key Features:
EXT. POWER
QJ71E71-100 QJ71E71-B5 QJ71E71-B2
• GX Works2 provides complete support for configuration and maintenance of Ethernet connections
including programming, monitoring, email and FTP capabilities for remote system monitoring and
maintenance via Ethernet connection
• Compatible with existing LANs via range of physical connection formats (10base-T, 100base-TX,
10base-5, 10base-2)
• Peer-to-peer communication
• Multiple ports
• Acts as a gateway into lower level networks for access to individual stations on large networks
• “Keep Alive” function allows the status of external equipment to be monitored via TCP/IP
10BASE5,10BASE2 10BASE-T,100BASE-TX
Segment length
Node Transceiver
Hub
Terminator
Segment length
Segment length
Hub
QJ71E71
Repeater
Node Node
Max. inter-node
distance
Node Node
10BASE5:QJ71E71-B5 10BASE2:QJ71E71-B2
N-type terminator Coaxial cable for 10BASE5 Transceiver RG58A/U coaxial cable
Terminator or RG58C/U coaxial cable T-Type connector
AUI cable
External device External device
E
E 7
1
7
1
DC
Power
supply
10BASE-T:QJ71E71-100 100BASE-TX:QJ71E71-100
Hub Hub
Twisted pair cable Up to 4 levels are allowed Twisted pair cable Up to 2 levels are allowed
for cascade connection. for cascade connection.
External device
External device
E E
7 7
1 1
Required Manuals
Ethernet Interface Module User’s Manual
IB(NA)0800009 (Hardware) QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71, Basic information on QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71 and QJ71E71-B2 Yes -
QJ71E71-B2
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module
SH(NA)080009 Covers programming and using the Ethernet modules No (purchase separately) -
User’s Manual (Basic)
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module Covers higher level functions, such as email, FTP, and integra-
User’s Manual (Application) tion with other networks
Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Reference guide to the MC Protocol used by the Q Series
Protocol Reference Manual Ethernet modules (Also used by the QJ71C24 and QJ71C24-R2 )
Manual (Web Function) Q Corresponding
SH(NA)080180 Guide to using the Ethernet modules with an Internet connection No (purchase separately) -
Ethernet Interface Module User’s
56
Ethernet Enterprise Level Network Modules
Model Number QJ71E71-100 QJ71E71-B5 QJ71E71-B2
Stocked Item S - -
Ethernet Transition Speed 100BASE-TX 10BASE-T 10BASE5 10BASE2
Data Transmission Speed 100Mbps 10Mbps
Communication Mode Full-duplex/Half-duplex Half-duplex
Maximum Node-to-Node Distance - 2500 m (8202.10 ft.) 925 m (3034.77 ft.)
Transmission
Specifications Maximum Segment Length 100 m (328.08 ft.) (*1) 500 m (1640.42 ft.) 185 m (606.96 ft.)
Cascade connection Cascade connection
Maximum Number of Modes/Connection 100 units/ segment 30 units/ segment
Maximum 2 stages Maximum 4 stages
Interval Between the Minimum Nodes - 2.5 m (8.20 ft.) 0.5 m (1.64 ft.)
No. of Simultaneously Open
16 connections (Connections usable by the sequence program)
Connections Allowed
Fixed Buffer 1 k words x 16
Random Access Buffer 6 k words x 1
Transmission Data
Storage Memory Attached File 6 k words x 1
Binary, ASCII or CSV can be selected.
E-mail Attached File Format
File name: XXXX.bin (binary), XXXX.asc (ASCII), XXXX.csv (CSV) (CSV: Comma Separated Value)
Main Text 960 words x 1
5VDC Internal Current Consumption 0.50A 0.50A 0.60A (*3)
12VDC External Power Supply Capacity (Transceiver) - (*2) -
Weight kg (lb) 0.11 (0.24) 0.12 (0.26) 0.13 (0.29) (*3)
Notes:
1. Length between the Hub and node.
2. It is necessary to apply a transceiver, or a device that meets AUI cable specifications.
3. The product with first 5 digits of serial number “05049” or earlier is different as follows:
• 5VDC internal current consumption: 0.70A
• Weight: 0.14kg (0.31lb.)

CC-Link IE Control Level Master/Local Network Modules
CC-Link IE is an industry leading alternative for open control level • Variety of Reliability, Availability and Serviceability
networking. Originally introduced as MELSECNET/G, it introduces (RAS) functions to allow network operation to continue
an unprecedented 1Gbit/s Ethernet physical layer fiber topology despite broken media, power failures, etc
for system performance surpassing any other network technology. • Extensive diagnostic functions and tools to monitor
MELSECNET/G has been turned over to the open administration network operation and quickly troubleshoot faults
of the CC-Link Partner Association (CLPA), and is now known as
CC-Link IE. Mitsubishi offers full support for CC-Link IE via the • Up to 120 stations per network
Q Series Automation Platform and the iQ Platform system. • Up 550 meters between stations
Key Features: • Connect up to 239 networks
• Practically unlimited bandwidth (1Gbit/s) • Program free parameter based configuration for
cyclic communications
• Noise immune, fault tolerant dual loop optical fiber media
• Uses industry standard 1000base-SX optical fiber and LC type
connectors
Required Manuals
Basic information on QJ71GP21-SX and QJ71GP21S-
IB(NA)0800364E CC-Link IE Network Module User’s Manual (Hardware) Yes -
SX
CC-Link IE Network System Reference Manual No (purchase
SH(NA)080668 Reference guide to the CC-Link IE network technology -
(Controller Network) separately)
Note: Many of these manuals are available by free download from our website, www.meau.com.
CC-Link IE Optical Fiber Cordsets

QG-_M-B-LL CC-Link IE cordset, where _ represents length 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 or 50 meters S
Belden Belden part numbers. Ordered directly through Belden. -
Model Number QJ71GP21-SX QJ71GP21S-SX

Stocked Item S -
Network Common Memory 256 kB
Transient Transmission Capacity 960 bytes
Communication Speed 1GB
When Universal model QCPU is used for control station: 120; (Control station: 1, Normal station: 119); When High Performance model
Number of Stations Per Network
QCPU is used for control station: 64 (Control station: 1, Normal station: 63)
Connection Cable Optical fiber cable (Multi-mode fiber)

Overall Cable Distance 66000m (When 120 stations are connected)
Max. Station-To-Station Distance 550m
Max. Number of Networks 239
Max. Number of Groups 32
48 (I/O assignment: Empty first half: 16 points,
I/O Device Points Occupied 32
Latter half: 32 points for intelli.)
Voltage 20.4V to 31.2VDC
Current 0.28A
External Power Terminal Screw Size M3
Applicable Solderless No external power supply function
Supply R1.25-3
Terminal
Allowable Momentary
1ms (Level PS1)
Power Failure Time
Weight (kg) 0.18 0.28
Base Unit Slots Occupied 1 2
58
iQ Platform CC-Link IE Field Control and Remote I/O Network Module
CC-Link IE Field brings 1 Gigabit speed for cyclic, acyclic and transient data transmission to RJ45 and Cat 5e cabling
infrastructure. Create mixtures of line and star topology, and maintain control over up to 120 controller or remote I/O
stations simultaneously on the same network.
Model Number QJ71GF11-T2 (*1)
Stocked Item S
Network Common Memory 32 kB
Communication Speed 1Gbps
Connection Cable An Ethernet cable that meets the 1000BASE-T standard (Category 5e or higher, shielded RJ45)
Maximum Station-to-
100m max. (Compliant with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (Category 5e))
Station Distance
Ethernet Line topology: 12000m (when connected to 1 master station and 120 slave stations)
Total Distance
Star topology: Depends on the system configuration
Number of Cascade
Up to 20
Connections
Transmission Path Line topology, star topology, ring topology and mix of both line topology and star topology is possible
Number of Connected Master Station 1 station
Stations in One
Network Local Station 120 stations (Local station or Remote I/O) (*2)
Maximum Number of Networks 239
Communication Method Token passing method
Weight (kg) 0.18
Notes:
1. Must be used with QnU Universal CPUs with Serial Numbers starting with ‘12012’ or higher.
2. For CC-Link IE Field Remote I/O stations, refer to the LJ72GF15-T2 CC-Link IE Field Slave Head station.
MELSECNET/H Control Level Master/Local Network Modules

Use MELSECNET/H to link Q Series systems together on a control level network for the coordinated operation of
multiple controllers on a production line or large machine. MELSECNET/H also supports the direct connection
of PCs onto the network for SCADA or maintenance applications. MELSECNET/H was designed to offer similar
performance benefits to most industrial Ethernet systems, while offering the high degree of performance
required in an automation environment.
Key Features:
• MELSECNET/H configuration and maintenance is supported by GX Works2 with no need for
accessory plug-ins
• High-speed communications at up to 25Mbit/s (depending on modules used)
• Backwards compatible with existing MELSECNET/10 installations
• Guaranteed determinism via token passing scheme
• Scalable to exceed the needs of the largest installations (over 15,000 stations in one system)
• Up to 30km loop circumference via fiber connections
• Loop topology optical fiber media offers maximum speed and dual redundancy
• Single bus coax offers many performance benefits with economical media
• No programming required to establish cyclic network communications; just set parameters in GX Works2
• Transient communications permit asynchronous peer to peer messaging
• Loop topology offers recovery from media breaks via automatic loop back
• Floating master maintains network operation by allowing any station to take over after the original master
goes offline
• Offline stations return to the network automatically when able
• Extensive diagnostic functions to monitor network operation and status
• Program and monitor across the network
• Transmit up to 35 kB of uninterrupted data for increased performance and simpler programming
(S/N 06092x, Version D units or later)

Required Manuals
MELSECNET/H Network Module User’s Manual Basic information on QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21G
IB(NA)0800144 Yes -
(Hardware) QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21G, QJ71BR11 and QJ71BR11 (MELSECNET/H master modules)
General reference to MELSECNET/H
MELSECNET/10H for Q Network System Reference
SH(NA)080049 (MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10H are No (purchase separately) -
Manual (PLC to PLC network)
equivalent terms)
MELSECNET/H Optical Fiber

Optical fiber media cable is available for connecting MELSECNET/H networks.
AS-1000M-B Optical fiber cable, sold by the meter S
DL-72ME AS-1000M-B connector, MEAU offers the service to provide pre-terminated cables as required S
PA7003 Splice connector for joining pre-terminated AS-1000M-B cable -
CAK-0068ME Optional termination tool kit for AS-1000M-B and DL-72ME for on-site termination work -

Model Number QJ71LP21-25 QJ71LP21S-25 QJ71LP21G QJ71LP21GE
Stocked Item S - - -
Certification UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE
Connection Form Duplex loop type
MELSECNET/H Mode MELSECNET/10 Mode

LX/LY 8192 points (8k bits) 8192 points (8k bits)
Max. Number of Link Points Per Network
LB 16384 points (16k bits) 8192 points (8k bits)
W 16384 points (16k words) 8192 points (8k words)
Max. Number of Link Points Per Station [LW+LB+LY<=2000 bytes (cyclic communication)]+[LW+LB+LY<=2000 bytes (low-speed cyclic communication)]
Transient Transmission Capacity Max. 1920 bytes/frame
Transmission Speed 10Mbps/25Mbps (depending on switch setting) (*1) 10Mbps 10Mbps
Optical (AS-1000M-B Optical (AS-1000M-B
Cable Type Optical (GI-50/125) Optical (GI-62.5/125)
(SI, 200/250)) (*2) (SI, 200/250)) (*2)
Number of Stations Connected 64 stations (1: control station, 63: normal station)
Overall Distance 30km (98360.67 ft.)
Transmission Speed
Cable Type
10Mbps 25Mbps
SI 500m (3278.69 ft.) 200m (1312.33 ft.)
Station to Station Distance 2km (6557.38 ft.)
H-PCF 1km (3278.69 ft.) 400m (1312.33 ft.)
Broadband
1km (3278.69 ft.) 1km (3278.69 ft.)
H-PCF
QSI 1km (3278.69 ft.) 1km (3278.69 ft.)
Distance Extension Repeater -
48 points (I/O assignment: first

I/O Device Points Occupied 32 points 16 points as empty, 1st 32 points 32 points
as intelligent)
Voltage - 20.4 to 31.2VDC - -
Current - 0.20 A - -
Terminal Screw Size - M3 Screw - -
External
Applicable Solderless
Power Supply - R1.25-3 - -
Terminal
Applicable Wire Size - 0.3 to 1.25 mm2 - -
Tightening Torque - 42 to 58N • cm - -
Internal Current Consumption (5VDC) (A) 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55
Weight (kg) 0.11 0.20 0.11 0.11
Base Unit Slots Occupied 1 2 1
Notes:
1. 25 Mbps is available for the MELSECNET/H mode only.
2. Other types of fiber cables can be used, see “Station-to-station distance”. To order pre-assembled AS-1000M-B cables, specify cable length, two DL-72ME connectors, and labor-TSS surcharge.
60
Model Number QJ71BR11 QJ71NT11B
Stocked Item S S
Connection Form Simplex bus type Token bus
MELSECNET/H Mode,
MELSECNET/H Mode MELSECNET/10 Mode
MELSECNET/H Extended Mode (*1)
LX/LY 8192 points (8k bits) 8192 points (8k bits)
Max. Number of Link Points Per Network LX/LY 8192 points
LB 16384 points (16k bits) 8192 points (8k bits)
LB 16384 points
W 16384 points (16k words) 8192 points (8k words)
W 16384 points
[LW+LB+LY<=2000 bytes (cyclic MELSECNET/H mode: {(LY+ LB) /8 + (2 × LW)} ≤ 2000 bytes (*2)
Max. Number of Link Points Per Station communication)]+[LW+LB+LY<=2000 bytes MELSECNET/H Extended mode: {(LY+ LB) /8 + (2 × LW)} ≤ 35840
(low-speed cyclic communication)] bytes (*2)
156kbps/312kbps/625kbps/1.25Mbps/2.5Mbps/5Mbps/10Mbps
Transmission Speed 10Mbps
(Switched by network parameters)
Cable Type Coaxial 75Ω; RG-59B/U RG-11A/U Twisted pair cable or CC-Link Ver.1.10-compatible cable(*4)

Number of Stations Connected 32 stations (1: control station, 31: normal station)
500m (1639.34 ft.)

Overall Distance RG-11A/U) / 300m
(983.61 ft.) (RG-59B/U)
Communication Speed Twisted Pair Cable CC-Link Ver. 1.10-Compatible Cable

156kbps (*3) 1200m 1200m
312kbps 600m 900m
625kbps 400m 600m
Station to Station Distance
1.25Mbps 200m 400m
2.5Mbps 200m
5Mbps (Not applicable) 150m
10Mbps 100m
Up to 2.5km (8196.72 ft.) by connection of max. four repeaters.

Distance Extension Repeater -
Use A6BR10/ A6BR10-DC repeaters.
I/O Device Points Occupied 32 points 32 points

Internal Current Consumption (5VDC) (A) 0.75 0.6
Weight (kg) 0.11 0.13
Notes:
1. Mode selection is performed using network parameters.
2. The number of LY points of the stations set in the I/O master station is the sum total of the LY points for output to all stations within the block.
3. This value is set as default of the communication speed.
4. For details of cable specifications, refer to the user manual.

MELSECNET/H Remote I/O Network Modules
These modules form a complimentary solution to the master/local • Place complex I/O combinations on a remote
modules. The master/local modules allow CPUs to be linked for network link
information exchange. The remote I/O modules fit on a base rack in • Most I/O and special function modules (analog,
place of the CPU, and allow this rack of I/O to be operated under the motion, communications, etc) can be installed on
control of a remote Q Series CPU over a MELSECNET/H link. a remote I/O rack
Key Features: • Remote I/O modules offer a communication port
on the I/O rack when local access is required
• Fiber loop and coax bus versions available
Required Manuals
Basic information on QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G,
MELSECNET/H Network Module User’s Manual
IB(NA)0800145 QJ72BR15, QJ72BR15 (MELSECNET/H remote I/O station Yes -
(Hardware) QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G
modules)
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System
SH(NA)080124 General reference to MELSECNET/H remote I/O network No (purchase separately) -
Reference Manual (Remote I/O network)
Model Number QJ72LP25-25 QJ72LP25G QJ72LP25GE QJ72BR15

Stocked Item S - - S
Certiication UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL • CE
Connection Form Duplex loop type Simplex bus type
Max. Number of Link Points Per Station Remote I/O station to remote master station ((LY+LB)/8 + (2 LW)) </- 1600 bytes
10Mbps/25Mbps (depending on
Transmission Speed 10Mbps
switch setting)
Optical (AS-1000M-B Coaxial 75Ω (RG-59B/U,
Cable Type Optical (GI-50/125) Optical (GI-62.5/125)
(SI, 200//250)) (*1) RG-11A/U)
33 stations (1:remote master
Number of Stations 65 stations (1:remote master station, 1:remote I/O station)
station, 32:remote I/O station)
500m (1639.34 ft.) (RG-11A/U);
Overall Distance 30km (98360.66 ft.)
300m (983.61 ft.) (RG-59B/U)
Up to 2.5km (8196.72 ft.) 4
Distance Extension Repeater - - - repeaters max. Use A6BR10/
A6BR10-DC
SI type optical cable: 500m
(3278.69 ft.); H-PCF type
Communication optical cable: 1km (3278.69 ft.);
2km (6557.38 ft.) 2km (6557.38 ft.) -
Speed: 10Mbps Broadband H-PCF cable: 1km
(3278.69 ft.); QSI type optical
Max. Distance cable: 1km (3278.69 ft.)
Between Stations SI type optical cable: 200m
(1312.33 ft.); H-PCF type optical
Communication cable: 400m (1311.48 ft.);
- - -
Speed: 25Mbps Broadband H-PCF cable: 1km
(3278.69 ft.); QSI type optical
cable: 1km (3278.69 ft.)
5VDC Internal Current Consumption (A) 0.89 0.89 0.89 1.1
Weight (kg) 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.16
Note: 1. Other types of fiber can be used. See “Interstation distance”. AS-1000M-B is purchased by the meter and can be ordered pre-assembled with DL-72ME connectors and LaborTSS surcharge.
62
PC Network Cards
Many of our larger scale controller systems are typically integrated into large-scale plant wide networks
that require integration with PC based systems. Mitsubishi Electric addresses this requirement with a range
of PC compatible network cards that allow a PC to be directly connected to a number of our networks.
These boards are typically used as the physical network interface for a PC system written in third party
applications such as Microsoft® Visual Basic ™, Visual C++™, etc.
Q80BD- Q80BD- Q80BD- Q81BD- Q80BD- Q80BD- Q80BD- Q80BD- Q81BD-J61BT11

Model Number
J71GP21-SX J71GP21S-SX J71LP21-25 J71LP21-25 J71LP21G J71LP21GE J71BR11 J61BT11N (*1)
Stocked Item - - S - - - S S -
Certification UL • cUL • CE CE UL • cUL • CE
Network Type CC-Link IE Control MELSECNET/H CC-Link
Optical Fiber Multi-mode Optical Fiber Optical Fiber
Media Type Optical Fiber (62.5 micron) Coax Twisted Pair
(200 micron) Optical Fiber (50 micron) (62.5 micron)
Configuration Type Dual loop Bus
Station Type Master/local

External Power
No Yes No
Supply
Note:
1. Supports PCI Express bus.
CC-Link Device Level Master/Local Network Module QJ61BT11
Device level networks typically link a controller to the physical • Control up to 64 CC-Link networks from a single
RUN L RUN
MST S MST
SD RD
ERR. L ERR.
STATION NO.
components of a system that it controls. CC-Link represents the Q Series system

7 8
4 5 6
9 0 1
X10
23
7 8
next level down from MELSECNET/H in the networking hierarchy
4 5 6
9 0 1
X1
• Open device network with over 200 vendors

23
BCD
EF 2
8 9A
MODE
01
and allows devices such as I/O modules, VFDs, HMIs and servos
67
3 45
to be connected to the controller in a very cost effective, high • Eliminates costly wiring harnesses with a single NC
NC
DA
2
1
economical cable
SLD
3
performance way via a single network cable.

DB
4
(FG)
5
DG
6
7
• Adds device diagnostic capabilities

Key Features: • All devices on the network support high performance
• QJ61BT11N module supports CC-Link V2.0 10Mbit/s communications speed
• V2.0 increases I/O capacity to 8192 points and data capacity • Up to 13.2km bus length with repeaters
to 4096 words (up from 2048 and 512 respectively) • Redundant master station capability
• V2.0 permits more efficient use of network station • Fully supported by all Mitsubishi automation products
address space
• Very wide array of products available
• CC-Link configuration and maintenance is supported by
GX Works2 with no need for accessory plug-ins Please see the CC-Link part of the Distributed I/O section for a
full listing of the CC-Link I/O products available.
Required Manuals
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User’s
IB(NA)0800250 Covers basic information on QJ61BT11N Yes -
Manual (Hardware) QJ61BT11N
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User’s
SH(NA)080394 Covers programming a CC-Link system No (purchase separately) -
Manual QJ61BT11N
Model Number QJ61BT11N

Stocked Item S
Transmission Rate Selectable 156 kbps/ 625 kbps/ 2.5 Mbps/ 5 Mbps/ 10 Mbps
Maximum Overall Cable Distance (Maximum
Varies according to the transmission rate (156 kbps: 1200m; 10Mbps: 100m)
Transmission Distance)
Maximum Number of Connected Stations
64
(Master Station)
Number of Occupied Stations (Local Station) 1 to 4 stations; The number of stations can be switched using the GX Works2 parameter setting
Maximum Number of Link Points Per System Remote I/O (RX, RY): 8192 points; Remote write register (RWw): 2048 words. Remote read register (RWr): 2048 words
Remote Station/Local Station/Intelligent Device Remote I/O (RX, RY): 128 points; Remote write register (RWw): 32 words (master station - remote device station/local station/
Station/Standby Master Station Maximum intelligent device station/standby master station); Remote register (RWr): 32 words (remote device station/local station/intelligent
Number of Link Points Per Station device station/standby master station - master station)
RAS Function Automatic return function; Slave station cut-off function; Error detection by the link special relay/register
5VDC Internal Current Consumption 0.46 A

CC-Link Device Level Master/Local Network Module (continued)
Model Number QJ61BT11N
Local Local
Remote I/O Remote I/O station or station or
Master
station or station or Intelligent Intelligent
station
Remote device Remote device device device
station station station station
Inter-station cable length

Max. Overall Cable
Same Speciications
Length and Interstation
Regardless of System Max overall cable length
Cable Length (Ver. 1.10
Coniguration
or later) Ver. 1.10-Compatible CC-Link Dedicated Cable (Terminating Resistor 110Ω Used)
Transmission Speed Interstation Cable Length Max. Overall Cable Length
156kbps 1200m (3934.43 ft.)
625kbps 900m (2950.82 ft.)
2.5Mbps 20 cm (7.88 inch) or more 400m (1311.48 ft.)
5Mbps 160m (524.59 ft.)
10Mbps 100m (327.87 ft.)
Connection Cable BA1SJ61-S (signal only) / BA1SJ61-P (signal and power)

Weight (kg) 0.12
64
PROFIBUS-DP V1 and V2 Device Level Network Master Module
The QJ71PB92V supports the more recent PROFIBUS-DPV1 and V2 advanced function set.
Key Features:
• PROFIBUS-DPV1 functions:
- Acyclic slave communications
- Slave alarm acquisition
• PROFIBUS-DPV2 functions:
- Slave station clock control
• General functions:
- Up to 125 slave stations
- Support for slave configuration with CommDTM/FDT
- Program using GX Configurator DP V7.0
Required Manuals
Profibus-DP Master Module User’s Covers basic information on
IB(NA)0800324 Yes -
Manual (Hardware) QJ71PB92V
Profibus-DP Master Module User’s
SH(NA)080572 Covers using the QJ71PB92V No -
Manual
PROFIBUS-DP Master Module Performance Specifications

Model Number QJ71PB92V
Stocked Item S
PROFIBUS-DP Station Type Class 1 master station
External Standard and Characteristics EIA-RS485 compatible
Communication Cable Shielded twisted pair cable
Network Configuration Bus type (tree type if repeater is used)
Max. Transmission Distance
Transmission Rate Transmission Distance
when Using Repeater (*2)
9.6kbps
Transmissions Specifications
19.2kbps 1200m/segment 4800m/network

93.75kbps
Transmission Rate (*1) Maximum 187.5kbps 1000m/segment 4000m/network
Transmission Distance (*2)
500kbps 400m/segment 1600m/network
1.5Mbps 200m/segment 800m/network
3Mbps
6Mbps 100m/segment 400m/network
12Mbps
Max. No. of Repeaters In a Path 3 repeaters
Max. No. of Stations 32 stations per segment (including repeaters)
Max. No. Slave Stations 125 slaves per single QJ71PB92V master
I/O Data Size Max. 8192 words (4096 input words, 4096 output words)
Weight (kg) 0.13
Notes:
1. Transmission rate control is within ±0.2% (compatible with IEC 61158-2).
2. The “maximum transmission distance” in the above table is an example which assumes that 3 repeaters are being used. If more repeaters are used to extend
the distance, the maximum transmission distance would be calculated as follows: [Maximum transmission distance (m/network)] = [Number of repeaters +1]
x [transmission distance (m/segment)]

PROFIBUS-DP Device Level Network Slave Module
The QJ71PB93D allows a Q Series system to be connected to a third party PROFIBUS-DP network
as a slave controller. This allows distributed processing systems to be built where local control of
the application can be given to the Q Series, which then supplies information back to a supervisory
controller. This could be another Q Series system, fitted with the QJ71PB92D. Configure the QJ71PB93D
using the GX Configurator-DP plug in for GX Developer.
Required Manuals
SH(NA)080318 Profibus-DP Slave Module type QJ71PB93D User’s Manual Covers QJ71PB93D and GX Configurator-DP No -
IB(NA)0800230 Profibus-DP Slave Module User’s Manual (Hardware) QJ71PB93D Basic information on QJ71PB93D Yes -
Model Number QJ71PB93D

Stocked Item -
PROFIBUS-DP Station Type Slave station (EN50170 Volume 2 (Parts 1-4, 8) compliant)
Station Number Setting Range 0 to 125 (*3)
Max. Communication Data Size Number of I/O data is 192 words in total ( Number of input or output data is up to 122 words)
Electrical Standards Complies with EIA-RS485
Network Cable Dedicated PROFIBUS DP cable
Network Configuration Bus (tree type when a repeater is used)
Max. Transmission Distance
Transmission Speed Transmission Distance [m/segment]
with 3 Repeaters [m]
9.6 [kbps]
19.2 [kbps]
1200 4800
45.45 [kbps]
Transmission Transmission Speed / Maximum 93.75 [kbps]
Specifications Transmission Distance (*1, *2) 187.5 [kbps] 1000 4000
500 [kbps] 400 1600
1500 [kbps] 200 800
3 [Mbps]
6 [Mbps] 100 400
12 [Mbps]
Max. Number of Repeaters / Network 3 units (*2)
Max. Number of Stations / Segment 32 stations (including repeaters)
Number of Connection Nodes / Segments 32
5VDC Internal Power Consumption 0.44
Weight (kg) 0.11
Notes:
1. Transmission speed control within ±3% (Compliant with EN50170 Volume 2)
2. Distance that the transmission distance can be expanded by (m/network) using repeaters.
Maximum transmission distance (m/network) = (number of repeaters + 1) x transmission distance (m/segment)
3. Factory set to “126” (EN50170 Volume 2 compliant)
Set the station number by using sequence program or GX Configurator-DP 4.03D or later.
Set communication parameters on the master station side.
GSD (DDB) file may be required without GX Configurator-DP Version 4.03D or later. Please contact your local Mitsubishi representative for the GSD (DDB file).
66
MODBUS/TCP Network Module
The QJ71MT91 module offers a full MODBUS/TCP network communications facility to any Q Series system. Use this
module to establish control of a MODBUS/TCP network of devices from a Q Series based system.
Key Features:
• Easily configured with Intelligent Function Module utilities in GX Developer or GX Works2 (requires plug-in)
• GX Configurator-MB or GX Configurator2-MB reduce setup and maintenance time
• Master communication function supports both automatic communications or communication under program
control if required
• Also supports slave communication functions including automatic response and MODBUS device assignment
• Both slave and master functions can operate concurrently
• 100Mbit Ethernet capability with KeepAlive and router relay functions
Required Manuals
MODBUS/TCP Interface Module User’s Manual
IB(NA)0800280 Basic information on QJ71MT91 Yes -
(Hardware) QJ71MT91
SH(NA)080446 MODBUS/TCP Interface Module User’s Manual Covers QJ71MT91 and GX Configurator MB Included with GX Configurator MB as PDF -
QJ71MT91
Model Number
10BASE-T 100BASE-TX
Stocked Item S
Data Transmission Rate 10Mbps 100Mbps
Maximum Node-To-Node Distance 200m
Maximum Segment Length (*1) 100m
Number of Cascade Connection Stages Max. 4 stages Max. 2 stages
Maximum Number of Connections (*2) 64 connections
Transmission
Number of Routers That Can Be Set 1 default router + any 8 routers
Specifications
Cable compliant with the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T Cable compliant with the IEEE802.3 100BASE-TX
Cable Standard (unshielded twisted pair cable Standard (shielded twisted pair cable
(UTP cable), Category 3, 4, 5) (STP cable), Category 5)
Connector Applicable For External Wiring RJ45

Automatic Number of Slaves (*3) 64 slaves
Communication Input Area Size 4k words
Function Output Area Size 4k words
Master
Function Number of Instructions That Can
Up to 8 instructions
Be Executed Concurrently (*4)
Dedicated Instruction
Input Area Size Max. 253 bytes per instruction
Output Area Size Max. 253 bytes per instruction
Coil 64k points
Input 64k points
MODBUS
Input Register 64k points
Slave Function Device Size
Holding Register 64k points
Extended File Register Max. 4086k points
No. of Simultaneously Acceptable Request Messages 64
Number of Simultaneously Connectable MELSOFT PCs Max. 8
Weight (kg) 0.11
Notes:
1. Length between a hub and a node.
2. Indicates the number of TCP connections that can be established simultaneously.
3. Indicates the maximum number of slaves that can be communication targets.
4. Indicates the maximum number of dedicated instructions that can be started simultaneously from a sequence program.

MODBUS® RTU Master Module
The QJ71MB91 module adds Modbus RTU capability to a Q Series system. Use this module to communicate with
and control any of a wide variety of third party Modbus compatible products.
Key Features:
• Easily configured with Intelligent Function Module utilities in GX Developer or GX Works2 (requires plug-in)
• GX Configurator-MB or GX Configurator2-MB reduce setup and maintenance time
• Supports master communication with automatic communication
• Dedicated instructions are available for communications
• Supports slave communications with automatic response and device assignment function
• Link operation function; allows a third party Modbus device to communicate with Modbus slaves connected to
the Q Series controller via the QJ71MB91 module
• 115.2kbps communication speed
Required Manuals
IB(NA)0800329 Modbus Interface Module User’s Manual (Hardware) Basic information on the QJ71MB91 Yes -
SH(NA)080578 Modbus Interface Module User’s Manual Covers QJ71MB91 and GX Configurator MB No -
Note: Many of these manuals are available by free download from our website, www.meau.com. Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric.
Model Number QJ71MB91

Stocked Item S
Number of Interfaces RS-232 1 channel; RS-422/485 1 channel
Total transmission speed of two interfaces must be 115200 bps or less
300 600 1200 2400

Transmission Transmission Speed (bps)
4800 9600 14400 19200
Specifications
28800 38400 57600 115200
Transmission Distance RS-232 Max. 15m (49.2 ft.)

(Overall Distance) RS-422/485 Max. 1200m (3936.9 ft.) (Overall distance)
Automatic Number of Slaves (*1) 32 per channel

Communication Input Area Size 4k words
Function Output Area Size 4k words
Master
Function Number of Instructions That Can Be
1 per channel
Executed Concurrently (*2)
Dedicated Instruction Input Area Size Max. 253 bytes per instruction
Output Area Size Max. 253 bytes per instruction
Coil 64k points
Input 64k points
MODBUS® Device Size Input Register 64k points
Slave Function Holding Register 64k points
Extended File Register Max. 4086k points
Number of Simultaneously Acceptable Request Messages 1 request per channel
Station Number 1 to 247
Weight (kg) 0.20
Notes:
1. Indicates the maximum number of slaves that can be communication targets.
2. Indicates the maximum number of dedicated instructions that can be activated simultaneously from a sequence program.
68
EtherNet/IPTM Scanner
The EIP4CCPU is an EtherNet/IP™ Scanner for the iQ Platform. It allows the iQ Platform to talk with other Ethernet/IP connected
third party CPUs such as ControlLogix or CompactLogix to share data, and to directly control EtherNet/IP distributed devices such
as I/O (Block or Point), drives, and other devices. The scanner is configured using the EIP4CCPU Scanner Configuration Utility
(a free utility that can be downloaded at meau.com). The EIP4CCPU Scanner Configuration Utility discovers and configures the
network settings of a scanner regardless of its network parameters, making it very easy to setup a new module or reconfigure an
existing module.
Required Manual
ICC-#10816 EIP4CCPU User’s Manual Covers EIP4CCPU Yes -
Model Number EIP4CCPU

Stocked Item -
Number of Client TCP Connections 32 (*1)
Number of Server TCP Connections 8
PLCs Supported on Backplane 1 to 3
Changing Configuration During Operation Yes (*2)
CIP Connections 60 (*3)
Total Combined Input and
Up to 14KB (high speed shared memory limitation)
Output Data Size
Max Data Size 511 bytes
Client Class 1 Implicit (I/O) Connection Type (Target to Originator) Multicast (*4)
Messaging
Transport Trigger Cyclic
Data Type SINT, USINT
RPI 1 to 8388ms
Minimum Timeout Time 128ms (timeout multiplier is adjusted according to the RPI)
Class 3 CIP Connections (Connected) 16 (*3, *5)
UCMM (Unconnected) 16 outstanding requests (*5)
Max Data Size 120 words
Connection Type (Target to Originator) Point-to-Point
Cache Type Un-cached
Client Explicit Messaging Transport Trigger Application
Data Type INT, UINT
RPI 7500ms
Timeout Multiplier 4x
Tag Access Methods Data table read/write, Typed read/write, CIP generic
PLC Implementation Based on populating internal PLC registers with a predefined messaging structure
CIP Connections 16
Max Data Size 250 words
Connection Type (Target to Originator) T->O Point-to-Point
Transport Trigger Application
Server Class 3 Explicit
Data Type INT, UINT
Messaging
RPI 1 to 8388ms
Timeout Multiplier 4x to 512x
Tag Access Methods Data table read/write, Typed read/write, CIP generic
PLC Implementation Predefined device mappings
Notes:
1. The client TCP and CIP connections share a common resource pool. The number of TCP and CIP connections is dependent upon one another and must satisfy the following formulas:
1. (Number of TCP connections * 4) + (Number of CIP connections) <= 160
2. (Number of CIP connections) <= 60
2. If configuration is changed via EtherNet/IP by editing the Connection Configuration objects (RSNetWorx for EtherNet/IP method), the configuration will take effect immediately without rebooting the device. If the
configuration is transferred as an XML file via FTP to the device (Windows® Configuration Utility method), a reboot is required for the configuration to take effect.
3. The number of simultaneous class 1 connections lists the total number of simultaneous I/O connections that can be made to remote devices, regardless of whether or not those devices are being served by a
single adapter at one IP address (modular devices such as Flex I/O and Point I/O will consume one class 1 connection for each module attached to the chassis/adapter). Because the scanner supports up to
128 TCP connections (sockets), up to 128 simultaneous physical remote devices (adapters) can be attached to. At the same time, the scanner contains a pool of 256 class 1 CIP connections and 16 class 3 CIP
connections. So, for example, if the scanner is configured to target one Flex I/O adapter with three modules on the chassis, then it will use the following internal resources: one TCP connection and three class
1 CIP connections. Additionally, if the user wants a connected explicit messaging request to target (for example) module #2 on the chassis, then this will consume one of the 16 class 3 CIP connections (so in
total, one TCP connection, three class 1 CIP connections, and one class 3 CIP connection will be in use). During configuration, the user can keep adding connections until they run out of either TCP connections
or 17 ICC class 1 connections. For example, if the network contains a large number of modular devices with multiple modules on each adapter, then it is likely that the pool of class 1 CIP connections will be
exhausted first. On the other hand, if the network does not contain any modular devices, then only one class 1 CIP connection will be required for each TCP connection, and it is therefore likely that the number
of TCP connections will be exhausted first.
4. Up to 20 unique multicast addresses are supported per TCP connection.
5. Both connected and unconnected explicit messaging requires the use of interrupts. Each interrupt can only service one outstanding explicit message at any given time. Since there are only 16 interrupts, the total
number of outstanding connected and unconnected explicit messages cannot exceed 16.

DeviceNet™ Device Level Network Master Module
The DeviceNet master module allows the Q Series to control systems that require integration of third
party DeviceNet products. The QJ71DN91 module is configured by use of the GX Configurator-DN
plug-in for GX Developer or GX Configurator2-DN in GX Works2. Note that this module is also capable of
functioning as a DeviceNet slave if required.
Required Manuals for DeviceNet

IB(NA)0800149 QJ71DN91 User’s Manual (Hardware) Covers basic information on QJ71DN91 Yes -
Covers programming of the QJ71DN91 module and Included as PDF with

SH(NA)080143 DeviceNet Master-Slave Module User’s Manual -
GX Configurator-DN GX Configurator-DP
DeviceNet is a trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd. under license by Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.
Model Number QJ71DN91

Stocked Item S
Node Type DeviceNet master (Group 2 only client)
Node Number Which Can be Set 0 to 63
Number of Message Connection 63
Connections that
Can be Created I/O Connection 63 (polling, bit strobe, change of state, cyclic)
Functioning
as Master Send Max. 4096 points (512 bytes), max. 256 bytes per 1 node
Amount of I/O Communication
Receive Max. 4096 points (512 bytes), max. 256 bytes per 1 node
Communication
Data Message Send Max. 240 bytes
Communication Receive Max. 240 bytes
Node Type DeviceNet slaves (Group 2 server)
Setting Possible Node Number 0 to 63
Number of
Functioning Connections that I/O Connection 1 (polling)
as Slave Can be Created
Amount of Send Max. 1024 points (128 bytes)
Communication I/O Communication
Data Receive Max. 1024 points (128 bytes)
Transmission Speed One speed can be selected from 125, 250 and 500kbit/s
Maximum Transmitting Distance of Trunk Line Length of Drop Line
Communications Thick and
Speed Thin
Thick Cables Thin Cables Maximum Total
Cables
Maximum Cable Length* Coexist
125kbaud 500m (1640 ft.) 156m (511 ft.)
100m See table
250kbaud 250m (820 ft.) 6m (20 ft.) 78m (256 ft.)
(328 ft.) below
500kbaud 100m (328 ft.) 39m (128 ft.)
Current Consumption Required on the Network (A) 0.03
Weight (kg) 0.11
* The maximum cable length complies with that in the DeviceNet specification (release 2.0) volumes 1 and 2.
Combined Distance of Thick and Thin Cables

Transmission Speed Max, Combined Distance of Thick and Thin Cables
125kbaud Thick cable length + 5 x Thin cable length ≤ 500m (1640 ft.)
250kbaud Thick cable length + 2.5 x Thin cable length ≤ 250m (820 ft.)
500kbaud Thick cable length + Thin cable length ≤ 100m (328 ft.)
70
CC-Link/LT Sensor Level Network Master Module QJ61CL12
RUN
SD
ERR.
L RUN
RD
L ERR.
The QJ61CL12 allows the Q Series to control a CC-Link/LT • Control up to 1024 I/O per master SW
1
ON
network segment. Key features of CC-Link/LT are: • Compatible with CC-Link

I/O
2
POINTS
3
4
B RATE
5
6
MODE
• Connect network devices with no cutting or stripping of cable • Fine granularity of I/O allows placement of small groups
7
TEST 8
• I/O is addressed like it was on the rack; no special of I/O where required
programming required
LINK
QJ61CL12
Required Manuals
QJ61CL12 CC-Link / LT Master Module User’s Manual
IB(NA)0800232 Basic information on QJ61CL12 Yes -
(Hardware)
SH(NA)080351 CC-Link / LT Master Module User’s Manual QJ61CL12 Covers QJ61CL12 and CC-Link/LT No -
QJ61CL12
Model Number
4-Point Mode 8-Point Mode 16-Point Mode
Stocked Item -
Max. Number of Link Points [When The Same I/O
256 points (512 points) 512 points (1024 points) 1024 points (2048 points)
Address Is Used]
Number of Link Points Per Station [When The Same
4 points (8 points) 8 points (16 points) 16 points (32 points)
Control Specifications
I/O Address Is Used]

Number of Points 128 points 256 points 512 points
When 32 Stations 2.5Mbps 0.7 0.8 1.0
Are Connected 625kbps 2.2 2.7 3.8
Link Scan 156kbps 8.0 10.0 14.1
Time (ms) Number of Points 256 points 512 points 1024 points
When 64 Stations 2.5Mbps 1.2 1.5 2.0
Are Connected 625kbps 4.3 5.4 7.4
156kbps 15.6 20.0 27.8
Transmission Rate (bps) 2.5M / 625k / 156k
Communication
Specifications
Number of Connected Units 64

Remote Station Numbers 1 to 64
RAS Function Network diagnostics, internal loopback diagnostics, station detach function automatic return to system
Connection Cable Dedicated flat cable (0.75mm² x 4) CL9-FL4-18
I/O Device Points Occupied (*1) 16, 32, 48, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024
5VDC Internal Current Consumption 0.13 A
Voltage 20.4 to 28.8VDC
24VDC Power
Current Consumption 0.028 A
Supply (*2)
Current on Startup 0.070 A
Weight (kg) 0.09
Notes:
1. Set by module switches
2. External supply
AS-i Sensor Level Network Master Module

The AS-i module allows Q Series to control systems that require integration of third party AS-i sensor level
network products. The GX Configurator-AS plug in for GX Developer configures the QJ71AS92 module.

Covers QJ71AS92 and GX Supplied as a PDF with GX
SH(NA)080291 AS-i Master Module User’s Manual -
Configurator-AS Configurator-AS
IB(NA)0800225 AS-i Master Module User’s Manual (Hardware) QJ71AS92 Basic information on QJ71AS92 Yes -
Model Number QJ71AS92

Stocked Item S
Certification CE
Max. Number of AS-i System Slaves 62 (Group A: 31, Group B: 31)
Max. Number of I/O Points Input 248 points
(1 Point = 16 Bits) Output 248 points
Max. Number of Analog I/O Input 124 points
Points (1 Point = 1 Bit) Output 124 points
I/O Refresh Time Approx. 5 ms (without I/O slave grouping); Approx. 10 ms (with I/O slave grouping); Approx. 35 ms (per analog slave channel)
Communication Speed 167 kbps
Transmission Distance Max. 100m (Max. 300m by use of two repeaters)
Connection Cable Dedicated AS-i cable
Voltage TYP. 30.5VDC (supplied by AS-i power supply)
External Power Supply
Current Consumption 46mA (TYP 30.5VDC)
Weight (kg) 0.12

e-F@ctory
High Speed Data Logger Module

The High Speed Data Logger can manipulate and store large amounts of CPU data in multiple formats on a CF card for access later
via FTP, E-mail, or direct. Dedicated software utilities available for download directly from the module’s built-in FTP server allow for
easy logging setup as well as data analysis.
Model Number QD81DL96
Stocked Item S
10BASE-T 10Mbps 100BASE-TX 100Mbps
Ethernet (*1)
Data Transmission Rate

100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
No. of Cascaded Stages Maximum 4 stages Maximum 2 stages
Max. Segment Length (*2) 100m

Supply Power Voltage 3.3 V±5%
Flash Card
Compact
Supply Power Capacity Maximum 150mA

Card Size TYPE I card
Number of Card Slots 1 card
Number of Occupied I/O Points 32 points/slot
Number of Access Target CPUs Maximum of 64 CPUs
High Speed Data
Sequence scan time synchronization; 1 to 32767 ms (for trigger logging) 3 to 32767 ms (for continuous logging)
Data Sampling Sampling
Interval (Point) General Data
0.1 to 0.9 seconds; 1 to 32767 seconds
Data Sampling (*3)
Sampling
Amount of High Speed Data
Overall amount of data: maximum of 8192 (per setting: 256);Overall number of device points: maximum of 8192 (per setting: 256)
Sampled Sampling
Data (*4, *5, General Data Overall amount of data: maximum of 16384 (per setting: 256);
*6) Sampling Overall numbe number of device points: maximum of 262144 (per setting: 4096)
Bit, Word (signed), Double word (signed), Word (unsigned), Double word (unsigned), Float (single precision),
Data Type (*7)
Float (double precision), 16 bit BCD, 32 bit BCD, String: 1 to 8192 characters, Raw: 1 to 8192 bytes
Data Output Format (CSV File) (*8) Bit, Decimal format, Exponential format, Hexadecimal format, String, Raw
Scaling (*9) Basic arithmetic operations: calculations combining (×, ÷) and (+, -)
Number of Settings Maximum of 64 settings (*10)
Logging Type Continuous logging, Trigger logging
File Format CSV ile (extension: CSV), Binary ile (extension: BIN) (*11)
Specify applicable period or exclusion period, Data condition, Date range, Time range, Day of week/week condition, AND or OR
Period
combination of the above: up to 8 conditions (*12)
Data Logging
Data condition: bit ON/OFF, compare data to constant value, compare data to data, Data change, Fixed cycle: 1 to 86400 seconds, Time of
Trigger
day speciication: specify month/day/hour/minute/second, At module startup, AND or OR combination of the above: up to 8 conditions
Conditions
Trigger Logging (*12), Condition execution count: 3 conditions (*12), Condition execution order (order and/or time conditions): up to 4 conditions (*12)
Number of
Before trigger occurs: 0 to 32767 lines; After trigger occurs: 1 to 32767 lines
Logging Rows
Number of lines (number of records) speciication: 100 to 65535 lines, File size speciication, Data condition, compare data to data,
File Switching Timing
Data change, Fixed cycle, Time of day speciication, At module startup, Trigger logging unit
Max. Number of Files Saved 65535
Number of Events Maximum of 64 events per single event logging setting
Event Logging
File Format CSV ile (extension: CSV); Binary ile (extension: BIN)
Data condition, compare data to data, Data change, AND or OR combination of the above: up to 4 conditions, Condition execution
Event Conditions
count: 3 conditions, Condition execution order (order and/or time conditions): up to 4 conditions
Period Data condition, Date range, Time range, Day of week/week condition, AND or OR combination of the above: up to 8 conditions (*13)
File Switching Timing No. of rows (no. of records), File size speciication, Data condition, Data change, Fixed cycle, Time of day, at module startup
Number of Files Saved 65535
File Format Excel format (extension: xls)
Output Data Type Data inside data logging ile (*14), Current value data, Creation time
Amount of Output Data 64 layouts per single report setting, 65535 cells in total
Report
Data condition, Data change, Fixed cycle, Time of day speciication, At module startup, AND or OR combination of the above: up to
Creation Trigger Conditions 8 conditions (*12), Condition execution count: 3 conditions (*12), Condition execution order (order and/or time conditions): up to
4 conditions (*12), At the time of the data logging ile is switched
Period Data condition, Date range, Time range, Day of week/week condition, AND or OR combination of the above: up to 7 conditions (*12)
Layout File Size Maximum of 10MB (total of all report settings)
Max. Number of Files Saved 65535
Note: Continued on next page.
72
High Speed Data Logger Module (continued)
Model Number QD81DL96
Subject User speciied; automatically created
Body User speciied; automatically created
Attachment Saved ile transmission e-mail: Saved ile (CSV, binary, or Excel ile); Maximum of 512KB
Attachment Format MIME 1.0
E-Mail
Port No. 25, 587, other (1 to 65535)

Communications
Authentication
with Mail Server No authentication, SMTP-AUTH (PLAIN, LOGIN, CRAM-MD5), POP before SMTP
Method
Target Address 16 groups max.
Operability Veriied E-Mail Client
Microsoft® Outlook® Express 6.0, Microsoft Windows® Mail 6.0
Software
Application Read and delete saved iles
FTP Server
(*15)
Operability Veriied FTP Client

Microsoft Internet Explorer® 6.0; Windows Internet Explorer 7.0
Software
Session Count (*16) 10
Application Transfer saved iles
Client
(*17)
FTP
Operability Veriied FTP Server

Microsoft Internet Information Services
Software
Data sampled with the data logging function (realtime display, historical display), Data sampled with the event logging function
Data Viewer Software
Displayable Data
(realtime display, historical display)
Number of Displayable Windows Maximum of 4 windows (*18)
Number of Windows Which Can Be
Maximum of 2 windows for 1 high speed data logger module (*19)
Monitored in Real Time
Graph Lines Maximum of 32 lines per trend window
Realtime Trend Data Maximum of 10000 plots
Realtime Event Data Maximum of 2000
Weight (kg) 0.15
Notes:
1. The high speed data logger module distinguishes 10BASE-T from 100BASETX depending on the device on other end. For connection with a hub not having the auto-negotiation function, set the hub side to half-
duplex auto communication mode.
2. Distance between a hub and node.
3. The specification for target data sampling with the data logging function, event logging function, and report function.
4. The number of device points available for 1 piece of data depends on the data type.
5. The total number of data logging, event logging, and report data.
• Data logging : logging target data, trigger condition data, period condition data, file switching condition data, saved file name data
• Event logging: monitoring data, period condition data, file switching condition data, saved file name data
• Report : current value data, creation trigger condition data, period condition data, saved file name data
6. The amount of sampled data per single setting is as follows only when the creation trigger and current value data are not synchronized with the report setting. Amount of data (per single setting): maximum of
65535, number of device points (per single setting): maximum of 65535.
7. The data type when reading data from the programmable controller CPU’s device memory.
8. The format when outputting data to a CSV file with data logging or event logging. Binary files are output in the binary format. Reports are output in Excel cell format.
9. A function to perform data scaling and offset calculations.
10. Up to 64 settings can be configured for data logging, event logging, and report function combined. Of these, up to 32 settings can be configured for data logging, event logging, and report function when high
speed data sampling is specified.
11. By using the report function, data can be re-output in the Excel file format.
12. When high speed data sampling is specified, period and trigger conditions combined up to 4 conditions. When general data sampling is specified, period and trigger conditions combined up to 8 conditions.
13. When high speed data sampling is specified, up to 4 conditions.
14. Only binary format data logging can be output to report function.
15. A function to access the high speed data logger module (FTP server) from a personal computer’s FTP client software. For details of supported FTP commands, refer to Appendix 9.
16. The upper limit of the number of simultaneous connections to the high speed data logger module from FTP client software. FTP client software may use multiple connections per single access session.
17. A function to access a personal computer’s FTP server software from the high speed data logger module (FTP client).
18. Up to 4 windows can be displayed, consisting of the realtime trend window, historical trend window, realtime event window, and historical event window.
19. Up to 2 windows can be displayed, consisting of the realtime trend window and realtime event window.
CompactFlash Specifications
Model Number QD81MEM-512MBC QD81MEM-1GBC QD81MEM-2GBC QD81MEM-4GBC QD81MEM-8GBC
Stocked Item S S - - -
Memory Capacity 512MB 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB
Number of Insertions / Ejections 10,000 cycles
External Dimensions (W x W x D) mm 43 x 36 x 3.3
Weight (g) 12

Standard MES Interface Module QJ71MES96
RUN
ERR.
As part of Mitsubishi’s e-F@ctory technology, the QJ71MES96 module allows a direct connection from a PULL
CF CARD
Q Series Automation Platform controller on the shop floor to high level IT MES (Manufacturing Execution Systems) 10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
100
infrastructure. This offers the following benefits:

M
SD/
RD
• No need for intermediate PC infrastructure to interface shop floor controllers to “front office” IT systems
• Significantly reduced cost of ownership as no PC maintenance issues apply
• Improved security; prevents access by unauthorized personnel QJ71MES96
• Improved productivity; industrially hardened architecture is immune to typical PC reliability issues

• High speed Ethernet connection from shop floor to “front office” IT systems
• Convenient installation; module simply mounts in a spare Q Series slot and configures with dedicated software
tool (MX-MESIF-STD-C1)
Required Manuals for QJ71MES96

QJ71MES96 MES Interface Module User’s Manual
IB(NA)0800354 Basic information on QJ71MES96 module Yes -
(Hardware)
Complete information on how to use the MES interface No
SH(NA)080644 QJ71MES96 MES Interface Module User’s Manual -
module and associated software (purchase separately)
Performance Specifications
Model Number QJ71MES96
Stocked Item S
Interface (*1) 10BASE-T 100BASE-TX
Data Transmission Rate 10 Mbps 100 Mbps
Ethernet
Number of Cascaded Stages Maximum 4 stages Maximum 2 stages
Max. Segment Length (*2) 100 m
I/O Device Points Occupied 32 points/slots
Weight (kg) 0.16
Notes:
1. The MES interface module distinguishes 10BASE-T from 100BASE-TX depending on the device on other end. For connection with a hub not having the auto-negotiation
function, set the hub side to half-duplex auto communication mode.
2. Distance between a hub and node.
74
MES Interface IT Module
The MES Interface IT and e-F@ctory technology solves the difficult The MES Interface IT module is a communication interface between IT
challenge of efficiently linking factory and IT systems to enable assets and plant floor equipment.
comprehensive data collection and distribution. It achieves system Each MES Interface IT system should have a minimum of one module
standardization security, and high data reliability for any system from and one transport. A transport is added to the module so the module
individual machines to large scale production lines. knows how to talk to a database or message queue system. Additional
transports can be purchased at anytime.
• Access to accurate and reliable production information Mitsubishi Electric MELSEC drivers are included with the purchase
• Dramatically simplified system architecture of the module. Other drivers are available as options if the module
• Reduced integration time and effort needs to share information with legacy MELSEC or third party
controllers.
• Improved security and standardization
Device connections refer to the number of controllers or other
• Achieves lean and agile operation at the lowest cost of ownership devices the MES Interface IT module will communicate with. The
example to the left has four controllers (one is the local CPU and
the other three are networked). The module comes with five device
connections. Additional connections can be purchased at anytime.

Q Series C Language CPU, 128MB
MES IT DeviceWise Core
Included items
QJ71MES96IT MES IT 2GB CF Memory Card S
MES IT 5 Device Connections
MES IT Mitsubishi (EZ Socket) Driver
Extra Device MESITDVC-5 MES IT 5 Device Connections S
Connections MESITDVC-10 MES IT 10 Device Connections S
MESITLCLDTBS MES IT Local Database S
MESITTRNSORCL MES IT Oracle Transport + Local Database S
MESITTRNSSQL MES IT SQL Transport + Local Database S
MESITTRNSDB2 MES IT DB2 Transport + Local Database S
Transports /
MESITTRNSMQTT MES IT MQTT Transport + Local Database S
Databases
MESITTRNSSIB MES IT SIB Transport + Local Database S
MESITTRNSWMQ MES IT WMQ Transport + Local Database S
MESITTRNSPSQL MES IT Postgre SQL Transport + Local Database S
MESITTRNSRDM MES IT RDM Transport + Local Database S
MESITDRVMMC MES IT Mitsubishi (MC Protocol) Driver S
MESITDRVRAPLC MES IT Rockwell Driver (SLC, PLC5, MicroLogix) S
MESITDRVRALGXTG MES IT Logix Tag Driver S
MESITDRVSMNSS7 MES IT Siemens S7 Driver S
MESITDRVHWKEYE MES IT Siemens HAWKEYE Driver S
Drivers
MESITDRVOMRON MES IT OMRON Driver S
MESITDRVALIEN MES IT ALIEN Driver S
MESITDRVBANNR MES IT BANNER Driver S
MESITDRVEMS MES IT EMS Driver S
MESITDRVMBUS MES IT Modbus Driver S
Spare Parts MESIT2GBCF Spare MES IT 2GB CF Memory Card S

Performance Specifications
Databases Oracle 10g, 11g; Microsoft SQL Server 2000, 2005, 2008; IBM DB2 8,9; IBM DB2/400 V5R3; Local DB
Data Transport Method
Messages MSMQ; WMQ; WMQTT; WebSphere MQ; JMS; SAP; SMTP (e-mail); TCP; HTTP
SQL Commands Supported
by the Database Interface Insert; Batch Insert; Update; Select; Delete; Select with Delete; Select with Update; Stored Procedure; CountRows
Function
Data Transport Map Message Style ASCII (delimited format, free format), XML
Character Code UTF-8
Max. Store and Forward
10,000MB/transport. However, the volume actually used does not exceed the capacity of a CompactFlash card (512MB)
Capacity
Fixed cycle (Schedule-Periodic); Fixed time (schedule); Value monitoring (Data); Listener (Listener); Manual operation (On
Trigger Conditions Demand); Boot from separate trigger (Sub Trigger); MES Interface IT event (Internal); Top management communication
event (Enterprise); Event from separate system with multiple CPUs (GINT command)
Numerical processing (referencing other numerical operations) (Expression); Standby (Wait); Device writing (Set);
Array operation (Array); Bit operation (Bit); Device control (Device); Communication from top management (Enterprise
Actions
Trigger Communication); Setting display (Hardware); Correction of internal data (internal); PING operation (Ping); Job control
(Routing); File operation (Staging File System); Character string operation (String); Boot trigger (Trigger)
Four arithmetic operation (+, -, x. /); abs (absolute value); acos (inverse cosine); asin (inverse sine); atan (inverse
tangent); avg (average); cos (cosine); cosh (hyperbolic cosine function); exp (exponential function); ln (natural logarithm);
Operations
log (logarithmic function); log10 (common logarithm); max (maximum value); min (minimum value); sin (sine); sinh
(hyperbolic sine function); sqrt (square root); sum (total); tan (tangent); tanh (hyperbolic tangent function)
F. Accessories
Q Series Programming Cables

Depending on the CPU type being used, either a serial or USB connection can be made to a CPU from a PC as follows:
CPU Connections Available Cable to Use
Q00J, Q00, Q01, Q02 Serial RS-232 SC-Q (serial connection)
Q02H, Q06H, Q12H, Q25H, Q12PH, Q25PH Serial RS-232 and USB (Type B) SC-Q (serial connection) or third party USB cable (Type B)
Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U,Q02U,Q03U, Q04U, Q06U, GT09-C30USB-5P, Third party USB (Mini-B) or
USB (Mini-B) and RS-232/Ethernet
Q10U, Q13U, Q20U, Q26U, Q50U, Q100U Ethernet SC-Q / Cat5e (RJ45 connector)
Q Series Slot Filler Module

In some cases it is not possible to fill all the slots on a rack. Where unused slots exist, there is a risk of system damage caused
by extraneous material entering the backplane or system modules via the unused slot positions. The QG60 module is an empty
single slot module case that fits in an unused slot to protect from possible contamination. Since the QG60 contains no electronic
components, it does not affect the system configuration, power consumption or programming.
Memory Cards
Q Series memory cards are optional memory expansions. Use these cards to expand the CPU memory up to 32Mb. Memory
cards may be used for storage of programs, data and system documentation. Note these are only used with sequence CPUs.
Program memory is not increased by adding memory cards.
Required Manuals
CPU specifications, system configuration, Programming basics, I/O

QCPU(Q Mode) User’s Manual
assignments, memory organization, CPU functions, communication No
SH(NA)080484 (Function Explanation, Program -
with intelligent function modules, parameters and devices, program up/ (purchase separately)
Fundamentals)
downloads, overview of multiple program architecture, programming basics
76
Memory Cards Supported Data and Compatibility
Memory Card
(RAM)
Memory Cards (ROM) For program storage only.
SRAM Card Flash Card ATA Card Does not increase program memory.
File Name and Notes:
Drive No. Q2MEM-1MBS
Q2MEM-8MBA Extension 1. To execute the program stored in the standard ROM or memory
Q2MEM-2MBS Q2MEM-2MBF card, adjusting the program memory boot settings is required in
Q2MEM-16MBA
Q3MEM-4MBS Q2MEM-4MBF the PLC parameter dialog box. Note that the Universal model QCPU
Q2MEM-32MBA
Q3MEM-8MBS cannot boot data from the standard ROM to the program memory.
Parameter X X X PARAM.QPA 2. Read from a sequence program requires several scans.
Intelligent Function Module 3. Read only from a sequence program.
X X X IPARAM.QPA
Parameter
Program X (*1) X (*1) X (*1) ***.QPG
Device Comment X (*2) X (*2) X (*2) ***.QCD
Device Initial Value X X X ***.QDI
Device Data - - - ***.QST
File Register X X (*3) - ***.QDR
Local Device X - - ***.QDL
Sampling Trace File X - - ***.QTD
Failure History Data X - - ***.QFD
PLC User Data - - X ***.***
CPU Module
Memory Card High

Redundant Universal
Base Q CPUs Performance Process CPUs
CPUs QnU CPUs
CPUs
Q2MEM-1MBS - X X X X
SRAM Q2MEM-2MBS - X X X X
Card Q3MEM-4MBS - - - - X
Q3MEM-8MBS - - - - X
Flash
Q2MEM-2MBF - X X X X
Card
Q2MEM-8MBA - X X X X
ATA
Card
Note: Only one memory card can be installed for each CPU module.
Type Memory Type Capacity Write Count (Times) Certification Stocked Items
Q2MEM-1MBS SRAM 1,011kb No restriction UL • cUL • CE S
Q2MEM-2MBS SRAM 2,034kb No restriction UL • cUL • CE S
Q2MEM-2MBF Linear flash ROM 2,032kb 100,000 UL • cUL S
Q2MEM-4MBF Linear flash ROM 4,080kb 100,000 UL • cUL -
Q3MEM-4MBS SRAM 4,078kb No restriction UL • cUL • CE -
Q3MEM-4MBS-SET Set consisting of Q3MEM-4MBS and protective cover N/A N/A UL • cUL • CE -
Q2MEM-8MBA ATA flash ROM 7,940kb 1,000,000 UL • cUL S
Q3MEM-8MBS SRAM 8,172kb No restriction UL • cUL • CE -
Q3MEM-8MBS-SET Set consisting of Q3MEM-8MBS and protective cover NA N/A UL • cUL • CE -
Q2MEM-16MBA ATA flash ROM 15,932kb 1,000,000 UL • cUL -
Q2MEM-32MBA ATA flash ROM 31,854kb 1,000,000 UL • cUL -
Note: Both the linear flash ROM and ATA flash ROM are rewritable non-volatile memories. For replacement memory card back-up batteries, please see the Accessories section.
For certain sequence CPU functions to be enabled, specific types of memory card are required. Please refer to the relationship between memory cards and supported data type to
select the memory card that best meets your needs.
Q Series Memory Card Adapter

The Q2MEM-ADP adapter allows a Q Series memory card (Q2MEM-_MB_) to be installed in a standard PC Card (PCMCIA) slot
for reading and writing to the card. Non-Stock product.
Q Series Memory Card Replacement Battery

Use these batteries to maintain the contents of SRAM memory cards after power down.
Model Number Q2MEM-BAT Q3MEM-BAT

Stocked Item S -
Classification Graphite fluoride lithium primary battery Manganese dioxide lithium primary battery
Initial Voltage 3.0V 3.0V
Nominal Current 48mAh 550mAh
Storage Life 5 years (room temperature)
Lithium Content 0.014g 0.150g
Application Power failure backup for SRAM card (for Q2MEM-1MBS/Q2MEM-2MBS) Power failure backup for SRAM card (for Q3MEM-4MBS/Q3MEM-8MBS)

Q Series CPU Memory Replacement Battery
All Q Series CPUs employ RAM based memory. To insure this is preserved after power down, use
the Q6BAT or Q7BAT. Note these are not compatible with the A6BAT. Any RAM based memory cards
installed in the CPU use the Q2MEM-BAT for back-up and are independent of the Q6BAT. One Q6BAT is
shipped with each CPU.
Model Number Q6BAT
Stocked Item S
Back-Up Time After Battery
CPU Type Min. Back-Up Time Typical Back-Up Time
Error ON
Battery Lifetime Basic Q CPUs 5,433 hours 13,120 hours 120 hours
Q02H, Q06H 2,341 hours 6,435 hours 120 hours
Q12H, Q25H, Q12PH, Q25PH 1,260 hours 4,228 hours 48 hours
Model Number Q7BAT/Q7BAT-SET

Stocked Item S
Back-Up Time After Battery
CPU Type Min. Back-Up Time Typical Back-Up Time
Error ON
Battery Lifetime Q02 13,000 hours 31,000 hours 240 hours
Q02H, Q06H 5,000 hours 14,000 hours 240 hours
Q12H, Q25H, Q12PH, Q25PH 2,900 hours 9,700 hours 96 hours
Q Series Connector Disconnection Prevention Holder

The Q6HLD-R2 is a clamp that fixes a cable securely to the RS-232 port of a Q Series CPU to prevent
accidental disconnection. It is adjustable to accommodate different cable designs and does not block
access to the USB port, where available
Model Number Q6HLD-R2

Stocked Item -
Required Manuals IB(NA)0800181 Included
Q Series Spare Parts

Model Number Description Stocked item
BKO-C8834H12 Spare CC-Link terminating resistors 2 x 110Ω, 2 x 130Ω, fitted with insulated lugs -
BKO-C10798H02 QJ61BT11N CC-Link network master module network connection terminal block -
QXn0/QYn0 I/O block complete terminal block assembly (screw terminal block, hinged
K08H07500150 -
cover and label) (Fits QX10, QY10, etc.)
K08H07500151 Hinged cover and label only from K08H07500150 -
Q Series Spring Clamp Terminal Block Q6TE

-18S
The Q6TE-18S fits most Q Series 16 point (or less) I/O modules and allows terminations to be made via a
1
2
3
spring clamp. This offers the benefit of making wiring connections without using wiring lugs.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Model Number Q6TE-18SN 12
11
13
S
14
Stocked Item 16
15
17
Required Manuals IB(NA)0800476 Included 18
Q Series IDC Terminal Block Adapter

The Q6TA32 allows some I/O modules to offer an IDC (insulation displacement connector) type wiring con-
nection. This makes wiring less expensive and faster, as wires do not need to be stripped or have a lug fit-
ted. Wire is simply pushed into the receptacles on the adapter, and held firmly by the IDC connection.
Model Number Q6TA32
Stocked Item -
Required Manuals IB(NA)0800228 Included
Q Series IDC Insertion Tool

Use the Q6TA32-TOL to fit wires into the IDC receptacles of the Q6TA32.
Model Number Q6TA32-TOL
Stocked Item -
78
Q Series Program Loader EQLDR01 CPU Connection
The EQLDR-01 program loader provides a convenient handheld device that can be used to upload, store,
transfer and download programs for Basic Q CPUs that do not have a memory card slot. The EQLDR-01
also accepts standard off the shelf compact flash memory cards for inexpensive transfer of programs
from one loader to another.
Required Manuals
50EM8508-A EQLDR01 User’s Manual -
Model Number EQLDR01

Stocked Item -
Transmission Speed 115.2Kbps
Interface
Cable Length 0.2m
Power Supply Received from CPU (5VDC)
Current Consumption (5VDC) 0.31A
Weight (kg) 0.14
External Dimensions (Excluding Cable) W x H x D mm (in) 75 x 110 x 27.5 (2.95 x 4.33 x 1.08)
Q00JCPU Q00CPU QO1CPU

Internal Memory about 37s about 93s
CPU WR
Compact Flash™ Card about 36s about 96s
Internal Memory about 24s about 58s
CPU RD
Maximum Processing Time of Each Mode Compact Flash™ Card about 21s about 54s
MEM.-CF about 2s about 3s
CF-MEM. about 5s about 7s
MEM.CLR. about 6s
CF CLR.* about 2s (The processing time differs according to capacity.)
*With Compact Flash™ card capacity of 32 MB

QS Safety PAC
MELSEC QS Safety
The MELSEC Safety lineup provides innovative solutions to • Reduced wiring costs using CC-Link Safety device level network for
applications requiring accident-free user operation. For Category both Safety and Non-Safety I/O
4 Safety control, the QS Safety PLC uses TÜV certified function • Built-in User Management to the programming environment for
block programming and CC-Link Safety to integrate both safety and different levels of user access
non-safety assets into a single seamless system. Safety rated Light
Curtains, Electromechanical Switches, and Laser Scanners can all be • QS PLCs have Test Mode and Safety Mode for easy
incorporated to minimize danger to the operator. Another way to add pre-commission trouble-shooting
safety control to a non-safety system is by using the Safety Relay • Safety Relay Modules are easily integrated with existing
Modules, which provide independent Category 3 Safety I/O control and control systems
can be monitored via the Q Bus or standard CC-Link. • Safety Relay Modules require no programming and an optional
Key Features: partial system shutdown feature
• QS PLC is TÜV certified to IEC61508 SIL 3 and ISO13849-1 Category 4
• Safety Function Blocks included with standard GX Developer
programming software for easy failsafe programming
System Configuration
*
A
E
QS Safety CPU
Battery for
QCPU (Q6BAT)
C*
Base unit
D*
*B
Communication / Networking modules
Safety power supply module
* Minimum requirements
A. QS Safety CPU ........................................................................................................................................... 81
B. Base Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 82
C. Safety Power Supply Module ..................................................................................................................... 82
D. Communication / Networking Modules ...................................................................................................... 82
E. Battery (Compatible with Q Series) ............................................................................................................ 77
F. Safety Relay Modules................................................................................................................................. 85
80
Required Manuals
Overview, system configuration, general specifications, CPU module,

QSCPU User’s Manual (Hardware
SH(NA)080626 power supply module, base unit, battery, startup, EMC and LVD, No (purchase separately) -
Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
loading and installation, maintenance and inspection, troubleshooting
Overview, performance specifications, sequence program execution,

QSCPU User’s Manual (Function I/O assignment, memory and file handling, functions, communication
Explanation, Program Fundamentals) with IFM, parameters, devices, procedures for writing programs to
CPU
General description, instruction tables, configuration of instructions,

QSCPU Programming Manual
SH(NA)080628 how to read instructions, sequence instructions, basics instructions, No (purchase separately) -
(Common Instructions)
application instructions, QSCPU dedicated instructions, error codes
QSCPU Module User’s Manual Overview, specifications, EMC and LVD, loading and installation, error
IB(NA)0800340 Yes -
(Hardware) codes, transportation precautions
Overview, application example, risk assessment and safety level,

SH(NA)080613 Safety Application Guide No (purchase separately) -
precautions for the use of safety PLCs, safety application example
CC-Link Safety System Master Module Overview, specifications, mounting and installation, part names and
User’s Manual (Hardware) settings, external wiring, external dimensions
Overview, system configuration, specifications, functions, data
CC-Link Safety System Master Module
SH(NA)080600 link processing time, parameter setting, procedure before starting, No (purchase separately) -
User’s Manual
programming specifications, troubleshooting
CC-Link Safety System Remote I/O Overview, specifications, part names and settings, mounting and
Module User’s Manual (Hardware) installation, wiring, external dimensions
Overview, system configuration, specifications, functions, parameter
CC-Link Safety System Remote I/O
SH(NA)080612 setting, procedures and settings, programming, maintenance and No (purchase separately) -
Module User’s Manual
inspection, troubleshooting
A. MELSEC QS Safety CPU Specifications

Model Number QS001CPU
Stocked Item S
Processing Speed (Sequence LD XO 0.10 µs
Instruction) MOV D0 D1 0.35 µs
Program Capacity (*1) 14k steps (56 kB)
Program Memory (Drive 0) 128 kB
Memory Capacity (*1 )
Standard ROM (Drive 4) 128 kB
Program Memory 3 (*2)
Max. Number of Files Stored
Standard ROM 3 (*2)
Maximum I/O Device Points 6144 points (X/Y0 to 17FF)
Maximum Physical I/O points 1024 points (X/Y0 to 3FF)
Maximum Expansion 4 Communication / Networking modules
Communication Ports USB (B-Type), RS-232
Weight (kg) 0.29
Protection Of Degree IP2X
Notes:
1. The maximum number of executable sequence steps is as follows. (Program capacity) - (File header size (default: 34 steps)) For the details, refer to the QSCPU User’s
Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
2. Parameter, sequence program, SFC program, and device comment files can be stored.

B. MELSEC QS Safety Base Unit Specifications OUT
5V
Model Number QS034B SG

a1 b1
Stocked Item S POWER CPU I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3

FG
Expansion Slots (Excluding CPU Slot) 4

80M1 IND.CONT.E Q.
MODEL
Applicable Intelligent Function Modules QS and Q Series communication/networking modules (*1)

SERIAL PASSED
MADE IN JAPAN BD992C202H01

Weight (kg) 0.28
External Dimensions W x H x D mm (in) 245 x 98 x 44.1 (9.65 x 3.86 x 1.74)
Note: 1. Only CC-Link Safety, CC-Link IE, MELSECNET/H and Ethernet modules can be connected.
C. MELSEC QS Safety Power Supply Specifications

Model Number QS061P-A1 QS061P-A2
Stocked Item S -
Applicable Base Unit QS034B-E
Input Power Supply 100 to 120VAC +10% -15% 200 to 240VAC +10% -15%
Input Frequency 50/60Hz ±5%
Input Voltage Distortion Factor Within 5%
Max. Input Apparent Power 125VA
Inrush Current 20A within 8ms (*2)
Rated Output Current 5VDC 6A
Allowable Momentary Power Failure Period (*1) Within 20ms
Operation Indication LED indication (Normal: ON (green), Error: OFF)
Weight (kg) 0.40
Notes:
1. Allowable momentary power failure period
• An instantaneous power failure lasting less than 20ms will cause AC down to be detected, but operation will continue.
• An instantaneous power failure lasting in excess of 20ms may cause the operation to continue or initial start to take place depending on the power supply load.
2. Inrush current. When power is switched on again immediately (within 5 seconds) after power-off, an inrush current of more than the specified value (2ms or less) may flow. Reapply
power 5 or more seconds after power-off. When selecting a fuse and breaker in the external circuit, take account of the blowout, detection characteristics and above matters.
D. Intelligent Function Modules

The QS Safety PLC can be used with the CC-Link Safety Master, MELSECNET/H, CC-Link IE Field and Ethernet intelligent
function module.
MELSEC QS CC-Link Safety Network Master Specifications

Model Number QS0J61BT12
Stocked Item S
Transmission Rate Select from 156kbps/625kbps/2.5Mbps/5Mbps/10Mbps
Maximum Overall Cable Distance
1200 meters at 156kpp, 100 meters at 10Mbps
(Maximum Transmission Distance)
Maximum No. of Connectable Modules 64 modules
Remote I/O (RX, RY) : 2048 points • Remote register (RWr) : 256 points (remote device stationmaster station)
Maximum No. of Link Points Per System
Remote register (RWw): 256 points (master remote device station)
Station Type Safety remote station Standard remote station
Number of Occupied
1 Station 1 Station 2 Stations 3 Stations 4 Stations
Stations
Link Points Per RX 32 points 32 points 64 points 96 points 128 points
Remote Station
RY 32 points 32 points 64 points 96 points 128 points
RWr 0 points 4 points 8 points 12 points 16 points
RWw 0 points 4 points 8 points 12 points 16 points
Recommended Connection Cable Version 1.10 compatible CC-Link dedicated cable (*1)
Weight (kg) 0.12
Note:
1. Use BA1SJ61-S or -P certified CC-Link cable and appropriate terminating resistors.
82
CC-Link IE Field Safety Interface
Model Number QS0J71GF11-T2
Stocked Item S
Number of Connectable Master Station (Safety Station) 1 station (Up to 120 slave stations can be connected to the master station (safety station))
Stations per Network Local Station (Standard Station) 120 stations
Number of Connectable Safety Stations per Network 32 stations
Maximum Number of Asynchronous Mode 31 connections
Safety Connections per
Station Synchronous Mode 8 connections
Number of Safety Inputs/ Input 8 words
Outputs per Safety
Connection Output 8 words
Communication Speed (*1) 1Gbps
Network Topology Line topology, star topology (Coexistence of line topology and star topology is possible), and ring topology
An Ethernet cable that meets the 1000BASE-T standard: Category 5e or higher (double shielded, STP),
Connection Cable
straight cable
Ethernet Maximum Station-to-Station Distance 100m max. (Compliant with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (Category 5e))
• Line topology: 12000m (when cables are connected to 1 master station and 120 slave stations)
Overall Cable Distance • Star topology: Depends on the system configuration.
• Ring topology: 12100m (when cables are connected to 1 master station and 120 slave stations)
Number of Cascade Connections Up to 20
External Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 27.4 x 98 x 115
Weight (kg) 0.18
QS CC-Link Safety Remote I/O Module Specifications

Model Number QS0J65BTB2-12DT
Stocked Item S
Input Specifications Output Specifications
4 points (source + sink) or 2 points
No. of Input Points 8 points (Input terminals: 16 points) (*2) No. of Output Points
(source + source)
Rated Input Voltage 24VDC Rated Load Voltage 24VDC
19.2V to 28.8VDC
Rated Input Current Approx. 4.6mA Operating Load Voltage Range
(Ripple ratio: 5% or less)
Operating Voltage Range 19.2V to 28.8VDC (Ripple ratio: 5% or less) Max. Load Current 0.5A/point
ON Voltage / ON Current 15VDC/2mA or more Leakage Current at OFF 0.5mA or less
OFF Voltage / OFF Current 5VDC/0.5mA or less Max. Voltage Drop at ON 1.0VDC or less
Input Type Negative common (source) Output Type Source + sink type; Source + source type
OFF - ON 0.4ms or less (at 24VDC) OFF-ON 0.4ms or less (at 24VDC)
Response Time Response Time
ON - OFF 0.4ms or less (at 24VDC) ON-OFF 0.4ms or less (at 24VDC)
Safety Remote Station 32ms or less + filtering time Safety Remote Station Output
32ms or less
Input Response Time (1ms, 5ms, 10ms, 20ms, 50ms) Response Time
External Power Voltage 19.2V to 28.8VDC (Ripple ratio: 5% or less)
Supply Current 60mA (24VDC, with all points ON, excepting for external load current)
Points / Common 16 input points/common, 4 output points/common (Terminal block 2-wire type)
Common Current Max. 4A (Total of inputs and outputs)
No. of Stations Occupied 1 station
Safety Refresh Response Processing Time 38ms
Voltage 19.2V to 28.8VDC (Ripple ratio: 5% or less)
Module Power (*1) Current 140mA or less (24VDC, with all points ON)
Momentary Power
10ms or less
Failure Period
Level of Protection IP2X
Connection Type Screw Terminal
Weight (kg) 0.67
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 197 x 65 x 74.5
Notes:
1. The power supply connected to the QS0J65BTB2-12DT must satisfy the following conditions: (1) Reinforced insulation SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage): Hazardous potential part (48V or more) (2)
Compliance with the LVD (Low Voltage Directive) (3) Output voltage within 19.2V to 28.8VDC (Ripple ratio: 5% or less.)
2. Two inputs terminals are assigned for each input since redundant wiring is supported.

MELSEC QS CC-Link Safety Remote I/O Module Specifications
Model Number QS0J65BTS2-8D QS0J65BTS2-4T
Stocked Item S S
Number of I/O Points Input: 8 points (input terminals: 16 points) (*2) Output: 4 points (source + sink), or 2 points (source + source)
Rated Input Voltage 24VDC -
Rated Input Current Approx. 5.9 mA -
Rated Load Voltage - 24VDC
Operating Load Voltage Range 19.2 to 28.8VDC (ripple ratio: 5% or less)
ON Voltage / ON Current 15VDC or more / 2mA or more -
OFF Voltage / OFF Current 5VDC or less / 0.5 mA or less -
Max. Load Current - 0.5 A/point
Leakage Current at OFF - 0.5 mA or less
Max. Voltage Drop at ON - 1.0VDC or less
Input Type Negative common (source type) -
Output Type - Source + sink type, Source + source type
Response OFF - ON 0.4 ms or less (at 24VDC)
Time ON - OFF 0.4 ms or less (at 24VDC)
11.2 ms or less + time of noise removal filter
Safety Remote Station Input Response Time 10.4 ms or less (ON to OFF), 11.2 ms or less (OFF to ON)
(1 ms, 5 ms, 10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms)
External Power Voltage 19.2 to 28.8VDC (ripple ratio: 5% or less)
Supply Current 40 mA (at 24VDC, all points ON, not including external load current) 45 mA (at 24VDC, all points ON, not including external load current)
Points / Common 16 input points/common (spring clamp terminal block 2-wire type) 4 output points/common (spring clamp terminal block 2-wire type)
Common Current - Max. 2 A
Number of Occupied Stations 1 station
Safety Refresh Response Processing Time 9.6 ms
Voltage 19.2 to 28.8VDC (ripple ratio: 5% or less)
Module Power Current 120 mA or less (24VDC, all points ON) 95 mA or less (24VDC, all points ON)
(*1) Momentary Power Failure
10 ms or less
Period
Degree of Protection IP2X
Connection Type Screw Terminal
Weight (kg) 0.46 0.45
Applicable DIN Rail TH35-7.5Fe, TH35-7.5Al (JIS C 2812 compliant)
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 163 x 98 x 85 197 x 65 x 74.5
Notes:
1. The power supply connected to the QS0J65BTB2-8D and QS0J65BTS2-4T must satisfy the following conditions:
(1) SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage): Reinforced insulation from hazardous potential part (48 V or more) required.
(2) Compliance with the LVD (Low Voltage Directive).
(3) Output voltage must be 19.2 to 28.8 V DC (ripple ratio: 5% or less).
2. Two input terminals are assigned for each input since dual wiring is supported. Do not insert two or more wires into one terminal.
84
F. Safety Relay Modules
Function Description
Prevents damage of the safety functions due to a single failure by doubling inputs.
Input N type: Dual input with positive common and negative common
Dual Input Function Input P type: Dual input with positive commons
In the case of input N type, when a short circuit occurs between the dual inputs, a short circuit occurs between the power supply and
grounding. Therefore, power goes off by the electric fuse.
Start-Up/Off Check Function Checks that status of the safety relay module and external device are normal.
Start-Up Method Selection Function Checks that status of the safety relay module and external device are normal.
Allows to check operating status of the whole safety relay modules including extension safety relay modules by connecting to the
Monitor Function
programmable controller using programming tool.
Partial Shutdown Function With
Allows to shut off outputs of a certain module by using safety inputs of extension module.
Extension Module
QJ71E71-100 QJ71GP21 -SX QS90SR2SN-Q QJ61BT11N

POWER RUN ERR RUN PRM Q61P POWER RUN PRM
Q61P INIT COM.ERR
S
T. MODE D LINK
Z MODE D LINK
N PW X10 S PW K1 SD RD
OPEN 100M SD RD
SD RD O. ERR. ERR. X1 K2 ERR.
× 100 10 1
STATION NO.
X10
X1
MODE
PULL PULL
NC
1
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX DA
2
3
DB 4
5
DG 6
7
CC-Link
Safety Relay Module Specifications

Q Series Safety Relay Module CC-Link Safety Relay Module Extension Safety Relay Module
Model Number
QS90SR2SP-Q QS90SR2SN-Q QS90SR2SP-CC QS90SR2SN-CC QS90SR2SP-EX QS90SR2SN-EX
Applicable Safety Standard EN954-1 Category 4, ISO13849-1 PL e
Number of Safety Input Points 1 point (2 inputs)
Number of Start-Up Input Points 1 point
Number of Safety Output Points 1 point (3 outputs)
Rated Load Current Category 4: 3.6 A/point or less, Category 3: 5.0 A/point or less (250VAC/30VDC)
Response Time Until Output OFF 20 ms or less (safety input OFF to safety output OFF)
Time Time Until Output ON 50 ms or less (safety input ON to safety output ON)
Supplied from Q Series safety relay module
Module Power Supply 20.4 to 26.4VDC (ripple ratio: 5% or less) 20.4 to 26.4VDC (ripple ratio: 5% or less)
or CC-Link safety relay module.
Supplied from Q Series safety relay module
Safety Power Supply 20.4 to 26.4VDC (ripple ratio: 5% or less) 20.4 to 26.4VDC (ripple ratio: 5% or less)
or CC-Link safety relay module.
Number of Extension Modules Max. 3 extension safety relay modules Max. 3 extension safety relay modules N/A
External Connections Two-piece spring clamp terminal block
Mechanical 5,000,000 times or more
Relay Life
Electrical 100,000 times or more
N type N type N type
P type P type P type
(dual input with (dual input with (dual input with
Input Type (dual input with (dual input with (dual input with
positive common and positive common and positive common and
positive commons) positive commons) positive commons)
negative common) negative common) negative common)
Safety Relay Module Extension Cables

Model Number QS90CBL-SE01 QS90CBL-SE15
Stocked Item S S
Cable Length (m) 0.1 1.5

86
Distributed I/O
Distributed I/O
Enterprise Level
MELSECNET
CC-Link IE Control
Control Level
CC-Link IE Field
CC-Link
CC-Link Safety
Device Level
CC-Link/LT
Sensor
Level
CC-Link IE ....................................................................................................................................................... 89
CC-Link ........................................................................................................................................................... 94
CC-Link/LT .................................................................................................................................................... 119
CC-Link Safety .............................................................................................................................................. 127
Stock Product: Stock product is product MEAU makes every effort to have on hand for immediate shipment. There may be instances
when we are out of stock due to unexpected large requirements. All stock product will be indicated in this book by an “S” in the Stocked
Item columns/rows.
Non-Stock Product: Non-stock product is product supplied on an “as-needed” basis. Standard lead times of 12 - 16 weeks apply,
product is non-returnable and non-cancelable. Product listed as non-stock may change to stock product subject to increases in sales
and usage. All non-stock product will be indicated in this book by a dash “-” in the Stocked Item columns/rows.
Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Distributed I/O 87

n DISTRIBUTED I/O
Distributed I/O allows you to place I/O points close to where they are required on your machine or line. Mitsubishi Electric offers three main
approaches to putting networked I/O into a system:
Control Level:
CC-Link IE Control
CC-Link IE Control is an industry leading alternative for open control level networking. Originally introduced as MELSECNET/G, it introduces
an unprecedented 1Gbit/s Ethernet physical layer dual-loop fiber topology for system performance, surpassing any other network technology.
MELSECNET/G has been turned over to the open administration of the CC-Link Partner Association (CLPA), and is now known as CC-Link IE
Control. Also see CC-Link IE Field for Control and Device level communication; for Control the difference being share data volume and cabling.
MELSECNET/H, NET/10, NET/II, NET/B

These Mitsubishi Electric control level networks allow controller to controller networking, plus the ability to place regular rack based I/O on a
network link that operates at up to 25Mbit/s. A network node of remote I/O uses a standard controller base with a remote I/O network adapter
in place of a CPU. As a standard base unit is used, any type of regular rack based I/O or special function module may be used. This gives
tremendous flexibility for configuring remote I/O nodes. For more details on modules available, please refer to the Q Series controller section.
Note that in general, a remote I/O network is a separate network segment to a controller network.
Device Level:
CC-Link IE Field
CC-Link IE Field follows the same 1Gbit Industrial Ethernet technology as CC-Link IE Control, but uses shielded Cat5e cables and standard
RJ45 connectors for both Control and Device level communication on a single network. The flexible topology allows for both star and line
networks, or a combination of the two. The differences between CC-Link IE Control and CC-Link IE Field are share data volume, cabling, and
only CC-Link IE Field supports Device level communication.
CC-Link and CC-Link Safety

The original Control and Communication Link (CC-Link) is a high performance, open device level network that operates at up to 10Mbit/s.
Mitsubishi Electric offers extensive support for this network, with a wide variety of I/O and special function modules that sit directly on the
network, under the control of a Q, QnA, AnS/QnAS, A or FX Series controller. This section presents the I/O and special function modules
available, divided into device types. For information on other Mitsubishi Electric automation products that support CC-Link, please refer to the
other controller, HMI, VFD and Servo sections of this publication.
CC-Link also addresses the needs of critical safety systems with the addition of CC-Link Safety, a fully EC61508 SIL 3 and ISO13849-1
category 4 certified safety network when used with the MELSEC QS Safety PLC.
Profibus-DP
Profibus-DP is an alternative open device level network also widely supported by Mitsubishi Electric. This section presents the I/O choices
available. For information on other Mitsubishi Electric automation products that support Profibus, please refer to the other controller, HMI and
VFD sections of this publication.
Sensor Level:
CC-Link/LT
CC-Link/LT is a sensor level version of CC-Link. It offers a way to simply connect discrete I/O to a controller with minimum installation and
labor costs. CC-Link/LT uses a special “vampire” style connection technology to make device connections with no cutting or stripping of cable.
88
CC-Link IE
PLC engineering software
MES (Manufacturing Execution System) MES
MELSOFT GX Works2
Office
LAN (Ethernet)
MODE
RUN
ERR
USER
BAT
BOOT
HMI PLC
PULL
PULL
USB
PC Interface board
Simple motion
Q61P
Q03UDECPU
MODE MODE
RUN RUN
ERR ERR QX42-S1
USER USER
BAT BAT QY42P
BOOT BOOT
QY42P
PULL
module NEW
PULL
PULL
USB
PLC USB
Industrial switching hub PLC
Seamless
data
communication HMI Inverter Servo PC Remote I/O PLC High-speed counter Remote I/O HMI
module NEW Inverter
amplifier Interface module
board Servo Servo Servo
Production Site
NEW
amplifier amplifier amplifier
Industrial switching hub
Remote I/O Remote I/O
module NEW module NEW Extension
module NEW
PULL PULL
PULL PULL
USB USB
Analog input Analog output

module NEW module NEW Bridge Safety Safety
module PLC PLC
Ethernet NEW
adapter
* New-generation optical
network for SSCNET.
Vision sensor
Remote
I/O
CC-Link Remote Inverter CC-Link-AnyWire Safety Safety Remote

CC-Link/LT I/O PC remote remote I/O
HMI DB A20 bridge module
bridge I/O I/O
CC-Link-AnyWire
Bitty bridge module
Anywire DB A20
Wireless LAN Adapter Anywire Bitty
(Access point) Servo amplifier

C
X1 L
-2
D1 D
S3 ALT27XB-02G-P
ADDRESS
No.
Emergency Robot Warning

stop light
Analog General Sensor sensor
PC I/O I/O connection
CC-Link IE is an open 1Gbit Industrial Ethernet automation network consisting of two parts; CC-Link IE Control, and CC-Link IE Field.
CC-Link IE Control communicates over dual-loop fiber between PLCs, HMIs, and PCs with an extremely large cyclical data-sharing capacity.
CC-Link IE Field has a smaller cyclical data-sharing capacity, but communicates with both PLCs and Remote I/O stations over shielded Cat5e
cables with standard RJ45 connectors in a star, line, or combination topology. CC-Link IE Field uses L Series Slave Head Stations for remote
I/O. Adding an Ethernet Adapter to the CC-Link IE Field network allows full access to the network from standard TCP/IP devices like PCs, HMIs,
and sensors.
CC-Link IE Products
Product Model Number Description Stocked Item
QJ71GP21-SX Interface for iQ Platform (QnU CPU) S
QJ71GP21S-SX Interface for iQ Platform (QnU CPU), w/ redundant power -
Master/Slave
Q80BD-J71GP21-SX PCI interface card -
CC-Link IE Control Q80BD-J71GP21S-SX PCI interface card, w/ redundant power -
IE Control Interface GT15-J71GP23-SX Interface for GOT1000 HMI (GT16/GT15) S
Fiber Optic Cordset Pre-made cordset. _ = 1m, 2m, 3m, 5m, 10m, 15m, 20m, 25m,
QG-_M-B-LL S
(Cable with Connectors) 30m, 35m, 40m, 50m length
QJ71GF11-T2 Interface for iQ Platform (QnU CPU) S
Master/Slave LJ71GF11-T2 Interface for L Series S
QS0J71GF11-T2 Interface for QS Safety -
Slave Head Station LJ72GF15-T2 Remote I/O head station for L Series S
IE Field Interface GT15-J71GF13-T2 Interface for GOT1000 HMI (GT16/GT15) S
Fiber Optic Cordset FR-A7NCE Interface for A700 Series Inverters S
(Cable with Connectors) MR-J3-T10 Interface for MR-J3 Servo Amplifiers S
CC-Link IE Field Ethernet Adapter NZ2GF-ETB SLMP interface to standard TCP/IP products -
NZ2EHG-T8 Industrial Ethernet switch, 1Gbps S
Ethernet Switch
NZ2EHF-T8 Industrial Ethernet switch, 100Mbps S
Remote I/O NZ2GF2B1-16_ Digital remote I/O products S
Analog I/O NZ2GF2B-60_ Analog remote I/O products S
High-Speed Counter NZ2GFCF-D62PD2 High-speed counter module -
Extension I/O NZ2EX2B1-16_ Extension remote I/O modules S
CC-Link Bridge NZ2GF-CCB CC-Link IE Field to CC-Link bridge module S

n DISTRIBUTED I/O
CC-Link IE Field Remote I/O
• Directly connectable on a CC-Link IE Field network
• One extension module max. can be added to a Remote I/O, Analog, or High-Speed Counter Module
• Fast logic function performs logic locally in the module
• Certifications: UL, cUL, CE
Maximum Load
Number Rated Number Rated Current External Internal Dimensions
Input Output Common Stocked
Type Model Number of Input Input of Output Load Connection Current (W x H x D)
Type Type Connection Item
Points Voltage Points Voltage Wire Type Consumption mm
1
1 Point
Common
DC One wire 16 points
NZ2GF2B1-16D - 16 24VDC - - - - 180mA 133 x 50 x 68 S
input type 1 common
Standard Transistor One wire 16 points
NZ2GF2B1-16T - - - 16 12/24VDC 0.5A 4A 190mA 133 x 50 x 68 S
I/O Block Sink type 1 common
Transistor One wire 16 points
NZ2GF2B1-16TE - - - 16 12/24VDC 0.5A 4A 190mA 133 x 50 x 68 S
Source type 1 common
DC One wire 16 points
NZ2EX2B1-16D - 16 24VDC - - - - 20mA 84.5 x 50 x 68 S
input type 1 common
Extension Transistor One wire 16 points
NZ2EX2B1-16T - - - 16 12/24VDC 0.5A 4A 30mA 84.5 x 50 x 68 S
I/O Block Sink type 1 common
Transistor One wire 16 points
NZ2EX2B1-16TE - - - 16 12/24VDC 0.5A 4A 30mA 84.5 x 50 x 68 S
Source type 1 common
90
CC-Link IE Field Analog Modules
• A/D and D/A module have 4 channels (voltage/current) • Averaging can be set to be triggered by extension I/O
• Switchable ranges module
• Handles analog ranges ±10VDC and 0~ 20mA • Certifications: UL, cUL, CE
Analog Input
Model Number NZ2GF2B-60AD4
Stocked Item S
Voltage -10 to +10VDC (input resistance 1M)
Analog Input
Current 0 to 20mA DC (input resistance 250)
Digital Resolution 16 bit + sign (-16384 to 16383)
Digital Output Accuracy Maximum

Input Input Range
Value Ambient Temperature 0 to 55°C Resolution
-10 to +10V 0.625mV
“± 0.2% (20mA)”
User range setting 1 (-10 to +10V) -16000 to 16000 0.5mV
Input/Output Characteristics Accuracy Voltage User range setting 2 (-5 to +5V) 0.25mV
(Accuracy Relative to the Maximum Digital
Output Value) 0 to 5V “± 0.2% (10mA)” 0.3125mV
0 to 16000
1 to 5V 0.25mV
0 to 20mA 1.25μA
0 to 16000
Current 4 to 20mA “± 0.2% (40μA)” 1μA
User range setting 2 (-20 to +20mA) -16000 to 16000 1μA
Input Range Switching Yes

Offset/Gain Setting Yes, function keys on module
Maximum Conversion Speed 400μs/channel
Station Type Remote device station
Between communication system terminal and all analog input terminals: Photocoupler isolation/ Between power supply system
Isolation Method
terminal and all analog input terminals: Transformer insulation/ Between input channels: Non-insulation
External Connection Method RJ45 connector (communication), terminal block (power supply), 18-point terminal block (analog input area)
Applicable Wire Size Power supply: core: 0.5 to 1.5mm2 (20 to 16 AWG) I/O: core: 0.3 to 2.0mm2 (22 to 14 AWG)
Internal Current Consumption (24VDC) 230mA
Weight (kg) 0.3
External Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 133 x 50 x 68
Analog Output
Model Number NZ2GF2B-60DA4
Stocked Item S
Digital Resolution 16 bit + sign (-16384 to 16383, -288 to 12287, -12288 to 12287)
Voltage -10 to 10VDC (external load resistance value: 1k to 1M)
Analog Output
Current 0 to 20mADC (external load resistance value: 0 to 600)
Accuracy
Digital Output Maximum
Input Input Range Ambient Temp. Ambient Temp.
Value Resolution
0 to 55°C 25 ± 5°C
-10 to +10V 0.625mV ± 0.2%
± 0.3% (30mA)
User range setting 1 (-10 to +10V) -16000 to 16000 0.5mV (20mA)
Input/Output Characteristics Accuracy
(Accuracy Relative to the Maximum Digital Voltage User range setting 2 (-5 to +5V) 0.25mV
Output Value) 0 to 5V 0.3125mV ± 0.3% (15mA) ± 0.2% (10mA)
0 to 16000
1 to 5V 0.25mV
0 to 20mA 1.25μA
0 to 16000
Current 4 to 20mA 1μA ± 0.3% (60μA) ± 0.2% (40μA)
User range setting 2 (-20 to +20mA) -16000 to 16000 1μA
Output Range Switching For each channel

Offset/Gain Setting Yes, function keys on module
Output Short-Circuit Protection Protected
Maximum Conversion Speed 100μs/channel
Between communication system terminal and all analog input terminals: Photocoupler isolation/ Between power supply system
Isolation Method
terminal and all analog input terminals: Transformer insulation/ Between input channels: Non-insulation
External Connection Method RJ45 connector (communication), terminal block (power supply), 18-point terminal block (analog output area)
Applicable Wire Size Power supply: core: 0.5 to 1.5mm2 (20 to 16 AWG) I/O: core: 0.3 to 2.0mm2 (22 to 14 AWG)
RAV1.25-3 (compliant with JIS C 2805), V2-MS3 (JST Mfg. Co., Ltd), RAP2-3SL (Nippon Tanshi Co., Ltd.), TGV2-3N
(Nichifu Co., Ltd.)
Internal Current Consumption (24VDC) 325mA
Weight (kg) 0.3

n DISTRIBUTED I/O
CC-Link Bridge Module
• Enables simple access to CC-Link deivces on a CC-Link IE Field network
• Connect up to 64 CC-Link Ver. 1 modules
• Certifications: UL, cUL, CE
Model Number NZ2GF-CCB

Stocked Item S
CC-Link IE Field Station Type Intelligent device station
Compatible CC-Link Version Ver. 1.10
Up to 64 modules connectable with the following conditions
a: Number of modules occupying 1 station
b: Number of modules occupying 2 stations
Condition 1 {(1 x a) + (2 x b) + (3 x c)+ (4 x d)} ≤ 64
Number of Connected CC-Link Modules c: Number of modules occupying 3 stations
d: Number of modules occupying 4 stations
A: Number of remote I/O stations ≤ 64
Condition 2 (16 x A) + (54 x B) ≤ 2304
B: Number of remote device stations ≤ 42
Transmission Speed Selectable among 156kbps/625kbps/2.5Mbps/5Mbps/10Mbps
External Power Supply 24VDC (20.4 to 28.8VDC), Current consumption: 290mA
Weight (kg) 0.38
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 160 x 69.5 x 68
CC-Link IE Field High-Speed Counter Module

• 32 bit counter • PWM output function
• 5/24VDC (2 to 5 mA input) or differential input • Certifications: UL, cUL, CE
• Switchable counting speed up to 8Mpps
Model Number NZ2GFCF-D62PD2
Stocked Item -
Counting Speed Selector Switch Setting Differential input DC input
Phase 1-phase input (1 multiple / 2 multiples), 2-phase input (1 multiple / 2 multiples / 4 multiples), CW/CCW
Counting Input Signal Signal Level EIA Standards RS-422-A, differential line driver level
5/24VDC, 4 to 8mA
(øA, øB) (AM26LS31 [Texas Instruments] or equivalent)
Counting 1 Phase Input 4Mpps 200kpps
Speed
(Maximum) 2 Phase Input 8Mpps 200kpps
Model Count, subtraction count, Linear counter format, ring counter format, Preset/replace function, latch counter function
Counter
Minimum Count Pulse Width
1-phase input (1 multiple/ 2-phase input (1 multiple/ 1-phase input (1 multiple/ 2-phase input (1 multiple/
2 multiples), CW/CCW 2 multiples/4 multiples) 2 multiples), CW/CCW 2 multiples/4 multiples)
Comparison Range 32-bit signed binary
Coincidence Output
Comparison Result Setting value < count value, setting value = count value, setting value > count value
EIA Standards RS-422-A, differential line driver level
Phase Z 5/24VDC, 4 to 8mA: 2 points
(AM26LS31 [Texas Instruments] or equivalent): 2 points
External Input
Function Start 5/24VDC, 7 to 12mA: 2 points
Latch Counter 5/24VDC, 7 to 12mA: 2 points
External Output Coincidence Output Transistor (sink type) output: 4 points 5 to 24VDC 0.1A/point, 0.4A/common
Power Supply Voltage 20.4 to 26.4VDC
Current Consumption (at 24VDC) 220mA
Applicable Connector for External Wiring A6CON1, A6CON2, A6CON4 (sold separately)
External Device 0.3mm² (22 AWG) (A6CON1 and A6CON4), 0.088 to 0.24mm² (28 to 24 AWG) (A6CON2)
Power Supply Core: 0.5 to 1.5mm² (20 to 16 AWG)
TE 0.5-10 (Nichifu Co. Ltd.) [Applicable wire size: 0.5mm2], TE 0.75-10 (Nichifu Co. Ltd.) [Applicable wire size: 0.75mm²],
TE 1.0-10 (Nichifu Co. Ltd.) [Applicable wire size: 0.9 to 1.0mm²], TE 1.5-10 (Nichifu Co. Ltd.) [Applicable wire size: 1.25
Applicable Solderless Terminal to 1.5mm²], AI 0.5-10WH (Phoenix Contact Co. Ltd.) [Applicable wire size: 0.5mm²], AI 0.75-10GY (Phoenix Contact Co.
Ltd.) [Applicable wire size: 0.75mm²], AI 1-10RD (Phoenix Contact Co. Ltd.) [Applicable wire size: 1.0mm²], AI 1.5-10BK
(Phoenix Contact Co. Ltd.) [Applicable wire size: 1.5mm²]
Weight (kg) 0.25
Dimension (W x H x D) mm 133 × 68 × 50
92
CC-Link IE Field Ethernet Adapter
The Ethernet Adapter is used to add standard Ethernet TCP/IP devices onto a CC-Link IE Field network, like PCs,
GOT1000 HMIs, and 3rd party devices. These Ethernet TCP/IP devices are bridged into the control network using
Seamless Message Protocol (SLMP), which also enables use of standard MC Protocol and MELSOFT programming
port protocol. The Ethernet Adapter is DIN-rail mounted, separate from other controllers or hardware.
Model Number NZ2GF-ETB

Stocked Item S
Input Power Supply 24VDC (-35% to +30%)
Communication Speed 1Gbps or 100Mbps
Network Topology Star, Line, Mixed Star and Line, and Ring
Communication Port CC-Link IE Field network port x2, Ethernet TCP/IP
Maximum Stations per Network 121
Maximum Station-to-Station Distance 100m
Maximum Ethernet TCP/IP Devices Per
Up to 32
Ethernet Adapter
Connection Cable Ethernet cable (Category 5e or higher, with shielded RJ45 connectors)
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 135 x 90 x 109
Weight (kg) 0.7
CC-Link IE Field Supported L Series I/O Modules

Product Model Number Description Stocked Item
L61P L Series PSU, 100-240VAC, 5VDC 5A S
Power Supply (REQUIRED)
L63P L Series PSU, 24VDC, 5VDC 5A S
LX10 L Series 16pt 100-240VAC Input, Screw Terminals S
LX28 L Series 8pt 100-240VAC Input, Screw Terminals S
Digital Inputs LX40C6 L Series 16pt 24VDC Input, Sink/Source, Screw Terminals S
LX41C4 L Series 32pt 24VDC Input, Sink/Source, 40 pin Connector S
LX42C4 L Series 64pt 24VDC Input, Sink/Source, 40 pin Connector x2 S
LY10R2 L Series 16pt Relay Output, Screw Terminals S
LY20S6 L Series 16pt 264VAC Triac Input, Screw Terminals S
LY40NT5P L Series 16pt 12-24VDC Sink Transistor Output, Screw Terminals S
LY40PT5P L Series 16pt 12-24VDC Source Transistor Output, Screw Terminals S
Digital Outputs
LY41NT1P L Series 32pt 12-24VDC Sink Transistor Output, 40 pin Connector S
LY41PT1P L Series 32pt 12-24VDC Source Transistor Output, 40 pin Connector S
LY42NT1P L Series 64pt 12-24VDC Sink Transistor Output, 40 pin Connector x2 S
LY42PT1P L Series 64pt 12-24VDC Source Transistor Output, 40 pin Connector x2 S
L60AD4 L Series 4ch Analog Input, Voltage/Current, Scaling, Error History S
Analog I/O
L60DA4 L Series 4ch Analog Output, Voltage/Current, Scaling, Error History S
L60TCTT4 L Series 4ch Temperature Control (Thermocouple) S
L60TCRT4 L Series 4ch Temperature Control (PT100) S
Temperature Control
L60TCTT4BW L Series 4ch Temperature Control (Thermocouple) with Wire Break S
L60TCRT4BW L Series 4ch Temperature Control (PT100) with Wire Break S
LD62 L Series 2ch High-Speed Counter, 5/12/24VDC Input, 200KHz S
High-Speed Counter
LD62D L Series 2ch High-Speed Counter, Differential Driver Input, 500KHz S
LD75D4 L Series 4-axis Pulse Positioning, 200Kpps, Positioning Data S
Positioning Module (*1)
LD75P4 L Series 4-axis Differential Driver Positioning, 4Mpps, Positioning Data S
LD77MH4 L Series 4-axis SSCNETIII Motion, Positioning Data Table, Cam, Encoder, Phase Compensation S
Motion Module (*1)
LD77MH16 L Series 16-axis SSCNETIII Motion, Position Data Table, Cam, Encoder, Phase Compensation S
CC-Link Interface LJ61BT11 L Series CC-Link Ver.2 Master/Local Station S
LJ71C24 L Series 2ch Serial Communication, RS-232, RS-422/485 S
Serial Communication
LJ71C24-R2 L Series 2ch Serial Communication, RS-232 x2 S
End-Cover (Accessory) (*2) L6EC-ET L Series End-Cover with Error Output Relay S
Note: See L Series PLC section for more information. CC-Link IE Field Remote I/O Head Station must be setup using GX Works2 version 1.31H or later. See Software section for more information.
1. Requires LJ72GF15-T2 with Serial Number starting with 12081 or higher.
2. The LJ72GF15-T2 Head Station is supplied with a standard End-Cover without an Error Output Relay.

n DISTRIBUTED I/O
CC-Link
Q Series Supervisory PC
Automation
Platform
L Series PLC
iQ Platform Legacy
A/QnA Series Controller
E700 Series
AC Drives
GOT1000 HMI FX Series Micro PLC

rd Party
3rd arty Intelligent Devices
Robot
EnergyPAQ
D75 Dual Axis

Motion
Controller
Remote Program
Interface Remote Modules:
I/O, Analog, High- Third Party Products:
Speed Controllers, Sensors, Valves, Etc.
e
RTD, Etc.
Lev
vic
De
el
MR-J3/Motor
Laptop PC Servo Amp
Solution
ST Slice IO
Control and Communication Link (CC-Link) is an open network administered as a fully open architecture by the CC-Link Partner Association
(CLPA). Currently over 1000 products are CC-Link certified.
CC-Link was designed from the outset as a “flat” network. This means it offers both high speed response of I/O performance, but also high
volumes of data communication as required in more complex distributed systems. CC-Link guarantees a full 10Mbit/s performance across the
whole network, regardless of device type, eliminating hidden bottle necks, common with other open systems. While configuration software is
not mandatory, GX Configurator-CC offers an intuitive, graphical network configuration tool for setting up and troubleshooting a system. Both
standard GX Developer and GX Works2 include built-in configuration tools for CC-Link.
CC-Link offers you the freedom to integrate a wide variety of automation components into a single, seamless automation system, including any
of the following items on the network:
• Master or local controllers (Q, L, FX)
• HMIs
• VFDs
• Discrete I/O (in a wide variety of types and configurations)
• Analog I/O
• High speed counters
• Motion controllers
• RTD/Thermocouple modules
• PC stations via PC-link cards
• Robots
• Energy Monitor
94
ST Series Slice Type Remote I/O
1 Ch Analog Output Module

16 Pt Digital 16 Pt Digital
Input Module Output Module 2 Ch Analog Output Module
A B C D D
Head Station 2 Pt Digital Input Module Power Supply Module
Power Supply Module 4 Pt Digital Input Module 2 Ch Analog Input Module

2 Pt Digital Input Module 2 Pt Digital Output Module Power Feeding Module
A. Head Stations ................................................................................................................................................ 95

B. Power Supply Modules .................................................................................................................................. 96
C. Digital I/O Modules ........................................................................................................................................ 96
D. Analog I/O Modules ....................................................................................................................................... 97
E. Base Modules and Accessories ..................................................................................................................... 98
The ST Series Remote I/O solution, where “ST” stands for “Slice Terminal” after their extremely slim profile (~0.5in), places easily-expandable
remote I/O devices on decentralized head stations. This allows users to mix-and-match between digital and analog I/O types on a single
network node. This product promotes ease of design flexibility and ease of maintenance, including online I/O module replacement. The ST
Series has dedicated software which is used for system configuration, commissioning, and online troubleshooting and diagnostics. Supporting
both CC-Link and PROFIBUS/DP, this product is perfect for applications with modular remote I/O requirements.
Key Features:
• Network Head Stations for CC-Link and PROFIBUS/DP • Online Module Change without rewiring
• Mix-and-match I/O types: Digital and Analog • Selectable Spring or Screw clamp terminals
• I/O-count expansion as low as 2-point up to 16-point; • Single software: GX Configurator-ST Slice module
Head module
63 slices max • DIN Rail mounting
DIN rail
A. Head Stations
The head station is the network interface that connects the remote I/O node to its network master.
Head stations are the only ST Series modules that do not require a separate base module. Base module
Model Number ST1H-BT ST1H-PB

Stocked Item S S
Certification CE CE
Communication Protocol CC-Link PROFIBUS/DP
Communication Interface CC-Link RS-485 (D-SUB 9-pin)
Operation Modes Remote Device Station Synch mode, Freeze mode
Max. Network Distance 1200m 4800m (with 3 repeaters)
Programming Interface RS-232 Mini-DIN
Modules Per Head Station 63 Slices Max.
Internal Power Consumption 410mA 530mA
External Power Supply ST1PSD
Weight (kg) 0.11 0.10
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 50.5 x 114.5 x 74.5

n DISTRIBUTED I/O
B. Power Supply Modules
There are two lines of power to consider; 5VDC for the back-plane communication, and 24VDC for the Head Station and I/O modules.
The ST Series is run off of 24VDC power, but may require more than one power supply module and/or type depending on the size and
contents of the system configuration.
Model Number ST1PSD ST1PDD
Stocked Item S S
Certification CE CE
Occupied Slices 2 1
Power Supply 24VDC (±20%)
Internal Power Consumption (5VDC) - 60mA
Max. Output Current (5VDC) 2.0A -
Max. Output Current (24VDC) 8A 8A
Weight (kg) 0.06 0.03
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 25.2 x 55.4 x 74.1 12.6 x 55.4 x 74.1
24VDC Spring Clamp ST1B-S4P2-H-SET ST1B-S4P2-D
Applicable Module Power Screw Clamp ST1B-E4P2-H-SET ST1B-E4P2-D
Base Modules 5VDC Bus Spring Clamp ST1B-S4P2-R-SET -
Refresh Screw Clamp ST1B-E4P2-R-SET -
C. Digital I/O Modules

The ST Series Digital Input/Output modules come in various sizes and capacities, with counts as low as 2 points and as high as 16 points.
These modules can be assembled in any order and mixed with analog I/O modules as well. Each I/O module requires a corresponding base
module, which will be individually keyed to that type of I/O module after the first use. This prevents spare modules to be placed in incorrect
position during maintenance such as Online Module Change.
Digital Input Modules

Model Number ST1X2-DE1 ST1X4-DE1 ST1X16-DE1 ST1X1616-DE1-S1
Certification CE CE CE CE
Occupied Slices 1 1 8 8
Number of Input Points 2 4 16 32
Rated Input Voltage 24VDC (+20/-15%)
Rated Input Current 4mA 4mA 4mA 5mA
Minimum Input Response Speed 0.5/1.5ms or less
5VDC Internal Power Consumption 85 95 120 200
Weight (kg) 0.03 0.03 0.11 0.11
Spring Clamp ST1B-S4X2 ST1B-S6X4 ST1B-S4X16 ST1B-S6X32
Applicable Base Modules
Screw Clamp ST1B-E4X2 ST1B-E6X4 ST1B-E4X16 ST1B-E6X32
Digital Output Modules

Model Number ST1Y2-TE2 ST1Y16-TE2 ST1Y2-TPE3 ST1Y16-TPE3 ST1Y2-TE8 ST1Y2-R2
Certification CE CE CE CE CE CE
Occupied Slices 1 8 1 8 1 1
Number of Output Points and Type 2 Transistor 16 Transistor 2 Transistor 16 Transistor 16 Transistor 2 Relay
24VDC (+20/-
Rated Load Voltage 24VDC (+20/-15%)
15%), 240VAC
24VDC 2A or
Maximum Load Current 0.5A/pt, 1A/com 0.5A/pt, 4A/com 1A/pt, 2A/com 1A/pt, 4A/com 2A/pt, 4A/com 240VAC 2A / point,
4A/com
OFF-ON 1ms or less 0.5ms or less 1ms or less 10ms or less
Response Time
ON-OFF 1ms or less 1.5ms or less 1ms or less 12ms or less
Protection Function - - Thermal and Short Circuit Protection - -
5VDC Internal Power Consumption 90mA 150mA 95mA 160mA 95mA 90mA
Weight (kg) 0.03 0.11 0.03 0.11 0.04 0.04
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 12.6 x 55.4 x 74.1 100.8 x 55.4 x 74.1 12.6 x 55.4 x 74.1 100.8 x 55.4 x 74.1 12.6 x 55.4 x 74.1
Spring Clamp ST1B-S3Y2 ST1B-S3Y16 ST1B-S3Y2 ST1B-S3Y16 ST1B-S3Y2 ST1B-S4IR2
Screw Clamp ST1B-E3Y2 ST1B-E3Y16 ST1B-E3Y2 ST1B-E3Y16 ST1B-E3Y2 ST1B-E4IR2
96
D. Analog I/O Modules
The ST Series Analog Input/Output modules add 1 to 2 channels of analog-to-digital or digital-to-analog conversion per slice. These modules
can be assembled in any order and mixed with digital I/O modules as well. Each I/O module requires a corresponding base module, which
will be individually keyed to that type of I/O module after the first use. This prevents spare modules to be placed in incorrect position during
maintenance such as Online Module Change.
Analog Input Modules

Model Number ST1AD2-V ST1AD2-I ST1TD2 ST1RD2
Certification CE CE CE CE
Occupied Slices 1 1 1 1
Number of Input Channels 2 2 2 2
Thermocouple Input:
-10 to +10V, 0 to +10V, 0 to
Analog Input 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA K,T:0.3°C; E:0.2°C; J:0.1°C; PT100/PT1000
5V, 1 to 5V
B:0.7°C; R,S:0.8°C; N:0.4°C
Absolute Maximum Input ±15V ±30mA ±4V, ±80μV
Resolution 12bit+sign 4μV 0.1°C
Cold junction temperature
Conversion Speed 0.1ms per channel compensation setting not set: 80ms per channel
30ms/ch, set: 60ms/ch
5VDC Internal Power Consumption 110mA 95mA 80mA
Weight (kg) 0.04
Spring Clamp ST1B-S4IR2 ST1B-S4TD2
Screw Clamp ST1B-E4IR2 ST1B-E4TD2
Analog Output Modules

Model Number ST1DA2-V-F01 ST1DA1-I-F01
Stocked Item S S
Certification CE CE
Occupied Slices 1 1
Number of Output Channels 2 1
Analog Output Range -10 to +10V, 0 to +10V, 0 to 5V, 1 to 5V 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA
Absolute Maximum Input ±15V ±30mA
Resolution 12bit+sign
Conversion Speed 0.1ms per channel
5VDC Internal Power Consumption 95mA
Weight (kg) 0.04
Spring Clamp ST1B-S4IR2
Screw Clamp ST1B-E4IR2
Absolute Encoder Input Module

Model Number ST1SS1
Stocked Item S
Certification CE
Occupied Slices 2
Counting Range 31-bit binary (0 to 2147483647)
Resolution 2 to 31bits
SSI Baud Rate 125kHz, 250kHz, 500kHz, 1MHz, 2MHz
External Input 1pt, 24VDC, 12mA
5VDC Internal Power Consumption (mA) 80
Weight (kg) 0.04
Spring Clamp ST1B-S4IR2
Screw Clamp ST1B-E4IR2

n DISTRIBUTED I/O
E. Base Modules and Accessories
The ST Series Slice I/O system requires a base module for each slice that mounts to the DIN Rail and houses the wiring and I/O module.
With the signiicant system size reduction, the ST Series also has optional markers which can be used to improve ease-of-understanding for
maintenance and future system service. All base modules and accessories are STOCK items.
Required Base Module (Choose Spring/Screw) Optional Accessories (*1)
Product Model Number Description
Spring Clamp Screw Terminal Extra Coding Element
ST1H-BT CC-Link Head Station - - -
Head Stations
ST1H-PB PROFIBUS Head Station - - -
Head Station Power Supply ST1B-S4P2-H-SET ST1B-E4P2-H-SET
Bus Refresh Module ST1PSD
Power Modules Expansion Power Supply ST1B-S4P2-R-SET ST1B-E4P2-R-SET ST1A-CKY-06
Service Power Module ST1PDD I/O Module Power Supply ST1B-S4P2-D ST1B-E4P2-D
ST1X2-DE1 2pt, 24VDC ST1B-S4X2 ST1B-E4X2
Input Modules (Source) ST1A-CKY-02
ST1X1616-DE1-S1 32pt, 24VDC ST1B-S6X32 ST1B-E6X32
Digital I/O ST1Y2-TE2 2pt SOURCE Trans, 24VDC, 0.5A
Modules ST1Y2-TPE3 2pt SOURCE Trans, 24VDC, 1A ST1B-S3Y2 ST1B-E3Y2
ST1Y2-TE8 2pt SOURCE Trans, 24VDC, 2A ST1A-CKY-08
Output Modules
ST1Y16-TE2 16pt SOURCE Trans, 24VDC, 0.5A
ST1B-S3Y16 ST1B-E3Y16
ST1Y16-TPE3 16pt SOURCE Trans, 24VDC, 1A
ST1Y2-R2 2pt Relay, 240VAC / 24VDC, 2A ST1A-CKY-17
ST1AD2-V 2ch Voltage Input ST1A-CKY-13
Analog Input Modules
ST1AD2-I 2ch Current Input ST1B-S4IR2 ST1B-E4IR2 ST1A-CKY-14
Analog I/O ST1DA2-V-F01 2ch Voltage Output ST1A-CKY-11
Analog Output Modules
Modules ST1DA1-I-F01 2ch Current Output ST1A-CKY-12
Temperature Input ST1TD2 Thermocouple Input -
ST1B-S4TD2 ST1B-E4TD2
Modules ST1RD2 PT100, PT1000 Input -
Absolute Encoder Input Module ST1SS1 SSI Adapter ST1B-S4IR2 ST1B-E4IR2 -
Note: 1. Model numbers include 10 pieces.
The ST Series is made to be DIN Rail mounted. Use the brackets and plates included with the head stations to ix the system in place. Spares are
available as follows.
Model Number Stocked Item Description
ST1A-EPL S Included with the head module (1 piece)
ST1A-EBR S Included with the head module (2 pieces)
After a base module is installed with a slice module the irst time, it is coded for that speciic type of slice module. This is to ensure that
replacement slice modules are itted to the correct base module and wiring. Replacement Coding Elements are available.
Coding element (male part)
Coding element (male and female parts)

Coding element (female part)
Before shipment
Once slice module is
mounted on base module
98
Base Module Marker
Base module markers and wiring markers also help prevent future mistakes during maintenance and service. They are available as shown below.
ST1A-BMK-50 S For No. 1 to 50
Note: Model numbers include 10pcs
Base module markers
Base module
Wire Marker Color Wire Type

Wiring marker
Black Signal wire
Red DC Power Supply (+24V; +15V)
Blue -, 0V, N
Base module Red-Blue System power supply
Yellow-Green FG
Green Shield
Brown L1 phase

ST1A-WMK-BL S Terminal mark, blue (-, DV, N)
ST1A-WMK-RD S Terminal mark, red (24VDC, 5VDC)
ST1A-WMK-GN S Terminal mark, green (Shield)
ST1A-WMK-BK S Terminal mark, black (Signal wire)
ST1A-WMK-BR S Terminal mark, brown (L1)
ST1A-WMK-RD/BL S Terminal mark, red/blue (Module driving power supply)
ST1A-WMK-GN/YL S Terminal mark, green/yellow (FG,(PF))
ST1A-WMK-WH S Terminal mark, white
Note: Model numbers include 10 pieces

n DISTRIBUTED I/O
Guide to CC-Link Dedicated I/O Blocks and Special Function Modules
This section presents the current line-up of CC-Link dedicated I/O blocks and special function modules. For network master modules, please
refer to the appropriate controller section. Before using this guide, please read the following guide to nomenclature:
Guide to CC-Link Dedicated I/O Block Nomenclature • Generic Model Number Format
AJ65 BT -
Symbol Module Type External Load Symbol Device Type Symbol Sink or Source Symbol Special Features
Symbol
Connection Method
F Waterproof (IP67) A 120 VAC Sink (no symbol) Inputs 1 Fast switching inputs
1 1 wire type Inputs Inputs
S Compact type D 24 VDC E Source Outputs 1 Low leakage output current
2 2 wire type
V Vertical format R Relay Sink (no symbol) 1 Fast switching inputs
3 3 wire type Outputs
Outputs S Triac / SSR E Source Combination 2 Low leakage output current
Symbol Connector Type 4 4 wire type
T Transistor Sink (no symbol) Fast switching inputs & low
3 wire type on inputs, 3
M12 waterproof (IP67) 32 Combination leakage output current
A 2 wire type on outputs Transistor input /
threaded connector Combination DT E Source
4 wire type on inputs, transistor output
B Screw terminal block 42
2 wire type on outputs
One touch connector f or
C Symbol Number of I/O Points
I/O connections
CF FCN connector Symbol Points 8 8 points
One touch connector for None 1 Common 16 16 points
CU I/O, power and
network connections B 2 Commons 32 32 points
Note on “1-wire”, “2-wire”, “3-wire” and “4-wire” terminology

Throughout the CC-Link blocks, we reference these terms. These are concise definitions for the following ways to connect I/O devices:
• 1 wire: One side of the load is connected to the I/O module terminal block. The other side is connected to a common terminal shared by
all devices.
• 2 wire: One side of the load is connected to the I/O module terminal block. The other side is connected to a dedicated common terminal for
that load on the terminal block. Note that in some cases, the common terminals may be connected internally.
• 3 wire: The I/O block is configured to accept loads with three connections (such as various types of sensor, etc)
• 4 wire: As three wire, but configured for four connection devices.
Note on connector types

Various different types of connector styles are available on the CC-Link blocks, as follows:
NOTE: IN GENERAL, BLOCKS ARE NOT SUPPLIED WITH CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES (IF REQUIRED).
PLEASE ENSURE YOU HAVE ALL NECESSARY CONNECTORS BEFORE BEGINNING AN INSTALLATION.
• Screw terminals: These are conventional screw terminals. Note that all wiring will require cutting, stripping, and terminating with a
crimped spade or ring type lug to insure a reliable connection.
• FCN connector: These are 40 pin connectors that allow fast connection and disconnection of a whole group of I/O in one action.
The following types of FCN connector are available:
Model Number Certification Number of Pins Wiring Type Connector Type Stocked Item
A6CON1 UL • cUL 40 Solder FCN S
A6CON2 UL • cUL 40 Crimp FCN S
A6CON3 UL • cUL 40 IDC FCN S
One Touch Connector (OTC): OTCs offer significant installation and maintenance benefits as follows:
• IDC (insulation displacement connector) type connection avoids need for stripping or terminating wiring with lugs. Simply cut wiring to
length, insert into connector and snap shut to make a reliable connection. These are available for I/O, network and power connections.
• Easily connected and disconnected individually or in groups to assist maintenance
• Compact design minimizes I/O block size
• Available in a variety of wiring gauge sizes and colors for identification
• Shipped in boxes of 20 connectors; divide quantity required by 20, then round up to next whole number for correct order quantity.
Model Number Gauge Size (AWG) Color Qty. Per Box Comments Stocked Item
A6CON-P214 26-24 Transparent 20 For I/O S
A6CON-P220 26-24 Yellow 20 For I/O -
A6CON-P514 22-20 Red 20 For I/O -
A6CON-P520 22-20 Blue 20 For I/O -
100
Water resistant M12 connectors: Selected I/O blocks are available in an IP67 water resistant format. These use connectors that use an
M12 metric threaded connector to make all connections. Benefits include:
• Water tight connections for installations where exposure to liquids is required
• In some installations, these blocks may be mounted directly on a machine without the need for an enclosure, reducing system cost.
Miscellaneous accessories: The following accessories are also available: Note the quantity per box and calculate the correct order
quantity accordingly.
Model Number Quantity Per Box Comments Stocked Item

BA1SJ61-S N/A Three conductor, CLPA certified, signal only CC-Link cable. Sold by the meter. S
Five conductor, CLPA certified, signal and power CC-Link cable.
BA1SJ61-P N/A S
Sold by the meter.
A6CON-L5P 10 OTC network connector S
A6CON-PW5P 10 OTC power connector S
A6CON-LJ5P 5 OTC Network on-line connector (*1) S
A6CON-PWJ5P 5 OTC Power on-line connector (*2) S
A6CON-TR11 1 Terminating resistor (*3) S
A6CAP-DC1 20 Dust cap to protect unused connectors on IP67 modules (*4) -
A6CAP-WP1 20 Metal waterproof cap to protect unused connectors on IP67 modules (*4) -
A6CAP-WP2 20 Plastic waterproof cap to protect unused connectors on IP67 modules (*4) -
A6PLT-J65V1 1 DIN rail mount for vertical format blocks (single width) -
A6PLT-J65V2 1 DIN rail mount for vertical format blocks (double width) -
BKO-C8834H12 2 x 110 ohm, 2 x 130 ohm CC-Link terminating resistors with insulating lugs S
BKO-C10798H02 1 QJ61BT11 network terminal block assembly S
Notes:
1. This connector accepts two A6CON-L5P and plugs into a CC-Link module. Its function is to allow a network connection to be connected/disconnected via a single operation, and maintains the
network connection. Note these are only used with “VBT” type modules.
2. Accepts two A6CON-PW5P and performs the same function as A6CON-LJ5P for power. Use only with “VBT” modules.
3. Required at the end of a network segment for reliable communication for “VBT” modules.
4. AJ65FBT and AJ65SBTW4 type modules

n DISTRIBUTED I/O
CC-Link Remote I/O: Screw Terminal Block Type • AJ65SBTB_-_/AJ65BTB_-_
• Widest range of I/O types in CC-Link I/O product line • Screw Terminals
• AJ65BTB_-_ equipped with removable terminal blocks
PW L RUN L
ERR X0 1
2 3 4 5
6 7 Y8 9 A B
C D E F
STATION NO.
40 20 10 8 B RATE
Finger protector
4 2 1 4 2
Sprung screw ON 1
DA DG +24V
A J65SBTB1-16DT
24G
DB
• AJ65SBTB_-_ offer most efficient use of panel space

SLD
(FG)
X0 X2 X4
retracts to insert X1 X3 X5
X6
X7
Y8
Y9
YA
9B
YC
YD
YE
YF
COM+
COM-
wiring lug
• Certifications: UL • cUL • CE
Terminal block
Input Modules
Model Number AJ65SBT B2N-8A AJ65SBTB2N-16A AJ65SBTB1-8D AJ65SBTB1-16D AJ65SBTB1-16D1 AJ65SBTB1-32D AJ65SBTB1-32D1 AJ65SBTB1-32D5
Input Type AC input DC input; +COM/-COM common type
Stocked Item - S S S S S S -
Number of Input Points 8 16 8 16 16 32 32 32
Rated Input Voltage 100 to 120VAC 24VDC 5VDC
External Connection
Two wire type One wire type
Wire Type
8 points 1 16 points 1 8 points 1
Common Connection 16 points 1 common 32 points 1 common
common common common
Internal Current
35mA 40mA 30mA 35mA 40mA 45mA 50mA 35mA
Consumption
Dimensions
118 x 50 x 40 179 x 50 x 40 87.3 x 50 x 40 118 x 50 x 40 179 x 50 x 40
(W x H x D) mm
Model Number AJ65SBTB3-8D AJ65SBTB3-16D AJ65BTB1-16D AJ65BTB2-16D AJ65SBTB3-16D5 AJ65SBTB3-16KD AJ65SBTB1-32KD

Input Type DC input: +COM/-COM common type
Stocked Item - - S S - - -
Number of Input Points 8 16 16 16 16 16 32
Rated Input Voltage 24VDC 5VDC 24VDC
External Connection
Three wire type One wire type Two wire type Three wire type One wire type
Wire Type
Common Connection 8 points 1 common 16 points 1 common 32 points 1 common
Internal Current
40mA 45mA 60mA 60mA 30mA 50mA 75mA
Consumption
Dimensions
118 x 50 x 40 179 x 50 x 40 151.9 x 65 x 46 197.4 x 65 x 46 179 x 50 x 40
(W x H x D) mm
Output Modules
Model Number AJ65SBTB1-8T AJ65SBTB1-8T1 AJ65SBTB1-16T AJ65SBTB1-32T AJ65SBTB1-16T1 AJ65SBTB1-32T1
Output Type Transistor output; Sink type
Stocked Item - - S S S S
Number of Output Points 8 8 16 32 16 32
Rated Load Voltage 12/24VDC
Maximum 1 Point 0.5A
Load
Current 1 Common 2.4A 3.6A 4.8A 3.6A 4.8A
External Connection
One wire type
Wire Type
Common Connection 8 points 1 common 16 points 1 common 32 points 1 common 16 points 1 common 32 points 1 common
Internal Current
35mA 35mA 50mA 65mA 50mA 65mA
Consumption
Dimensions
87.3 x 50 x 40 118 x 50 x 40 179 x 50 x 40 118 x 50 x 40 179 x 50 x 40
(W x H x D) mm
Model Number AJ65SBTB1-8TE AJ65SBTB1-16TE AJ65SBTB2-8T AJ65SBTB2-16T AJ65SBTB2-8T1 AJ65SBTB2-16T1 AJ65SBTB1B-16TE1 AJ65SBTB1-32TE1
Output Type Transistor output; Source type Transistor output; Sink type Transistor output; Source type
Stocked Item - S - - - - - -
Number of Output Points 8 16 8 16 8 16 16 32
Maximum 1 Point 0.1A 0.5A
Load
Current 1 Common 0.8A 1.6A 2.4A 3.6A 2.4A 3.6A 4A 4.8A
External Connection
One wire type Two wire type One wire type
Wire Type
8 points 16 points 8 points 16 points 8 points 16 points 8 points 32 points
Common Connection
1 common 1 common 1 common 1 common 1 common 1 common 1 common 1 common
Internal Current
Consumption
Dimensions
87.3 x 50 x 40 118 x 50 x 40 179 x 50 x 40 118 x 50 x 40 179 x 50 x 40
(W x H x D) mm
102
Output Modules (continued)
Model Number AJ65SBTB2N-8R AJ65SBTB2N-16R AJ65SBTB2N-8S AJ65SBTB2N-16S AJ65BTB1-16T AJ65BTB2-16R AJ65BTB2-16T
Transistor output Transistor output
Output Type Relay output Triac output Relay output
(sink) (sink)
Stocked Item S S - - S S -
Number of Output Points 8 16 8 16 16 16 16
Rated Load Voltage 24VDC/240VAC 100 to 240VAC 12/24VDC 24VDC/240VAC 12/24VDC
Maximum 1 Point 2A 0.6A 0.5A 2A 0.5A
Load
Current 1 Common 4A 8A 2.4A 4.8A 4A 8A 4A
External Connection
Two wire type One wire type Two wire type
Wire Type
Common Connection 8 points 1 common 16 points 1 common 8 points 1 common 32 points 1 common 8 points 1 common 8 points 1 common 8 points 1 common
Internal Current
85mA 120mA 55mA 85mA 80mA 85mA 80mA
Consumption
Dimensions
118 x 50 x 40 179 x 50 x 40 118 x 50 x 40 179 x 50 x 40 151.9 x 65 x 46 197.4 x 65 x 46
(W x H x D) mm
Combined I/O Modules

Model Number AJ65SBTB32-8DT AJ65SBTB32-8DT2 AJ65SBTB1-16DT AJ65SBTB1-16DT1 AJ65SBTB1-16DT2 AJ65SBTB1-16DT3 AJ65SBTB32-16DT
I/O Type DC input/trans output / +COM type/sink type
Stocked Item - - S - - - -
Number of I/O Points 4/4 8/8
Input/Load Voltage 24VDC / 24VDC
Maximum 1 Point 0.5A
Load
Current 1 Common 1.2A 2.4A
Connection Wire Type Three wire type / Two wire type / Three wire type /
Two wire type / Two wire type One wire type / One wire type
on Input/Output Sides Two wire type Two wire type Two wire type
Internal Current
Consumption
Dimensions
118 x 50 x 40 118 x 50 x 40 179 x 50 x 40
(W x H x D) mm
Model Number AJ65SBTB32-16DT2 AJ65SBTB32-16DR AJ65SBTB32-16KDT2 AJ65SBTB32-16KDT8 AJ65SBTB32-16KDR AJ65SBTB1-32DT AJ65SBTB1-32DT1

Stocked Item - - - - - S -
Number of I/O Points 8/8 16 / 16
Input/Load Voltage 24VDC / 24VDC 24VDC / 24VDC 12VDC / 12VDC 24VDC / 24VDC 24VDC / 24VDC
Maximum 1 Point 0.5A 2A 0.5A
Load
Current 1 Common 1.2A 2.4A 4A / common 3.6A
Connection Wire Type Two wire type /
Three wire type / Two wire type One wire type / One wire type
on Input/Output Sides Two wire type
Internal Current
Consumption
Dimensions
179 x 50 x 40
(W x H x D) mm
Model Number AJ65SBTB1-32DT2 AJ65SBTB1-32DT3 AJ65SBTB1-32TE1 AJ65SBTB1-32KDT2 AJ65SBTB1-32KDT8 AJ65BTB1-16DT AJ65BTB2-16DT AJ65BTB2-16DR
DC input/relay
output / +COM/-
I/O Type DC input/trans output / +COM type/sink type DC input/trans output / +COM type/sink type
COM common
type/-
Stocked Item - - - - - - - S
Number of I/O Points 8/8 32 / 32 16 / 16 8/8
Input/Load Voltage 24VDC / 24VDC 12VDC / 24VDC 24VDC / 24VDC 12VDC / 12VDC 24VDC / 12/24VDC 24VDC / 240VAC
Maximum 1 Point 0.5A 2A
Load
Current 1 Common 3.6A 4.8A 3.6A 4A 8A
Connection Wire Type
One wire type / One wire type Two wire type / Two wire type
on Input/Output Sides
Internal Current
60mA 15mA 65mA 15mA 70mA
Consumption
Dimensions
179 x 50 x 40 151.9 x 65 x 46 197.4 x 65 x 46
(W x H x D) mm

n DISTRIBUTED I/O
CC-Link Remote I/O: One-Touch Connector Type • AJ65SBTC_-_ / AJ65VBTCU_-_
• One touch IDC type connector offers labor and material cost • One Touch Connectors
savings; No stripping of cable or lugs required
• Connectors available separately No need for soldering,
wire stripping
or screw tightening.
• Certifications: UL • cUL • CE Press in
Connector Wiring securely connected simply by pressing

the side of the plug inward after inserting the
wire into the connector.
For a detailed description of the connectors see introduction to this section.
Input Modules
Model Number AJ65SBTC1-32D AJ65SBTC1-32D1 AJ65SBTC4-16DN AJ65VBTCU3-8D1 AJ65VBTCU3-16D1 AJ65SBTC4-16DE
Input Type DC input / +COM/-COM common type DC input / +COM type DC input / -COM type
Stocked Item S - S - - -
Number of Input Points 32 16 8 16 16
Rated Input Voltage 24VDC
External Connection
One wire type Four wire type Three wire type Four wire type
Wire Type
Common Connection 32 points 1 common 16 points 1 common 8 points 1 common 16 points 1 common
Internal Current
45mA 35mA 40mA 35 mA
Consumption
Dimensions
118 x 50 x 40 41 x 115 x 93 60 x 115 x 93 118 x 50 x 40
(W x H x D) mm
Output Modules
Model Number AJ65SBTC1-32T AJ65SBTC1-32T1 AJ65VBTCU2-8T AJ65VBTCU2-16T
Output Type Transistor output / Sink type
Stocked Item - - - -
Number of Output Points 32 8 16
Max. Load 1 Point 0.1A
Current 1 Common 3.2A 0.8A 1.6A
External Connection
One wire type Two wire type
Wire Type
Internal Current
60mA 35mA 40mA
Consumption
Dimensions
118 x 50 x 40 41 x 115 x 93 60 x 115 x 93
(W x H x D) mm

Model Number AJ65SBTC4-16DT AJ65SBTC4-16DT2 AJ65SBTC1-32DT AJ65SBTC1-32DT1 AJ65SBTC1-32DT2 AJ65SBTC1-32DT3
Stocked Item - - - - - -
Number of I/O Points 8/8 16 / 16
Rated Input / Load Voltage 24VDC / 24VDC
Max. Load 1 Point 0.5A 0.1A
Current 1 Common 2.4A 1.6A
Leakage Current 0.25mA max. 0.1mA max. 0.25mA max. 0.1mA max.
External Connection
Four wire type / Four wire type One wire type / One wire type
Wire Type
Common Connection 16 points 1 common 32 points 1 common
Internal Current
40mA 50mA
Consumption
Dimensions
118 x 50 x 40
(W x H x D) mm
Note: +COM: Positive common (sink) -COM: Negative common (source)
104
CC-Link Remote I/O: Embedded I/O Adapters • AJ65MBTL1N-_
• Intended for OEM System Designers needing to embed a CC-Link network connection inside their own products
• Each device offers differing amounts of discrete I/O to interface to the OEM device
• PCB mounted device
Input Adapter Output Adapter I/O Combination Adapter
Model Number
AJ65MBTL1N-16D AJ65MBTL1N-32D AJ65MBTL1N-16T AJ65MBTL1N-32T AJ65MBTL1N-16DT
Stocked Item - - - - -
DC Input DC input Transistor output Transistor output DC input / Transistor output
Input/Output Type
+COM type +COM type Sink type Sink type +COM type / Sink type
Number of Input/
16 32 16 32 8/8
Output Points
Rated Input / Load
24VDC 12/24VDC 24VDC / 24VDC
Voltage
Maximum 1 Point - - 0.1A
Load
Current 1 Common - - 1.6A 3.2A 0.8A
Leakage Current - - 0.1mA ± 0.1mA
External Connection
44 pins (2 rows) 62 pins (2 rows) 44 pins (2 rows) 62 pins (2 rows) 44 pins (2 rows)
Wire Type
Common Connection 16 points 1 common 32 points 1 common 16 points 1 common 32 points 1 common 16 points 1 common
Current
35mA 45mA 50mA 60mA 50mA
Consumption
Dimensions
53 x 22 x 31.5 85 x 22 x 31.5 53 x 22 x 31.5 85 x 22 x 31.5 53 x 22 x 31.5
W x H x D (mm)
CC-Link Remote I/O: Water Resistant Connector Type AJ65FBTA_-16_ • AJ65SBTW4-16_

• Water resistant I/O power and network connections certified to IP67
• “F Type” modules can be replaced without disrupting the network
• Standard M12 connections
• F Type modules offer built-in terminating resistors, 55°C operating temperature
• W Type modules offer waterproof screw terminal connections for power and network connections
• Connectors available from a variety of third party sources
• Dustproof and waterproof connection caps are available to protect unused connectors. See the introduction to this section.
Input Module Output Module I/O Module

Model Number
AJ65FBTA4-16D AJ65FBTA4-16DE AJ65SBTW4-16D AJ65FBTA2-16T AJ65FBTA2-16TE AJ65FBTA42-16DT AJ65FBTA42-16DTE AJ65SBTW4-16DT
Stocked Item S - - - - - - -
DC input / DC input / DC input /
DC Input DC input DC input Transistor output Transistor output
Transistor output Transistor output Transistor output
+COM: Positive
Input/Output Type common (Sink) +COM: Positive -COM: Negative +COM: Positive
+COM: Positive -COM: Negative
-COM: Negative Sink type Source type common (Sink) / common (Source) / common (Sink) /
common (Sink) common (Source)
common (Source) sink type source type sink type
common type
Number of Input/
16 16 16 16 16 8/8 8/8 8/8
Output Points
Rated Input / Load
24VDC 12/24VDC 24VDC / 24VDC
Voltage
Maximum 1 Point - - - 0.5A 1.0A 0.5A 1.0A 0.5A
Load
Current 1 Common - - - 4.0A 4.0A 2.4A 4.0A 2.4A
External Connection
Four wire type Two wire type Four wire type / two wire type
Wire Type
8 points 1
16 points 1 common / 16 points
Common Connection 16 points 1 common 16 points 1 common common / 8
1 common
points 1 common
Current
Consumption
Cable Diameter
Fitting cable size Fitting cable size f
Range for
- - f 4.0mm to 8.0mm - - - - 4.0mm to 8.0mm
Water Resistant
/- /-
Compression Fitting
Dimensions 60 x 200 x 48 (including
184.7 x 48 x 72 60 x 200 x 48 (including communication adapter) 184.7 x 48 x 72
W x H x D (mm) communication adapter)

n DISTRIBUTED I/O
CC-Link Remote I/O: FCN Connector Type • AJ65SBTCF_-_ • AJ65VBTCF_-_ • AJ65BTC_-_
• All I/O wiring terminates in a single 40 pin connector
• Connectors available separately to facilitate wiring harness construction
Input Modules
Model Number AJ65SBTCF1-32D AJ65BTC1-32D
Input Type DC input (sink/source common type) DC input (sink, source type)
Stocked Item - -
Number of Input Points 32
External Connection Wire Type One wire type
Common Connection 32 points / 1 common
Internal Current Consumption 45mA 70mA
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 118 x 50 x 40 118 x 50 x 40
Output Modules
Model Number AJ65SBTCF1-32T AJ65BTC1-32T
Output Type Transistor output / Sink type
Stocked Item - -
Number of Output Points 32
Current 1 Common 3.2A 2A

Model Number AJ65SBTCF1-32DT AJ65VBTCF1-32DT1 AJ65VBTCFJ1-32DT1
I/O Type DC input (Sink / Source type) transistor output (Sink) DC input (Sink) / Transistor output (Sink)
Stocked Item - -
Number of I/O Points 16 / 16
Rated Input 24VDC
Voltage Load 12/24VDC
Current 1 Common 1.6A
on Input/Output Sides
Common Connection 16 points / 1 common 32 point / 1 common
Internal Current Consumption 50mA
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 118 x 50 x 40 41 x 115 x 113 41 x 115 x 63.5
106
CC-Link Remote I/O: Spring Clamp and e-CON Type • AJ65VBTS_-_ _ _ and AJ65VBTCE_-_ _ _
These I/O blocks enable cost savings through reduced labor and material costs. Spring clamps eliminate the need ON
PW L RUN
1 2 4 1 2 4 8 10 20 40
L ERR.
B RATE STATION NO.

0 1 2
3 4 5
6 7
for wiring lugs and avoid the need for periodic retightening of I/O terminals.
8 9 A
B C D
E F
AJ65VBTS3-1
6D
NC X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 XA XB XC XD XE
CON COM1+ XF
A
B
C
D
COM1+
• The e-CON terminals use the same I/O connection type as the existing CC-Link/LT I/O blocks
COM1-
COM1-
Input Modules
Model Number AJ65VBTS3-16D AJ65VBTS3-32D
Input Type DC input / +COM/Sink
Stocked Item - -
Number of Input Points 16 32
External Connection Wire Type Three wire type
Wire Gauge Size AWG 28 to 16
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 137 x 50 x 51.5 222 x 50 x 51.5
Model Number AJ65VBTCE3-8D AJ65VBTCE3-16D AJ65VBTCE3-16DE AJ65VBTCE3-32DE

Input Type DC input / +COM/Sink DC input / -COM/Source
Stocked Item - - - -
Number of Input Points 8 16 16 32
External Connection Wire Type Three wire type
Common Connection 8 points / 1 common 16 points / common 32 points / common
Internal Current Consumption 30mA 35mA 35mA 40mA
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 40 x 100 x 40.5 114 x 50 x 41.5 100 x 50 x 41.5 155 x 50 x 41.5
Output Modules
Model Number AJ65VBTS2-16T AJ65VBTS2-32T Model Number AJ65VBTCE2-8T
Output Type Transistor / Sink Output Type Transistor / Sink
Stocked Item - - Stocked Item -
Number of Output Points 16 32 Number of Output Points 8
Rated Load Voltage 12/24VDC Rated Load Voltage 12/24VDC
Max. Load 1 Point 0.5A Max. Load 1 Point 0.1A
Current 1 Common 4A Current 1 Common 0.8A
External Connection Wire Type Two wire type External Connection Wire Type Two wire type
Common Connection 16 points / 1 common Common Connection 8 points / 1 common
Wire Gauge Size AWG 28 to 16 Internal Current Consumption 35mA
Internal Current Consumption 45mA 60mA Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 40 x 100 x 40.5
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 137 x 50 x 51.5 222 x 50 x 51.5

Model Number AJ65VBTS32-16DT AJ65VBTS32-32DT Model Number AJ65VBTCE32-16DT
I/O Type DC input/trans output / +COM/sink I/O Type DC input/trans output / +COM/sink
Stocked Item - - Stocked Item -
Number of I/O Points 8/8 16/16 Number of I/O Points 8/8
Input 24VDC Input/Load Voltage 24VDC / 24VDC
Rated Voltage
Load 24VDC / 24VDC or 12VDC Max. Output 1 Point 0.1A
Max. Output 1 Point 0.5A Load Current 1 Common 0.8A
Load Current 1 Common 4A Connection Wire Type on Input/
Three wire type / Two wire type
Connection Wire Type on Input/ Output Sides
Three wire type / Two wire type Common Connection 16 points / 1 common
Output Sides
Common Connection 16 points / 1 common Internal Current Consumption 40mA
Internal Current Consumption 40mA 50mA Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 114 x 50 x 41.5

n DISTRIBUTED I/O
CC-Link Analog Modules: One-Touch Connector Type • AJ65VBTCU-68ADVN • AJ65VBTCU-68ADIN
• Compatible with CC-Link Version V2.0
• Eight analog channels occupy only one station, instead of three with CC-Link V1.10
• High precision analog to digital conversion
• Switchable input ranges for each channel
• Sampling or averaging processing
• One touch connectors reduce installation time and cost (available separately)
• Module can be replaced without disrupting the network (when “on line” network connector is used)
Model Number AJ65VBTCU-68ADVN AJ65VBTCU-68ADIN

Stocked Item - -
Voltage -10 to +10VDC (input resistance 1m) -
Analog Input
Current - 0 to 20mA DC (input resistance 250)
Digital Resolution 12-bit +sign (-4096 to +4095)
Accuracy
Ambient Ambient Maximum
Analog Input Range Digital Value
Temperature Temperature Resolution
0 to 50°C 25 ± 5°C
-10 to +10V
-4000 to
User range setting 1 2.5mV
+4000
(-10 to +10V)
Input/Output Characteristics AJ65VBTCU-68ADV
0 to 5V 1.25mV
Accuracy (Accuracy Relative to the Voltage
1 to 5V ± 0.3% (± 12 digit) ± 0.2% (± 8 digit) 1.0mV
Maximum Digital Output Value) 0 to 4000
User range setting 2 (*1) (*1)
1.25mV
(-10 to +10V)
0 to 20mA 5μA
AJ65VBTCU-68ADI
4 to 20mA 0 to 4000 4μA
Current
User range setting (0 to 20mA) 5μA
Note 1: 1 digit refers to one digital unit.
Input Range Switching For each channel

Offset/Gain Setting Yes
Maximum Conversion Speed 1ms/channel
Number of Occupied Stations, Ver. 1 mode: 3 stations (RWr/RWw 12 words each, RS/RY 32 points)
Expanded Cyclic Setting Ver. 2 mode: 1 station (extended work (RWr/RWw) 16 words each, RX/RY 32 points), Quadruple
CC-Link Compatible Function Cyclic transmission, extended cyclic transmission, station-to-station cable length relaxation
Between communication system and batch of analog inputs: Photocoupler isolation / Between power supply system and batch of analog
Isolation Method
inputs: Photocoupler isolation; Between channels: No isolation / Communication interface: No isolation
One-touch connector for communication [transmission circuit] (5-pin/solderless type. The connector plug is sold separately.)
One-touch connector for power supply and FG [module power supply and FG] (5-pin/solderless type. The connector plug is sold separately.)
External Connection Method
One-touch connector for analog input (4-pin/solderless type. The connector plug is sold separately.)
(Optional parts) Online connector for communication: A6CON-LJ5P, online connector for power supply: A6CON-PWJ5P
One-Touch Connector Communication line: CC-Link dedicated cable compatible with Ver. 1.10, 0.5mm² (AWG20) [f2.2 to 3.3mm]
for Communication Shielded power supply 0.5mm² (AWG20)
Applicable One-Touch Connector
0.66 to 0.98mm² (AWG18) [f2.2 to 3.0mm], wire size 0.08mm² or more
Wire Size for Power Supply
One-Touch Connector f1.0 to 1.4mm (A6CON-P214), f1.4 to 2.0mm (A6CON-P220), [applicable wire size: 0.14 to 0.2mm²]
for Analog I/O f1.0 to 1.4mm (A6CON-P514), f1.4 to 2.0mm (A6CON-P520), [applicable wire size: 0.3 to 0.3mm²]
External Power Supply 24VDC (20.4 to 26.4VDC with a ripple rate of 5% or less)
Inrush Current 4.2A, 1.2ms max.
Weight (kg) 0.17
108
CC-Link Analog Modules: Analog to Digital Converter Modules • AJ65SBT-64AD • AJ65BT-64AD
AJ65SBT-64AD
• Four channels (voltage input / current input)
• Switchable input ranges
• Handles analog ranges ±10VDC and 0 ~ 20mA
• Compact size
• Perform channel averaging without affecting conversion speed
AJ65BT-64AD
Model Number AJ65SBT-64AD AJ65BT-64AD

Stocked Item S S
Analog Voltage -10 to +10VDC (input resistance 1m) -10 to +10VDC (input resistance 1m)
Input Current 0 to 20mA DC (input resistance 250) -20 to +20mA DC (input resistance 250)
Digital Resolution 12 bit +sign (-4096 to +4095) 12 bit or 11 bit +sign (0 to 4000, or -2000 to +2000)
Accuracy
Digital Maximum Ambient Ambient
Analog Input Range
Value Resolution Temperature Temperature Accuracy
0 to 55°C 25 ± 5°C Digital Maximum Ambient
Analog Input Range
-10 to +10V Value Resolution Temperature
-4000 to 0 to 55°C
User range setting +4000 2.5mV
1 (-10 to +10V) -10 to +10V 5mV
Voltage
Input/Output
Voltage
0 to +4000,
Characteristics 0 to 5V 1.25mV 0 to +10V 2.5mV
or -2000, to
Accuracy (Accuracy 1 to 5V 1.0mV 0 to 5V +2000 1.25mV
0 to 4000 ± 0.4% ± 0.2% ±1%
Relative to the User range setting 1 to 5V 1mV
1.25mV (± 16 digit) (± 8 digit) (±40 digit)
Maximum Digital 2 (0 to +5V) -20 to 20mA 20μA
(*1) (*1) 0 to +4000, (*1)
Current
Output Value) 0 to 20mA 5μA 0 to 20mA 10μA
or -2000 to
4 to 20mA 4μA 0 to 20mA 5μA
Current
+2000
0 to 4000 4 to 20mA 4μA
User range setting
5μA
3 (0 to +20mA) Note 1: 1 digit refers to one digital unit.
Note 1: 1 digit refers to one digital unit.
Input Range Switching For each channel All channels in the batch
Maximum Conversion
1ms/channel
Speed
Number of Analog
4 channels/module
Input Points
Station Type 1 station (32 points each for RX/RY, 4 points each for RWr/RWw) Remote device station 2 stations (32 points each for RX/RY, 8 points each for RWr/RWw)
Between power supply system and batch of analog inputs: Photocoupler isolation / Between communication system and batch of analog inputs:
Isolation Method
Photocoupler isolation / Between channels: No isolation
External Connection 7-point 2-piece terminal block (transmission, power supply), directly mounted
27-point terminal block (M3.5)
Method 18-point terminal block (analog output area)
Applicable Wire Size 0.3 to 0.75mm² 0.75 to 2.00mm²
Internal Current
0.09A 0.12A
Consumption (24VDC)
Weight (kg) 0.20 0.35
External Dimensions
118 x 50 x 40 151.9 x 65 x 63
(W x H x D) mm

n DISTRIBUTED I/O
CC-Link Analog Module: Analog to Digital Converter Module • AJ65SBT2B-64AD
• Switchable input ranges
• Compact size
• Perform channel averaging without affecting conversion speed
Model Number AJ65SBT2B-64AD

Stocked Item -
Voltage -10 to +10VDC (input resistance 1MΩ)
Analog Input
Current 0 to 20mA DC (input resistance 250Ω)
Digital Resolution 16 bit +sign (-16384 to +16383)
Maximum Accuracy (*1)

Analog Input Range Digital Value
Resolution Ambient Temperature 0 to 55°C
-10 to +10V 0.625mV
User Range Setting 1 (-10 to +10V) -16000 to +16000 0.5mV (*2)
Voltage
Input/Output Characteristics Accuracy

User Range Setting 2 (-5 to 5V) 0.25mV (*2)
(Accuracy Relative to the Maximum
Digital Output Value) 1 to 5V 0.3125mV ± 0.2%
0 to 16000
1 to 5V 0.25mV (± 32 digit) (*2)
0 to 20mA 1.25μA
Current
0 to 16000
4 to 20mA 1μA
User Range Setting 2 -16000 to 16000 1μA (*2)
Conversion Speed 200μs/channel

Absolute Maximum Input Voltage: ±15V Current: ±30mA (*3)
No. of Analog Input Points 4 channels
No. of Offset/Gain Setting Times (*4) Max. 10,000 times
CC-Link Version CC-Link Ver.1.10
CC-Link Station Type Remote device station
Number of Occupied Stations 1 station
Connection Cable CC-Link dedicated cable
Withstand Voltage 500VAC for 1 minute between all power supply and communication system terminals and all analog input terminals
Between communication system terminal and all analog input terminals: Photocoupler isolation
Insulation Method Between power supply system terminal and all analog input terminals: Transformer insulation
Between input channels: Non-insulation
Noise Immunity Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1μs, noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (DC type noise simulator condition)
Built-in Terminating Resistor Provided (110Ω)
Communication Part,
External Module Power Supply 7-point two-piece terminal block M3 × 5.2 screw (tightening torque range: 0.59 to 0.88N•m) Applicable solderless terminal: 2 or less
Connection Part
System
I/O Part 18-point two-piece terminal block M3 × 5.2 screw (tightening torque range: 0.59 to 0.88N•m) Applicable solderless terminal: 2 or less
RAV1.25-3 (compliant with JIS C 2805) [Applicable wire size: 0.3 to 1.25mm²]
V2-MS3, RAP2-3SL, TGV2-3N [Applicable wire size: 1.25 to 2.0mm²]
Module Mounting Screw M4 screw × 0.7mm × 16mm or more (tightening torque range: 0.78 to 1.08 N•m) Mountable with a DIN rail
Applicable DIN Rail TH35-7.5Fe, TH35-7.5Al (compliant with IEC 60715)
24VDC (20.4 to 28.8VDC)
External Power Supply Inrush current: 16A, 4.0ms or less
Current consumption: 0.12A (24VDC)
Weight (kg) 0.25
Notes:
2. These values indicate the maximum resolution with user range setting.
3. This value indicates a momentary input current value at which the built-in resistor will not be broken.
4. The number of times that the SELECT/SET switch is set to SET in test mode.
110
CC-Link Analog I/O Modules: Digital To Analog Converter Module • AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN
• Compatible with CC-Link V2.0.
• Eight analog channels occupy only one station, instead of three with CC-Link V1.10.
• High precision digital to analog conversion.
• Switchable output ranges for each channel.
• Clear or retain analog output when the controller stops.
• One-touch connectors reduce installation time and cost (available separately).
• Module can be replaced without disrupting the network (when “on-line” network connector is used.)
Model Number AJ65VBTCU-68DAVN

Stocked Item -
Digital Resolution 12 bit +sign (-4096 to +4095)
Analog Output -10 to +10VDC (external load resistance: 2k to 1M)
Accuracy
Maximum
Digital Analog Ambient Temperature Ambient Temperature Resolution
0 to 55°C 25 ± 5°C
Input/Output Characteristics -10 to +10V
Accuracy (Accuracy Relative to the -4000 to +4000 User range setting 1 ± 0.3% (± 30mV) ± 0.2% (± 20mV)) 2.5mV
Maximum Analog Output Value) (-10 to +10V)
Voltage
0 to 5V 1.25mV
0 to 4000 1 to 5V ± 0.3% (± 15mV) ± 0.2% (± 10mV) 1.0mV
User range setting 2 (0 to 5V) 1.0mV
Output Range Switching For each channel

Maximum Conversion Speed 1ms/channel
Output Short-Circuit Protection Yes
Number of Analog Output Points 8 channels/module
Number of Occupied Stations, Ver. 1 mode: 3 stations (RWr/RWw 12 words each, RS/RY 32 points)
Expanded Cyclic Setting Ver. 2 mode: 1 station (extended work (RWr/RWw) 16 words each, RX/RY 32 points), Quadruple
CC-Link Compatible Function Cyclic transmission, extended cyclic transmission, station-to-station cable length relaxation
Between communication system and batch of analog Outputs: Photocoupler isolation
Isolation Method Between power supply system and batch of analog Outputs: Photocoupler isolation
Between channels: No isolation
One-touch connector for communication [transmission circuit] (5-pin/solderless type. The connector plug is sold separately.)
One-touch connector for power supply and FG [module power supply and FG] (5-pin/solderless type. The connector plug is sold separately.)
External Connection Method
One-touch connector for analog input (4-pin/solderless type. The connector plug is sold separately.)
(Optional parts) Online connector for communication: A6CON-LJ5P, online connector for power supply: A6CON-PWJ5P
One-Touch Connector Communication line: CC-Link dedicated cable compatible with Ver. 1.10, 0.5mm² (AWG20) [f2.2 to 3.3mm]
for Communication Shielded power supply 0.5mm² (AWG20)
Applicable One-Touch Connector
0.66 to 0.98mm² (AWG18) [f2.2 to 3.0mm], wire size 0.16mm² or more
Wire Size for Power Supply
One-Touch Connector f1.0 to 1.4mm (A6CON-P214), f1.4 to 2.0mm (A6CON-P220), [applicable wire size: 0.14 to 0.2mm²]
for Analog I/O f1.0 to 1.4mm (A6CON-P514), f1.4 to 2.0mm (A6CON-P520), [applicable wire size: 0.3 to 0.3mm²]
External Power Supply 24VDC (20.4 to 26.4VDC with a ripple rate of 5% or less)
Inrush Current 4.3A, 1.2ms max.
Internal Current Consumption 0.15A
Weight (kg) 0.16

n DISTRIBUTED I/O
CC-Link Analog Modules: Digital To Analog Converter Module
AJ65SBT-62DA • AJ65BT-64DAV • AJ65BT-64DAI
AJ65SBT-62DA Analog Input
• Two channels (voltage input / current input)
• Switchable analog outputs
• Compact size
AJ65BT-64DAV
• Four channels (voltage output)
AJ65BT-64DAI
• Four channels (current output)
• Digital values from 0 to +4000 can be converted to analog values of 4 mA to +20 mA
Model Number AJ65SBT-62DA AJ65BT-64DAV AJ65BT-64DAI

Stocked Item S S -
Digital Voltage 12 bit +sign (-4096 to +4095) 11 bit +sign (-2048 to +2047) -
Resolution Current 12 bit (0 to +4095) - 12 bit (0 to 4095)
Analog Voltage -10 to +10VDC (external load resistance: 2k to 1M) -10 to +10VDC (external load resistance: 2k to 1M) -
Output Current 0 to 20mA DC (external load resistance: 0 to 600) - 4 to 20mA DC (external load resistance: 0 to 600)
Accuracy
Digital Maximum Ambient Ambient
Analog Output Resolution temperature temperature
Value
0 to 55°C 25 ± 5°C
-4000 to
-10 to +10V 2.5mV
+4000 ± 0.4% ± 0.2% Digital Analog Maximum Accuracy Digital Analog Maximum Accuracy
Input/Output
Characteristics -4000 to User range setting 1 (± 40mV) (± 20mV)) Value Output Resolution (overall) Value Output Resolution (overall)
2.5mV
Voltage
Accuracy +4000 (-10 to +10V) +2000 +10V 4000 +20mA

0 to 4000 0 to 5V 1.25mV +1000 +5V 2000 +12mA
Voltage
Current
(Accuracy ±1 ±1
Relative to the 0 to 4000 1 to 5V 1.0mV ± 0.4% ± 0.2% 0 ±0 5mV
(± 0mV)
4μA
(± 200mA)
Maximum Analog User range setting 2 (± 20mV) (± 10mV) -1000 -5V 0 +4mA
Output Value) 0 to 4000 1.25mV
(0 to 5V) -2000 -10V
0 to 4000 0 to 20mA 5μA
Current
0 to 4000 4 to 20mA 4μA ± 0.4% ± 0.2%

User range setting 3 (± 80μA) (± 40μA)
0 to 4000 5μA
(0 to 20mA)
Output Range
For each channel None
Switching
Offset/Gain
Yes
Setting
Output Short-
Yes
Circuit Protection
Maximum
1ms/channel
Conversion Speed
Number of Analog
2 channels/module 4 channels/module
Output Points
Number of
Occupied 1 station (32 points each for RS/RY, 4 points each for RWr/RWw) 2 stations (32 points each for RS/RY, 8 points each for RWr/RWw)
Stations
Connection 7 point 2 piece terminal block (transmission, power supply), directly
27 point terminal block, M3.5 screws
Terminal Block mounted 18 point terminal block (analog output area), M3 screw
Applicable Wire
0.3 to 0.75mm² 0.75 to 2.00mm²
Size
Applicable
RAV1.25 to 3.5 (compliant to JIS C 2805) RAV1.25 to 3.5, RAV2 to 3.5
Solderless Term.
Internal Current
Consumption 0.16A 0.18A 0.27A
(24VDC)
Weight (kg) 0.2 0.4
External
Dimensions 118 x 50 x 40 151.9 x 65 x 63
(W x H x D) mm
112
CC-Link Analog Modules: Temperature Input Modules • AJ65BT-68TD • AJ65BT-64RD3 • AJ65BT-64RD4
AJ65BT-68TD
• Eight thermocouple inputs per module
• Compatible with K, E, J, T, B, R and S thermocouples
• Assign any thermocouple type to each channel
• Enable/disable conversion for each channel
• Disconnection detection
• Select either sampling or moving average processing for each channel
• Automatic cold junction compensation for PT100 RTD
AJ65BT-64RD3 / 64RD4
• Four RTD inputs per module
• Enable/disable conversion for each channel
• Disconnection detection
• Offers moving average processing to reduce effects of noise
• Accurate to ±0.25% of full scale measurement
Model Number AJ65BT-68TD AJ65BT-64RD3 AJ65BT-64RD4 AJ65SBT2B-64TD

Stocked Item S - - S
Measurement Method - Three wire type Four wire type -
Connectable Platinum Resistance
- Pt100, JPt100 PT100
Temp. Sensors
Connectable Thermocouples B, R, S, K, E, J, T - B, R, S, N, K, E, J, T
Temperature Input Range -200 to 1700°C -180 to 600°C -270 to 1820°C
16-bit signed binary 16-bit signed binary
(-1800 to 6000: Value up to the irst decimal place x 10)
Temperature Detection Value (-2000 to 17000: Value up to the irst (-2700 to 18200: value rounded to
decimal place x 10) one decimal place x 10)
(-80000 to 600000: Value up to the third decimal place x 1000)
16 bit signed binary (-2700 to
Scaling Value 16-bit signed binary (0 to 2000) -
18200)
±0.1%
(accuracy relative to
Ambient temperature the maximum value)
Overall Accuracy (*1) (*1)
(20°C or less, 30°C or more) ±0.25%
(accuracy relative to
the maximum value)
Cold-Junction Compensation System (C) ±1.0 - ±1.0°C
Resolution (C) B, R, S, 0.3°C K, E, J, T: 0.1°C 0.025°C B, R, S, N: 0.3°C K, E, J, T: 0.1°C
Conversion Speed (Sampling Time: ms/ch) 45ms/channel 40ms/channel 640ms/4 channels
8 channels + 1 channel for con-
Temperature Sensor Input Channel 4 channels/module
necting the Pt100 sensor
1 station (RX/RY: 32 points each,
Number of Occupied Stations 4 stations (128 points each for RX/RY, 16 points each for RWr/RWw)
RWr/RWw: 4 points each)
Between all power supply systems
and all communication systems
and cold junction compensation
Between thermocouple input and channels
Between platinum resistance temperature sensor input and CC-Link
CC-Link transmission system and Between thermocouple input
Isolation Method transmission system: Photocoupler isolation / Between channels: No
between channels: Transformer and all communication systems
isolation
isolation and cold junction compensation
channels
Between thermocouple input chan-
nels: Transformer isolation
RAV1.25 to 3.5 (compliant to JIS C RAV1.25-3(JIS C 2805 compliant)
Applicable Solderless Terminal RAV1.25 to 3.5, RAV2 to 3.5 (compliant to JIS C2805)
2805), RAV 2-3.5 V2-MS3, RAP2-3SL, TGV2-3N
Connection Terminal Block 27-point terminal block (M3.5 x 7 screws) 18-point, 2-piece terminal block
Applicable Wire Size 0.75 to 2.00mm² 0.3 to 2.0mm²
24VDC (20.4VDC to 28.8VDC);
External Power Supply 24VDC (18 to 30VDC)
Inrush current: 1.5A, 1.3ms
Internal Current Consumption (24VDC) 0.081A 0.17A 0.12A
Weight (kg) 0.40 0.38 0.3
External Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 151.9 x 65 x 63 122 x 50 x 54
Note:
1. The calculation of overall accuracy is as shown below
(Overall accuracy) + (Conversion accuracy) x (Temperature characteristic) + (Operating ambient temperature change) + (Cold-junction compensation accuracy). Here the operating ambient temperature change
denotes a value not within the operating ambient temperature range of 25 ±5°C.

n DISTRIBUTED I/O
CC-Link Special Function I/O: High-Speed Counter Modules
AJ65BT-D62 • AJ65BT-D62D • AJ65BT-D62D-S1
AJ65BT-D62/D62D/D62D-S1 AJ65BT-D62 AJ65BT-D62D-S1

• 24 bit counter • DC input/sink output type • Differential input/sink output type
• 5/12/24VDC (2 to 5 mA input) • Preset DC input • Preset differential input
• Switchable counting speed • Maximum counting speed: 200 kpps • Maximum counting speed: 400 kpps
• Four counter functions: AJ65BT-D62D
- Latch-counter function • Differential input/sink output type
- Sampling counter function
- Periodic pulse-counter function • Preset DC input
- Count-disable function • Maximum counting speed: 400 kpps
Model Number AJ65BT-D62 AJ65BT-D62D AJ65BT-D62D-S1

Stocked Item S - -
Counting Speed Selector Switch Setting HIGH (*2) LOW (*1) HIGH (*2) LOW (*1) HIGH (*2) LOW (*1)
Phase 1 phase input, 2 phase input
Counting
Input Signal Signal Level (øA, øB) EIA standard, RS-422-A differential type line driver level
5/12/24VDC, 2 to 5mA
[Equivalent to Am26L31 (Japan Texas Instruments, Inc.)]
1 Phase
200kpps 10kpps 400kpps 10kpps 400kpps 10kpps
Counting Speed Input
(Maximum) 2 Phase
200kpps 7kpps 300kpps 7kpps 300kpps 7kpps
Input
Counting Range 24-bit binary 0 to 16777215
Counter Model Preset up/down counter and ring counter functions
5μs 100μs 142μs 2.5μs 3.3μs 100μs 142μs 2.5μs 3.3μs 100μs 142μs
Minimum Count Pulse

Width 2.5μs 2.5μs 50 50 71 71 1.25 1.25 1.65 1.65 50 50 71 71 1.25 1.25 1.65 1.65 50 50 71 71
μs μs μs μs μs μs μs μs μs μs μs μs μs μs μs μs μs μs μs μs
(1 and 2 phase input) (1 phase input) (2 phase input) (1 phase input) (2 phase input) (1 phase input) (2 phase input) (1 phase input) (2 phase input) (1 phase input) (2 phase input)
Coincidence Comparison Range 24-bit binary

Output Comparison Result Setting value < count value, setting value = count value, setting value > count value
EIA standard, RS-422-A differential type line
Preset 5/12/24VDC, 2 to 5mA driver level [Equivalent to Am26L31 (Japan
External Texas Instruments, Inc.)]
Input
Function Start 5/12/24VDC, 2 to 5mA 5/12/24VDC, 2 or 5mA
Response Time OFF-ON: 0.5ms max, ON-OFF: 3ms max.
External Coincidence Output 2A/1 common
Output Response Time 0.1ms max.
Number of Occupied Stations 4 stations
Power Supply Voltage 18 to 28.8VDC
Current Consumption (at 24VDC) 70mA 100mA 120mA
Connection Terminal Block 27-point terminal block (M3.5 x 7 screws)
Application Wire Size 0.75 to 2.00mm²
Application Solderless Terminal RAV1.25 to 3.5, RAV2 to 3.5 (compliant to JIS C 2805)
Weight (kg) 0.41 0.42
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 151.9 x 65 x 63
Note:
1. The rise and fall time of the input signal should be 2µs or less and have a duty cycle of 50%.
2. The rise and fall time of the input signal should be 0.1µs or less and have a duty cycle of 50%.
114
CC-Link Special Function I/O: Positioning Module • AJ65BT-D75P2-S3
• Decentralized motion control - can be placed anywhere on a CC-Link network
• Supports absolute positioning with Mitsubishi’s intelligent digital servo line RS-422
• Differential driver supports pulse output to 400 kpps and 10m distance to amplifiers
• A wide selection of positioning control functions including:
• Seven types of home position return functions
• Automatic trapezoid and S curve acceleration/deceleration methods
• Point table for each axis (up to 600 points)
Model Number AJ65BT-D75P2-S3

Stocked Item S
Interpolation Function 2 axis linear interpolation, 2 axis circular interpolation (*1)
Control Method PTP (Point to Point) control, locus control (both linear and circular interpolation can be set), speed control, speed/position switch control
Control Unit mm, inch, degrees, pulse
Positioning Data It is possible to set 600 data points (positioning data No.: 1 to 600) per axis
Peripheral Device / Software GX Conigurator-AP; A7HGP / SW1RX-AD75P or later; PC-9800 series / SW1NX-AD75P or later (*2); DOS/V PC (IBM PC/AT compatible PC) /
Package SW1VD-AD75P or later (*3)
Teaching Module AD75TU (software version D or later)
Backup Parameters and positioning data are stored in the lash memory (battery-less)
Positioning Method PTP control: Incremental/absolute system; Speed/position switch control: Incremental/absolute system (*4); Locus control: Incremental/absolute system
Absolute system: -214748364.8 to 214748364.7 (m) / -13421772.8 to 13421772.7 (m) (*5); -21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (inch) / -1342.17728 to
1342.17727 (inch); 0 to 359.99999 (degree) / 0 to 359.99999 (degree); 2147483648 to 2147483647 (pulse) / -134217728 to 134217727 (pulse)
Incrementation system: -214748364.8 to 214748364.7 (m) / -13421772.8 to 13421772.7 (m); -21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (inch) / -1342.17728
to 1342.17727 (inch); -21474.83648 to 21474.8364.7 (degree) / -1342.17728 to 1342.17727 (degree); 2147483648 to 2147483647 (pulse) /
Positioning Range
-134217728 to 134217727 (pulse)
Speed/position switch control (increment system): 0 to 214748364.7 (m) / 0 to 13421772.7 (m); 0 to 21474.83647 (inch) / 0 to 1342.17727 (inch);
0 to 21474.83647 (degree) / 0 to 1342.17727 (degree); 0 to 2147483647 (pulse) / 0 to 134217727 (pulse)
Positioning
Speed/position switch control (absolute system): 0 to 359.99999 (degree) / 0 to 359.99999 (degree)

0.01 to 6000000.00 (mm/min) / 0.01 to 375000.00 (mm/min) (*5); 0.001 to 600000.000 (inch/min) / 0.001 to 37500.000 (inch/min); 0.001 to
Speed Command
600000.000 (degree/min) / 0.001 to 37500.000 (degree/min); 1 to 1000000 (pulse/s) / 1 to 62500 (pulse/s)
Acceleration /
Automatic trapezoid acceleration / deceleration and S-curve acceleration / deceleration (*6)
Deceleration Processing
Acceleration /
It is possible to switch between 1 to 65535 (ms) and 1 to 8388608 (ms); It is possible to set 4 patterns for both acceleration and deceleration times.
Deceleration Time
Rapid Stop Deceleration
It is possible to switch between 1 to 65535 (ms) and 1 to 8388908 (ms) (same ranges as for the acceleration / deceleration time)
Time
Starting Time 20 ms or less (excluding link scan time)
10136-3000VE (soldering-type, accessory)
Connector
10136-6000EL (pressure connection type, sold separately)
In case of 10138-3000VE: AWG#24 to #30 (approximately 0.05 to 0.2 SQ)
In case of 10138-6000VE: AWG#28 (approximately 0.08 SQ)
Maximum Output Pulse When connected to differential driver: 400kbps; When connected to open collector: 200kbps
Maximum Connection Distance
When connected to differential driver: 10m; When connected to open collector: 2m
Between Servos
Station type Intelligent device station
Number of Occupied Stations 4 stations (128 points each for RX/RY, 16 points each for RWr/RWw)
External Power Supply 24VDC (20.4 to 26.4V)
Applicable Solderless Terminal RAV1.25 to 3.5, RAV2 to 3.5
24VDC Internal Current
0.30A
Consumption
Weight (kg) 0.50
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 170 x 63.5 x 80
Notes:
1. The circular interpolation function is not available when a stepping motor is used.
2. PC-9800 Series is a registered trademark of NET.
3. DOS/V is a registered trademark of IBM Japan, Ltd.
4. In the absolute method, the control unit of the speed/position switch control is “degree” only.
5. Indicates the setting range of “standard mode/stepping motor mode.”
6. The automatic S-curve acceleration/deceleration is not available when a stepping motor is used.

n DISTRIBUTED I/O
CC-Link Special Function I/O • AJ65SBT-RPT
• Allows distance of a CC-Link network to be extended up to 13.2 km with regular
BA1SJ61-S or BA1SJ61-P cable
• Use a maximum of 10 repeaters per segment
• Allows T-branch configurations
Model Number AJ65SBT-RPT
Stocked Item S
Maximum Number of Connected
10
Modules (Levels) per Segment
Maximum Transmission Distance of
Varies depending on the transmission speed. Same as the normal CC-Link system (a system consisting of one segment).
Each Segment
Number of Occupied Stations
None
(Stations)
Station Numbers that Can be Set No station number
Power Supply Voltage 20.4 to 26.4VDC
Current Consumption 0.06A (at TYP 24VDC)
Weight (kg) 0.2
System Coniguration
[Segment] (*2) [Segment(first level)] Notes:
Master station (*3) 1. The repeater is a module used to connect each segment and extend the CC-Link system.
Remote
Remote I/O station device station
Repeater
(AJ65SBT-RPT)
Intelligent
device station
2. In a CC-Link system using repeaters, a block of devices connected by wiring from one
terminal resistor to another terminal resistor is referred to as a segment. (A conventional
CC-Link system can be said to be a single-segment configuration.)
IN OUT
Terminal resistor Terminal resistor Terminal resistor Terminal resistor 3. It is necessary to match the transmission speed of each segment to the transmission
(mandatory) (mandatory) (mandatory) (mandatory)
speed of the master station.
Repeater (J65SBT-RPT) (*1)
[1st level] IN OUT
Intelligent Remote
Remote I/O station device station device station
Terminal resistor
(mandatory)
Terminal resistor
(mandatory)
Repeater(AJ65SBT-RPT) (*1)
[2nd level] IN OUT
Local station
Remote I/O station
Terminal resistor
Terminal resistor (mandatory)
(mandatory)
CC-Link Special Function I/O • AJ65BTS-RPH

• Star topology wiring (T-branch) with 8 branch lines available in CC-Link system
• Extended transmission distance in CC-Link system
• Energy saving by adoption of a spring clamp terminal block
• Improved maintenability by system separation.
Model Number AJ65BTS-RPH
Stocked Item -
Station Number -
Station Type -
Number of Occupied Stations 0
Transmission Speed Can select from 156 kbps / 625 kbps / 2.5 Mbps / 5 Mbps / 10 Mbps
Max. Number of Modules Connected to
64
the Trunk Line
Trunk line side: No restriction (compliant with the CC-Link speciications)
Connection Position
Branch line side: Connect to the end of the branch line (segment end)
AJ65BTS-RPH only: 2nd stage
Max. Number of Stages Connected to
Combination of AJ65BTS-RPH and AJ65SBT-RPT: 3rd stage
Configure Segment
Combination of AJ65BTS-RPH and AJ65FRTA-RPH, AJ65SBT-RPS/RPG or AJ65BT-RPI: 2nd stage
Trunk line side: 110 Ω, or 130 Ω
Terminating Resistor
Branch line side: 110 Ω
Terminal Block Type Spring clamp terminal block
Connected
Terminal Block Applicable Wire
AWG24 to 12, Single wire 0.5 to 1.78 mm2; stranded wire 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
Sizes
Mounting Orientation No restriction (mountable in six orientations)
Module Fixing Screw M4 mounting screw
Applicable DIN Rail TH35-7.5Fe, TH35-7.5Al (conforming to IEC 60715)
Voltage 24 V DC external power supply (20.4 to 26.4 V, ripple within ±5%)
Power Supply
Current 0.36 A (TYP. 24 V DC)
Current Consumption 0.06A (at TYP 24VDC)
Weight (kg) 0.37
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 197.5 x 65 x 45.5
116
CC-Link Special Function I/O: Optical Repeater Modules • AJ65SBT-RPS • AJ65SBT-RPG
• Allows distance of a CC-Link network to be extended up to 7.8 km using optical fiber cable
• Noise resistant
• Use a maximum of 6 repeaters per segment
Model Number AJ65SBT-RPS AJ65SBT-RPG
Stocked Item - -
Power Supply
Common Current 0.06A (at TYP 24VDC)
Specification Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 118 x 54 x 40
Weight (kg) 0.2
CC-Link Maximum Number of Connected
3 levels 2 levels
Communication Levels in a System
Specification Number of Occupied Stations None
Connection Cable SI-200/220 QSI-185/230 GI-50/125
Optical Applicable Connector CA7003 CA9103S
Communication Maximum Transmission Distance
Specification of Optical Fiber Cable Between 500m 1000m 2000m
Repeaters
[Segment (*2)] Combinations of optical repeater module and optical iber cable to
Master station (*3)
Remote I/O Repeater (*1) Intelligent Repeater (*1) be used. The optical repeater modules can be used in the following
station (AJ65SBT-RPS/RPG) device station (AJ65SBT-RPS/RPG) combinations with optical iber cable.
Optical
Repeater Optical Fiber Cable
[Segment (first level)] Module
Repeater (*1) SI-type optical iber cable (maximum extension distance of cable: 500m)
(AJ65SBT-RPS/RPG) AJ65SBT-RPS
Remote Intelligent
QSI-type optical iber cable (maximum extension distance of cable: 1000m)
Remote I/O Remote
station device station device station device station AJ65SBT-RPG GI-type optical iber cable (maximum extension distance of cable: 2000m)
1. The repeater is a module used to connect each segment and extend the CC-Link system.
2. In a CC-Link system using repeaters, a block of devices connected by wiring from one terminal resistor to
[Segment (first level)] another terminal resistor is referred to as a segment. (A conventional CC-Link system can be said to be a
Local station single-segment configuration.)
Repeater (*1)
Remote I/O station (AJ65SBT-RPS/RPG) 3. It is necessary to match the transmission speed of each segment to the transmission speed of the master
station.
4. Up to 3 levels can be used in one segment (up to 2 levels when AJ65SBT-RPG modules are used).
[Segment (second level)] (*4)

Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
Repeater (*1)
(AJ65SBT-RPS/RPG)
Optical fiber cable CC-Link dedicated cable Terminal resistor (mandatory)
CC-Link Special Function I/O: Wireless Optical Repeater Module • AJ65B-RPI-10A • AJ65BT-RPI-10B
• Wireless optical link is ideal for rotating machinery, to replace festoon cabling, etc.
• Use “A” and “B” modules as a pair
• Certifications: CE
Model Number AJ65BT-RPI-10A / AJ65BT-RPI-10B
Stocked Item -
Power Supply
Common Current 0.137A (at TYP 24VDC)
Specification Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 161 x 100 x 57.5
Weight (kg) 0.5
Transmission Speed 2.5M / 625k / 156kbps
CC-Link Maximum Number of Connected
2 levels
Communication Levels in a Segment
Specification When the monitoring function is used: 1 (remote I/O station), when the monitoring
Number of Occupied Stations
function is not used: 0 (no station is occupied)
Optical Transmission Distance 0 to 100m
Optical When the optical transmission distance is 0 to 50m: Total angle ±2
Angle of Beam Spread (°)
Communication When the optical transmission distance is 50 to 100m: Total angle ±1
Specification Modulation Frequency Module A to module B: 36 ± 3MHz; Module B to module A: 44 ± 2.5MHz
Modulation Method FSK
Specially
Noted General Ambient Illumination Must be 10000 lx or less (avoid direct sunlight)
Specification

n DISTRIBUTED I/O
CC-Link Special Function I/O: RS-232 Interface Module • AJ65BT-R2N
• Provides a single RS-232 port directly on the CC-Link network
• Allows general purpose RS-232 devices to be located remotely (Printer, barcode, reader, etc.)
Model Number AJ65BT-R2N

Stocked Item S
Interface RS-232 compliant (D-Sub 9P)
Communication Method Full-duplex communication method
RS-232
Synchronization Method Asynchronous method

Transmission Speed 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 (*1), 115200 (*1) bps
Transmission Distance Up to 15m
Protocol Nonprocedural protocol MELSOFT connection (equivalent to AJ65BT-G4-S3 Q mode)
Transmission Path Bus (RS-485)
CC-Link Station Type Intelligent device station
CC-Link
CC-Link Version Ver.1

Connection Cable CC-Link dedicated cable/CC-Link high-performance cable/CC-Link Ver. 1.10-compatible cable
Number of Occupied Stations 1 station (RX/RY: 32 points each, RWw/RWr: 4 points each)
Insulation Resistance Between all external DC terminals and ground: 10MΩ or more by 500VDC insulation resistance tester
Noise Immunity By noise simulator of 500 Vp-p noise voltage, 1µs pulse width, and 25 to 60 Hz noise frequency
Module Mounting Screw M4 x 0.7 mm x 16 mm or larger, also mountable with DIN rail
Applicable DIN Rail TH35-7.5Fe, TH35-7.5AI, TH35-15Fe (conforms to IEC 60715)
External Power Supply 24VDC (20.4 to 26.4VDC, ripple ratio: within 5%) Current consumption: 0.11 A (TYP. 24VDC)
Rated Input Current Approx. 7 mA
Operating Voltage Range 19.2 to 28.8VDC (ripple ratio: within 5%)
Input Resistance Approx. 3.3 kΩ
OFF-ON 10 ms or less
Response Time
ON-OFF 10 ms or less
Wiring Method For Common 2 points/common, positive/negative common (sink/source)
Number of Output Points 2 points
General-Purpose I\O
Isolation Method Photocoupler

Rated Load Voltage 12 to 24VDC (+20/-15%)
Operating Load Voltage Range 10.2 to 28.8VDC (ripple ratio: within 5%)
Output Type Sink
OFF-ON 1 ms or less
Response Time
ON-OFF 1 ms or less (resistance load)
Voltage 10.2 to 28.8VDC (ripple ratio: within 5%)
External Power Supply For Output
Current 10 mA (at 24VDC), (MAX all points ON)
Wiring Method For Common 2 points/common
Protection Function Yes
External Connections 7-point terminal block (M3.5 screw)
Applicable Wire Size 0.75 to 2 mm²
Applicable Crimping Terminal RAV1.25-3.5, RAV2-3.5 (conforms to JIS C 2805)
Weight (kg) 0.40
Note:
1. Unless data are sent concurrently from the AJ65BT-R2N and external-device sides in Nonprocedural protocol mode, communication at 57600 bps or 115200 bps is available.
In the event of concurrent transmission, an RS-232 receive overrun error (BB23H) may occur.
118
CC-Link Special Function I/O: CC-Link - CC-Link / LT Bridge Module • AJ65SBT-CLB C C -L ink
PW L R UN L E R C C -Link
R . L R UN L E /L T C C -Link
RR. L ERR.
C C -Link/L T
• Provides a way to link a CC-Link/LT network to a CC-Link network

S TATION NO.
40 20 10 B R ATE
8 4 2 NOS TS T
1 2 1 4
2 1 2 1 MODE B RATE
3 4 5 NC
6 7 8 9 10 2 1 2 1
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A J 65S B T -C
LB ON
CC-Link
C C -L ink/L T
Model Number AJ65SBT-CLB

CC-Link
Stocked Item -
Selected between 2, 4 and 8 stations*
When 2 stations are selected: 64 points for each of RX/RY
(16 points used by the system), 8 words for each of RWr/RWw
Number of Occupied Stations When 4 stations are selected: 128 points for each of RX/RY
CC-Link/LT
Number of CC-Link Occupied Stations 2 stations occupied 4 stations occupied 8 stations occupied
Maximum Number 4-Points Mode 12 stations 28 stations 56 stations
of CC-Link/LT 8-Points Mode 6 stations 14 stations 28 stations
Connected Stations 16-Points Mode 3 stations 7 stations 14 stations
Bridge Station Connection Position Connected at the end of the trunk line
*When 8 stations are occupied, set the parameters so that two 4-station occupying modules are connected consecutively.
CC-Link/LT
CC-Link/LT offers a cost effective way to network small groups of digital I/O for applications such as in-panel wiring and similar uses.
Key Features:
• Attach wiring to I/O blocks with no cutting or stripping of cable: devices simply clip on to the cable, leading to
significant labor and material cost saving
• Fast communication speed
• Up to 1024 I/O per segment
• Fine granularity of I/O allows placement of small quantities of I/O where required
• Can be connected to an existing CC-Link network via the AJ65SBT-CLB bridge module
Guide to CC-Link/LT I/O

This section presents the current line-up of CC-Link/LT I/O blocks. For the network master modules,
please refer to the appropriate controller section.
Before using this guide, please read the following guide to nomenclature:
CL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 Unit for CC-Link/LT 3 Total number of I/O points 5 Connection form 7 Shape
:1 or 2 2: 2 points B: Terminal block S:Ultracompact
4: 4 points C: Sensor connector V: Vertical type
8: 8 points M: MIL connector None: Normal type
16: 16 points D: Cable type (horizontal type)
2 Unit type 4 I/O specifications 6 Wire type
X: Input D1: 24VDC input 1: 1-wire type
Y: Output R1: Relay output 2A 2: 2-wire type
XY: I/O hybrid T1: Transistor output 0.1A 3: 2- or 3-wire type
TP1: Transistor output 0.1A 5: Input 2 or 3-wire type, output 2-wire type
(with output protection)
DT1: 24VDC input/
transistor output 0.1A
DR1: 24VDC input/
relay output 2A

n DISTRIBUTED I/O
Note on “1-wire”, “2-wire” and “3-wire” terminology
Throughout the CC-Link/LT blocks, we reference these terms. These are concise definitions for the following ways to connect I/O devices:
• 1 wire: One side of the load is connected to the I/O module terminal block. The other side is connected to a common terminal
shared by all devices.
• 2 wire: One side of the load is connected to the I/O module terminal block. The other side is connected to a dedicated common terminal for
that load on the terminal block. Note that in some cases, the common terminals may be connected internally.
• 3 wire: The I/O block is configured to accept loads with three connections (such as various types of sensor, etc)
CC-Link/LT Accessories
The following connectors and cable for CC-Link/LT are available:
NOTE: ALL CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES ARE SOLD SEPARATELY. PLEASE ENSURE YOU HAVE ALL NECESSARY
CONNECTORS BEFORE BEGINNING AN INSTALLATION.
Product Model Number Description Quantity Per Box AWG Stocked Item
Where _ _ = length (sold by the

Dedicated Flat Cable CL9-FL4-18-_ _ 10 m N/A S
meter)
Connector CL9-CNF-18 - 10 N/A S

Terminating Resistor CL9-TERM - 2 N/A -
ECN-A014R Red 20 28 - 24 -
A Type Plug (*1) ECN-A004Y Yellow 20 24 - 22 -
ECN-A024BL Blue 20 22 - 20 -
A Type Receptacle ECN-A104 Panel / Wall mounting type 20 N/A -
(*1) ECN-A154 Relay connection type 20 N/A -
ECN-M014R Red 20 26 - 24 -
ECN-M024Y Yellow 20 26 - 24 -
ECN-M034OR Orange 20 26 - 24 -
M Type Plug (*1)
ECN-M044GN Green 20 22 - 20 -
Open Sensor Connector
ECN-M054BL Blue 20 22 - 20 -
ECN-M064GY Gray 20 22 - 20 -
ECN-M114R Red 20 26 - 24 -
ECN-M124Y Yellow 20 26 - 24 -
M Type Receptacle ECN-M134OR Orange 20 26 - 24 -
(*1) ECN-M144GN Green 20 22 - 20 -
ECN-M154BL Blue 20 22 - 20 -
ECN-M164GY Gray 20 22 - 20 -
MIL Type (*2) - Available from 3rd parties - - -
Notes:
1. Use with CL_ _ _-_ _C_ _ _ type blocks
2. Use with CL_ _ _-_ _ _M_ _ _ type blocks
120
CC-Link/LT Power Supply Adapter
CC-Link/LT requires 24VDC power to be supplied to the network. The two options for doing this are the
CL1PAD1 and the CL1PSU-2A. CL1PAD1 allows network power to be derived from a 24VDC supply,
whereas the CL1PSU-2A allows a 120VAC supply to be used.
Model Number CL1PAD1

Stocked Item -
Certification UL • cUL
Maximum Input Voltage 28.8VDC
Maximum Input Current 5.0A
Insulation Resistance 10MΩ across input-FG by 500VDC insulation resistance tester
CL1PAD1 to external PSU: screw terminals
External Connection System
CL1PAD1 to CC-Link/LT network: CL9-CNF-18 connectors to network cable.
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm (in) 66 x 85 x 90 (2.5 x 3.3 x 3.5)
Model Number CL1PSU-2A

Stocked Item S
24V
Certification CE AC BS
-2S W L LINK DB
N
Rated Voltage 100, 120, 200, 230, and 240VAC

DA
CL1PSU
-2A
Rated Current 1.2A / 100V AC 0.7A / 200VAC LCNET/
Input POW ER 24G

DB
DA
Power Fuse 3.15A +24V
Inrush Current Max. 50A / 100V AC Max. 60A / 200

Output Voltage 24VDC +10 % / -5 %
0.01A to 2A Derating occurs according to the ambient temperature and
Output power voltage. [Use the module in a proper range so that the total current
Output Current
consumption of each module does not exceed 2A (except the period
immediately after the power is turned on).]
By noise simulator of 1000Vp-p in noise voltage, 1µs in noise width,
Noise Resistance
and 25 to 60Hz in frequency
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm (inch) 90 x 90 x 90 (3.55 x 3.55 x 3.55)
CC-Link/LT to CC-Link Bridge Module

The AJ65SBT-CLB allows a CC-Link/LT network segment to be connected to a CC-Link network. PW
C C -L ink
L R UN L E R C C -Link
R . L R UN L E /L T
The module uses the A6CON-L5P and A6CON-LJ5P network connectors.

RR. L ERR. C C -Link
S TATION C C -Link/L T
40 20 10 8 NO. B R ATE
4 2 NOS TS T
1 2 1 4
2 1 2 1 MODE B RATE
3 4 5 NC
6 7 8 9 10 2 1 2 1
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A J 65S B T -C
LB ON
CC-Link
C C -L ink/L T
Model Number AJ65SBT-CLB

Stocked Item -
CC-Link
Selected between 2, 4 and 8 stations
*When 2 stations are selected: 64 points for each of RX/RY
Number of Occupied Stations (16 points used by the system), 16 words for each of RWr/RWw
CC-Link/LT
Number of CC-Link Occupied Stations 2 stations occupied 4 stations occupied 8 stations occupied
Maximum Number 4-Points Mode 12 stations 28 stations 56 stations
of CC-Link/LT 8-Points Mode 6 stations 14 stations 28 stations
Connected Stations 16-Points Mode 3 stations 7 stations 14 stations
Bridge Station Connection Position Connected at the end of the trunk line
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm (inch) 87 x 49 x 40 (3.43 x 1.93 x 1.57)
Note: When 8 stations are occupied make parameter setting so that two 4-station occupying modules are consecutively connected.

n DISTRIBUTED I/O
CC-Link/LT: Screw Terminal Modules
Input Modules
Model Number CL1X4-D1B2 CL2X8-D1B2
Stocked Item S S
Input Type DC / +COM/-COM
Number of Input Points 4 8
PW L R UN L E R R C L2Y 8-T P 1B
. 2
PW L R UN L E R R
.
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ON
24VDC
ON
Rated Input Voltage IN STATION NO.

OUT 40 20 10
8 4 2 1
STATION NO. 0.5ms
1.5ms
Y0
External Connection Wire Type Two wire X0

X1
X2
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
X3 Y7
Common Connection 4 points / common 8 points / common

Output Modules
Model Number CL1Y4-T1B2 CL1Y4-R1B2 CL1Y4-R1B1 CL2Y8-TP1B2
Output Type Transistor / Sink Relay Relay Transistor / Sink
Number of Output Points 4 4 4 8
Rated Load Voltage 12/24VDC 250VAC/30VDC 250VAC/30VDC 12/24VDC
Maximum Load 1 Point 0.1A 2A 2A 0.1A
Current 1 Common 0.4A 4A 2A 0.8A
External Connection Wire Type Two wire Two wire One wire Two wire
Common Connection 4 points / common 4 points / common 1 point / common 8 points / common
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 50 x 49 x 40 80 x 49 x 40 80 x 49 x 40 64 x 49 x 40
I/O Modules
Model Number CL1XY4-DT1B2 CL1XY4-DR1B2 CL1XY8-DT1B2 CL1XY8-DR1B2
DC Input/Transistor Output / DC Input/Relay Output / DC Input/Transistor Output / DC input /
I/O Type
+COM/-COM/sink +COM /-COM +COM/-COM/sink relay output
Number of I/O Points 2/2 2/2 4/4 4/4
Input/Load Voltage 24VDC / 24VDC and 12VDC 24VDC / 250VAC and 30VDC 24VDC / 24VDC and 12VDC 24VDC / 250VAC and 30VDC
Maximum Output 1 Point 0.1A 2A 0.1A 2A
Load Current 1 Common 0.4A 4A 0.4A 4A
Leakage Current 0.1mA N/A 0.1mA N/A
Connection Wire Type on
Two wire / two wire
Input / Output Sides
2 points/common; 2 points/common; 4 points/common; 4 points/common;
Common Connection
2 points/common 2 points/common 4 points/common 4 points/common
LINK /PW
P W L R UN. L E
RR.
0 1 2 3
C L2Y 8-T P 1B
PW L R UN
2
L E RR.
ON 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ON
CC-Link/LT: Spring Clamp Modules

CL1Y4-T1S2
OUT 40 20 10 8 4
21
S TATION NO. HLD
40 20 10
8 4 2 1
STATION NO.
OUT
HLD
DC24V DC24V
Y0 Y1
DC 24V Y0 Y2 Y3
Y1 Y4 Y5
Y2 Y3 Y6 Y7
DC 24G DC
24G C OM+
C OM+ C
DC 24V C OM+ OM+ C OM+
C OM+ C OM+ C OM+ C
OM+ C OM+
C OM+ C OM+
Input Modules Output Modules

Model Number CL1X4-D1S2 CL2X8-D1S2 Model Number CL1Y4-T1S2 CL2Y8-TP1S2
Stocked Item S S Stocked Item S S
Input Type DC / +COM/-COM Output Type Transistor / Sink
Number of Input Points 4 8 Number of Output Points 4 8
Rated Input Voltage 24VDC Rated Load Voltage 12/24VDC
External Connection Wire Type Two wire Maximum Load 1 Point 0.1A 0.1A
Common Connection 4 points / common 8 points / common Current 1 Common 0.4A 0.8A
Internal Current Consumption 40mA Leakage Current 0.1mA
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 69 x 49 x 40 External Connection Wire Type Two wire
Common Connection 4 points / common 8 points / common
122
CC-Link/LT: e-CON (Sensor Connector Modules)
Input Modules
Model Number CL1X4-D1C3 CL2X8-D1C3V CL2X16-D1C3V
Stocked Item - - -
Input Type DC / +COM
Number of Input Points 4 8 16
External Connection Wire Type Two wire/three wire
Common Connection 4 points / common 8 points / common 16 points / common
Internal Current Consumption 35mA 40mA 45mA
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 69 x 49 x 23.6 24 x 85 x 39 48 x 85 x 39
Output Modules I/O Modules

Model Number CL1Y4-T1C2 CL2Y8-TP1C2V CL2Y16-TP1C2V Model Number CL2XY16-DTP1C5V
Stocked Item - - - Stocked Item S
Output Type Transistor / Sink DC input/transistor
I/O Type
Number of Output Points 4 8 16 output / +COM/sink
Number of I/O Points 8/8
Rated Load Voltage 24VDC
Maximum Load 1 Point 0.1A 0.1A 0.1A
Current Maximum Output 1 Point 0.1A
1 Common 0.4A 0.8A 1.6A
Load Current 1 Common 0.8A
Leakage Current 0.1mA
Leakage Current 0.1mA
External Connection Wire Type Three wire Two wire Two wire
Connection Wire Type on Input / Two wire or three wire
Common Connection 4 points / common 8 points / common 16 points / common
Output Sides / two wire
Internal Current Consumption 60mA 55mA 55mA 8 points/common;
Common Connection
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 69 x 49 x 23.6 24 x 85 x 39 48 x 85 x 39 8 points/common
C L2X16-D1M C L2 Y 16-T P
CC-Link/LT: MIL Connector Modules

1V 1M1V
IN 1234567 OUT 1234567
8 8
S T.No. ON S T.No. ON
LINK/PW LINK/PW
PW PW
L R UN L R UN
LE RR. L ER R .
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
A A
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F
Input Modules Output Modules

Model Number CL2X16-D1M1V Model Number CL2Y16-TP1M1V CL2Y16-TPE1M1V CL2Y16-TP1MJ1V
Stocked Item - Stocked Item - - -
Input Type DC / +COM Output Type Transistor / sink Transistor / source Transistor / sink
Number of Input Points 16 Number of Output Points 16
Rated Input Voltage 24VDC Rated Load Voltage 12/24VDC
External Connection Wire Type One wire Maximum Load 1 Point 0.1A
Common Connection 16 points / common Current 1 Common 1.6A
Internal Current Consumption 45mA Leakage Current 0.1mA
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 24 x 85 x 39 External Connection Wire Type One wire
Common Connection 16 points / common

n DISTRIBUTED I/O
CC-Link/LT: Cable Type Modules
Input Modules Output Modules I/O Modules
Model Number CL1X2-D1D3S Model Number CL1Y2-T1D2S Model Number CL1XY2-DT1D5S
Stocked Item - Stocked Item - Stocked Item -
Input Type DC / +COM Output Type Transistor / sink DC input/transistor /
I/O Type
+COM/sink
Number of Input Points 2 Number of Output Points 2
Number of I/O Points 1/1
Rated Input Voltage 24VDC Rated Load Voltage 24VDC
External Connection Wire Type Three wire Maximum Load 1 Point 0.1A
Current Maximum Output 1 Point 0.1A
Common Connection 2 points / common 1 Common 0.2A
Load Current 1 Common 0.1A
Internal Current Consumption 40mA Output Response OFF-ON 1.0 ms
Time Leakage Current 0.1mA
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 20 x 65 x 12 ON-OFF 1.0 ms
Connection Wire Type on Input / Three wire / two
Leakage Current 0.1mA Output Sides wire
External Connection Wire Type Two wire 1 point/common; 1
Common Connection
Common Connection 2 points / common point/common
Internal Current Consumption 40mA Internal Current Consumption 40mA
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 20 x 65 x 12 Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 20 x 65 x 12
CC-Link/LT: CL2AD4-B Analog-Digital Converter Module

Model Number CL2AD4-B
Stocked Item S
Voltage -10 to 10VDC (input resistance 1MΩ)
Analog Input
Current 0 to 20mADC (input resistance 250Ω)
Digital Output 15-bit signed binary (-4096 to 4095)
Accuracy
Analog Input Digital Output Ambient Ambient Max.
Range Value Temperature Resolution
Temp. Temp.
Coefficient (*3)
I/O Characteristics, Maximum 25 ± 5°C (*1) 0 to 55°C
Resolution, Accuracy (Accuracy -10 to 10V -4000 to 4000
2.5mV
Relative To Maximum Value of 0 to 10V
Voltage
Digital Output Value) 0 to 5V 0 to 4000 ± 0.2% ±4% ±80ppm / °C 1.25mV
1 to 5V (±8 digit) (*2) (±8 digit) (*2) (±0.0080% / °C) 1.0mV
0 to 20mA 5µA
Current 0 to 4000
4 to 20mA 4µA
Conversion Speed 200µs / 4 channel (*4)

Absolute Maximum Output Voltage: ±15V, current: ±30mA
Analog Output 4 channels / 1 module
CC-Link/LT Station Type Remote device station
Number of Occupied Stations 16 point mode with four occupied stations (*5)
Dielectric
Insulation
Specific Isolated Area Isolation System Withstand
Resistance
Voltage
Between communication system terminals and all analog input terminals Photocoupler
Isolation
Between power supply system terminals and all analog input terminals isolated 1 min. duration 500VDC
Transformer of 500VAC 10MΩ or more
Between communication system terminals and power supply system terminals isolated
Across channels Non-isolated - -
Connected Terminal Block Direct-coupled, 14-point terminal block (M3 screw)

Applicable Crimping Terminal RAV1.25-3 (conforming to JIS C2805), V1.25-3 (manufactured by JST Mfg. CO., Ltd.), 1.25-3, TG1.25-3 (manufactured by NICHIFU CO., Ltd.)
Voltage 24VDC (20.4VDC to 28.8VDC, ripple ratio: within 5%)
Module
Power Current Consumption 0.070A
Supply (*6)
Start Up Current 0.570A
Protection Degree IP2X
Weight (kg) 0.15
Notes:
1. Standard accuracy
2. Digital indicates the digital output value
3. Accuracy for each 1°C temperature change
4. The conversion speed of the first order lag filter channel is 400µs when a first order lag filter is used.
5. The number of I/O occupied points (occupied station count) differs depending on the final channel permitted for conversion.
6. A dedicated power supply/supply adaptor is used to supply power.
124
CC-Link/LT: CL2DA2-B Digital-Analog Converter Module
Model Number CL2DA2-B
Stocked Item S
Digital Voltage 12-bit signed binary (-4096 to 4095)

Resolution Current 12-bit signed binary (-96 to 4095)
Analog Voltage -10 to 10VDC (external load resistance: 1kΩ to 1MΩ)

Output Current 0 to 20mADC (external load resistance: 0 to 600Ω)
Accuracy
Analog Output Digital Input Ambient Ambient Max.
Range Value Temperature Resolution
Temp. Temp.
Coefficient (*2)
25 ±5°C (*1) 0 to 55°C
I/O Characteristics, Maximum -10 to 10V -4000 to 4000 ±0.2% ±0.4%
Resolution, Accuracy (Accuracy 2.5mV
0 to 10V (±20mV) (±40mV)
Relative To Maximum Value of Voltage
Digital Output Value) 0 to 5V 0 to 4000 ±0.2% ±0.4% ±80ppm /°C 1.25mV
1 to 5V (±10mV) (±20mV) (±0.0080% /°C) 1.0mV
0 to 20mA ±0.2% ±0.4% 5µA
Current 0 to 4000
4 to 20mA (±40µA) (±80µA) 4µA
Conversion Speed 200µs / 2 channel

Output Short-Circuit Protection Provided
Absolute Maximum Output Voltage: ±12V, current: +21mA
Analog Output Points 2 channels / 1 module
CC-Link/LT Station Type Remote device station
Number of Occupied Stations 16 point mode with two occupied stations (*3)
Dielectric
Insulation
Specific Isolated Area Isolation System Withstand
Resistance
Voltage
Between communication system terminals and all analog input terminals Photocoupler
Isolation Between power supply system terminals and all analog input terminals isolated 1 min. duration 500VDC
Transformer of 500VAC 10MΩ or more
Between communication system terminals and power supply system terminals isolated
Across channels Non-isolated - -
Connected Terminal Block Direct-coupled, 14-point terminal block (M3 screw)

Applicable Crimping Terminal RAV1.25-3 (conforming to JIS C2805), V1.25-3 (manufactured by JST Mfg. CO., Ltd.), 1.25-3, TG1.25-3 (manufactured by NICHIFU CO., Ltd.)
Voltage 24VDC (20.4VDC to 28.8VDC, ripple ratio: within 5%)
Module
Power Current Consumption 0.170A
Supply (*4)
Start Up Current 0.470A
Protection Degree IP2X
Weight (kg) 0.15
Notes:
1. Standard accuracy.
2. Accuracy for each 1°C temperature change.
3. The number of I/O occupied points (occupied station count) differs depending on the final channel permitted for conversion.
4. A dedicated power supply/supply adaptor is used to supply power.

n DISTRIBUTED I/O
CC-Link/LT Accessories
Common Terminal Blocks CL2TE-5 and CL2TE-10S
Use these terminal blocks to increase the number of common terminals on a
CC-Link/LT I/O block in order to increase wiring convenience.
Model Number CL2TE-5 CL2TE-10S
Stocked Item - -
Cable Type I/O Module Holder CL1-HLD

Use this holder to increase the convenience of mounting the cable type I/O
modules. Can be bolted down or DIN rail mounted. Non-stock item.
Model Number CL1-HLD
Stocked Item -
CC-Link Safety
CC-Link safety is a fully IEC 61508 SIL 3 and ISO13849-1 Category 4 certified network for use in
connecting critical safety components such as emergency stop buttons and light curtains when used
with the MELSEC QS Safety PLC.
Remote I/O Module: QS0J65BTB2-12DT, QS0J65BTS2-8D, QS0J65BTS2-4T

• Dual redundant DC inputs and outputs
• Test pulse capability to sense I/O faults
• Built in safety diagnostics
See the Programmable Automation Controller/PAC section of this PSG for detailed information and specifications.
126
WS Safety Controller
Programmable Automation Controllers

WS Safety Series
A
B C D
STATION No.
x10 1 2 3 4
0 5
6
x1 1
2 3
4
GCC1 0 5
9 6
8 7
L RUN/L ERR.
SLD DG DB DA
A. CPU Modules............................................................................................................................................... 128

B. Networking Modules ................................................................................................................................... 129
C. Safety Input and I/O Combined Modules..................................................................................................... 130
D. Safety Relay Module ................................................................................................................................... 130
Item columns/rows.
Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Programmable Automation Controllers WS Safety 127

n PROGRAMMABLE AUTOMATION CONTROLLERS WS SAFETY
WS Safety Controllers
The WS Safety Controller provides FB-style programming for control of Safety assets, complying with ISO13849-1 PLe and IEC61508 SIL3
safety standards. The most suitable application for the MELSEC-WS is to ensure the safe operation of stand-alone machines. The safety
controller allows expansion of up to 144 points of I/O as well as an Ethernet communication interface. Easily conigure a controller, adjust
parameters, and create programs using the WS Developer Setting and Monitoring Tool software, exclusively provided for the controller.
WS Safety Controller Modules
Model Number Description Stocked Item 1 CPU module
WS0-CPU000200 WS SAFETY, CPU, 144I/O, RS-232 S 12 safety I/O modules (max. 4 safety relay
Max. Coniguration
WS0-CPU130202 WS SAFETY, CPU, 144I/O, RS-232, EFI S output modules)
WS0-MPL000201 WS SAFETY, CPU Memory Plug S 2 different network modules
WS0-XTDI80202 WS SAFETY, Input Module, 8IN S Max. I/O 96 inputs and 48 outputs
WS0-XTIO84202 WS SAFETY, I/O Module, 8IN, 4OUT S 255 standard (i.e. AND, OR, NOT, XNOR, XOR,
WS0-4RO4002 WS SAFETY, 4OUT Safety Relay Module S etc.) or application-speciic logic blocks (i.e.
Program Capacity
emergency stop, two-hand, muting, pressing,
WS0-C20R2 WS SAFETY, RS-232 Programming Cable S
reset, restart, etc.)
WS0-UC-232A WS SAFETY, USB-RS-232 Converter S
Network Options Ethernet, CC-Link
WS0-GETH00200 WS SAFETY, Ethernet Module S
EFI Interfaces 2 (WS0-CPU130202 only)
WSO-GCC100202 WS SAFETY, CC-Link Interface Module S
Flexi Link Up to 4 WS0-CPU130202
WS0-TBS4 WS SAFETY, Screw Terminal S
WS0-TBC4 WS SAFETY, Spring Terminal S Max. Power Supply Current 4A (limited at Power Supply or Fuse)
*Required elements are CPU, Memory Plug, and I/O modules
General Speciications
Operating Ambient Temperature -25 to 55°C
Storage Ambient Temperature -25 to 70°C
Operating Ambient Humidity 10 to 95 % RH, non-condensing (*4)
Storage Ambient Humidity 10 to 95 % RH, non-condensing (*4)
Constant
Frequency Range Half Amplitude Sweep Count
Acceleration
Conforms to IEC Under intermittent 5 to 8.4 Hz - 3.5 mm
Vibration Resistance vibration
61131-2 8.4 to 150 Hz 9.8 m/s² - 10 times each in
Under continuous 5 to 8.4 Hz - 1.75 mm X, Y, Z directions
vibration 8.4 to 150 Hz 4.9 m/s² -
Shock Resistance Conforms to IEC 61131-2 (147 m/s², 3 times each in X, Y, Z directions)
Operating Ambience No corrosive gases
Operating Ambience (*1) 2,000 m or less
Installation Location Inside control panel
Overvoltage Category (*2) II or less
Pollution Degree (*3) 2 or less
Equipment Category Class III
Notes:
1. Do not store or use the programmable controller under the pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude 0 m.
2. This indicates the section of power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within the premises.
Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities. The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300 V is 2500 V.
3. This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in the environment where the device is used. Pollution degree 2 is when only non-conductive pollution occurs.
However, temporary conductivity caused by condensation is to be expected.
4. Specifications of MELSEC-WS differ from MELSEC-Q/QS mainly in General specifications (Operating ambient temperature, storage ambient temperature, etc.) EMC standards:
MELSEC-WS - EN61000-6-2, EN55011MELSEC-Q/QS - IEC 61131-2
A. CPU Modules
Model Number WS0-CPU000200 WS0-CPU130202
Stocked Item S S
Category Category 4 (EN/ISO 13849-1) Category 4 (EN 954-1)
Safety Integrity Level (SIL) SIL3 (IEC 61508) SILCL3 (IEC 62061)
Performance Level (PL) PLe (EN/ISO 13849-1)
PFHd 1.07×10-9 1/h 1.69×10-² 1/h
Enclosure Rating (EN/IEC 60529) Terminals: IP20, Housing: IP40
EMC EN61000-6-2, EN55011 (Class A) (*1)
Number of EFI Interfaces 0 2
EFI Connection - By spring clamp terminal block
Data Interface Backplane bus (FLEX BUS+)
Coniguration Interface RS-232
Single-core or inely stranded: 1×0.14 mm² to 2.5 mm² or 2×0.14 mm² to 0.75 mm²
Cross-Circuit of Connecting Wires
Finely stranded with ferrules to EN 46228: 1×0.25 mm² to 2.5 mm² or 2×0.25 mm² to 0.5 mm²
Weight (g) 111 119
Supply Voltage 24VDC (16.8 to 30VDC)
PELV or SELV (The current of the power supply unit that supplies the CPU module has to be limited to a maximum
Type of Supply Voltage
of 4 A - either by the power supply unit itself or by a fuse.)
Power Consumption Max. 2.5 W
Switch-On Time Max. 18 seconds
Short-Circuit Protection 4 A gG (with tripping characteristics B or C)
Note:
1. Specifications of MELSEC-WS differ from MELSEC-Q/QS mainly in General specifications (Operating ambient temperature, storage ambient temperature, etc.) EMC standards: MELSEC-WS - EN61000-6-2,
EN55011MELSEC-Q/QS - IEC 61131-2
128
B. Networking Modules
Ethernet Interface Module

Model Number WS0-GETH00200
Stocked Item S
Number of Modules Mountable to the Safety Controller Max. 2 modules (in total WS0-GETH and WS0-GCC1)
Network Type Ethernet (TCP/IP) 100Base-TX Ethernet (TCP/IP) 10Base-T
Communication Transmission Rate 100Mbps 10Mbps
Connection Technique RJ45
Number of Connections Max. 4 connections + 1 connection (for Setting and Monitoring Tool only)
Enclosure Rating (EN/IEC 60529) IP20
Internal Power Consumption (W) Max. 2.4
Weight (g) 125
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 22.5 x 96.5 x 121
CC-Link Interface Module

Model Number WS0-GCC100202
Stocked Item S
Number of Modules Mountable to the Safety Controller Max. 2 modules (in total WS0-GETH and WS0-GCC1)
CC-Link Station Type Remote device station
CC-Link Version Ver.1.10
Data Transmission Speed 156kbps/625kbps/2.5Mbps/5Mbps/10Mbps (autosensing)
Station Number 1 to 64 (factory default: 0)
1 station (RX/RY 32 points each, RWw/RWr 4 points each)
2 stations (RX/RY 64 points each, RWw/RWr 8 points each)
Number of Occupied Stations 3 stations (RX/RY 96 points each, RWw/RWr 12 points each)
4 stations (RX/RY 128 points each, RWw/RWr 16 points each)
(The last 16 points of RX/RY are for system use (reserved))
Cable Ver.1.10-compatible CC-Link dedicated cable (*1)
Housing Enclosure Rating / Terminals IP40/IP20 according to IEC 60529
Weight (g) 120
Note:
1. Connect a terminating resistor (110Ω).
Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Programmable Automation Controllers WS Safety 129

n PROGRAMMABLE AUTOMATION CONTROLLERS WS SAFETY
C. Safety Input and I/O Combined Modules
Model Number WS0-XTDI80202 WS0-XTIO84202 (*2)
Stocked Item S S
Category Category 4 (EN/ISO 13849-1), Category 4 (EN 954-1)
Safety Integrity Level (SIL) SIL3 (IEC 61508)
Performance Level (PL) PLe (EN/ISO 13849-1)
PFHd 0.4×10-9 1/h 0.9×10-9 1/h (double channel) 4.8×10-9 1/h (single channel)
Enclosure Rating (EN/IEC 60529) Terminals: IP20, Housing: IP40
EMC EN61000-6-2,EN55011 (Class A) (*1)
Protection Class III (IEC 61140)
External Connection Method By spring clamp terminal block
Internal Power Consumption (W/O Test Pulse Output) Max. 1.4 W Max. 1.1 W
Single-core or inely stranded: 1×0.14 mm² to 2.5 mm² or 2×0.14 mm² to 0.75 mm²
Cross-Circuit of Connecting Wires
Finely stranded with ferrules to EN 46228: 1×0.25 mm² to 2.5 mm² or 2×0.25 mm² to 0.5 mm²
Supply Voltage 24VDC (16.8 to 30VDC)
PELV or SELV (The current of the power supply unit that
Type of Supply Voltage supplies the CPU module has to be limited to a maximum of 4
External Power A - either by the power supply unit itself or by a fuse.)
-
Specs
Power Consumption Max. 96 W (including Q1 to Q4)
Switch-On Time Max. 18 seconds
Short-Circuit Protection 4 A gG (with tripping characteristics B or C)
ON Voltage -13 to 30VDC
OFF Voltage -5 to +5VDC
ON Current 2.4 to 3.8 mA
Input Specs
OFF Current -2.5 to 2.1 mA
Redundancy Mismatch Time 4 ms to 30 s (Default: 3 s, Increase or decrease 4 ms by 4 ms)
Number of Inputs 8 points (Single), 4 points (Dual-channel)
Number of Outputs 8 points (2 kinds) 2 points (2 kinds)
Output Type PNP
Output Voltage 15.6 to 30VDC
Test Pulse Output Output Current (DC) Max. 120 mA
Specs Test Pulse Cycle 1 to 25 Hz (Changeable by settings)
Test Pulse OFF Time 1 to 100 ms (Changeable by settings)
Load Capacity 1 µF for test pulse duration ≥ 4 ms, 0.5µF for test pulse duration 1 ms < 100 Ω
Cable Resistance 100 Ω or less
Output Points 4 points (Single), 2 points (Dual-channel)
Output Type PNP
Output Voltage 24VDC (15.6 to 30VDC)
Output Current (DC) 2A
Total Output Current Max. 3.2 A
Output Specs Test Pulse OFF Time - ≤ 0.65ms
Test Pulse Cycle 0.8 Hz
Load Capacity ≤ 0.5 µF
Cable Length 100m, 1.5mm²
Response Time Changeable by logic coniguration
Fast Shut Off Time 8ms
Weight (g) 139 164
Specifications of MELSEC-WS differ from MELSEC-Q/QS mainly in:
General specifications (Operating ambient temperature, storage ambient temperature, etc.)
1. EMC standards: MELSEC-WS-EN61000-6-2, EN55011; MELSEC-Q/QS-IEC 61131-2
2. WS0-XTIO84202 is required for use of WS0-4RO4002
D. Safety Relay Module

Used in tandem with the WS0-XTIO84202 for Safety Relay.
Model Number WS0-4RO4002
Stocked Item S Certiication UL • cUL • CE
Category Category 4 Number of N/O Contacts 4
Safety Integrity Level (SIL) SIL3 Number of N/C Contacts 2
PFDd 1.6×10-7 Floating AC Switching Voltage 5 - 275VAC (250VAC Typical)
PFHd 1×10-9 1/h Contacts DC Switching Voltage 5 - 275VDC (230VDC Typical)
Supply Voltage 24VDC (19.2 - 30VDC) Switching Current 10mA - 6A (12A max.)
Enclosure Rating (EN/IEC 60529) Terminals: IP20, Housing: IP40 Response Time 30ms
EMC EN61000-6-2,EN55011 (Class A)* Non-Isolated Number of N/O Contacts 2
Power Consumption Max. 2 W Current-Limited Output Voltage 18 - 30VDC (24VDC Typical)
Impulse Resistance Voltage 4 kV N/O Contacts Output Current 75 mA
Rated Voltage 300 VAC
Peeled Off Length of Wire 8 mm Weight (kg) 0.19
Max. Tension 0.6 Nm Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 22.5 x 106.5 x 120.8
Specifications of MELSEC-WS differ from MELSEC-Q/QS mainly in:
General specifications (Operating ambient temperature, storage ambient temperature, etc.)
EMC standards: MELSEC-WS-EN61000-6-2, EN55011; MELSEC-Q/QS-IEC 61131-2
130
L Series Programmable Logic Controllers
Programmable Logic Controllers

L Series
PERFORMANCE
series
E XPA N DA B I L I T Y
L Series CPU Modules .....................................................................................................................133

Power Supplies ................................................................................................................................135
Digital I/O Expansion .......................................................................................................................135
Connectors, Cables and Terminal Blocks .........................................................................................138
Analog I/O Modules .........................................................................................................................138
A/D Converter Module .....................................................................................................................139
Intelligent Function Modules ...........................................................................................................141
Networks .........................................................................................................................................146
Accessories .....................................................................................................................................148
Item columns/rows.
Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Programmable Logic Controllers L Series 131

n PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS L SERIES
L Series System Configuration
Display unit
(optional) SD memory card *1
(optional)
END cover
C E F
I/O modules or
intelligent function
RS-232 adapter Branch module
CPU module modules
Power supply module (optional)
END cover with
ERR terminal
(optional)
Main block
D
D D Extension cable
Dedicated cable with connector Dedicated cable with connector
Connector
(relay terminal module) (connector/terminal block converter module)
(optional) (optional)
Extension block 1 Extension module Branch module C E F
D D
Relay terminal module Connector/terminal block converter module

(optional) (optional)
Extension cable
To Extension block 2
A. L Series CPU Modules .................................................................................................................................. 133

B. Power Supplies............................................................................................................................................. 135
C. Digital I/O Expansion .................................................................................................................................... 135
D. Connectors, Cables and Terminal Blocks ..................................................................................................... 138
E. Analog I/O Modules ...................................................................................................................................... 138
F. Intelligent Function Modules ......................................................................................................................... 141
G. Accessories .................................................................................................................................................. 148
132
A. L Series CPU Modules
The L Series is a powerful but compact modular controller with many features built-in to the CPU
itself. The rack-free design promotes high system flexibility with minimum form factor. Built-in
Mini-B USB and Ethernet allow for easy communication, along with a built-in SD/SDHC memory slot
for data logging and memory storage, and built-in digital I/O for simple high-speed counting and
positioning functions. The high-performance version CPU also includes a built-in CC-Link interface
for Master/Local Station networking. This highly flexible architecture makes the L Series ideal for
both stand-alone and networked machines.
Key Features: ●● Built-in data logging capabilities

●● Flexible rack-free modular design ●● Commonly available SD/SDHC memory media
●● All-in-one CPU with built-in Ethernet, and positioning I/O functions ●● Expansion capabilities for I/O, Analog, Communication,
●● Up to 260K Step memory and Motion/Positioning
●● As low as 9.5ns instruction processing ●● Integration into iQ Works and GX Works2 next generation software
●● 24 points of built-in I/O
CPU Speciications
Model Number L02CPU(-P) L06CPU(-P) L26CPU(-P) L26CPU-(P)BT
Certification UL-cUL-CE UL-cUL-CE UL-cUL-CE UL-cUL-CE
LD Instruction 40ns 9.5ns
Processing Speed
MOV Instruction 80ns 19ns
Program Capacity 20k steps 60k steps 260k steps
Program Memory (Drive 0) 80 kB 240 kB 1040 kB
Memory Capacity Standard RAM (Drive 3) 128 kB 768 kB 768 kB
Standard RAM (Drive 4) 512 kB 1024 kB 2048 kB
Program Memory 64 programs 124 programs 252 programs
Maximum Number
Standard RAM 4 files (file register file, local device file, sampling trace file, and module error collection file)
of Files
Standard ROM 128 files 256 files 256 files
Memory Card Type SD/SDHC
Max. Number
of Intelligent Initial Setting 2048 4096 4096
Function Module
Parameter Refresh 1024 2048 2048
Settings
5VDC Internal With Display Module 1.00A 1.06A 1.06A 1.43A
Current
Consumption Without Display Module 0.94A 1.00A 1.00A 1.37A
Max. I/O Device Points 8192 points (X/Y0 to X/Y1FFF)
1024 points
Max. Physical I/O Points 4096 points (X/Y0 to X/YFFF)
(X/Y0 to X/Y3FF)
Built-in CC-Link No No No Yes
Weight (kg) 0.37 0.47
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 70 x 90 x 95 98.5 x 90 x 95
CPU Built-In Input Speciications

Rated Input Voltage 24VDC (+20%/-15%, ripple ratio within 5%)
Standard Input Rated Input Current 4.1mA TYP. (at 24VDC)
Minimum Input Response Speed 100μs
Input Response Time Setting 0.1ms/1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms
24V input: 24VDC (+20%/-15%, ripple ratio within 5%)
Rated Input Voltage
Differential input: EIA Standard RS-422-A differential type line driver level
High-Speed Input 24V input: 6.0mA TYP. (at 24VDC)
Rated Input Current
Differential input: EIA Standard RS-422-A differential type line driver level
Minimum Input Response Speed 10μs
Input Response Time Setting 0.01ms/0.1ms/0.2ms/0.4ms/0.6ms/1ms
CPU Built-In Output Speciications

Model Number L02CPU/L06CPU L26CPU/L26CPU-BT L02CPU-P/L06CPU-P L26CPU-P/L26CPU-P
Output Type Sink Transistor Source Transistor
Rated Load Voltage 5 to 24VDC 0.1A
OFF-ON 1μs or less (rated load, resistive load)
Response Time
ON-OFF 1μs or less (rated load, resistive load)

CPU Built-In I/O - Positioning Function Specifications
Control Unit Pulse
PTP Control (*1 ) INC system, ABS system
Positioning Control
Speed-Position
Method INC system
Switching Control
PTP Control (*1 ) -2147483648 to 2147483647 pulse
Positioning Control
Speed-Position
Positioning Control Range 0 to 2147483647 pulse
Switching Control
Speed Command 0 to 200kpulse/s
Acceleration/Deceleration System
Automatic trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration and S-pattern acceleration/deceleration
Selection
Acceleration/Deceleration Time 0 to 32767ms
Trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration (1-axis start): 30μs/axis
Starting Time (1-Axis Linear Control)
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration (1-axis start): 35μs/axis
Pulse Output Method Open collector output (5 to 24VDC), sink or source logic
Command Pulse Maximum Output Speed 200kpulse/s
Output Maximum Connection Distance from
2m
Drive Unit
Zero Signal 24VDC 6mA Equivalent with differential driver 20mA
Speed-Position Switching Signal
Near-Point Dog Signal
DC24V 4.1mA
External Input Upper and Lower Limit Signal
Drive Unit READY Signal
Zero signal: 10μs Speed-position switching signal, near-point dog signal: 100μs
Minimum Input Response Time
Upper and lower limit signal, drive unit READY signal: 2ms
Deviation Counter Clear Signal ADY signal: 2ms External output; Deviation counter clear signal, sink or source logic
External Output OFF-ON
Response Time 1μs or less (rated load, resistive load)
ON-OFF
Note:
1. The abbreviation for Point To Point, referring to position control.
CPU Built-In I/O - High Speed Counter Specifications

Number of Channels 2ch
Phase 1-phase input (multiple of 1/2), CW/CCW, 2-phase input (multiple of 1/2/4)
24V Input 24VDC 6mA
Count Input Signal
Signal Level EIA Standard RS-422-A differential type line driver level
Differential Input
(Equivalent with AM26LS31 (manufactured by Texas Instruments Japan Limited))
Maximum Counting Speed 200kpulse/s (1-phase multiple of 2, 2-phase multiple of 4)
Counting Range Binary with 32-bit code (-2147483648 to 2147483647)
Type UP/DOWN preset counter (+ ring counter function)
Counter Minimum Count Phase 1 5μs
Pulse Width (Duty
Ratio 50%) Phase 2 10μs
Minimum Phase Differential for
5μs
2-Phase Input
Comparison Range Binary with 32-bit code (-2147483648 to 2147483647)
Coincidence Output
Comparison Result Set value < Count value; Set value = Count value; Set value > Count value
24V Input Open collector; 24VDC 6mA
Phase Z (Preset) EIA Standard RS-422-A differential type line driver level
Differential Input
(Equivalent with AM26LS31 (manufactured by Texas Instruments Japan Limited))
External Input
Function Start
24VDC 4.1mA
Latch
Minimum Input Response Time Phase Z: 10μs Function start, latch: 100μs
Comparison Output 2 points/ch
Output Voltage/Current 5 to 24VDC 0.1A
External Output
Output Response OFF-ON
1μs or less (rated load, resistive load)
Time ON-OFF
Output Frequency Range DC to 200kHz
PWM Output Minimum ON Width 1μs
Duty Ratio ON time can be set in increments of 0.1μs.
Measurement Item Pulse width (ON width: 200μs or more, OFF width: 200μs or more)
Pulse Width
Measurement Resolution 5μs
Measurement
Measurement Points 1 point/ch
134
CPU Built-In Ethernet Port Specifications
Data Transfer Speed 100/10Mbps
Communication Mode Full-duplex/Half-duplex
Transmission Method Base band
Transmission Maximum Distance Between
Speciication Hub and Node 100m
Maximum Number 10BASE-T Maximum of cascading hub connections
of Connectable
Nodes 100BASE-TX Maximum of 2 cascading hub connections
Number of TCP/IP
Total of 16 for socket communications, MELSOFT connections, and MC protocol (*1). One for FTP
Connections UDP/IP
Cable to Use For 10BASE-T Connection Cables compliant to Ethernet standards, category 3 or higher (STP/UTP cables) (*3)
(*2) For 100BASE-TX Connection Cables compliant to Ethernet standards, category 5 or higher (STP cables)
Notes:
1. Only 3E frames may be used.
2. Straight through cable. Also, CPU is connected directly with a GOT, a cross cable may be used.
3. The use of STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cables is recommended in noisy environments.
B. Power Supplies
The L Series has three Power Supply Units selectable according to AC/DC power requirements.
Power Supply Module Specifications
Model Number L61P (*1) L63P L63SP
Stocked Item S S S
Input Power Supply 100 to 240 VAC (-15% to +10%) 24 VDC (-35% to +30%) 24 VDC (-35% to +30%)
AC Supply Frequency 50/60Hz (-5% to +5%) - -
AC Supply Voltage Distortion Factor Within 5% - -
Maximum Input Apparent Power 130 VA - -
Maximum Input Power - 45W 45W
Inrush Current ≤8ms @ 20A ≤1ms @ 100A (for 24 VDC input) 100A within 1ms (24 VDC input)
Rated Output Current (5VDC) 5A
Allowable Momentary Power Failure Time 10ms 10ms (24 DC input) Within 10ms (24 VDC input)
Weight (kg) 0.32 0.29 0.19
Note:
1. AC Power Supply included in CPU sets; L02CPU-SET, L06CPU-SET, L26CPU-SET, and L26CPU-BT-SET
C. Digital I/O Expansion

Aside from the built-in I/O, the L Series has several I/O expansion options for Relay and
Transistor.
Digital Input Module Specifications (AC / DC Input Module)

Model Number LX10 LX28 LX40C6 LX41C4 LX42C4
Stocked Item S S S S S
Number of Input Points 16 points 8 points 16 points 32 points 64 points
100 to 120VAC (+10%/ 100 to 240VAC (+10%/
Rated Input Voltage 24VDC (+20/-15%, ripple ratio within 5%)
-15%), 50/60Hz (±3Hz) -15%), 50/60Hz (±3Hz)
16.4mA (200VAC, 60Hz),
8.2mA (100VAC, 60Hz), 13.7mA (200VAC, 50Hz) 6.0mA TYP. 4.0mA TYP. 4.0mA TYP.
Rated Input Current
6.8mA (100VAC, 50Hz) 8.2mA (100VAC, 60Hz), (at 24VDC input) (at 24VDC input) (at 24VDC input)
6.8mA (100VAC, 50Hz)
15ms or less (100VAC
15ms or less (100VAC
OFF-ON 50Hz, 60Hz)10ms or less
50Hz, 60Hz)
Response Time (200VAC 50Hz, 60Hz) 1ms/5ms/10ms/20ms/70ms (Initial setting is 10ms.)
20ms or less (100VAC 20ms or less (100/200VAC
ON-OFF
50Hz, 60Hz) 50Hz, 60Hz)
16 points/common 8 points/common
Common Terminal Arrangement 16 points, 1 common 32 points, 1 common 32 points, 1 common
(common terminal: TB17) (common terminal: TB17)
16 points (I/O assignment: 32 points (I/O assignment: 64 points (I/O assignment:
Number of Occupied I/O Points 16 points (I/O assignment: input 16 points)
16 input points) 32 input points) 64 input point)
External Connections 18-point screw terminal block (M3 × 6 screw) 18-point terminal block 40-pin connector 40-pin connector x 2
100mA 120mA
5VDC Internal Current Consumption 90mA (TYP. all points ON) 80mA (TYP. all points ON) 90mA (TYP. all points ON)
(TYP. all points ON) (TYP. all points ON)
Weight (kg) 0.17 0.15 0.15 0.11 0.12
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 28.5 x 90 x 117 28.5 x 90 x 95

Digital Output Module Specifications

Model Number LY10R2 (Relay) LY20S6 (Triac)
Stocked Item S S
Maximum Load Voltage 24VDC / 240VAC 264VAC
Maximum Load Current 2A/point, 8A/common 0.6A/point, 4.8A/common
Surge Suppressor - CR absorber
Protection Function
Fuse - -
Common Terminal Arrangement 16 points/common 16 points/common (common terminal: TB17)
Number of Occupied I/O points 16 points (I/O assignment: 16 input points) 16 points (I/O assignment: output 16 points)
External Connections 18-point terminal block 18-point screw terminal block (M3 × 6 screw)
5VDC Internal Current Consumption 460mA (TYP. all points ON) 300mA (TYP. all points ON)
Weight (kg) 0.21 0.22
Digital Output Module Specifications (Sink Transistor Output Modules)

Model Number LY40NT5P LY41NT1P LY42NT1P
Stocked Item S S S
Number of Output Points 16 points 32 points 64 points
Rated Load Voltage 12 to 24VDC (+20%/-15%)
Maximum Load Current 0.5A/point, 5A common 0.1A / point, 2A / common
OFF-ON 0.5ms or less
Response Time
ON-OFF 1ms or less (rated load, resistive load)
Voltage 12 to 24VDC (+20%/-15%, ripple ratio within 5%)
External Supply Power
Current 9mA (at 24VDC) 13mA (at 24VDC)/common 9mA (at 24VDC)/common
Common Terminal Arrangement 16 points/common 32 points/common 32 points/common
Number of Occupied I/O points 16 points (I/O assignment: 16 output points) 32 points (I/O assignment: 32 output points) 64 points (I/O assignment: 64 output points)
External Connections 18-point terminal block 40-pin connector 40-pin connector x 2
Weight (kg) 0.15 0.11 0.12
136
Digital Output Module Specifications (Source Transistor Output Modules)
Model Number LY40PT5P LY41PT1P LY42PT1P
Stocked Item S S S
Number of Output Points 16 points 32 points 64 points
Rated Load Voltage 10.2 to 28.8VDC
Maximum Load Current 0.5A / point, 5A / common 0.1A / point, 2A / common
Response Time
ON-OFF 1ms or less (rated load, resistive load)
Voltage 10.2 to 28.8VDC (ripple ratio within 5%)
Current 17mA (at 24VDC) 20mA (at 24VDC) 20mA (at 24VDC)/common
Common Terminal Arrangement 16 points/common 32 points/common 32 points/common
16 points 32 points ( 64 points
Number of Occupied I/O points
(I/O assignment: 16 output points) I/O assignment: 32 output points) (I/O assignment: 64 output points)
External Connections 18-point screw terminal block 40-pin connector 40-pin connector
Weight (kg) 0.15 0.11 0.12
Combination I/O Modules

Model Number LH42C4NT1P LH42C4PT1P
Stocked Item S S
Rated Input Voltage 24 VDC (ripple rate 5% or less)
Rated Input Current 4.0mA TYP (at 24 VDC)
Output Type Sink Source
Rated Load Voltage 10.2 to 28.8 VDC
Maximum Load Current 0.1A/point, 2A / commom
OFF-ON 1ms, 5ms, 10ms, 20ms, 70ms, or less
Input Response Time
ON-OFF 1ms, 5ms, 10ms, 20ms, 70ms, or less
Output Response Time
OFF-ON 1ms or less
Voltage 12/24 VDC (ripple rate: 5% or less)
Current 9mA (at 24 VDC)/common 20mA (at 24 VDC) / common
Input Common Terminal Arrangement 32 points / common
Output Common Terminal Arrangement 32 points / common
Number of Occupied I/O points 32 points
External Connections 40-pin connector
5VDC Internal Current Consumption 160 mA (TYP all points ON) 150mA (TYP all points ON)
Weight (kg) 0.12 0.12
Branch and Extension Modules

Model Number L6EXB L6EXE
Stocked Item S S
5VDC Internal Current Consumption 0.08 0.08
Weight (kg) 0.12 0.13

D. Connectors, Cables and Terminal Blocks
For connector type I/O, all L Series and Q Series modules use the same FCN connector. Connectors, cables and terminal blocks are available for both.
Category Model Number Description Stocked Item Applicable Products (*1)
A6CON1 FCN, 40 Pin, Solder Type S
A6CON2 FCN, 40 Pin, Crimp Type S L02CPU, L26CPU-BT, LX_, LY_,
LD75_, LD62_, QX_, QY_, QH42P,
Connectors (For User-Made Cables) A6CON3 FCN, 40 Pin, IDC Type S QX41Y41P, Q66DA-G, Q68RD3-G,
FCN, 40 Pin, Solder Type, Low- QD75_, QD72P3C3
A6CON4 -
Profile
LCBL40P-2M 2.0m I/O Pigtail Cable, 40 Pin S L02CPU, L26CPU-BT, LX_, LY_,
LCBL40P-5M 5.0m I/O Pigtail Cable, 40 Pin S LD75_, LD62_, QX_, QY_, QH42P,
Direct-Wire Cables
QX41Y41P, Q66DA-G, Q68RD3-G,
LCBL40P-10M 10m I/O Pigtail Cable, 40 Pin S QD75_, QD72P3C3
FA-SCBL05FMV-M 0.5m Terminal Block Cable S
FA-SCBL10FMV-M 1.0m Terminal Block Cable S
FA-LTB40P
FA-SCBL15FMV-M 1.5m Terminal Block Cable -
Terminal Block Dedicated Cables FA-SCBL20FMV-M 2.0m Terminal Block Cable S
Terminal Block Cable. _ = 0.5m,
AC_TB 1.0m, 2.0m, 3.0m, 4.0m, 5.0m, S A6TBXY36, A6TBXY54
8.0m, 10.0m length
FA-LTB40P Terminal Block, 40 Point S L02CPU, L26CPU-BT
A6TBXY36 Terminal Block, 32 Point S LY41NT1P, LY42NT1P, LY41PT1P,

Terminal Blocks
LY42PT1P, QX41_, QX42_, QY41_,
A6TBXY54 Terminal Block, 32 Point, 2-Wire - QY42_, QH_, QX41Y41P
LC06E 0.6m Extension Cable S L6EXB

Extension Cable LC10E 1.0m Extension Cable S
L6EXE
LC30E 3.0m Extension Cable S
Note:
1. Applicable products are FCN connector type CPUs and Modules.
E. Analog I/O Modules

Analog input and output modules can be added on and configured easily in GX Works2 using built-in utilities.
Model Number L60AD4 (Analog Input Module) L60DA4 (Analog Output Module)
Stocked Item S S
Number of Analog I/O Points 4 points (ch)
Voltage -10 to 10VDC (Input resistance value 1MΩ) -10 to 10VDC (External load resistance value 1kΩ to 1MΩ)
Analog I/O
Current 0 to 20mADC (Input resistance value 250Ω) 0 to 20mADC (External load resistance value 0Ω to 600Ω)
Output -20480 to 20479
Digital Output When Using Scaling
-32768 to 32767
Function
Digital Output
Analog Input Range Resolution
Value Analog Output Range Digital Value Resolution
0 to 10V 500μV 0 to 5V 250μV
0 to 20000
0 to 5V 0 to 20000 250μV 1 to 5V 200μV
1 to 5V 200μV Voltage -10 to 10V 500μV
Voltage -20000 to
-10 to 10V 500μV Users range
I/O Characteristics, Resolution -20000 to 20000 333μV (*1)
Users range setting
20000 307μV (*1)
setting 0 to 20mA 1000nA
0 to 20000
0 to 20mA 1000nA 4 to 20mA 800nA
0 to 20000 Current
4 to 20mA 800nA Users range -20000 to
Current 700nA (*1)
Users range -20000 to setting 20000
1230nA (*1)
setting 20000
Ambient Temperature
±0.1% (±20 digit) ±0.1% (voltage: ±10mA, current: ±20μA)
25 ±5°C
Accuracy
Ambient Temperature
±0.2% (±40 digit) ±0.3% (voltage: ±30mV, current: ±60μA)
0 to 55°C
Conversion Speed High speed: 20μs/ch; Medium speed: 80μs/ch; Low speed: 1ms/ch 20μs/ch
Absolute Maximum Input Voltage: ±15V, Current: 30mA (*2) -
Output Short Protection - Available
24VDC (+20%/-15%); Ripple, spike within 500mVp-p
External Power Supply -
Inrush current: 4.3A, 1000μs or less; Current consumption: 0.18A
I/O Device Points Occupied 16 points (I/O assignment: 16 points for Intelligent function module)
External Connections 18-point terminal block
5VDC Internal Current Consumption 0.52A 0.16A
Weight (kg) 0.19 0.20
Notes:
1. Maximum resolution in users range settings.
2. Maximum instantaneous current value that will not cause destruction of the internal components. The maximum constant input current value is 24mA.
138
A/D Converter Module
Model Number L60AD4-2GH
Stocked Item S
Number of Analog I/O Points 4 points (4 channels)
Voltage -10 to 10VDC (Input resistance value 1MΩ)
Analog I/O
Current 0 to 20mADC (Input resistance value 250Ω)
Output -32000 to 32000
Digital Output When Using Scaling
-32768 to 32767
Function
Analog Input Range Digital Output Value Maximum Resolution
0 to 10V 312.5μV
0 to 5V 0 to 32000 156μV
1 to 5V 125μV
Voltage -10 to 10V -32000 to 32000 312.5μV
1 to 5V (Extended mode) -8000 to 32000 125μV
I/O Characteristics, Resolution (*1) User range setting
-32000 to 32000 200μV (*2)
(bi-polar: voltage)
0 to 20mA 625nA
0 to 32000
4 to 20mA 500nA
Current 4 to 20mA (Extended mode) -8000 to 32000 500nA
User range setting
0 to 32000 400nA (*2)
(uni-polar: current)
Accuracy (Accuracy Reference Accuracy
Within ±0.05% (±16 digit)
for the Maximum (*4)
Value of the Digital Temperature
Output Value) (*3) ±40.1ppm/°C or lower
Coeficient (*5)
Conversion Speed 40μ/2 channels
Absolute Maximum Input Voltage: ±15V, Current: 30mA (*6)
Offset/Gain Setting Count (*7) Up to 100000 counts
Between I/O terminals and programmable controller power supply: photocoupler isolation;
Insulation Method
Between analog input channels: dual channel transformer insulation
Between I/O terminals and programmable controller power supply: 500VAC for 1 minute;
Between analog input channels: 1000VAC for 1 minute
Weight (kg) 0.20
Notes:
1. For details on the I/O conversion characteristic, refer the I/O Conversion Characteristic of A/D Conversion in Users Manual.
2. Maximum resolution in the user range setting.
4. Accuracy under the ambient temperature when the offset/gain setting is performed.
5. Accuracy when the temperature changes 1°C EX: Accuracy when the temperature changes from 25°C to 30°C 0.05% + 0.00401%/°C (temperature coefficient) × 5°C (temperature change) = 0.070%
6. A momentary input current value which does not cause damage to internal resistors of the module. The maximum input current value for constant application is 24mA.
7. If the number of offset/gain settings exceeds 100000 times, an error occurs. The error code (170) is stored in Latest error code (Un\G19), Error flag (XF) turns on, then the ERR. LED turns on.

Combination Analog Module
Model Number L60AD2DA2
Stocked Item S
Number of Analog Output Points 2 points (2 channels)
Input -16384 to 16383
Digital Input
With Scaling Function -32768 to 32767
Voltage -10 to 10VDC (external load resistance 1kΩ to 1MΩ)
Analog Output
Current 0 to 20mADC (External load resistance 0Ω to 600Ω)
Voltage -10 to 10 VDC (input resistance 1MΩ)
Analog Input
Current 0 to 20mADC (input resistance 250Ω)
Output -16384 to 16383
DIgital Output
With Scaling Function -32768 to 32767
Analog Output Range Digital Input Value Resolution
0 to 5V 416μV
0 to 12000
1 to 5V 333μV
Voltage -10 to 10V -16000 to 16000 625μV
User Range Setting
-12000 to 12000 319μV (*2)
(Bi-Polar: Voltage)
0 to 20mA 166nA
0 to 12000
Current 4 to 20mA 1333nA
User Range Setting -12000 to 12000 696nA (*2)
I/O Characteristics, Resolution (*1) Analog Input Range Digital Output Value Resolution
0 to 10V 0 to 16000 625µV
0 to 5V 416µV
0 to 12000
1 to 5V 333µV
Voltage
-10 to 10V -16000 to 16000 625µV
1 to 5V (Extended mode) -3000 to 13500 333µV
User Range Setting (Voltage) -1200 to 12000 321µV
0 to 20mA 1666nA
0 to 12000
4 to 20mA 1333nA
Current
4 to 20mA (Extended mode) -3000 to 13500 1333nA
User Range Setting (Current) -12000 to 12000 1287nA (*2)
Ambient Temperature
Analog Output Range
25 ±5° 0 to 55°
0 to 5V
Within ±0.2% (±10mV) Within ±0.4% (±20mV)
Voltage 1 to 5V
-10 to 10V Within ±0.2% (±20mV) Within ±0.4% (±40mV)
0 to 20mA
Current Within ±0.2% (±40µA) Within ±0.4% (±80µA)
4 to 20mA
Accuracy (Accuracy for the Maximum Value of Ambient Temperature

Analog Input Range
the Analog Output Value) (*3) 25±5º C 0~55º C
0 to 10V
±0.2% (±32 digit) ± 0.3% (±48 digit)
-10 to 10V
Voltage 0 to 5V
1 to 5V
1 to 5V (Extended mode)
± 0.2% (± 24 digit) ± 0.3% (± 36 digit)
0 to 20mA
Current 4 to 20mA
4 to 20 mA (Extended mode)
Conversion Speed 80μ/channel (*4)
Output Short Protection Protected
Offset/Gain Setting Count (Flash Memory
Up to 100000 counts
Write Count) (*5)
Between I/O terminals and programmable controller power supply: photocoupler isolation; Between I/O channels: no isolation
Insulation Method
Between the external power supply and analog I/O channels: transformer isolation
Between I/O terminals and programmable controller power supply: 500VAC for 1 minute;
Between the external pwer supply and analog I/O: 500VAC for 1 minute
External Power Supply 24VDC +20%, -15%; Ripple, spike 500mVp-p or lower; Inrush current 3.5A, 1000µ or shorter; Current consumption 0.12A
Weight (kg) 0.22
Notes:
1. For details on the I/O conversion characteristic, refer to the I/O Conversion Characteristic of A/D Conversion in Users Manual.
2. Maximum resolution in the user range setting.
4. For details on the conversion speed, refer to the enable/disable settings and conversion speed of A/D and D/A in the Users Manual.
5. If the number of offset/gain settings exceeds 100000 times, an error (error code 170) occurs.
140
F. Intelligent Function Modules
Temperature I/O Modules

Model Number L60TCTT4 L60TCRT4 L60TCTT4BW L60TCRT4BW
Control Output Transistor output
Number of Temperature Input Points 4 channels/module
Type of Usable Temperature Sensors, the Temperature
Measurement Range, the Resolution, and the Effect From Thermocouple Resistive thermal device Thermocouple Resistive thermal device
Wiring Resistance of 1Ω
Ambient Temperature:
Full scale × (±0.3%)
Indication 25 ±5°C
Accuracy Ambient Temperature:
Full scale × (±0.7%)
0 to 55°C
Temperature Process
Cold Junction Value (PV): -100° C or Within ±1.0°C Within ±1.0°C
Accuracy Temperature More
Compensation Temperature Process
Accuracy: Value (PV): -150 to Within ±2.0°C - Within ±2.0°C -
(Ambient -100°C
Temperature: Temperature Process
0 to 55°C) Value (PV): -200 to Within ±3.0°C Within ±3.0°C
-150°C
Sampling Cycle 250ms/4 channels, 500ms/4 channels
Control Output Cycle 0.5 to 100.0s
Input Impedance 1MΩ
Input Filter 0 to 100s (0: Input filter OFF)
Sensor Correction Value Setting -50.00 to 50.00%
Operation at Sensor Input Disconnection Upscale processing
Temperature Control Method PID ON/OFF pulse or two-position control
PID Constants Setting Can be set by auto tuning
Proportional Band (P) 0.0 to 1000.0% (0: Two-position control)
PID Constants Range
Integral Time (I) 0 to 3600s (set 0 for P control and PD control)
Derivative Time (D) 0 to 3600s (set 0 for P control and PI control)
Set Value (SV) Setting Range Within the temperature range set in the thermocouple/platinum resistance thermometer to be used
Dead Band Setting Range 0.1 to 10.0%
Output Signal ON/OFF pulse
Rated Load Voltage 10 to 30VDC
Transistor Output Max. Inrush Current 0.4A 10ms
Leakage Current at OFF 0.1mA or less
Max. Voltage Drop at ON 1.0VDC (TYP) at 0.1A 2.5VDC (MAX) at 0.1A
Response Time OFF–ON: 2ms or less, ON–OFF: 2ms or less
Number of Accesses to Non-Volatile Memory Max. 1012 times
Current Sensor See L Series User’s Manual
Heater Disconnection Detection
Input Accuracy - Full scale × (±1.0%)
Specifications
Number of Alert Delay 3 to 255
Number of Occupied I/O Points 16 points (I/O assignment: 16 intelligent points)
Number of Occupied Module 1 2
External Connection 18-point terminal block Two 18-point terminal blocks
Internal Current Consumption 0.30A 0.31A 0.33A 0.35A
Weight (kg) 0.18 0.33
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 28.5 x 90 x 117 57.0 x 9 x 117

LD77MH4 1 LD77MH16
RUN 2 RUN AX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AX 3
ERR. ERR. 9 10 11 121314 1516
4
P P
U CN1 U CN1
L L
S S
E E
R R
Simple Motion Modules

Model Number LD77MH4 LD77MH16
Stocked Item S S
Number of Control Axes 4 16
Operation Cycle (ms) 0.88 0.88/1.77
PTP (Point To Point) control, path control (both linear and arc can be set), speed control, speed-position switching
Control System
control, position-speed switching control, Speed-torque control
Control Unit mm, inch, degree, PLS
Positioning Data 600 data/axis. (Can be set with GX Works2 or sequence program)
Backup Parameters, positioning data, and block start data can be saved on flash ROM (battery-less backup)
PTP control: Incremental system/absolute system; Speed-position switching control: Incremental system/absolute
Positioning System
system (*1); Position-speed switching control: Incremental system; Path control: Incremental system/absolute system
Applicable Connector for External Input Signal LD77MHIOCON
LD77MH MR-J3(W)-_B/MR-J3(W)-_B MR-J3(W)-_B; Standard cord for inside panel; 0.15 (0.49), 0.3 (0.98),
MR-J3BUS_M [m (ft)] (*2)
0.5 (1.64), 1 (3.28), 3 (9.84)
SSCNET III Cable LD77MH MR-J3(W)-_B/MR-J3(W)-_ MR-J3(W)-_B; Standard cable for outside panel; 5 (16.40), 10 (32.81),
MR-J3BUS_M-A [m (ft)] (*2)
20 (65.62)
MR-J3BUS_M-B [m (ft)] (*2,*3) LD77MH MR-J3(W)-_B/MR-J3(W)-_B MR-J3(W)-_B; Long distance cable; 30 (98.43 ), 40 (131.23), 50 (164.04)
5VDC Internal Current Consumption (A) 0.55 0.70
Flash ROM Write Count Max. 100000 times
Number of Occupied I/O Points (Points) 32 (I/O assignment: Intelligent function module 32 points)
Number of Applicable Modules Up to 5 modules
Outline Dimensions mm (inch) W x H x D 45.0 x 90.0 x 95.0 (1.77 x 3.54 x 3.74)
Weight (kg) 0.22
External Command Signal - Switching Signal DI signal (External start or speed-position switching can be selected by parameter.)
Notes:
2. _ = Cable length: (015: 0.15m (0.49ft.), 03: 0.3m (0.98ft.), 05: 0.5m (1.64ft.), 1: 1m (3.28ft.), 3: 3m (9.84ft.), 5: 5m (16.40ft.), 10: 10m (32.81ft.), 20: 20m (65.62ft.), 30: 30m (98.43ft.), 40: 40m (131.23ft.),
50: 50m (164.04ft.) )
3. For the cable of less than 30[m](98.43[ft.]), contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.
142
SSCNET III Head Module
Model Number LJ72MS15
Stocked Item S
Maximum Link Points Per RWr, RX 256 bytes in total
Network RWw, RY 256 bytes in total
Maximum Link Points Per RWr, RX 64 bytes in total
Station RWw, RY 64 bytes in total
Communication Speed 150Mbps
888μs: 4 stations
Maximum Connectable Communication
444μs: 2 stations
Stations Per Network (*1) Cycle:
222μs: 1 station
Connection Cable SSCNET III cable (optical iber cable)
Maximum Station-to-Station Distance POF type: 20m; H-PCF type: 50m
Connection Method Daisy chain connection (Regenerative relay system with a servo ampliier)
Transmission System Full-duplex communication (because of the separation of the channels for sending and receiving)
Encoding Method 8B10B + scramble
Transmission Format Original to SSCNET III/H
Synchronization Method Synchronization of the control cycle and communication cycle that synchronize with the data transmission of the Motion controller
Communication Cycle 222μs/444μs/888μs
Error Control System CRC
Head Module
X 4096 points, 512 bytes (Number of points accessible to the actual module)
Number of I/O Points (*2)
Y 4096 points, 512 bytes (Number of points accessible to the actual module)
X 8192 points, 1KB (Number of usable points on programs); (RX0 is assigned from X0)
Y 8192 points, 1KB (Number of usable points on programs); (RY0 is assigned from Y0)
SB 8192 points, 1KB
SW 8192 points, 16KB
Number of Device Points
SM 2048 points, 256 bytes
SD 2048 points, 4KB
W 8192 points, 16KB; (RWw0 is assigned from W0, RWr0 is assigned from W1000)
Uoo\Goo Devices that directly access the buffer memory of intelligent function modules
Number of Writes to the Parameter Memory Up to 100000 times
Year, month, date, hour, minute, and second (automatic leap year detection) When connected to a network, the clock synchronizes
periodically with the clock in the Motion controller via the network. (Initial value: 2000/1/1 00:00:00) After the clock information has
Clock Function (For Displaying the Date and
been acquired from the Motion controller, when the head module is powered off then on, the clock resumes from the time when the
Time of an Error)
power was last turned off. (The clock pauses during power off.) Therefore, the data and time of an error that occurred during initial
processing may be different from the actual one.
Allowable Momentary Power Failure Time Depends on the power supply module used
Internal Current Consumption (5VDC) A 0.55
Laser Classiication (JIS C 6802, IEC 60825-1) Class 1
Weight (kg) 0.20
Notes:
1. This number includes only head modules. Servo amplifiers are not included.
2. This is the maximum number of points that can be assigned to the actual module in “PLC Parameter” - “I/O Assignment” of GX Works2.

Positioning Modules
Open collector and differential line driver pulse positioning modules can be added on and configured in
GX Works2 using built-in utilities.
Model Number LD75P1/LD75D1 (*1) LD75P2/LD75D2 (*1) LD75P4/LD75D4 (*1)
Stocked Item S S S
Number of Control Axes 1 axis 2 axes 4 axes
2-axis linear interpolation 2-, 3-, or 4-axis linear interpolation
Interpolation Function None
2-axis circular interpolation 2-axis circular interpolation
PTP (Point To Point) control, path control (both linear and arc can be set), speed control, speed position switching control,
Control System
position-speed switching control
Control Unit mm, inch, degree, pulse
Positioning Data 600 data/axis (Can be set with GX Works2 or program.)
Backup Parameters, positioning data, and block start data can be saved on lash ROM (battery-less backup)
PTP Control (*1) Incremental system/absolute system
Speed-Position
Positioning Switching Control Incremental system/absolute system (*2)
Control
System Position-Speed
Incremental system
Switching Control
Path Control Incremental system/absolute system
–214748364.8 to 214748364.7 (μm)
–21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (inch)
In Absolute System
0 to 359.99999 (degree)
–2147483648 to 2147483647 (pulse)
–214748364.8 to 214748364.7 (μm)
In Incremental –21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (inch)
System –21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (degree)
Positioning –2147483648 to 2147483647 (pulse)
Control
Positioning In speed-Position
Range 0 to 214748364.7 (μm)
Control Switching Control
0 to 21474.83647 (inch)
(INC Mode)/Position-
0 to 21474.83647 (degree)
Speed Switching
0 to 2147483647 (pulse)
Control
In Speed-Position
Switching Control 0 to 359.99999 (degree)
(ABS Mode) (*2)
0.01 to 20000000.00 (mm/min)
0.001 to 2000000.000 (inch/min)
Speed Command
0.001 to 2000000.000 (degree/min)
1 to 4000000 (pulse/s)
Acceleration/Deceleration System
Trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration, S-curve acceleration/deceleration
Selection
Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1 to 8388608 (ms) Four patterns can be set for each of acceleration time and deceleration time
1-axis linear control 1.5ms
1-axis speed control 1.5ms
2-axis linear interpolation control (Composite speed) 1.5ms
2-axis linear interpolation control (Reference axis speed) 1.5ms
2-axis circular interpolation control 2.0ms
3-axis linear interpolation control (Composite speed) 1.7ms
Starting Time (*3)
3-axis linear interpolation control (Reference axis speed) 1.7ms
4-axis linear interpolation control 1.8ms
Factors in starting time extension. The following times will be added to the starting time in the described conditions:
• S-curve acceleration/ deceleration is selected: 0.1ms; Other axis is in operation: 0.5ms; During continuous positioning control:
0.3ms; During continuous path control: 0.3ms
Applicable Wire Size 0.3mm² (22AWG) (for A6CON1 or A6CON4), 0.088 to 0.24mm² (28 to 24AWG) (for A6CON2)
Applicable Connector For External Device A6CON1, A6CON2, A6CON4 (sold separately)
Max. Output Pulse LD75P1, LD75P2, LD75P4: 200kpulse/s; LD75D1, LD75D2, LD75D4: 4Mpulse/s
Max. Connection Distance Between Servos LD75P1, LD75P2, LD75P4: 2m; LD75D1, LD75D2, LD75D4: 10m
Internal Current Consumption (5VDC) LD75P1: 0.44A; LD75D1: 0.51A LD75P2: 0.48A; LD75D2: 0.62A LD75P4: 0.55A; LD75D4: 0.76A
No. of Occupied I/O Points 32 points (I/O assignment: intelligent 32 points)
Weight (kg) 0.18
Dimensions (W x D x H) mm 45.0 x 95.0 x 90.0
Notes:
1. LD75P represents the open collector output system, and LD75D represents the differential driver output system.
2. In speed-position switching control (ABS mode), the control unit available is “degree” only. (For details, refer to Section 9.2.17 “Speedposition switching control (ABS mode)”.
3. Using the “Pre-reading start function”, the virtual start time can be shortened. (For details, refer to Section 12.7.7 “Pre-reading start function”.
144
High Speed Counting Modules
High-speed counter modules can be added on and configured in GX Works2 using built-in utilities.
Model Number LD62 (DC Input) LD62D (Differential Input)
Stocked Item S S
Certiications UL • cUL • CE
Number of Channels 2ch
Counting Speed Switch Setting 10kpulse/s, 100kpulse/s, 200kpulse/s 10kpulse/s, 100kpulse/s, 200kpulse/s, 500kpulse/s
Phase 1-phase input (multiple of 1/2), CW/CCW, 2-phase input (multiple of 1/2/4)
Count Input
EIA Standard RS-422-A differential type line driver level
Signal Signal Level 5/12/24VDC 2 to 5mA
(Equivalent with AM26LS31)
Maximum Counting Speed 200kpulse/s 500kpulse/s
Counting Range Binary with 32-bit code (-2147483648 to 2147483647)
Type UP/DOWN preset counter (+ ring counter function)
10kpulse/s 50μs
10kpulse/s 50μs
Minimum Count Pulse Width 100kpulse/s 5μs
100kpulse/s 5μs
(Duty Ratio 50%) 200kpulse/s 2.5μs
Counter 200kpulse/s 2.5μs
500kpulse/s 1μs
10kpulse/s 25μs
10kpulse/s 25μs
Minimum Phase Differential for 100kpulse/s 2.5μs
100kpulse/s 2.5μs
2-Phase Input 200kpulse/s 1.25μs
200kpulse/s 1.25μs
500kpulse/s 0.5μs
Comparison Comparison Range Binary with 32-bit code (-2147483648 to 2147483647)
Output Comparison Result Set value < Count value; Set value = Count value; Set value > Count value
Preset 5/12/24VDC 2 to 5mA (Differential type line drivers conform-
5/12/24VDC 2 to 5mA
External Function Start ing to EIA standard RS-422-A are also applicable.)
Input Minimum Input OFF-ON Function start: 0.5ms
Response Time ON-OFF Function start: 1ms
Comparison Output 2 points/channel
External Output Voltage/Current 12 to 24VDC 0.5A
Output Output Response OFF-ON
0.1ms or less (rated load, resistive load)
Time ON-OFF
I/O Device Points Occupied 16 points (I/O assignment: 16 points for intelligent function module)
External Connections 40-pin connector
Weight (kg) 0.13
Dimensions (W x D x H) mm 28.5 x 90 x 95

Serial communication modules can be added on and configured in GX Works2 using pre-defined or user-defined protocols.
Model Number LJ71C24 LJ71C24-R2
Stocked Item S S
ch1 RS-232-compliance (D-Sub 9P female) RS-232-compliance (D-Sub 9P female)
Interface
ch2 RS-422/485-compliance (2-piece terminal block) RS-232-compliance (D-Sub 9P female)
Line Full duplex/half duplex
MC Protocol Half duplex
Communication
Pre-Deined Protocol
System
Nonprocedural Protocol Full duplex/half duplex
Synchronization Method Start-stop synchronization method
50bps/300bps/600bps/1200bps/2400bps/4800bps/9600bps/14.4kbps/ 19.2kbps/28.8kbps/38.4kbps/57.6kbps/115.2kbps/230.4kbps;
Transmission Speed Transmission speed 230.4kbps is only available for channel 1. Total transmission speed of two interfaces is available up to 230.4kbps.
Total transmission speed of two interfaces is available up to 115.2kbps when the communication data monitoring function is used.
Processes one request during installed C24 CPU module END processing. (Number of scans that must be processed/number
MC Protocol
of link scans depends on the contents of the request.)
Access Cycle Pre-Deined Protocol Sends or receives data when requested with the dedicated instruction (CPRTCL).
Nonprocedural Protocol
Sends data each time a send request is issued. Can receive at any time.
Parity Check All protocols and when ODD/EVEN is selected by parameter.
Error Detection MC protocol/bidirectional protocol selected by parameter. For the pre-deined protocol, whether or not a sum check code is
Sum Check Code
needed depends on the selected protocol. Nonprocedural protocol selected by user frame.
RS-232 RS-422/485
DTR/DSR (ER/DR) Control Enabled Disabled
RS/CS Control Enabled Disabled
Transmission Control
CD Signal Control Enabled Disabled
DC1/DC3 (Xon/Xoff) Control DC2/DC4 Control Enabled Disabled
• DTR/DSR signal control and DC code control are selected by the user.
Transmission RS-232 Maximum 15m (overall distance)
Distance (Overall
Distance) RS-422/485 Maximum 1200m (overall distance) -
Weight (kg) 0.17 0.14
Dimensions (W x D x H) mm 28.5 x 90 x 118 28.5 x 90 x 99

G. Networks
Ethernet Module
LJ71E71-100
Model Number
100BASE-TX 10BASE-T
Stocked Item S
Data Transmission Speed 100Mbps 10Mbps
Interface RJ45 (AUTO MDI/MDI-X)
Communication Mode Full-duplex / Half-duplex Half-duplex
Transmission
Specifications Transmission Method Base band
Maximum Segment Length 100m (length between a hub and a node)
Maximum Number of Cascade Cascade connection Cascade connection
Connections (maximum of 2 levels) (maximum of 4 levels
Number of Simultaneous Open
16 connections (Connections usable on a program)
Connections
Sending/
Receiving Fixed Buffer 1k word x 16
Data Storage Random Access Buffer 6k Words 6k words x 1
Memory Attachment 6k words x 1
E-Mail
Main Text 960k words x 1
Weight (kg) 0.18
External Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 28.5 x 95 x 90
CC-Link IE Field Master/Slave

CC-Link IE Field brings 1 Gigabit speed for cyclic, acyclic and transient data transmission to RJ45 and Cat 5e cabling
infrastructure. Create mixtures of line and star topology, and maintain control over up to 120 controller or remote I/O
stations simultaneously on the same network.
Model Number LJ71GF11-T2
Stocked Item S
Network Common Memory 32k bytes
Communication Speed 1Gbps
Connection Cable An Ethernet cable that meets the 1000BASE-T standard (Category 5e or higher, shielded RJ45)
Maximum Station-to-
100m max. (Compliant with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (Category 5e))
Station Distance
Ethernet Line topology: 12000m (when connected to 1 master station and 120 slave stations)
Total Distance
Star topology: Depends on the system configuration
Number of Cascade
Up to 20
Connections
Transmission Path Star, Line, Mixed Star & Line, and Ring
Number of Connected Master Station 1 station
Stations in One
Network Local Station 120 stations (Local station or Remote I/O) (*1)
Communication Method Token passing method
Weight (kg) 0.27
Note:
1. For CC-Link IE Field Remote I/O stations, refer to the LJ72GF15-T2 CC-Link IE Field Slave Head station.
CC-Link IE Field Slave Head Station

In place of an L Series CPU, CC-Link IE Field Slave Head Stations can be used to provide remote control over Digital I/O, Analog,
Motion, High-Speed Counter, Serial Communication, and CC-Link Master/Local Station modules via CC-Link IE Field.
Model Number LJ72GF15-T2 (*1)
Stocked Item S
Transmission Speed 1Gbps
Network Topology Star, Line, Mixed Star & Line, and Ring
Communication Method Deterministic (token passing)
Maximum Number of Mountable Modules 10 (120 when using extension and branch modules)
Communication Port CC-Link IE ield network port x 2, USB port (Mini-B terminal) x 1
RAS Function Network event logging, unit error logging, testing, monitoring, and error history preservation function
Connection Cable Ethernet cable (category 5 or higher)
Note:
1. CC-Link IE Field network requires CC-Link IE Field Master module.
146
CC-Link Master/Local Station
Additional CC-Link Master/Local Stations can be added on and configured in GX Works2.
Model Number LJ61BT11
Stocked Item S
Transmission Speed 156kbps/625kbps/2.5Mbps/5Mbps/10Mbps
Maximum Overall Cable Distance (Maximum
1.2 km (without repeater, varies according to the transmission speed.)
Transmission Distance)
Maximum Number of Connected Stations
64
(Master Station)
Number of Occupied Stations (Local Station) 1 to 4 stations (The number of stations can be switched using the GX Works2 parameter setting.)
Maximum Number Remote I/O (RX, RY) 2048 points
of Link Points Per Remote Register (RWw) 256 points (master station remote device station/local station/intelligent device station/standby master station)
System (*1) Remote Register (RWr) 256 points (remote device station/local station/intelligent device station/standby master station master station)
Number of Link Remote I/O (RX, RY) 32 points (local station is 30 points)
Points Per Station Remote Register (RWw) 4 points (master station remote device station/local station/intelligent device station/standby master station)
(*1) Remote Register (RWr) 4 points (remote device station/local station/intelligent device station/standby master station master station)
Transmission Path Bus (RS-485)
RAS Function Automatic return function; Slave station cut-off function; Error detection via link special relay/register
Connection Cable CC-Link dedicated cables compatible with Ver.1.10
Weight (kg) 0.15
Note:
1. Indicates the number of link points for Remote net Ver.1 mode.
IO Link Master
Model Number ME1IOL6-L
Stocked Item -
Number of Ports 6
Port Configuration IO-Link, Digital output (SIO mode), Digital input (SIO mode), Disabled
Rated Voltage 24 VDC
IO-Link Mode Rated Output Current (C/Q) 15 mA
Rated Sensor/Actuator Supply Current (L+) 200 mA
Input Type Sink
Digital Rated Voltage 24 VDC
Input Internal Pull-Down Current (C/Q) 5 mA
Input Filter (HW and SW) 200 μs
SIO Mode
Rated Voltage 24 VDC
Digital Rated Output Current (C/Q)
200 mA Max. current per port (sum of C and L+): 215 mA
Output Rated Sensor/Actuator Supply Current (L+)
Output Type Push-pull
Communication Line (C/Q)
Port Disabled Switched OFF
Sensor/Actuator Supply Line Switched OFF (L+)
Protection Communication Line (C/Q)
Over-current, over-load and short-circuit
Functions Sensor/Actuator Supply Line (L+)
Insulation Between the I/O Terminals and PLC Power Supply Photocoupler isolation
Method Between Channels No isolation
Between I/O terminals and programmable controller power supply:
500 V ACrms for 1 minute
Between I/O terminals and programmable controller power supply:
Insulation Resistance
500 VDC 10 MΩ or more
Number of I/O Occupied Points 32 points (I/O assignment: Intelligent 32 points)
External Wiring Connection System 18-points terminal block
Cable Type Unshielded cable
Maximum Length 20 m
Cable Specification Applicable Wire Size 0.3 to 0.75mm²
Overall Loop Resistance 6Ω
Effective Line Capacitance 3 nF
Applicable Solderless Terminals R1.25-3 (Solderless terminals with sleeves cannot be used)
24 VDC (+20%, -15%); ripple, spike within 500mVP-P In order to keep the specified
Voltage IO-Link output voltage levels (L+ line) the external supply voltage must be higher than
External Supply Power 22 VDC
Current (A) The sum current on the L- lines must not exceed 1.7
Inrush Current 8 A within 230 μs
Internal Current Consumption (5 VDC) (A) 0.06
Online Module Change Not supported
Weight (kg) 0.18

CC-Link/LT Master Module
Model Number LJ61CL12
Stocked Item -
Transmission Speed 156kbps/625kbps/2.5Mbps
Network Topology T-branch
Communication Method Deterministic (CRC)
Number of Connectable Modules 64
Number of Occupied I/O Points 16 points (I/O assignment: 1024points for intelligent function module)
Weight (kg) 0.12
H. Accessories
Display Module Specifications
Use the Display Module for on-site maintenance and troubleshooting, directly from the PLC without a computer or software. Monitor
devices, force devices and adjust intelligent function module parameters, all while using User Messages prompted by the program.
Model Number L6DSPU (*1)
Stocked Item S
Number of Display Characters 16 characters x 4 lines
Language Selection English and Japanese
Backlight Display Green and red
Weight (kg) 0.03
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 45 x 50 x 17.3
Note:
1. Display unit included in CPU sets, L02CPU-SET and L26CPU-BT-SET.
RS-232 Adapter Speciications

Model Number L6ADP-R2
Stocked Item S
Maximum Data Transmission Speed 115.2kbps
Weight (kg) 0.10
End Cover and End Cover with Error Terminal

Model Number L6EC L6EC-ET
Stocked Item S S
Rated Switching Voltage, Current - 24VDC, 0.5A
Minimum Switching Load - 5VDC, 1mA
OFF to ON: 10ms or less;
Response Time -
ON to OFF: 12ms or less
Mechanical: 20 million or more Electrical: 100
Life - thousand or more for rated switching voltage
and current
Surge Suppressor - None
Fuse - None
External Connection System - Spring clamp terminal block
0.3 to 2.0mm² (AWG22 to 14)
Applicable Wire Size -
(Stranded wire/single wire)
Internal Current Consumption 0.04A 0.06A
Weight (kg) 0.06 0.11
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 13 x 90 x 95 28.5 x 90 x 95
Note: L Series CPU modules and the CC-Link IE Field Slave Head Station are supplied with a standard End Cover included.
Backup Batteries
Uses standard Q Series backup batteries. See Programmable Automation Controllers section for more details.
Memory Cards
Mitsubishi provides industrial grade SD memory cards for the L Series. Commercially available SD/SDHC cards
supported up to 32GB.
Model Number Memory Card Stocked Item
L1MEM-2GBSD 2GB S
L1MEM-4GBSD 4GB S
148
FX Family
Programmable Logic Controllers

FX Family
Compact Controllers
FX3U/FX3UC 16-384
PERFORM AN CE
FX3G/FX3GE 14-256
FX3S 10-30
Sequence Controller
ALPHA 6-28
I /O
The FX Family .................................................................................................................................150

Main Units Overview ........................................................................................................................152
Main Unit Configuration ...................................................................................................................155
Configuration Rules .........................................................................................................................159
Programming and Device Specifications .........................................................................................160
Environmental and Electrical Specifications.....................................................................................161
Main Unit Options ............................................................................................................................162
FX Input / Output Expansion Options...............................................................................................166
FX Analog Options ...........................................................................................................................168
FX High-Speed I/O and Positioning Expansion ................................................................................171
FX Communications and Networking Expansion .............................................................................173
Networking Modules ........................................................................................................................173
FX Interfaces and Power Supplies ...................................................................................................175
Accessories ......................................................................................................................................176
Sequence Controllers - Alpha2 Series .............................................................................................178
Software...........................................................................................................................................181
Item columns/rows.
Non-Stock Product: Non-stock product is product supplied on an “as-needed” basis. Standard lead times of 12 - 16 weeks apply, product
is non-returnable and non-cancelable. Product listed as non-stock may change to stock product subject to increases in sales and usage.
All non-stock product will be indicated in this book by a dash “-” in the Stocked Item columns/rows.
Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Programmable Logic Controllers FX Family 149

n PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS FX FAMILY
The FX Family
The FX family of PLCs is highly flexible, enabling fast and efficient configuration for the application at hand. It is the ideal choice for simple
control systems requiring up to 30 I/O (FX3S), or a more complex system with up to 384 I/Os (FX3U).
Model FX3S FX3G FX3GE FX3U FX3UC

Power Supply 100-240VAC 100-240VAC, 24VDC 100-240VAC 100-240VAC, 24VDC 24VDC
Maximum I/O 30 256* 256 384* 384*
Digital I/O DC/Relay/Transistor DC/Relay/Transistor DC/Relay AC/DC/Relay/Transistor/Triac DC/Relay/Transistor
Cycle Period / Logical
0.21µs 0.21µs 0.21μs 0.065µs 0.065µs
Instruction
Memory 4k steps 32k steps 64k steps 64k steps 64k steps
* With remote I/O
FX Standards Compliance: All FX products are manufactured under ISO 9000 quality assurance and 14001
environmental management standards. In addition, most FX PLC products are certified by internationally recognized
standards agencies. The “Ratings” section of the specifications tables lists the approvals for each product. The approval
agencies are as follows:
UL, cUL: Underwriter’s Laboratories and ABS: American Bureau of Shipping

corresponding Canadian approvals RINA: Registro Italiano Navale
CE: Complies to the European EMC and LVD directives BV: Bureau Veritas
DNV: Det Norske Veritas NK: Nippon Kaiji Kyokai
LR: Lloyd’s Register KC: Korea Certification
GL: Germanischer Lloyd
FX Control Solutions
FX PLCs have been designed to be used in a variety of industry areas with a focus on compact applications. With over 11,000,000 PLCs sold
world wide, the FX PLCs have been fitted to variety of applications in a range of different industry areas. Examples of a few industries where
FX PLCs are used include the timber industry, food industry, textile industry, plastics industry, printing industry, packaging industry and water
processing industry.
Analog Control
Expanding the FX PLC with analog inputs and outputs is required when the system needs to handle voltage or current inputs/outputs,
temperature inputs, or temperature or PID control. The following expansion boards, special adapters, and special function blocks
support different ranges and combinations of these features.
Analog Input Analog Output Temperature Input
Ammeter or Analog Input Motor or Analog Output Temperature Analog Input

Pressure Sensor Device FX FX Sensor Device FX
Inverter Control Device
Voltage or PLC Data Voltage or PLC Data PT100/PT1000/Ni1000

Current Input A/D convert Processing A/D convert Thermocouple A/D convert Temperature Value
Current Input Processing (Temperature Measurement Device) Read to PLC
High-Speed Control
All FX Series PLCs are equipped with built-in open collector high-speed counters. These high-speed inputs are connected to external
devices such as encoders and ultrasound sensors for system feedback control.
FX Integrated High-Speed Counter FX with High-Speed Input Adapter
Open Collector Inputs Rotary Encoder or Sensor Gauge FX3U-4HSX-ADP Rotary Encoder or Sensor Gauge
2 Adapters max.
FX3U / FX3UC FX 3U 8ch max.

1-phase 1-count up to 200kHz
Differential Line OR
Receiver Inputs
2ch max.
150
Inverter Control
Parameters and commands between the PLC and Mitsubishi Inverters can be handled through serial communication using FREQROL protocol.
Another popular control method for these controllers include Analog Control.
RS-485
Communication Equipment
Inverter
FX3S FX3G
Analog Board RS-485 Communication
OR + Analog Speed Control

(0-10V DC, 4-20mA) FX 3U/FX 3UC/FX3G/FX3S
Motor * Applicable Inverters: F700/A700/E700/V500/F500/A500/E500/S500
Positioning Open Field Networks

The built-in high-speed pulse outputs on all transistor-type FX Series Within an application, control devices can be made up from
PLCs, are designed to satisfy simple independent-axis positioning equipment from different manufacturers, however sustaining reliable
applications. For more advanced applications, the SSCNET Special communication between devices is essential. Supported networks:
Function Block provides high performance positioning control. Ethernet, CC-Link, PROFIBUS, DeviceNet, and Modbus.
FX3U
Transistor-type Output
Pulse Output
2 Axes
200kHz
ON (Forward Rotation) OFF (Reverse Rotation)
Direction
200kHz
1st Axis DeviceNet
100kHz
2nd Axis 2 Axes

100kHz 200kHz
3rd Axis 200kHz

100kHz
Servo Amp,
Stepping Motor Driver
Multidrop networks, non-protocol communication, and remote maintenance are just some of the many uses.
N:N Network Computer Link (Dedicated Protocol) Remote Maintenance

Communication between FX Series PLCs Communication with a PC Communication with a PC
Connect up to 8 FX PLCs using N:N Networking to allow 1:N Computer to PLC Communication Using a modem connection, a PC can monitor/force
data exchange between each station. The PC can communicate with a network of up to 16 FX, A, devices and perform program upload/download to a PLC
RS-485 Communication 8 FX PLCs Max. and Q PLCs. from remote locations.
Station 0 Station 1 Station n RS-485Communication 16 PLCs Max. Computer (with GX Developer) RS-232C Communication
Modem Modem
Station 0 RS-485 Communication Station n
RS-485 Communication Equipment Phone Line

RS-232C Communication Equipment
Computer (PC) RS-485 Communication Equipment
Parallel Link 1:1 RS-232C Communication Equipment to PLC

Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instructions)
Communication between 2 FX Series PLCs of the same series PLC communication with Printers, Barcode Readers, etc.
When communicating over an RS-232C interface, the PC
Auxiliary Relays (M) and Data Registers (D) are updated can communicate with one FX PLC. Serial communication is possible between a PLC and any
automatically between two PLCs of the same series. external equipment with an RS-232C or RS-485 (RS-422)
RS-232C Communication interface.
Master Station Slave Station
RS-485 Communication PC, Printer, RS-232C Communication
Barcode Reader,
Computer (PC) RS-232C Communication Equipment etc.
RS-485 Communication Equipment RS-232C Communication Equipment

Note: The RS2 Instruction is only available for FX3U/FX3UC Series PLCs

n PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS FX FAMILY Speed Analog
Main Units Overview Communication Positioning
Expandability Memory
FX3U - Top of the Line

Controllable I/O: 16 - 384 points with CC-Link or AS-i remote I/O
Main Unit I/O: 16/32/48/64/80/128 points
The FX3U is the original dual system-bus, high-speed, fully Product Details
expandable compact PLC designed to seamlessly control All-in-one CPU, power supply and I/O. Includes many upgraded
communication, networking, analog, and positioning systems. features from the FX2N, including high expandability using
Expansion Boards and Special Adapters to add functionality.
• 3rd generation compact PLC
• High efficiency with more speed, more performance, Fast Instruction Times
more memory, and new functions Basic Instructions: 0.065 µs / instruction (Contact Instruction)
• Built-in high-speed processing and positioning Applied Instructions: 0.642 µs / instruction (MOV Instruction)
• Exchangeable communication expansion boards that mount Large Memory
directly into the main unit (USB, RS-232C, RS-422, RS-485) 64,000 steps of built-in program memory
• Simultaneous memory cassette and display module Flash Memory Cassettes with loader functionality also available
mounting available
Large Device Memory
• Integrated real-time clock Auxiliary Relays: 7,680 points
• Easy programming with large instruction set and table Timers: 512 points
positioning configuration Counters: 235 points
• Large programming memory Data Registers: 8,000 points
Extension Registers: 32,768 points
• Programming with GX Works2 or GX Works2 FX
Extension File Registers: 32,768 points
(with optional memory cassette)
Speed Analog
Communication Positioning
FX3UC - Slim Fit

Controllable I/O: 16 - 384 points with CC-Link or AS-i remote I/O
Main Unit I/O: 16/32/64/96 points
The FX3UC is the new ultra-compact high-speed, fully expandable Product Details
PLC. Based on 24VDC power and using connector-type transistor I/O, Ultra-compact size main unit including many upgraded features from
the FX3UC is designed for space conscious and modular applications. the FX2NC, including high expandability using Special Adapters to
add functionality.
• 3rd generation Super-compact PLC
• Reduced size and wiring using connector-type I/O Fast Instruction Times
• Built-in high-speed processing and positioning Basic Instructions: 0.065µs / instruction (Contact Instruction)
Applied Instructions: 0.642µs / instruction (MOV Instruction)
• Ultra-compact design featuring connector-type wiring for
installation space optimization Large Memory
• 64k steps of internal program memory 64,000 steps of built-in program memory
• Integrated real-time clock Flash Memory Cassettes with loader functionality also available
• Easy programming with large instruction set and table Large Device Memory
positioning configuration Auxiliary Relays: 7,680 points
• Programming with GX Works2 or GX Works2 FX Timers: 512 points
Counters: 235 points
• Relay output
Data Registers: 8,000 points
(with optional memory cassette)
152
Speed Analog
FX3G - Customized Control

Controllable I/O: 14 - 256 points (with CC-Link remote I/O)
The FX3G is an introductory compact PLC that is the latest addition Product Details
to the FX3 Series. With control of directly connected and networked All in one CPU, power supply and I/O. Includes many upgraded
I/O, connectivity to the FX3 Series ADP bus and new expansion features from the FX1N. Especially usage of the FX3 Series ADP bus
boards makes the FX3G ideal for simple yet performance critical system and new expansion boards (BD).
applications.
Instruction Times
• 3rd generation compact PLC Basic Instructions: 0.21µs / instruction (Contact Instruction)
• Highly flexible
Large Memory
• Dual bus architecture- 32k steps of internal program memory
32,000 steps of built-in program memory. EEPROM memory cassette
• Integrated real-time clock with loader function is available.
• Easy programming with large instruction set and table
positioning configuration Large Device Memory
Auxiliary Relays: 7,680 points
• Built-in USB port for the programming communication function to Timers: 320 points
enable high-speed communication at 12Mbps Counters: 235 points
• Two built-in variable analog potentiometers available for adjusting Data Registers: 8,000 points
the timer set time Extension Registers: 24,000 points
• Programming with GX Works2 or GX Works2 FX Extension File Registers: 24,000 points
Speed Analog
FX3GE - All-In-One Control

Controllable I/O: 24 - 256 points (with CC-Link remote I/O)
Main Unit I/O: 24/40 points
The FX3GE combines the powerful FX3G CPU with built-in Ethernet Product Details
communications and analog I/O to provide a cost-effective micro PLC All in one CPU, power supply and I/O. Also includes an Ethernet
that can meet the needs of a wide variety of applications right out of communications port and analog inputs and outputs. Can use all the
the box. same expansion options as FX3G.
• 3rd generation compact PLC Fast Instruction Times
• Highly flexible Basic Instructions: 0.21μs / instruction (Contact Instruction)
• Embedded Ethernet communications port
Large Memory
• Embedded analog I/O (2 inputs, 1 output) 32,000 steps of built-in program memory. EEPROM memory cassette
• Dual bus architecture - 32k steps of internal program memory with loader function is available.
• Integrated real-time clock Large Device Memory
• Easy programming with large instruction set and table Auxiliary Relays: 7,680 points
positioning configuration Timers: 320 points
• Built-in USB port for the programming communication function to Counters: 235 points
enable high-speed communication at 12Mbps. Data Registers: 8,000 points
• Two built-in variable analog potentiometers available for adjusting
the timer set time.

Speed Analog
FX3S - Keeping it Simple
Controllable I/O: 10 - 30 points
The FX3S is the fit-and-forget PLC solution for space and cost Product Details
conscious applications requiring up to 30 I/O. This minimum- All-in-one CPU, power supply and I/O. Expansion options includes
expandability, battery-less maintenance free controller is perfect adapter and expansion boards for communication, analog control, or
for handling straightforward processes and can be hidden away in temperature input.
locations without regular maintenance activities.
Fast Instruction Times
• 3rd generation basic compact PLC Basic Instructions: 0.21µs / instruction (Contact Instruction)
• High performance with minimal size Applied Instructions: 0.5µs / instruction (MOV Instruction)
• Integrated power supply (AC powered)
Large Memory
• Maintenance-free EEPROM memory 4,000 steps of built-in program memory. No battery, no maintenance.
• Ample memory capacity (4000 steps) and device ranges
Large Device Memory
• Built-in USB port for the programming communication function Auxiliary Relays: 1,536 points
to enable high-speed communication at 12Mbps Timers: 138 points
• Built-in positioning control Counters: 88 points
• Integrated real-time clock Data Registers: 3,000 points
• Increased functionality using Expansion Boards and
Special Adapters
154
Main Unit Configuration
9 5 4 3 1 6 7 8
High-Speed Output ADP

High-Speed Input ADP
Communication ADP
Special Function Blocks
FX 3U Power Supply
2
Analog ADP
FX 3U /FX 2N
CF Card ADP
Expansions
FX 2N I/O
FX 3U
Board
Unit
Main Unit
Expansion Boards FX3U Main Units

Communication Interface Board 2 1
FX3U -232-BD FX3U -CNV-BD
FX3U -422-BD OR
FX3U -485-BD Analog Potentiometer
FX3U -422-BD FX3U -USB-BD FX3U -8AV-BD
Special Adapters
FX3U -32MR
FX3U -232ADP-MB
Communication FX3U -485ADP-MB 4
FX3U -ENET-ADP
n FX3U Main Units 16-128 I/O
FX3U -16MR/ES AC D R FX3U -48MR/ES AC D R FX3U -80MR/ES AC D R
9 5 3 FX3U -16MT/ES AC D T1 FX3U -48MT/ES AC D T1 FX3U -80MT/ES AC D T1
FX3U -16MT/ESS AC D T2 FX3U -48MT/ESS AC D T2 FX3U -80MT/ESS AC D T2
FX 3 U -4AD- PTW-ADP
F X3U -4AD -PTK-ADP
FX3U -16MR/DS DC D R FX3U -48MR/DS DC D R FX3U -80MR/DS DC D R
FX 3 U -4HSX-AD P FX 3U -2HSY -ADP
POWER
PO WE R
PO W ER
X0/3 X 2/ 5
PO W ER
Y0 /2 Y1/3 FX3U -16MT/DS DC D T1 FX3U -48MT/DS DC D T1 FX3U -80MT/DS DC D T1

DC D T2
X1/4 X 6/7 Y4/6 Y5/7
DC FX3U -48MT/DSS DC D T2 FX3U -80MT/DSS

24+
FX3U -16MT/DSS D T2
24+
F P.R P
24-
24-
ï ú
ï ú
ï ú
PLS DIR
ï ú
J-type
+
J-type
Y0/2
FX3U -32MR/ES FX3U -64MR/ES FX3U -128MR/ES AC D R
X0/3
-
AC D R
L1+
R
-
AC D
L1+
+
+
L1-
Y4/6
L1-
X1/4
-
-
L2+
L2+
SGA
+
FX3U -32MT/ES FX3U -64MT/ES FX3U -128MT/ES AC D T1

L2-
X2/5
+
AC D T1 AC
L2-
Y1/3
D T1
L3+
-
L3+
+
X6/7
L3-
+
L3-
Y5/7
L4+
-
SG SG
L4+
FX3U -64MT/ESS FX3U -128MT/ESS AC D T2

L4-
FX3U -32MT/ESS AC
SGB
D T2 AC D T2
L4-
FX3U -4AD-ADP FX3U -4AD-PNK-ADP FX3U -32MR/DS DC D R FX3U -64MR/DS DC D R

FX3U -CF-ADP FX3U -4HSX-ADP FX3U -2HSY-ADP
Analog Temperature FX3U -32MT/DS DC D T1 FX3U -64MT/DS DC D T1
Data Storage High Speed Counter FX3U -32MT/DSS DC D T2 FX3U -64MT/DSS DC D T2
FX3U -4AD-ADP FX3U -4AD-PT-ADP FX3U -32MR/UA1
FX 3U -CF-ADP FX3U -4HSX-ADP AC E R FX3U -64MR/UA1 AC E R
FX3U -4DA-ADP FX3U -4AD-TC-ADP FX3U -32MS/ES AC D TR AC D TR
FX3U -64MS/ES
FX3U -3A-ADP FX3U -4AD-PTW-ADP Positioning
AC AC Power supply DC DC Power supply R Relay output
FX3U -4AD-PNK-ADP FX3U -2HSY-ADP T1 Transistor (sink)
E AC Input D DC Input (sink/source) TR Triac output T2 Transistor (source)
Special Function Modules
Unpowered Extension Blocks 6

Powered Extension Units
Input/Output Extension Units Input Extension Blocks Output Extension Blocks
OUT
FX2N -32ER-ES/UL FX2N -8EX-ES/UL FX2N -8EYR-ES/UL

FX2N -32ET-ESS/UL FX2N -8EX-UA1/UL FX2N -8EYT-ESS/UL
FX2N -8EYR-S-ES/UL
2
FX2N -48ER-DS FX2N -16EX-ES/UL

FX2N -48ER-ES/UL
IN
FX2N -16EYR-ES/UL
FX2N -48ER-UA1/UL FX2N -16EYT-ESS/UL
OUT
FX2N -48ET-DSS Input/Output Extension Blocks FX2N -16EYS

FX2N -48ER FX2N -48ET-ESS/UL
FX2N -8ER-ES/UL
FX2N -8EX FX2N -16EYR
Analog Positioning Network 7 8

FX2N -2AD FX3U-1PG FX2N -32CCL
RUN
ERR.
L RUN
L ERR.
SD
FX3U -4AD FX2N -10PG FX3U -16CCL-M
RD
FX2N -2DA FX3U -20SSC-H FX3U -64CCL
FX3U -4DA FX2N -1RM-E-SET FX3U -ENET
FX2N -5A FX3U -32DP FX 3U-1PSU-5V
FX2N -8AD FX3U -64DP-M

FX 3 U -64CCL
FX 3U-20SSC-H
FX3U -1PSU-5V
Temperature High Speed Counter Communication
FX2N -2L FX2N-1HC FX2N -232IF Power Supply Unit
FX2N -4AD-TC FX3U-2HC
FX0N -3A FX3U -20SSC-H FX3U -64CCL FX2N -4AD-PT
FX3U-4LC FX3U -1PSU-5V
Optional Equipment and Software
n GOT n Interface Converter n Software

GOT1000 FX-USB-AW GX Developer
GT10/GT11/GT12/GT14/GT16 FX-232AWC-H GX Works2
GX Works2 FX
Accessories
n Memory Cassettes n Display Modules n Extension Cables
FX3U -FLROM-64 FX3U -7DM FX0N -30EC(30cm)
FX3U -FLROM-16 FX0N -65EC(65cm)
FX3U -FLROM-64L
FX3U -FLROM-1M n Display Module Holder FX0N -65EC n Battery n PLC Bus Connector
FX3U -FLROM-64L FX3U -7DM FX3U -7DM-HLD FX3U -32BL FX2N -CNV-BC

9 3 2 1 4 5 6 7 8

FX 2N Unpowered I/O
Communication ADP
FX 3UC -1PS-5V or
2NC
FX 2NC -CNV-IF
CF Card ADP
2N
Analog ADP
FX 2NC I/O
Expansions
Expansions
FX 3UC /FX
FX 3UC /FX
FX 3UC
Main Unit
Special Adapters FX3UC Main Units

3 2 1
FX 3U -4AD-PTW-ADP
FX 3U -232ADP-MB
POWER
POWER
RD
SD
24+
24-
ï ú
ï ú
J-type
FX 3 U -4AD-PTK-ADP FX 3U -485ADP- MB
L1+
L1-
PO WER POWER
L2+
RD
SD
L2-
L3+
24+
L3-
24-
L4+
L4-
ï ú
330
OPEN
ï ú
110
J-type
L1+
FX3U -4AD-ADP FX3U -232ADP-MB

L1-
L2+
L2-
RDA
L3+
RDB
L3-
SDA
L4+
SDB
L4-
SG
FX3U -4AD-PNK-ADP FX3U -485ADP-MB
Analog Temperature Communication FX3UC -64MT/DSS

FX3U -4AD-ADP FX3U -4AD-PT-ADP FX3U -232ADP-MB n FX 3UC Main Units 16-96 I/O
FX3U -4DA-ADP FX3U -4AD-TC-ADP FX3U -485ADP-MB
FX3U -3A-ADP FX3U -4AD-PTW-ADP FX3U -ENET-ADP FX3UC -16MT/D* DC D1 T1
FX3U -4AD-PNK-ADP FX3UC -16MT/DSS DC D2 T2
FX3UC -16MR/DS-T DC D2 R DC DC Power supply
D1 DC Input (sink)
FX3UC -32MT/D* DC D1 T1
9 FX3UC -32MT/DSS DC D2 T2 D2 DC Input (sink/source)
T1 Transistor Output (sink)
FX3UC -64MT/D* DC D1 T1
T2 Transistor Output (source)
Data Storage FX3UC -64MT/DSS DC D2 T2
R Relay
FX 3U -CF-ADP FX3UC -96MT/D* DC D1 T1
FX3UC -96MT/DSS DC D2 T2
Special Function Modules*

n I/O Extension Blocks * The special function Modules of FX3UC -**MT/DSS.
4 6 Unpowered Extension Blocks Input Extension Blocks 7

Input Extension Blocks FX2N -8EX-ES/UL
FX2NC -16EX-T-DS
OUT
FX2N -8EX-UA1/UL
FX 2NC -32EX
-DS
FX 2NC -16EYR-T-DS
PW FX2NC -16EX-DS
PO WER
FX 3UC -1PS-5V
Power Supply Unit FX2N -16EX-ES/UL

POWER Y0
X0 X0 1
1 1 2
2 3
2
FX2NC -32EX-DS
2
3 3 Y4
X4 X4 5
5 5 6
6 6
7
FX3UC -1PS-5V
7 7
Y0
Output Extension Blocks

X0 X0
1 1
1 2
2 2
3 3 3
X4 X4 Y4
5 5 5
6 6 6 IN
7 7 7
Output Extension Blocks FX2N -8EYR-ES/UL

OR OUT
FX2N -8EYT-ESS/UL
FX2NC -16EYR-T-DS FX2N -8EX FX 2N -16EYR FX2N -8EYR-S--ES/UL
FX2NC -16EYT-DSS Interface Converter FX2N -16EYR-ES/UL
Input/Output Extension Blocks
FX2NC -32EYT-DSS FX2NC -CNV-IF FX2N -16EYT-ESS/UL
FX2NC -32EX FX2NC -16EYR-T FX3UC -1PS-5V FX2N -8ER-ES/UL FX2N -16EYS
Network 8
RUN
ERR.
L RUN
L ERR.
FX2N -32CCL FX3U -32DP
SD
RD
FX3U -16CCL-M FX3U -64DP-M
n Special Function Blocks FX 2N -2AD
FX3U -64CCL FX3U -ENET
POWER
5 FX 3U-4DA
FX 3U-20SSC-H FX 3U -64CCL Temperature
Analog D /A
FX2N -2LC FX3U-4LC
FX 3U C -4AD
FX2N -4AD-TC
FX3UC -4AD FX3U -4DA FX 2N -2AD FX 3U -20SSC-H FX 3U -64CCL FX2N -4AD-PT
FX2NC -4DA High Speed Counter
Analog Positioning
FX2N -1HC FX3U-2HC
High Speed Counter FX2N -2AD FX3U -4DA FX3U-1PG FX2N -1RM-E-SET
FX3U -4AD FX2N -5A FX2N -10PG FX3U -20SSC-H Communication
FX3UC -4AD FX2NC -1HC FX2N -2DA FX2N -8AD FX2N -232IF
Optional Equipment and Software
n GOT n Interface Converter n Software

GOT1000 FX-USB-AW GX Developer
GT10/GT11/GT12/GT14/GT16 FX-232AWC-H GX Works2
GX Works2 FX
Accessories
n Memory Cassettes n Connecting to Terminal Block n Connector Parts
FX3U -FLROM-64 FX-16E-150CAB (1.5m) FX-16E-150CAB-R (1.5m) FX2C -I/O-CON
FX3U -FLROM-16 FX-16E-300CAB (3m) FX-16E-300CAB-R (3m) FX2C -I/O-CON-S
FX3U -FLROM-64L FX-16E-500CAB (5m) FX-16E-500CAB-R (5m) FX2C -I/O-CON-SA
FX3U -FLROM-1M n I/O Cables
General I/O cable
FX-16E-500CAB-S (5m)
n Terminal Blocks n Input Switches n PLC Bus Connector

FX-16E-TB/UL FX2C -16SW-C FX0N -65EC FX2N -CNV-BC
FX-16EYR-ES-TB/UL FX2C -16SW-TB n Power Supply Cables
FX-16EYS-ES-TB/UL n Battery n Extension Cables FX2NC -100MPCB (1m)
FX-16EYT-ESS-TB/UL FX3U -32BL FX0N -30EC (30cm) FX2NC -100BPCB (1m)
FX-16E-TB FX-32E-TB/UL FX0N -65EC (65cm) FX2NC -10BPCB1 (0.1m)
156
5 4 3 1 6 7 8 5 4 3 1 6 7 8 5 4 1 6 7 8

Interface Converter ADP

Communication ADP
Communication ADP
Communication ADP
FX 3G Main Unit FX 3G Main Unit FX3GE Main Unit
Power Supply Unit
Power Supply Unit
Power Supply Unit

14/24 I/O Points 40/60 I/O Points
Expansions
Expansions
Expansions
Analog ADP
Analog ADP
Analog ADP
FX 3U /FX 2N
FX 3U /FX 2N
FX3U / FX2N
FX 2N I/O
FX 2N I/O
FX 2N I/O
FX 3U
FX 3U
2 2 2
FX 3U
2 3 2
BD1 BD1 BD2 BD1
Expansion Boards FX3G Main Units

Communication Analog Analog Setpoint 2 1
FX 3G -232-BD FX 3G -2AD-BD FX 3G -8AV-BD
FX 3G -422-BD FX 3G -1DA-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX3G-232-BD FX3G-485-BD-RJ*
*Available 12/2013
Special Adapters
5 4 3 FX 3G -24MT/ES FX 3G -40MT/ES
FX 3G Main Units 14-60 I/O

FX 3G -14MR/ES AC D R FX 3G -40MR/ES AC D R
FX 3G -14MT/ES AC D T1 FX 3GE-40MR/ES AC D R
FX 3G -14MT/ESS AC D T2 FX 3G -40MT/ES AC D T1
FX 3G -14MR/DS DC D R FX 3G -40MT/ESS AC D T2
FX 3G -14MT/DS DC D T1 FX 3G -40MR/DS DC D R
FX 3G -14MT/DSS DC D T2 FX 3G -40MT/DS DC D T1
FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-232ADP-MB FX 3G -40MT/DSS DC D T2

FX 3G -24MR/ES AC D R
FX 3GE-24MR/ES AC D R FX 3G -60MR/ES AC D R
FX 3G -60MT/ES AC D T1
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP FX3U-485ADP-MB
FX 3G -60MT/ESS AC D T2
FX 3G -60MR/DS DC D R
Analog Temperature Communication Interface Converter FX 3G -60MT/DS DC D T1
DC D T2
FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP FX 3U -232ADP-MB FX 3G -CNV-ADP FX 3G -60MT/DSS
FX3U-4DA-ADP FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP FX 3U -485ADP-MB AC AC Power supply R Relay output
FX3U-3A-ADP FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP FX 3U -ENET-ADP* DC DC Power supply T1 Transistor(sink)
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP * Not available for FX3GE main units D DC Input(sink/source) T2 Transistor(source)
Special Function Modules

I/O Extension Blocks
6
Powered Extension Units Unpowered Extension Blocks
Input/Output Extension Units Input Extension Blocks Output Extension Blocks Input/Output Extension Blocks
FX 2N -32ER-ES/UL FX 2N -8EX-ES/UL FX 2N -8EYR-ES/UL FX 2N -8ER-ES/UL

FX 2N -32ET-ESS/UL
2
FX 2N -8EX-UA1/UL FX 2N -8EYT-ESS/UL
FX 2N -48ER-DS IN FX 2N -16EX-ES/UL FX 2N -8EYR-S-ES/UL
FX 2N -48ER-ES/UL FX 2N -16EYR-ES/UL
FX 2N -48ER-UA1/UL FX 2N -16EYT-ESS/UL
FX 2N -48ET-DSS FX 2N -16EYS
FX2N-48ER
FX 2N -48ET-ESS/UL FX2N-8EX

Analog Temperature Network
7 Power Supply Unit
8
FX 2N -2AD FX 2N -2LC FX 3U -16CCL-M FX 3U -1PSU-5V
FX 3U -4AD FX 2N -4AD-TC FX 2N -32CCL
FX 2N -2DA FX 2N -4AD-PT FX 3U -64CCL
FX 3U -4DA FX 3U -4LC FX 3U -ENET
FX3U -4DA
FX 2N -5A FX 3U -32DP FX3U -1PSU-5V
FX 2N -8AD
D/A
FX 3U -1PSU-5V
FX3U-4DA
Optional Equipment and Software Accessories

GOT Memory Cassette Display Module Extension Cables Battery
GOT1000 FX 0N -30EC(30cm) FX 3U -32BL
(GT10/GT11/GT12/GT14/GT16) FX 0N -65EC(65cm)
Interface Converter FX 0N -65EC
FX-232AWC-H FX3G-5DM
PLC Bus Connector

Software FX 2N -CNV-BC
GT14 GX Developer FX3G-EEPROM-32L FX3G-5DM
GX Works2
GX Works2 FX

5 4 3 1

FX3S Main Unit
Communication ADP
Analog ADP
2
BD1
Expansion Boards FX3G Main Units

Communication Analog Analog Setpoint 2 1
FX 3G -232-BD FX 3G -2AD-BD FX 3G -8AV-BD
FX 3G -422-BD FX 3G -1DA-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX3G-232-BD FX3G-485-BD-RJ*
*Available 12/2013
Special Adapters
5 4 3 FX3S-10MR/ES
FX3G Main Units 14-60 I/O

FX 3S -10MR/ES AC D R FX 3S-20MR/ES AC D R
FX 3S -10MT/ES AC D T1 FX 3S-20MT/ES AC D T1
FX 3S -10MT/ESS AC D T2 FX 3S-20MT/ESS AC D T2
FX 3S-14MR/ES AC D R FX 3S -30MR/ES AC D R
FX 3S-14MT/ES AC D T1 FX 3S -30MT/ES AC D T1
FX3U-232ADP-MB FX 3S-14MT/ESS
FX3U-4AD-ADP AC D T2 FX 3S -30MT/ESS AC D T2
FX3U-485ADP-MB AC AC Power Supply R Relay Output

FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
D DC Input (sink/source) T1 Transistor (sink)
Analog Temperature Communication Interface Converter T2 Transistor (source)
FX 3U -4AD-ADP FX 3U -4AD-PT-ADP FX 3U -232ADP-MB FX 3S -CNV-ADP
FX 3U -4DA-ADP FX 3U -4AD-TC-ADP FX 3U -485ADP-MB
FX 3U -3A-ADP FX 3U -4AD-PTW-ADP FX 3U -ENET-ADP
FX 3U -4AD-PNK-ADP

GOT Memory Cassette
GOT1000
(GT10/GT11/GT12/GT14/GT16)
Interface Converter
FX-232AWC-H
Software
GT14
GX Developer
GX Works2 FX 3G -EEPROM-32L
GX Works2 FX
4 3 2 1
Communication ADP
Expansion Boards
Interface Converter
Boards
FX 2NC
FX 1N
Main Unit
Special Adapters Expansion Boards FX1S Main Units

4 2 1
Communication Boards
FX1N -232-BD
FX 2NC -232ADP
POWER
FX 2NC -485AD P
POWER
FX 2NC -ENET-ADP
POWER
LINK
FX1N-2AD-BD FX1N -485-BD 100-240
VA C L N
S/S
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
0 1 2 3
RD RD
SD SD
ACT
SD
FX1N -422-BD MITSUBISHI
4 5 6 7
IN
RD
POWER
RUN
ERROR
RDA
RDB
SDA
FX1S-14MR
SDB
FX1N -2AD-BD
OUT
é 0 1 2 3
4 5
SG
Y4 14MR
Y2
Analog Boards 0V Y0 Y1 -ES/UL

Y3 Y5
24V COM0 COM1COM2
FX1S-14MR
FX1N -2AD-BD*
FX2NC -232ADP FX 2NC -485ADP FX2NC -ENET-ADP
FX1N -1DA-BD*
FX1N -8AV-BD n FX1S Main Units 10-30 I/O
Communication Adapters FX1S-10MR-ES/UL AC D R FX1S-30MR-ES/UL AC D R
FX2NC -232ADP FX1N-1DA-BD
FX1S-10MT-ESS/UL AC D T2 FX1S-30MT-ESS/UL AC D T2
FX2NC -485ADP FX1S-10MR-DS DC D R FX1S-30MR-DS AC D R
Extension Boards DC
FX2NC -ENET-ADP FX1S-10MT-DSS D T2 FX1S-30MT-DSS AC D T2
FX1N -4EX-BD* FX1S-10MT AC D1 T1 FX1S-30MT AC D1 T1
FX1N -2EYT-BD* FX1S-14MR-ES/UL AC D R
FX1N -1DA-BD FX1S-14MT-ESS/UL AC D T2
AC AC Power supply
FX1S-14MR-DS DC D R
FX1S-14MT-DSS DC D T2 DC DC Power supply
FX1S-14MT AC D1 T1 D DC Input(sink/source)
* Ver.2.00 or later
FX1S-20MR-ES/UL AC D R D1 DC Input (sink)
FX1S-20MT-ESS/UL AC D T2 R Relay output
FX1S-20MR-DS DC D R T1 Transistor(sink)
3 FX1S-20MT-DSS DC D T2
T2 Transistor(source)
FX1S-20MT AC D1 T1
Interface Board
FX1N -CNV-BD

n GOT n Software n Display Modules
GOT1000 GX Developer MITSUBISHI
8L PLC FX1N -5DM
(GT10/GT11/GT12/GT14/GT16) GX Works2 FX
WR
ON FX-10DM-E
n Interface Converters PROTEC T
SW
O FF
FX-USB-AW ES C - + OK RD
8L PLC
n Memory Cassette
FX-232AWC-H FX1N -5DM FX1N -EEPROM-8L FX1N -EEPROM-8L
158
Configuration Rules
CAUTION: For full configuration details please refer to the respective hardware manuals.
1. Number of input/output points
FX3U/FX3UC: The total number of combined input/output points and remote I/O points on CC-Link or AS-i system must be 384 points
or less on the whole system, where the number of local I/O points and remote I/O points cannot exceed 256 points.
FX3G: The total number of combined input/output points and remote I/O points on CC-Link must be 256 points or less on the whole
system, where the maximum number of local I/O points and remote I/O points cannot exceed 128 points.
2. Number of connected special extension devices

FX3U Special adapter (up to 10 units (*1)) Special function unit/block (up to 8 units)
Input/output
Special adapter Special adapter Special adapter Special adapter Expansion Input/output powered Special function Special function
(analog) (communication) (high-speed output) (high-speed input) board Main unit extension block unit block
extension unit
Up to 4 units Up to 2 units Up to 2 units Up to 2 units Only 1 unit
When an expansion board other than FX3U-CNV-BD is used, only 1 adapter can be connected.
FX3UC
Special Special Input/output Special Special
adapter adapter Main unit extension function function
(analog) (communication) block unit unit
Up to 4 units Up to 2 units
Up to 8 units
FX3G
FX3G Main Units (40/60 Point Type)
Special Input/output Extension
Special adapter Expansion Main unit Special
adapter powered power supply
(communication) board 40/60 point type function block
(analog) extension unit unit
Up to 2 units Up to 2 units Up to 2 units Up to 2 units Only 1 unit Up to 8 units
FX3G Main Units (14/24 Point Type)

Special Input/output Extension
Special adapter Expansion Main unit Special
adapter powered power supply
(communication) board 14/24 point type function block
(analog) extension unit unit
Only 1 unit Only 1 unit Only 1 unit Up to 2 units Only 1 unit Up to 8 units
3. Calculation of current consumption

FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G: The power is supplied to each connected device from the built-in power supply of the main unit, the input /
output powered extension unit or the extension power supply unit. There are three types of built-in power supplies; 24VDC service power,
5VDC power and internal 24VDC power. The power consumed varies depending on the type of product added.
Extension block Input/output Extension block Extension Extension block

Special Expansion Main unit (some blocks can powered (some blocks can power supply (some blocks can
adapter board be connected) extension be connected) unit be connected)
unit
Power supply Power supply Power supply from Power supply from
from main unit from main unit input/output powered extension power supply
extension unit unit*
Note: FX3S/FX1S controllers can generally be considered as standalone controllers so no explicit configuration requirements exist.
However, for configuration of adapters, boards, and memory cassettes, etc. please refer to the FX3S/FX1S hardware manual.

Programming and Device Specifications
Model Number FX1S FX3S FX3G/FX3GE FX3U/FX3UC
Programming
256 total (combined local and 384 total (combined local and
I/O Points 30 (+4 optional) 30
CC-Link remote I/O) CC-Link remote I/O)
Max. 128 direct addressing and Max. 256 direct addressing and
Address Range Max. 30 direct addressing Max. 30 direct addressing
Max. 128 remote I/O Max. 256 remote I/O
32,000 steps EEPROM (internal), 64,000 steps RAM (internal),
Program Memory 2,000 steps EEPROM 4,000 steps EEPROM exchangeable EEPROM memory exchangeable FLROM memory
cassette cassette
Instruction Time 0.55 µs / contact instruction 0.21 μs / contact instruction 0.21 µs / contact instruction 0.065 µs / contact instruction
27 sequence instructions, 29 sequence instructions, 2 step 29 sequence instructions, 29 sequence instructions,
Number of Instructions 2 step ladder instructions, ladder instructions, 116 applied 2 step ladder instructions, 2 step ladder instructions,
85 applied instructions instructions 123 applied instructions 210 applied instructions
Programming Language Step ladder, instruction list, SFC Step ladder, structured text, simple ladder, function block
Program Execution Cyclical execution, refresh mode processing
8 or 16-character keyword
8 character keyword with 3
Program Protection 2 different keywords, maximum password length 16 characters protection with 3 protection
protection levels each (*1)
levels each (*1)
Devices
7,680 total, with 384 general
1,536 total, with 384 general 7,680 total, with 500 general
512 total, with 384 general (M0 - M384), 1152 EEPROM
(M0 - M383), 128 EEPROM (M0 - M499), 524 optional
Auxiliary Relays (M0 - M383) and 128 latched latched (M384 - M1535), and
latched (M384 - M511), 1,024 latched (M500 - M1023), and
(M384 - M511) 6,144 general/optional latched
general (M512 - M1535) 6,656 latched (M1024 - M7679)
(M1536 - M7679)
Special Auxiliary Relays 256 (M8000 - M8255) 512 (M8000 - M8511)
4,096 total, with 1,000 EEPROM
256 total, with 128 EEPROM 4,096 total, with 1,000 optional
latched (S0 - S999) and 3,096
State Relays 128 all latched (S0 - S127) latched (S0 - S127) and 128 latched (S0 - S999) and 3,096
general/optional latched (S1000
general (S128 - S255) latched (S1000 - S4095)
- S4095)
320 total, with 206 100ms 512 total, with 206 100ms
138 total, with 38 100 ms
64 total, with 31 points partially (T0 - T199 and T250 - T255), (T0 - T191, T192 - T199 and
(T0 - T31 and T132 - T137), 31
Timers switchable between 100ms and 46 10ms (T200 - T245), and T250 - T255), 46 10ms
100ms/10ms switchable (T32 -
10ms (T32 - T62) 68 1ms (T246 - T249 and (T200 - T245), and 260 1ms
T62), and 65 1 ms (T63 - T127)
T256 - T319) (T246 - T249 and T256 - T511)
External Setpoint Entry Via Potentiometer 2 0

235 total (16-bit and 32-bit),
67 total (16-bit and 32-bit), 235 total (16-bit and 32-bit),
32 total (16 - bit only), with with 36 general (C0 - C16 and
with 51 general (C0-C15 and with 120 general (C0 - C99 and
Counters 16 general (C0 - C15) and 16 C200 - C219) and 199 EEPROM
C200-C234) and 16 EEPROM C200 - C219) and 115 latched
latched (C16 - C31) latched (C16 - C199 and C220
latched (C16-C31) (C100 - C199 and C220 - C234)
- C234)
1 phase, 6 points max: 60 kHz / 138 total, with 38 100 ms
2 points, 10 kHz / 4 points ; (T0-T31 and T132-T137), 31 21 total, with 16 1-phase (C235 - C250) and
High-Speed Counters
2 phase, 2 points max: 30 kHz / 100ms/10ms switchable (T32- 5 2-phase (C251 - C255)
1 point, 5 kHz / 1 point T62), and 65 1 ms (T63-T127)
1 phase, 6 points max: 60 kHz/ 1 phase, 8 points max: 100 kHz/

1 phase, 6 points max: 60 kHz/ 4 points, 10 kHz / 2 points 6 points; 10 kHz / 2 points
High-Speed Counter Speed -
2 points, 10 kHz / 4 points 2 phase, 3 points max: 30 kHz/ 2 phase, 2 points max: 50 kHz/
2 points, 5kHz/1 point 2 points
Real-Time Clock - Year, month, day, hour, minute, second, day of the week
8,000 total, with 128 general
3,000 total, with 128 general 8,000 total, with 200 general
256 total, with 128 general (D0 - D127), 972 EEPROM
(D0-D127), 128 EEPROM (D0 - D199), 312 optional
Data Registers (D0 - D127) and 128 latched latched (D128 - D1099), and
latched (D128-D255), 2,744 latched (D200 - D511), and
(D128 - D255) 6,900 general/optional latched
general (D256-D2999) 7,488 latched (D512 - D7999)
(D1100 - D7999)
Extension Registers - - 24,000(R0~R23999) 32,768(R0~R32767)
24,000(ER0~R23999) 32,768(ER0~R32767)
Extension File Registers - -
internal/optional memory optional memory
Index Registers 16
Special Data Registers 256 (D8000 - D8255) 512 (D8000 - D8511)
Pointers 64 256 2,048 4,096
Nestings 8
Interrupt Inputs 6
Constants 16-bit: K: -32,768 to +32,767; H: 0 to FFFF; 32-bit: K: -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647; H: 0 to FFFF FFFF
Note:
1. 8-character keyword protection level depends on the keyword registered; 16-character keyword protection level is set within GX-Developer
160
Environmental Specifications
Model Number FX1S FX3S FX3G / FX3GE FX3U FX3UC
0 - 55° C (storage
Ambient Temperature 0 - 55° C (storage temperature: -25 to +75° C)
temperature: -20 to +70° C)
Noise Durability 1000 Vpp with noise generator; 1 µs at 30 - 100 Hz
AC PSU: 1500VAC, 1 min. /
Dielectric Withstand Voltage AC PSU: 1500VAC, 1 min. AC PSU: 1500VAC, 1 min. / DC PSU: 500VAC, 1 min. 500VAC, 1 min.
DC PSU: 500VAC, 1 min.
Ambient Relative Humidity 35 - 85% (non-condensing) 5 - 95% (non-condensing)
Shock Resistance Complies to IEC 68-2-27: 147 m/s² (3 times each in 3 directions for 11 ms)
Vibration Resistance Complies to IEC 68-2-6: 9.8 m/s² (resistance to vibrations from 57 - 150 Hz for 80 minutes along all 3 axes); 4.9 m/s² for DIN rail mounting
Insulation Resistance 500VDC, 5MΩ
Ground Class D: Grounding resistance 100Ω or less
For FX3G-14M and
From FX3U-16M_ to
FX3G_-24M AC: 250V 1A;
AC models: 250V 1.0A; FX3U-32M_ 250V 3.15A;
Fuse 250V 1A DC: 250V 3.15A 125V 3.15A
DC models: 250V 0.8A From FX3U-48M_ to
For FX3G_-40M_ and
FX3U-128M_: 250V 5A
FX3G-60M_: 250V 3.15A
Environment Avoid environments containing corrosive gases, install in a dust-free location
Electrical Specifications
FX1S FX1S FX3S AC FX3GE AC FX3G FX3G DC FX3U
FX3U
AC Powered DC Powered Powered Powered AC Powered Powered DC Powered
AC Powered
Power Supply Specifications Models Models Models Models Models Models Models FX3UC
Models (FX3U-
(FX1S- M - (FX1S-_M_- (FX3S-_M_/ (FX3GE-_M_/ (FX3G-_M_/ (FX3G-_M_/ (FX3U-_M_/
_M_ES/ESS)
ES/UL) DS/-DSS) ES/ESS) ES/ESS) ES/ESS) DS/DSS) DS/DSS)
100-240VAC 100-240VAC 100-240VAC 24VDC (+20%
100-240VAC 100-240VAC
(+10% / 24VDC (+10% / (+10% / 24VDC 24VDC /-15%) Ripple
Power Supply (+10% / -15%), (+10% / -15%),
-15%), 50/60 (+10% / -15%) -15%), 50/60 -15%), 50/60 (+20% / -15%) (+20% / -30%) Voltage (p-p)
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Hz (±10%) Hz Hz 5% or less
15A / 5 ms 15A / 5ms 30A / 5ms 30A / <5 ms 30A / <5 ms
(at 100VAC); 10A / 0.1 ms (at 100VAC); (at 100VAC); (at 100VAC); 30A / <1 ms (at 100VAC); 35A / <0.5 ms 30A / < 0.5ms
Inrush Current at ON
25A / 5 ms (at (at 24VDC) 28A / 5ms (at 50A / 5ms (at 50A / <5 ms (at 24VAC) 65A / <5 ms (at (at 24VDC); (at 24VDC)
200VAC) 200VAC) 200VAC) (at 200VAC) 200VAC)
Allowable Momentary
10 ms 5 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 5ms 10 ms 5 ms 5 ms
Power Failure Time
FX3U-16/32MR/
ES: 400 mA
External Service Power Supply
400 mA - 400 mA 400 mA 400 mA - / FX3U-48/ - -
(24VDC)
64/80/128MR/ES:
600 mA
FX3G /
FX1S FX3S FX3G FX3U FX3UC FX3UC
FX1S Relay FX3S Relay FX3GE FX3U Relay FX3U Triac
Output Specifications Transistor Transistor Transistor Transistor Relay Transistor
Models Models Relay Models Models
Models Models Models Models Models Models
Models
<250VAC, <250VAC, <240VAC, <240VAC, 85 - <240VAC,
Switching Voltage (Max.) (V) 5 - 30VDC 5 - 30VDC 5 - 30VDC 5 - 30VDC 5 - 30VDC
<30VDC <30VDC <30VDC <30VDC 242VAC <30VDC
0.3A (Y0
Max. - Y3), and
Per Output (A) 2 0.5 2 0.5 2 0.5 2 0.5 0.3 2
Output 0.1A (Y4 or
Current higher)
Per Group (A) (*1) 8 0.8 8 0.8 8 0.8 8 0.8 0.8 8 0.8
12W (7.2W
per point
15VA /
for Y0 - Y3
Max. Switching Current 100VAC
80VA 12W 80VA 12W 80VA 12W 80VA 12W 80VA and 2.4W
(Inductive Load) 30VA /
per point
240VAC
for Y4 or
higher)
< 0.2 < 0.2 < 0.2
Response Time (ms) 10 0.2 10 0.2 10 (< 5µs for 10 (< 5µs for 1 ms 10 (< 5µs for
Y0, Y1) (*4) Y0, Y2) Y0, Y2)
3,000,000 3,000,000 3,000,000 3,000,000 3,000,000
at 20VA; at 20VA; at 20VA; at 20VA; at 20VA;
Life of Contacts 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000
- - - - - - (*3)
(Switching Times) at 35VA; at 35VA; at 35VA; at 35VA; at 35VA;
200,000 at 200,000 at 200,000 at 200,000 at 200,000 at
80VA 80VA 80VA (*2) 80VA (*2) 80kA
Notes:
1. This limitation applies to the maximum output current for each reference terminal (Common), each serving 1 to 4 relay or transistor outputs.
Please observe the reference terminal assignments for group identification.
2. Not guaranteed by Mitsubishi Electric.
3. Refer to the specifications of the Terminal Block being used.
4. The 40 and 60 I/O pints main units supports 0.5˜µs for Y2.

Main Unit Options
FX3U
FX3U Main Units with 16 I/O
Model Number FX3U-16MR/DS FX3U-16MR/ES FX3U-16MT/DSS FX3U-16MT/DS FX3U-16MT/ESS FX3U-16MT/ES
Rating UL • cUL • CE (EMC)
Integrated Inputs/Outputs 16 16 16 16 16 16
Power Supply 24VDC 100-240VAC 24VDC 24VDC 100-240VAC 100-240VAC
Integrated Inputs 8 8 8 8 8 8
Integrated Outputs 8 8 8 8 8 8
Output Type Relay Relay Transistor (Source) Transistor (Sink) Transistor (Source) Transistor (Sink)
Power Consumption (W) 25 30 25 25 30 30
Weight (kg) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 130 x 90 x 86 130 x 90 x 86 130 x 90 x 86 130 x 90 x 86 130 x 90 x 86 130 x 90 x 86

Model Number FX3U-32MR/DS FX3U-32MR/ES FX3U-32MT/DSS FX3U-32MT/DS FX3U-32MT/ESS FX3U-32MT/ES FX3U-32MR/UA1 FX3U-32MS/ES
Stocked Item S S S S S S S S
Integrated Inputs/Outputs 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
Power Supply 24VDC 100-240VAC 24VDC 24VDC 100-240VAC 100-240VAC 100-240VAC 100-240VAC
Integrated Inputs 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
Integrated Outputs 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
Transistor Transistor
Output Type Relay Relay Transistor (Sink) Transistor (Sink) Relay Triac
(Source) (Source)
Power Consumption (W) 30 35 30 30 35 35 35 35
Weight (kg) 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.65
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 150 x 90 x 86 150 x 90 x 86 150 x 90 x 86 150 x 90 x 86 150 x 90 x 86 150 x 90 x 86 182 x 90 x 86 150 x 90 x 86

Weight (kg) 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85

Model Number FX3U-64MR/DS FX3U-64MR/ES FX3U-64MT/DSS FX3U-64MT/DS FX3U-64MT/ESS FX3U-64MT/ES FX3U-64MR/UA1 FX3U-64MS/ES
Stocked Item S S S S S S S S
Integrated Inputs/Outputs 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64
Power Supply 24VDC 100-240VAC 24VDC 24VDC 100-240VAC 100-240VAC 100-240VAC 100-240VAC
Integrated Inputs 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
Integrated Outputs 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
Transistor Transistor
Output Type Relay Relay Transistor (Sink) Transistor (Sink) Relay Triac
(Source) (Source)
Power Consumption (W) 40 45 40 40 45 45 45 45
Weight (kg) 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 220 x 90 x 86 220 x 90 x 86 220 x 90 x 86 220 x 90 x 86 220 x 90 x 86 220 x 90 x 86 285 x 90 x 86 220 x 90 x 86
162
Stocked Item - S - S S S
Weight (kg) 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2

Model Number FX3U-128MR/ES FX3U-128MT/ESS FX3U-128MT/ES
Stocked Item S - -
Integrated Inputs/Outputs 128 128 128
Power Supply 100-240VAC 100-240VAC 100-240VAC
Integrated Inputs 64 64 64
Integrated Outputs 64 64 64
Output Type Relay Transistor (Source) Transistor (Sink)
Power Consumption (W) 65 65 65
Weight (kg) 1.8 1.8 1.8
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 350 x 90 x 86 350 x 90 x 86 350 x 90 x 86
FX3UC
FX3UC Main Units with 16 - 96 I/O
FX3UC- FX3UC-16MT/ FX3UC-16MR/ FX3UC- FX3UC-32MT/ FX3UC- FX3UC-64MT/ FX3UC- FX3UC-96MT/
Model Number
16MT/D DSS DS-T 32MT/D DSS 64MT/D DSS 96MT/D DSS
Stocked Item - S S - S S - - S
UL • cUL • CE
Rating UL • cUL • CE (EMC) UL • cUL
(EMC)
Integrated Inputs/Outputs 16 16 16 32 32 64 64 96 96
Integrated Inputs 8 8 8 16 16 32 32 48 48
Input Type Sink Sink / Source Sink / Source Sink Sink / Source Sink Sink / Source Sink Sink / Source
Integrated Outputs 8 8 8 16 16 32 32 48 48
Transistor Transistor Transistor Transistor Transistor Transistor Transistor Transistor
Output Type Relay
(Sink) (Source) (Sink) (Source) (Sink) (Source) (Sink) (Source)
Power Consumption (W) 6 6 6 8 8 11 11 14 14
Weight (kg) 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.35 0.35
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 34 x 90 x 74 34 x 90 x 74 34 x 90 x 74 34 x 90 x 74 34 x 90 x 74 59.7 x 90 x 74 59.7 x 90 x 74 85.4 x 90 x 74 85.4 x 90 x 74

FX3G
FX3G Main Units with 14 I/O
Model Number FX3G-14MR/DS FX3G-14MR/ES FX3G-14MT/DSS FX3G-14MT/DS FX3G-14MT/ESS FX3G-14MT/ES
Power Supply (V) 24VDC 100-240VAC 24VDC 24VDC 100-240VAC 100-240VAC
Weight (kg) 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

Weight (kg) 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55

Weight (kg) 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7

Weight (kg) 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85
164
FX3GE
FX3GE Main Units with 24 I/O
Model Number FX3GE-24MR/ES
Stocked Item S
Integrated Inputs/Outputs 24
Integrated Inputs 100-240VAC
Input Type 14
Integrated Outputs 10
Output Type Relay
Power Consumption (W) 32
Weight (kg) 0.6
FX3GE Main Units with 40 I/O

Model Number FX3GE-40MR/ES
Stocked Item S
Integrated Inputs/Outputs 40
Integrated Inputs 100-240VAC
Input Type 24
Integrated Outputs 16
Output Type Relay
Weight (kg) 0.8
FX3S
FX3S Main Units with 10 - 14 I/O
Model Number FX3S-10MR/ES FX3S-10MT/ES FX3S-10MT/ESS FX3S-14MR/ES FX3S-14MT/ES FX3S-14MT/ESS
Power Supply (V) 100 - 240VAC 100 - 240VAC 100 - 240VAC 100 - 240VAC 100 - 240VAC 100 - 240VAC
Output Type Relay Transistor (Sink) Transistor (Source) Relay Transistor (Sink) Transistor (Source)
Weight (kg) 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 60 x 90 x 75 60 x 90 x75 60 x 90 x75 60 x 90 x75 60 x 90 x75 60 x 90 x75

Model Number FX3S-20MR/ES FX3S-20MT/ES FX3S-20MT/ESS FX3S-30MR/ES FX3S-30MT/ES FX3S-30MT/ESS
Power Supply (V) 100 - 240VAC 100 - 240VAC 100 - 240VAC 100 - 240VAC 100 - 240VAC 100 - 240VAC
Output Type Relay Transistor (Sink) Transistor (Source) Relay Transistor (Sink) Transistor (Source)
Weight (kg) 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.45 0.45 0.45
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 75 x 90 x 75 75 x 90 x75 75 x 90 x75 100 x 90 x75 100 x 90 x75 100 x 90 x75

FX1S
FX1S-10MR- FX1S-10MR- FX1S-10MT- FX1S-10MT- FX1S-14MR- FX1S-14MR- FX1S-14MT- FX1S-14MT-
Model Number FX1S-10MT FX1S-14MT
DS ES/UL DSS ESS/UL DS ES/UL DSS ESS/UL
Stocked Item - S S S - S S S S S
Rating UL • cUL • CE (EMC) UL • cUL UL • cUL • CE (EMC) UL • cUL
Integrated Inputs/Outputs 10 10 10 10 10 14 14 14 14 14
100 - 100 - 100 - 100 - 100 - 100 -
Power Supply 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC
240VAC 240VAC 240VAC 240VAC 240VAC 240VAC
Integrated Inputs 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8
Integrated Outputs 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 6 6 6
Transistor Transistor Transistor Transistor Transistor Transistor
Output Type Relay Relay Relay Relay
(Source) (Source) (Sink) (Source) (Source) (Sink)
Power Consumption (W) 6 19 6 19 19 6.5 19 6.5 19 19
Weight (kg) 0.22 0.3 0.22 0.3 0.3 0.22 0.3 0.22 0.3 0.3
Dimen. (W x H x D) mm 60 x 90 x 49 60 x 90 x 75 60 x 90 x 49 60 x 90 x 75 60 x 90 x 75 60 x 90 x 49 60 x 90 x 75 60 x 90 x 49 60 x 90 x 75 60 x 90 x 75

FX1S-20MR- FX1S-20MR- FX1S-20MT- FX1S-20MT- FX1S-30MR- FX1S-30MR- FX1S-30MT/ FX1S-30MT-
Model Number FX1S-20MT FX1S-30MT
DS ES/UL DSS ESS/UL DS ES/UL DSS ESS/UL
Stocked Item S S S S S S S S S S
Rating UL • cUL • CE (EMC) UL • cUL UL • cUL • CE (EMC) UL • cUL
Integrated Inputs/Outputs 20 20 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30
Power Supply 24VDC 100 - 240VAC 24VDC 100 - 240VAC 100 - 240VAC 24VDC 100 - 240VAC 24VDC 100 - 240VAC 100 - 240VAC
Integrated Inputs 12 12 12 12 12 16 16 16 16 16
Integrated Outputs 8 8 8 8 8 14 14 14 14 14
Transistor Transistor Transistor Transistor Transistor Transistor
Output Type Relay Relay Relay Relay
(Source) (Source) (Sink) (Source) (Source) (Sink)
Power Consumption (W) 7 20 7 20 20 8 21 8 21 21
Weight (kg) 0.3 0.4 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.35 0.45 0.35 0.45 0.45
Dimen. (W x H x D) mm 75 x 90 x 49 75 x 90 x 75 75 x 90 x 49 75 x 90 x 75 75 x 90 x 75 100 x 90 x 49 100 x 90 x 75 100 x 90 x 49 100 x 90 x 75 100 x 90 x 75
FX Input / Output Expansion Options
ï
BY0+BY0-BY1+BY1-
FX1N-2EYT-BD
Extension Boards
The FX1N Series extension boards are available for the FX1S main units and add 4 inputs or 2 outputs to the system
Model Number FX1N-4EX-BD FX1N-2EYT-BD
Stocked Item S S
Applicable PLCs FX1S FX1S
Integrated Inputs 4 2
Power Supply 5VDC (from main unit); 24VDC / 25 mA (S/S terminal) 5VDC (from main unit)
Integrated Outputs 4 -
Voltage 24VDC (+20% / -15%) -
Input Level
Current 5 mA (24VDC) -
Integrated Outputs - 2
Output Type - Transistor
Max. Switching Voltage - 5 - 30VDC
Weight (kg) 0.02 0.02
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 43 x 38.5 x 22 43 x 38.5 x 22
166
Powered Extension Units
The FX2N Series extension units are available with up to 48 integrated I/O with selectable relay or transistor
output models.
Model Number FX2N-32ER-ES/UL FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL FX2N-48ER-DS FX2N-48ER-ES/UL FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL
Stocked Item S S - S S
Rating UL • cUL • CE (EMC) CE UL • cUL • CE (EMC)
Applicable PLCs FX3U / FX3G / FX3GE
Integrated Inputs / Outputs 32 32 48 48 48
Power Supply AC Range (+10%, -15%) 100-240VAC 100-240VAC 24VDC 100-240VAC 100-240VAC
External Service Power Supply (24VDC) mA 250 250 - 460 -
Power Supply Int. Bus (5VDC) mA 690 690 690 690 690
Integrated Inputs 16 (24VDC) 16 (24VDC) 16 (24VDC) 16 (24VDC) 24 (120VDC)
Integrated Outputs 16 16 24 24 24
Output Type Relay Transistor (Source) Relay Relay Relay
ON Voltage (Max.) Relay version: < 264VAC, < 30VDC; Transistor version: 5 - 30VDC
Max. Output Per Output (A) 2 0.5 2 2 2
Current Per 4 Outputs (A) 8 0.8 8 8 8
Weight (kg) 0.65 0.65 0.85 0.85 1.0
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 150 x 90 x 87 150 x 90 x 87 182 x 90 x 87 182 x 90 x 87 220 x 90 x 87
Model Number FX2N-48ET FX2N-48ET-DSS FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL
Stocked Item - - -
Rating - CE UL • cUL • CE (EMC)
Applicable PLCs FX3U / FX3G / FX3GE
Integrated Inputs / Outputs 48 48 48
Power Supply 100-240VAC 24VDC 100-240VAC
External Service Power Supply (24VDC) mA 460 - 460
Power Supply Int. Bus (5VDC) mA 690 690 690
Integrated Inputs 24 (24VDC) 24 (24VDC) 24 (24VDC)
Output Type Transistor (Sink) Transistor (Source) Transistor (Source)
Max. Output Per Output (A) 0.5 0.5 0.5
Current Per 4 Outputs (A) 0.8 0.8 0.8
Weight (kg) 0.85 0.85 0.85
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 182 x 90 x 87 182 x 90 x 87 182 x 90 x 87
IN
Unpowered Extension Units

The FX2N Series 8 - 16 integrated I/O extension blocks are selectable with relay, transistor or triac outputs.
FX2N-8EYT-ESS/
Model Number FX2N-8ER-ES/UL FX2N-8EX-ES/UL FX2N-8EX-UA1/UL FX2N-8EYR-ES/UL FX2N-8EYT FX2N-8EY-S-ES/UL
UL
Stocked Item S S S S S S S
UL • cUL • CE
Rating UL • cUL • CE (EMC) UL • cUL - UL • cUL UL
(EMC)
Applicable PLCs FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G / FX3GE
Integrated Inputs / Outputs 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Power Supply All modular extension units are powered by the base unit
Integrated Inputs 4 (24VDC) 8 (24VDC) 8 (100-120VAC) - - - -
Integrated Outputs 4 - - 8 8 8 8
Output Type Relay - - Relay Transistor (Sink) Transistor (Source) Relay
Max. Per Output (A) 2 - - 2 0.5 0.5 2.0
Output Isolated
Current Per 4 Outputs (A) 8 - - 8 0.8 0.8
(commons)
5VDC Current Consumption (mA) 25 25 25 30 30 30 30
Weight (kg) 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.3
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 43 x 90 x 87 43 x 90 x 87 43 x 90 x 87 43 x 90 x 87 43 x 90 x 87 43 x 90 x 87 40 x 90 x 87

Model Number FX2N-16EX-ES/UL FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL FX2N-16EYS FX2N-16EYT FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL
Rating UL • cUL • CE (EMC) UL • cUL - UL • cUL
Applicable PLCs FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G / FX3GE
Integrated Inputs / Outputs 16 16 16 16 16
Integrated Inputs 16 (24VDC) - - - -
Integrated Outputs - 16 16 16 16
Output Type - Relay Triac (SSR) Transistor (Sink) Transistor (Source)
ON Voltage (Max.) Relay version: < 240VAC, < 30VDC; Transistor version: 5 - 30VDC; Triac version: 85 - 242VAC
Max. Per Output (A) - 2 0.3 0.5 0.5
Output
Current Per 4 Outputs (A) - 8 0.8 0.8 1.6
5VDC Current Consumption (mA) 45 40 160 180 180
Weight (kg) 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 40 x 90 x 87 40 x 90 x 87 40 x 90 x 87 40 x 90 x 87 40 x 90 x 87
FX2NC Unpowered Extension Units

The FX2NC Series extension blocks are available with 16 or 32 integrated I/O with selectable relay or transistor 16-output models.
Model Number FX2NC-16EX-DS FX2NC-16EX-T-DS FX2NC-16EYR-T-DS FX2NC-16EYT-D/UL FX2NC-16EYT-DSS FX2NC-32EX-DS FX2NC-32EYT-D/UL
Stocked Item S S S S S - -
UL • cUL • CE
Rating UL • cUL • CE (EMC) UL • cUL UL • cUL • CE UL • cUL
(EMC)
Applicable PLCs FX3UC
Integrated Inputs / Outputs 16 16 16 16 16 32 32
Integrated Inputs 16 16 - - - 32 (24VDC) -
Integrated Outputs - - 16 16 16 - 32
Output Type - - Relay Transistor (Sink) Transistor (Source) - Transistor (Sink)
Max. Per Output (A) - - 2 0.1 0.1 - 0.1
Output
Current Per 4 Outputs (A) - - 4 0.8 0.8 - 0.8
5VDC Current Consumption (mA) 30 30 50 30 50 60 100
Weight (kg) 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.2 0.2
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 14.6 x 90 x 87 20.2 x 90 x 89 24.2 x 90 x 89 14.6 x 90 x 87 14.6 x 90 x 87 26.2 x 90 x 87 26.2 x 90 x 87
FX Analog Options FX1N-8AV-BD
Analog Setpoint
The analog setpoint boards provide 8 analog setpoint potentiometers to the FX system. Setpoints can be
polled by the PLC and used as default values for timers, counters and data registers.
Model Number FX1N-8AV-BD FX3G-8AV-BD FX3U-8AV-BD
Stocked Item S S S
Rating CE (EMC)
Applicable PLCs FX1S FX3G / FX3GE / FX3S FX3U
Power Supply 5VDC from main unit
Analog Channels (Inputs) 8-bit 8-bit 8-bit
Related I/O Points 0 0 0
Weight 0.02 0.02 0.02
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 43 x 38.5 x 22 35 x 51 x 12 19.7 x 46.1 x 53.5
168
FX3U -4AD-ADP
POWER
Analog Input
24+
24-
V1+
I1+
Analog input modules can provide up to 8 analog inputs that are used to convert analog voltage or current
COM1
V2+
FX1N-2AD-BD
I2+
COM2
V3+
signals into digital values which can be used by the FX PLC.
I3+
COM3
V4+
I4+
COM4
Model Number FX1N-2AD-BD FX3G-2AD-BD FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-4AD FX3UC-4AD
Stocked Item S S S S -
Rating CE (EMC) UL • cUL • CE (EMC)
FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G / FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G /
Applicable PLCs FX1S FX3G / FX3GE / FX3S FX3UC
FX3GE / FX3S FX3GE
5VDC / 15 mA 5VDC / 110 mA 5VDC / 100 mA
Power Supply 5VDC (from main unit) 5VDC (from main unit) (from main unit) (from main unit) (from main unit)
Analog Channels (Input) 2 2 4 4 4
-10 to 10VDC / -20 to -10 to 10VDC / -20 to
Analog Range 0 to 10VDC / 4 - 20 mA 0 to 10VDC / 4 - 20 mA 0 to 10VDC / 4 - 20 mA
+20mA / 4 to 20 mA DC +20mA / 4 to 20 mA DC
Voltage 2.5 mV (12 bit) 2.5 mV 2.5 mV (12 bit) 0.32 mV (15 bit + sign) 0.32 mV (15 bit + sign)
Resolution
Current 8 µA (11 bit) 8 µA (11 bit) 10 µA (11 bit) 1.25 µA (14 bit + sign) 1.25 µA (14 bit + sign)
Overall Accuracy for Fullscale ±1% ±1% ±0.5% to 1% (*1) ±0.3 to 1% fullscale (*1) ±0.3 to 1% fullscale (*1)
Related I/O Points 0 0 0 8 8
Weight (kg) 0.02 0.02 0.1 0.2 0.13
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 43 x 38.5 x 22 35 x 51 x 29.2 17.6 x 90 x 89.5 55 x 90 x 87 20.2 x 90 x 89
Model Number FX2N-2AD FX2N-4AD FX2NC-4AD FX2N-8AD (*2)
FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G /
Applicable PLCs FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G / FX3GE FX3UC
FX3GE
5VDC / 20 mA
(from main unit)
Power Supply (from main unit) (from main unit) (from main unit)
24VDC / 50 mA
(from main unit)
Analog Channels (Input) 2 4 4 8
0 to 10VDC / 0 to 5VDC / -10 to 10VDC / -20 to -10 to 10VDC / -20 to -10 to 10VDC / -20 to
Analog Range
4 to 20mA DC 20mA DC / 4 to 20mA DC 20mA DC / 4 to 20mA DC 20mA DC / 4 to 20mA DC
Voltage 2.5 mV (12 bit) 5 mV (11 bit + sign) 0.32 mV (15 bit + sign) 0.63 mV (14 bit + sign)
Resolution
Current 4 µA (12 bit) 20 µA (10 bit + sign) 1.25 µA (14 bit + sign) 2.5 µA (13 bit + sign)
Overall Accuracy Voltage ±0.3% - 0.5% (*1)
±1% ±1% ±0.3 - 0.5% (*1)
for Fullscale Current ±0.5 - 1.0% (*1)
Related I/O Points 8 8 8 8
Weight (kg) 0.2 0.3 0.13 0.4
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 43 x 90 x 87 55 x 90 x 87 20.2 x 90 x 89 75 x 90 x 75
Notes:
1. Dependent on the ambient temperature.
2. The FX2N-8AD can be configured to accept standard analog inputs as well as selected temperature inputs such as K, T or J type thermocouples.

FX3U -4DA-ADP
POWER
24+
24-
V1+
Analog Output
I1+
COM1
FX1N-1DA-BD
V2+
I2+
COM2
Analog output modules provide up to 4 analog outputs that are used to convert digital values in the PLC
V3+
I3+
COM3
V4+
to voltage or current signals.
I4+
COM4
Model Number FX1N-1DA-BD FX3G-1DA-BD FX3U-4DA-ADP FX3U-4DA FX2N-2DA FX2N-4DA FX2NC-4DA
Stocked Item S S S S S S S
Rating CE (EMC) UL • cUL • CE (EMC)
FX3U / FX3UC / FX3U / FX3UC /
FX3G /FX3GE / FX3U / FX3UC / FX3U / FX3UC /
Applicable PLCs FX1S FX3G / FX3GE / FX3G / FX3GE / FX3UC
FX3S FX3G / FX3GE FX3G / FX3GE
FX3S FX3S
5VDC / 30 mA
5VDC / 15 mA 5VDC / 120 mA 5VDC / 30 mA 5VDC / 30 mA
5VDC 5VDC (from main unit)
Power Supply (from main unit) (from main unit) (from main unit) (from main unit)
(from main unit) (from main unit) 24VDC / 85 mA
24VDC / 150 mA 24VDC / 160 mA 24VDC / 200 mA 24VDC / 130 mA
(from main unit)
Analog Channels (Output) 1 1 4 4 2 4 4
-10 to 10VDC 0 to 10VDC / 0 to 10VDC / -10 to 10VDC /
0 to 10VDC / 0 to 10VDC / 0 to 10VDC /
Analog Output Range / 0 to 20mA / 0 to 5VDC / 0 to 20mA DC / 0 to 20mA DC /
4 to 20mA DC 4 to 20mA DC 4 to 20mA DC
4 to 20mA DC 4 to 20mA DC 4 to 20mA DC 4 to 20mA DC
0.32 mV 5 mV 5 mV
Voltage 2.5 mV (12 bit) 2.5 mV (12 bit) 2.5 mV (12 bit) 2.5 mV (14 bit)
(15 bit + sign) (11 bit + sign) (11 bit + sign)
Resolution
20 µA 20 µA
Current 8 µA (11 bit) 8 µA (11 bit) 4 µA (12 bit) 0.63 µA (15 bit) 4 µA (12 bit)
(10 bit + sign) (10 bit + sign)
Overall Accuracy for Fullscale ±1% ±1% ±5% - 1% (*1) ±0.3% - 0.5% (*1) ±1% (*1) ±1% (*1) ±0.5% -1% (*1)
Related I/O Points 0 0 0 8 8 8 8
Weight (kg) 0.02 0.02 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.13
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 43 x 38.5 x 22 35 x 51 x 29.2 17.6 x 90 x 89.5 55 x 90 x 87 43 x 90 x 87 55 x 90 x 87 24.2 x 90 x 89
Note: 1. Dependent on the ambient temperature.
Combination Analog Input / Output Modules FX2N -5A
Combination analog input / output modules are used for both digital to analog and 24 V
analog to digital conversion.

AD / DA
Model Number FX0N-3A* FX2N-5A* FX3U-3A-ADP

Stocked Item S S S
Rating CE (EMC) UL • cUL • CE (EMC) UL • cUL
Applicable PLCs FX3U / FX3UC FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G / FX3GE FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G / FX3GE / FX3S
5VDC / 30 mA (from main unit) 5VDC / 70 mA (from main unit) 5VDC / 20 mA (from main unit)
Power Supply
24VDC / 90 mA (from main unit) 24VDC / 90 mA 24VDC / 90 mA
Analog Input 2 4 2
Channels Output 1 1 1
-10 to 10 V (15 bit + sign)
Analog Voltage 0 to 10VDC (8 bit); 0 to 5VDC (8 bit) 0 to 10VDC (12 bit)
-100 to 100 mV (11 bit + sign)
Input Range
(Resolution) -20 to 20 mVDC (14 bit + sign)
Current 4 to 20 mA DC (8 bit) 4 to 20 mA DC (12 bit)
4 to 20 mA DC (14 bit)
Analog Voltage 0 to 10VDC (8 bit); 0 to 5VDC (8 bit) -10 to 10VDC (12 bit) 0 to 10VDC
Output Range
(Resolution) Current 4 to 20 mA DC (8 bit) 0/4 to 20 mA DC (10 bit) 4 to 20 mA DC
Overall Accuracy for Fullscale ±1% ±0.3 - 1% ±0.5 - 1%
Weight (kg) 0.2 0.3 0.1
Dimensions (W x H x D) (mm) 43 x 90 x 87 55 x 90 x 87 17.6 x 90 x 89.5
Note:
1. When attaching the FX0N-3A or FX2N-5A analog modules to an FX3UC main unit, the FX2NC-CNV-IF interface adapter or the FX3UC-1PS-5V power supply unit is required.
170
Temperature Input Options
The analog temperature input modules are used for J and K type thermocouple and Pt100 temperature sensor input and FX2N -4AD-TC
temperature control. 2 open collector transistor outputs are available with the FX2N-2LC, 4 with the FX3U-4LC. A/D
FX3U-4AD-PTW- FX3U-4AD-PT- FX3U-4AD-PNK- FX3U-4AD-TC-

Model Number FX2N-4AD-TC FX2N-4AD-PT FX2N-2LC FX3U-4LC
ADP ADP ADP ADP
Stocked Item - S - S S S S S
FX3G / FX3GE /
Applicable PLCs FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G / FX3GE / FX3S FX3U / FX3UC FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G / FX3GE
FX3U / FX3UC
5VDC / 70 mA 5VDC / 160 mA
5VDC / 15 mA 5VDC / 15 mA 5VDC / 15 mA 5VDC / 15 mA 5VDC / 40 mA 5VDC / 30 mA
(from main (from main
Power Supply (from main unit) (from main unit) (from main unit) (from main unit) (from main unit) (from main unit)
unit) 24VDC / unit) 24VDC /
24VDC / 50 mA 24VDC / 50 mA 24VDC / 50 mA 24VDC / 45 mA 24VDC / 60 mA 24VDC / 50 mA
55 mA 50 mA
2 points 4 points
4 (Pt1000 or 4 (Pt100 (Thermocouple (Thermocouple
Analog Inputs 4 (Pt100 sensors) 4 (Pt100 sensors) 4 (J or K type) 4 (J or K type)
Ni1000) sensors) and Pt100 and Pt100
sensor) sensor)
-50 to +250 -100 to +600
-100 to +600
Compensated Temperature (Pt1000) (J type)
-100 to +600 -50 to +250 (J type) -100 to -100 to +600 -200 to +1300 -200 to +1300
Range (°C) -40 to +110 -100 to +1000
+1200 (K type)
(Ni1000) (K type)
-500 to +2500 -1000 to +6000 -1000 to +6000
2 transistor 4 transistor
Digital Outputs -1000 to +6000 -500 to +2500 (Pt1000) -400 to (J type) -1000 to (J type) -1000 to -1000 to +6000
output points output points
+1100 (Ni1000) +10000 (K type) +12000 (K type)
0.3 (J type) 0.3 (J type)
Resolution (°C) 0.2 to 0.3 0.1 0.1 0.2 - 0.3 0.1 or 1 0.1 or 1
0.4 (K type) 0.4 (K type)
Overall Accuracy ±0.3% - 0.7% ±0.3% - 0.7%
±0.5% - 1% (*1) ±0.5% - 1% (*1) ±0.5% - 1% (*1) ±0.5% - 1% (*1) ±0.5% - 1% (*1) ±1.0%
for Fullscale (±1 digit) (*1) (±1 digit) (*1)
Related I/O Points 0 0 0 0 8 8 8 8
Weight 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.4
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 17.6 x 90 x 89.5 17.6 x 90 x 89.5 17.6 x 90 x 89.5 17.6 x 90 x 89.5 55 x 90 x 87 55 x 90 x 87 55 x 90 x 87 90 x 90 x 80
Note: 1. Dependent on the ambient temperature.
FX3U-4HSX-ADP
FX High-Speed I/O and Positioning Expansion POWER
X0/3 X2/5
X1/4 X6/7
+
X0/3
-
FX2N -1HC
+
X1/4
High-Speed Counters and Pulse Train Output
-
+
X2/5
-
+
X6/7
-
SG SG
These high-speed modules provide additional counting and pulse output features to the PLC.
Model Number FX2N-1HC FX2NC-1HC FX3U-2HC FX3U-4HSX-ADP FX3U-2HSY-ADP
Stocked Item S - S S S
Applicable PLCs FX3U / FX3UC FX3UC FX3U / FX3UC FX3U FX3U
Signal Level 5, 12, 24VDC / 7 mA 5VDC -
5VDC 90 mA (from main unit) 245 mA (from main unit) 30 mA (from main unit)
Power Supply
24VDC - - 30 mA (from main unit) 60 mA (from main unit)
Maximum Connectivity - - 2 2
1 phase (1 input or 2 input);
Inputs 4 -
Counter 2 phase (1 edge, 2 edge or 4 edge count)
Outputs - - 2
1 phase: 200kHz;
Max Counter Input 50 kHz 200 kHz -
2 phase: 100kHz
Frequency
Output - 200 kHz
Differential line receiver
(equivalent to AM26C32)
Input Format Differential line receiver and open collector -
photocoupler isolation on
inputs
Type of Counter Up / down counter, ring counter -
Differential line driver
(equivalent to AM26C32)
Output Format -
pulse/direction or forward/
reverse rotation)
Counting Range 16 Bit 0 to 65,535 -
(Up/Down and
Ring Counter) 32 Bit -2147483648 to +2147483647 -
4 x transistor
Output Type 2 x transistor (5 to 24VDC / 0.5A) - less than 25 mA
(5 to 24VDC / 0.5A)
4 (2 output points occupied
Related I/O Points 8 4 (4 input)
per high-speed output)
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 55 x 90 x 87 20.2 x 90 x 89 55 x 90 x 87 17.6 x 90 x 89.5 17.6 x 90 x 89.5

1-Axis Positioning START
DOG
X0
X1
POWER
ERROR
PGO
FP
The FX3U-1PG and FX2N-10PG positioning modules are extremely efficient single-axis positioning modules for
FX 2N-10PG ø RP
ø CLR
controlling either step drives or servo drives (by external regulator) with a pulse train.
Model Number FX3U-1PG FX2N-10PG
Stocked Item S S
Applicable PLCs FX3U / FX3UC
Input Signal Level 24VDC / 40 mA 5VDC / 100 mA; 24VDC / 70 mA
Pulse Output 5 to 24VDC / 35 mA 5 to 24VDC / 25 mA
Signal Level
CLR Signal 5 to 24VDC / 20 mA 5 to 24VDC / 20 mA
Power Supply 5VDC / 150 mA (from main unit) 5VDC / 120 mA (from main unit)
Accessible Axes 1 1
Output Frequency Max. 100 kHz Max. 1 MHz
Related I/O Points 8 8
Weight (kg) 0.2 0.2
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 43 x 90 x 87 43 x 90 x 87
Function Servo / stepper pulse control Advanced servo / stepper control
2-Axis Positioning
High-performance 2-axis positioning module featuring simultaneous and interpolated 2-axis positioning control. With its
dedicated setup, monitor and testing software, FX Configurator-FP, all aspects of the servo system can be controlled.
FX3U -20SSC-H
Model Number FX3U-20SSC-H
Stocked Item S
Number of Controllable Axes 2 axes
Related I/O 8
MELSERVO MR-J3-B/MR-J3W-B/MR-J3-BS maximum 2 amplifiers can be connected; Standard cord
Connectable Servo Amplifier
length: Station-to-station maximum 20m, Long distance cord length: Station-to-station maximum 50m
Servo Bus SSCNET III
Scan Cycle 1.77 ms
Method Increment / Absolute
User Units PLS, µm, 10-4 inch, mdeg
Unit Magnification 1, 10, 100, and 1,000-fold
Positioning Range -2,147,483,648 to -2,147,483,648 PLS
Positioning Speed Units Hz, cm/min, 10deg/min, inch/min
Acceleration / Trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration: 1 to 500 ms.
Deceleration Process Only trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration is available for interpolation
Starting Time 1.6 ms or less
Interpolation Function 2-axis linear interpolation, 2-axis circular interpolation
Power Supply 24VDC + 20% -15% Ripple (p-p) within 5%
Power Consumption 5W
Weight (kg) 0.3
Cam Switch
The FX2N-1RM-E-SET is often called an electronic cam module. It can be used to replace a mechanical camming
system with a virtual electronic cam sequence using a resolver module.
Model Number FX2N-1RM-E-SET
Stocked Item S
Rating CE (EMC)
Number of Controllable Axes 1 using resolver F2-720RSV
Maximum Connectivity 3
Number of Cam Output I/O 48 outputs (32 may be ON at one time)
Control Resolution 1 revolution of 720 divisions (0.5 degrees) or 360 divisions (1 degree)
Response 415 rpm with 0.5 degrees or 830 rpm with 1 degree
ON/OFF Frequency 8 times per CAM profile
Resolver 3000 rpm
Maximum Cable Length up to 100 m
Power Supply 24VDC (-15% to +10%); 300 mA (400 mA when 32 outputs are ON)
Related I/O Points 8 (*1)
Weight (kg) 0.5
Note 1: The number of related I/O points will always be 8, regardless of how many units are attached.
172
FX Communications and Networking Expansion
33
0
OP
EN
11
0
RD
SD
These communication expansion boards allow their respective FX main units to communicate with external
devices and other FX main units over a variety of serial networks.
FX3G-485-BD-
Model Number FX2N-232IF FX1N-232-BD FX1N-422-BD FX1N-485-BD FX3G-232-BD FX3U-USB-BD FX3G-422-BD FX3G-485-BD
RJ (*1)
Stocked Item S S S S S S S S S
Rating CE (EMC)
FX3G / FX3GE FX3G / FX3GE FX3G / FX3GE FX3G / FX3GE
Applicable PLCs FX3U / FX3UC FX1S FX1S FX1S FX3U
/ FX3S / FX3S / FX3S / FX1S
RS-232 with RS-232 with RS-422 with 8 RS-232 with RS-422 with 8 RS-485
RS-485 with
Interface 9-pole D-SUB 9 pole D-SUB pole mini DIN 9 pole D-SUB USB (Mini B) pole mini DIN RS-485 with RJ-45
terminal block
connector connector connector connector connector connector
5VDC / 40 mA 5VDC / 15mA
(from main 5VDC / 60 mA 5VDC / 60 mA 5VDC / 60 mA 5VDC (from main 5VDC 5VDC
5VDC (from
Power Supply unit), (from main (from main (from main (from main unit), 30mA (from main (from main
main unit)
24VDC / 80 unit) unit) unit) unit) (from PC USB unit) unit)
mA connectors)
Related I/O Points 8 - - - - - - - -
Weight (kg) 0.3 0.02 0.01 0.02 0.2 0.02 0.2 0.2 0.2
19.6 x 46.1 x
Dimensions (W x H x D) (mm) 55 x 90 x 87 43 x 38.5 x 22 43 x 38.5 x 20 43 x 38.5 x 22 35 x 51 x 17.2 35 x 51 x 14.9 35 x 51 x 29.2 35 x 51 x 29.2
53.5
Note 1: Available December, 2013
Modbus and Serial Communication Adapters

These communication special adapters support a wide range of serial communication standards including Modbus.
Model Number FX3U-485ADP-MB FX3U-232ADP-MB

FX3U -232ADP-MB
FX3U -485ADP-MB
POWER
POWER RD
RD SD
SD
Stocked Item S S 330

OPEN
110
RDA
RDB
SDA
FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G / FX3GE / FX3S
SDB
Applicable PLCs
SG
Power Supply 5VDC / 20 mA (from main unit) 5VDC / 30 mA (from main unit)
Interface RS-485 RS-232C
Communication Speed Max. 115.2 kbps Max. 115.2 kbps
Communication Distance 500m 15m
Weight (kg) 0.08 0.08
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 17.6 x 90 x 89.5 17.6 x 90 x 89.5
Networking Modules RUN

INIT.
100M
SD
RD
ERR.
COM.ERR.
Ethernet POWER
The FX3U-ENET communication module enables 8 ports of simultaneous Ethernet communication with features
such as peer-to-peer, email send/receive options, and program upload/download. (The FX2NC-ENET-ADP 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
C1
C2
C3
C4
communication special adapter is an Ethernet interface supporting 10BASE-T communication.)

C5
C6
C7
C8
Model Number FX3U-ENET FX3U-ENET-ADP FX2NC-ENET-ADP

Stocked Item S S S
Applicable PLCs FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G / FX3GE FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G / FX3S FX1S
Max. Data Transmission 1023 words x 8 1023 words x 4 16 words
Power Supply 24VDC / 240 mA Supplied from PLC Supplied from PLC
Communication Cable Ethernet with RJ45 connector Ethernet with RJ45 connector Ethernet with RJ45 connector
Communication Protocol MC Protocol, TCP / IP / UDP MC Protocol, TCP / IP / UDP -
Communication With Mail Server SMTP / POP3 - -
Maximum Transfer Rate 100 Mbps / 10 Mbps 100 Mbps / 10 Mbps -
Maximum Segment Length 100 m 100 m -
Weight (kg) 0.3 0.1 0.1
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 55 x 90 x 87 17.6 x 90 x 89.5 19 x 90 x 78

Profibus
PROFIBUS-DP allows for the implementation of decentralized control with comprehensive data and alarm
processing capabilities. Easy setup is available by using the GX Configurator-DP software package.
Model Number FX3U-64DP-M FX3U-32DP
Stocked Item S S
Applicable PLCs FX3U / FX3UC FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G / FX3GE
Master/Slave Master Slave
Power Supply Internal 24VDC / Max. 155 mA Internal 24VDC / 145 mA
Version V 1.0 connector V 1.0 connector
Communication Speed Max. 12 Mbps Max. 12 Mbps
Maximum Distance (*1) 1,200 m 1,200 m
Maximum Number of Slaves 64 / Master -
Communication Distance (m) Max. 1200m (depends on communication speed)
Communication Cable Profibus cable with Profibus-DP connector
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 43 x 90 x 89 43 x 90 x 89
Note:
1. Depends on communication speed.
CC-Link RUN RUN

ERR. ERR.
L RUN MST
L ERR. TEST 1
SD TEST 2
RD L RUN
CC-Link provides a deterministic network with communication speeds up to 10Mbps

L ERR.
CC-LINK
FX3U-64CCL FX2N-16CCL-M
Model Number FX2N-32CCL FX3U-64CCL FX3U-16CCL-M

SW
M/S
PRM
TIME
LINE
SD
RD
Stocked Item S S S
Rating CE (EMC) UL • cUL • CE (EMC) UL • cUL • CE (EMC)
Master/Slave Slave Intelligent device station (slave) Master (V2, V1)
FX3U / FX3UC. Cannot use with
Applicable PLCs FX2N-32ASI-M AS-i FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G / FX3GE FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G / FX3GE
interface master block
5VDC / 130 mA (from main unit)
Power Supply 24VDC / 220 mA 24VDC / N/A
24VDC / 50 mA
Version V 1.00 V 2.00 / V 1.10 V 2.00 / V 1.10
I/O Points 8 8 8
Weight 0.3 0.3 0.4
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 43 x 90 x 87 55 x 90 x 87 55 x 90 x 87
DeviceNet
Allows the FX system to be a Group 2 slave station on a DeviceNet network.
Model Number FX2N-64DNET
Stocked Item S
POWER
Rating UL • cUL • CE (EMC) FX2N-64DNET
Applicable PLCs FX3U / FX3UC /TO
Slave
MS
Master/Slave NS
Power Supply 5VDC / Max. 12 mA (from main unit) 24VDC / 50 mA

I/O Points 8
Weight 0.2
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 43 x 90 x 87
174
FX Interfaces and Power Supplies
FX2NC-CNV-IF
Interface Boards and Modules

The FX Series interface boards enable connection of special adapters to the left side of the associated FX main
unit. The FX2NC-CNV-IF interface adapter allows FX3UC main units to connect with the standard FX0N / FX2N /
FX3U right side expansion bus.
Model Number FX3U-CF-ADP FX3S-CNV-ADP FX3G-CNV-ADP FX3U-CNV-BD FX1N-CNV-BD FX2NC-CNV-IF
Rating CE (EMC)
Applicable PLCs FX3U / FX3UC FX3S FX3G FX3U FX1S FX3UC
Interface adapter
Analog and Analog and Analog and to connect with
CF Card special Function expansion
Description communication communication communication
adapter board standard FX0N /
special adapter special adaptor special adaptor
FX2N / FX3U
Weight (kg) 0.3 0.1 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.3
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 45 x 90 x 74 14.6 x 90 x 74 14.6 x 90 x 74 19.6 x 46.1 x 53.5 43 x 38 x 14 90 x 14.6 x 74
Power Supply Modules

The FX Series power supply units are used to add power onto the 5V and 24V expansion buses FX3UC-1PS-5V
when the built-in service power supplies are not sufficient.

POWER
Model Number FX3U-1PSU-5V FX3UC-1PS-5V FX3U -1PSU-5V
Stocked Item S -
Applicable PLCs FX3U / FX3G FX3UC
Input Voltage 100 - 240VAC 24VDC +20% - 15%
Input Frequency 50 / 60 Hz -
30A max. 5 ms or less / 100VAC
Inrush Current 30A max. 0.5 ms / 24VDC
65A max. 5 ms or less / 200VAC
Power Consumption 20 VA max. 25 W max.
Output Current (Internal 24VDC 0.3A -
for Supply) 5VDC 1A 1A
Holding Time 10 ms / 100VAC 5 ms
Weight (kg) 0.3 0.15
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 55 x 90 x 87 24.2 x 90 x 74
Power Supply Unit

The FX2N-20PSU 24VDC power supply unit is meant to provide a 24VDC power supply for DC MITSUBISHI
powered FX main units, FX special function modules, sensors connected to the FX main units, etc. POWER
FX2N-20PSU
Model Number FX2N-20PSU
Stocked Item S
Applicable PLCs FX1S / FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G / FX3GE
Ambient Temperature 0 - 55°C (-20 - 70°C storage temperature)
Ambient Relative Humidity
35 - 85% (35 - 90% storage humidity)
(Non-Condensing)
Input Voltage 100 - 240VAC
Input Frequency 50/60 Hz
Fuse Rating 3.15A (built-in)
Rush Current 60A / 200VAC max.
Output Power 24 DC ±10% / 2A maximum; 0.2A minimum
Ripple Noise 500 mVp-p or less
Holding Time 10 ms / 100VAC
Protection Against Overcurrent Actuated when current becomes 110 - 160% or more, automatic recovery when voltage drop occurs
Protection Against Overvoltage Actuated when current becomes 110-140% or more, output shutdown, no automatic recovery (diode clamp)
Weight (kg) 0.3

Accessories
Memory Cassettes
The Loader functionality allows the memory cassette to upload and download programs from and to the
internal memory of the FX main units. When the memory cassette is attached to the FX main unit without
uploading or downloading, the program on the memory cassette is executed. With the FX3U-FLROM-1M,
1.3MB of additional capacity is provided for symbolic information.
Model Number FX3U-FLROM-16 FX3U-FLROM-64 FX3U-FLROM-64L FX3U-FLROM-1M FX1N-EEPROM-8L FX3G-EEPROM-32L
Rating CE (EMC)
Applicable PLCs FX3U / FX3UC FX1S FX3G / FX3GE / FX3S
64k steps
Size 16k steps 64k steps 64k steps 2k / 8k steps 32k steps
+1.3MB Symbolic
Memory Type Flash Flash Flash Flash EEPROM EEPROM
Protect Switch Provided Provided Provided Provided Provided Provided
Data Transfer Buttons Not Provided Not Provided Provided Not Provided Provided Provided
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 37 x 20 x 6.1 37 x 20 x 6.1 37 x 20 x 6.1 37 x 20 x 6.1 33 x 30 x 9 35 X 21 X 9.6
Backup Batteries
Backup batteries provide enough power to store relevant data within the FX
main units and modules when they are not powered.
Model Number FX3U-32BL FX1N-BAT
Stocked Item S S
Applicable PLCs FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G / FX3GE FX1S
Interface Converter
Interface converter is necessary to bridge two different communication types.
Model Number FX-USB-AW FX-232AWC-H
Stocked Item S -
Rating CE (EMC)
FX1S / FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G / FX1S / FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G /
Applicable PLCs
FX3GE / FX3S FX3GE /FX3S
Applications USB to RS-422 converter RS-422 to RS-232C converter
Terminal Blocks
Remote terminal blocks allow I/O modules to be placed at the point of control. The blocks are connected
with FX3UC main units using connector-type I/O cabling.
Model Number FX-16E-TB FX-16E-TB/UL FX-16EX-A1-TB FX-16EX-A1-TB/UL FX-16EYR-ES-TB/UL
Stocked Item - S - - S
Rating - UL • cUL - - UL • cUL
Applicable PLCs FX3UC
Max. Number of Inputs/Outputs 16 16 16 16 16 output
Integrated Inputs (Sink) 16 (24VDC) 16 (24VDC) 16 (120VAC) 16 (120VAC) -
Integrated Outputs - - - - 16
Output Type - - - - Relay
Switching Voltage (Max.) - - - - 240VAC / 30VDC
Max. Output Per Output (A) - - - - 2
Current Per 4 Outputs (A) - - - - 8
Model Number FX-16EYS-ES-TB/UL FX16EYT-TB FX-16EYT-ES-TB/UL FX-16EYT-ESS-TB/UL FX-32E-TB/UL FX-TB40MIN
Stocked Item - - - - - S
Rating UL • cUL - UL • cUL -
Applicable PLCs FX3UC FX3U-2HC
Max. Number of Inputs/Outputs 16 output 16 16 output 16 output 32 40
Integrated Inputs (Sink) - - - - 32 (24VDC) -
Integrated Outputs 16 16 16 16 - -
Output Type Triac (SSR) Transistor (Sink) Transistor (Source) Transistor (Sink) - -
Switching Voltage (Max.) 242VAC 30VDC 30VDC 30VDC - -
Max. Output Per Output (A) 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.5 - -
Current Per 4 Outputs (A) 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 - -
176
Hand-Held Programmer
A small, industrial programming and maintenance tool for the FX Series. This unit can perform program
uploads/downloads and store up to 15 programs in its internal memory. Keywords can be registered,
deleted or canceled in applicable PLCs. Program monitoring and data device adjustment functionality is also
available. To stay up to date the latest firmware can be downloaded on a PC then installed via the USB port.
PLC programs on the PC can also be transferred via USB, eliminating the need for peripheral devices.
Model Number FX-30P
Stocked Item S
Rating UL • cUL • CE
Applicable PLCs FX1S / FX3U / FX3UC / FX3G / FX3GE / FX3S
Power Supply 5VDC / 155mA
Display / Characters LED / 21 x 8 characters
Display Modules
Display modules are attached to the front face of the main unit and enable monitoring and adjustment of PLC data services.
Model Number FX3G-5DM FX3U-7DM FX3U-7DM-HLD FX1N-5DM FX-10DM-E
Stocked Item S S S S S MITSUBISHI
Rating CE (EMC) CE (EMC) - CE (EMC) CE (EMC)

FX1S / FX3U / - + OK
ESC
Applicable PLCs FX3G FX3U FX3U FX1S

FX3UC
LCD LCD LCD LCD
Display -
(with backlight) (with backlight) (with backlight) (with backlight)
16 characters x 16 characters x 2 x 16 characters
Resolution - -
4 lines 4 lines (80 x 16 pixels)
5VDC ±5% / 5VDC ±5% /
Power Supply (From Main Unit) - 5VDC / 20 mA -
110 mA 220 mA
Extension Cable - - Included - -
Weight 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.02 0.02
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 49.4 X 39.4 X12 48 x 35 x 11.5 66.3 x 41.8 x 13 40 x 32 x 17 96 x 62 x 32
Connection Cables
The cables listed in the following tables are used for FX Series PLC programming,
positioning applications block connections and interface conversion.
Model Number F2-RS-5CAB FX-232CAB-1 SC09 GT09-C30USB-5P
Stocked Item - S S S
Application FX2N-1RM to resolver PC (RS-232) to GOT (RS-232) PC (RS-232) to PLC (RS-422) PC (USB) to PLC (Mini USB)
Length (m) 5.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
Connection Cables for FX3UC Remote Terminal Blocks

Model Number FX-16E-150CAB FX-16E-300CAB FX-16E-500CAB FX-16E-150CAB-R FX-16E-300CAB-R FX-16E-500CAB-R FX-40E-300CAB-R
Stocked Item S - - S S - S
Connection cable to FX-TB40MIN
Application FX3UC to remote FX terminal block
terminal block used with FX3U-4HC
Length (m) 1.5 3.0 5.0 1.5 3.0 5.0 3.0
Connection Cables for Extension Bus

Model Number FX0N-30EC FX0N-65EC FX2N-GM-65EC FX2N-GM-5EC
Stocked Item S S - -
Application PLC bus cable PLC bus cable GM bus cable GM bus cable
Length (m) 0.3 0.65 0.65 0.05
Connection Cables for FX3UC Main Units
Model Number FX2NC-100MPCB FX2NC-100BPCB FX2NC-10BPCB1
Stocked Item S - -
Power crossover cable for input
Application 24VDC power cable for main units 24VDC power cable for extension units
extension blocks
Length (m) 1 1 0.01

Sequence Controllers - Alpha2 Series
Controllable I/O: 14 - 28 points
Main Unit I/O: 14/24 points
The Alpha Class Programming

The Alpha2 is a controller designed to address simple control Graphical “function block” style programming with drag and
applications at the lower end of the industrial and commercial drop icons creates an intuitive environment for the user. The
control markets. With simple analog processing integrated, a programming software also includes a simulation mode to
straightforward programming style and a built-in display, the allow off-line program testing without any hardware connected
Alpha2 is a highly affordable control solution
Full Featured calendar and clock
• Integrated analog processing The Alpha family has a calendar and clock with automatic
• Simple programming style summer and winter time switching.
• Relay and Transistor output options Expansion
• Analog input and output options Four expansion boards are currently available 4 digital 24V
• High-speed counters up to 1 kHz DC inputs with two integrated counters, 4 digital 240V AC/DC
inputs, 4 relay outputs and 4 transistor outputs.
• Language support for 7 different languages
• Display area for messages and function block data Applications
• Built-in LCD screen for programming panel or operator The Alpha2 can be fitted to a range of lower end of the
interface functions industrial and commercial control markets. Typical applications
are listed below.
• Programming with Alpha VLS
• Lighting control
• Heating ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC)
Product Details • Lighting
All-in-one CPU, power supply, display and I/O. Expansion options
include expansion boards for communication, high-speed counting • Pump controllers
or extra I/O. • Building automation
• Alarms and security systems
Alpha Main Units

Model Number AL2-10MR-A AL2-10MR-D AL2-14MR-A AL2-14MR-D AL2-24MR-A AL2-24MR-D
Digital Inputs 6 6 8 8 15 15
Analog Inputs - 6 - 8 - 8
Channels - 6 - 8 - 8
Max. Power Consumption (W) 4.9 4.0 5.5 7.5 7.0 9.0
Typical Power All I/O (W) 3.5 / 1.85 240VAC 4.5 / 2.0 240VAC 5.5 / 2.5 240VAC
2.5/0.75 4.0 / 1.0 5.0 / 1.0
Consumption ON / OFF (W) 3.0 / 1.55 120VAC 3.5 / 1.5 120VAC 4.5 / 2.0 120VAC
Weight (kg) 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.35 0.3
Dimensions (W x D x H) mm 71.2 x 90 x 52 71.2 x 90 x 52 124.6 x 90 x 52 124.6 x 90 x 52 124.6 x 90 x 52 124.6 x 90 x 52
Environmental Specifications
General Specifications Alpha2
Ambient Temperature Display: -10 to 55°C, Hardware: -25 to 55°C (storage temperature: -30 to +70°C)
Protection Rating IP20
Noise Immunity 1000 Vpp with noise generator; 1µs at 30 - 100 Hz, tested by noise simulator
Dielectric Withstand Voltage 3750VAC, >1 min. according to EN60730
Allowable Relative Humidity 35 - 85% (no condensation)
Shock Resistance Complies to IEC 68-2-27: 147 m/s² acceleration, 11 ms 3 x 3 directions
Vibration Direct Mounting Complies to IEC-2-6: 19.6 m/s² acceleration, 80 min. in each direction
Resistance DIN Rail Mounting Complies to IEC-2-6: 9.8 m/s² acceleration, 80 min. in each direction
Insulation Resistance 500VDC, 7 MΩ Complies to EN60730-1
Ambient Conditions No corrosive gasses, no dust
178
Electrical Specifications
Power Supply DC Powered Models AC Powered Models
Output Specifications Alpha2
Specifications (AL2-_MR-D) (AL2-_MR-A)
24VDC 100-240VAC Type Relay
Power Supply
(+20% / -15%) (+10% / -15%), 50/60 Hz
Switching Voltage (Max.) 250VAC, 30VDC
Inrush Current at ON 7.0A (at 24VDC) 6.5A (at 240VAC)
10M, 14M: 8A/com
Allowable Momentary
5 ms 10 ms Rated Current 24M (001-004): 8A/com
Power Failure Time
24M (005-009): 2A/point
Digital Inputs
Max. Switching Load - 14M, 24M: 249 VA/250VAC, 373 VA/250
24VDC 100-240VAC Inductive Load 24M: 93 VA/125VAC, 93 VA/250VAC
Input Voltage
(+20% / -15%) (+10% / -15%), 50/60 Hz
Minimum Load 10mA, 5 V DC
Sink: 5.5mA, 24VDC I01-I08
AL2-10MR-D (I01 - I06) 0.13mA / 120VAC (*1) Response Time <10 ms
AL2-14MR-D/AL2-24MR-D 0.25mA / 240VAC (*1)
(I01 - I08/ I09 - I15)
I09 - I15
Source: 6.0mA, 24VDC 0.15mA / 120VAC (*1)
Input Current AL2-10MR-D (I01 - I06) 0.29mA / 240VAC (*1)
AL2-14MR-D/AL2-24MR-D
(I01 - I08)
Source: 5.5mA, 24VDC

AL2-14MR-D/AL2-24MR-D
(I09 - I15)
35-85 ms, 120VAC
OFF - ON 10 - 20 ms
Response 25-55 ms, 240VAC
Time 35-85 ms, 120VAC
ON - OFF 10 - 20 ms
50-130 ms, 240VAC
Analog Inputs 6 (10MR-D); 8 (14 & 24MR-D) -
Analog Input Range 0-500 -
Resolution 9 bit, (10 V/500) -
Conversion Speed 8 -
Input Voltage 0-10VDC -
Input Impedance 142 ±5% -
Accuracy ±5% (0.5VDC) -
Note:
1. Current leakage from sensors connected to the inputs might provide enough current to turn the
controller ON. Do not use 2-wire sensors.
Programming Specifications
System Specifications Alpha2
Programming Method Function block

Program Capacity 200 function blocks or 5000 bytes
Program Processing Cyclic processing of the stored program
Number of Available Instructions 38 different function blocks
Program Storage Integrated EEPROM and optional additional EEPROM cassette
At voltage loss the current status of values, running time meters, and real-time data are stored for up to 20 days
Data Storage
(at temperatures of 0 to 25 °C) using capacitors
Processing Time 1 ms + 20µs /logic instruction (complex commands 500/µs instruction)
Real-Time Clock Seconds, minutes, hours, day of week, month, year (4-digit); accuracy: 5 s / day; automatic daylight savings time adjustment
Program Protection 3 levels using program and keys

n PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS FX FAMILY V1- V2+ V2-
+ - V1+
Alpha Expansion Options

CH1 CH2
POWER 0~10V
24V DC OUTPUT
- V1+ I1+ VI1-

+
MITSUBISHI ANALOG
POWER OUTPUT
Expansion/adapter modules significantly increase the range of applications for the Alpha2.
24V DC
POWER
(Expansion modules are inserted directly into the Alpha2 and therefore do not take up any further CH1
450°C -50°C Line 450°C
CH2
-50°C Line
space. The AL-2TC-ADP and AL2-2PT-ADP adapters are connected externally to the AL2.) AL2-2TC-ADP
K-type Thermocouple
-50~450°C
ANALOG 2DA
CH2
CH1 OUTPUT
V2+ I2+ VI2-
SLD L2+ L2- SLD

L1+ L1-
Model Number Descriptions Stocked Item Rating
AL2-4EX* 4 digital inputs (24VDC) with 2 selectable high-speed counter (1kHZ) S

AL2-4EX-A2* 4 digital inputs (240VAC) S
AL2-4EYR* 4 relay outputs (2A) -
AL2-4EYT* 4 transistor outputs (1A) - UL • cUL • CE
AL2-2TC-ADP 2 Channel TC Input Adapter Module S
AL2-2PT-ADP 2 Channel PT Input Adapter Module S
AL2-2DA* 2 Channel Digital to Analog Expansion Module S
*AL2 Expansion Cassettes cannot be used with AL2-10M** controllers due to size constraints.
Alpha Memory Cassette

The memory cassette allows the memory cassette to upload and download programs from and to the
internal memory of the Alpha2. When the memory cassette is attached to the Alpha2 without uploading
or downloading, the program on the memory cassette is executed.
AL 2-E E P R O M
MADE IN J APAN
Model Number AL2-EEPROM-2
Stocked Item S
Rating -
Memory Type EEPROM
Memory Size 5000 bytes
Number of Program Steps 200 function blocks
Non-Volatile Storage Yes
Write Protection Yes
Alpha AS-i Interface

The AL2-ASI-BD in combination with an Alpha2 controller facilitates the data communications via an AS
ASI+ASI-
interface system. The AL2-ASI-BD is attached to an Alpha2 series module and forms a slave unit.
Model Number AL2-ASI-BD
Stocked Item S
Module Type Slave Module
Number of I/O Points 4 inputs; 4 outputs
External Power Supply 30.5VDC (AS-Interface power supply)
External Current Consumption Max. 40 mA
Communication Protocol AS-i standard
Weight 0.5
Dimensions 53.1 x 90 x 24.5
Alpha2 Interface Cables

The AL-232CAB is an RS-232C interface cable. It connects the Alpha2 controller to a personal computer
running the programming software for the Alpha2 controller. The AL2-GSM-CAB is an RS-232C interface
cable that enables the Alpha2 to connect to a GSM modem or other equipment including personal
computer, graphic operator terminal, or other serial devices.
AL-232CAB
Model Number AL-232CAB AL2-GSM-CAB
Stocked Item S S
Rating - -
Connector 9-pin D-SUB female connector 9-pin D-SUB male connector
Application Alpha2 to PC GSM modem or other serial communication
Length (m) 2.5 1.5
AL2-GSM-CAB
Note: The above cables cannot be used with the AL2-10MR-series.
180
Software
GX Works2
GX Works2, as part of iQ Works, is the next generation configuration and programming software for FX, L and iQ Platform / Q Series controllers.
Following the goal of maximum efficiency, GX Works2 allows developers to mix and match between five different programming languages,
each conforming to a different programming style. Developers can select their preferred language which is best suited for the application. This
environment conforms to IEC1131-3 standards, also allowing parts of projects to be saved in Libraries for use within future applications.
Type Model Number Description Stock Status Notes
GX-WORKS2-C1 Single User License of GX Works2 S
GX-WORKS2-C5 5 User License of GX Works2 S
GX-WORKS2-C10 10 User License of GX Works2 -
Software
These are the part numbers to use if a customer wants to purchase the GX Works2
programming software only, without the full iQ Works suite.
GX-WORKS2-OEM OEM Site License of GX Works2 -
GX-WORKS2-C1-SMA SMA for GX-Works2-C1 -
These are the part number to order an SMA for the GX Works2 part numbers.
SMA

Updates will be provided electronically.
GX-WORKS2-OEM-SMA OEM-SMA Site License of GX Works2 -
GX Works2 FX
GX Works2 FX is a scaled down version of GX Works2 supporting FX Series PLCs. GX Works2 FX is completely compatible with the full version
of GX Works2 making it easy to share programs between the two software packages (limited to FX PLC programs). Customers who already have
GX Works2 or iQ Works do not need GX Works2 FX as all the functionality in GX Works2 FX is available in those software products.
FX Configurator-EN, FX Configurator-FP, and helpful function blocks are included on the CD.
Type Model Number Description Stock Status Notes
GX-WORKS2-FX-C1 Single User License of GX Works2 FX S
GX-WORKS2-FX-C5 5 User License of GX Works2 FX -
GX-WORKS2-FX-C10 10 User License of GX Works2 FX - GX Works2 FX only supports FX Series PLCs. Customers using FX in addition to
Software
Q or L Series CPUs should select the full version of GX Works2 or iQ Works.

GX Works2 FX does not require an SMA, updates are available for all users for the
GX-WORKS2-FX-C50 50 User License of GX Works2 FX - entire life of the software.
GX-WORKS2-FX-OEM OEM Site License of GX Works2 FX -
USB and Serial Connection Options

Use the FX-USB-AW (USB option) and/or the GT09-C30USB-5P (USB), SC09 (RS-422), GT01-C30R2-9S (RS-232)
cables for programming controllers.
FX PLC Configuration Software

Model Number Description Stocked Item Applicable For
GX-CONFIG-DP-C1 Profibus configuration tool (FX3U-64DP-M) Single User License S Windows® 95/98/ME/NT/ 2000/XP/Vista/
GX-CONFIG-DP-C5 Profibus configuration tool (FX3U-64DP-M) 5 User License - Windows® 7 (32bit and 64bit)
Alpha Programming Software

AL-PCS/WIN is the standard programming and documentation software for all Alpha Series controllers and
provides an easy to use graphical programming environment. Program elements are placed on the function
block diagram with visible wires to connect them and the I/O terminals. Monitoring functions with optional
pictures of the use’s application in the background are also available.
Model Number AL-PCS/WIN
Series Alpha Series

Language 7 languages (English/German/French/Italian/Spanish/Swedish/Russian)
Applicable For Windows® 95/98/ME/NT/2000/XP/Vista/Windows 7 (32bit and 64bit)

182
Human Machine Interfaces
Human Machine Interfaces
Graphical Operation Terminals (GOT)
GT16 Advanced models

Machine, Factory, Enterprise Level
GT12 Standard models

Machine, Factory Level
SCREEN SIZE
GT14 Standard models

Machine, Factory Level
GT11 Handy models

Machine Level
GT10 Compact models

Machine Level
F UNCTIO N A LITY
Stock Product: Stock product is product MEAU makes every effort to have on hand for immediate shipment. There may be instances when we are out of stock
due to unexpected large requirements. All stock product will be indicated in this book by an “S” in the Stocked Item columns/rows.
Non-Stock Product: Non-stock product is product supplied on an “as-needed” basis. Standard lead times of 12 - 16 weeks apply, product is non-returnable
and non-cancelable. Product listed as non-stock may change to stock product subject to increases in sales and usage. All non-stock product will be indicated
in this book by a dash “-” in the Stocked Item columns/rows.
Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Human Machine Interfaces 183

n HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACES
GOT1000 Family
4 / GT12
Q172DLX
Q172DPX Q172DLX
Q172DPX Q173SXY Q173SXY Q173SXY
PLS. A PLS. B TREN PLS. A PLS. B TREN
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3
24VDC Q173SXY 24VDC Q173SXY 24VDC Q173SXY
NCIO PLCIO NCIO PLCIO NCIO PLCIO
Q172DLX Q172DLX
GT11 Handy GOT
GT16 Handy GOT
GT16H-CNB-42S
Controller Wiring of power supply, Connector Conversion Box
emergency stop switch, Handy GOT
operation switch, etc.
Communication with PLC, PLC connection cable GT16H-Coo-42P

temperature controller, External cable
inverter, servo amplifier, etc.
A. Base Units ..................................................................................................................................186

B. Communication Interfaces..........................................................................................................197
C. Options and Accessories ............................................................................................................197
D. Cables ........................................................................................................................................200
E. Screen Configuration Software and Programming Cable ...........................................................205
184
The GOT1000 Series of Graphical Operator Terminals is an all new ●● Motion Monitor - Access to Q-Motion CPU (Q172/3CPUs) parameters/
high performance line of panel mounted and pendant style touch monitoring data through special pre-programmed screens
screen displays. Models in this family combine high resolution TFT ●● Network Monitor - Direct access to CPU stations on Mitsubishi’s high-
(Thin Film Transistor) and STN (Super Twist Nematic) displays with speed networks (MNET10/II/B), CC-Link, CC-Link IE Field
Transparent Mode - Simultaneous communication of both HMI and
a wide assortment of sizes and resolution to cover 5.7 inch QVGA to
●●
Mitsubishi controller from a PC through serial or high-speed MELSEC Bus

15 inch XGA terminals. Terminals support a wide range of connection connections
types and vendors. GOT1000 terminals are conigured with a single ●● Ladder Monitor function requires additional memory expansion board
easy to use programming environment.
GOT1000 Terminal Features Include
GOT1000 Standard Hardware Features ●● Multi-Channel Connections: simultaneous communications to
●● Front panel mounted USB port several devices
●● Compact Flash expansion slot ●● Scripting functions allow terminals the ability to run aux codes
●● Embedded communications and option slots (RS-232 / 422 / 485 / Ethernet ●● Highly advanced alarm, messaging and recipe management
/ USB) (built-in communication ports for GT16, GT14, GT12, GT11_ _ and ●● Graphical trending and data sampling
Handy models) ●● Multi language (Unicode 2.1) and True Type font support
●● Built-in power supply (AC or 24VDC) ●● Multilevel security protection (device, screen, system and project levels)
●● Ultra-thin design for today’s compressed panel and installation space ●● Advanced data sharing and gateway functions (FTP, email,
requirements client/server functions)
●● Ultra-wide viewing angles combined with bright crystal clear ●● Printing and report generation
display characteristics ●● Supports time action/time scheduling
●● 64bit RISC processor combined with Mitsubishi Graphics Accelerator for ●● Supports graphics, text and numerical data
high-speed processing and lightning quick touch operations
and data crunching
Advanced GOT1000 Preventative Maintenance Features
●● Expandable project memory and upgradeable OS
●● UL and CE environmental ratings (GT16 Models Only)
oo
●● Built-in preventative maintenance allows users to monitor/schedule

convenient times to replace or service GOT terminals
Advanced GOT1000 Maintenance Features ●● Display Screen Monitor: Tracks total hours terminal has been in operation
(Supported by Mitsubishi Controllers Only) and number of touch presses
●● System Monitor - Direct access to devices in CPU ●● Backlight Monitor: Tracks total hours light has been in operation
●● Ladder Monitor (*1) - Direct access to CPU Logic ●● Compact Flash Monitor: Tracks removable media write access
●● Ladder and List Editor - Modify Logic without a PC
(supports A/AnS Series CPU) Note 1: Requires additional expansion memory.
●● Special Unit Monitor (*1) - Direct access to Special Function Modules
(SFM) and Buffer Memory (BFM) data locations through special pre-
programmed screens
Manuals
Model Number Manual Name Contents Included?
Specifications and operations of GT Designer 3 and screen editing methods for
SH(NA)080866 GT Designer 3 Version 1 Screen Design Manual
the novice GOT users
GT Designer 3 Version 1 Screen Design Manual Specifications and setting details of various object functions used in GT
SH(NA)080867
(Functions) Designer 3
Applicable system configurations and connection methods for GOT1000 series
SH(NA)080898 GOT1000 Connection Manual (Mitsubishi products ELE)
to Mitsubishi products
SH(NA)080869 GOT1000 Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi products 1)
to Non-Mitsubishi products
SH(NA)080870 GOT1000 Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi products 2)
to Non-Mitsubishi products
GOT1000 Connection Manual (microcomputer, MODBUS Applicable system configurations and connection methods for GOT1000 series
SH(NA)080871
product and peripheral) to Non-Mitsubishi products
JY997D39201 GOT1000 Connection Manual (Alpha2 connection)
to Alpha2 Controllers
Specification, system configurations and settings methods of the gateways
SH(NA)080858 GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual
functions
SH(NA)080859 GOT1000 MES Interface Function Manual Specification, system configurations and settings methods of the MES option
SH(NA)080860 GT SoftGOT1000 Operating Manual Screen configuration, functions and use for GT SoftGOT1000
SH(NA)080861 GT Simulator 3 Version 1 Operating Manual How to operate GT Converter 2
SH(NA)080862 GT Converter 3 Version 1 Operating Manual How to operate GT Simulator 2 Yes with software title
Advanced GOT1000 functions including Ladder Monitor, System Monitor, etc.
SH(NA)080863 GOT1000 User’s Manual (Extended Options Functions Manual )
(Sold separately)
GT16 hardware - relevant content such as part names, external dimensions,
SH(NA)080778 GT16 User’s Manual Stored in CD-ROM mounting, power supply wiring, specifications, and introduction to option
devices. (Sold separately)
JY997D44801 GT14 User’s Manual mounting, power supply wiring, specifications, and introduction to option
SH(NA)080864 GT12 Supplementary Description Stored in CD-ROM GT12 hardware and software functionality to the GT11 Series
IB(NA)0800448 GT12 General Description mounting, power supply wiring, specifications, and introduction to option
JY997D17501 GT11 User’s Manual Stored in CD-ROM mounting, power supply wiring, specifications, and introduction to option
JY997D20101 GT11 Handy hardware - relevant content such as part names, external dimen-
Handy GOT User’s Manual Stored in CD-ROM sions, mounting, power supply wiring, specifications, and introduction to
JY997D20102 option devices. (Sold separately)
JY997D24701 GT10 User’s Manual Stored in CD-ROM mounting, power supply wiring, specifications, and introduction to option

A. Base Units
GT169 5 - XTBA
Code Screen Size Code Display Colors Code Mounting Type Code Resolution Code Display Device Code Communication Interface
9 15" 5 256 or more V Applic. for Video/RGB XGA TFT Color
X With built-in bus connection interface
8 12.1" 2 16 colors None Panel mount type 1024 x 768 dots T high brightness,
wide viewing angle Q (*1) for QCPU ( mode) / motion controller
0 black & white HS Handy type SVGA CPU (Q Series)
7 10.4" S
6 8.4" Compatible with 800 x 600 dots N TFT Color With built-in bus connection interface
S STN Color A (*1) for QnA/ACPU/motion controller
5 5.7" M multimedia & VGA CPU (A Series)
Video/RGB V
640 x 480 dots STN monochrome
3 4.5" B E (*2) With built-in Ethernet
QVGA (blue/white)
2 3.7" Q 320 x 240 dots L STN Monochrome 2 (*3) With built-in RS-232
None (*3) With built-in RS-422
None 288 x 96 dots
160 x 64 dots 1. GT115 -Q BDQ and GT115 -
GT16 A variety of integrated functions, including Ethernet and multimedia Q BDA only
*For inquiries relating to products which
GT14 Standard 6˝ model with built-in Ethernet 2. GT14 only
conform to UL, cUL and CE directives,
Code Main Unit Frame 3. GT10 only
please contact your local sales office.
GT12 Standard model with built-in Ethernet B Black
GT11 Standard model with enhanced basic functions for standalone use W White Code GT10 Backlight
GT10 Compact model packed with the functionality necessary for a HMI W White Backlight
None Green Backlight
Code Power Supply

A 100 to 240VAC
D 24VDC
L 5VDC
General Specifications
Model Number GT16, GT14, GT12, GT11, GT10
Operating Display 0 to 50°C

Ambient Temp.
(*1) Other Than Display 0 to 55°C
Storage Ambient Temperature -20°C to 60°C
Operating Ambient Humidity (*2) 10 to 90%RH, no condensation
Storage Ambient Humidity (*2) 10 to 90%RH, no condensation
Frequency Acceleration Half Amplitude Sweep Count
5 to 9Hz - 3.5mm
Conforming to Under intermittent
Vibration Resistance (*3) JIS B 3502 and vibration 9 to 150Hz 9.8m/s² - 10 times in each
IEC 61131-2 of X, Y and Z
Under continuous 5 to 9Hz - 1.75mm directions
vibration 9 to 150Hz 4.9m/s² -
Impact Resistance Conforming to JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131-2 (147m/s², 3 times in each of X, Y and Z directions)
Operating Atmosphere No corrosive gas
Operating Altitude (*4) 2000m or less
Installation Location In control panel
Overvoltage Category (*5) II or lower
Contamination Level (*6) 2 or less
Cooling Method Self-cooling
Notes:
1. When an extension unit is mounted on the MELSECNET/H communication unit (GT15-J71LP23-25 or GT15-J71BR13) or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13), the operating ambient
temperatures are 5°C lower than the maximum temperatures shown in the general specifications table.
2. Water bulb temperature for STN display type must be 39°C or lower.
3. Refer to the Communication Unit User’s Manual for vibration resistance specifications when using the MELSECNET/10 communication unit (GT15-75J71LP23-Z or GT15-75J71BR13-Z) or CC-Link
communication unit (GT15-75J61BT13-Z). (The specifications of communication units are different from those of the GOT main unit.)
4. Do not operate or store the GOT unit in pressurized environments where the pressure exceeds the 0m elevation atmospheric pressure, as this could result in abnormal operation.
5. Assuming that the device is connected at some point between a public power distribution network and local system equipment. Category II applies to devices that are supplied with power from
fixed equipment. The surge withstand voltage is 2500V for devices with ratings up to 3000V.
6. Index that indicates the level of foreign conductive matter in the operating environment of device. Contamination level 2 denotes contamination by non-conductive matter only, though momentary
conductivity may occur due to occasional condensation.
186
GT16 - Base Units
Screen Size Display Colors Power Memory Remarks Stk.
Model Number Display
(Resolution) (Number of Colors) Supply Size Item
GT1695M-XTBA 100-240VAC S
15" TFT color LCD (high brightness,
GT1695 65,536 colors
1024 x 768 dots wide viewing angle)
GT1695M-XTBD 24VDC S
-
GT1685M-STBA 100-240VAC S
12.1" TFT color LCD (high brightness,
GT1685 65,536 colors
800 x 600 dots wide viewing angle)
GT1685M-STBD 24VDC S
15MB
10.4"
800 x 600 dots
TFT color LCD (high brightness,
65,536 colors -
wide viewing angle)
GT1675M-VTBA 100-240VAC S
10.4"
640 x 480 dots
GT1675M-VTBD 24VDC S
GT167_
GT1675-VNBA 100-240VAC - S
TFT color LCD 4,096 colors
GT1675-VNBD 24VDC - S
10.4"
11MB
640 x 480 dots
GT1672-VNBA 100-240VAC - S
TFT color LCD 16 colors
GT1672-VNBD 24VDC - S
8.4"
800 x 600 dots
65,536 colors 15MB -
wide viewing angle)
GT1665M-VTBA 100-240VAC S
8.4"
GT166_
640 x 480 dots
GT1665M-VTBD 24VDC S
GT1662-VNBA 100-240VAC 11MB - S

8.4"
TFT color LCD 16 colors
640 x 480 dots -
GT1662-VNBD 24VDC 11MB S
5.7" -
GT165_ GT1655-VTBD TFT color LCD 65,536 colors 24VDC 15MB S
640 x 480 dots
6.5" VGA TFT color LCD (high brightness,
Handy GT1665HS-VTBD 65,536 colors 24VDC 15MB - S
640 × 480 dots wide viewing angle)
GT14 - Base Units

Screen Size Display Colors Power Memory Remarks
Model Number Display Stk. Item
(Resolution) (Number of Colors) Supply Size
GT1455_ GT1455-QTBDE 65,536 colors S
5.7" QVGA wide viewing angle)
24VDC 9MB -
320 x 240 dots Monochrome (black/
GT1450_ GT1450-QLBDE STN monochrome LCD S
white) 16 gray scales

GT12 - GT11 - GT10 Base Units
Screen Size Display Colors Power Memory Stk.
Model Number Display Remarks
(Resolution) (Number of Colors) Supply Size Item
100 to
GT1275-VNBA 10.4" VGA - S
240VAC
640 x 480 dots
GT1275-VNBD 24VDC S
GT12
GT12_5 TFT color LCD 256 colors 6MB

100 to
GT1265-VNBA 8.4" VGA - S
240VAC
640 x 480 dots
GT1265-VNBD 24VDC S
GT1155HS-QSBD STN color LCD 256 colors - S

5.7” QVGA
GT11
Handy 24VDC 3MB

GOT 320 x 240 dots Monochrome (b/w)
GT1150HS-QLBD STN monochrome LCD - S
16 gray scales
GT1055-QSBD STN color LCD 256 colors S
5.7" QVGA
GT105_ Mono (blue/white) 24VDC 3MB -
GT1050-QBBD 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome LCD S
16 gray scales
GT1045-QSBD STN color LCD 256 colors - S
4.7" QVGA
GT104_ Mono (blue/white) 24VDC 3MB
GT1040-QBBD 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome LCD - S
16 gray scales
GT1030-HBD Dedicated to RS-422 connection S
GT1030-HBD2 3-color LED Dedicated to RS-232 connection S

(green,
GT1030-HWD orange, red) Dedicated to RS-422 connection -
GT1030-HWD2 Dedicated to RS-232 connection -

24VDC
GT1030-HBDW Mono- Dedicated to RS-422 connection -
4.5" chrome
GT1030 STN monochrome LCD 3-color LED 1.5MB
GT1030-HBDW2 288 x 96 dots (black/ Dedicated to RS-232 connection -
white) (white, pink,
GT1030-HWDW red) Dedicated to RS-422 connection -
GT1030-HWDW2 Dedicated to RS-232 connection -

green, orange,
GT1030-HBL Dedicated to RS-422 FX connection S
GT10
red
5VDC
green, orange,
GT1030-HWL Dedicated to RS-422 FX connection -
red
GT1020-LBD Dedicated to RS-422 connection S
24VDC
GT1020-LBD2 Dedicated to RS-232 connection S
GT1020-LBL 3-color LED 5VDC Dedicated to RS-422 FX connection S

(green,
GT1020-LWD orange, red) 24VDC Dedicated to RS-422 FX connection -
GT1020-LWD2 24VDC Dedicated to RS-232 connection -

Mono-
GT1020-LWL 3.7" chrome 5VDC Dedicated to RS-422 FX connection -
GT1020 STN monochrome LCD 512KB
GT1020-LBDW 160 x 64 dots (black/ Dedicated to RS-422 connection -
white) 24VDC
GT1020-LBDW2 Dedicated to RS-232 connection -
GT1020-LBLW 3-color LED 5VDC Dedicated to RS-422 FX connection -

(white, pink,
GT1020-LWDW red) 24VDC Dedicated to RS-422 FX connection -
GT1020-LWDW2 24VDC Dedicated to RS-232 connection -
GT1020-LWLW 5VDC Dedicated to RS-422 FX connection -
188
GT16 Power Supply Specifications
GT1675M-STBA GT1675M-STBD
GT1675M-VTBA GT1675M-VTBD
GT1675-VNBA GT1675-VNBD
GT1695M-XTBA GT1685M- GT1695M- GT1685M- GT1665HS-
Model Number GT1672-VNBA GT1672-VNBD GT1655-VTBD
STBA XTBD STBD VTBD
GT1665M-STBA GT1665M-STBD
GT1665M-VTBA GT1665M-VTBD
GT1662-VNBA GT1662-VNBD
24VDC 24VDC (+25%,
Input Power Supply Voltage 100 to 240VAC (+10%, -15%) 24VDC (+25%, -20%)
(+10%, -15%) -20%)
Input Frequency 50/60Hz ±5% - -
150VA (at max. 110VA (at 100VA (at max. -
Input Maximum Voltampere -
load) max. load) load)
Power Consumption 64W or less 46W or less 39W or less 60W or less 40W or less 38W or less 11.6W or less 16W
Power Consumption W/ Backlight Off 38W or less 32W or less 30W or less 30W or less 26W or less 27W or less 8.2W or less 14W
12A or less 30A or less
67A or less (1ms,
Inrush Current 28A or less (4ms, at max. load) (75ms, at max. 12A or less (55ms, at max. load) (2ms, at max.
at max. load)
load) load)
Permissible Instant. Failure Time Within 20ms (100VAC or more) Within 10ms Within 5ms Within 10ms
Noise voltage
Noise voltage
1000Vp-p,
500Vp-p, noise
noise width
width 1µs by
Noise voltage 1500Vp-p, noise width 1µs by noise Noise voltage 500Vp-p, noise width 1µs by noise 1ms by noise
Noise Resistance noise simulator
simulator with noise frequency 25 to 60Hz simulator with noise frequency 25 to 60Hz simulator
with noise
with noise
frequency 25 to
frequency 30
60Hz
to 100Hz
1500VAC for 1 minute between power supply
Withstand Voltage 500VDC for 1 minute between power supply terminal and ground
terminal and ground for 1 minute
Insulation Resistance 10MΩ or higher with an insulation resistance tester (500VDC between power supply terminal and ground)
Applicable Wire Size 0.75 to 2 [mm²] (*1)
Clamp Terminal Clamp terminals for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A (*1)
Tightening Torque (Terminal Block’s 0.5 to 0.8 [N·m] (*1)
Terminal Screws)
Note:
1. Excluding GT1665HS

Model Number GT1450-QLBDE GT1455-QTBDE
Input Power Supply Voltage 24VDC (+10% -15%), ripple voltage 200mV or less
Fuse (Built-in, Irreplaceable) 1.6A
Power Consumption 8.40W (350mA/24V) 8.40W (350mA/24V)

Power
Consumption
With Backlight Off 7.44W (310mA/24V) 7.44W (310mA/24V)
Inrush Current 30A or less (26.4VDC) 2ms
Permissible Instantaneous Failure Time Within 5ms
Noise Resistance Noise voltage: 1000Vp-p, Noise width: 1μs (by noise simulator of 30 to 100Hz noise frequency)
Withstand Voltage 500VAC for 1 minute (across power supply terminals and earth)
Insulation Resistance 10MΩ or higher with an insulation resistance tester (across power supply terminals and earth)
Applicable Wire Size 0.75 [mm²] or more for power supply, 2 [mm²] or more for grounding
Applicable Solderless Terminal Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A

GT16 Performance Specifications
GT1695M-XTBA GT1685M-STBA GT1675M-STBA GT1675M-VTBA GT1675-VNBA GT1672-VNBA
Model Number GT1695M-XTBD GT1685M-STBD GT1675M-STBD GT1675M-VTBD GT1675-VNBD GT1672-VNBD
Type TFT color LCD (high-brightness, wide viewing angle) TFT color LCD
Screen Size 15" 12.1" 10.4"
Resolution (Dots) 1024 x 768 XGA 800 x 600 SVGA 640 x 480 VGA
Display Size (W x H) mm 304.1 x 228.1 246 x 184.5 211 x 158
16-dot standard font: 64

Number of Displayed chars. x 48 lines (2-byte) 16-dot standard font: 50 chars. x 37 lines (2-byte) 16-dot standard font: 40 chars. x 30 lines (2-byte)
Display (1*)
Characters 12-dot standard font: 85 12-dot standard font: 66 chars. x 50 lines (2-byte) 12-dot standard font: 53 chars. x 40 lines (2-byte)
chars. x 64 lines (2-byte)
Display Colors 65,536 4,096 colors 16 colors

Right/left: 75°, Up: 50°, Right/left: 80°, Up:
View Angle (*2) Up/down/right/left: 88° Right/left: 45°, Up: 30°, Down: 20°
Down: 60° 60°, Down: 80°
Intensity (cd/m²) 450 470 400 450 200
Intensity Adjustment 8-step adjustment 4-step adjustment
Approx. 52,000 hours Approx. 43,000 hours Approx. 52,000 hours
Life
(operating ambient temperature: 25°C) (operating ambient temperature: 25°C) (operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
Backlight
Backlight Cold-cathode fluorescent tube (replaceable), with backlight OFF detection function. Backlight off time and screen save time can be set.
Life (*3) Approx. 50,000 hours or more (Time for display intensity reaches 50% at operating ambient temperature of 25°C)
Type Analog resistive type
Touch Panel
Key Size (Dots) Min. 2 x 2 (per key)

(*10)
No. of Simultaneous Simultaneous touch prohibited (*4) (1 point only)

Touch Pts.
Life 1,000,000 times or more (operating force 0.98N or less)
Detection Distance (m) 1 -
Human Sensor
Detection Range Right/left/up/down: 70° -

Detection Delay Time 0 to 4 -
(Sec)
Temperature difference between human body and
Detection Temperature -
ambient air: 4°C or higher
Memory
C Drive 15MB built-in flash memory (for saving project data, extended function OS/optional function OS) 11MB built-in flash memory
(*5)
Life (No. Of Writings) 100,000 times

Battery GT15-BAT type lithium battery (optional)
Battery
Backed Up Data Clock data and maintenance time notification data, system log data
Life Approx. 5 years (operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
RS-232, 1ch. Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800 bps; Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male); Application: Communication
RS-232 (*7)
with connected devices, connection to personal computer; (project data upload/download, OS installation, FA transparent function)
RS-422/485, 1ch. Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800 bps; Connector shape: 14-pin (female); Application:
RS-422/485
Communication with a controller
Built-in Interface
Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 1 ch.; Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack); Application: Communication with a controller, using the
Ethernet
gateway function, or connection to personal computer; (project data upload/download, OS installation, MES interface function) (*8)
USB (full speed: 12 Mbps), host 1ch.; Connector shape: TYPE-AApplication: Data transfer, data storage
USB USB (full speed: 12 Mbps), device 1ch. Connector shape: TYPE Mini-B; Application: Connection to personal computer (project data upload/
download, OS installation, FA transparent function)
CF Card Compact flash slot, 1ch. Connector shape: TYPE I Application: Data transfer and storage, GOT start-up
Optional Function Board 1ch for optional function board installation
Extension Unit (*7) 2ch for communication unit/optional unit installation
Buzzer Output Single tone (tone length adjustable)
Protective Construction Outside the enclosure: IP67 Inside the enclosure: IP2X (*6)
External Dimensions (Without 397 x 296 x 61 316 x 242 x 52 303 x 214 x 49
USB Port Cover) (W x H x D) mm
Panel Cut Dimens (W x H) mm 383.5 x 282.5 302 x 228 289 x 200
Weight (Excluding Mounting 5.0 2.7 2.1 2.3
Brackets) (kg)
Application Software Package GT Works3 Version1.17T or later
Notes:
1. On LCD screens, bright dots (permanently lit) and black dots (not to be lit) generally appear. Because the large number of display elements exist on an LCD screen, it is not possible to reduce appearance of the
bright and black dots to zero. Note that the existence of bright and black dots is a standard characteristic of LCDscreens, and it does not mean that the products are defective or damaged.
2. LCD panels have characteristics of tone reversal. Note that even within the indicated view angles, the screen display may not be clear enough depending on the display color.
3. Using the GOT screen save/backlight OFF functions prevents screen burn-in and extends backlight life.
4. An analog resistive touch display is used. When 2 points on the screen are touched simultaneously, if a switch is located the middle of the 2 points then the switch will be activated. Therefore, avoid touching 2
points on the screen simultaneously.
5. The memory is ROM that permits overwriting of new data without having to delete the existing data.
6. With the USB environmentally protective cover is on, pressing firmly the portion marked “[“ makes it conform to IP67f (JEM1030). (The USB interface conforms to IP2X (JEM1030) when a USB cable or a USB
memory is connected.) However, this does not guarantee protection in all users’ environments. The unit may not be used in an environment where it is exposed to splashing oil or chemicals for a long time or it
is soaked with oil mist.
7. Where more than one extension unit, barcode reader, and RFID controller are used, the sum of their current consumptions should be within the current level which the GOT can supply. For the currents which the
extension units, barcode reader, and RFID controller consume and the current level which the GOT can supply, see “Notes for use” (page 67).
8. The function version A of GT1695/GT1685 is not compatible with 10BASE-T.
9. The degree of protection is not guaranteed under all users’ environmental conditions. If the interface protective cover or the rear face protective cover is removed, the specification does not apply.
10. If necessary, use a stylus pen meeting the following specifications. (excluding GT1665HS) • Material: Polyacetal resin • Pen point radius: 0.8mm or more
190
GT1665M-STBA GT1665M-VTBA GT1662-VNBA
Model Number GT1655-VTBD GT1665HS-VTBD
GT1665M-STBD GT1665M-VTBD GT1662-VNBD
Type TFT color LCD (high-brightness, wide viewing angle) TFT color LCD TFT color LCD (high-brightness, wide viewing angle)
Screen Size 8.4˝ 5.7˝ 6.5˝
Resolution SVGA: 800 x 600 VGA: 640 × 480 VGA: 640 x 480
Display Size (W x H) mm 171 x 128 115 x 86 132.5 x 99.4
16-dot standard font: 50

Number of Displayed chars. × 37 lines (2-byte) 16-dot standard font: 40 chars. × 30 lines (2-byte)
Display (*1)
Characters 12-dot standard font: 66 12-dot standard font: 53 chars. × 40 lines (2-byte)
chars. × 50 lines (2-byte)
Display Colors 65,536 16 colors 65,535 65,536
Right/left: 45°, Up/Down: Right/left: 80°, Up: 60°,
View Angle (*2) Right/left: 80°, Up: 80°, Down: 60° Up, Down: 80°
20° Down: 80°
Intensity (cd/m²) 450 470 400 350 450
Intensity Adjustment 8-step adjustment 4-step adjustment 8-step adjustment
Approx. 52,000 hours Approx. 50,000 hours Approx. 41,000 hours
Approx. 43,000 hours
Life (operating ambient (operating ambient (operating ambient
(operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
temperature: 25°C) temperature: 25°C) temperature: 25°C)
Cold-cathode fluorescent tube (replaceable), with backlight OFF detection function.
Backlight LED Backlight off time and screen save time can be set.
Backlight
Backlight off time and screen save time can be set.

Approx. 50,000 hours or more Approx. 40,000 hours or more Approx. 70,000 hours or more Approx. 41,000 hours or more
Life (*3)
(Time for display intensity reaches 50% at operating ambient temperature of 25°C)
Touch Panel

(*10)
No. of Simultaneous Simultaneous touch prohibited (*4) (1 point only)

Touch Pts.
Detection Distance (m) -
Detection Range -
Human
Sensor
Detection Delay Time -

(Sec)
Detection Temperature -
15MB built-in flash memory 11MB built-in flash memory 15MB built-in flash memory
Memory
C Drive
(*5)
For saving project data, extended function OS/optional function OS

Life (No. Of Writings) 100,000 times
Battery GT15-BAT type lithium battery (optional)
Battery
Backed Up Data Clock data, maintenance time notification data, system log data and SRAM user area (500KB)
RS-232, RS-422/485, 1ch,
RS-232, 1ch. Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800 bps; Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin each (When using, select
RS-232 (*7) (male); Application: Communication with connected devices, connection to personal computer; (project data upload/ one of the channels.)
download, OS installation, FA transparent function) Transmission speed:
115200/57600/ 38400/
19200/9600/4800bps
Connector shape: Square,
RS-422/485, 1ch. Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800 bps; Connector shape: 14-pin 42-pin (male) Application:
RS-422/485
(female); Application: Communication with a controller Communication with
connected devices
Data transfer system:
Built-in Interface
100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T,
1ch; Connector shape:
Square, 42-pin (male)
Data transfer system: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T, 1ch; Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack); Application: Application: Communication
Ethernet Communication with connected devices, gateway function, connection to personal computer (project data upload/ with connected devices,
download, OS installation, MES interface function) gateway function,
connection to personal
computer (project data
upload/download, OS
installation)
USB (full-speed 12Mbps), host 1ch Connector shape: TYPE-A; Application: Data transfer and storage
USB USB (full-speed 12Mbps), device 1ch Connecter shape: TYPE Mini-B; Application: Connection to personal computer (project data upload/down-
load, OS installation, FA transparent function)
CF Card Compact flash slot, 1ch Connector shape: TYPE 1; Application: Data transfer, data storage, GOT startup
Optional Function Board 1ch for optional function board installation
Extension Unit (*7) 2ch for communication unit/optional unit installation
JEM1030 IP65f (when
Protective Construction JEM1030 Front: IP67f In panel: IP2X (*6) external connecting cable is
fitted) (*9)
External Dimensions (Without 241 x 190 x 52 167 x 135 x 60 201 x 30 x 97
USB Port Cover) (W x H x D) mm
Panel Cut Dimen (W x H) mm 227 x 176 155 x 121 -
Weight (Excluding Mounting 1.7 1.8 1.0 1.2
Brackets) (kg)
GT Works3 Version 1.17T
Application Software Package GT Works3 Version 1.17T or later GT Works3 V 1.26C or later
or later
Notes: See previous page.

Model Number GT1455-QTBDE GT1450-QLBDE
Type TFT color LCD Monochrome (black/white) LCD

Screen Size 5.7”
Resolution (Dots) 320 x 240 dots
Display Size (W x H) mm (in) 115 x 86 (4.53 x 3.39) (Horizontal format)
Number of Displayed 16-dot standard font: 20 characters 15 lines (Horizontal format)
12-dot standard font: 26 characters 20 lines (Horizontal format)
Display
Characters
Display Colors 65536 colors Monochrome (black/white) 16 scales
View Angle (*5) Left/Right: 80°, Top: 80°, Bottom: 60° (Horizontal format) Left/Right: 45°, Top: 20°, Bottom: 40° (Horizontal format)
Contrast Adjustment - 32-level adjustment
Intensity of Liquid Crystal 400 [cd/m2] 300 [cd/m2]
Display Only
Intensity Adjustment 8-level adjustment
Life Approx. 50,000h. (Time for contrast to become 1/5 at operating ambient temperature of 25°)
Backlight
Backlight LED type (irreplaceable) Backlight off/screen saving time can be set.(*3)
Life (*1) Approx. 70,000h or longer. (Time for display intensity reaches 50% at operating ambient temperature of 25°C)
Type Analog resistive film
Touch Panel
Key Size (Dots) Minimum 2 x 2 dots (per key)

No. Of Simultaneous Simultaneous presses not allowed. (Only 1 point can be touched)
Touch Points
Life 1 million times (operating force 0.98N max.)
Battery Memory
C Drive Built-in flash memory, 9 Mb (for storing project data and OS), Life (Number of write times): 100,000 times
(*3)
D Drive SRAM (internal), 512 kB (battery backup)

Battery GT11-50BAT lithium battery
Backed Up Data Clock data, alarm history, recipe data, time action setting value, advanced alarm, advanced recipe, logging, hard copy and SRAM user area
Life Approx. 5 years (Operating ambient temperature of 25°C)
RS-422/485, 1ch; Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps; Connector shape: D-Sub 9pin (Female); Application: For
RS-422/485 communicating with a controller; Terminating resistor: Open/110 /330 (Switched by terminating resistor selector switch)(*6) (At factory shipment: 330)
RS-232, 1ch; Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800bps; Connector shape: D-Sub 9pin (Male); Application: For communicating
Built-in Interface
RS-232 with a controller, connecting a bar code reader/RFID, connecting a PC (project data upload/download, OS installation, FA transparent function)
Ethernet (Only for Models Data transfer method: 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T, 1ch; Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular jack); Application: For communicating with a controller,
Equipped with Ethernet) using the gateway function, connecting a PC (project data upload/download, OS installation, FA transparent function)
USB (Full Speed 12Mbps), Host, 1ch; Connector shape: TYPE-A; Application: For transferring data, storing data
USB USB (Full Speed 12Mbps), device, 1ch; Connector shape: Mini-B; Application: For connecting a PC (project data upload/download,
OS installation, FA transparent function)
SD standard, 1ch; Supported memory card: SDHC memory card, SD memory card; Application: For uploading/downloading project data,
SD Card
OS installation, storing logging data
Protective Construction (*7) IP67f (front section of the panel only)
External Dims. (Without USB Port 164 x 135 x 55 (6.46 x 5.32 x 2.17)
Cover) (W x H x D) mm (in)
Panel Cut Dimensions (W x H) mm 153 x 121
Weight (Excluding Mounting Approx. 0.7 (Excluding mounting fixtures)
Brackets) (kg)
Compatible Software Package GT Simulator2 Version 2.58L or later
(GT Designer3 Version)
Notes:
1. Bright dots (always lit) and dark dots (unlit) may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics. It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom, as the liquid crystal display comprises of a
great number of display elements. Flickers may be observed depending on the display color. Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect. Flickers and partial
discoloration may be generated on the liquid crystal display panel due to the display contents or the contrast adjustment. However, please note that these phenomena appear due to its characteristic and are
not caused by product defect. There is a difference in the display brightness and the color tones between liquid crystal display panels. When using multiple liquid crystal display panels, please note that there is
an individual difference between them. A crosstalk (shadow as an extension of the display) may appear on the liquid crystal display panel. Please note that it appears due to its characteristic. When the display
section is seen from the outside of the display angle, the display color seems like it has changed. Please note that it appears due to its characteristic. Especially, the response time of a STN liquid crystal display
is slower in the lower temperature due to its characteristic. Please use the display after checking the response time. Please note that the response time, brightness and color of the liquid crystal display panel
may vary depending on the usage environmental temperature. When the same screen is displayed for a long time, an incidental color or partial discoloration is generated on the screen due to heat damage, and it
may not disappear. To prevent the heat damage, the screen saver function is effective. For details on the screen saver function, refer to the following.
2. Gradation inversion is a characteristic of liquid crystal display panel. Please be forewarned that depending on the displayed color, the visualization may be difficult even within the described view angle.
3. The GOT screen saving/backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life.
4. The touch panel is analog resistive film-type. If you touch the panel simultaneously in 2 points or more, the switch that is located around the center of the touched point, if any, may operate. Do not touch the
panel in 2 points or more simultaneously. Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver. Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section. An analog resistive
film-type touch panel does not require adjustment usually. However, misalignment between object position and actual touched position may be caused as usage time passes. If misalignment between object
position and actual touched position may occur, adjust the touch panel position. Misalignment between object position and actual touched position may operate an unintended object, which causes unintended
operation by mis-output and mis-operation.
5. ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data
6. Set the terminating resistor selector switch of the GOT in accordance with the connection type when adopting GOT multidrop connection.
7. Note that this does not guarantee all user’s operation environment. The protection is not applied when the interface environment protection cover is removed. In addition, the product may not be used in
environments under exposition of oil or chemicals for a long period of time, or in environments filled with oil-mist.
192
Model Number GT1275-VNBA GT1265-VNBA GT1275-VNBD GT1265-VNBD
Input Power Supply Voltage 100 to 240 VAC (+10%, −15%) 24VDC (+25%, -20%)
Input Frequency 50/60Hz ±5% -
Input Maximum Voltampere 44 VA (at max. load) -
Power Consumption 18 W or less 11W or less
With Backlight Off 15 W or less 6W or less
Inrush Current 40 A or less (4 ms, at max. load) 29A or less (10 ms, at max. load)
Permissive Instantaneous Within 20 ms (100 VAC or more) Within 10 ms
Failure Time
Noise voltage 1,500 Vp-p, and noise width 1μs, by noise simulator with Noise voltage 500 Vp-p, and noise width 1μs, by noise simulator
Noise Resistance
noise frequency 25 to 60 Hz with noise frequency 25 to 60 Hz
Withstand Voltage 1,500 VAC for 1 minute between power supply terminals and ground 500 VDC for 1 minute between power supply terminals and ground
Insulation Resistance 10 MΩ or higher with an insulation resistance tester (500 VDC between power supply terminals and ground)
Applicable Wire Size 0.75 to 2 [mm²]
Clamp Terminal Clamp terminals for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-S3.3, V2-N3A and FV2-N3A
Tightening Torque (Terminal 0.5 to 0.8 [N·m]
Block’s Terminal Screws)
Model Number GT1155HS-QSBD GT1150HS-QLBD
Input Power Supply Voltage 24VDC (+10%, -15%), ripple voltage of 200mV or less
Input Frequency -
Input Maximum Voltampere -
Power Consumption 9.84W or less (410mA/24VDC) 9.36W or less (390mA/24VDC)
With Backlight Off 4.32W or less (180mA/24VDC)
Inrush Current 15A or less (2ms, at max. load)
Permissible Instantaneous Within 5ms
Failure Time
Noise Resistance Noise voltage 1000Vp-p, noise width 1µs by noise simulator with noise frequency 30 to 100Hz
Withstand Voltage 500VAC for 1 minute between power supply terminal and ground for 1 minute
Insulation Resistance 10MΩ or higher with an insulation resistance tester (500VDC between power supply terminal and ground)
Applicable Wire Size 0.75 to 2 [mm²] (*1)
Clamp Terminal Clamp terminals for M3 screw RAV1.25-3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A (*1)
Tightening Torque (Terminal
0.5 to 0.8 [N·m] (*1)
Grounding -
Note: Excluding GT115_HS

GT1030-HBD GT1020-LBD
GT1030-HWD GT1020-LWD
GT1030-HBD2 GT1020-LBD2 GT1020-LBL
GT1040-QBBD GT1030-HWD2 GT1020-LWD2 GT1020-LWL
Model Number GT1055-QSBD GT1050-QBBD GT1045-QSBD GT1030-HBDW GT1020-LBDW GT1020-LBLW
GT1030-HWDW GT1020-LWDW GT1020-LWLW
GT1030-HBDW2 GT1020-LBDW2
GT1030-HWDW2 GT1020-LWDW2
5VDC (±5%),
24VDC (+10%, -15%),
Input Power Supply Voltage 24VDC (+10% -15%) 24VDC (+10% -15%) supplied from PLC
ripple voltage of 200mV or less communication cable
Input Frequency -
Maximum Input Voltage -
0.5A (built-in, not 0.4A (built-in, not 1.0A (built-in, not
Fuse 1.0A exchangeable) exchangeable) exchangeable)
9.84W or less 9.36W or less 3.6W or less 2.2W or less 1.9W or less 1.1W or less
Power Consumption (410mA /24VDC) (390mA/24VDC) (150mA/ 24VDC) (90mA/24VDC) (80mA/24VDC) (220mA/5VDC)
2.9W or less 1.7W or less 1.2W or less 0.6W or less
With Backlight Off 4.32W or less (180mA/24VDC) (120mA/ 24VDC) (70mA/24VDC) (50mA/24VDC) (120mA/5VDC)
15A or less (26.4VDC) 18A or less (26.4DCV) 13A or less (26.4DCV)
Inrush Current 15A or less (26.4VDC) 2ms -
2ms 1ms 1ms
Permissible Instantaneous Within 5ms -
Failure Time
Noise Resistance Noise voltage 1000Vp-p, noise width 1µs by noise simulator with noise frequency 30 to 100Hz
Withstand Voltage 500VAC for 1 minute between power supply terminal and ground for 1 minute -
Insulation Resistance 10MΩ or higher with an insulation resistance tester (500VDC between power supply terminal and ground) -
1-wire 0.14 to 1.5mm², AWG26 to AWG16 (single wire),
terminal 0.14 to 1.0mm², AWG26 to AWG16 (stranded wire)
Applicable Wire Size 0.75 to 2 [mm²] 0.25 to 0.5mm², AWG24 to AWG20 (bar terminal with insulation sleeve)
2-wire 0.14 to 0.5mm², AWG26 to AWG20 (single wire),
terminal 0.14 to 0.2mm², AWG26 to AWG24 (stranded wire)
Clamp terminals for M3 screw
Clamp Terminal RAV1.25-3, V2-N3A, FV2-N3A AI2.5-6BU, AI0.34-6TQ, AI0.5-6WH (made by Phoenix Contact)
Tightening Torque (Terminal 0.5 to 0.8 [N·m] 0.22 to 0.25 [N·m]
Grounding Class D grounding (100Ω or less) When the unit cannot be grounded, ground it to the panel

GT1275-VNBA GT1265-VNBA
Model Number GT1275-VNBD GT1265-VNBD
Type TFT color LCD
Screen Size 10.4" 8.4"
Resolution (Dots) 640 x 480 VGA
Display Size (W x H) mm 211.2 x 158.4 170.9 x 128.2
Display (*1)
Number of Displayed 16-dot standard font: 40 chars. x 30 lines (2-byte)

Characters 12-dot standard font: 53 chars. x 40 lines (2-byte)
Display Colors 256
View Angle (*2) Right/left: 45°, Up/down: 20°
Intensity 200 [cd/m²]
Intensity Adjustment 4-step adjustment
Life Approx. 52,000 hours (Operating ambient temperature: 25˚C)
Backlight Cold-cathode luorescent tube (replaceable), 1 CCFL light
Backlight
50,000 hours or more 40,000 hours or more

Life (*3)
Time for display intensity reaches 50% at operating ambient temperature of 25˚C

Touch Panel

No. of Simultaneous Touch Simultaneous touch prohibited (1 point touch only) (*4)
Points
C Drive 6 Mb built-in lash memory (for saving project data and function OS)
Battery Memory
(*5)
Life (No. of Writings) 100,000 times

Built-In SRAM 512 kB
Battery GT11-50BAT type lithium battery
Backed Up Data Clock data, alarm history, and recipe data
Life Approx. 5 years (operating ambient temperature: 25˚C)
RS-232, 1 ch, Transmission speed: 115,200/57,600/38,400/19,200/9,600/4,800 bps, Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (male),
RS-232
Application: communication with PLC and other FA devices, communication with personal computer (*2)
Built-in Interface
RS-422/485, 1 ch, Transmission speed: 115,200/57,600/38,400/19,200/9,600/4,800 bps, Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (female),
RS-422/485
Application: Communication with PLC and other FA devices
Data transmission system: 100BASE-TX, 1 ch, Connector shape: RJ-45 (modular connector),
Ethernet
Application: communication with connected devices
USB (Full Speed 12 Mbps), device 1 ch, Connector shape: Mini-B, Application: connection to personal computer
USB
(Project data upload/download, OS installation, FA transparent function)
CF Card Compact lash slot 1ch., Connector shape: Type I, Application: data transfer, data storage
Protective Construction JEM1030, Front: IP67f (*6)
External Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 303 x 214 x 53 241 x 190 x 58
Panel Cut Dimensions (W x H) mm 289 x 200 227 x 176
Weight (Excluding Mounting Brackets) kg 2.3 1.7
Applicable Software Packages GT Designer3 Version 1.01B or later (*7)
Notes:
1. On LCD screens, bright dots (permanently lit) and black dots (not to be lit) generally appear. Because the large number of display elements exist on an LCD screen, it is not possible to reduce appear-
ance of the bright and black dots to zero. Flickering may occur depending on the display colors. Note that the existence of bright and black dots is a standard characteristic of LCD screens, and it does
not mean that the products are defective or damaged.
2. LC panels have characteristics of tone reversal. Note that even within the indicated view angles, the screen display may not be clear enough depending on the display color.
3. Using the GOT screen save/backlight OFF functions prevents screen burn-in and extends the backlight life.
4. An analog resistive touch display is used. When 2 points on the screen are touched simultaneously, if a switch is located the middle of the 2 points then the switch will be activated. Therefore, avoid
touching 2 points on the screen simultaneously.
5. The memory is a ROM that permits overwriting of new data without having to delete the existing data.
6. This does not guarantee protection in all users’ environments. The unit may not be used in an environment where it is exposed to splashing oil or chemicals for a long time or it is soaked with full of oil mist.
7. iQ Works will be supported in the next version (except for GT12).
194
Model Number GT1155HS-QSBD GT1150HS-QLBD
Type STN color LCD STN monochrome (B&W) LCD
Screen Size 5.7"

Resolution (Dots) QVGA: 320 x 240
Display Size (W x H) mm 115 x 86
No. of Displayed 16-dot standard font: 20 chars. x 15 lines (2-byte) 12-dot standard font: 26 chars. x 20 lines (2-byte) (in horizontal display mode)
Characters
Display
Display Colors 256 Monochrome (B&W) 16 gray scale
View Angle Right/left: 50°, Up: 50°, Down: 60° Right/left: 45°,Up: 20°, Down: 40°
Contrast Adjustment 16-step adjustment

Intensity (cd/m²) 350 220
Intensity Adjustment 8-step adjustment
Life Approx. 50,000 hours (operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
Cold-cathode fluorescent tube (not replaceable), with backlight OFF detection function
Backlight
Backlight
Backlight off time and screen save time can be set

Approx. 75,000 hours or more Approx. 54,000 hours or more
Life (*1)
Time for display intensity reaches 50% at operating ambient temperature of 25°C
Type Matrix resistive type
300 keys/screen (matrix consisting of 15 lines x 20 columns)
Touch Panel
Number of Touch Keys

No. of Simultaneous Max. 2 points
Touch Points
C Drive (*2) 3 Mb built-in flash memory (for saving project data, OS)
Memory
Life (No. of Writings) 100,000 times

D Drive Built-in SRAM, 512 kB (battery backup)
Battery GT11-50BAT type lithium battery
Battery
Backed Up Data Clock data, alarm history and recipe data

Bus -
RS-422 -
RS-422/232, 1ch, (Select one when using) Transmission speed: 115200/ 57600/38400/19200/9600/4800 bps, Connector shape:
RS-422/232
Round type, 32-pin (male) Application: Communication with connected devices
Interface
RS-232, 1ch, Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800 bps, Connector shape: Mini-DIN 9-pin (female)
Built-in
RS-232
Application: Connection to personal computer (project data upload/download, OS installation, FA transparent function)
USB (full speed: 12 Mbps), device 1ch Application: Connection to personal computer (project data upload/download, OS installation,
USB (*3)
FA transparent function)
CF Card Compact flash slot, 1ch; Connector shape: TYPE I; Application: Data transfer and storage
Optional Function
1ch for optional function board installation
Board
Protective Construction JEM1030 Front: IP65f (*4)
External Dims. (Without USB 176 x 220 x 93
Port Cover) (W x H x D) mm
Panel Cut Dims. (W X H) mm -
Weight (kg) 1.0 (main unit only)
Screen Design
Applicable GT Designer2 Version 2.58L or later
Software
Software
Simulation
Packages GT Simulator2 Version 2.58L or later
Software
Notes:
1. Using the GOT screen save/backlight OFF functions prevents screen burn-in and extends the backlight life.
2. The built-in memory is a ROM that permits overwriting of new data without having to delete the existing data.
3. Conforms to the IP67f (JEM1030) standard when the USB port cover is installed. (The USB interface conforms to IP2X (JEM1030) when a USB cable is connected.) However, this does not guarantee
protection in all users’ environments.
4. This does not guarantee protection in all users’ environments. The specification is not applied when the interface protective cover and rear face protective cover are removed.

GT1020-LBD GT1020-LBDW GT1020-LBD2 GT1020-LBDW2 GT1030-HBD GT1030-HBDW GT1030-HBD2 GT1030-HBDW2 GT1040-QBBD GT1045-QSBD GT1050-QBBD GT1055-QSBD
Model Number GT1020-LBL GT1020-LBLW GT1030-HBL GT1030-HBLW
STN mono- STN color STN mono- STN color

Type STN monochrome (B&W) LCD chrome (white/ chrome (white/
blue) LCD LCD blue) LCD LCD
Screen Size 3.7" 4.5" 4.7" 5.7"
Resolution (Dots) 160 x 64 288 x 96 320 x 240 (Horizontal format)
Display Size (W x H) mm 86.4 x 34.5 109.42 x 35.98 96 x 72 115 x 86
16-dot standard font: 36 chars. x 6 lines (1-byte) or 18 16-dot standard font: 16-dot standard font: 20
Number of 16-dot standard font: 20 chars. x 4 lines 40 characters x15 lines, chars. x15 lines (2-byte),
chars. x 6 lines (2-byte) (in horizontal mode. 12-dot
Displayed (1-byte) or 10 chars. x 4 lines (2-byte) 12-dot standard font: 12-dot standard font: 26
standard font: 48 chars. x 8 lines (1-byte) or 24 chars. x 53 characters x 20 lines chars. x 20 lines (2-byte) (in
Characters (in horizontal display mode)
8 lines (2-byte) (in horizontal mode) (horizontal mode) horizontal display mode)
Display
Monochrome Monochrome
Display Colors Monochrome (B&W) (white/blue), 256 (white/blue), 256
16 scales 16 scales
Right/left: Right/left: Right/left: Right/left:
45°, Up: 20°, 50°, Up: 40°, 45°, Up: 20°, 55°, Up: 65°,
View Angle Right/left: 30°, Up: 20°, Down: 30° (in horizontal display mode) Down: 40° Down: 70° Down: 40° Down: 70°
(in horizontal (in horizontal (in horizontal (in horizontal
display mode) display mode) display mode) display mode)
Contrast Adjustment 16-step adjustment
Intensity (cd/m²) 200 (in green) 300 (in white) 200 (in green) 300 (in white) 200 (in green) 300 (in white) 200 (in green) 300 (in white) 300 150 260 380
Intensity Adjustment - 8-step -
Life (*1) Approx. 50,000 hours (Time after which display contrast reaches 20% at operating ambient temperature of 25°C)
3-color LED 3-color LED 3-color LED 3-color LED 3-color LED 3-color LED 3-color LED 3-color LED
(green, orange (white, pink (green, orange (white, pink (green, orange (white, pink (green, orange (white, pink and
Backlight
Color and red) and red) and red) and red) and red) and red) and red) red) (replace- LED Backlight off/screen saving time can be set
(replacement (replacement (replacement (replacement (replacement (replacement (replacement ment not
not needed) not needed) not needed) not needed) not needed) not needed) not needed) needed)
Function Status (on/blinking/off) control is possible. Screen save time can be set.
Type Analog resistive type Matrix resistive type
Number of Touch
Max. 50 keys/screen Max. 50 keys/screen (matrix resistive film touch panel)
Touch Panel
Keys
Key Size (Dots) Min. 2 x 2 (per key) Min. 16 x 16 (per key) Min. 16 x 16 (per key)
No. of Simultaneous Simultaneous pressing of more than one key is impossible
Touch Points (If there is a switch near the center of the pressed keys, the Max. 2 points Max. 2 points
switch may function.)
Built-in flash ROM for saving project data Built-in flash ROM for saving project data Built-in flash ROM for saving project data
User Memory
Memory
(512 kB or less), OS, alarm history, recipe data (1.5 Mb or less), OS (3 MB or less), OS
Life (No. of 100,000 times
Writings)
Battery - GT11-50BAT type lithium battery GT11-50BAT type lithium battery
Battery
Backed Up Data - Clock data, alarm history and recipe data Clock data, alarm history and recipe data
Life - Approx. 5 years (operating ambient temperature: 25°C) Approx. 5 years (operating ambient temperature: 25°C)
RS-422, 1ch,
RS-422, 1ch, Transmission RS-232, 1ch, Transmission RS-232, 1ch, Transmission
Transmission speed:
speed: 115200/57600/ speed: 115200/57600/ speed: 115200/57600/384
115200/57600/38400 RS-422/485, 1ch Transmission speed:
38400/19200/9600/480 38400/19200/9600/480 00/19200/9600/4800 bps.
For Communication 0 bps. Connector shape: /19200/9600/ 4800 115200/57600/38400/ 19200/9600/ 4800 bps.
0 bps. Connector shape: Connector shape: Connector
With PLC bps. Connector shape: Connector shape: D-sub, 9-pin (Female) Application:
Connector terminal Connector terminal terminal block, 9-pin
Connector terminal Communication with PLC
block, 9-pin Application: block, 9-pin Application: Application: Communication
block, 9-pin Application:
Communication with PLC Communication with PLC with PLC
Communication with PLC
Built-in Interface
RS-232, 1ch Transmission speed:

115200/57600/38400/ 19200/9600/ 4800 bps.;
For Communication RS-232, 1ch Transmission speed: 115200/57600/38400/19200/9600/4800 bps; Connector shape: Mini DIN Connector shape: D-sub 9-pin (Male); Application:
With Personal 6-pin (female); Application: Communication with personal computer (project data upload/download, OS
Communication with PLC, bar code reader, PC
Computers installation, transparent function)
(Project data upload/download, OS installation,
Transparent function)
USB (Full Speed 12Mbps) 1ch Connector shape:
Mini-B (Receptacle); Application: PC communication
USB -
(Project data upload/download, OS installation,
transparent function)
GT10-50FMB - Connection to GT10-50FMB memory board
Buzzer Output Single tone (tone length adjustable/none)

Protective Construction (*4) Conforming to IP67f (JEM1030) (front panel)
External Dimensions 113 x 74 x 27 145 x 76 x 29.5 139 x 112 x 41 164 x 135 x 56
(W x H x D) mm
Panel Cut Dimensions 137 x 66 130 x 103 153 x 21
(W x H) mm
Weight (kg) 0.2 (excl. fittings) 0.3 (excl. fittings) 0.45 (excl. fittings) 0.7 (excl. fittings)
Screen Design Software GT Designer2 Version 2.58L or later GT Designer2 Version 2.85P or later
General Note:
On LCD screens, bright dots (permanently lit) and black dots (not to be lit) generally appear. Because the large number of display elements exist on an LCD screen, it is not possible to reduce appearance of the
bright and black dots to zero. Flickering may occur depending on the display colors. Note that the existence of bright and black dots is a standard characteristic of LCD screens, and it does not mean that the
products are defective or damaged.
Notes: Refer to notes on previous page.
196
B. Communication Interfaces
Applicable Model
Stk.
Product Name Model Number Specifications GT1020/ GT1040/ Handy Item
GT16 GT14 GT12 1030 1050 GOT
GT15-QBUS Bus connection (1ch) unit standard model for QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q Series) X - - - - - S
GT15-QBUS2 Bus connection (2ch) unit standard model for QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q Series) X - - - - - S
GT15-ABUS Bus connection (1ch) unit standard model for QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU (A Series) X - - - - - S
Bus Connection GT15-ABUS2 Bus connection (2ch) unit standard model for QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU (A Series) X - - - - - S
Unit GT15-75QBUSL Bus connection (1ch) unit thin model for QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q Series) (*1) X - - - - - S
GT15-75QBUS2L Bus connection (2ch) unit thin model for QCPU (Q mode)/motion controller CPU (Q Series) (*1) X - - - - - S
GT15-75ABUSL Bus connection (1ch) unit thin model for QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU (A Series) (*1) X - - - - - S
GT15-75ABUS2L Bus connection (2ch) unit thin model or QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU (A Series) (*1) X - - - - - -
GT15-RS2-9P RS-232 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (male)) X - - - - - S
Serial GT15-RS4-9S RS-422/485 serial communication unit (D-sub 9-pin (female)) (*2,*3) X - - - - - S
Communication
Unit RS-422/485 serial communication unit (terminal block). Usable only when connecting
GT15-RS4-TE X - - - - - S
to temperature controllers/indicating controllers via RS-485 (*2)
RS-422 GT15-RS2T4-9P RS-422 connector: 9-pin X - - - - - S
RS-232 - RS-422 conversion unit
Conversion Unit GT15-RS2T4-25P RS-422 connector: 25-pin X - - - - - S
RS-485
Conversion GT14-RS2T4-9P RS-232-RS-485 conversion unit - X - - - - S
Adapter
MELSECNET/H GT15-J71LP23-25 Optical loop unit X - - - - - -
Communication
Unit GT15-J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit X - - - - - S
CC-Link IE GT15-J71GP23-SX Optical loop unit X - - - - - S
Control
CC-Link IE Field GT15-J71GF13-T2 CC-Link IE Field Interface X - - - - - S
CC-Link
Communication GT15-J61BT13 Intelligent device station unit (supporting CC-Link version 2) X - - - - - S
Unit
Ethernet
Communication GT15-J71E71-100 Ethernet (100Base-TX/10Base-T) unit X - - - - - S
Unit
Serial Multidrop GT01-RS4-M Multidrop Interface Master Station X X X X X - S
Conversion GT10-9PT5S Conversion Adapter D-sub 9-pin to terminal block 5-pin - X - - X - S

Adapters
Notes:
1. The unit cannot be used stacked on other units. Physically occupies 2 slots.
2. The unit may not be able to be used depending on the connection destination. See List of Connectable Models.
3. The unit cannot be used when connecting to temperature controllers/indicating controllers via RS-485 (2-wire type).
C. Options and Accessories

Optional Units
Applicable Model
Stock
Product Name Model Number Specifications
GT12 GT1020/ GT1040/ Handy Item
GT16 GT14 1030 1050 GOT
USB slave (PictBridge) for printer connection, 1ch. Cable for printer
Printer Unit GT15-PRN X - - - - - S
connection (3m) included
Video Input Unit GT16M-V4 For NTSC/PAL input, 4ch X - - - - - S
RGB Input Unit GT16M-R2 For analog RGB input, 2ch X - - - - - S
Video/RGB Input Unit GT16M-V4R1 For NTSC/PAL (4ch) and RGB X - - - - - S
RGB Output Unit GT16M-ROUT For analog, RGB output X - - - - - S
Multimedia Unit GT16M-MMR For multimedia functions X - - - - - S
CF Card Unit GT15-CFCD For additional CF card port (B drive) on the back of the GOT X - - - - - S
CF Card Extension Unit GT15-CFEX-C08SET For additional CF card port (B drive) at the front of the control panel (*1) X - - - - - -
Sound Output Unit GT15-SOUT For sound output X - - - - - S

For external input/output
GT15-DIOR X - - - - - -
(Negative common input/ source output)
External Input/Output Unit
For external input/output
GT15-DIO X - - - - - -
(Positive common input / source output)
Note:
1. Includes unit to be installed on the control panel, unit to be installed on the GOT, and connection cable (0.8m).

Options and Accessories
Applicable Model
Stock
Product Name Model Number Specifications GT1020/ GT1040/ Handy
GT16 GT14 GT12 Item
1030 1050 GOT
GT16-90XLTT For GT1695M-XTB_ X - - - - - S
GT16-80SLTT For GT1685M-STB_ X - - - - - S
GT16-70SLTT For GT1675M-S X - - - - - S
GT16-70VLTT For GT1675M-V X - - - - - S
GT16-70VLTN For GT1675M-_VN, GT1672-VN X - - - - - S
Backlight Backlight
GT16-60SLTT For GT16665M-S X - - - - - S
GT16-60VLTT For GT1665M-V X - - - - - S
GT16-60VLTN For GT1662-VN X - - - - - S
GT12-70VLTN For GT1275-VNBA_ - - X - - - S
GT12-60VLTN For GT1265-VNBA_ - - X - - - S
Optional Optional function board + 48MB expansion memory - - - - - X S
Function Board GT11-50FNB
Memory Loader GT10-LDR GT1020/1030 OS data transfer - - - X - - S
Memory Board GT10-50FMB GT10 OS and project data transfer - - - - X - S
GT16-90PSCB Clear, 5 sheets X - - - - - S
GT16-90PSGB Antiglare, 5 sheets X - - - - - S
Protective sheet for 15" screen
GT16-90PSCW Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets X - - - - - -
GT16-90PSGW Antiglare (frame: white), 5 sheets X - - - - - -
Protective sheet for 12.1" screen
Protective sheet for 10" screen
Protective Protective sheet for 5.7" screen
Sheet GT16-50PSCW Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets X - - - - - -
GT16H-60PSC Protective sheet for GT16HS Clear Sheets - - - - - X S
GT14-50PSCB Clear, 5 sheets - X - - - - S
GT14-50PSGB Protective sheet for 5.7" screen Antiglare, 5 sheets - X - - - - S
GT14-50PSCW (for GT14) Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets - X - - - - -
GT14-50PSGW Antiglare (frame: white), 5 sheets - X - - - - -
GT11-70PSCB Protective sheet for 10.4" (GT12) Clear, 5 sheets - - X - - - S
GT11-60PSCB Protective sheet for 8.4" (GT12) Clear, 5 sheets - - X - - - S
GT11-50PSCB Clear, 5 sheets - - - - X - S
GT11-50PSGB Protective sheet for 5.7" screen Antiglare, 5 sheets - - - - X - S
GT11-50PSCW (for GT11) Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets - - - - X - -
GT11-50PSGW Antiglare (frame: white), 5 sheets - - - - X - -
GT11H-50PSC Clear, 5 sheets - - - - - X S
(for Handy GOT)
GT10-50PSCB Clear, 5 sheets - - - X - - S
GT10-50PSGB Protective sheet for 5.7" screen Antiglare, 5 sheets - - - X - - S
GT10-50PSCW (for GT1050) Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets - - - X - - -
GT10-50PSGW Antiglare (frame: white), 5 sheets - - - X - - -
198
Options and Accessories (continued)
Applicable Model
Stock
Product Name Model Number Specifications GT1020/ GT1040/ Handy
GT16 GT14 GT12 Item
1030 1050 GOT
Protective GT10-30PSGB Protective sheet for 4.5" screen Antiglare, 5 sheets - - - X - - S
Sheet GT10-30PSCW (for GT1030) Clear (frame: white), 5 sheets - - - X - - -
USB GT16-UCOV For 15", 12.1", 10.4" and 8.4" X - - - - - S
Environmentally-protective cover
Environmentally
for USB interface on main unit
Protective GT11-50UCOV front panel (for replacement) For 5.7" - X - - X - S
Cover
GT05-90PCO Protective cover for oil for 15" screen X - - - - - S
GT05-80PCO Protective cover for oil for 12.1" screen X - - - - - S
Protective GT05-70PCO Protective cover for oil for 10.4" screen X - X - - - S
Cover For Oil GT05-60PCO Protective cover for oil for 8.4" screen X - X - - - S
(*2) GT05-50PCO Protective cover for oil for 5.7" screen X X - - X - S
GT05-30PCO Protective cover for oil for 4.5" screen - - - X - - S
GT05-20PCO Protective cover for oil for 3.7" screen - - - X - - S
GT16-90PSCB-012 Protection Cover For F&B 15" screens – No access to Front USB (5 Sheets) X - - - - - S
Cover for GT16-90PSCB-012 Protection Cover For F&B 12" screens – No access to Front USB (5 Sheets) X - - - - - S
Food and GT16-70PSCB-012 Protection Cover For F&B 10" screens – No access to Front USB (5 Sheets) X - - - - - S
Beverage GT16-60PSCB-012 Protection Cover For F&B 8.4" screens – No access to Front USB (5 Sheets) X - - - - - S
GT16-50PSCB-012 Protection Cover For F&B 5.7" screens – No access to Front USB (5 Sheets) X X - - - - S
Emergency GT16H-60ESCOV For misoperation prevention of emergency stop switch - - - - - X S
Stop Switch
Guard GT11H-50ESCOV For misoperation prevention of emergency stop switch - - - - - X -
GT15-90STAND Stand for 15" type X - - - - - -
GT15-80STAND Stand for 12.1" type X - - - - - -
Stand
GT15-70STAND Stand for 8.4"/10.4" type X - X - - - -
GT15-50STAND Stand for 5.7" type X X - X X - -
GT05-MEM-512MC 512MB flash ROM X - X X - X -
CF Card (*4) GT05-MEM-_GC 1GB, 2GB, 4GB, 8MB, 16GB flash ROM X - X X - X -
CF-_GB 1GB OR 4GB Compact Flash Card X - X X - X -
L1MEM-2GBSD 2GB SD Card - X - - - - S
SD Card
L1MEM-4GBSD 4GB SDHC Card - x - - - - S
Memory Card GT05-MEM-ADPC CF card - memory card (TYPE II) conversion adapter X X X - X X -
Adapter CF-ADAPTER Compact Flash (CF) Adapter (TYPE II) Sub CF adapter when possible X X X - X X -
GT15-70ATT-98 A985GOT (*3) X - X - - - -
Attachment A870GOT-SWS A8GT-70GOT-TB GT157_
GT15-70ATT-87 for 10.4" type A870GOT-TWS A8GT-70GOT-SW X - X - - - S
A8GT-70GOT-TW A8GT-70GOT-SB
GT15-60ATT-97 A97_GOT X - X - - - S
GT15-60ATT-96 A960GOT X - X - - - S
Attachment A870GOT-EWS A77GOT-EL-S5

GT15-60ATT-87 Attachment A8GT-70GOT-EW A77GOT-EL-S3 X - X - - - S
GT156_
for 8.4" type A8GT-70GOT-EB A77GOT-EL
A77GOT-CL-S5 A77GOT-L-S5
GT15-60ATT-77 A77GOT-CL-S3 A77GOT-L-S3 X - X - - - -
A77GOT-CL A77GOT-L
GT15-50ATT-95W Attachment A956WGOT GT155_ X X - - X - S
GT15-50ATT-85 for 5.7" type A85_GOT GT115_ X X - - X - S
GT15-BAT Battery for backup of clock data and maintenance time notification data X - - - - - S
Battery
GT11-50BAT Battery for backup of clock data, alarm history and recipe data (for replacement) - X X X (*1) X X S
D808D197G51 GT16/15/12 Series mounting hardware (4 pieces) X X X - - - S
GT11/F900 H/W KIT GT11/F94 Series mounting hardware (4 pieces) - - - - X - S
Misc. GT10 Mounting H/W GT10 Mounting hardware (10 clips, gasket, terminal block) - - - X - - S
GT115 Option Cover GT1500 option cover (1 pcs) X X - - - - S
GT15 RS-232 Cover GT1500 RS-232 cover (1 pcs) X X - - - - S
Notes:
1. GT1030 only
2. Check if the oil resistant cover can be used in an actual use environment before use. When using the oil resistant cover, the front USB interface and human sensor cannot be used.
3. Including the GP250_ and GP260_ manufactured by Pro-face.
4. We recommend specifying CF cards with part number CF-_ _ MB when possible. CF cards cannot be used with GT1040/1050.

D. Cables
Third Applicable Model (*2)
Cable Party Stock
Product Name Model Number Application
GT16 GT14 GT12 GT1020/
Length Products GT1040/ Handy Item
(*1) 1030 1050 GOT
GT15-QC06B 0.6m -
GT15-QC12B 1.2m S
QCPU Extension For connection between QCPU and GOT
Cable GOT-to-GOT GT15-QC30B 3m X X - - - - - S
Connection Cable For connection between GOT and GOT
Bus GT15-QC50B 5m S
Connection GT15-QC100B 10m S
Cable
For QCPU GT15-QC150BS 15m S
(Q Mode) Long-Distance For long-distance (13.2m or more)
GT15-QC200BS 20m -
Connection Cable connection between QCPU and GOT (A9GT-
for QCPU GOT-to- GT15-QC250BS 25m X QCNB required) X - - - - - -
GOT Long-Distance For long-distance connection between GOT
Connection Cable GT15-QC300BS 30m S
and GOTP
GT15-QC350BS 35m -
Used for QCPU long-distance (13.2m or
Bus Extension Connector Box A9GT-QCNB - - X - - - - - S
more) bus connection
GT15-C12NB 1.2m -
For connection between QnA/ACPU/motion
GT15-C30NB 3m X controller CPU (A Series, extension base) X - - - - - S
and GOT
GT15-C50NB 5m S
GT15-AC06B 0.6m S
GT15-AC12B 1.2m For connection between QnA/ACPU/motion S
Large CPU X controller CPU (A Series, extension base) X - - - - -
GT15-AC30B 3m and A7GT-CNB -
Extension Cable
GT15-AC50B 5m -
GT15-A370C12B-S1 1.2m For connection between motion controller -
X X - - - - -
GT15-A370C25B-S1 2.5m CPU (A Series, main base) and GOT -
GT15-A370C12B 1.2m For connection between motion controller -
X X - - - - -
GT15-A370C25B 2.5m CPU (A Series, main base) and A7GT-CNB -
GT15-A1SC07B 0.7m -
For connection between QnAS/AnSCPU/
GT15-A1SC12B 1.2m X X - - - - - -
Small CPU motion controller CPU (A Series) and GOT
Extension Cable GT15-A1SC30B 3m S
Bus
Connection For connection between QnAS/AnSCPU
GT15-A1SC50B 5m X X - - - - - -
Cable For and GOT
QnA/ACPU/ GT15-A1SC05NB 0.45m -
For connection between QnAS/AnSCPU/
Motion
GT15-A1SC07NB 0.7m X motion controller CPU (A Series) and X - - - - - -
Controller Small CPU A7GT-CNB
CPU Extension Cable GT15-A1SC30NB 3m -
(A Series) For connection between QnAS/AnSCPU and
GT15-A1SC50NB 5m X X - - - - - -
A7GT-CNB
GT15-C100EXSS-1 10.6m For long-distance (13.2m or more) connection -
Small CPU GT15-C200EXSS-1 20.6m between QnAS/AnSCPU/motion controller CPU -
Long-Distance X (A Series) and GOT; For long-distance (13.2m X - - - - -
Connection Cable or more) connection between A7GT-CNB and
GT15-C300EXSS-1 30.6m S
GOT *Set of GT15-EXCNB and GT15-C_BS
GT15-C07BS 0.7m -
GOT-to-GOT GT15-C12BS 1.2m S
X For connection between GOT and GOT X - - - - -
Connection Cable GT15-C30BS 3m S
GT15-C50BS 5m S
GT15-C100BS 10m -
GOT-to-GOT
Long-Distance GT15-C200BS 20m X For connection between GOT and GOT X - - - - - -
Connection Cable
GT15-C300BS 30m -
A0J2HCPU For connection between power supply unit
GT15-J2C10B 1m X X - - - - - -
Connection Cable (A0J2-PW) for A0J2HCPU and GOT
Used for QnA/ACPU long-distance (13.2m or
Bus Connector Conversion Box A7GT-CNB - - X - - - - - S
more) bus connection
Usable as GT15-C_EXSS-1 in combination with
Buffer Circuit Cable GT15-EXCNB 0.5m X X - - - - - S
GT15-C_BS
Ferrite Core Set for Q Bus Cable GT15-QFC - X S
(Two-Pack) Ferrite cores for replacing existing GOT-A900 bus
X - - - - -
Ferrite Core Set for A Bus Cable cable with bus cable for GOT1000
GT15-AFC - X S
(Two-Pack)
GT16-C02R4-9S 0.2m X For connection between RS-422/485 (connector) X - - - - - S
and RS-422 cable (D-sub 9 pins)
RS-422 Conversion Cable
For connection between RS-422/485 (connector)
GT16-C02R4-25S 0.2m X and RS-422 cable (D-sub 25 pins) X - - - - - S
FA-LTBGTR4CBL05 0.5m -
RS-485 Terminal Block For connection between RS-422/485 (connector)
FA-LTBGTR4CBL10 1m X X - - - - - S
Conversion Unit and terminal block conversion cable
FA-LTBGTR4CBL20 2m -
Notes:
1. Items listed above are developed by Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., LTD., and sold through your local sales office.
2. The applicable connection configuration and cable vary depending on the GOT main unit. For more details, see the GOT1000 Series Handbook and the GOT1000 Series Connection Manual.
200
Cables (continued)
Third Applicable Model (*2)
Cable Party Stock
Product Name Model Number Length Products Application GT16 GT14 GT12 GT1020/ GT1040/ Handy Item
(*1) 1030 1050 GOT
GT01-C30R4-25P 3m For connection between QnA/ACPU/motion controller CPU S
(*3)
GT01-C100R4-25P 10m (A Series)/FXCPU (D-sub 9-pin connector) and GOT -
- For connection between FA-CNV_CBL and GOT X X X - X
QnA/A/FXCPU GT01-C200R4-25P 20m For connection between serial communication unit and GOT -
-
Direct Connection GT01-C300R4-25P 30m For connection between AJ65BT-G4-S3 and GOT -
Cable Computer
Link Connection GT10-C30R4-25P 3m S
Cable For connection between QnA/FXCPU
GT10-C100R4-25P 10m (D-sub 25-pin connector) and GOT S
- - - - X - -
GT10-C200R4-25P 20m For connection between serial communication unit -
(AJ71QC24(N)-R4) and GOT
GT10-C300R4-25P 30m -
GT09-C30R4-6C 3m S
Computer Link GT09-C100R4-6C 10m For connection between serial communication unit and GOT -
X X X X - X -
Connection Cable GT09-C200R4-6C 20m For connection between computer link unit and GOT -
GT09-C300R4-6C 30m -
GT01-C10R4-8P 1m S
GT01-C30R4-8P 3m S
RS-422
Cable GT01-C100R4-8P 10m X X X - X - S
GT01-C200R4-8P 20m -
GT01-C300R4-8P 30m -
FXCPU Direct
Connection Cable GT10-C10R4-8P 1m S
FX Communication
Function Extension GT10-C10R4-8PC 1m For connection between FXCPU (MINI-DIN 8-pin S
Board Connection connector)and GOT
GT10-C30R4-8P 3m S
Cable For connection between FXCPU communication
(Model Numbers -
GT10-C30R4-8PC 3m function extension board and GOT S
Ending in C
Include a Terminal GT10-C100R4-8P 10m S
Block Connector) - - - X - -
GT10-C100R4-8PC 10m S
GT10-C200R4-8P 20m -
GT10-C200R4-8PC 20m S
GT10-C300R4-8P 30m -
GT10-C300R4-8PC 30m S
VFD PU Port Direct GT01-C30R4-VFD 3m VFD (RJ45-pin) to GOT (D-Sub 9-pin, male) X X X - X - S
Connection
For connection between QCPU and GOT/personal
X X X - X - S
computer (GT SoftGOT1000) (D-sub 9-pin)
GT01-C30R2-6P 3m - For connection between personal computer (screen
QCPU Direct design software) (D-sub 9-pin, female) and GOT - - - X - X S
Connection Cable (MINI-DIN 6-pin, female)
Data Transfer
Cable For connection between QCPU and GOT. For
GT10-C30R2-6P 3m - - - - X - - S
connection between GOT and GOT
For connector conversion box between QCPU and
GT11H-C30R2-6P 3m - - - - - - X -
Handy GOT
FX Communication For connection between FXCPU communication
Function Extension function extension board (D-sub 9-pin connector)
Board Connection and GOT/personal computer (GT SoftGOT1000)
RS-232 Cable, FX (D-sub 9-pin). For connection between FXCPU
Cable Communication GT01-C30R2-9S 3m - X X X - X - S
Function Adapter communication function adapter (D-sub 9-pin
Connection Cable, connector) and GOT. For connection between personal
Data Transfer computer (screen design software) (D-sub 9-pin,
Cable female) and GOT (D-sub 9-pin, female)
For connection between FXCPU communication
FX Communication function adapter (D-sub 25-pin connector) and
Function Adapter GOT/personal computer (GT SoftGOT1000) (D-sub
Connection Cable, GT01-C30R2-25P 3m - X X X - X - -
Data Transfer 9-pin).For connection between personal computer
Cable (screen design software) (D-sub 25-pin, male) and
GOT (D-sub 9-pin, female)
GT09-C30R2-9P 3m For connection between serial communication unit -
Computer Link
Connection Cable X and GOT. For connection between computer link unit X X X - X -
GT09-C30R2-25P 3m and GOT -
Converts Handy GOT connector to RJ-45 for
GT16H-CNB-42S - - terminal block, D-sub connector or Ethernet for - - - - - X S
Connector Conversion Box For each signal type
Handy GOT
Converts D-sub 37-pin connector to terminal block
GT11H-CNB-37S - - - - - - - X S
and D-sub 9-pin connector
Notes:
3. The RS-422 cables less than 10m and the RS-232 cable less than 3m can be used when the connector conversion box for the Handy GOT is used.

Cables (continued)
Applicable Model (*2)
Cable Third Party
Product Name Model Number Products Application Stk.
GT12 GT1020/
Length (*1) GT1040/ Handy Item
GT16 GT14 1030 1050 GOT
GT16H-30-42P 3m - - - - - X S
For connection between connector conversion
GT16H-60-42P 6m - - - - - - X -
box and Handy GOT
GT16H-100-42P 10m - - - - - X -
GT16H-C30-32P 3m - - - - - X -
GT16H-C50-32P 5m For connection between CC-Link interface unit - - - - - X -
-
FA Device, Power GT16H-C80-32P 8m and Handy GOT - - - - - X -
External Supply and GT16H-C130-32P 13m - - - - - X -
Connection Operation Switch
Cable Connection Cable GT11H-C30-37P 3m S
For connection between FA device connection
GT11H-C60-37P 6m - - - - - - X S
relay cable and GOT
GT11H-C100-37P 10m S
GT11H-C30 3m S
For connection between FA device, power supply
GT11H-C60 6m - - - - - - X S
and operation switches and GOT
GT11H-C100 10m S
For connection between FXCPU and GOT
RS-422, Power GT11H-C15R4-8P 1.5m - For connection between power supply and - - - - - X S
Supply and operation switches and GOT
Operation Switch For connection between A/QnACPU and GOT
FA Device Connection Cable GT11H-C15R4-25P 1.5m - For connection between power supply and - - - - - X S
Connection
Relay Cable operation switches and GOT
RS-232, Power For connection between QCPU and GOT
Supply and GT11H-C15R2-6P 1.5m - For connection between power supply and - - - - - X S
Operation Switch
Connection Cable operation switches and GOT
For connection between GOT1000 (external I/O

unit) and GOT-A900 external I/O A interface unit
GT15-C30HTB 0.3m X X - - - - - -
connection cable (A8GT-C05TK/A8GT-C30TB/user-
External I/O Unit Connection fabricated cable)
Conversion Cable
For connection between GOT1000 (external I/O
GT15-C03H50TB 0.3m unit) and other 3rd party products (D-sub 50 pin X - - - - - -
to open leads)
For connection between external monitor,
Analog RGB cable GT15-C50VG 5m X X - - - - - -
personal computer and vision sensor and GOT
RS-232/USB For connection between personal computer (USB)
Conversion Adapter GT10-RS2TUSB-5S - - and GOT (RS-232) (Adapter and personal computer - - - X - - S
For Data Transfer are connected with GT09-C30USB-5P)
For panel mounting USB connection. For extending
Panel Mount USB GT10-C10EXUSB-
1m - rear mounted USB port on GT1040/1050 to control - X - - X - -
USB Cable Extension 5S
panel
For connection between personal computer and GOT
For connection between QCPU (USB miniB) and X X X X X X S
Data Transfer Cable GT09-C30USB-5P 3m X personal computer (GT SoftGOT1000)
For connection between printer and GOT (printer unit) X - - - - - S
Notes:
202
Cables For Other Brand PLCs
Cable Third Party Stk.
Product Name Model Number Length Products GOT Connection Destination
GT16 GT14 GT12 GT1020/ GT1040/ Handy Item
(*1) 1030 1050 GOT
PLC CPU: CQM1/CQM1H/CS1/CJ1/CV500/CV1000/
CV2000/CVM1.
Serial communication unit: CS1W-SCU21/CJ1W-SCU41.
GT09-C30R20101-9P 3m -
Communication board: C200HW-COM02/COM05/COM06
Cable For Serial communication board: CQM1-SCB41/
OMRON PLC CS1W-SCB41/CS1W-SCB21
GT09-C30R20102-25S 3m Connection cable: CQM1-CIF01 -
GT09-C30R20103-25P 3m Base mount type host link unit: C500H-LK201-V1 -
GT09-C30R21101-6P 3m PLC CPU: KV-700/1000 -
Cable For GT09-C30R21102-9S 3m Multi-communication unit: KV-L20/L20R port 1 -
KEYENCE PLC
GT09-C30R21103-3T 3m Multi-communication unit: KV-L20/L20R port 2 -
Cable For GT09-C30R20601-15P 3m PLC CPU: JW-22CU/70CUH/100CUH/100CU -

SHARP PLC GT09-C30R20602-15P 3m PLC CPU: JW-32CUH/33CUH -
Cable For JTEKT
(Former Toyoda GT09-C30R21201-25P 3m
Machine Works) RS-232/RS-422 converter: TXU-2051 -
PLC
Cable For Shinko
Technos Digital Digital indicating controller: FCR-100/FCD-100/
GT09-C30R21401-4T 3m -
Indicating FCR-23A/PC-900/FIR series
Controller
Cable For GT09-C30R20501-9P 3m PLC CPU: T2E -

TOSHIBA PLC GT09-C30R20502-15P 3m PLC CPU: T2N -
Cable For PLC CPU: H-4010/H Series board type/EH-150 Series

GT09-C30R20401-15P 3m -
Hitachi Industrial Intelligent serial port module: COMM-H/COMM-2H
Equipment Systems
PLC GT09-C30R20402-15P 3m PLC CPU: H-4010/EH-150 Series -
Cable For Hitachi

PLC
GT09-C30R21301-9S 3m Communication module: LQE560/LQE060/LQE160 -
RS-232
Cable
Cable for Fuji X RS-232C interface card: NV1L-RS2RS-232C/485 X X X - X (*3)
Electric FA GT09-C30R21003-25P 3m
Components & Interface capsule: FFK120A-C10 -
Systems PLC General interface module: NC1L-RS2/FFU120B
GT09-C30R20901-25P 3m RS-422-232 conversion adapter: AFP8550 -

PLC CPU: FP2/FP2SH/FP10(S)/FP10SH/FP-M
Cable For GT09-C30R20902-9P 3m Computer communication unit: AFP2462/AFP3462/ -
Matsushita Electric AFP5462
Works PLC
GT09-C30R20903-9P 3m PLC CPU: FP1-C24C/C40C -
GT09-C30R20904-3C 3m PLC CPU: FP1-C16CT/C32CT -
GT09-C30R20201-9P 3m PLC CPU: PROGIC-8/MP-920/MP-930 -
GT09-C30R20202-15P 3m PLC CPU: PROGIC-8 -
PLC CPU: CP-9300MS
GT09-C30R20203-9P 3m MEMOBUS module: CP-217F -
Cable For Yaskawa (when connected to CN1)
Electric PLC
GT09-C30R20204-14P 3m PLC CPU: MP-940 -
MEMOBUS module: CP-217IF (when connected
to CN2)
GT09-C30R20205-25P 3m -
Yokogawa Electric personal computer module:
LC01-0N/LC02-0N
GT09-C30R20301-9P 3m CPU port/D-sub 9-pin conversion cable: KM10-0C -

Cable For Personal computer module: F3LC11-1N/
Yokogawa Electric GT09-C30R20302-9P 3m -
PLC F3LC11-1F/F3LC12-1F/F3LC11-2N
GT09-C30R20304-9S 3m Converter: ML2-_ -
Cable For
Allen-Bradley PLC
GT09-C30R20701-9S 3m PLC CPU: SL500 Series Converter: 1761-NET-AIC S
Cable For SIEMENS

PLC
GT09-C30R20801-9S 3m HMI adapter -
Notes:

Cable Third Party Stock
Product Name Model Number Length Products GOT Connection Destination
GT16 GT14 GT12 GT1020/ GT1040/ Handy Item
(*1) 1030 1050 GOT
GT09-C30R40101-9P 3m PLC CPU: CV500/CV1000/CV2000/CVM1
GT09-C100R40101-9P 10m Serial communication unit: CJ1W-SCU41
GT09-C200R40101-9P 20m Serial communication board: CQM1-SCB41/
GT09-C300R40101-9P 30m CS1W-SCB41
GT09-C30R40102-9P 3m
Base mount type host link unit: C200H-LK202-V1/
Cable For GT09-C100R40102-9P 10m
C500H-LK201-V1
OMRON PLC GT09-C200R40102-9P 20m
Communication board: C200HW-COM03/COM06
GT09-C300R40102-9P 30m
GT09-C30R40103-5T 3m
GT09-C100R40103-5T 10m
Communication board: CP1W-CIF11
GT09-C200R40103-5T 20m
GT09-C300R40103-5T 30m
GT09-C30R41101-5T 3m
Cable For GT09-C100R41101-5T 10m
Multi-communication unit: KV-L20/L20R port 2
KEYENCE PLC GT09-C200R41101-5T 20m
GT09-C300R41101-5T 30m
GT09-C30R40601-15P 3m
GT09-C100R40601-15P 10m
PLC CPU: JW-22CU/70CUH/100CUH/100CU
GT09-C200R40601-15P 20m
GT09-C300R40601-15P 30m
GT09-C30R40602-15P 3m
Cable For GT09-C100R40602-15P 10m
PLC CPU: JW-32CUH/33CUH
SHARP PLC GT09-C200R40602-15P 20m
GT09-C300R40602-15P 30m
GT09-C30R40603-6T 3m
GT09-C100R40603-6T 10m
Link unit: JW-21CM/10CM/ZW-10CM
GT09-C200R40603-6T 20m
GT09-C300R40603-6T 30m
Cable For JTEKT GT09-C30R41201-6C 3m
(Former Toyoda GT09-C100R41201-6C 10m PLC CPU: PC3J/PC3JL Communication module:
Machine Works) GT09-C200R41201-6C 20m PC/CMP2-LINK
PLC GT09-C300R41201-6C 30m
GT09-C30R40501-15P 3m
GT09-C100R40501-15P 10m
PLC CPU: T2/T3/T3H/ model 3000 (S3)
GT09-C200R40501-15P 20m
GT09-C300R40501-15P 30m
GT09-C30R40502-6C 3m
Cable For TOSHIBA GT09-C100R40502-6C 10m
PLC CPU: T2E/model2000(S2)
PLC GT09-C200R40502-6C 20m
RS-422 GT09-C300R40502-6C 30m
X X X X - X (*3) -
Cable GT09-C30R40503-15P 3m
GT09-C100R40503-15P 10m
PLC CPU: T2N
GT09-C200R40503-15P 20m
GT09-C300R40503-15P 30m
Hitachi Industrial GT09-C100R40401-7T 10m
Intelligent serial port module: COMM-H/COMM-2H
Equipment Systems GT09-C200R40401-7T 20m
PLC GT09-C300R40401-7T 30m
GT09-C30R41301-9S 3m
Cable For Hitachi GT09-C100R41301-9S 10m PLC CPU: LQP510
PLC GT09-C200R41301-9S 20m Communication module: LQE565/LQE165
GT09-C300R41301-9S 30m
Cable For Fuji GT09-C30R41001-6T 3m
Electric FA GT09-C100R41001-6T 10m RS-232C/485 interface capsule: FFK120A-C10
Components & GT09-C200R41001-6T 20m General interface module: NC1L-RS4/FFU120B
Systems PLC GT09-C300R41001-6T 30m
GT09-C30R40201-9P 3m
GT09-C100R40201-9P 10m MEMOBUS module: JAMSC-120NOM27100/
GT09-C200R40201-9P 20m JAMSC-IF612
Cable For Yaskawa GT09-C300R40201-9P 30m
Electric PLC GT09-C30R40202-14P 3m
GT09-C100R40202-14P 10m
PLC CPU: MP940
GT09-C200R40202-14P 20m
GT09-C300R40202-14P 30m
GT09-C30R40301-6T 3m
GT09-C100R40301-6T 10m
Personal computer link module: F3LC11-2N
GT09-C200R40301-6T 20m
Cable For Yokogawa GT09-C300R40301-6T 30m
Electric PLC GT09-C30R40302-6T 3m
GT09-C100R40302-6T 10m
Personal computer link module: LC02-0N
GT09-C200R40302-6T 20m
GT09-C300R40302-6T 30m
GT09-C30R40303-6T 3m
GT09-C100R40303-6T 10m
Temperature controller: GREEN Series
Yokogawa Electric GT09-C300R40303-6T 30m
Temperature GT09-C30R40304-6T 3m
Controller GT09-C100R40304-6T 10m
Temperature controller: UT2000 Series
GT09-C200R40304-6T 20m
GT09-C300R40304-6T 30m
Notes:
204
E. Screen Configuration Software and Programming Cable
Included Products
Screen Design Simple Data
Product Name Model Number Simulation Software Remarks
Software GT Conversion Function SoftGOT Function (*1)
GT-Simulator3
Designer3 GT-Converter2 GT SoftGOT
Ver. 1.x
Ver. 1.x Ver. 2.x
GT-WORKS3-C1 GT WORKS3 Version 1.x X X X X English Version
License Key For
GT SoftGOT1000 (*1) GT15-SGTKEY-U For USB port -
Programming Cable GT01-C30R2-9S, GT01-C30R2-6P, GT10-RS2TUSB-5S, and GT09-C30USB-5P. See cable table for further selection information -
Note: 1. To use GT SoftGOT1000, a license key for GT SoftGOT1000 is necessary for each personal computer.
Remote Access License

GT16-PCRAKEY-1 GOT1000 PC Remote Operator License - 1 User S
GT16-PCRAKEY-5 GOT1000 PC Remote Operator License - 5 User -
GT16-VNCSKEY-1 GT16 VNC Server License Key – 1 User -
GT16-VNCSKEY-5 GT16 VNC Server License Key – 5 User -
GT16-VNCSKEY-10 GT16 VNC Server License Key – 10 User S
GT16-VNCSKEY-20 GT16 VNC Server License Key – 20 User S
GT14-VNCSKEY-1 GT14 VNC Server License Key - 1 User s
GT14-VNCSKEY-5 GT14 VNC Server License Key - 5 User -
Note: This license is required for GT16 Series terminals using the VNC (Virtual Network Computer) client function for the purposes of remote PC access.
Dimensional Diagrams
GT16 • GT14 • GT12 Base Units Unit : mm (inch)
G T1695 397
GT1685 GT1675 303
316
320 240 252
10
10
10
199
214
227
242
281
296
222
10
10
240
320
10
6
6
61
49
56
52
56
10 382 10 288
301
GT1665 GT1655-V GT16 Handy
167
10
241 116
175.5
10
21 50 47
135
120
201
190
175
116
10
230
6
60
175.5
10
152
GT145_ GT1275 GT1265
164 303 (11.93)

22 120 2~4mm 241 (9.49)
252 (9.92)
(0.39)
23
175.5 (6.91)
(0.39)
10
10
10
#4-40UNC
(inch screw type)
199 (7.83)
214 (8.43)
190 (7.48)
175 (6.89)
M2.6
(Metric screw type)
135
120
(0.39)
(0.39)
222 (8.74) 175.5 (6.91)

10
10
10
(0.24)
(0.24)
6
6
51 (2.01)
52 (2.05)
53 (2.09)
58 (2.28)
6
47
55
288 (11.34)
226 (8.90)
152

Dimensional Diagrams
GT11 • GT10 Base Units
Unit : mm (inch)
GT104_ GT105_
139 (5.47")
10 10 15.5
(0.39") 86 (3.38") (0.39")(0.61") 164
(0.37")
120
9.5
10
MITSUBISHI GOT 1000
102 (4.01")
112 (4.4")
135
120
(0.37")
120
10
9.5
86 (3.38")
10 10 17.5
Panel thickness: 5mm(0.2") or less
Panel
(0.39") (0.39")(0.68") thickness:
5mm
47
53
56
41 (1.61")
(0.19")
5
152
129 (5.07")
Handy GOT GT1030 GT1020

13
62
18 75 113 5
176 145 4.5
72 10 76 10 7.5 80 or more
50 62 10 84 10 80 or more
16
74
65
84
65
84
76
209
204
10 76 10 9.5
10 84 10 21 Panel
Panel thickness:
thickness: 1 to 4mm
29.5
27
23
25
1 to 4mm
3.5
74
168
Panel Cutout
Screen Size GOT Type A B +2 (*1)
A 0
15" GT1695 383.5 282.5 Notes:

1. Same dimensions as A975/970GOT(-B)
2. Same dimensions as F940GOT
12.1" GT1685 302 228
+2 (*1)
Panel opening B 0
10.4" GT127_ 289 200
8.4" GT126_ 227 176 (unit: mm)
GT14_ (*2)
5.7" GT115_ (*2) 153 121
GT105_
With CF Card Extension Unit
4.7" GT104_ 130 103 Type A B
4.5" GT1030 137 66 GT15-CFEX-C08SET 94.0 33.0
3.7" GT1020 105 66
206
Bus Connections Cables (Unit: mm)
Cable Cable Length External Dim. Fig.1 10 L Fig.6 12.4

33 L
145 95 34.2 160 110
GT15-QC_B 0.6, 1.2, 3, 5, 10m Fig. 1 Cable approx. Ø10 Cable approx. Ø8.0
49.9
42
GT15-QC_BS 15, 20, 25, 30, 35m Fig. 1
Ferrite core, approx. Ø35 × 40, Ferrite core, approx. Ø35 × 40,
red holder tube
1.2, 3, 5m Fig. 2
green holder tube
GT15-C_NB
GT15-AC_B 0.6, 1.2, 3, 5m Fig. 3 Fig.2 12.4 Fig.7 12.4
33 L 60 20
20 60 L 33
70 50 110 50
GT15-A370C_B-S1 1.2, 2.5m Fig. 4 Cable approx. Ø8.0 Cable approx. Ø8.0
49.9
49.9
58
58
GT15-A370C_B 1.2, 2.5m Fig. 5 GOT side
PLC side Ferrite core, approx. Ø35 × 40, PLC side
Ferrite core, approx. Ø35 × 40,
green holder tube
0.7, 1.2, 3, 5m Fig. 6 green holder tube A7GT-CNB side
GT15-A1SC_B
GT15-A1SC_NB 0.45, 0.7, 3, 5m Fig. 7 Fig.3 20 60 L Fig.8 12.4
33 1000 FG cable 75 20.5
50 70
Cable approx. Ø17.0
GT15-C_EXSS-1 (*1) 10.6, 20.6, 30.6m Fig. 8 & 9
49.9
GOT side
58
CON1
CON2
60
GT15-EXCNB 0.5m Fig. 8 500
Ferrite core, approx. Ø32 × 16,
0.7, 1.2, 3, 5, 10, 20, green holder tube PLC side Cable approx. Ø9.0 GOT side
GT15-C_BS Fig. 9
30m
Fig.4 12.4 33 L Fig.9 12.4 33 L
GT15-J2C10B 1m Fig. 10 110
Cable approx. Ø8.0
50 FG cable
49.9
49.9
Note 1: GT15-C_EXSS-1 is a set consisting of GT15-EXCNB and GT15-CMBS. (See Fig. A.) 160 110
Ferrite core, approx. Ø35 × 40, Cable approx. Ø9.0 Ferrite core, approx. Ø35 x 40,
green holder tube blue holder tube
PLC side GOT side Fig.5 12.4 33 L 60 20

Fig.10 1000 33 12.4
100 Cable approx. Ø8.0 70
110 Cable approx. Ø8.0 50
Fig. A
49.9
GOT side
CON1
CON2
49.9
58
Ferrite core, approx. Ø35 × 40, GOT side
Motion controller Ferrite core, approx. Ø35 × 40, green holder tube
GT15-EXCNB (Fig. 8) GT15-CM BS (Fig. 9) side green holder tube A7GT-CNB side A0J2-PW side
(Unit: mm)
RS-422 Cables Fig.11 16 45 200 38 8 Fig.17 30 1000 38

250
Cable Cable Length External Dim. Ø5
0.2m Fig. 11
33
21
30
GT16-C02R4-9S Ø7 Ø25 × 33
GT01-C30R4-25P 3m Fig. 12 Ø13
GT01-C_R4-25P 10, 20, 30m Fig. 13 Fig.12 16 50 3000 53 16 Fig.18

16 50 3000 40 13
GT01-C_R4-8P 1, 3, 10, 20, 30m Fig. 14 Ø7 Ø7

Ø20 × 28
35
55
35
13
GT10-C_R4-8P 1, 3, 10, 20, 30m Fig. 15
GT10-C_R4-25P 3, 10, 20, 30m Fig. 16
GT10-C10R4-8PL 1m Fig. 17 Fig.13 16 50 L 53 16
Fig.19
16 50 3000 50 16
Ø7 Ø6
35
55
35
35
RS-232 Cables
Cable Cable Length External Dim. Fig.14 Fig.20 16 50 3000 53 16
16 50 L 40 13
GT01-C30R2-6P 3m Fig. 18 Ø25 × 33
Ø6 Ø6
35
3m Fig. 19
55
35
GT01-C30R2-9S
13
GT01-C30R2-25P 3m Fig. 20
GT10-C30R2-6P 3m Fig. 21 Fig.15 30 L 40
Fig.21 30 3000 40
250 200
Approx. Ø30
Ø13 Ø13
Ø7 Ø25 × 33 Approx. 48
Ø7
RS-485 Terminal Block Conversion Unit
47 4
Cable Cable Length External Dim. Fig.16
30 L 53
Fig.22 18
16
FA-LTBGTR4CBL_ 0.5, 1, 2m Fig. 22 250 8 35 L
Ø8.1
50
115
93
21
55
Ø7 Ø25 × 33
29

Communication Units (Unit of measure: mm)
External 63 3 GOT main unit GOT main unit

Item Model Number Fig.1 Fig.2 Fig.3 GOT main unit
7
133 3 137
Dim.
Standard Model of Bus GT15-QBUS (1 ch) Fig. 1
107
98
107
98
Connection Unit for QCPU
102
(Q mode)/ Motion Controller CPU GT15-QBUS2 (2 ch) Fig. 2
A
(Q Series) 2.5
2.5
A
GT15-ABUS (1 ch) Fig. 1
30.5
30.5
21.5
Standard Model of Bus
21.5
17.5
B
B
Bus Connection Unit for QnA/ACPU/ C *1 D C *1 *1
Motion Controller CPU (A Series) GT15-ABUS2 (2 ch) Fig. 2 *2 *2 *3
Connection GOT main unit 63 3 GOT main unit
Unit Thin model of Bus Connection GT15-75QBUSL (1 ch) Fig. 3 Fig.4 63 3 Fig.5 Fig.6
Unit for QCPU (Q Mode)/Motion

Controller CPU (Q Series) GT15-75QBUS2L (2 ch) Fig. 3 RS-232
117
112
98
98
48
GT15-75ABUSL (1 ch) Fig. 3
38
Thin Model of Bus Connection RS-422
Unit for QnA/ACPU/Motion

GT15-75ABUS2L Fig. 3 2.5 2.5
12
7
Controller CPU (A Series)
20.5
11.5
30.5
30.5
21.5
21.5
9
RS-232 Serial Communication 57
GT15-RS2-9P Fig. 4 31.5
*1
29.5
*1
Unit (D-sub 9-pin (Male))
GOT main unit
133
Serial RS-422/485 Serial Communication GT15-RS4-9S Fig.7 20 89.7 Fig.8 Fig.9
7
Mounting hole 3
Fig. 4 48 155 20
Comm. Unit Unit (D-sub 9-pin (Female))
46.7
64.2
108
98
RS-422/485 Serial Communication GT15-RS4-TE Fig. 5
71.5
Unit (Terminal Block)
80
3
From base 2.5
RS-232-->RS-422 Conversion Unit GT15-RS2T4-9P Fig. 6 unit
4.25
30.5
RS-422
21.5
(9-pin)
Conversion
9.5
39.5 4.25 To bus When connector
is fitted 49.5 40.5
Unit RS-232-->RS-422 Conversion Unit GT15-RS2T4-25P connection unit
Fig. 6
(25-pin) GOT main unit 133 GOT main unit GOT main unit
Fig.10 133 Fig.11 3 Fig.12 133
3
7
3
Bus Extension Connector Box A9GT-QCNB Fig. 7
Bus Connector Conversion Box A7GT-CNB Fig. 8
98
108
117
120
98
2
98
MELSECNET/H Optical Loop Unit GT15-J71LP23-25 Fig. 9
3
Comm. Unit GT15-J71BR13 Fig. 10
20
Coaxial Bus Unit
3
2.5 2.5
12
15
3
2.5
30.5
21.5
8.5
30.5
21.5
GT15-J71GP23-SX Fig. 11
44
CC-Link IE Controller Network Comm. Unit
35
23.5
31.5
11
29 15.5 11.5
When F type connector is fitted
CC-Link Comm. Unit: Intelligent Device Station Unit GT15-J61BT13 Fig. 12 (Unit of measure: mm)
GOT main unit 133 GOT main unit
63 GOT main unit 63 3
Ethernet Communication Unit GT15-J71E71-100 Fig. 13 Fig.13 3 Fig.14 Fig.15
98
128
101
136
112
98
38
9
14
23
24
For GT16
28.5
2.5 2.4
44
35
Units other than CC-Link IE controller CC-Link IE controller network
7
26
30.5
30.5
21.5
8
network communication unit and communication unit and multimedia unit
21.5
8
32
13
46
multimedia unit 21 13.5 86
111
1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd Fig.16 133

GOT main unit
3 Fig.17 133
GOT main unit
3 Fig.18 133 GOT main unit
3
15" 19.5 41 62.5 15" 33.5 55 76.5
105
18 39.5 61.5 32 53 75
98
105
12.1" 12.1"
105
98
98
2nd stage
19.5
3rd stage
19.5
1st stage
8
8
8
2.5 2.5
2.5
8.5
30.5
21.5
30.5
21.5
8
8.5
30.5
21.5
GOT main unit
8.5
18 18 34 26 19 18 18 34 26 19
19
This figure shows GT16M-V4R1. *1 This figure shows GT15V-75V4R1. *1
Optional Units GOT main unit
Fig.19 1.3 30 Fig.20 GOT side Control panel side
External
Item Model Number 93
Dim.
105
63
Printer Unit GT15-PRN Fig. 14

43
63
1.3
Multimedia Unit GT16M-MMR Fig. 15 1.8 63

114.5
GT16M-V4 Fig. 16
105
98
Video Input Unit 8

GT15V-75V4 Fig. 17
14 32
58
GOT main unit 1.8

63
GT16M-R2 Fig. 16
3 9 62.5
Fig.21
6
RGB Input Unit

29.5
GT15V-75R1 Fig. 17
110
98
GT16M-V4R1 Fig. 16 2.5

Video/RGB Input Unit
52
GT15V-75V4R1 Fig. 17 60
Ø18
5
GT16M-ROUT Fig. 18
30.5
21.5
RGB Output Unit

13
GT15V-75ROUT Fig. 18 22
CF Card Unit GT15-CFCD Fig. 19 Fig.22

63 3
Fig.23 4 drilled holes
Ø3.5
CF Card Extension Unit GT15-CFEX-C08SET Fig. 20 18 28 18 82 37.5
Audio Output Unit GT15-SOUT Fig. 21

112
98
25
2.5
GT15-DIOR Fig. 22
113
91
60
External Input/Output Unit

7
GT15-DIO Fig. 22
30.5
21.5
Panel cut
Handy GOT Connector Conversion Box GT11H-CNB-37S Fig. 23
18 19.5
10.5
29 Unit: mm
3
(*1)The connector shape varies depending on the model.

(*2) Dimensions A-D for each communication unit. (*3) Dimension A for each communication unit.
Model Model Number A

A B C D
Number
GT15-75QBUSL 2.5
GT15-QBUS 2.5 12 31.5 -
GT15-75QBUS2L 2.5
GT15-QBUS2 2.5 11 29 33.5
GT15-75ABUSL 4
GT15-ABUS 4.5 15 29.5 -
GT15-75ABUS2L 4
GT15-ABUS2 4.5 11 31 31
208
Motion Controllers
Motion Controller
Q170MCPU QD/QDS Series Motion CPUs

MITSUBISHI Q170MCPU
Q 7 D
MODE
RU
ERR
USER
BAT
PULL
BOOT
• 1 to 16 axes per unit • iQ Platform

SW
D
PO E R
45
45
7 7
2
STOP RUN
RESET STOP RU
CAUTION
PERIPHERAL I/F
EMI
• USB, Serial, Ethernet • 8 to 32 axes per CPU

• I/O Expandable • Registration & Following
EMI
C 1
• Registration & Following • CAM
CN1
• CAM • Interpolation
E T IO
D
• PTP
CN2
F UNC T ION / P E R F OR M A NCE
24VDC FRONT
BAT
MITSUBISHI MR MQ100
QD77MS/
MR MQ100
PULL
PO E R
RESET STOP RU
• 1 5 axes per CPU LD77MH Modules
PERIPHERAL I/F
• Registration & Following C 1

• 2 to 16 axes per CPU
C 1
• CAM • Mark Detection
• PTP • CAM
E T IO
• Interpolation
• PTP
24VDC
QD75M4
4
QD75M4
QD75MH Modules
4
• 1 to 4 axes per CPU
• Interpolation
• PTP
CONTROL AXES
QD Series Motion Controllers for the iQ Platform ...........................................................................211

QD75MH Positioning Modules for QH Series Automation Platform ................................................217
LD77MH and QD77MS Simple Motion Modules .............................................................................220
MR-MQ100 Single Axis Motion Controller ......................................................................................225
Q170MCPU Stand-Alone Motion Controller.....................................................................................228
Stock Product: Stock product is product MEAU makes every effort to have on hand for immediate shipment. There may be
instances when we are out of stock due to unexpected large requirements. All stock product will be indicated in this book by
an “S” in the Stocked Item columns/rows.
Non-Stock Product: Non-stock product is product supplied on an “as-needed” basis. Standard lead times of 12 - 16 weeks
apply, product is non-returnable and non-cancelable. Product listed as non-stock may change to stock product subject
to increases in sales and usage. All non-stock product will be indicated in this book by a dash “-” in the Stocked Item
columns/rows.
Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Motion Controllers 209

n MOTION CONTROLLERS
QD Series Motion Controllers for the iQ Platform
The performance of the Q172D/Q173D Motion CPUs is twice as fast as the previous generation systems resulting in shorter system times.
Shared memory capacity has been increased 3.5 times, Motion SFC processing time is reduced by three-quarters, in-position signal response
time has been decreased by half and program read and write times have been increased three times when compared with previous motion
CPU models.
Q172DLX
Q172DPX Q172DEX Q172DPX
1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3
Q172DLX Q173DPX
Servo External Signal

Software Motion CPU Input/Output
External Interrupt Input
Battery Unit
MR-J3-B Safety
SSCNET III
MR-J3-B Safety
SSCNET III
Linear
Servomotor
Q172DLX Q172DLX Q173SXY Q173SXY Q173SXY
Q172DLX
A. iQ Series Base Units ...................................................................................................................211

B. Motion Controller CPU Modules ................................................................................................211
C. External Signal Interface Module................................................................................................213
D. QD Series Serial Absolute Synchronous Encoder and Interface Module ...................................213
E. QD Series Manual Pulse Generator and Interface Module..........................................................214
F. QD Miscellaneous Parts, Cables and Connectors........................................................................215
G. Operating and Programming Software ......................................................................................216
210
A. iQ Series Base Units
iQ Series Base Information
Model Number Q38DB Q312DB Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B
Type Base Unit Extension Base Unit
Specifications and Extension
See iQ section of this PSG for detailed information and specifications
Connection Cables
Power Supply Modules

Model Number Q61P-A1 Q61P-A2 Q61P Q62P Q63P Q64P
Specifications See iQ section of this PSG for detailed information and specifications
Sequence CPU Modules

Model Number Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU
Cables for CPU to Extension Base Unit or Extension Base Unit to Extension Base Unit
Model Number QC05B QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B
B. Motion Controller CPU Modules

Model Number Q173DCPU Q172DCPU
Stocked Item S S
Number of Control Axes Up to 32 axes Up to 8 axes
0.44ms / 1 to 6 axes
SV13 0.88m / 7 to 18 axes
1.77ms / 19 to 32 axes
Operation Cycle
(Default) 0.44ms / 1 to 4 axes
0.88ms / 5 to 12 axes 0.44ms / 1 to 4 axes
SV22
1.77ms / 13 to 28 axes 0.88ms / 5 to 8 axes
3.55ms / 29 to 32 axes
Interpolation Functions Linear interpolation (Up to 4 axes), Circular interpolation (2 axes), Helical interpolation (3 axes)
PTP(Point to Point) control, Speed control, Speed-position control, Fixed-pitch feed, Constant speed control,
Control Modes Position follow-up control, Speed control with fixed position stop, Speed switching control, High-speed oscillation
control, Synchronous control (SV22)
Acceleration/ Deceleration Control Automatic trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration, S-curve acceleration/deceleration
Compensation Backlash compensation, Electronic gear, Phase compensation (SV22)
Programming Language Motion SFC, Dedicated instruction, Mechanical support language (SV22)
Servo Program Capacity 16k steps
Number of Positioning Points 3200 points (Positioning data can be designated indirectly)
Peripheral I/F Via PLC CPU (USB/RS-232)
Proximity dog type (2 types), Count type (3 types), Data set type (2 types), Dog cradle type, Stopper type (2 types),
Home Position Return Function
Limit switch combined type (Home position return retry function provided, home position shift function provided)
JOG Operation Function Provided
Possible to connect 3 modules
Function
Synchronous Encoder Possible to connect 12 modules (SV22) Possible to connect 8 modules (SV22)
M-Code Function M-code output function provided; M-code completion wait function provided
Limit Switch Output Function Number of output points 32 points; Watch data: Motion control data/Word device
Made compatible by setting battery to servo amplifier.
Absolute Position System
(Possible to select the absolute data method or incremental method for each axis)
Q172DLX : 4 modules usable Q172DLX : 1 module usable
Motion Related Interface Module Q172DEX : 6 modules usable Q172DEX : 4 modules usable
Q173DPX : 4 modules usable (*2) Q173DPX : 3 modules usable (*2)
Internal Current 1.14 1.25
Dimensions W x D x H mm (in) 27.4 x 98 x 119.3 (1.08 x 3.86 x 4.70)
Weight (kg) 0.33 0.33
Notes:
1. The MR-J2S-B servo amplifiers for SSCNET cannot be used.
2. When using the incremental synchronous encoder (SV22), you can use above number of modules. When connecting the manual pulse generator, you can use only 1 module.

Motion Controller CPU Modules
Model Number Q173DSCPU Q172DSCPU
Stocked Item S S
Number of Control Axes 32 axes (Up to 16 axes / system) 16 axes
Operation Cycle
0.2ms, 0.4ms, 0.8ms, 1.7ms, 3.5ms, 7.1ms
(Operation Cycle Setting)
PTP (Point to Point) control, Speed control, Speed-position control, Fixed-pitch feed, Constant speed control,
Interpolation Functions Linear interpolation (Up to 4 axes), Circular interpolation (2 axes), Helical interpolation (3 axes)
PTP(Point to Point) control, Speed control, Speed-position control, Fixed-pitch feed, Constant speed control,
Acceleration/ Deceleration Control Trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration, S-curve acceleration/deceleration, Advanced S-curve acceleration/deceleration
Number of Positioning Points 3200 points (Positioning data can be set indirectly)
Peripheral I/F Via PLC CPU (USB, RS-232, Ethernet)
Proximity dog type (2 types), Count type (3 types), Data set type (2 types), Dog cradle type, Stopper type (2 types),
Home Position Return Function Limit switch combined type, Scale home position signal detection type (Home position return re-try function
provided, home position shift function provided)
Possible to connect 3 modules (Q173DPX use), Possible to connect 1 module (Internal I/F use) (*5)
Function
Speed-Torque Control Speed control without positioning loops, Torque control without positioning loops, Tightening & Press-fit control
Synchronous Encoder Possible to connect 12 modules (SV22 use)
M-Code Function M-code output function provided, M-code completion wait function provided
Limit Switch Output Function Number of output points 32 points, Watch data: Motion control data, Word device
ROM Operation Function Provided
High-Speed Reading Function 8 points (Via Input module, Via tracking of Q172DEX/Q173DPX), 4 points (Via Q17nDSCPU’s Internal I/F)
Mark Function Continuous Detection mode, Specified Number of Detections mode, Ring Buffer mode
Detection Mark Detection Signal 4 points (Via Q17nDSCPU’s Internal I/F), Bit device, Q172DLX (DOG / CHANGE)
Function Mark Selection Setting 32
Torque limit Value Change Function Forward new torque value, Reverse new torque value
Target Position Change Function Provided
Servo Parameter Change Function Provided
Servo Amplifier Control Mode
Gain switching function, PI-PID control, Control loop changing (semi closed loop control, fully closed loop control)
Switching Function
Optional Data Monitor Function 6 setting/axes (MR-J4-B’s SSCNETIII/H use)
Forced Stop Function Motion controller forced stop (EMI terminal, System setting), Forced stop terminal of servo amplifier
Number of Input/Output Points Total 256 points (Q17nDSCPU’s Internal I/F 4 points + I/O module)
Clock Function Provided
Security Function Password registration, Password for every motion SFC programs, Software security key function
All Clear Function Delete all user data in Motion CPU
Remote Operation Remote RUN/STOP, Remote latch clear
Digital Oscilloscope Function Bit data: 16 channels, Word data: 16 channels (*4)
Amplifier-less Operation Function Provided
Made compatible by setting battery to servo amplifier.
Q172DLX: 4 modules usable Q172DLX: 1 module usable
Motion Related Interface Module Q172DEX: 6 modules usable (*2) Q172DEX: 6 modules usable (*2)
Q173DPX: 4 modules usable (*3) Q173DPX: 4 modules usable (*3)
Q173DS: 1.75A (*6) Q172DS: 1.44A (*6)
Internal Current Q173D: 1.25A Q172D: 1.25A
Q173D-S1: 1.30A Q172D-S1: 1.30A
Dimensions W x D x H mm (in) 27.4 x 120.3 x 120.5 (1.08 x 4.74 x 4.74)
Weight (kg) 0.38
Notes:
1. The SSCNETIII compatible servo amplifier can be used, but the SSCNET compatible servo amplifier cannot be used.
2. Q172DEX cannot be used in SV13.
3. When using the incremental synchronous (SV22 use), you can use the number of modules in the specification. When connecting the manual pulse generator, you
can use only 1 module.
4. 8CH word data and 8CH bit data can be displayed in real time.
5. When the manual pulse generator is used with the Q17_ DSCPU’s internal I/F, do not set the Q173DPX in the System Settings.
6. The current consumption (0.2A) of manual pulse generator/incremental synchronize encoder connected to the internal I/F connector is not contained.
212
C. External Signal Interface Module
Model Number Q172DLX
Stocked Item S
Servo external signals: 32 points (Upper stroke limit, Lower stroke limit, Stop input, Proximity DOG/
Number of Inputs
Speed-position switching signal) (4 points x 8 axes)
Input Method Sink/Source type
Isolation Method Photocoupler
Rated Input Voltage 12/24VDC
Rated Input Current 12VDC 2mA/24VDC 4mA
Operating Voltage Range 10.2 to 26.4VDC (12/24VDC +10/ -15%, ripple ratio 5% or less)
ON Voltage/Current 10VDC or more/2.0mA or more
OFF Voltage/Current 1.8VDC or less/0.18mA or less
Input Resistance Approx. 5.6KΩ
Response time of the Upper/Lower OFF - ON
1ms
Stroke Limit and STOP Signal ON - OFF
Response Time of the Proximity DOG, OFF - ON
0.4ms/0.6ms/1ms (CPU parameter setting, Default 0.4ms)
Speed-Position Switching Signal ON - OFF
Common Terminal Arrangement 32 points/common (common terminal: B1, B2)
Indicates to Display ON indication (LED)
External Connector Type 40 pin connector
Applicable Wire Size 0.3mm²
Applicable Connector for the External Connection A6CON1 (Attachment), A6CON2, A6CON3 (Optional)
Applicable Connector/Terminal Block Converter Module A6TBXY36, A6TBXY54, A6TBXY70 (Optional)
Number of I/O Occupying Points 32 points (I/O allocation: Intelligent, 32 points)
Weight (kg) 0.15
Dimensions (mm (inch)) W x H x D 27.4 x 98 x 90 (1.08 x 3.86 x 3.54)
Servo External Signal Application Number of Points

Upper Stroke Limit Input (FLS)
For detection of upper and lower stroke limits
Lower Stroke Limit Input (RLS)
Stop Signal Input (STOP) For stopping under speed or positioning control 32 points
For detection of proximity DOG at proximity DOG or (4 points/8 axes)
Proximity DOG/Speed-Position Switching Input
count type home position return or for switching from
(DOG/CHANGE)
speed to position switching control.
Note: Signal No. 1 to 8 can be assigned to the specified axis. To make the assignment, use the system settings of the positioning software package.
D. QD Series Serial Absolute Synchronous Encoder and Interface Module
Serial Absolute Synchronous Encoder Input

Model Number Q172DEX
Applicable Signal Types Differential-output type : (SN75C1168 or equivalent)
Transmission Method Serial communications
Synchronous Method Counter-clock-wise (viewed from end of shaft)
Communication Speed 2.5 Mbps
Applicable Types Q170ENC
Position Detection Method Absolute (ABS) method
Tracking Enable Signal Input Resolution 262144 PLS/rev (18bit)
Model Number Q172DEX Number of Modules 2/module
Stocked Item S External Connector Type 20 pin connector
Number of Inputs Tracking enable signal: 2 points Applicable Connector for the
Q170ENCCNS (Optional)
External Connection
Input Method Sink/Source type
Applicable Wire MB14B0023 12 Pair
Isolation Method Photocoupler Q170ENCCBL_M: _= cable length 2m (6.56 ft.),
Rated Input Voltage 12/24VDC Recommended Cables 5m (16.4 ft.), 10m (32.81 ft.), 20m (65.62 ft.),
Rated Input Current 12VDC 2mA/24VDC 4mA 30m (98.43 ft.), 50m (164.04 ft.) (Note)
10.2 to 26.4VDC Cable Length Up to 50m (164.04 ft.)
Operating Voltage Range (12/24VDC +10 / -15%, Back up the Absolute Position Depends on A6BAT/MR-BAT
ripple ratio 5% or less) 12000 (h), (Example of encoders x 2, ambient temperature
ON Voltage/Current 10VDC or more/2.0mA or more Battery Service Life Time
40°C (104°F) ) 24000 (h), (Example of encoders x 1,
(Value in Actual)
OFF Voltage/Current 1.8VDC or less/0.18mA or less ambient temperature 40°C (104°F) )
Input Resistance Approx. 5.6KΩ Memory of Data Exchange None
Response OFF to ON 0.4ms/0.6ms/1ms Number of I/O Occupying Points 32 points (I/O allocation: Intelligent, 32 points)
Time ON to OFF (CPU parameter setting, Default 0.4ms) Internal Current Consumption
0.19
Common Terminal 1 point/common (5VDC) (A)
Arrangement (Common terminal: TREN.COM) Dimensions W x H x D mm (in) 27.4 x 98 x 90 (1.08 x 3.86 x 3.54)
Display ON indication (LED) Weight (kg) 0.15
Note: Use these cables when the tracking enable signal is not used. Customer must make a cable when the
tracking enable signal is used.

QD Series Synchronous Encoder (Optional)
Model Number Q170ENC
Stocked Item S
Resolution 262144 PLS/rev
Transmission Method Serial Communications (Connected to Q172EX-S2/S3)
Direction on Increase Counter clockwise (viewed from end of shaft)
IP65 (dust proof, waterproof)
Protective Construction (*1)
except for the shaft-through portion
Permitted Speed at ON 3600 r/min
Permitted Speed at OFF (*2) 500 r/min
Permitted Axis Load Radial load: Max 19.6N; Thrust load: Max 9.8N
Runout at Input Shaft Tip 0.02 mm (0.00079 in) or less; 15 mm (0.59 in) from tip
Recommended Coupling Bellows coupling
Permissible Angular Acceleration 40,000 rad/s²
Internal Current Consumption (A) 0.2
Q170ENCCBL_M: _= cable length 2m (6.56 ft.),
Connecting Cable 5m (16.4 ft.), 10m (32.8 ft.), 20m (65.6 ft.),
30m (98.4 ft.), 50m (164.04 ft.)]
Communication Method Differential driver/receiver conforming to RS-422A
Transmission Distance Up to 50m (164.04 ft)
Operating Temperature -5°C to 55°C (23 to 131°F)
Notes:
1. If an “o-ring” is required, please purchase separately.
2. If it exceeds a permitted speed at power OFF, a position displacement is generated.
E. QD Series Manual Pulse

Serial Absolute Synchronous Encoder I/F
Generator and Interface Module
Model Number Q173DPX
Number of Modules (Max.) 3 per module
Voltage-output/ High Voltage 3.0 to 5.25VDC
Open Collector Low Voltage 0 to 1.0VDC
Differential- High Voltage 2.0 to 5.25VDC
Output Type
(26LS31 or Low Voltage 0 to 0.8VDC
Equivalent)
Input Frequency Max. 200kpps (After magnification by 4)
Tracking Enable Signal Input Voltage-output type/Open-collector type (5VDC),
Applicable Types Recommended product: MR-HDP01; Differential-output
Model Number Q173DPX type: (26LS31 or equivalent)
Stocked Item S External Connector Type 40 pin connector
Number of Inputs Tracking enable signal: 3 points Applicable Wire Size 0.3mm²
Input Method Sink/Source type Applicable Connector for the
A6CON1 (Attachment) A6CON2, A6CON3 (Optional)
Isolation Method Photocoupler External Connection
Applicable Connector/
Rated Input Voltage 12/24VDC Terminal Block Converter Module
A6TBXY36, A6TBXY54, A6TBXY70 (Optional)
Rated Input Current 12VDC 2mA/24VDC 4mA Voltage-Output/
Operating Voltage 10.2 to 26.4VDC (12/24VDC +10/ -15%, Open Collector
30m (98.43 ft.)
Range ripple ratio 5% or less) Cable Length Output Type
(Open collector output type: 10m (32.81 ft.) )
ON Voltage/Current 10VDC or more / 2.0 mA or more Differential-Output
Type
OFF Voltage/Current 1.8VDC or less / 0.18 mA or less
Number of I/O Occupying Points 32 points (I/O allocation: Intelligent, 32 points)
Input Resistance Approx. 5.6KΩ
Internal Current Consumption 0.38
Common Terminal 1 point/common
Arrangement (Common terminal: TREN.COM) Dimensions W x H x D mm (in) 27.4 x 98 x 90 (1.08 x 3.86 x 3.54)
Display ON indication (LED) Weight (kg) 0.15
Manual Pulse Generator (Optional)

3.6 (0.14) Packing t = 2.0
Model Number MR-HDP01 3 t ( 4 10)
P 72 i ac
Stocked Item S 0
90
NP
10 + +
ø60 (2.36)0.5
Pulse Resolution 25 PLS/rev (100 PLS/rev at magnification of 4)

ø80 (3.15)1
ø70 (2.76)
ø50 (1.97)
20
80
+5 t
Voltage - output (power supply voltage - 1V or more), 12 0
Output Method
30
+ +
70
Output current = Up to 20 mA 60
+ + + +
40 +
Power Supply Voltage 4.5 to 13.2VDC (*1) 50

3 6
Consumption Current 60 16 20 27.0 0.5 8.89 7.6

3 ø4.8 (0 t 19) (0.63)(0.79) (1.06) (0.35) (0.3)
Life 1,000,000 revolutions at 200 r/min +
i ac
Permitted Axis Load Radial load : Max. 19.6N; Thrust load : Max. 9.8N
) 20
(2.44
ø62
ø72 (2
Pulse Signal Status 2 signals: A phase, B: phase, 90° phase difference .83) 0.2
nit (inc )
Friction Torque 0.06N/m (at 20°C (68°F))
+ +
Operating Temperature -10°C to +60°C (14°F to 140°F)
Note: 1. If using an external power supply, it needs to be 5VDC.
214
F. QD Miscellaneous Parts, Cables and Connectors
Connection between Q172DCPU and MR-J3-B Safety Connection between Q173DCPU and
Series Servo Amplifiers MR-J3-B Safety Series Servo Amplifiers
Q172DCPU Q173DCPU
Motion CPU Module Motion CPU Module
SSCNET III Cable Length
Q172DLX Q172DLX
SSCNET III Cable Length

1 1 1 1 1 1
Q172DLX 2 2 2 2 2 2
PLS. A PLS. B TREN 3 3 3 3 3 3
MR-J3BUS_M use
1 1 1
2 2 2 24VDC Q173SXY 24VDC Q173SXY
3 3 3
24VDC Q173SXY 24VDC Q173SXY

MR-J3BUS_M use ≤3m (9.84 ft)
≤3m (9.84 ft)
MR-J3BUS_M-A use
MR-J3BUS_M-A use ≤20m (65.62 ft)
≤20m (65.62 ft)
MR-J3BUS_M-B use
MR-J3BUS_M-B use ≤50m (164.04 ft)
≤50m (164.04 ft)
CN2 CN1 SSCNET III System 1
CN1
Attach cap to connectors

of system not being used. CN1A CN1A
CN1A CN1A Cap
Cap CN1B CN1B
CN1B CN1B Servo Amplifier Servo Amplifier
MR-J3-B Safety MR-J3-B Safety
Servo Amplifier Servo Amplifier
MR-J3-B Safety MR-J3-B Safety SSCNET III System 2
CN1A CN1A
Cap
CN1B CN1B

MR-J3-B Safety MR-J3-B Safety
Miscellaneous Parts
HMI Please select the HMI from the GOT1000 Series in this Product Selection Guide N/A
Q170DBATC Battery holder for Q6BAT (Battery not included) S
Q6BAT Battery for memory data backup of SRAM built-in Motion CPU S
A6BAT Battery for data backup of the Q170ENC S
Q170DBATCBL05M Cable between Q170DBATC holder and Motion CPU (0.5M) S
MR-J3USBCBL3M USB cable from PC to PLC CPU (3M) S
SC-Q RS-232 cable from PC to PLC CPU S
Manuals
IB(NA)0300133 Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU User’s Manual MEAU.com
IB(NA)0300134 Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Programming Manual (Common) MEAU.com
IB(NA)0300135 Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Programming Manual (Motion SFC) MEAU.com
IB(NA)0300136 Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Programming Manual (Real Mode) MEAU.com
IB(NA)0300137 Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Programming Manual (Virtual Mode) MEAU.com
SH(NA)030084 MR-J3-B Safety Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual MEAU.com
SH(NA)030041 MR-J3 Servo Motor Instruction Manual MEAU.com
Cables for Q172DCPU/Q173DCPU to MR-J3-B Safety Servo Amplifiers

MR-J3BUS015M 0.15M SSCNET III (plastic) cable from Q172D/173DCPU to MR-J3-B Safety Amplifier S
MR-J3BUS1M 1M SSCNET III (plastic) cable from Q172D/173DCPU to MR-J3-B Safety Amplifier S
MR-J3BUS3M 3M SSCNET III (plastic) cable from Q172D/173DCPU to MR-J3-B Safety Amplifier S
MR-J3BUS5M-A 5M SSCNET III (plastic) cable from Q172D/173DCPU to MR-J3-B Safety Amplifier S
MR-J3BUS30M-B 30M SSCNET III (glass) cable from Q172D/173DCPU to MR-J3-B Safety Amplifier S
MR-J3BUS40M-B 40M SSCNET III (glass) cable from Q172D/173DCPU to MR-J3-B Safety Amplifier -
MR-J3BUS50M-B 50M SSCNET III (glass) cable from Q172D/173DCPU to MR-J3-B Safety Amplifier -

Cables and Connectors for Special Function Modules
Q173DPX connector to use the manual pulse generator and incremental synchronous encoder or
A6CON1 S
Q172DLX connector to use the servo external input signals
QD75MCBL-2M 2M I/O pigtail cable to use in place of the A6CON1 connector S
A6TBXY36 Q172DLX terminal block conversion module - Sink Type I/O (Standard type) S
A6TBXY54 Q172DLX terminal block conversion module - Sink Type I/O (2-wire type) -
A6TBXY70 Q172DLX terminal block conversion module - Sink Type I/O (3-wire type) -
AC05TB 0.5M cable from Q172DLX to A6TBXY_ _ terminal block conversion module S
AC10TB 1M cable from Q172DLX to A6TBXY_ _ terminal block conversion module S
AC80TB 8M cable from Q172DLX to A6TBXY_ _ terminal block conversion module -
AC100TB 10M cable from Q172DLX to A6TBXY_ _ terminal block conversion module -
Q170ENCCNS Connector set for the Q170ENC absolute synchronous encoder S
Q170ENCCBL2M 2M cable from the Q172DEX to the Q170ENC absolute synchronous encoder S
Q170ENCCBL20M 20M cable from the Q172DEX to the Q170ENC absolute synchronous encoder -
Cables for Forced Stop Input Connector (EMI)

Q170DEMICBL05M 0.5M cable for EMI connector on CPU S
Q170DEMICBL1M 1M cable for EMI connector on CPU S
G. Operating and Programming Software

MT WORKS2
Conveyor assembly use Automatic machinery use
Motion SFC compatible Motion SFC compatible
SW8DNC-SV13QB (Q173DCPU) SW8DNC-SV22QA (Q173DCPU)
Dedicated language Mechanical support language
SW8DNC-SV13QD (Q172DCPU) SW8DNC-SV22QC (Q172DCPU)
Electronic component assembly, Press feeder, Food processing, Food

Inserter, Feeder, Molder, Conveying packaging, Winding machine, Spinning
equipment, Paint applicator, Chip machine, Textile machine, Printing
mounting, Wafer slicer, Loader/Unloader, machine, Book binder, Tire molder,
Bonding machine, X-Y table Paper-making machine
Linear interpolation (1 to 4 axes), Circular interpolation, Synchronous control, Electronic shaft,

Constant-speed, Fixed-pitch feed, Speed control with Electronic clutch, Electronic cam, Draw
fixed position stop, Speed switching, Speed control, control
Speed/position switching
Q Series Integrated Start-up Support Software Packages

Model Number Stocked Item Description Details
SW1DNC-MTW2-E Conveyor assembly software; Automatic machinery software; Cam data creation
(Integrated start-up support software) software; Digital oscilloscope software; Document print software; Help section
QD Series Q172DCPU (SSCNET III) SW8DNC-SV13QD: For conveyor assembly
Operating Software (OS) SW8DNC-SV22QC: For automatic machinery
MT-WORKS2-C1 S
QD Series Q173DCPU (SSCNET III) SW8DNC-SV13QB: For conveyor assembly
Operating Software (OS) SW8DNC-SV22QA: For automatic machinery
Single user license - can be used on 1 computer at a time; Installation manual included
MT-WORKS2-C5 - 5 user license - can be used on up to 5 computers at a time
216
QD75MH Positioning Modules for QH Series Automation Platform
One of Q Series’ strengths is the ability to integrate motion control directly onto your system. If a Q Series motion CPU is not required,
the QD75MH positioning modules provide a range of alternative motion control capabilities. The QD75MH is connected to MR-J3-B Safety
servo amplifiers by means of the Servo System Control Network (SSCNET III). This allows compatibility with absolute position systems,
between the QD75MH and servo amplifiers (overall distance of 30 meters). Key features include: one, two and four axis versions available;
1MHz output capacity; Support up to 256 axes; 4 axis linear interpolation; Circular interpolation; variety of control schemes (point to point,
fixed feed, speed, speed/position and position/speed).
CPU QD75MH
QD75MH4
RUN AX1
AX2
AX3
ERR AX4
QD75MH4
AX3 AX1
AX4 AX2
Manual Pulse
Generator
Machine System Inputs (Switches)
SSCNET III Cable
USB Cable
MR-J3-B Safety Servo Motor

RS-232C Cable
Software
QD75MH Parts List
QD75MH1 SSCNET III single axis motion controller for Q Series Automation Platform S
QD75MH2 SSCNET III dual axis motion controller for Q Series Automation Platform S
QD75MH4 SSCNET III 4 axis motion controller for Q Series Automation Platform S
GX-CONFIG-QP-C1 Programming software for QD75M and QD75MH motion modules (optional) S
MR-HDP01 Optional manual pulse generator S
Cables and Accessories
A6CON1 Spare I/O connector, solder type S
A6CON2 Spare I/O connector, crimp type S
A6CON3 Spare I/O connector, IDC type S
A6CON4 Spare I/O connector, low profile type -
QD75MCBL-2M I/O cable - pigtail (order 2 for QD75M4 or QD75MH4) 2M S
MR-J3BUS015M SSCNET III (plastic) cable (QD75MH to MR-J3-BS) and (MR-J3-BS to MR-J3-BS) 0.15M S
MR-J3BUS1M SSCNET III (plastic) cable (QD75MH to MR-J3-BS) and (MR-J3-BS to MR-J3-BS) 1M S
MR-J3BUS3M SSCNET III (plastic) cable (QD75MH to MR-J3-BS) and (MR-J3-BS to MR-J3-BS) 3M S
MR-J3BUS5M-A SSCNET III (plastic) cable (QD75MH to MR-J3-BS) and (MR-J3-BS to MR-J3-BS) 5M S
MR-J3BUS30M-B SSCNET III (glass) cable (QD75MH to MR-J3-BS) and (MR-J3-BS to MR-J3-BS) 30M S
MR-J3BUS40M-B SSCNET III (glass) cable (QD75MH to MR-J3-BS) and (MR-J3-BS to MR-J3-BS) 40M -
MR-J3BUS50M-B SSCNET III (glass) cable (QD75MH to MR-J3-BS) and (MR-J3-BS to MR-J3-BS) 50M -
Manuals
IB(NA)66900 GX-CONFIG-QP-C1 Software Operating Manual MEAU.com
IB(NA)0300117 QD75MH User Manual (details) MEAU.com
IB(NA)0300099 QD75MH User Manual (hardware) MEAU.com
Note: Please refer to the Servomotor and Amplifiers Section in this Product Selection Guide to select servo amplifier and motor model numbers.

QD75MH Performance Speciications
Model Number QD75MH1 QD75MH2 QD75MH4
No. of Control Axes 1 Axis 2 Axis 4 Axis
2 axis linear interpolation 2, 3, or 4 axis linear interpolation
Interpolation Function None
2 axis circular interpolation 2 axis circular interpolation
PTP (Point To Point) control, path control (both linear and arc can be set), speed control, speed position switching control,
Control System
position-speed switching control
Positioning Data 600 data (positioning data Nos. 1 to 600)/axis (Can be set with peripheral device or PLC program.)
PTP control: Incremental system/absolute system; Speed-position switching control: Incremental system/absolute system (*1);
Positioning System
Position-speed switching control: Incremental system; Path control: Incremental system/absolute system
-214748364.8 to 214748364.7 (µm) • -21474.83648 to 21474.83647

In Absolute System
(inch)0 to 359.99999 (degree) • -2147483648 to 2147483647 (PLS)
-214748364.8 to 214748364.7 (µm) • -21474.83648 to 21474.83647
In incremental System
(inch)-21474.83648 to 21474.83647 (degree) • -2147483648 to 2147483647 (PLS)
In Speed-Position Switching
0 to 214748364.7 (µm) • 0 to 21474.83647 (inch)
Control (INC mode) / Position-
0 to 21474.83647 (degree) • 0 to 2147483647 (PLS)
Positioning Speed Switching Control
In Speed-Position Switching
Control (ABS Mode) (*1) 0 to 359.99999 (degree)
Positioning Range
Speed Command 0.01 to 20000000.00 (mm/min) • 0.001 to 2000000.000 (inch/min) • 0.001 to 2000000.000 (degree/min) (*3) • 1 to 50000000 (PLS/s)
Acceleration/ Deceleration
Automatic trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration
Process
Acceleration/ Deceleration Time 1 to 8388608 (ms): Four patterns can be set for each of acceleration time and deceleration time
1 axis linear control: 3.5

1 axis speed control: 3.5
2 axis linear interpolation control (Composite speed): 4.0
Factors in starting time extension. The
2 axis linear interpolation control (Reference axis speed): 4.0 following times will be added to the starting
2 axis circular interpolation control: 4.0 time in the described conditions:
• S-pattern acceleration/deceleration is
Starting Time (ms) (*2) 2 axis speed control: 3.5
selected: 0.5
3 axis linear interpolation control (Composite speed): 4.0 • Other axis is in operation: 1.5
3 axis linear interpolation control (Reference axis speed): 4.0 • During continuous positioning control: 0.2
• During continuous path control: 1.0
4 axis linear interpolation control: 4.0
0.3 mm² (when A6CON1 and A6CON4 are used), AWG#24 to 28 (when A6CON2 is used), AWG#28 (twisted)/AWG#30 (single wire)
(when A6CON3 is used)
Applicable Connector for External Device A6CON1, A6CON2, A6CON3, A6CON4 (sold separately)
• Connection between QD75MH and MR-J3-_ _B Safety.
• Connection between MR-J3-_ _B Safety and MR-J3-_ _B Safety.
MR-J3BUS_ _M (*4)
• Standard code for inside panel.
• 0.15m (0.49ft.), 0.3m (0.98ft.), 0.5m (1.64ft.), 1m (3.28ft.), 3m (9.84ft.)
• Connection between QD75MH and MR-J3-B Safety.
SSCNET III Cable MR-J3BUS_ _M-A (*4)
• Standard code for outside panel.
• 5m(16.40ft.), 10m (32.81ft.), 20m (65.62ft.)
• Connection between QD75MH and MR-J3-_ _B Safety.
MR-J3BUS_ _M-B (*4)
• Long distance cable.
• 30m (98.43ft.), 40m (131.23ft.), 50m (164.04ft.)
SSCNET III Cable Overall Length (m) 50 50 50
Internal Current Consumption (5VDC) QD75MH1 : 0.60A QD75MH2 : 0.60A QD75MH4 : 0.60A
No. of Occupied I/O Points (Points) 32 (I/O assignment: 32 points for intelligent function module)
Dimensions W x H x D mm (in) 27.4 x 98 x 90 (1.08 x 3.86 x 3.54)
Notes:
2. Using the “Pre-reading start function”, the virtual start time can be shortened.
3. When “Speed control 10 x multiplier setting for degree axis function” is valid, this will be the setting range 0.01 to 20000000.00 (degree/min).
4. _ _ = Cable length. (015: 0.15m (0.49ft.), 03: 0.3m (0.98ft.), 05: 0.5m (1.64ft.), 1: 1m (3.28ft.), 3: 3m (9.84ft.), 5: 5m (16.40ft.), 10: 10m (32.80ft.), 20: 20m (65.62ft.), 30: 30m (98.43ft.),
40: 40m (131.23ft.), 50: 50m (164.04ft.) )
218
QD75MH Input/Output (X/Y) Comparisons
Input (X) Output (Y)
Name QD75MH Name QD75MH
(QD75) READY X00 Axis 1 Positioning Start Y10
Axis 1 Start Complete X10 Axis 2 Positioning Start Y11
Axis 4 Start Complete X13 Axis 1 STOP Y04
Axis 1 BUSY X0C Axis 2 STOP Y05
Axis 2 BUSY X0D Axis 3 STOP Y06
Axis 3 BUSY X0E Axis 4 STOP Y07
Axis 4 BUSY X0F All Axis Servo ON Y01
Axis 1 Positioning Complete X14 Axis 1 Forward Run JOG Start Y08
Axis 2 Positioning Complete X15 Axis 1 Reverse Run JOG Start Y09
Axis 3 Positioning Complete X16 Axis 2 Forward Run JOG Start Y0A
Axis 4 Positioning Complete X17 Axis 2 Reverse Run JOG Start Y0B
Axis 1 Error Detection X08 Axis 3 Forward Run JOG Start Y0C
Axis 2 Error Detection X09 Axis 3 Reverse Run JOG Start Y0D
Axis 3 Error Detection X0A Axis 4 Forward Run JOG Start Y0E
Axis 4 Error Detection X0B Axis 4 Reverse Run JOG Start Y0F
Axis 1 M Code ON X04 PLC READY Y00
Axis 2 M Code ON X05 Axis 1 Execution Prohibition Flag Y14
Synchronization Flag X01 Axis 4 Execution Prohibition Flag Y17
Use Prohibited X02, X03, X18 to X1F Use Prohibited Y02, Y03, Y18 to Y1F
QD75MH4
Axis 2 (AX2) Axis 1 (AX1)

RUN AX1
AX2
AX3
ERR AX4
Pin Layout AX3 AX1

QD75MH4
Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name AX4 AX2
1B20 PULSER B- 1A20 PULSER B+

1B19 PULSER A- 1A19 PULSER A+
B20 A20 1B18 No connect 1A18 No connect
B19 A19
B16 A16
B15 A15 1B15 5V 1A15 5V
B14 A14 1B14 SG 1A14 SG
B13 A13
B11 A11
B8 A8
B5 A5
B4 A4 1B8 EMI.COM 1A8 EMI
B3 A3
1B7 COM 1A7 COM
B2 A2
B1 A1 1B6 COM 1A6 COM
1B5 CHG 1A5 CHG
1B4 STOP 1A4 STOP
Front view of
1B3 DOG 1A3 DOG
the module
1B2 RLS 1A2 RLS
1B1 FLS 1A1 FLS
Note:
1. The pin arrangement of the axis 3 (AX3)/axis 4 (AX4) of QD75MH_ _ and QD75M_ _ is the same.

LD77MH and QD77MS Simple Motion Modules
The LD77MH and QD77MS simple motion modules offer the flexibility to include or add motion to the L series PLC. A variety of controls
including positioning control, speed control, torque control, cam control and synchronous control can be achieved with simple parameter
settings and a sequence program. The LD77MH and QD77MS modules are capable of 2 axes and 16 axes of control and add the functionality
and convenience of using the MR-J3-B Safety amplifiers with Mitsubishi’s 50Mbps high-speed optical communication Servo System Control
Network (SSCNETIII).
LD77MH / QD77MS
LD77MH4 1
RUN 2
AX 3
ERR.
4
P
U CN1
L
S
E
R
MR-J3-B Safety MR-J3-B Safety MR-J3W-B
SSCNET III Cable
USB Cable
RS-232C Cable
Cable
Manual Pulse
Generator
Software
LD77MH Parts List

Model Number Description Stocked Items
LD77MH4 4 Axis Motion Controller for L Series PLC S
LD77MH16 16 Axis Motion Controller for L Series PLC S
GX-WORKS2-C1 PLC and Motion Programming Software S
MR-CONFIGURATOR2 Communication Software for MR-J3-B Safety Amplifiers S
MR-HDP01 Optional Manual Pulse Generator S
Cables and Accessories
MR-ECN1 External I/O Signal Connector. S
LD77DOCBL-2M Differential Output Type Cable for External I/O - 2 Meter S
LD77DOCBL-20M Differential Output Type Cable for External I/O - 20 Meter -
LD77DOCBL-30M Differential Output Type Cable for External I/O - 30 Meter -
LD77OCCBL-2M Voltage Output/Open Collector Cable for External I/O - 2 Meter S
MR-J3BUS015M 0.15 meter SSCNET III (plastic) cable from LD77MH to MR-J3-B Safety Amplifier S
MR-J3BUS03M 0.3 meter SSCNET III (plastic) cable from LD77MH to MR-J3-B Safety Amplifier S
MR-J3BUS05M 0.5 meter SSCNET III (plastic) cable fromLD77MH to MR-J3-B Safety Amplifier S
MR-J3BUS1M 1 meter SSCNET III (plastic) cable from LD77MH to MR-J3-B Safety Amplifier S
MR-J3BUS3M 3 meter SSCNET III (plastic) cable from LD77MH to MR-J3-B Safety Amplifier S
MR-J3BUS5M-A 5 meter SSCNET III (plastic) cable from LD77MH to MR-J3-B Safety Amplifier S
MR-J3BUS30M-B 30 meter SSCNET III (glass) cable from LD77MH to MR-J3-B Safety Amplifier S
MR-J3BUS40M-B 40 meter SSCNET III (glass) cable from LD77MH to MR-J3-B Safety Amplifier -
MR-J3BUS50M-B 50 meter SSCNET III (glass) cable from LD77MH to MR-J3-B Safety Amplifier -
MR-TBNATBL05M 0.5M cable used to make a connection to the LD77MH4 and LD77MH16 -
MR-TBNATBL1M 1M cable used to make a connection to the LD77MH4 and LD77MH16 -
MR-TB26A Junction terminal block S
Manuals
IB(NA)0300172 LD77MH Simple Motion Module User’s Manual MEAU.com
IB(NA)0300163 MR Configurator2 (SW1DNC-MRC2-E) Installation Guide MEAU.com
220
LD77MH Performance Speciications
Model Number LD77MH4 LD77MH16
Stocked Status S S
Number of Control Axes 4 16
Operation Cycle (ms) 0.88 0.88/1.77
PTP (Point To Point) control, path control (both linear and arc can be set), speed control, speed-position switching
Control System
control, position-speed switching control, Speed-torque control
Positioning Data 600 data/axis. (Can be set with GX Works2 or sequence program.)
PTP control: Incremental system/absolute system
Speed-position switching control: Incremental system/absolute system (*1)
Positioning System
Position-speed switching control: Incremental system
Path control: Incremental system/absolute system
Applicable Connector for External Input Signal LD77MHIOCON
LD77MH MR-J3(W)-_B/MR-J3(W)-_B MR-J3(W)-_B; Standard cord for inside panel; 0.15 (0.49), 0.3 (0.98), 0.5
MR-J3BUS_M [m (ft)] (*2)
(1.64), 1 (3.28), 3 (9.84)
SSCNET III Cable LD77MH MR-J3(W)-_B/MR-J3(W)-_ MR-J3(W)-_B; Standard cable for outside panel; 5 (16.40), 10 (32.81), 20
MR-J3BUS_M-A [m (ft)] (*2)
(65.62)
MR-J3BUS_M-B [m (ft)] (*2,*3) LD77MH MR-J3(W)-_B/MR-J3(W)-_B MR-J3(W)-_B; Long distance cable; 30 (98.43 ), 40 (131.23), 50 (164.04)
Number of Occupied I/O Points) 32 (I/O assignment: Intelligent function module 32 points)
Number of Applicable Modules Up to 5 modules
Outline Dimensions W x H x D mm (in) 45.0 x 90.0 x 95.0 (1.77 x 3.54 x 3.74)
Weight (kg) 0.22
External Command Signal - Switching Signal DI signal (External start or speed-position switching can be selected by parameter.)
Notes:
2. _ = Cable length: (015: 0.15m (0.49ft.), 03: 0.3m (0.98ft.), 05: 0.5m (1.64ft.), 1: 1m (3.28ft.), 3: 3m (9.84ft.), 5: 5m (16.40ft.), 10: 10m (32.81ft.), 20: 20m (65.62ft.), 30: 30m (98.43ft.), 40: 40m (131.23ft.), 50:
50m (164.04ft.) )
3. For the cable of less than 30(m)(98.43(ft.)), contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.

LD77MH_ Input/Output (X/Y) Comparisons
Signal Direction: LD77MH4 - PLC CPU Signal Direction: PLC CPU - LD77MH4 Signal Direction: LD77MH16 - PLC CPU Signal Direction: PLC CPU - LD77MH16
Device No. Signal Name Device No. Signal Name Device No. Signal Name Device No. Signal Name
X0 LD77 READY Y0 PLC READY X0 LD77 READY Y0 PLC READY
X1 Synchronization flag Y1 All Axis Servo ON X1 Synchronization flag Y1 All Axis Servo ON
X2 Y2 X2 Y2
Use prohibited Use prohibited
X3 Y3 X3 Y3
X4 Axis 1 Y4 Axis 1 X4 Y4
M code ON Axis stop
Forward run X8 Y8
X8 Axis 1 Y8 Use prohibited Use prohibited
JOG start
Axis 1 X9 Y9
Reverse run
X9 Axis 2 Y9 XA YA
Error JOG start
detection Forward run XB YB
XA Axis 3 YA
JOG start XC YC
Axis 2
Reverse run XD YD
XB Axis 4 YB
JOG start
XE YE
Forward run
XC Axis 1 YC XF YF
JOG start
Axis 3
Reverse run X10 Axis 1 Y10 Axis 1
XD Axis 2 YD
JOG start X11 Axis 2 Y11 Axis 2
BUSY
Forward run Axis 3 Axis 3
XE Axis 3 YE X12 Y12
JOG start
Axis 4 X13 Axis 4 Y13 Axis 4
Reverse run
XF Axis 4 YF X14 Axis 5 Y14 Axis 5
JOG start
X10 Axis 1 Y10 Axis 1 X15 Axis 6 Y15 Axis 6
X11 Axis 2 Start Y11 Axis 2 Positioning X16 Axis 7 Y16 Axis 7
X12 Axis 3 complete Y12 Axis 3 start X17 Axis 8 Y17 Axis 8 Positioning
Busy
X13 Axis 4 Y13 Axis 4 X18 Axis 9 Y18 Axis 9 start
X15 Axis 2 Y15 Axis 2 Execution X1A Axis 11 Y1A Axis 11
Positioning
prohibition
X16 Axis 3 complete Y16 Axis 3 X1B Axis 12 Y1B Axis 12
flag
X17 Axis 4 Y17 Axis 4 X1C Axis 13 Y1C Axis 13
X18 Y18 X1D Axis 14 Y1D Axis 14
X19 Y19 X1E Axis 15 Y1E Axis 15
X1A Y1A X1F Axis 16 Y1F Axis 16
X1B Y1B
Use prohibited Use prohibited
X1C Y1C
X1D Y1D
X1E Y1E
X1F Y1F
LD77MH4 1
RUN 2
AX
Pin Layout Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name ERR. 3
4
1 5V 14 5V
P
2 SG 15 SG U CN1
1 14 L
S
E
2 15
3 HA (*1, *2, *3) 16 HB (*1, *2, *3)
R
3 16
4 17 4 HAH (*1, *2, *4) 17 HBH (*1, *2, *4)
5 18
6 19 5 HAL (*1, *2, *4) 18 HBL (*1, *2, *4)
7 20 6 19
8 21
9 22 7 20
10 23 No connect (*5) No connect (*5)
11 24 8 21
12 25 9 22
13 26
10 EMI 23 EMI, COM
Front view of 11 DI1(*6) 24 DI2(*6)
the module 12 DI3 (*6) 25 DI4 (*6)
13 COM (*7) 26 COM (*7)
Notes:
1. Input type from manual pulse generator/incremental synchronous encoder is switched in “ Pr.89 Manual pulse generator/
Incremental synchronous encoder input type selection”. (Only the value specified against the axis 1 is valid.)
• 0: Differential-output type (Default value)
• 1: Voltage-output/open-collector type
2. Set the signal input form in “Pr.24 Manual pulse generator/Incremental synchronous encoder input selection”.
3. Voltage-output/open-collector type - Connect the A-phase/PLS signal to HA, and the B-phase/SIGN signal to HB.
4. Differential-output type - Connect the A-phase/PLS signal to HAH, and the A-phase/PLS inverse signal to HAL. Connect the
B-phase/SIGN signal to HBH, and the B-phase/SIGN inverse signal to HBL.
5. Do not connect to any of the terminal is explained as “No connect”.
6. Set the external command signal (DI) in “ Pr.95 External command signal selection” at LD77MH16 use.
7. “COM” is the common terminal of DI1, DI2, DI3 and DI4.
222
Simple Motion Module QD77MS Parts List
QD77MS16 Up to 16 axes control S
Manual pulse generator, Pulse resolution: 25PLS/rev(100PLS/rev after magnification by 4). Permitted speed: 200r/min
MR-HDP01 S
(Normal rotation)
GX Works2 SW1DNC-GXW2-E, Sequence program creation, QD77MS setting S
MR Configurator2 SW1DNC-MRC2-E, Servo amplifier MR-J4 series setting and adjustment S
Cables and Accessories (*1)
MR-J3BUS_M SSCNET III cable, Standard cord for inside panel (_ = available lengths in meters: 0.15, 0.3, 0.5, 1, 3) S
MR-J3BUS_M-A SSCNET III cable, Standard cord for outside panel (_ = available lengths in meters: 5, 10, 20) S
MR-J3BUS_M-B (*2) SSCNET III cable, long distance cable (_ = available lengths in meters: 30, 40, 50) S
Manuals
IB(NA)-0300174-B(1202)MEE QD77MS/LD77MH Simple Motion Module Users Manual (synchronous control) MEAU.com
IB-(NA)-0300185-A(1202)MEE Melsec-Q QD77MS Simple Motion Module Users Manual (positioning control) MEAU.com
Notes:
1. Please contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative for the cable of 100m.
2. _=Cable length (015: 0.15m (0.49ft.), 03: 0.3m (0.98ft.), 05: 0.5m (1.64ft.), 1: 1m (3.28ft.), 3: 3m (9.84ft.), 5: 5m (16.40ft.), 10: 10m (32.81ft.), 20: 20m (65.62ft.), 30: 30m (98.43ft.), 40: 40m (131.23ft.),
50: 50m (164.04ft.))
QD77MS Input/Output (X/Y) Comparisons

Signal Direction: QD77MS2 - Signal Direction: PLC CPU - Signal Direction: Signal Direction: Signal Direction: Signal Direction:
PLC CPU QD77MS2 QD77MS4 - PLC CPU PLC CPU - QD77MS4 QD77MS16 - PLC CPU PLC CPU - QD77MS16
Device Device Device Device Device Device
Signal Name Signal Name Signal Name Signal Name Signal Name Signal Name
No. No. No. No. No. No.
X0 QD77 READY Y0 PLC READY X0 QD77 READY Y0 PLC READY X0 QD77 READY Y0 PLC READY
X1 Synchronization flag Y1 All Axis Servo ON X1 Synchronization flag Y1 All Axis Servo ON Synchronization
X1 Y1 All Axis Servo ON
X2 Y2 X2 Y2 flag
Use prohibited Use prohibited Use prohibited Use prohibited X2 Y2
X3 Y3 X3 Y3
X3 Y3
M code ON Axis stop X4 Y4
M code ON Axis Stop X5 Y5
X6 Y6 X6 Axis 3 Y6 Axis 3
Use prohibited Use prohibited X6 Y6
Forward run X7 Y7
X8 Axis 1 Y8 Forward run
Error JOG start X8 Axis 1 Y8 X8 Y8
Axis 1 JOG start Use prohibited Use prohibited
detection Reverse run Axis 1
X9 Axis 2 Y9 Reverse run X9 Y9
JOG start X9 Axis 2 Y9
Error JOG start XA YA
Forward run Detection Forward run
XA YA XA Axis 3 YA XB YB
JOG start JOG start
Use prohibited Axis 2 Axis 2 XC YC
Reverse run Reverse run
XB YB XB Axis 4 YB
JOG start JOG start XD YD
XC Axis 1 YC Forward run XE YE
BUSY XC Axis 1 YC
XD Axis 2 YD JOG start XF YF
Use prohibited Axis 3
Reverse run
XE YE XD Axis 2 YD X10 Axis 1 Y10 Axis 1
Use prohibited JOG start
XF YF Busy X11 Axis 2 Y11 Axis 2
Forward run
Axis 1 Axis 1 XE Axis 3 YE
X10 Start Y10 Positioning JOG start X12 Axis 3 Y12 Axis 3
complete start Axis 4
X11 Axis 2 Y11 Axis 2 Reverse run X13 Axis 4 Y13 Axis 4
XF Axis 4 YF
X12 Y12 JOG start X14 Axis 5 Y14 Axis 5
Use prohibited Use prohibited X10 Axis 1 Y10 Axis 1
Axis 1 Axis 1 Execution X11 Axis 2 Start Y11 Axis 2 Positioning
X14 Positioning Y14 X16 Axis 7 Y16 Axis 7
prohibition X12 Axis 3 Complete Y12 Axis 3 start
X15 Axis 2 complete Y15 Axis 2 X17 Axis 8 Y17 Axis 8 Positioning
flag X13 Axis 4 Y13 Axis 4 Busy
X18 Axis 9 Y18 Axis 9 Start
X19 Axis 10 Y19 Axis 10
X17 Y17 X15 Axis 2 Positioning Y15 Axis 2 Execution
X18 Y18 Prohibition X1A Axis 11 Y1A Axis 11
X16 Axis 3 complete Y16 Axis 3 Flag
X19 Y19 X1B Axis 12 Y1B Axis 12
X17 Axis 4 Y17 Axis 4
X1A Y1A X1C Axis 13 Y1C Axis 13
Use prohibited Use prohibited X18 Y18
X1B Y1B X1D Axis 14 Y1D Axis 14
X19 Y19
X1C Y1C X1E Axis 15 Y1E Axis 15
X1A Y1A
X1D Y1D X1F Axis 16 Y1F Axis 16
X1B Y1B
X1E Y1E Use prohibited Use prohibited
X1C Y1C
X1F Y1F X1D Y1D
X1E Y1E
X1F Y1F

Simple Motion Module QD77MS Performance Speciications
Model Number QD77MS16 QD77MS4 QD77MS2 (*3)
Stocked Item S S S
Number of Control Axes 16 axes 4 axes 2 axes
Operation Cycle 0.88 ms / 1.77 ms (*1) 0.88 ms 0.88 ms
Interpolation Function Linear interpolation (Up to 4 axes), Circular interpolation (2 axes)
PTP (Point To Point) control, Path control (both linear and arc can be set), Speed control, Torque control, Speed-position switching
Control System
control, Position-speed switching control
Acceleration/Deceleration Process Trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration
Compensation Function Backlash compensation, Electronic gear, Near pass function
Synchronous Control External encoder, Cam, Phase Compensation, Cam auto-generation function
Positioning Data 600 data (positioning data No. 1 to 600)/axis (Can be set with MELSOFT GX Works2 or PLC program)
Machine OPR Control Near-point dog method, Count method 1, Count method 2, Data set method, Scale origin signal detection method
OPR Control Fast OPR Control Provided
Sub Functions OPR retry, OP shift
1-axis linear control, 2-axis linear interpolation control, 3-axis linear interpolation control, 4-axis linear interpolation control (*4)
Linear Control
(Composite speed, Reference axis speed)
Fixed-Feed Control 1-axis fixed-feed control, 2-axis fixed-feed control, 3-axis fixed-feed control, 4-axis fixed-feed control
2-Axis Circular Interpolation
Sub point designation, center point designation
Control
Speed Control 1-axis speed control, 2-axis speed control, 3-axis speed control, 4-axis speed control
Speed-Position Switching
Positioning Control INC mode, ABS mode
Position-Speed Switching
INC mode
Control
Current Value Changing Changing to a new current value using the positioning data, changing to a new current value using the start No.
NOP Instruction Provided
JUMP Instruction Unconditional JUMP, Conditional JUMP
LOOP, LEND Provided
High-Level Positioning Control Block start, Condition start, Wait start, Simultaneous start, Repeated start
JOG Operation Provided
Manual Inching Operation Provided
Control Manual Pulse Generator
Possible to connect 1 module (Incremental) Unit magnification (1 to 10000 times)
Operation
Expansion
Speed-Torque Control Speed control without positioning loops, Torque control without positioning loops, Tightening and Press-fit control
Control
Absolute Position System Made compatible by setting battery to servo amplifier
Synchronous Encoder Interface Up to 4 channel (internal interface, servo amplifier, via the PLC CPU interface)
Internal Interface 1 channel (Incremental)
Speed Limit Function Speed limit value, JOG speed limit value
Torque Limit Function Torque limit value_same setting, torque limit value_individual setting
Functions Forced Stop Function Valid/Invalid setting
That Limit
Software Stroke Limit
Control Movable range check with current feed value, movable range check with machine feed value
Function
Hardware Stroke Limit
Provided
Function
Speed Change Function Provided
Override Function Provided
Functions
That Change Acceleration/Deceleration Provided
Control Time Change Function
Details Torque Change Function Provided
Target Position Change
Target position address and target position speed are changeable
Function
M Code Output Function Provided
Other Step Function Deceleration unit step, Data No. unit step
Functions Skip Function Via sequence CPU, Via external command signal
Teaching function Provided
Mark Detection Function Continuous Detection mode, Specified Number of Detections mode, Ring Buffer mode
Mark Detection Signal 4 points 2 points
Mark Detection Setting 16 4
Optional Data Monitor Function 4 points/axis
Amplifier-less Operation Function Provided
Bit data:16 channels,
Digital Oscilloscope Function (*2) Bit data: 8 channels, Word data: 4 channels
Word data: 16 channels
Number of Occupied I/O Points 32 (I/O assignment: Intelligent function module 32 points)
Dimensions W x H x D mm (in) 27.4 x 98 x 90 (1.08 x 3.86 x 3.5)
Weight (kg) 0.16 0.15
Notes:
1. Default value is 1.77 ms. If necessary, check the operation time and change to 0.88 ms.
2. 8CH word data and 8CH bit data can be displayed in real time.
3. The maximum number of control axes for QD77MS2 is two axes. Use QD77MS4 or QD77MS16 to control three or more axes.
4. 4-axis linear interpolation control is effective only for the reference axis speed.
224
MR-MQ100 Single Axis Motion Controller
The MR-MQ100 was designed to be the performance leader for single axis and 1.5 axis control. Combined with the speed and accuracy of the
SSCNETIII fiber optic communication network as well as the power of the MR-J3-B Safety series servo amplifiers, machines can now perform
at higher production levels where applications involving rotary cut, flying saw, labeling operation and other high speed applications are
required. Intuitive software makes implementation of encoder following, CAM profiles, registration mark synchronization and even servo axis
tuning very easy and quick.
Software
D PC
Hub
MR-MQ100
MITSUBISHI MR-MQ100
A
GOT
B
PULL
POWER
RESET STOP RUN

PERIPHERAL I/F GT16
GT15
GT12
CN1
C External I/O
MR-J3B
Safety MR-J3-D01 GOT
EXT.IO
B
GT16
GT15
24VDC
GT12
+ GT11
24VDC Input
GT10
C B
Manual
Pulse
Generator
Servo
Armature
Cable
B
Servo Feed
Back Cable
Servo motor
A. MR-MQ100 Motion Controller....................................................................................................226

B. Peripheral Equipment .................................................................................................................226
C. Cables and Connectors................................................................................................................227
D. Software ......................................................................................................................................227

A. MR-MQ100 Motion Controller
Single Axis Motion Controller (OS included)
MITSUBISHI MR-MQ100
Model Number MR-MQ100 PULL
POWER
Stocked Item S RESET STOP RUN
PERIPHERAL I/F
Power Supply 24VDC ±10% (Required Current Capacity 400mA)
Digital Inputs* 20 Inputs (AI = 2, AO = 2) CN1
Digital Outputs* 18
Signal Type A/B Phase Pulse Train Input EXT.IO
Synchronous Voltage-Output / Open

Up to 800kpps (After magnification by 4), up to 10m
Encoder Collector Type (5VDC) 24VDC
Differential-Output Type Up to 4Mpps (after magnification by 4), up to 30m

Peripheral Interface 100 Mpbs/10Mpbs Ethernet (for programming and additional operation)
Number of Control Axes 1 axis
Operation Cycle 0.44ms
Servo Amplifier MR-J3B Safety Servo Amplifier
Programming Language Motion SFC, dedicated instruction, mechanical support language (SV22)
Memory Backup Q6BAT
Number of CAMs Up to 256 CAM profiles may be stored internally
CAM Resolution Per Cycle 256, 512, 1024, 2048
Functions Stroke Resolution 32767
Control Mode Two-way CAM, fed CAM
Weight kg (lb) 0.7 (1.54)
*When combined with MR-J3-DO1 card.
B. Peripheral Equipment
MR-J3-D01 Specifications (When used with MR-MQ100 Motion Module)
Model Number MR-J3-D01
Stocked Item S
02NC
Power Supply For Interface 24VDC ±10% (required current capacity: 0.8A (*1, *2))
0 3NC
Digital Input 30 points, photocoupler insulation, sink/source compatible
Digital Output 16 points, photocoupler insulation, sink/source compatible
Analog Input 2ch, 0 to ±10VDC (input impedance: 10 to 12kΩ)
01NC
Analog Output 2ch, 0 to ±12VDC
P15R: DC+15V, permissible current: 30mA
Power Supply for Analog Input Signal
N12R: DC–12V, permissible current: 30mA (*3)
Structure Natural-cooling open (IP00)
Ambient Temperature 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) (non-freezing), storage: -20 to 65°C (-4 to 149°F) (non-freezing)
Ambient Humidity 90% RH maximum (non-condensing), storage: 90% RH maximum (non-condensing)
Environment Atmosphere Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist or dust
Elevation 1000m or less above sea level
Vibration 5.9m/s² or less at 10 to 55Hz (direction of X, Y and Z axes)
Weight g (lbs) 140 (0.31)
Notes:
1. 0.8A is the value when all of the input/output points are used. The current capacity can be stepped down according to the number of input/output points in use.
2. A 24VDC power supply for input/output signals can be shared by the servo amplifier and MR-J3-D01. In this case, secure the power supply capacity corresponding to the
points of the input/output signals to be used.
3. P15R can be used as a power supply for TLA and VC. N12R can be used as a power supply for VC. Note that the power voltage varies between -12V to -15V.
Manual Pulse Generator

Model Number MR-HDP01 3.6 (0.14) Packing t = 2.0
3 t ( 4 10)
Stocked Item S 0
90
P 72 i ac
NP
10
25 PLS/rev (100 PLS/rev at magnification of 4) +
+
ø60 (2.36)0.5
ø80 (3.15)1
ø70 (2.76)
ø50 (1.97)
20
Voltage - output (power supply voltage - 1V or more),

80
Pulse Resolution Method +5 t

12 0
Output current = Up to 20 mA
30
+ +
70
+ + + +
4.5 to 13.2VDC
+
60
40
Power Supply Voltage 50
3 6

3 ø4.8 (0 t 19) (0.63)(0.79) (1.06) (0.35) (0.3)
i ac
Radial load : Max. 19.6N; Thrust load : Max. 9.8N

) 20
Permitted Axis Load

(2.44
ø62
ø72 (2
Pulse Signal Status 2 signals: A phase, B phase, 90° phase difference .83) 0.2
nit (inc )
Friction Torque 0.1N/m (at 20°C (68°F)) + +
Operating Temperature -10°C to +60°C (14°F to 140°F)

Note: If using an external power supply, it needs to be 5VDC.
226
HMIs Available to Connect to the MR-MQ100
Model Description Stocked Item
GT16 Series Advanced Models (Machine, Factory, Enterprise Level) (*1)
GT15 Series Full-Spec Models (Machine, Factory, Enterprise Level) (*1)
GT12 Series Standard Models (Machine, Factory Level) (*1)
GT11 Series Standard Models (Machine Level) (*1)
GT10 Series Compact Models (Machine Level) (*1)
Note:
1. For more information on HMI’s please refer to page Human Machine Interface section in this catalog.
Servo Amplifiers Available to Connect to the MR-MQ100

MR-J3-B Safety Series Advanced SSCNETIII optical communication interface (*1)
MR-J3-B-RJ004 Series Linear Servo using SSCNETIII optical communication interface (*1)
Note:
1. For more information on Servo Systems please refer to the Servomotors and Amplifiers section in this catalog.
Replacement Batteries for MR-MQ100

Q6BAT Battery, replacement for memory back-up S
Q7BAT Battery, high capacity replacement for memory back-up S
C. Cables and Connectors

Cables and Connectors for MR-MQ100
MR-J3BUS015M SSCNET III cable, 0.15M S
MR-J3BUS1M SSCNET III cable, 1M S
MR-J3BUS3M SSCNET III cable, 3M S
MR-J3BUS5M-A SSCNET III cable, 5M S
MR-J3BUS30M-B SSCNET III cable, 30M S
MR-J3BUS40M-B SSCNET III cable, 40M -
MR-J3BUS50M-B SSCNET III cable, 50M -
MR-MQEXT422CBL-3M Cable for EXT I/O - RS-422 connector on MR-MQ100, 3M S
MR-MQPWRCBL-3M Cable for 24VDC power to MR-MQ100, 3M S
Q170MIOCON 50 pin solder connector for the EXT I/O connector Included with MR-MQ100 Module
Q170MPWCON 24VDC connector and pins for the power input Included with MR-MQ100 Module
Q170MPWCBL2M-E Cable for 24VDC power with EMI terminal jumper S
MR-J3D01MQ20-3M 20 Pin Pigtail Cable for MR-MQ100/MR-J3-D01 Only - 3M S
MR-J3D01MQ50-3M 50 Pin Pigtail Cable for MR-MQ100/MR-J3-D01 Only - 3M S
Manual for MR-MQ100

IB(NA)0300150 MR-MQ100 User’s Manual (Details) MEAU.com
D. Software
MR-Configurator (MRZJW3-SETUP221E)
This software makes it easy to perform setup, tuning, monitor display, diagnostics, reading and writing of parameters, and test
operations with a personal computer. User-satisfying functions that enable the balance with the machine system, optimum control
and short start up time are available.
1. This software can set up and tune your servo system easily with a personal computer.
2. Multiple monitor functions: Graphic display functions are provided to display the servo motor status with the input signal triggers,
such as the command pulse, droop pulse and speed.
3. Test operations with a personal computer: Test operation of the servo motors can be performed with a personal computer using
multiple test mode menus.
4. Further advanced tuning is possible with the improved advanced functions.
MT-Developer2-MQ Software (SW1DNC-MTW2MQ-E)
Description Model Number Stocked Item Model Number Description Stocked Item
Windows Communication Software MR-CONFIGURATOR S MT-DEV2-MQ-C1 Software for MR-MQ100 Only (1 User License) S
Communication Cable MR-J3USBCBL3M S MT-DEV2-MQ-C5 Software for MR-MQ100 Only (5 User License) -
MT-DEV2-MQ-C10 Software for MR-MQ100 Only (10 User License) -
Note: MR-Configurator CD Version 7.00A and higher or MRZJW3-SETUP221E Version C1 and higher
must be used with MR-J3-B series amplifiers when using MR-MQ100 motion controller. MT-DEV2-MQ-C25 Software for MR-MQ100 Only (25 User License) -

Q170MCPU Stand-Alone Motion Controller
The new Q170MCPU stand-alone motion controller offers high-performance control of positioning, speed, synchronous phase and torque,
and offers on-the-ly mode switching and registration through electronic cam and gearing. This motion controller delivers a compact design,
side-by-side mounting with MR-J3B Safety servo drives (50W~55KW) for reduced panel space requirements, and the ability to operate
rotary and linear motors and fully closed loop systems. Quick release connectors reduce wiring and setup time and the ampliiers are plug-
and-play. All operating parameters are instantly downloaded at power up, and servo axis tuning and in-plant replacement of servo drives are
quick and easy.
Q170MCPU
A MITSUBISHI
MODE
Q170MCPU
RUN
ERR.
USER
PULL
BAT.
BOOT
GOT or PC
E POWER
USB RESET STOP RUN
PERIPHERAL I/F
F RS-232
Software E
EMI
B
CN1
E EJECT
Note: Q170MCPU includes Q6BAT

battery, Q170DBATC battery holder, EXT.IO
Q170DEMICON emergency connector,

CARD
Q170MPWCON 24VDC connector,

and Q170MIOCON Ext. I/O connector
FRONT
OUT E
24VDC
24VDC
Input
MR-J3B MR-J3B MR-J3B

Safety C Safety Safety
E
D
Q172DLX Q172DLX Q173SXY Q173SXY Q173SXY
A. Q170MCPU Motion Controller....................................................................................................229

B. Manual Pulse Generator 25ppr (optional) ..................................................................................229
C. Peripheral Equipment .................................................................................................................230
D. Extension Base Unit and Modules..............................................................................................230
E. Miscellaneous Parts, Cables and Connectors .............................................................................230
F. Software ......................................................................................................................................232
228
A. Q170MCPU Motion Controller
Stand-Alone Motion Controller (Connectors included) MITSUBISHI
MODE
Q170MCPU
RUN
ERR.
Item Q170MCPU Q170MCPU-S1

USER
BAT.
PULL
BOOT
POWER
S -
USB RESET STOP RUN
Stocked Item
PERIPHERAL I/F
RS-232
Number of Control Axes Up to 16 axes EMI
CN1
Operation Cycle SV13 0.44ms / 1 to 6 axes 0.88ms / 7 to 16 axes EJECT
(Default) SV22 0.44ms / 1 to 4 axes 0.88ms / 5 to 12 axes 1.77ms / 13 to 16 axes EXT.IO
CARD
Interpolation Functions Linear interpolation (Up to 4 axes), Circular interpolation (2 axes), Helical interpolation (3 axes) FRONT
PTP (Point to Point) control, Speed control, Speed-position control (External input signal (DOG) of servo
OUT
24VDC
Control Modes ampliier usable), Fixed-pitch feed, Constant speed control, Position follow-up control, Speed control with ixed
position stop, Speed switching control, High-speed oscillation control, Synchronous control (SV22)
Acceleration/ Deceleration Control Automatic trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration, S-curve acceleration/deceleration
PLC Program Capacity 20k steps 30k steps
Number of Positioning Points 3200 points (Positioning data can be designated indirectly)
Peripheral I/F USB/RS-232 (PLC CPU area), PERIPHERAL I/F (Motion CPU area)
Proximity dog type (2 types), Count type (3 types, External input signal (DOG) of servo ampliier usable),
Home Position Return Function Data set type (2 types), Dog cradle type, Stopper type (2 types), Limit switch combined type Home position
return re-try function provided, home position shift function provided
Manual Pulse Generator Operation Function Possible to connect 3 modules
Synchronous Encoder Operation Function Possible to connect 8 modules (SV22 use, Incremental only)
M-Code Function M-code output function provided M-code completion wait function provided
Limit Switch Output Function Number of output points 32 points Watch data: Motion control data / Word device
ROM Operation Function Provided
External Input Signal Q172DLX, External input signal (FLS/RLS/DOG) of servo ampliier
High-Speed Reading Function Provided (Via input module, Via tracking of Q173DPX)
Forced Stop Motion controller forced stop (EMI terminal, System setting), Forced stop terminal of servo ampliier
Number of I/O Points 512 points 4096 points
Clock Function Provided
Security Function Provided
All Clear Function Provided
Remote Operation Remote RUN/STOP, Remote latch clear
Digital Oscillation Function Provided
Made compatible by setting battery to servo ampliier.
Number of SSCNET Systems (*1) 1 system
Motion Related Interface Module Q172DLX : 2 module usable Q173DPX : 3 modules usable (*2)
Notes:
1. The servo amplifiers for SSCNET cannot be used.
2. When using the incremental synchronous encoder (SV22 use), you can use above number of modules. When connecting the manual pulse generator, you can use only 1 module.
B. Manual Pulse Generator 25ppr (optional)

3.6 (0.14) Packing t = 2.0
3 t ( 4 10)
Model Number MR-HDP01 P 72 i ac
0
Stocked Item S 90
NP
10 + +
ø60 (2.36)0.5
ø80 (3.15)1
ø70 (2.76)
ø50 (1.97)
Pulse Resolution 25 PLS/rev (100 PLS/rev at magnification of 4)

20
80
+5 t
Voltage - output (power supply voltage - 1V or more), 12 0
30
Output Method + +
70
Output current = Up to 20 mA +
60
+ + + +
40
Power Supply Voltage 4.5 to 13.2VDC 50
3 6

3 ø4.8 (0 t 19) (0.63)(0.79) (1.06) (0.35) (0.3)
i ac
Permitted Axis Load Radial load: Max. 19.6N; Thrust load: Max. 9.8N
) 20
(2.44
Pulse Signal Status 2 signals: A phase, B phase, 90° phase difference

ø62
ø72 (2
.83) 0.2
nit (inc )
Friction Torque 0.1N/m (at 20°C (68°F))
Operating Temperature -10°C to +60°C (14°F to 140°F) + +

Note: If using an external power supply, it needs to be 5VDC.

C. Peripheral Equipment
HMIs Available to Connect to the Q170MCPU
GT16 Series All models that are available (*1)
Note:
1. For more information on HMIs please refer to the HMI section in this catalog.
Servo Ampliiers Available to Connect to the Q170MCPU

MR-J3-B Safety Series Advanced SSCNETIII optical communication interface (*1)
MR-J3-B-RJ004 Series Linear Servo using SSCNETIII optical communication interface (*1)
Note:
1. For more information on Servo Systems please refer to the Servo section in this catalog.
D. Extension Base Unit & Modules

Extension Base Units and the Modules that can be used with the Q170MCPU
Model Description Applicable Model Stocked Item
Q52B 2 slot extension base unit S
Q170MCPU(-S1)
Q55B 5 slot extension base unit S
Q63B (*3) 3 slot extension base unit -
Q65B (*3) 5 slot extension base unit S
Q170MCPU-S1
Q172DLX External signal interface module (*1) S
Q173DPX Manual pulse generator interface module (*1) Q170MCPU(-S1) S
Other PAC Modules I/O Modules, Analog Output Modules, etc. (*2) S
Notes:
1. For specifications on these modules refer to the QD Series Motion Controllers section in this catalog.
2. For specifications on these modules refer to the iQ Platform section in this catalog.
3. Requires separate power supply.
E. Miscellaneous Parts, Cables and Connectors

Miscellaneous Parts for the System
Q6BAT Replacement battery for memory data backup of SRAM built-in Motion CPU S
Large capacity battery for memory data backup of SRAM built-in Motion
Q7BAT S
CPU (includes Q170MBAT-SET)
Q170DBATC Replacement battery holder for Q6BAT (Battery not included) S
Q170MBAT-SET Battery holder for the Q7BAT (Battery not included) -
MR-J3USBCBL3M USB cable from PC to Q170MCPU S
SC-Q RS-232 cable from PC to Q170MCPU S
GT01-C30R2-6P RS-232 cable from GOT to Q170MCPU S
Cables for Forced Stop Input Connector (EMI)

Q170DEMICON Connector for emergency stop input cable (provided with Q170MCPU) -
Q170DEMICBL05M 0.5M cable for EMI connector on CPU S
230
Cables and Connectors Q170MCPU to MR-J3-B Safety Servos
MR-J3BUS015M SSCNET III Cable, 0.15M S
MR-J3BUS1M SSCNET III Cable, 1M S
MR-J3BUS3M SSCNET IIICable, 3M S
MR-J3BUS5M-A SSCNET III Cable, 5M S
MR-J3BUS30M-B SSCNET III Cable, 30M S
MR-J3BUS40M-B SSCNET III Cable, 40M -
MR-J3BUS50M-B SSCNET III Cable, 50M -
Cables for Q170MCPU to the Extension Base Unit

QC05B 0.45M extension cable S
QC30B 3M extension cable S
Cable and Connectors for the Special Function Modules

A6CON1 Q172DLX connector to use the servo external input signals. S
A6TBXY36 Q172DLX Terminal Block Conversion Module - Sink Type I/O (Standard type) S
A6TBXY54 Q172DLX Terminal Block Conversion Module - Sink Type I/O (2-wire type) -
A6TBXY70 Q172DLX Terminal Block Conversion Module - Sink Type I/O (3-wire type) -
AC05TB 0.5M cable from Q172DLX to A6TBXY _ terminal block conversion module S
I/O and Power Cables and Connectors for the Q170MCPU

MR-MQEXTCBL-3M Cable for EXT I/O connector on Q170MCPU, 3 M S
MR-MQPWRCBL-3M Cable for 24VDC power to Q170MCPU, 3 M S
24VDC power cable with 2 meter EMI terminal with crimp terminal R1.25-3.5. Cable for
Q170MPWCBL2M-E disabling the emergency stop input on the front of the Q170MCPU by short-circuiting the S
EMI terminal to the 24VDC power supply.
Q170MIOCON 50 pin solder connector for the EXT I/O connector (Provided with Q170MCPU) -
Q170MPWCON 24VDC connector and pins for the power input (Provided with Q170MCPU) -
Manuals
IB(NA)0300156 Q170MCPU Motion Controller Users Manual MEAU.com
IB(NA)0300134 Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion Controller Programming Manual (Common) MEAU.com
IB(NA)0300135 Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion Controller (SV13/22) Programming Manual (Motion SFC) MEAU.com
IB(NA)0300136 Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion Controller (SV13/22) Programming Manual (Real Mode) MEAU.com
IB(NA)0300137 Q173DCPU/Q172DCPU Motion Controller (SV22) Programming Manual (Virtual Mode) MEAU.com
SH(NA)030084 MR-J3-B Safety Servo Ampliier Instruction Manual MEAU.com
SH(NA)030041 MR-J3 Servo Motor Instruction Manual MEAU.com

F. Software
MR-Configurator (MRZJW3-SETUP221E)
This software makes it easy to perform setup, tuning, monitor display, diagnostics, reading and writing of
parameters, and test operations with a personal computer. User-friendly functions that enable the balance
with the machine system, optimum control and short start up time are available.
1. This software can set up and tune your servo system easily with a personal computer.
2. Multiple monitor functions: Graphic display functions are provided to display the servo motor status with
the input signal triggers, such as the command pulse, droop pulse and speed.
3. Test operations with a personal computer: Test operation of the servo motors can be performed with a
personal computer using multiple test mode menus.
4. Further advanced tuning is possible with the improved advanced functions.
Note: MR-Configurator CD Version 7.00A and
Description Model Number Stocked Item higher or MRZJW3-SETUP221E Version C1
and higher must be used with MR-J3-B series
Windows Communication Software MR-CONFIGURATOR S
amplifiers when using MR-MQ100 motion
Communication Cable MR-J3USBCBL3M S controller.
MT-WORKS2 Software
Conveyor assembly use Automatic machinery use
Motion SFC compatible Motion SFC compatible
Dedicated language SW8DNC-SV13QG Mechanical support language SW8DNC-SV22QF
Electronic component assembly, Press feeder, Food processing, Food

Inserter, Feeder, Molder, Conveying packaging, Winding machine, Spinning
equipment, Paint applicator, Chip machine, Textile machine, Printing
mounting, Wafer slicer, Loader/Unloader, machine, Book binder, Tire molder,
Bonding machine, X-Y table Paper-making machine
Linear interpolation (1 to 4 axes), Circular interpolation, Synchronous control, Electronic shaft,

Constant-speed, Fixed-pitch feed, Speed control with Electronic clutch, Electronic cam, Draw
fixed position stop, Speed switching, Speed control, control
Speed/position switching
Q Series Integrated Start-up Support Software Packages

Model Number Stocked Item Description Details
SW1DNC-MTW2-E (Integrated start-up Conveyor assembly software; Automatic machinery software; Cam data creation
support software) software; Digital oscilloscope software; Document print software; Help section
MT-WORKS2-C1 S SW8DNC-SV13QG (SV13 Operating Software (OS))
SW8DNC-SV22QF (SV22 Operating Software (OS))
Single user license - can be used on 1 computer at a time; Installation manual included
232
Servomotors and Ampliiers
Servomotors and Amplifiers
MR-J4 Series 0.1 - 7kW
MR-J2-JR Servomotors and Amplifiers...........................................................................................234

MR-E Super Servomotors and Amplifiers .......................................................................................237
MR-JN Rotary Servomotors and Amplifiers ....................................................................................249
MR-J3 Servomotors and Amplifiers ................................................................................................263
MR-J3 Linear Servomotors and Amplifiers .....................................................................................325
MR-J3 Direct Drive Servomotors and Amplifiers ............................................................................339
MR-J4 Servomotors and Amplifiers ................................................................................................349
Note: Refer to the Motion Controller section of this catalog for the MR-MQ100 Single Axis Motion Controller.
Item columns/rows.
Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Servomotors and Amplifiers 233

n SERVOMOTORS AND AMPLIFIERS
MR-J2-JR Servomotors and Amplifiers
The ultimate servo system using the latest in servo technology operating at 24VDC input with: patented Real-Time Adaptive Tuning; RS-232C
serial interface for Windows based set-up speed, positioning, and torque modes; low acoustic noise and a built-in parameter unit.
MITSUBISHI
C
B E
OPEN MELSERVO
CN1A CN1B
CNP1 CNP2
A
CNP3
A. MR-J2-JR Servomotors .............................................................................................................235

B. MR-J2-JR Amplifiers..................................................................................................................236
C. Cables ........................................................................................................................................236
D. Software .....................................................................................................................................236
E. System Options ..........................................................................................................................236
234
A. MR-J2-JR Servomotors
Servomotor Selection
HC-AQ0 35 D
Symbol Description
None No brake installed
Symbol Description
B With an electromagnetic brake installed
1 10 Watts
2 20 Watts
3 30 Watts
Model Number HC-AQ0135 HC-AQ0235 HC-AQ0335

Stocked Item - - S (Non-B only)
Continuous Rated Output kW 0.01 0.02 0.03
Characteristics
(*1, *2) Rated Torque N•m (oz•in) 0.0318 (4.503) 0.0637 (9.021) 0.0955 (13.524)
Rated Speed (*1) r/min 3000
Maximum Speed r/min 5000 4500
Instantaneous Permissible Speed r/min 5750 5175
Maximum Torque N•m (oz•in) 0.0955 (13.524) 0.191 (27.048) 0.287 (40.643)
Power at Continuous Rated Torque kW/s 2.0 5.6 9.7
J [x 10⁴ kg•m²] 0.0050 0.0072 0.0094
Inertia Moment (*4)
WK² [oz•in²] 0.027 0.039 0.051
Recommended Ratio of Load Inertia Moment to Servomotor
30 times or less
Shaft Inertia Moment
Power Supply Capacity Refer to “Power supply capacity and generated loss of servo amplifier” in the Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual
Rated Current (Maximum Current) (A) 2.4 (7.7) 2.4 (7.7) 2.3 (7.4)
Speed/Position Detector Encoder (resolution: 8192 pulses/rev)
Accessory Encoder
Insulation Class Class B
Structure Totally-enclosed self-cooling (protection type: IP55 (*6))
Environmental Conditions (*5) Refer to Section 2.1 in the Servomotor Instruction Manual
Weight kg (lb) (*3) 0.19 (0.419) 0.22 (0.485) 0.25 (0.551)
Notes:
1. When the power supply voltage drops, we cannot guarantee the output and rated speed.
2. 80% ED at low noise.
80% ED: Indicates the condition in which operation time at read torque accounts for 80% and the other no load time accounts for 20% in a single operation cycle.
3. When the servomotor is equipped with reduction gear or electromagnetic brake, refer to the corresponding outline dimension drawing. For the EN Standard and UL/cUL Standard compliant mod-
els, please contact Mitsubishi.
4. If the load inertia moment ratio exceeds the indicated value, please contact Mitsubishi.
5. When the equipment is to be used in places where it is subjected to oil and/or water, such as on machine field sites, optional features apply to the equipment.
6. Except for the shaft-through portion and connector end.
HC-A Q0135 (B)D HC-A Q0235 (B)D HC-A Q0335 (B)D

14.1 0.1 28.3 0.2 42.5 0.3
Torque (N•m )
Torque (N•m )
Torque (N•m )
Short term operating range

Torque (in-oz)
Torque (in-oz)
Torque (in-oz)
Short term operating range

10.6 0.075 21.2 0.15
28.3 0.2
7.0 0.05 14.1 0.1 Short term operating range

14.1 0.1
3.5 0.025 7.0 0.05
Continuous operating range Continuous operating range Continuous operating range
0 0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500
Rotation speed (rpm ) Rotation speed (rpm ) Rotation speed (rpm )

B. MR-J2-JR Amplifiers
Amplifier Selection
MR-J2-03 5
Symbol Description
A Analog Speed, Analog Torque and Pulse Train Position
B SSCNET high speed serial network
C Built-in motion control (point table)
Model Number MR-J2-03A5 MR-J2-03B5 MR-J2-03C5

Stocked Item S - -
Voltage 21.6 to 30VDC (instantaneous permissible voltage 34V)
Circuit Power HC-AQ0135D Continuous 0.8A, Max. 2.4A
Supply (Note) Power Supply HC-AQ0235D Continuous 1.6A, Max. 4.8A
Capacity
HC-AQ0335D Continuous 2.4A, Max. 7.2A
Control Circuit Power Supply (Note) 24VDC+10% 200mA (400mA when using the servomotor equipped with electromagnetic brake)
System Sine-wave PWM control, current control system
Dynamic Brake Built-in
Overcurrent shut-off, regenerative overvoltage shut-off, overload shut-off, (electronic thermal relay),
Protective Functions servomotor overheat protection, encoder fault protection, undervoltage, instantaneous power failure
protection, overspeed protection, excessive error protection
Speed Frequency Response 250Hz or more
Structure Open (IP00)
Ambient Operation °C (°F) 0 to +55 (non-freezing) (32 to +131 (non-freezing))
Temperature Storage °C (°F) -20 to +65 (non-freezing) (-4 to +149 (non-freezing))
Ambient Humidity Operation (Storage) 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Environment
Atmosphere Indoors (no direct sunlight), Free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt
Altitude Max. 1000m (3280 ft) above sea level
Vibration m/s² (ft/s²) 5.9 or less (19.4 or less)
Weight kg (lb) 0.2 (0.44)
Note: To comply with the low voltage directive, use a reinforced insulation stabilizing power supply.
C. Cables
Motor Type Power/Encoder Cable Length Power/Encoder Cable Model Number Stocked Item
HC-AQ0135D or HC-AQ0135BD 2 Meter MR-JRCBL2M-H S
HC-AQ0135D or HC-AQ0135BD 5 Meter MR-JRCBL5M-H -
D. Software Manuals
Description Model Number Stocked Item Description Model Number Stocked Item
Windows Communication Software MR-CONFIGURATOR S MR-J2-03A5 Instruction Manual SH(NA)3200 MEAU.com
Communication Cable MR-JRPCATCBL3M S MR-J2-03B5 Instruction Manual SH(NA)030005 MEAU.com
MR-J2-03C5 Instruction Manual SH(NA)3209 MEAU.com
Servomotor Instruction Manual SH(NA)3181 MEAU.com
E. System Options
Description Model Number Stocked Item
Terminal Block MR-TB20 S
Terminal Block Cable 0.5M MR-J2TBL05M S
Terminal Block Cable 1.0M MR-J2TBL1M S
Encoder Connector Kit (instead of MR-JRCBL_M-H Cable) MR-JRCNM -
CN1-I/O Connector Kit (contains 2 connectors, one each for CN1A & CN1B) MR-J2CN1 S
MR-CCN1CBL-3M (3m length)
CN1-I/O Pigtail Cables (one each optional for CN1A & CN1B) S
MR-CCN1CBL-5M (5m length)
236
MR-E Super Servomotors and Amplifiers
High performance and compact, the MR-E Super is an excellent choice for applications up to 2kW. The MR-E Super is available in pulse-train
position or analog speed/torque models. The amplifier features Mitsubishi Electric’s legendary auto-tuning and vibration suppression functions,
a 400Hz analog frequency response, and accepts pulse commands up to 500kHz. The motors are low to medium inertia up to 4500rpm and are
equipped with a 131,072 pulse per revolution encoder. Set-up and diagnosis is made easy with the MR-Configurator Windows® based software.
A
D
D
C
E
C
(Order separately)
Not included with
B C
amplifier B
(Order separately)
Not included with
amplifier
A. MR-E Super Amplifiers ..............................................................................................................238

B. MR-E Super Servomotors ..........................................................................................................239
C. Cables and Connectors ..............................................................................................................242
D. Software and Manuals ...............................................................................................................245
E. Optional Accessories ..................................................................................................................245

A. MR-E Super Amplifiers
Amplifier Selection
MR-E- -KH003
Super Series
Symbol Description
Mitsubishi E-Series
general purpose AC A General Pulse Train Interface
Servo Amplifier AG Analog Input Interface
Compatible Motor
Symbol
HF-KE (B)W1-S100 HF-SE (B)JW1-S100
10 13 -
20 23 -
Conforms to
40 43 -
the following
standards: EN, 70 73 52
UL, cUL 100 - 102
200 - 152, 202
Servo Standard Specifications

MR-E-10A-KH003 MR-E-20A-KH003 MR-E-40A-KH003 MR-E-70A-KH003 MR-E-100A-KH003 MR-E-200A-KH003
Servo Amplifier Model
MR-E-10AG-KH003 MR-E-20AG-KH003 MR-E-40AG-KH003 MR-E-70AG-KH003 MR-E-100AG-KH003 MR-E-200AG-KH003
Voltage/Frequency (*1) 3-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz or 1-phase 230VAC 50/60Hz 3-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz
Supply
Power
For 3-phase 200 to 230VAC: 3-phase 170 to 253VAC

Permissible Voltage Fluctuation 3-phase 170 to 253VAC
For 1-phase 230VAC: 1-phase 207 to 253VAC
Permissible Frequency Fluctuation ±5% maximum
Control System Sine-wave PWM control/current control system
Dynamic Brake Built-in
Built-In Regenerative Resistor None Installed
Overcurrent shutdown, regeneration overvoltage shutdown, overload shutdown (electronic thermal), encoder fault protection,
Safety Features
regeneration fault protection, undervoltage/sudden power outage protection, overspeed protection, excess error protection
Maximum Input Pulse Frequency 1Mpps (when using differential receiver), 200 kpps (when using open collector)
Positioning Feedback Pulse Resolution per encoder/servomotor rotation: 131072 p/rev
Position Command Pulse Multiple Electronic gear A/B multiple, A: 1 to 65535, B: 1 to 65535, 1/50 < A/B < 50
Control Positioning Complete Width
A Type Amps
Mode 0 to ±10000 pulses (command pulse unit)

Setting
Excess Error ±2.5 rotations
Torque Limit Set by parameters
Speed Speed Control Range Internal speed command 1:5000

Control Speed Fluctuation Rate ±0.01% maximum (load fluctuation 0 to 100%) 0% (power fluctuation ±10%)
Mode Torque Limit Set by parameters
Speed Control Range Analog speed command 1:2000, internal speed command 1:5000
Speed Analog Speed Command Input 0 to ±10VDC / rated speed

AG Type Amps
Control ±0.01% maximum (load fluctuation 0 to 100%); 0% (power fluctuation ±10%)

Mode Speed Fluctuation Rate
±0.2% maximum (ambient temperature 25°C±10°C [59°F to 95°F]), when using analog speed command
Torque Limit Set by parameters or external analog input (0 to +10VDC/maximum torque)
Torque Analog Torque Command Input 0 to ±8VDC/maximum torque (input impedance 10 to 12kΩ)
Control
Mode Speed Limit Set by parameters or external analog input (0 to ±10VDC/rated speed)
Fan cooling open
Structure Self-cooling open (IP00)
(IP00)
Environment

Atmosphere Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist or dust
Vibration 5.9m/s² maximum
Weight kg (lb) 0.7 (1.5) 0.7 (1.5) 1.1 (2.4) 1.7 (3.7) 1.7 (3.7) 2.0 (4.4)
Note:
1. Rated output and rated speed of a servomotor are applicable when the servo amplifier, combined with the servomotor, is operated within the specified power supply voltage and frequency.
The torque drops when the power supply voltage is less than specified.
238
B. MR-E Super Servomotors
HF-KE 3 W1-S100 Stocked Motors

Model Number
Super Series HF-KE13W1-S100
HF-KE13BW1-S100
Encoder Resolution 131,072 ppr (Inc)
HF-KE23KW1-S100
Symbol Shaft Shape HF-KE23BKW1-S100
None Standard HF-KE43KW1-S100

(Straight Shaft) HF-KE43BKW1-S100
K With Keyway (Note) HF-KE73KW1-S100
Note: Keyway only on 200W ~ 750W with key included. HF-KE73BKW1-S100
Symbol Electromagnetic Brake

Rated Speed None Without Brake
3000 (r/min) B With Brake
Symbol Rated Output (W)

Conforms to the 1 100
following standards: 2 200
EN, UL, cUL 4 400
7 750
HF-SE 2 J W1-S100 Stocked Motors

Model Number
Super Series HF-SE52JKW1-S100
Encoder Resolution 131,072 ppr (Inc) HF-SE52BJKW1-S100
HF-SE102JKW1-S100
Symbol Shaft Shape
Standard HF-SE102BJKW1-S100
With Oil Seal None (Straight Shaft) HF-SE152JKW1-S100
Standard With Keyway (Note)
K HF-SE152BJKW1-S100
Note: Key not included. HF-SE202JKW1-S100
HF-SE202BJKW1-S100
Rated Speed None Without Brake
Symbol Rated Output (W)

Conforms to the 5 500
following standards: 10 1000
EN, UL, cUL 15 1500
20 2000
Rated Speed Rated Output Servomotor UL,

Motor Series EN Protective Rating Features Application Examples
(Max. r/min) Capacity (kW) Brake (B) cUL
HF-KE Super Series Belt Drive; Robots;

IP55
4 Types Mounters; Sewing
Excluding the shaft-
Small Capacity 3000 (4500) 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, Yes Yes Yes Machines; X-Y Tables;
through portion and
0.75 Food Processing
connector
Stable control from Machines
low speeds to high
speeds allows
HF-SE Super Series compliance with a
variety of applications.
IP65 Material Handling
4 Types
Medium Capacity 2000 (3000) Yes Yes Yes Excluding the shaft- Systems; Robots; X-Y
0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0
through portion Tables

MR-E HF-KE Super 3000 r/min Series Servomotor Specifications
Servomotor Model HF-KE13W1-S100 HF-KE23W1-S100 HF-KE43W1-S100 HF-KE73W1-S100
Servomotor Model with Brake HF-KE13BW1-S100 HF-KE23BW1-S100 HF-KE43BW1-S100 HF-KE73BW1-S100
Compatible Servo Amplifier Model MR-E-10A-KH003 MR-E-20A-KH003 MR-E-40A-KH003 MR-E-70A-KH003
Compatible Servo Amplifier
MR-E-10AG-KH003 MR-E-20AG-KH003 MR-E-40AG-KH003 MR-E-70AG-KH003
with Analog Input Interface
Power Facility Capacity (kVA) (*1) 0.3 0.5 0.9 1.3
Continuous Rated Output (W) 100 200 400 750
Running Duty Rated Torque (N·m [oz·in]) 0.32 (45.3) 0.64 (90.6) 1.3 (184) 2.4 (340)
Maximum Torque (N·m [oz·in]) 0.95 (135) 1.9 (269) 3.8 (538) 7.2 (1020)
Rated Speed (r/min) 3000
Maximum Speed (r/min) 4500
Permissible Instantaneous Speed (r/min) 5175
Power Rate At Continuous Rated Torque (kW/s) 11.5 16.9 38.6 39.9
Rated Current (A) 0.8 1.4 2.7 5.2
Maximum Current (A) 2.4 4.2 8.1 15.6
With No Options (*4) (*4) 249 140
Regenerative
Braking Frequency MR-RB032 (30W) (*4) (*4) 747 210
(Times /Min.) MR-RB12 (100W) - (*4) 2490 700
(*2, *3)
MR-RB32 (300W) - - - 2100
Moment Of Inertia Standard 0.088 (0.481) 0.24 (1.31) 0.42 (2.30) 1.43 (7.82)
J (x10-4 kg • m²)
[J (oz • in²)] With Electromagnetic Brake 0.090 (0.492) 0.31 (1.69) 0.50 (2.73) 1.63 (8.91)
Recommended Load/ Motor Inertia Moment Ratio Maximum of 15 times the servomotor’s inertia moment (*5)
Speed / Position Detector Incremental encoder (resolution per servomotor rotation: 131072 p/rev)
Structure Totally enclosed non ventilated (protection level: IP55) (*6)
Ambient Temperature 0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F) (non-freezing), storage: -15 to 70°C (5 to 158°F) (non-freezing)
Environment
Elevation / Vibration (*7) 1000m or less above sea level; X: 49m/s² Y: 49m/s²
Standard 0.56 (1.3) 0.94 (2.1) 1.5 (3.3) 2.9 (6.4)
Weight kg (lb)
With Electromagnetic Brake 0.86 (1.9) 1.6 (3.6) 2.1 (4.7) 3.9 (8.6)
Notes:
1. The power facility capacity varies depending on the power supply’s impedance.
2. The regenerative braking frequency shows the permissible frequency when the motor, without a load and the optional regeneration unit, decelerates from the rated speed to a stop. When a load is connected;
however, the value will be the table value/(m+1), where m=the load inertia moment/the motor inertia moment. When the operating speed exceeds the rated speed, the regenerative braking frequency is inversely
proportional to the square of (operating speed/rated speed). If the operating speed changes frequently or when the regeneration is constant (as with vertical feeds), find the regenerative heating value (W) in
operation. Provisions must be made to keep this heating value below the tolerable regenerative power (W). Optimal regenerative resistor varies for each system. Refer to the section “Optional Accessories •
Regenerative Brake Options” in this catalog for details on the tolerable regenerative power (W).
3. The regenerative braking frequency of the 600W or smaller servo amplifier may fluctuate due to the affect of the power voltage since the energy charged by the electrolytic capacitor in the servo amplifier is large.
4. There are no limits on regeneration frequency as long as the effective torque is within the rated torque range. However, the load/motor of inertia moment ratio must be 15 times or less.
5. Contact Mitsubishi if the load/motor of inertia moment ratio exceeds the value in the table.
6. The shaft-through portion and connector for cable terminal are excluded.
7. The vibration direction is shown in the right-side diagram. The numeric value indicates the maximum value of the component (commonly the bracket in the opposite direction of the motor shaft). Fretting of the
bearing occurs easily when the motor stops, so maintain vibration to approximately one-half of the allowable value.
X
Y
HF-KE13(B)W1-S100 (*1, *2) HF-KE23(B)W1-S100 (*1, *2) HF-KE43(B)W1-S100 (*1, *2) HF-KE73(B)W1-S100 (*1, *2)
140 1.0 280 2.0 560 4.0 1120 8.0
Torque (N •m)
Torque (N •m)
Torque (N •m)
Torque (N •m)
Peak running range Peak running range Peak running range

Peak running range
105 0.75 210 1.5 420 3.0 840 6.0
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
70 0.5 140 1.0 280 2.0 560 4.0
35 0.25 70 0.5 Continuous running 140 1.0 280 2.0

Continuous running range Continuous running Continuous running
range range range
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500
Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min)
Notes:
1. : For 3-phase 200VAC.
240
MR-E HF-SE Super 2000 r/min Series Servomotor Specifications
Servomotor Model HF-SE52JW1-S100 HF-SE102JW1-S100 HF-SE152JW1-S100 HF-SE202JW1-S100
Servomotor Model With Brake HF-SE52BJW1-S100 HF-SE102BJW1-S100 HF-SE152BJW1-S100 HF-SE202BJW1-S100
Compatible Servo Amplifier Model MR-E-70A-KH003 MR-E-100A-KH003 MR-E-200A-KH003
Compatible Servo Amplifier with Analog
MR-E-70AG-KH003 MR-E-100AG-KH003 MR-E-200AG-KH003
Input Interface
Power Facility Capacity (kVA) (*1) 1.0 1.7 2.5 3.5
Continuous Rated Output (kW) 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Running Duty Rated Torque (N·m [oz•in]) 2.39 (338) 4.77 (675) 7.16 (1010) 9.55 (1350)
Maximum Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 7.16 (1010) 14.3 (2020) 21.5 (3040) 28.6 (4050)
Power Rate At Continuous Rated Torque (kW/s) 9.34 19.2 28.8 23.8
Rated Current (A) 2.9 5.3 8.0 10
Maximum Current (A) 8.7 15.9 24 30
With No Options 120 62 152 71
MR-RB032 (30W) 180 93 - -
Regenerative
Braking Frequency MR-RB12 (100W) 600 310 - -
(Times / Min) MR-RB30 (300W) - - 456 213
(*2, *3)
MR-RB32 (300W) 1800 930 - -
MR-RB50 (500W) - - 760 355
Moment Of Inertia Standard 6.1 (33.4) 11.9 (65.1) 17.8 (97.3) 38.3 (209)
J (x10-4 kg • m²)
[J (oz • in²)] With Electromagnetic Brake 8.3 (45.4) 14.0 (76.5) 20.0 (109) 47.9 (262)
Recommended Load / Motor Inertia Moment Ratio Maximum of 15 times the servomotor’s inertia moment (*4)
Speed / Position Detector Incremental encoder (resolution per servomotor: 131072 p/rev)
Attachments Oil seal
Structure Totally enclosed non ventilated (protection level: IP65) (*5)
Vibration (*6) X, Y: 24.5m/s² X: 24.5m/s² • Y: 49m/s²
Standard 4.8 (11) 6.5 (15) 8.3 (19) 12 (27)
Weight kg (lb)
With Electromagnetic Brake 6.7 (15) 8.5 (19) 11 (25) 18 (40)
Notes:
1. The power facility capacity varies depending on the power supply’s impedance
2. The regenerative braking frequency shows the permissible frequency when the motor, without a load and the optional regeneration unit, decelerates from the rated speed to a stop. When a load is connected; however,
the value will be the table value/(m+1), where m=the load inertia moment/the motor inertia moment. When the operating speed exceeds the rated speed, the regenerative braking frequency is inversely proportional
to the square of (operating speed/rated speed). If the operating speed changes frequently or when the regeneration is constant (as with vertical feeds), find the regenerative heating value (W) in operation. Provisions
must be made to keep this heating value below the tolerable regenerative power (W). Optimal regenerative resistor varies for each system. Refer to the section “Optional Accessories • Regenerative Brake Options”
in this catalog for details on the tolerable regenerative power (W).
3. The regenerative braking frequency of the 600W or smaller servo amplifier may fluctuate due to the affect of the power voltage since the energy charged by the electrolytic capacitor in the servo amplifier is large
4. Contact Mitsubishi if the load/motor of inertia moment ratio exceeds the value in the table
5. The shaft-through portion is excluded.
X
Y
HF-SE52(B)JW1-S100 (*1, *2) HF-SE102(B)JW1-S100 (*1) HF-SE152(B)JW1-S100 (*1) HF-SE202(B)JW1-S100 (*1)

1260 9 2100 15 3360 24 4200 30
Peak Peak
Peak running range
running range running range
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
840 6 Peak 1400 10 2240 16 2800 20

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
running range
420 3 700 5 1120 8 1400 10
Continuous running Continuous running Continuous running Continuous running

range range range range
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000
Notes:

HF-KE_(B)W1-S100 Series: Encoder cable length 10M or shorter
24
Servo amplifier Analog Monitor
QD75P Positioning
22 25
unit
QD75D
A1SD75P
FX2N-10PG
FX2N-1PG CN3
FX3U MR-Configurator
23 CN1 (Setup software)
Analog Monitor
Operation
panel 26 24
32 33 27 28 CN2
CNP2
Motor power supply cable Motor power supply cable
11 CNP1 12
Motor electromagnetic brake cable Motor electromagnetic brake cable
17 18
Encoder cable 29 30 Encoder cable
3 4
Servomotor Cable protection Servomotor
HF-KE Cable protection
level IP65 level IP65 HF-KE
(B)W1-S100 compatible compatible (B)W1-S100
When the cables are led out in direction of motor shaft When the cables are led out in opposite direction of motor shaft
HF-KE_(B)W1-S100 Series: Encoder cable length over 10M 24

QD75P
22
Positioning
unit
25
QD75D
A1SD75P
FX2N-10PG
FX2N-1PG CN3
FX3U 23 CN1 MR-Configurator
Analog Monitor (Setup software)
Operation
panel 26 24
32 33 27 28 CN2
CNP2
Motor power supply cable Motor power supply cable (*2)
Wire size 0.75mm2 (AWG19)
CNP1 Manufacture a relay cable.
(*2)
Manufacture a relay cable.
14
13 Wire size
17 Motor electromagnetic brake cable 0.75mm2
Motor electromagnetic brake cable
Wire size 0.5mm2 (AWG20) (AWG19)
(*3)
29 30 Manufacture a relay cable. (*3)
Servomotor Manufacture a relay cable. Wire size 20
HF-KE
19 0.5mm2 (AWG20)
Encoder cable Encoder cable
(B)W1-S100
5 (*1) 7 7 (*1) 6
8 8 Servomotor
Cable protection Cable protection HF-KE
Servo motor level IP65 compatible level IP65 compatible (B)W1-S100 Servo motor
When the cables are led out in direction of motor shaft When the cables are led out in opposite direction of motor shaft
HF-SE_(B)JW1-S100 Series 24
QD75P
22
Positioning
unit
25
QD75D
A1SD75P
FX2N-10PG
FX2N-1PG CN3
FX3U 23 CN1 MR-Configurator
Analog Monitor (Setup software)
Operation
panel 26 24
32 33 27 28
CN2
CNP2
Motor power supply connector
CNP1
1 15 16
Motor electromagnetic brake connector
2 21 29 30
Encoder cable
10 31
Cable protection
Servomotor level IP65 compatible
242
MR-E Super Cables and Connectors (refer to chart on previous page)
Power Cables for HF-SE_(B)JW1-S100
Model Number Stocked Protection
Item (_ = cable length 2, 5, 10, Diagram
15, 20, 25, 30 Meter) Lengths Level
Standard-Flex, HF-SE52(B)JW1-S100 (*1) MR-J3P1-_M (*2)

Unshielded Type HF-SE102(B)JW1-S100 (*1) MR-J3P2-_M (*2) 2, 5, 10,
IP65
Cables (Straight Type HF-SE152(B)JW1-S100 (*1) MR-J3P2-_M (*2) 20, 30
Connector Only) HF-SE202(B)JW1-S100 (*1) MR-J3P4-_M (*2)
1 HF-SE52(B)JW1-S100 (*1) MR-J3PWS1-_M (*2)
High-Flex, Shielded HF-SE102(B)JW1-S100 (*1) MR-J3PWS2-_M (*2) 2, 5, 10,
Type Cables (Straight IP67
HF-SE152(B)JW1-S100 (*1) MR-J3PWS2-_M (*2) 20, 30
Type Connector Only)
HF-SE202(B)JW1-S100 (*1) MR-J3PWS4-_M (*2)
Brake Cables for HF-SE_BJW1-S100

2, 5, 10,
Standard-Flex, Unshielded Type Cables MR-J3BK-_M IP65
20, 30
2
2, 5, 10, 15,
High-Flex, Shielded Type Cables MR-J3BRKS1-_M IP65
20, 30
Encoder Cables for CN2 Connector for HF-KE_(B)W1-S100

Item Diagram
(_ =cable length in meters) Lengths Level
MR-J3ENCBL_M-A1-H 2, 5, 10 IP65
Lead Out in Direction of Motor _= 2, 5 or 10 (*1)
3 Shaft MR-J3ENCBL_M-A1-L Encoder Amplifier
2, 5, 10 IP65
10m or Shorter (Di- _= 2, 5, or 10 (*1) Side Side
rect Connection Type) MR-J3ENCBL_M-A2-H 2, 5, 10 IP65
Lead Out in Opposite Direction _= 2, 5, or 10 (*1)
4 of Motor Shaft MR-J3ENCBL_M-A2-L 2, 5, 10 IP65
_= 2, 5, or 10 (*1)
Lead Out in Direction of Motor MR-J3JCBL03M-A1-L Encoder Junction
5 S IP20
Shaft cable length 0.3 (*1) Side Connector
Lead Out in Opposite Direction MR-J3JCBL03M-A2-L
6 S IP20
of Motor Shaft cable length 0.3 (*1)
Exceeding 10m MR-EKCBL_M-H 20, 30 IP20
(Relay Type) _= 20, 30, 40, or 50 (*1)
7 Ampliier-Side Cable
MR-EKCBL_M-L Use this in combination with 5 or 6.
- IP20
_= 20 or 30 (*1)
Junction Connector,
8 MR-ECNM S IP20
Ampliier-Side Connector
Encoder Cable for CN2 Connector for HF-SE_(B)JW1-S100

Item Diagram
(_ = cable length in meters) Lengths Level
MR-ENECBL_M-H
9 Encoder Cable (_= 2, 5, 10, 20, 30, 40, or 2, 5, 10 IP67
50 (*1)
Encoder Side Amplifier Side
10 Encoder Connector Set MR-ENECNS S IP67
Motor Power Supply Cables for CNP2 for HF-KE_(B)W1-S100

Item Diagram
MR-PWS1CBL_M-A1-H 2, 5, 10 IP65
Lead Out in Direction of Motor _= 2, 5 or 10 (*1, *2)
Shaft (Non-shielded) MR-PWS1CBL_M-A1-L
11 2, 5, 10 IP65
_= 2, 5 or 10 (*1, *2)
Lead Out in Direction of Motor MR-J3PS_M-A1
10m or Shorter 5 IP65 Non-shielded
Shaft (Shielded) _= 5 or 10
(Direct Connection
MR-PWS1CBL_M-A2-H
Type) 2, 5, 10 IP65
Lead Out in Opposite Direction _= 2, 5 or 10 (*1, *2) Shielded
of Motor Shaft (Non-shielded) MR-PWS1CBL_M-A2-L
12 2, 5, 10 IP65
_= 2, 5 or 10 (*1, *2)
Lead Out in Opposite Direction MR-J3PS_M-A2 5, 10 IP65
of Motor Shaft (Shielded) _= 5 or 10
Lead Out in Direction of Motor MR-PWS2CBL03M-A1-L S IP55
Shaft (Non-shielded) cable length 0.3 (*1)
13
Lead Out in Direction of Motor MR-J3PS03M-A1 S IP65
Exceeding 10m Shaft (Shielded) cable length 0.3 (*1)
(Relay Type) Lead Out in Opposite Direction MR-PWS2CBL03M-A2-L S IP55
of Motor Shaft (Non-shielded) cable length 0.3 (*1)
14
Lead Out in Opposite Direction MR-J3PS03M-A2 S IP65
of Motor Shaft (Shielded) cable length 0.3 (*1)
Notes:
1. Must order separate brake cable for these motors.
2. Must order separate power connector 27 or 28 to connect to the power cable.
Power Supply Connectors
Protection
Item Model Number Stocked Item Diagram
Level
Motors: HF-SE52(B)JW1-S100; HF-SE102(B)JW1-S100; MR-PWCNS4
15 HF-SE152(B)JW1-S100 S IP67
(see 1 for the power cable) (straight type only)
Motor: HF-SE202(B)JW1-S100 MR-PWCNS5

16 S IP67
(see 1 for the power cable) (straight type only)
Motor Brake Cables for HF-KE_BW1-S100

Item Diagram
MR-BKS1CBL_M-A1-H 2, 5, 10 IP65
Lead Out in Direction of _= 2, 5, or 10 (*1)
17 Motor Shaft MR-BKS1CBL_M-A1-L
10m or Shorter - IP65
_= 2, 5, or 10 (*1)
(Direct Connection
MR-BKS1CBL_M-A2-H
Type) 2, 5, 10 IP65
18 of Motor Shaft MR-BKS1CBL_M-A2-L - IP65
_= 2, 5, or 10 (*1)
Lead Out in Direction of MR-BKS2CBL03M-A1-L
19 S IP55
Exceeding 10m Motor Shaft cable length 0.3 (*1)
(Relay Type) Lead Out in Opposite Direction MR-BKS2CBL03M-A2-L
20 S IP55
Note:
1. -H and -L indicate bending life. -H indicates a long bending life and -L indicates a standard bending life.
Brake Connector Set for HF-SE_BJW1-S100

Protection
Level
MR-BKCNS1
21 Brake Connector (see 2 for the brake cable) S IP67
(straight type only)
Connector for CN1 on Amp

Protection
Level
22 CN1 Connector (26 pin) MR-ECN1 S -
Pigtail Cable for CN1 on Amp

Protection
Level
MR-ECN1CBL-3M
23 CN1 Pigtail Cable (26 pin) S -
(3 meter cable)
Connector and Cable Options for CN3 Connector on Amp

Stocked Protection
Item Model Number Diagram
Lengths Level
24 Analog Monitor RS-232C Connector MR-ECN3 S -
SC-Q
25 Communication Cable S -
(3 meter cable)
26 Analog Monitor RS-232C Branch Cable MR-E3CBL15-P S -
CNP2 Power to Motor Connector

Protection
Level
27 MR-E10 to 100A/AG-KH003 MR-ECNP2-B S -
28 MR-E200A/AG-KH003 Amp Only MR-ECNP2-B1 S -
CNP1 Amp Power Input Connector

Protection
Level
29 MR-E10 to 100A/AG-KH003 Amps MR-ECNP1-B S -
30 MR-E200A/AG-KH003 Amp Only MR-ECNP1-B1 S -
244
CN2 Connector
Protection
Level
31 CN2 Connector Only MR-J3CN2 S -
For CN1
Stocked Protection
Lengths Level
32 Junction Terminal Block MR-TB26A S -
MR-TBNATBL_M
33 Junction Terminal Block Cable 05, 1 -
(_ =cable length: 0.5, 1m)
D. Software and Manuals

MR-Configurator Setup Software
This Windows® based software package is used to setup, program and test the amplifier. Initial
setup and programming is easy and quick with the user-friendly software, which has extensive help
functions and drop-downs. MR-Configurator also has many diagnostic functions such as a machine
simulator to aid in mechanical design, a machine analyzer to find resonant frequencies of the load
and set notch filters, an alarm monitor with history data, and the ability to assign and monitor I/O.
Features:
• Can be set up using a personal computer. Works on Windows 95/98/NT/ME/2000 Professional,
XP Professional*.
• Provides numerous monitor functions. Provides graph display function that enables display of
servomotor status upon input signal triggers such as command pulses, droop pulses, and r/min.
• Allows servomotors to be tested easily from a personal computer. Stocked
Description Model Number
* Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation. Item
Windows Communication
MR-CONFIGURATOR S
Software
Manuals Communications Cable SC-Q S
Hardware Description Model Number Stocked Item
MR-E Super SH(NA)030071 MEAU.com
EMC Guidelines (Servo) Manual IB(NA)67310 MEAU.com

Note: Many of these manuals are available for free download from our website, www.meau.com
E. Optional Accessories
Filters
Description Model Type Model Number Stocked Item
Line Noise Filter All MR-E Models FR-BSF01 S
Radio Noise Filter All MR-E Models FR-BIF S
EMC Filter MR-E-10 to 100 SF1252 S
EMC Filter MR-E-200 MF-3F480-025.230 -
Regenerative Brake Options

Model Number - Regenerative Power [W]
Servo Amplifier Built-In Regen.
MR-RB032 [40Ω] MR-RB12 [40Ω] MR-RB30 [40Ω] MR-RB32 [40Ω] MR-RB50 [40Ω] (Note)
Resistor
Stocked Item N/A S S S S S
MR-E-10 - 30 - - - -
MR-E-20 - 30 100 - - -
MR-E-40 10 30 100 - -
MR-E-70 20 30 100 - 300 -
MR-E-100 20 30 100 - 300 -
MR-E-200 100 - - 300 - 500
Note: Always install a cooling fan when using MR-RB50.
AC Power Improving Reactor Options

Model Type Model Number Stocked Item
MR-E-10 to 40 MRL-00402 S
MR-E-70 MRL-00802 S
MR-E-100 MRL-01202 S
MR-E-200 MRL-01802 S

MR-E Super Shaft Detail R
HF-KE_(B)W1-S100: With key (200, 400, 750W)

Variable Dimensions QK QL U
Model Number (*1)
T S R Q W QK QL U Y A
W
HF-KE23(B)KW1-S100 M4 screw
5 14h6 30 27 5 20 3 3
øS
HF-KE43(B)KW1-S100 Depth: 15mm
M5 screw
HF-KE73(B)KW1-S100 6 19h6 40 37 6 25 5 3.5 A T Y
Depth: 20mm
Note: A-A
1. Motors with keyway shaft (with/without key) and D-cut shaft cannot be used in frequent start/stop
applications. Loose keys may damage the motor shaft.
(Unit: mm)
25
21.5
20.5
HF-KE13(B)DW1-S100: D-cut (100W) (*1)
1
Note:
1. Motors with keyway shaft (with/without key) and D-cut shaft cannot be used in frequent start/stop
ø8h6
(Unit: mm)
R
HF-SE_(B)JW1-S100: Key way - Key not included
Q
Variable Dimensions
Model Number (*1, *2)
S R Q W QK QL U r Y
HF-SE52(B)JKW1-S100 U
M8 screw QK QL
HF-SE102(B)JKW1-S100 24h6 55 50 8 +0
+0.036 36 5 +0.2
4 +0 4
Depth: 20mm A
HF-SE152(B)JKW1-S100
M8 screw
øS
W
HF-SE202(B)JKW1-S100 35 +0
+0.01
79 75 10 +0
+0.036 55 5 5 +0.2 5
+0
Depth: 20mm
Notes: A
r Y
1. Motors with keyway shaft (with/without key) and D-cut shaft cannot be used in frequent start/stop A-A
2. A key is not supplied with the motor. The key shall be installed by the user.
(Unit: mm)
Optional Keys Available (Order Separately)

Motor Model Model Number Key Dimensions Stocked Item
HF-SE52~152(B)JKW1-S100 MTR KEY 8-7-28 8 x 7 x 28 S

HF-SE202(B)JKW1-S100 MTR KEY 10-8-45 10 x 8 x 45 S
246
HF-KE Super Series
(Unit: mm)
HF-KE13(B)W1-S100
82.4 (123.5) 2-ø4.5 Power supply connector
25 mounting hole 40 pin assignment
5 2.5 Use hexagonal °
20.5 20.7 45 Pin No. Signal name
21.5 cap head bolts. 1
2 1 Earth
1
2 U
2
3
20.7
3
ø4 3 V
4
6 4
ø30h7
4 W
38.8 (Note 3)
21 Brake connector
pin assignment (*3)
37.1
1
36
ø8h6
Pin No. Signal name
1
Encoder 2 1 B1
2
connector 2 B2
10.1 Brake Power supply
connector 9.5 connector
11.7 11.7 (*3)
13.7 4.9 21.5 18.4 19.2 13.9 6.4
58.3(*3) (*3) 40.5
27.4 27.5
<When the cables are led out in opposite direction of motor shaft>
7°
9°
13°
2
Encoder
connector 11.7 11.7 9.5
(*3) 58.3(*3)
21.5 18.4
Brake connector (*3) (*3)
Power supply connector
HF-KE23(B)W1-S100, HF-KE43(B)W1-S100 Power supply connector

pin assignment
4-ø5.8
mounting hole 60 Pin No. Signal name
L 30 1
Use hexagonal ° 1 Earth
7 3
cap head bolts. 45 2
1
2 U
2
3
3
3 V
4
4
ø7 4 W
0
ø50h7
Brake connector
ø14h6
pin assignment (*3)

1
47.1
47.1 (*3)
Pin No. Signal name
1
2 1 B1
2
2 B2
13.7 10 Encoder 10.1 9.5
connector 11.8 11.7 19.2 13.9
28.4 5.9
21.5 KL 27.8
Power supply
57.8 (*3) connector <When the cables are led out in opposite direction of motor shaft>
Variable dimensions
Brake Model
connector (*3)
L KL
76.6
HF-KE23(B)W1-S100 39.3
(116.1)
13.5°
7°
9°
98.5
HF-KE43(B)W1-S100 61.2
18.3 9.5 (138)
(*3) 11.8 11.7 Power supply connector
Encoder (*3)
connector 57.8
21.5 (*3) Brake connector (*3)
HF-KE73(B)W1-S100
4-ø6.6 pin assignment
113.8 (157) 40 80 mounting hole
8 3 ° Pin No. Signal name
45 Use hexagonal 1
cap head bolts. 1 Earth
2
1
2 U
2
3
3
ø9 3 V
4
0 4
4 W
ø70h7
Brake connector
pin assignment (*3)
57.1
56
1 Pin No. Signal name

ø19h6
1 B1
1
Encoder 9.5 14 12 2 2 B2
2
13.7 11.5 connector

11.7 19.2
11.8 27.8
27.4 21.4 72.3
65.5 (*3) Power supply connector <When the cables are led out in opposite direction of motor shaft>
Brake connector (*3)
7°
7°
Encoder
connector
9.5
11.7 18.4
7°
11.8
21.4 (*3) Power supply connector
(*3) Brake connector (*3)
65.5 (*3)
Notes:
1. Use a friction coupling to fasten a load.
2. Dimensions inside ( ) are for the models with an electromagnetic brake.
3. Only for the models with an electromagnetic brake. The electromagnetic brake terminals (B1, B2) do not have polarity.
4. For dimensions where there is no tolerance listed, use general tolerance.

HF-SE Super Series
HF-SE52(B)JW1-S100, HF-SE102(B)JW1-S100, HF-SE152(B)JW1-S100 4-ø9 mounting hole
Use hexagonal cap head bolts.
L 55
130
50
39.7 (45) 45°
12 3
(*3) (*3)
ø24h6
4 5
ø1
ø110h7
ø1
(*3) 65
(*3) ( *3) 79.9 (*3)
81.5
112.5
Oil seal
(*3) 19.5
(*3)
60.5 (*3)
Encoder connector 20.9
13.5 29
MS3102A20-29P KL
58 (*3)
Brake connector Earth
Brake W
CM10-R2P (*3)
C D
Power supply connector B A
MS3102A18-10P
V U
Brake connector Power supply connector (Unit: mm)
pin assignment pin assignment
Motor flange Motor flange
direction direction Variable dimensions
(*3) Model
L KL
HF-SE52(B)JW1-S100 120 (154.5) 57.8
HF-SE102(B)JW1-S100 142 (176.5) 79.8
HF-SE152(B)JW1-S100 164 (198.5) 101.8
HF-SE202(B)JW1-S100 4-ø13.5 mounting hole

Use hexagonal cap head bolts.
145 (194.5) 79 176

18 3
40 (47) 75 45°
(* 3)
ø2
ø35 +0.010
30
00
ø2
0
ø114.3 -0.025
0
81.5
96.9 (*3)
(* 3) (*3)
Oil seal 140.9

19.5
(*3) 68 (*3)
Encoder connector
(*3)
MS3102A20-29P
Brake connector
44 CM10-R2P (*3) 24.8 82
(*3) Power supply connector 79.8 W Earth
MS3102A22-22P Brake
C D
B A
V U
Brake connector Power supply connector
Motor flange Motor flange
direction direction
(*3)
Notes:
3. Only for the models with an electromagnetic brake. The electromagnetic brake terminals do not have polarity.
248
MR-JN Rotary Servomotors and Amplifiers
A
Servo Amplifier Control circuit
power supply
24VDC
L1
L2
C C
W
C
D
PC
Software
Servo Motor
A. MR-JN Rotary Amplifiers ...........................................................................................................250

B. MR-JN Super Servomotors ........................................................................................................251
C. Cables and Connectors ..............................................................................................................254
D. Software .....................................................................................................................................257
E. System Options ..........................................................................................................................257

A. MR-JN Rotary Amplifiers
Amplifier Selection
MR-JN- A
Symbol Description
None 1-Phase 200VAC
1 1-Phase 100VAC (Note)
Mitsubishi JN-Series Note: MR-JN-10A1and -20A1 are available.
general purpose AC
Servo Amplifier Compatible Motor 200VAC Class
Symbol
HF-KN HF-KP (with reducer)
Conforms to 10 053, 13 053, 13
the following
20 23 23
standards: EN,
UL, cUL 40 43 43
Servo Amplifier Specifications

Servo Amplifier Model MR-JN-10A MR-JN-20A MR-JN-40A MR-JN-10A1 MR-JN-20A1
Rated Voltage 3-phase 170VAC
Output
Rated Current (A) 1.1 1.6 2.8 1.1 1.6
Main Voltage/Frequency (*1, *2) 1-phase 200VAC to 230VAC 50/60Hz 1-phase 100VAC to 120VAC 50/60Hz
Circuit Rated Current (A) 1.5 2.4 4.5 3.0 5.0
Power Permissible Voltage Fluctuation 1-phase 170VAC to 253VAC 1-phase 85VAC to 132VAC
Supply Permissible Frequency Fluctuation ±5% maximum
Control Voltage 24VDC
Circuit Rated Current (A) 0.5
Power Permissible Voltage Fluctuation ±10% maximum
Supply Power Consumption (W) 10
Interface Power Supply 24VDC 10% (required current capacity: 0.2A (*5))
Tolerable regenerative Power of Built-In
- 10 10 - 10
Regenerative Resistor (W) (*3, *4)
Dynamic Brake Built-in (*6)
Overcurrent shutdown, regeneration overvoltage shutdown, overload shutdown (electronic thermal), servomotor overheat
Safety Features protection, encoder fault protection, regeneration fault protection, undervoltage/sudden power outage protection, overspeed
protection, excess error protection
Maximum Input Pulse Frequency 1Mpps (when using differential receiver), 200kpps (when using open collector)
Positioning Feedback Pulse Encoder resolution: 131072 p/rev
Control
Mode Positioning Complete Width Setting 0 to ±65535 pulses (command pulse unit)
Excess Error ±3 rotations
Torque Limit Set by parameters
Internal Speed Control Range Internal speed command 1:5000
Speed Speed Command Input Set by parameters
Control Speed Fluctuation Rate ±0.01% maximum (load fluctuation 0 to 100%); 0% (power fluctuation ±10%)
mode Torque Limit Set by parameters
Internal
Torque Command Input Set by parameters
Torque
Control
Speed Limit Set by parameters
Mode
Positioning Mode (*8) Point table method, Program method
Ambient Temperature 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) (non-freezing), storage: -20 to 65°C (-4 to 149°F) (non-freezing) (*7)
Environment

Vibration 5.9m/s² or less at 10 to 55Hz (direction of X, Y, and Z axes)
Weight kg (lb) 0.6 (1.3) 0.6 (1.3) 0.7 (1.5) 0.6 (1.3) 0.6 (1.3)
Note:
1. Rated output and speed of a servomotor are applicable when the servo amplifier, combined with the servomotor, is operated within the specified power supply voltage and frequency. Torque drops when the power supply
voltage is below the specified value.
2. For torque characteristics when combined with a servomotor, refer to “Servomotor Torque Characteristics” in this catalog.
3. Optimal regenerative resistor varies for each system. Select the most suitable regenerative resistor by using the capacity selection software.
4. Refer to “Options • Optional regeneration unit” in this catalog for the tolerable regenerative power (W).
5. 0.2A is the value when all of the input/output points are used. The current capacity can be stepped down according to the number of input/output points in use. Refer to “MR-JN-_A INSTRUCTION MANUAL” for details.
6. When using the built-in dynamic brake, refer to “MR-JN-_A INSTRUCTION MANUAL” for the permissible load to motor inertia moment ratio.
7. The servo amplifier can be installed closely. In this case, keep the ambient temperature within 0 to 45°C (32 to 113°F), or use the servo amplifier at 75% or less of the effective load rate.
8. Servo amplifier with software version B0 or above is required for the positioning function.
250
B. MR-JN Super Servomotors
HF-KN 3
Stocked Motors
Symbol Shaft Shape Model Number
HF-KN053
None Standard (Straight Shaft)
HF-KN053B
K With Keyway (Note) HF-KN13
D D-Cut (Note) HF-KN13B
HF-KN23K
Low inertia, Note: Refer to “Special Shaft End Specifications” in this
small capacity.
guide for the available models and detailed specifications. HF-KN23BK
HF-KN43K
Conforms to Symbol Electromagnetic Brake
HF-KN43BK
the following Rated Speed None Without Brake
standards: 3000 (r/min) B With Brake
EN, UL, cUL
Symbol Rated Output (kW)
05 0.05
1 0.1
2 0.2
4 0.4
HF-KP 3
Symbol Shaft Shape
None Standard (Straight Shaft)
K With Keyway (Note)
Note: Refer to “Special Shaft End Specifications” in this
guide for the available models and detailed specifications.
Symbol Reducer
Low inertia, G1 For general industrial machines
small capacity.
Conforms to G5 Flange output type for precision application, flange mounting
the following G7 Shaft output type for precision application, flange mounting
standards:
Note: Refer to “Geared Servo Motor Specifications” in this guide for the available model and detailed specifications.
EN, UL, cUL
None Without Brake
Rated Speed
Symbol Rated Output (kW)

05 0.05
1 0.1
2 0.2
4 0.4

HF-KN Servomotor Specifications
Servomotor Model HF-KN_ HF-KN053(B) HF-KN13(B) HF-KN23(B) HF-KN43(B)
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_-_ MR-JN-10A (1) MR-JN-20A (1) MR-JN-40A
Power Supply Capacity (kVA) (*1) 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.9
Rated Output (W) 50 100 200 400
Continuous Running Duty
Rated Torque (N•m [oz•in]) (*8) 0.16 (22.7) 0.32 (45.3) 0.64 (90.6) 1.3 (184)
Maximum Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 0.48 (68.0) 0.95 (135) 1.9 (269) 3.8 (538)
Power Rate Continuous Rated Torque (kW/s) 4.87 11.5 16.9 38.6
Rated Current (A) 0.9 0.8 1.4 2.7
Regenerative Braking Freq. (times/min) (*2) (*3) (*3) 470 261
Moment of inertia Standard 0.052 (0.284) 0.088 (0.481) 0.24 (1.31) 0.42 (2.30)
J (x10-4kg•m²) [J
(oz•in²)] With Electromagnetic Brake 0.054 (0.295) 0.090 (0.492) 0.31 (1.69) 0.50 (2.73)
Recommended Load / Motor Inertia Moment Ratio (*4) 15 times maximum 24 times maximum 22 times maximum
Speed/Position Detector Incremental 17-bit encoder (resolution: 131072 p/rev)
Structure Totally enclosed non-ventilated (protection level: IP65) (*5)
Ambient Temperature (*7) 0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F) (non-freezing), storage: -15 to 70°C (5 to 158°F) (non-freezing)
Environment
Elevation / Vibration (*6) 1000m or less above sea level X: 49m/s² Y: 49m/s²
Standard 0.4 (0.89) 0.5 (1.1) 1.0 (2.2) 1.4 (3.1)
Weight kg (lb)
With Electromagnetic Brake 0.6 (1.3) 0.7 (1.5) 1.4 (3.1) 1.8 (4.0)
Notes:
1. The power supply capacity varies depending on the power supply’s impedance.
2. The regenerative braking frequency shows the permissible frequency when the motor, without a load and an optional regeneration unit, decelerates from the rated speed to a stop. When a load is connected; how-
ever, the value will be the table value/(m+1), where m=load inertia moment/motor inertia moment. When the operating speed exceeds the rated speed, the regenerative braking frequency is inversely proportional to
the square of (operating speed/rated speed). If the operating speed changes frequently or when the regeneration is constant (as with vertical feeds), find the regenerative heating value (W) in operation. Provisions
must be made to keep this heating value below the tolerable regenerative power (W).Optimal regenerative resistor varies for each system. Select the most suitable regenerative resistor by using the capacity selec-
tion software. Refer to the section “Options • Optional regeneration unit” in this catalog for details on the tolerable regenerative power (W).
3. When the motor decelerates to a stop from the rated speed, the regenerative frequency will not be limited if the effective torque is within the rated torque range. When the motor decelerates to a stop from the
maximum speed, the regenerative frequency will not be limited if the effective torque is within the rated torque range and if the load to motor inertia moment is 8 times or less for HF-KN053(B) or 4 time or less for
HF-KN13(B).
4. Contact your local sales office if the load to motor inertia moment ratio exceeds the value in the table.
6. The vibration direction is shown in the diagram to the right. The value indicates the maximum value of the component (normally the bracket in the opposite direction of the motor shaft). Fretting of the bearing
occurs easily when the motor stops, so maintain vibration to approximately one-half of the allowable value.
7. In the environment where the servomotor is exposed to oil mist, oil and/or water, a standard specification servomotor may not be usable. Contact your local sales office for more details.
8. When unbalanced torque is generated, such as in a vertical lift machine, it is recommended that the unbalanced torque of the machine be kept under 70% of the motor’s rated torque.
X
Y
HF-KN053(B) (*1, *2, *3) HF-KN13(B) (*1, *2, *3) HF-KN23(B) (*1, *2, *3)
84 0.6 168 1.2 294 2.1
Peak running range

Torque (oz in)
Torque (oz in)
Torque (oz in)
Peak running range Peak running range

Torque (N m)
Torque (N m)
Torque (N m)
56 0.4 112 0.8 196 1.4
28 0.2 56 0.4 98 0.7
Continuous running range Continuous running range Continuous running range
0 0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500
Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min)
HF-KN43(B) (*1, *3)

630 4.5
Peak running range

Torque (oz in)
Torque (N m)
420 3.0 Notes: 1. : For 1-phase 230VAC.

210 1.5 The line is drawn only where
differs from the other two lines.
Continuous running range
0 0
1000 2000 3000 4000 4500
Speed (r/min)
252
HF-KP Geared Servomotor Specifications
Servomotor Model HF-KP_ HF-KP053(B)G_ HF-KP13(B)G_ HF-KP23(B)G_ HF-KP43(B)G_
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_-_ MR-JN-10A (1) MR-JN-20A (1) MR-JN-40A
Power Supply Capacity (kVA) (*1) 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.9
Rated Output (W) 50 100 200 400
Continuous Running Duty Rated Torque (N•m [oz•in])
0.16 (22.7) 0.32 (45.3) 0.64 (90.6) 1.3 (184)
(*8, *11)
Maximum Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 0.48 (68.0) 0.95 (135) 1.9 (269) 3.8 (538)
Rated Speed (r/min) (*9) 3000
Maximum Speed (r/min) (*9) 4500 (*6)
Permissible Speed (r/min) Refer to HF-KP Series Geared Servomotor Dimensions in this guide
Power Rate Continuous Rated Torque (kW/s) (*8) 4.87 11.5 16.9 38.6
Rated Current (A) 0.9 0.8 1.4 2.7
Regenerative Braking Frequency (times/min) (*2, *6) (*3) (*3) 474 276
Moment of inertia Standard
J (x10-4kg•m²) [J Refer to HF-KP Series Geared Servomotor Dimensions in this selection guide
(oz•in²)] With Electromagnetic Brake
Permissible Load to Motor Inertia Moment Ratio Refer to “Geared Servomotor Specifications” in this selection guide
Speed/Position Detector Absolute/incremental 18-bit encoder (resolution 262144 p/rev) (*10)
Environment (*7)
Elevation / Vibration (*5, *8) 1000m or less above sea level X: 49m/s² Y: 49m/s²
Standard
Weight kg (lb) Refer to HF-KP Series Geared Servomotor Dimensions in this selection guide
With Electromagnetic Brake
Notes:
2. The regenerative braking frequency shows the permissible frequency when the motor, without a load and an optional regeneration unit, decelerates from the rated speed to a stop. When a load is connected;
however, the value will be the table value/(m+1), where m=load inertia moment/motor inertia moment. When the operating speed exceeds the rated speed, the regenerative braking frequency is inversely propor-
tional to the square of (operating speed/rated speed). If the operating speed changes frequently or when the regeneration is constant (as with vertical feeds), find the regenerative heating value (W) in operation.
Provisions must be made to keep this heating value below the tolerable regenerative power (W).Optimal regenerative resistor varies for each system. Select the most suitable regenerative resistor by using the
capacity selection software. Refer to the section “Options • Optional Regeneration Unit” in this catalog for details on the tolerable regenerative power (W).
3. When the motor decelerates to a stop from the rated speed, the regenerative frequency will not be limited if the effective torque is within the rated torque range. When the motor decelerates to a stop from the
maximum speed, the regenerative frequency will not be limited if the effective torque is within the rated torque range and if the load to motor inertia moment is 8 times or less for HF-KP053(B)G_ or 4 time or less
for HF-KP13(B)G_.
5. The vibration direction is shown in the diagram to the right. The value indicates the maximum value of the component (normally the bracket in the opposite direction of the motor shaft). Fretting of the bearing
occurs easily when the motor stops, so maintain vibration to approximately one-half of the allowable value.
6. The values are applicable when combining with MR-JN servo amplifier series.
7. In the environment where the servomotor is exposed to oil mist, oil and/or water, a standard specification servomotor may not be usable. Contact your local sales office for more details.
8. The values are applicable for the servomotor without reducer.
9. The values are applicable at the reducer input shaft.
10. When combined with MR-JN servo amplifier series, the detector performance is equivalent to an incremental 17-bit encoder.
11. When unbalanced torque is generated, such as in a vertical lift machine, it is recommended that the unbalanced torque of the machine be kept under 70% of the motor’s rated torque.
X
Y
(Note 1)
Cautions
HF-KP053(B) (*2, *3, *4) HF-KP13(B) (*2, *3, *4) HF-KP23(B) (*2, *3, *4)
84 0.6 168 1.2 294 2.1
Peak running range

Torque (oz in)
Torque (oz in)
Torque (oz in)

Torque (N m)
Torque (N m)
Torque (N m)
56 0.4 112 0.8 196 1.4
28 0.2 56 0.4 98 0.7
0 0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500
HF-KP43(B) (Note *2, *4)

630 4.5
Notes: 1. For the servo motor without reducer.
Peak running range
Torque (oz in)
Torque (N m)

420 3.0
The line is drawn only where
210 1.5
differs from the other two lines.
0 0
1000 2000 3000 4000 4500

HF-JN Cables and Connectors
20
FX3U
Controller
FX3UC Servo amplifier
FX3G
QD70P CNP1
QD70D
QD75P 21
QD75D Manual pulse 19
Operation generator
LD75P cabinet 22 CNP2
MR-HDP01
LD75D 23
CN1
20 24 CN3
CN2
MR Configurator
(Setup software)
MRZJW3-SETUP221E
For encoder cable length 10M or shorter
For leading the cables out in a direction of the motor shaft (*4) For leading the cables out in an opposite direction of the motor shaft (*4)
To CNP1
To CN2
Motor power supply cable Motor power supply cable
11 12
Motor electromagnetic brake cable Motor electromagnetic brake cable
15 16
Encoder cable
Encoder cable
1 2
Servo motor Servo motor
For encoder cable length over 10M
For leading the cables out in a direction of the motor shaft (*4) For leading the cables out in an opposite direction of the motor shaft (*4)
To CNP1
Motor power supply cable
13 Wire size 0.75mm2 (AWG19)
To CN2
(*2) Manufacture a relay cable.
Manufacture a relay cable. (*2) Wire size
Motor electromagnetic brake cable 14
0.75mm2
17 Wire size 0.5mm2 (AWG20) Motor electromagnetic brake cable (AWG19)
(*3) Manufacture a relay cable. Manufacture a relay cable. (*3)

18 Wire size 0.5mm2
Encoder cable Encoder cable (AWG20)
3 (*1) 5 5 4 (*1)
6 6
Encoder cable Encoder cable
7 (*1) 9 9 8 (*1)
10 10
25 25
Servo motor Servo motor
Notes:
1. This cable does not have a long bending life, so always fix the cable before using.
2. If the length exceeds 10m, relay a cable using MR-PWS2CBL03M-A1-L/-A2-L cable. This cable does not have a long bending life, so always fix the cable before using. Refer to “MR-JN-_A INSTRUCTION
MANUAL” for details on manufacturing the relay cable.
3. If the length exceeds 10m, relay a cable using MR-BKS2CBL03M-A1-L/-A2-L cable . This cable does not have a long bending life, so always fix the cable before using. Refer to “MR-JN-_A INSTRUCTION
MANUAL” for details on manufacturing the relay cable.
4. Cables for leading two different directions may be used for one servomotor.
254
MR-JN Rotary Cables and Connectors (refer to chart on previous page)
Encoder Cables
Item Diagram
(_ = cable length in meters) Lengths Level (*2)
Lead Out in Direction of _= 2, 5 or 10 (*1)
1 Motor Shaft MR-J3ENCBL_M-A1-L
10m or Shorter 2, 5, 10 IP65 Encoder Amplifier
_= 2, 5, or 10 (*1) Side Side
(Direct Connection
MR-J3ENCBL_M-A2-H
Type) 2, 5, 10 IP65
2 of Motor Shaft MR-J3ENCBL_M-A2-L 2, 5, 10 IP65
_= 2, 5, or 10 (*1)
Lead Out in Direction of MR-J3JCBL03M-A1-L
3 S IP20 Encoder Junction
Motor Shaft cable length 0.3 (*1) Side Connector
Lead Out in Opposite Direction MR-J3JCBL03M-A2-L
4 S IP20
MR-EKCBL_M-H 20, 30 IP20
_= 20, 30, 40, or 50 (*1)
5 Ampliier-Side Cable
MR-EKCBL_M-L Use this in combination with 5 or 6.
- IP20
_= 20 or 30 (*1)
Junction Connector,
6 MR-ECNM S IP20
Ampliier-Side Connector
Motor Side Encoder Cable MR-J3JSCBL03M-A1-L
Exceeding 10m Lead Out In Direction of Cable length 0.3m S IP65
7
(Relay Type) Motor Shaft (*1)
Motor Side Encoder Cable MR-J3JSCBL03M-A2-L
8 Lead Out In Opposite Direction Cable length 0.3m S IP67 Use this in combination of cable numbers 9 or 10
of Motor Shaft (*1)
MR-J3ENSCBL_M-H 2, 5, 10,
_ = cable length 2, 5, 10, IP67
20, 30
20, 30, 40, 50m (*1)
9 Ampliier-Side Encoder Cable
MR-J3ENSCBL_M-L
_ = cable length 2, 5, 10, 2, 5 IP67 Use this in combination of cable numbers 7 or 8
20, 30m (*1)
Encoder Side Amplifier Side
10 Junction Connector Set MR-J3SCNS S IP67
Notes:
2. The IP rating indicated is for the connector’s protection against ingress of dust and water when coupled to a servo amplifier/servomotor. If the IP rating of the servo amplifier/servomotor differs from that of
these connectors, overall IP rating depends on the lowest of all.
Motor Power Supply Cables

Item Diagram
MR-PWS1CBL_M-A1-H 2, 5, 10 IP65
Lead Out in Direction of Motor _= 2, 5 or 10 (*1, *2)
Shaft (Non-Shielded) MR-PWS1CBL_M-A1-L
11 2, 5, 10 IP65
_= 2, 5 or 10 (*1, *2)
Lead Out in Direction of Motor MR-J3PS_M-A1
10m or Shorter 5 IP65 Non-shielded
Shaft (Shielded) _= 5 or 10
(Direct Connection
MR-PWS1CBL_M-A2-H
Type) 2, 5, 10 IP65
Lead Out in Opposite Direction _= 2, 5 or 10 (*1, *2) Shielded
of Motor Shaft (Non-Shielded) MR-PWS1CBL_M-A2-L
12 2, 5, 10 IP65
_= 2, 5 or 10 (*1, *2)
Lead Out in Opposite Direction MR-J3PS_M-A2 5, 10 IP65
of Motor Shaft (Shielded) _= 5 or 10
Lead Out in Direction of Motor MR-PWS2CBL03M-A1-L S IP55
Shaft (Non-Shielded) cable length 0.3 (*2)
13
Lead Out in Direction of Motor MR-J3PS03M-A1 S IP65
Exceeding 10m Shaft (Shielded) cable length 0.3 (*2)
(Relay Type) Lead Out in Opposite Direction MR-PWS2CBL03M-A2-L S IP55
of Motor Shaft (Non-Shielded) cable length 0.3 (*2)
14
Lead Out in Opposite Direction MR-J3PS03M-A2 S IP65
of Motor Shaft (Shielded) cable length 0.3 (*2)
Notes:
1. Must order separate power connector 27 or 28 to connect to the power cable.
Motor Brake Cables

Item Diagram
Lead Out in Direction of _= 2, 5, or 10 (*1)
15 Motor Shaft MR-BKS1CBL_M-A1-L
10m or Shorter - IP65
_= 2, 5, or 10 (*1)
(Direct Connection
MR-BKS1CBL_M-A2-H
Type) 2, 5, 10 IP65
16 of Motor Shaft MR-BKS1CBL_M-A2-L - IP65
_= 2, 5, or 10 (*1)
Lead Out in Direction of MR-BKS2CBL03M-A1-L
17 Motor Shaft cable length 0.3 (*1) S IP55
Exceeding 10m
(Relay Type) Lead Out in Opposite Direction MR-BKS2CBL03M-A2-L
18 S IP55
Note:

CNP1 and CNP2 Connectors
Item Model Number Stocked Item Protection Level Description
CNP1 Connector (Comes with Ampliier) N/A (Comes with ampliier) - -

19
CNP2 Connector (Comes with Ampliier) N/A (Comes with ampliier) - -
CN1 Connector
Item Model Number Stocked Lengths Protection Level Description
20 CN1 Connector Set MR-J2CMP2 S -
MR-TBNATBL_M
(_ = cable length: 0.5, 1M)
CN3 Connector
MR-J3USBCBL3M
23 USB Cable S -
(Cable length 3M)
Pigtail Cable for CN1 on Amp

Item Model Number Stocked Lengths Protection Level Diagram
MR-ECN1CBL-3M
24 CN1 Pigtail Cable (26 pin) S -
(Cable length 3M)
CN2 Connector
Item Model Number Stocked Item Protection Level Diagram
256
D. Software
MR Configurator
This software makes it easy to perform setup, tuning, monitor display,
diagnostics, reading and writing of parameters, and test operations with a
personal computer. User-friendly functions that enable the balance with the
machine system, optimum control and short start up time are available.
• This software can set up and tune your servo system easily with a
personal computer.
• Multiple monitor functions. Graphic display functions are provided to
display the servomotor status with the input signal triggers, such as the
command pulse, droop pulse and speed.
• Test operations with a personal computer. Test operation of the
servomotors can be performed with a personal computer using multiple
test mode menus.
• Further advanced tuning is possible with the improved advanced functions.

Windows Communication Software MR-CONFIGURATOR S
Communication Cable MR-J3USBCBL3M S
E. System Options
Manual Pulse Generator EMC Filter
Stocked
Servo Amplifier Type Model Number Stocked Item Description Servo Amplifier Type Model Number Description
Item
All MR-JN Models MR-HDP01 S
All MR-JN Models MF3F480-010.233MF -
Line Noise Filter

Servo Amplifier Type Model Number Stocked Item Description
Note: Contact MEAU for additional filter options.
Optional Regeneration Resistors

All MR-JN Models FR-BSF01 S Tolerable Tolerable Regenerative Power of
Servo Ampliier Regenerative Power of Optional Regeneration Unit (W)
Model Built-in Regenerative
Resistor (W) MR-RB032 (40Ω) MR-RB12 (40Ω)
Stocked Item - S S
MR-JN-10A (*1) - 30 -
MR-JN-20A (*1) 10 30 100
Radio Noise Filter MR-JN-40A 10 30 100
Servo Amplifier Type Model Number Stocked Item Description Note:
1. The power values in this table are resistor-generated powers, not rated powers.
All MR-JN Models FR-BIF S
Power Factor Improvement AC Reactor

Model Number Applicable Servo Ampliier Stocked Item
MRL-00204 MR-JN-10A (1), MR-JN-20A -
MRL-00401 MR-JN-40A, MR-JN-20A1 -

MR-JN Rotary Motor Shaft Details and Servomotor Dimensions
HF-KN Series
D-Cut Shaft (50W & 100W Motors Only) (*1)
25 (0.98)
21.5 (0.85)
1 (0.039)
20.5 (0.81)
0
ø8h6 (ø0.3150 -0.009 )
Unit: mm (inch)
Note:
1. The servomotor with the keyway shaft or the D-cut shaft cannot be used in frequent start/stop applications.
HF-KN Series
Keyway with Key Included (200W, 400W) (*1)
R
Q
Motor Capacity Variable Dimensions

QK QL
Model (W) T S R Q W QK QL U Y
U
A
5 14h6 30 27 5 20 3 3 M4 Depth
HF-KN_K 200, 400
(0.20) (0.554) (1.18) (1.06) (0.20) (0.79) (0.12) (0.12) 15 (0.59)
W
øS
A T Y
Cross Section
A-A
(Unit: mm)
Note:
HF-KP Series
Keyway with Key Included (200W, 400W) (*1, 2, 3)
Reduction Variable Dimensions

Motor Model
Ratio S Q W QK U T Y
1/5
1/11
HF-KP053G7K 1/21
1/33 M4 Screw
16 28 5 25 3 5
1/45 Depth 8mm
Q
1/5
QK U 1/11
HF-KP13G7K 1/21
W
1/33 M6 Screw
Sh7
25 42 8 36 4 7
1/45 Depth 12mm
T 1/5 M4 Screw
Y
16 28 5 25 3 5
1/11 Depth 8mm
HF-KP23G7K 1/21
M6 Screw
1/33 25 42 8 36 4 7
Depth 12mm
1/45
M4 Screw
1/5 16 28 5 25 3 5
Depth 8mm
1/11 M6 Screw
HF-KP43G7K 25 42 8 36 4 7
1/21 Depth 12mm
1/33 M10 Screw
40 82 12 70 5 8
1/45 Depth 20mm
Notes:
2. A key (single-point key) is supplied.
3. The dimensions not mentioned in the drawings are the same as those of the straight shaft of HF-KP_G7. Refer to “HF-KP Series Geared Servomotor Dimensions • HF-KP_(B)G7” in this guide.
258
HF-KN Series
HF-KN053(B), HF-KN13(B)
20.5 20.7 L 25 2- 4.5 mounting 40

5 2.5 hole
21.5 Use hexagonal cap 45
head bolts.
pin assignment
20.7
46 1 Pin No. Signal name
30h7
2 1 Earth
1
2
3 2 U
3
3 V
4
4
21
4 W
37.1
38.8 (*3)
36
8h6
Brake connector
1 pin assignment (*3)
Encoder Power supply Pin No. Signal name
1
connector 10.1 9.9 connector
2 1 B1
2
13.7 4.9 11.7 11.7 19.2 13.9 6.4 2 B2
27.4 21.5 KL 27.5
58.8 (*3) 18.4 Brake connector
(*3)
(*3)
Variable dimensions
Model
L KL
7
1
72
9
HF-KN053 (B) 25.4

13
2
Power (108.9)
supply
Encoder connector
connector 11.7 11.7 18.4 9.9
87
58.8 (*3) (*3) HF-KN13 (B) 40.4
Brake connector (*) (123.9)
21.5
HF-KN23(B), HF-KN43(B)
4- 5.8
mounting hole
Use hexagonal cap
L 30 head bolts. 60
7 3
45

70 pin assignment
1
Pin No. Signal name
50h7
2 1 Earth
1
3 2 U
2
3
4 3 V
14h6
4
4 W
47.1 (*3)
47.1
46
Brake connector
1 pin assignment (*3)
Encoder
connector 9.5 Pin No. Signal name
1
Power supply connector 2 1 B1
13.7 10 10.1 19.2 13.9 5.9
2
2 B2
28.4 11.8 11.7 KL 27.8
21.5
Brake connector (Note 3)
57.8 (*3)
Variable dimensions
Model
L KL
88.2
7
9
HF-KN23 (B) 40
13.5
Power supply
connector (116.8)
Encoder 9.5
connector 11.8 11.7 18.3
Brake connector (*3) 110.2
(*3) HF-KN43 (B) 62
(138.8)
57.8 (*3)
21.5

MR-JN Rotary HF-KP Series Geared Servomotor Dimensions
HF-KP_(B)G1
The actual shapes of the mounting screws may differ.
Rotation direction
For reverse rotation command
For forward rotation command
L LR 4- M
LK LH Q LD
LG
45
LA
LC
LE
S
KA
KB

LT (*3) Power supply connector
Encoder connector
LP (*3) KL
Brake connector
pin assignment
pin assignment (*3)
(*3) 1 1 Pin No. Signal name
Pin No. Signal name
2 1 Earth
1 B1
2 3 2 U
2 B2
4 3 V
4 W
Power supply
connector
Encoder connector LT
LP (*3)
Brake connector
(*3)
Reduction Moment of Inertia Variable Dimensions Weight

Ratio (Actual
Model
Reduction J(x10-4kg•m²) J(oz•in²) L LA LC LD LE S LH LK KL LG Q LR M KA KB LT LP kg lb
Ratio)
110.9 1.4 3.1
1/5 (9/44) 0.089 (0.091) 0.487 (0.498) 69
(152) (1.7) (3.8)
HF-KP053(B)G1
1/12 (49/576) 0.111 (0.113) 0.607 (0.618) 128 1.8 4.0
87
1/20 (25/484) 0.093 (0.095) 0.508 (0.519) (170) 37.1 - (2.1) (4.7)
75 60h7 65 50 16h6 6.5 8 34.5 25 60.5 7 36 11.7
126.9 (38.8) (58.3) 1.6 3.6
1/5 (9/44) 0.125 (0.127) 0.683 (0.694) 85
(168) (1.9) (4.2)
HF-KP13(B)G1
1/12 (49/576) 0.147 (0.149) 0.804 (0.815) 144.9 2.0 4.4
103
1/20 (25/484) 0.129 (0.131) 0.705 (0.716) (186) (2.3) (5.1)
130.1 3.3 7.3
1/5 (19/96) 0.400 (0.470) 2.19 (2.57) 92.8
(169.6) (3.9) (8.6)
HF-KP23(B)G1
1/12 (25/288) 0.450 (0.520) 2.46 (2.84) 150.1 3.9 8.6
112.8
1/20 (253/5000) 0.420 (0.490) 2.3 (2.68) (189.6) (4.5) (10)
100 82h7 90 73 25h6 8 38 35 74
152 47.1 - 3.9 8.6
1/5 (19/96) 0.570 (0.650) 3.12 (3.55) 10 114.7 9 46 11.8
(191.5) (47.1) (57.8) (4.4) (9.7)
172 4.5 10
HF-KP43(B)G1 1/12 (25/288) 0.620 (0.700) 3.39 (3.83) 134.7
(211.5) (5.0) (11)
175.5 5.6 13
1/20 (253/5000) 0.930 (1.01) 5.08 (5.52) 115 95h7 100 86 32h6 10 138.2 39 50 90
(215) (6.1) (14)
Notes:
2. Dimensions inside ( ) are for the models with electromagnetic brake.
3. Only for the models with electromagnetic brake. The electromagnetic brake terminals (B1, B2) do not have polarity.
4. The moments of inertia in the table are the values that are converted into motor shaft for the motor with reducer (and with electromagnetic brake).
5. For dimensions where there is no tolerance listed, use general tolerance. The actual dimensions may be 1mm to 3mm larger than the dimensions listed since the outer frame of the reducer is made by
casting. Design a machine in order to make allowances.
6. Lead out the power supply cable in opposite direction of the motor shaft for the following servomotors: All gear ratios for HF-KP053(B)G1 and HF-KP13(B)G1
260
HF-KP_(B)G5
The actual shapes of the mountig screws may differ.
Rotation direction
N-P screw depth: R 4- M

L LG LD
LM LK LH 45
T
LA
LB
LC
LE
LF
KA
KB

LT (*2) Power supply connector
Encoder connector
LP (*2) KL
Brake connector
pin assignment
pin assignment (*2)
Pin No. Signal name
2 1 Earth
1 B1
2 3 2 U
2 B2
4 3 V
4 W
Power supply
connector
Encoder connector LT LP
(*2)
Brake connector
(*2)

Ratio (Actual
Model
Reduction J(x10-4kg•m²) J(oz•in²) L LA LB LC LD LE LF LG LH LK LM KL T N P R M KA KB LT LP kg lb
Ratio)
1.1 2.5
1/5 0.120 (0.122) 0.656 (0.667)
(1.4) (3.1)
HF-KP053(B)G5 1/11 0.112 (0.114) 0.612 (0.623) 130.4
88.5
(*5) 1/21 0.103 (0.105) 0.563 (0.574) (171.5) 1.2 2.7
1/33 0.097 (0.099) 0.53 (0.514) (1.5) (3.3)
14H7 21 -0.5 3
+0.4
70 30 56h7 60 40 8 56 M4 7 5.5
1/45 0.097 (0.099) 0.53 (0.514) 37.1 -
36 11.7
(38.8) (58.3) 1.3 2.9
1/5 0.156 (0.158) 0.853 (0.864)
146.4 (1.6) (3.6)
104.5
HF-KP13(B)G5 1/11 0.148 (0.150) 0.809 (0.82) (187.5) 1.4 3.1
(*5) 1/21 0.139 (0.141) 0.76 (0.771) (1.7) (3.8)
1/33 0.150 (0.152) 0.82 (0.831) 148.9 2.6 5.8
24H7 27 -0.5 8
+0.4
105 45 85h7 90 59 10 56.5 107 M6 10 9
1/45 0.149 (0.151) 0.815 (0.826) (190) (2.9) (6.4)
5 6 1.8 4.0
1/5 0.411 (0.511) 2.41 (2.79)
140.6 (2.4) (5.3)
14H7 21 -0.5 3
+0.4
70 30 56h7 60 40 8 56 103.3 M4 7 5.5
(180.1) 1.9 4.2
HF-KP23(B)G5 1/11 0.443 (0.513) 2.42 (2.80)
(2.5) (5.6)
(*5)
1/21 0.738 (0.808) 4.03 (4.42)
147.6 3.4 7.5
24H7 27 -0.5 8
+0.4
1/33 0.692 (0.762) 3.78 (4.17) 105 45 85h7 90 59 10 61 110.3 M6 10 9
(187.1) 47.1 - (4.1) (9.1)
1/45 0.691 (0.761) 3.78 (4.16) 46 11.8
(47.1) (57.8)
162.5 2.3 5.1
14H7 21 -0.5 3
+0.4
1/5 0.621 (0.701) 3.4 (3.83) 70 30 56h7 60 40 8 56 125.2 M4 7 5.5
(202) (2.9) (6.4)
1/11 0.996 (1.08) 5.45 (5.90) 169.5 4.0 8.9
24H7 27 -0.5 8
+0.4
HF-KP43(B)G5 105 45 85h7 90 59 10 61 132.2 M6 10 9
1/21 0.918 (0.998) 5.02 (5.46) (209) (4.6) (11)
1/33 0.970 (1.05) 5.3 (5.74) 181.5 6.1 14
135 60 115h7 120 84 32H7 35+0.4
-0.5 13 13 70 144.2 M8 12 11
1/45 0.964 (1.04) 5.27 (5.69) (221) (6.7) (15)
Notes:
5. Lead out the power supply cable in opposite direction of the motor shaft for the following servomotors: All gear ratios for HF-KP053(B)G5 and HF-KP13(B)G5; Gear ratios of 1/21, 1/33 and 1/45 for
HF-KP23(B)G5

HF-KP_(B)G7
The actual shapes of the mounting screws may differ.
Rotation direction

4- M
L LR
LD
LM LK LG Q
45
LH
LA
LC
LE
S
KA
KB
Brake connector (*6) Power supply connector

Encoder connector LT (* 3)
LP (*3) KL
Brake connector pin assignment (*3) Power supply connector pin assignment
Pin No. Signal name
2 1 Earth
1 B1
2 3 2 U
2 B2
4 3 V
4 W
Power supply
connector
Encoder connector LT
LP (*3)
Brake connector
(*3)

Ratio
Model (Actual -4
Reduction J(x10 kg•m²) J(oz•in²) L LA LC LD LE S LG LH Q LR LK LM KL M KA KB LT LP kg lb
Ratio)
1.2 2.7
1/5 0.126 (0.128) 0.689 (0.70)
(1.5) (3.3)
HF-KP053(B)G7 1/11 0.113 (0.115) 0.618 (0.629) 130.4
88.5
(*6) 1/21 0.103 (0.105) 0.563 (0.574) (171.5) 1.3 2.9
1/33 0.097 (0.099) 0.53 (0.514) (1.6) (3.6)
70 56h7 60 40 16h7 21 3 28 58 8 56 5.5
1/45 0.097 (0.099) 0.53 (0.514) 37.1 -
36 11.7
(38.8) (58.3) 1.4 3.1
1/5 0.162 (0.164) 0.886 (0.897)
146.4 (1.7) (3.8)
104.5
HF-KP13(B)G7 1/11 0.149 (0.151) 0.815 (0.826) (187.5) 1.5 3.3
(*6) 1/21 0.139 (0.141) 0.76 (0.771) (1.8) (4.0)
1/33 0.151 (0.153) 0.826 (0.837) 148.9 3.0 6.7
105 85h7 90 59 25h7 27 8 42 80 10 56.5 107 9
1/45 0.149 (0.151) 0.815 (0.826) (190) (3.3) (7.3)
1.9 4.2
1/5 0.447 (0.517) 2.44 (2.83)
140.6 (2.5) (5.6)
70 56h7 60 40 16h7 21 3 28 58 8 56 103.3 5.5
(180.1) 2.0 4.4
HF-KP23(B)G7 1/11 0.443 (0.513) 2.42 (2.80)
(2.6) (5.8)
(*6)
1/21 0.740 (0.810) 4.05 (4.43)
147.6 3.8 8.4
1/33 0.693 (0.763) 3.79 (4.17) 105 85h7 90 59 25h7 27 8 42 80 10 61 110.3 9
(187.1) 47.1 - (4.5) (10)
1/45 0.691 (0.761) 3.78 (4.16) 46 11.8
(47.1) (57.8)
162.5 2.4 5.3
1/5 0.627 (0.707) 3.43 (3.87) 70 56h7 60 40 16h7 21 3 28 58 8 56 125.2 5.5
(202) (3.0) (6.7)
1/11 1.00 (1.08) 5.47 (5.90) 169.5 4.4 9.7
HF-KP43(B)G7 105 85h7 90 59 25h7 27 8 42 80 10 61 132.2 9
1/21 0.920 (1.00) 5.03 (5.47) (209) (5.0) (11)
1/33 0.976 (1.06) 5.3 (5.80) 181.5 7.5 17
135 115h7 120 84 40h7 35 13 82 133 13 70 144.2 11
1/45 0.967 (1.05) 5.29 (5.74) (221) (8.1) (18)
Notes:
6. Lead out the power supply cable in opposite direction of the motor shaft for the following servomotors: All gear ratios for HF-KP053(B)G7 and HF-KP13(B)G7; Gear ratios of 1/21, 1/33 and 1/45 for
HF-KP23(B)G7
262
MR-J3 Servomotors and Amplifiers
With a capacity range of 50W to 55kW, the size of both the amplifier and motor are reduced. A high resolution encoder, advanced auto-tuning and
vibration control have been added. The J3’s high torque motor can operate at up to 6000 rpm with a speed frequency response of 2100Hz. Twenty
percent smaller than its predecessor, the J3’s high resolution 262,144ppr encoder is mounted as standard to provide stability even at low speeds.
Mitsubishi Electric Automation’s original model adaptive control and ever-evolving automatic tuning function makes precise tuning easy and the J3’s
advanced vibration control suppresses vibrations automatically. Set-up, diagnostics, and tuning are easy with MR-Configurator, a Windows™ -based
software package. MR-Configurator has many improved diagnostic functions, such as an advanced machine analyzer, software oscilloscope, and
high speed monitor. A parameter setting window makes start-up easy, and a USB interface enables high-speed sampling and long-term wavelength
measurement. The MR-J3 supports the following control methods: Position, Speed, Torque, SSCNET III Network, CC-Link, RS-485 Multi-Drop and
Turret Index.
MR-J3-A MR-J3-B Safety

MR-J3-A-RJ070 (Indexer)
MR-J3-A-RJ158 (EtherCAT) Personal
computer
MR Configurator
CN5
Servo amplifier
E
A
A Junction
E CN3
terminal
F
block
CN8 To MR-J3-D05
safety logic unit
CN1A Servo system

F controller or Front axis
servo amplifier CN1B
U
V CN1B Rear servo amplifier
W CN1A or Cap
D CN2
CN2L
D
Load side encoder
Servo motor
MR-J3-T MR-J3W-B
Personal
computer
MR Configurator
E CN5 E
Servo amplifier
A
Junction
CN3
terminal F
A block
CN1A Servo system

controller or Front axis
F
CN1B Rear servo amplifier
CN1A or Cap
CN2
D
CN2L
D
Load side encoder
C
Servo motor
C C
A. MR-J3 Amplifiers .......................................................................................................................264

B. Converter Unit (Required for 30KW ~ 55KW 200/400V Amplifiers)...........................................277
C. MR-J3 Servomotors...................................................................................................................278
D. Cables and Connectors ..............................................................................................................295
E. Software and Manuals ................................................................................................................311
F. System Options ...........................................................................................................................311

A. MR-J3 Amplifiers
Amplifier Types
Interface Control Mode Compatible Motor Series
Source Capacity
Setup Software
EtherCAT (*4)
Loop Control
Fully Closed
Turret Index
Pulse Train
Multi-Drop
SSCNET III
Model
Power
Functions
Position
Position
(*1)
CC-Link
RS-422
Analog
HF-MP
Torque
HC-RP
HC-UP
Speed
HF-KP
HF-SP
HC-LP
HA-LP
Type
HF-JP
DIO
General
3-Phase
Purpose MR-J3_A 0.05 ~ 37kW x x x x x x x x
200VAC
Interface
A-Type
1-Phase
x x - - x - x x x x - - x x MR-J3-_A1 0.05 ~ 0.4kW x x - - - - - -
100VAC
3-Phase
MR-J3-_A4 0.5 ~ 55kW - - x x - - - x
400VAC
Advanced High-
3-Phase
Speed Serial MR-J3-_BS 0.05 ~ 37kW x x x x x x x x
200VAC
Bus SSCNETIII
B Safety Type
1-Phase
- - - x - - - x x x - x - x MR-J3-_BS1 0.05 ~ 0.4kW x x - - - - - -
100VAC
3-Phase
MR-J3-_BS4 0.5 ~ 55kW - - x x - - - x
400VAC
B Dual Axis
3-Phase 0.05 ~
- - - x - - - x x x - - - x MR-J3W-_B x x - - - - - -
200VAC 0.75kW
Built-in CC-Link
3-Phase
Positioning MR-J3-_T 0.05 ~ 25kW x x x x x x x x
200VAC
Function
T-Type
x x 1-Phase
- - x x - x - - x - - x MR-J3-_T1 0.05 ~ 0.4kW x x - - - - - -
(*2) (*3) 100VAC
3-Phase
MR-J3-_T4 0.5 ~ 22kW - - x x - - - x
400VAC
Notes:
1. Capacity selection software MSIZE (MRZJW3-MOTSZ111) can be downloaded for free from www.meau.com.
2. Please use the manual pulse generator (MR-HDP01).
3. Please use the extended IO unit (MR-J3-D01).
4. Please use the interface module MR-J3-T04.
264
100V/200V Amplifier Selection: (Example Part No. = MR-J3-10BS)
MR-J3 - - Symbol Special Types
None Standard J3 Amplifier
U1_ _ 400% Maximum Torque (*1)
RJ070 Turret Index (*2)
RJ158 EtherCAT
Mitsubishi General
Purpose AC Servo Notes:
Amplifier 1. JP motors only.
2. Available on MR-J3-A type only.
Symbol Power Supply

Symbol Special Types
A: General Purpose Interface None 3-phase 200VAC or 1-phase 230VAC (*1)
None Standard
B: MR-J3W Type Amplifiers Only 1 1-phase 100VAC (*2)
W Dual Axis (*1) BS: SSCNET III Interface Notes:
Note: T: CC-Link Interface 1.The 1-phase 200VAC is available on MR-J3-70 or smaller.
1. B type only. Available for 200, 400, 750W only. AN: General Purpose Interface 2.The 1-phase 100VAC is available on MR-J3-40 or smaller.
Safety option not available. For 2kW-200V amplifiers only
TN: CC-Link Interface
For 2kW-200V amplifiers only
Compatible Motors
Symbol
HF-KP HF-MP HF-SP HF-JP HC-LP HC-RP HC-UP HA-LP
10 053, 13 053, 13 - - - - - - -
20 23 23 - - - - - - -
40 43 43 - - - - - - -
60 - - 51, 53 52 - 52 - - -
70 73 73 - 73 - - - 72 -
100 - - 81, 102 103 53 (*3) 102 - - -
200 - - 121, 201, 152, 202 153, 203 73, 103 (*3) 152 103, 153 152 -
350 - - 301, 352 353 153, 203 (*3) 202 203 202 -
500 - - 421, 502 503 353 (*3) 302 353, 503 352, 502 502
700 - - 702 703 503 (*3) - - - 601, 701M, 702
11K - - - 903, 11K1M (*6) - - - - 801, 12K1, 11K1M, 11K2
15K - - - 15K1M (*6) - - - - 15K1, 15K1M, 15K2
22K - - - - - - - - 20K1, 25K1, 22K1M, 22K2
DU30K (*1,*2) - - - - - - - - 30K1, 30K1M, 30K2
DU37K (*1, *2) - - - - - - - - 37K1, 37K1M, 37K2
22 053, 13, 23 053, 13, 23 - - - - - - -
Dual Axis
053(*4, *5), 053(*4, *5), - -

44 13(*4, *5), 23, 43 13(*4, *5), 23, 43 - - - - -
77 43(*4, *5), 73 43(*4, *5), 73 51(*4, *5), 52(*4, *5) - - 52 (*2, *3) - 72 (*2, *3) -
Notes:
1. Converter Unit MR-J3-CR55K is required for 30kW and 37kW amplifiers.
2. Available for MR-J3-A and B Safety types only.
3. Use this servomotor with a dedicated servo amplifier MR-J3-_A(4)/BS(4)/T(4)-U1_ _ when increasing the maximum torque.
4. These motors can be used by setting parameter No. Po04 to “_ _1_”.
5. These motors are not compatible with FX3U-20SSC-H controller.
6. Use a dedicated servo amplifier MR-J3-_A(4)/BS(4)/T(4)-LR/-LW for HF-JP11K1M(4) and HF-JP15K1M(4). These servomotors cannot be used with any other servo amplifiers
without “-LR”.
400V Amplifier Selection: (Example Part No. = MR-J3-60A4)
MR-J3- 4 -
Symbol Power Supply
None Standard J3 Amplifier
U1_ _ 400% Maximum Torque (*2)
400VAC Amplifier
RJ070 Turret Index (*1)
RJ158 EtherCAT
Mitsubishi General Notes:
1. Available on MR-J3-A type only.
Purpose AC Servo 2. JP motors only.
Amplifier
A: General Purpose Interface
BS: SSCNET III Interface
T: CC-Link Interface (up to 22kW only)
Compatible Motors
Symbol
HF-SP HF-JP HA-LP
60 524 534 - -
100 1024 734, 1034 534 (*3) -
200 1524, 2024 1534, 2034 734, 1034 (*3) -
350 3524 3534 1534, 2034 (*3) -
500 5024 5034 3534 (*3) -
700 7024 7034 5034 (*3) 6014, 7014
11K - 9034, 11K1M4 (*4) - 8014, 12K14, 11K1M4, 11K24
15K - 15K1M4 (*4) - 15K14, 15K1M4, 15K24
22K - - - 20K14, 22K1M4, 22K24
DU30K (*1, *2) - - - 25K14, 30K14, 30K1M4, 30K24
DU37K (*1, *2) - - - 37K14, 37K1M4, 37K24
DU45K (*1, *2) - - - 45K1M4, 45K24
DU55K (*1, *2) - - - 50K1M4, 55K24
Notes:
1. Converter Unit MR-J3-CR55K4 is required for 30kW to 55kW amplifiers.
2. Available for the MR-J3-A and B Safety types only.
3. These motors can be used by setting parameter No. Po04 to “_ _1_”.
4. Use a dedicated servo amplifier MR-J3-_A(4)/BS(4)/T(4)-LR/-LW for HF-JP11K1M(4) and HF-JP15K1M(4).
These servomotors cannot be used with any other servo amplifiers without “-LR”.

MR-J3-A Servo Amplifier Specifications 100/200V 22kW or Smaller
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3- 10A 20A 40A 60A 70A 100A 200AN 350A 500A 700A 11KA 15KA 22KA 10A1 20A1 40A1
Stocked Item S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
3-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz or 1-phase 100 to
Voltage/Frequency (*1, *2) 3-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz
1-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz (*10) 120VAC 50/60Hz
Main Circuit For 3-phase 200 to 230VAC: 3-phase

Power 170 to 253VAC
Permissible Voltage Fluctuation 3-phase 170 to 253VAC 1-phase 85 to 132VAC
Supply For 1-phase 200 to 230VAC: 1-phase
170 to 253VAC

1-phase 100 to
Voltage/Frequency 1-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz (*10) 1-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz
120VAC 50/60Hz
Control
Circuit Permissible Voltage Fluctuation 1-phase 170 to 253VAC 1-phase 85 to 132VAC
Power
Interface Power Supply 24VDC ±10% (required current capacity: 300mA (*7))
Regenerative
Resistor/ Built-in Regenerative Resistor - 10 10 10 20 20 100 100 130 170 - - - - 10 10
Tolerable
Regenerative External Regenerative Resistor 500 850 850
Power (W) - - - - - - - - - - - - -
(Standard Accessory) (*5, *6) (800) (1300) (1300)
(*3, *4)
Dynamic Brake Built-in (*8, *13) External option Built-in (*8, *13)
Overcurrent shutdown, regeneration overvoltage shutdown, overload shutdown (electronic thermal), servomotor overheat
Safety Features protection, encoder fault protection, regeneration fault protection, undervoltage/sudden power outage protection, overspeed
protection, excess error protection
Maximum Input Pulse Frequency 1Mpps (when using differential receiver), 200kpps (when using open collector), (4Mpps) (*11)
Control
Speed Analog Speed Command Input 0 to ±10VDC/rated speed (possible to change the speed in 10V using the parameter No. PC12.) (*12)
Control ±0.01% maximum (load fluctuation 0 to 100%) 0% (power fluctuation ±10%) ±0.2% maximum (ambient temperature
25°C±10°C (59°F to 95°F)), when using analog speed command
Torque Limit Set by parameters or external analog input (0 to +10VDC/maximum torque) (*12)
Torque Analog Torque Command Input 0 to ±8VDC/maximum torque (input impedance 10 to 12kΩ) (*12)
Control
Self-cooling open
Structure Self-cooling open (IP00) Fan cooling open (IP00)
(IP00)
Ambient Temperature (*6, *9) 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) (non-freezing), storage: -20 to 65°C (-4 to 149°F) (non-freezing)
0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.4 1.4 2.1 2.3 4.6 6.2 18 18 19 0.8 0.8 1.0
Weight kg (lb)
(1.8) (1.8) (2.2) (2.2) (3.1) (3.1) (4.6) (5.1) (10) (14) (40) (40) (42) (1.8) (1.8) (2.2)
Notes:
1. Rated output and speed of a servomotor are applicable when the servo amplifier, combined with the servomotor, is operated within the specified power supply voltage and frequency. Torque drops when the
power supply voltage is below the specified value.
2. For torque characteristics when combined with a servomotor, refer to the section “Servomotor torque characteristics” in this catalog.
4. Refer to the section “Options • Optional regeneration unit” in this catalog for the tolerable regenerative power (W).
5. The servo amplifier (MR-J3-_KA-PX) without an enclosed regenerative resistor is also available.
6. The value in ( ) applies when the external regenerative resistors, GRZG400-_Ω, (standard accessory) are used with cooling fans (2 units of 92 x 92mm, minimum air flow: 1.0m³/min). Note that change in the
parameter No. PA02 is required.
7. 300mA is the value when all of the input/output points are used. The current capacity can be stepped down according to the number of input/output points in use. Refer to “MR-J3-_A SERVO AMPLIFIER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL” for details.
8. Special specification models without a dynamic brake, MR-J3-_A -ED and MR-J3-_A1-ED, are also available for 7kW or smaller servo amplifier.
9. The MR-J3-350A or smaller servo amplifier can be installed close together. In this case, keep the ambient temperature within 0 to 45°C (32 to 113°F), or use the servo amplifier with 75% or less of the effective
load rate.
10. The special specification model, MR-J3-_A-U004, is also available for 1-phase 200 to 240 VAC.
11. 4Mpps compatible servo amplifier (MR-J3-_A(1)-KE) is also available.
12. High resolution analog speed command and analog torque command is available with a set of MR-J3-_A(1)-RJ040 and the extension IO unit, MR-J3-D01.
13. When using the built-in dynamic brake, refer to “MR-J3-_A SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL” for the permissible load inertia moment ratio.
266
MR-J3-A Servo Amplifier Specifications: 200VAC, 30kW or Larger
Drive Unit Model MR-J3-DU30KA MR-J3-DU37KA
Stocked Item - -
Voltage/Frequency (*1)
Main Circuit
Permissible Voltage Fluctuation The drive unit’s main circuit power is supplied from the converter unit
Power Supply
Permissible Frequency Fluctuation
Voltage/Frequency 1-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz
Control Circuit Permissible Voltage Fluctuation 1-phase 170 to 253VAC

Power Supply Permissible Frequency Fluctuation ±5% maximum
Interface Power Supply 24VDC ±10% (required current capacity: 300mA) (*3)
Dynamic Brake External option
Overcurrent shutdown, overload shutdown (electronic thermal), servomotor overheat protection,

Safety Features encoder fault protection, undervoltage/sudden power outage protection, overspeed protection,
excess error protection
Control Mode Positioning Complete Width Setting 0 to ±10000 pulses (command pulse unit)
Analog Speed Command Input 0 to ±10VDC/rated speed (possible to change the speed in 10V using the parameter No. PC12.)
Speed Control
Mode ±0.01% maximum (load fluctuation 0 to 100%) 0% (power fluctuation ±10%) ±0.2% maximum (ambient
Speed Fluctuation Rate
temperature 25°C±10°C (59°F to 95°F)), when using analog speed command
Torque Control Analog Torque Command Input 0 to ±8VDC/maximum torque (input impedance 10 to 12kΩ)
Mode (*2) Speed Limit Set by parameters or external analog input (0 to ±10VDC/rated speed)
Structure Fan cooling open (IP00)
Weight kg (lb) 26 (57)
Notes:
1. Rated output and speed of a servomotor are applicable when the drive unit and the converter unit, combined with the servomotor, are operated within the specified power supply voltage and frequency.
Torque drops when the power supply voltage is below the specified value.
3. The interface power supply can be shared with the drive unit and the converter unit. When all of the input/output points are used, 300mA is required for the drive unit, and 130mA is required for the
converter unit. The current capacity can be stepped down according to the number of input/output points in use. Refer to “MR-J3-_A SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL” for details.

MR-J3-A Servo Amplifier Specifications, 400VAC, 22kW or Smaller
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3- 60A4 100A4 200A4 350A4 500A4 700A4 11KA4 15KA4 22KA4
Main Circuit
Power Supply

Power Consumption (W) 30 45
Regenerative
Built-in Regenerative Resistor 15 15 100 100 130 (*9) 170 (*9) - - -
Resistor/
Tolerable
Regenerative External Regenerative Resistor
Power (W) - - - - - - 500 (800) 850 (1300) 850 (1300)
(Standard Accessory) (*5, *6)
(*3, *4)
Dynamic Brake Built-in (*8, *10) External option
Overcurrent shutdown, regeneration overvoltage shutdown, overload shutdown (electronic thermal), servomotor
Safety Features overheat protection, encoder fault protection, regeneration fault protection, undervoltage/sudden power outage
protection, overspeed protection, excess error protection
Control Mode Positioning Complete Width Setting 0 to ±10000 pulses (command pulse unit)
Analog Speed Command Input 0 to ±10VDC/rated speed (possible to change the speed in 10V using the parameter No. PC12.) (*11)
Speed Control
Mode ±0.01% maximum (load fluctuation 0 to 100%) 0% (power fluctuation ±10%) ±0.2% maximum (ambient temperature
25°C±10°C (59°F to 95°F)), when using analog speed command
Torque Limit Set by parameters or external analog input (0 to +10VDC/maximum torque) (*11)
Torque Control Analog Torque Command Input 0 to ±8VDC/maximum torque (input impedance 10 to 12kΩ) (*11)
Ambient Temperature (*6) 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) (non-freezing), storage: -20 to 65°C (-4 to 149°F) (non-freezing)
Weight kg (lb) 1.7 (3.7) 1.7 (3.7) 2.1 (4.6) 4.6 (10) 4.6 (10) 6.2 (14) 18 (40) 18 (40) 19 (42)
Notes:
1. Rated output and speed of a servomotor are applicable when the servo amplifier, combined with the servomotor, is operated within the specified power supply voltage and frequency. Torque drops when
the power supply voltage is below the specified value.
4. Refer to the section “Options • Optional regeneration unit” in this catalog for the tolerable regenerative power (W).
5. The servo amplifier (MR-J3-_KA4-PX) without an enclosed regenerative resistor is also available.
6. The value in ( ) applies when the external regenerative resistors, GRZG400-_Ω, (standard accessory) are used with cooling fans (2 units of 92 x 92mm, minimum air flow: 1.0m³/min). Note that change in
the parameter No. PA02 is required.
7. 300mA is the value when all of the input/output points are used. The current capacity can be stepped down according to the number of input/output points in use. Refer to “MR-J3-_A SERVO AMPLIFIER
8. Special specification models without a dynamic brake, MR-J3-_A4 -ED, are also available for 7kW or smaller servo amplifier.
9. The amplifier built-in resistor is compatible with the maximum torque deceleration when the motor is used within the rated speed and the recommended load/motor inertia moment ratio. Contact
Mitsubishi if the operating motor speed and the load/motor inertia moment ratio exceed the rated speed and the recommended ratio.
10. When using the built-in dynamic brake, refer to “MR-J3-_A SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL” for the permissible load inertia moment ratio.
11. For the servo amplifier 11kW to 22kW, high resolution analog speed command and analog torque command is available with a set of MR-J3-_A4-RJ040 and the extension IO unit, MR-J3-D01. Servo
amplifier 7kW or smaller, compatible with high resolution analog speed torque command, will be available.
268
MR-J3-A Servo Amplifier Specifications, 400VAC, 30kW or Larger
Drive Unit Model MR-J3-DU30KA4 MR-J3-DU37KA4 MR-J3-DU45KA4 MR-J3-55KA4
Stocked Item -
Main Circuit
Power Supply

Overcurrent shutdown, overload shutdown (electronic thermal), servomotor overheat protection, encoder fault
Safety Features
protection, undervoltage/sudden power outage protection, overspeed protection, excess error protection
Position Control Command Pulse Multiple Electronic gear A/B multiple, A: 1 to 1048576, B: 1 to 1048576, 1/10 < A/B < 2000
Analog Speed Command Input 0 to ±10VDC/rated speed (possible to change the speed in 10V using the parameter No. PC12.)
Speed Control
Mode ±0.01% maximum (load fluctuation 0 to 100%) 0% (power fluctuation ±10%) ±0.2% maximum
(ambient temperature 25°C±10°C (59°F to 95°F)), when using analog speed command
Torque Control Analog Torque Command Input 0 to ±8VDC/maximum torque (input impedance 10 to 12kΩ)
Mode (*2) Speed Limit Set by parameters or external analog input (0 to ±10VDC/rated speed)
Weight kg (lb) 18 (40) 26 (57)
Vibration 5.9m/s2 maximum
Notes:
1. Rated output and speed of a servomotor are applicable when the drive unit and the converter unit, combined with the servomotor, are operated within the specified power supply voltage and frequency. Torque
drops when the power supply voltage is below the specified value.
3. The interface power supply can be shared with the drive unit and the converter unit. When all of the input/output points are used, 300mA is required for the drive unit, and 130mA is required for the converter
unit. The current capacity can be stepped down according to the number of input/output points in use. Refer to “MR-J3-_A SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL” for details.

MR-J3-A-RJ070 Servo Amplifier Specifications 200VAC, 22kW or Smaller (Indexer)
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_-RJ070 10A 20A 40A 60A 70A 100A 200AN 350A 500A 700A 11KA 15KA 22KA 10A1 20A1 40A1
Stocked Item S S S S S - S S S S - - - - - -
1-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz 120VAC 50/60Hz
Main Circuit For 1-phase 230VAC: 207 to 253VAC
Power Permissible Voltage Fluctuation For 3-phase 200 to 230VAC: 1-phase 170 to 253VAC 1-phase 85 to 132VAC
Supply 170 to 253VAC
1-phase 100 to
120VAC 50/60Hz
Control
Circuit
Power Permissible Frequency Fluctuation ±5% maximum
Supply Power Consumption (W) 30 45 30
Inrush Current Refer to MR-J3-_A Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual
Interface Power Supply 24VDC ±10% (300mA) (*1)
Dynamic Brake Built-in External option Built-in
Overcurrent shutdown, regeneration overvoltage shutdown, overload shutdown (electronic thermal), servomotor overheat protection, encoder
Safety Features
fault protection, regeneration fault protection, undervoltage/sudden power outage protection, overspeed protection, excess error protection
Max. No. of Stations MR-J3-_A-RJ070 only: 15 stations, With MR-J3-D01: 255 stations
Number of Gears on Servomotor /
Indexer 1/9999<MCX/CDV<9999, CDVx STN<32767, CMX x CDV<100000
Machine (Electronic Gears)
Positioning In-Position Range Setting 0 to ±10000 pulses (command pulse unit)
(Turret)
Error Excessive ±3 rotations
Self-cooling open
Structure Self-cooling open (IP00) Forced-cooling open (IP00)
(IP00)
0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.4 1.4 2.1 2.3 4.6 6.2 18 18 19 0.8 0.8 1.0
Weight kg (lb)
(1.8) (1.8) (2.2) (2.2) (3.1) (3.1) (4.6) (5.1) (10) (14) (40) (40) (42) (1.8) (1.8) (2.2)
Notes:
1. 300mA is the value when all I/O signals are used. The current capacity can be decreased by reducing the number of I/O points.
2. When closely mounting the servo amplifiers of 3.5kW or less, operate them at the ambient temperatures of 0 to 45°C or at 75% or smaller effective ratio loads.
MR-J3-A-RJ070 Servo Amplifier Specifications 400VAC, 22kW or Smaller (Indexer)

Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_-RJ070 60A4 100A4 200A4 350A4 500A4 700A4 11KA4 15KA4 22KA4
Stocked Item -
3-phase 323 to 528VAC
Permissible Voltage Fluctuation
Main Circuit
Power Supply
Power Supply Equipment Capacity Refer to MR-J3-_A Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual
Control 1-phase 323 to 528VAC
Permissible Voltage Fluctuation
Circuit Power Permissible Frequency Fluctuation ±5% maximum
Supply Power Consumption (W) 30 45
Interface Power Supply 24VDC ±10% (300mA) (*1)
Dynamic Brake Built-in External option
Safety Features
Maximum Number of Stations MR-J3-_A-RJ070 only: 15 stations, With MR-J3-D01: 255 stations
Number of Gears on Servomotor/
Indexer 1/9999<MCX/CDV<9999, CDV x STN<32767, CMX x CDV<100000
Machine (Electronic Gears)
Positioning In-Position Range Setting 0 to ±10000 pulses (command pulse unit)
(Turret)
Structure Self-cooling open (IP00) Forced cooling open (IP00)
Weight kg (lb) 1.7 (3.7) 1.7 (3.7) 2.1 (4.6) 4.6 (10) 4.6 (10) 6.2 (14) 18 (40) 18 (40) 19 (42)
Note: 1. 300mA is the value when all I/O signals are used. The current capacity can be decreased by reducing the number of I/O points.
270
MR-J3-B Safety Servo Amplifier Specifications 100V/200VAC, 22kW or Smaller
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3- 10BS 20BS 40BS 60BS 70BS 100BS 200BS 350BS 500BS 700BS 11KBS 15KBS 22KBS 10BS1 20BS1 40BS1
Stocked Item S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
Voltage/Frequency 3-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz or 1-phase 100 to 120VAC
3-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz
(*1, *2) 1-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz (*10) 50/60Hz
Main Circuit Permissible Voltage For 3-phase 200 to 230VAC: 3-phase 170 to 253VAC
3-phase 170 to 253VAC 1-phase 85 to 132VAC
Power Supply Fluctuation For 1-phase 200 to 230VAC: 1-phase 170 to 253VAC
Permissible Frequency
±5% maximum
Fluctuation
Voltage/Frequency 1-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz (*10) 1-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz
50/60Hz
Permissible Voltage
Control Circuit Fluctuation 1-phase 170 to 253VAC 1-phase 85 to 132VAC
Power Supply
±5% maximum
Fluctuation
Regenerative Built-in Regenerative
- 10 10 10 20 20 100 100 130 170 - - - - 10 10
Resistor/ Resistor
Tolerable
External Regenerative
Regenerative 500 850 850
Resistor (Standard - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Power (W) (800) (1300) (1300)
(*3, *4) Accessory) (*5, *6)
Control System Sine-wave PWM Control/Current Control System
Dynamic Brake Built-in (*8, *11) External option Built-in (*8, *11)
Overcurrent shutdown, regeneration overvoltage shutdown, overload shutdown (electronic thermal), servomotor overheat protection, encoder fault
Safety Features
protection, regeneration fault protection, undervoltage/sudden power outage protection, overspeed protection, excess error protection
Structure Self-Cooling Open Self-cooling open (IP00) Fan cooling open (IP00) Self-cooling open (IP00)
Ambient Temp. (*9) 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) (non-freezing), storage: -20 to 65°C (-4 to 149°F) (non-freezing)
0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.4 1.4 2.1 2.3 4.6 6.2 18 18 19 0.8 0.8 1.0
Weight kg (lb)
(1.8) (1.8) (2.2) (2.2) (3.1) (3.1) (4.6) (5.1) (10) (14) (40) (40) (42) (1.8) (1.8) (2.2)
Notes:
1. Rated output and rated speed of the servomotor used in combination with the servo amplifier are as indicated when using the power supply voltage and frequency listed. The torque drops when the power supply
voltage is less than specified.
2. For torque characteristics when combined with a servomotor, refer to the section “Servomotor torque characteristics” in the MR-J3 manual.
4. Refer to the section “Options • Optional regeneration unit” in the MR-J3 manual for the tolerable regenerative power (W).
5. The servo amplifier (MR-J3-_KB-PX) without an enclosed regenerative resistor is also available.
7. 150mA is the value when all of the input/output points are used. The current capacity can be stepped down according to the number of input/output points in use. Refer to “MR-J3-_B Safety SERVO AMPLIFIER
8. Special specification models without a dynamic brake, MR-J3-_BS-ED and MR-J3-_B1-ED, are also available.
9. The MR-J3-350BS or smaller servo amplifier can be installed closely. In this case, keep the ambient temperature within 0 to 45°C (32 to 113°F), or use the servo amplifier with 75% or less of the effective load rate.
10. The special specification model, MR-J3-_BS-U004, is also available for 1-phase 200 to 240VAC.
11. When using the built-in dynamic brake, refer to MR-J3-_B Safety SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL for the permissible load inertia moment ratio.
MR-J3-B Safety Servo Amplifier Specifications: 200VAC, 30kW or Larger

Drive Unit Model MR-J3-DU30KBS MR-J3-DU37KBS
Stocked Item -
Main Circuit Power
Supply
Overcurrent shutdown, overload shutdown (electronic thermal), servomotor overheat protection, encoder fault
Safety Features
protection, undervoltage/sudden power outage protection, overspeed protection, excess error protection
Notes:
1. Rated output and rated speed of the servomotor used in combination with the drive unit and the converter unit are as indicated when using the power supply voltage and frequency listed. The torque drops when
the power supply voltage is less than specified.
unit. The current capacity can be stepped down according to the number of input/output points in use. Refer to “MR-J3-_B Safety SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL” for details.

MR-J3-B Safety Servo Amplifier Specifications: 400VAC, 22kW or Smaller
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3- 60BS4 100BS4 200BS4 350BS4 500BS4 700BS4 11KBS4 15KBS4 22KBS4
Main Circuit Permissible Voltage Fluctuation 3-phase 323 to 528VAC
Power Supply Permissible Frequency
±5% maximum
Fluctuation
Control Circuit
±5% maximum
Fluctuation
Regenerative Built-In Regenerative Resistor 15 15 100 100 130 (*9) 170 (*9) - - -
Resistor/
Tolerable
Regenerative External Regenerative Resistor
- - - - - - 500 (800) 850 (1300) 850 (1300)
Power (W) (Standard Accessory) (*5, *6)
(*3, *4)
Safety Features
Weight kg (lb) 1.7 (3.7) 1.7 (3.7) 2.1 (4.6) 4.6 (10) 4.6 (10) 6.2 (14) 18 (40) 18 (40) 19 (42)
Notes:
5. The servo amplifier (MR-J3-_KB4-PX) without an enclosed regenerative resistor is also available.
6. The value in ( ) applies when the external regenerative resistors, GRZG400-_Ω, (standard accessory) are used with cooling fans (2 units of 92 X 92mm, minimum air flow: 1.0m³/min). Note that change in the
7. 150mA is the value when all of the input/output points are used. The current capacity can be stepped down according to the number of input/output points in use. Refer to “MR-J3-_B SAFETY SERVO AMPLIFIER
8. Special specification models without a dynamic brake, MR-J3-_B4-ED, are also available.
9. The amplifier built-in resistor is compatible with the maximum torque deceleration when the motor is used within the rated speed and the recommended load/motor inertia moment ratio. Contact Mitsubishi if the
operating motor speed and the load/motor inertia moment ratio exceed the rated speed and the recommended ratio.
10. For the servo amplifier 5kW or 7kW, the load/motor of inertia moment ratio must be 5 times or less when the amplifier built-in dynamic brake is used, and the motor speed exceeds 2000r/min.
MR-J3-B Safety Servo Amplifier Specifications: 400VAC, 30kW or Larger

Drive Unit Model MR-J3-DU30KBS4 MR-J3-DU37KBS4 MR-J3-DU45KBS4 MR-J3-DU55KBS4
Stocked Item -
Main Circuit
Power Supply
Control Permissible Voltage Fluctuation 1-phase 323 to 528VAC
Circuit Power
Overcurrent shutdown, overload shutdown (electronic thermal), servomotor overheat protection, encoder fault protection,
Safety Features
undervoltage/sudden power outage protection, overspeed protection, excess error protection
Weight kg (lb) 18 (40) 26 (57)
Notes:
unit. The current capacity can be stepped down according to the number of input/output points in use. Refer to “MR-J3-_B SAFETY SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL” for details.
272
MR-J3-DO5 Safety Logic Unit Specifications (*4)
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3- MR-J3-D05
Stocked Item S
Voltage 24VDC
Control Circuit
Permissible Voltage Fluctuation 24VDC±10%
Power Supply
Required Current Capacity 500mA (*1, *2)
Compatible System 2 systems (A-axis, B-axis independent)
Shut-off Input 4 points (2 points x 2 systems) SDI_ : source/sink compatible (*3)
Shut-off Release Input 2 points (1 point x 2 systems) SRES_ : source/sink compatible (*3)
Feedback Input 2 points (1 point x 2 systems) TOF_ : source compatible (*3)
Input Method Photocoupler insulation, 24VDC (external supply), internal limited resistance 5.4kΩ
8 points (4 points x 2 systems) STO_: source compatible (*3)
Shut-off Output
SDO_: source/sink compatible (*3)
Output Method Photocoupler insulation, Open collector. Permissible current: 40mA or less per output, Inrush current: 100mA or less per output
Response Performance
20ms or less (STO input OFF - shut-off output OFF)
(When Delay Time is Set to 0s)
Delay Time Setting A-axis: select from 0s, 1.4s, 2.8s, 5.6s, 9.8s or 30.8s; B-axis: select from 0s, 1.4s, 2.8s, 9.8s or 30.8s; Accuracy: ±2%
Safety Function STO, SS1 (EN IEC 61800-5-2), EMG STOP, EMG OFF (EN IEC 60204-1)
Safety Performance EN ISO 13849-1 PL d (Category 3), IEC/EN 61508 SIL 2, EN 62061 SIL CL 2
Vibration 5.9m/s² or less at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y and Z axes)
Weight kg (lb) 0.2 (0.44) (including CN9 and CN10 connectors)
Notes:
1. Inrush current of approximately 1.5mA flows instantaneously when turning the control circuit power supply on. Select an appropriate capacity of a power supply considering the inrush current.
2. Power-ON duration of the safety logic unit is 100,000 times.
3. _ in signal name represents a symbol which indicates a system number and axis name.
4. MR-J3B Safety amplifiers have STO built-in, the MR-J3-D05 is needed for the SS1 function.
MR-J3W-B Servo Amplifier Specifications

Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3- MR-J3W-22B MR-J3W-44B MR-J3W-77B
Stocked Item S S S
Rated Output Capacity A-axis 200W B-axis 200W A-axis 400W B-axis 400W A-axis 750W B-axis 750W
Rated Voltage 3-phase 170VAC
Output
Rated Current (A) 1.5 1.5 2.8 2.8 5.8 5.8
Voltage/Frequency (*1) 3-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz or 1-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz 3-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz
Rated Current (A) 3.5 6.1 10.4
Main Circuit For 3-phase 200 to 230VAC: 3-phase 170 to 253VAC
Power Supply Permissible Voltage Fluctuation 3-phase 170 to 253VAC
For 1-phase 200 to 230VAC: 1-phase 170 to 253VAC
±5% maximum
Fluctuation
Rated Current (A) 0.4
±5% maximum
Fluctuation
Interface Power Supply 24VDC ±10% (required current capacity: 0.25A) (*2)
Tolerable Built-In Regenerative Resistor 10 100
Regenerative
Power of Optional MR-RB14 100 -
Regenerative Regeneration
Resistor (W) Unit MR-RB34 - 300
Safety Features
Vibration 5.9m/s2 maximum, 10 – 55Hz (X, Y, Z axes)
Weight kg (lb) 1.4 2.3
Notes:
1. Rated output and speed of a rotary servomotor; and rated thrust and speed of a linear servomotor are applicable when the servo amplifier, combined with the servomotors or the linear servomotors, is operated
within the specified power supply voltage and frequency. Torque drops when the power supply voltage is below the specified value.
3. When using the built-in dynamic brake, refer to “MR-J3W-MB SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL” for permissible load inertia moment ratio.
4. MR-J3W-_B servo amplifiers can be mounted closely. In the case of MR-J3-44B, however, operate them at 90% or less of the effective load ratio.

MR-J3-T Servo Amplifier Specifications 100VAC/200VAC
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3- 10T 20T 40T 60T 70T 100T 200TN 350T 500T 700T 11KT 15KT 22KT 10T1 20T1 40T1
Stocked Item S S S S S S S S S S - - - S S S
1-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz (*10) 120VAC 50/60Hz
Main Circuit Power
Permissible Voltage For 3-phase 200 to 230VAC: 3-phase 170 to 253VAC
Supply For 1-phase 200 to 230VAC: 1-phase 170 to 253VAC
3-phase 170 to 253VAC 1-phase 85 to 132VAC
Fluctuation
Permissible Freq. Fluctuation ±5% maximum
1-phase 100 to
Voltage/Frequency 1-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz (*10) 1-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz 120VAC 50/60Hz
Control Circuit Permissible Voltage 1-phase 170 to 253VAC 1-phase 85 to 132VAC
Power Supply Fluctuation
Permissible Freq. Fluctuation ±5% maximum
Interface Power Supply 24VDC ±10% (required current capacity: 150mA (*7))
Regenerative Built-In Regenerative Resistor - 10 10 10 20 20 100 100 130 170 - - - - 10 10
Resistor/ Tolerable
Regenerative Power External Regenerative Resistor 500 850 850
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
(W) (*3, *4) (Standard Accessory) (*5, *6) (800) (1300) (1300)
Dynamic Brake Built-in (*8) External option Built-in (*8)
Safety Features fault protection, regeneration fault protection, undervoltage/sudden power outage protection, overspeed protection, excess error protection
Self-cooling open
Structure Self-cooling open (IP00) Fan cooling open (IP00) (IP00)
0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.4 1.4 2.1 2.3 4.6 6.2 18 18 19 0.8 0.8 1.0
Weight kg (lb) (1.8) (1.8) (2.2) (2.2) (3.1) (3.1) (4.6) (5.1) (10) (14) (40) (40) (42) (1.8) (1.8) (2.2)
Notes:
5. The servo amplifier (MR-J3-_KT-PX) without an enclosed regenerative resistor is also available.
7. 150mA is the value when all of the input/output points are used. The current capacity can be stepped down according to the number of input/output points in use. Refer to “MR-J3-_T SERVO AMPLIFIER
8. Special specification models without a dynamic brake, MR-J3-_T-ED and MR-J3-_T1-ED, are also available.
9. The MR-J3-350T or smaller servo amplifier can be installed closely. In this case, keep the ambient temperature within 0 to 45°C (32 to 113°F), or use the servo amplifier with 75% or less of the effective load rate.
10. The special specification model, MR-J3-_T-U004, is also available for 1-phase 200 to 240VAC.
MR-J3-T Servo Amplifier Specifications 400VAC

Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3- 60T4 100T4 200T4 350T4 500T4 700T4 11KT4 15KT4 22KT4
Stocked Item S S S S S S - - -
Voltage/Frequency (*1, 2) 3-phase 380 to 480VAC 50/60Hz
Main Circuit Power
Supply
Regenerative Built-in Regenerative Resistor 15 15 100 100 130 (*9) 170 (*9) - - -
Resistor/ Tolerable
Regenerative Power External Regenerative Resistor - - - - - - 500 (800) 850 (1300) 850 (1300)
(W) (*3, 4) (Standard Accessory) (*5, *6)
Weight kg (lb) 1.7 (3.7) 1.7 (3.7) 2.1 (4.6) 4.6 (10) 4.6 (10) 6.2 (14) 18 (40) 18 (40) 19 (42)
Notes:
5. The servo amplifier (MR-J3-_KT4-PX) without an enclosed regenerative resistor is also available.
6. The value in ( ) applies when the external regenerative resistors, GRZG400-MΩ, (standard accessory) are used with cooling fans (2 units of 92 x 92mm, minimum air flow: 1.0m³/min). Note that change in the
7. 150mA is the value when all of the input/output points are used. The current capacity can be stepped down according to the number of input/output points in use. Refer to “MR-J3-_T SERVO AMPLIFIER
8. Special specification models without a dynamic brake, MR-J3-_T4-ED are also available.
9. The amplifier built-in resistor is compatible with the maximum torque deceleration when the motor is used within the rated speed and the recommended load/motor inertia moment ratio. Contact Mitsubishi if the
operating motor speed and the load/motor inertia moment ratio exceed the rated speed and the recommended ratio.
10. For the servo amplifier 5kW or 7kW, the load/motor of inertia moment ratio must be 5 times or less when the amplifier built-in dynamic brake is used, and the motor speed exceeds 2000r/min.
274
MR-J3-A-RJ158 Servo Amplifier Specifications 200V and 100V Class (EtherCAT)
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_A-RJ158 10A 20A 40A 60A 70A 100A 200A(N) 350A 500A 700A 11KA 15KA 22KA 10A1 20A1 40A1
Stocked Item S S S S S - S S S S - - - - - -
3-phase 200 to 230VAC, 50/60Hz 1-phase 100 to
1-phase 230VAC, 50/60Hz 120VAC 50/60Hz
For 1-phase 230VAC: 207 to 253VAC
Main Circuit Permissible Voltage Fluctuation For 3-phase 200 to 230VAC: AC170 to 3-phase 170 to 253VAC 1-phase 85 to 132VAC
Power 253V170 to 253VAC
Power Supply Capacity Refer to the MR-J3-A Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual
Inrush Current Refer to the MR-J3-A Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual
1-phase 100 to
120VAC 50/60Hz
Control
Circuit
Supply Power Consumption (W) 30 45 30
Inrush Current Refer to the "MR-J3-A Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual"
Interface Voltage/Frequency 24VDC ±10% (300mA)
Power
Supply Power Supply Capacity 300mA (*1)
Dynamic Brake Built-in External option Built-in
Safety Features
EtherCAT Position Command By absolute position command for target position object
Position In-Position Range Setting 0 ~ ±65535 pulse
Control
Mode (CSP) Error Excessive ±3 rotations
Torque Limit Set via Parameters (Parameter No.PA11,PA12,PC35) or set Positive/Negative torque limit value object
Speed EtherCAT Speed Command By speed command for Target velocity object. Unit is 0.001r/min (last column is invalid)
Control Speed Fluctuation Ratio ±0.01% or less (Load fluctuation 0 to 100%); 0% (Power supply fluctuation ±10%)
Mode (CSP) Torque Limit Set via Parameters (Parameter No.PA11,PA12,PC35); or set Positive/Negative torque limit value object
Natural-cooling, open
Structure Natural-cooling, open (IP00) Forced-cooling, open (IP00)
(IP00)
0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.4 1.4 2.1 2.3 4.6 6.2 18 18 19 0.8 0.8 1.0
Weight kg (lb)
(1.8) (1.8) (2.2) (2.2) (3.1) (3.1) (4.6) (5.1) (10) (14) (40) (40) (42) (1.8) (1.8) (2.2)
Notes:
2. When closely mounting the servo amplifier of MR-J3-350A or less, operate them at the ambient temperatures of 0 to 45°C or at 75% or smaller effective load ratio.

MR-J3-A-RJ158 Servo Amplifier Specifications 400V Class (EtherCAT)
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_A-RJ158 60A4 100A4 200A4 350A4 500A4 700A4 11KA4 15KA4 22KA4
Stocked Item S S S S S S - - -
Main Circuit Permissible Voltage Fluctuation 3-phase 323 to 528VAC
Supply Power Supply Capacity Refer to MR-J3-_A Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual
Control Permissible Voltage Fluctuation 1-phase 323 to 528VAC
Circuit
Power
Supply Power Consumption (W) 30 45
Inrush Current Refer to the MR-J3-A Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual
Interface Voltage/Frequency 24VDC ±10%
Power
Supply Power Supply Capacity 300mA (*1)
Dynamic Brake Built-in External
Safety Features
EtherCAT Position Command By absolute position command for target position object
Position In-Position Range Setting 0 ~ ±65535 pulse
Control
Mode (CSP) Error Excessive ±3 rotations
Torque Limit Set via Parameters (Parameter No.PA11,PA12,PC35) Or set Positive/Negative torque limit value object
Speed EtherCAT Speed Command By speed command for Target velocity object. Unit is 0.001r/min (last column is invalid)
Control Speed Fluctuation Ratio ±0.01% or less (Load fluctuation 0 to 100%); 0% (Power supply fluctuation ±10%)
Mode (CSP) Torque Limit Set via Parameters (Parameter No.PA11,PA12,PC35); Or set Positive/Negative torque limit value object
Natural-cooling, open
Structure Forced-cooling, open (IP00)
(IP00)
Weight kg (lb) 1.7 (3.7) 1.7 (3.7) 2.1 (4.6) 4.6 (10) 4.6 (10) 6.2 (14) 18 (40) 18 (40) 19 (42)
Notes:
2. When closely mounting the servo amplifiers of 3.5kW or less, operate them at the ambient temperatures of 0 to 45°C or at 75% or smaller effective ratio loads.
MR-J3-D01 Specifications
Model MR-J3-D01
Stocked Item S
Power Supply for Interface 24VDC ±10% (required current capacity: 800mA) (*1, *2)
Digital Input 30 points, photocoupler insulation, sink/source compatible
Digital Output 16 points, photocoupler insulation, sink/source compatible
Analog Input 2ch, 0 to ±10VDC (input impedance: 10 to 12kΩ)
Analog Output 2ch, 0 to ±12VDC
Power Supply for Analog Input Signal (*3) P15R: DC+15V, permissible current: 30mA; N12R: DC-12V, permissible current: 30mA (*3)
Weight kg (lb) 140 (0.31)
Notes:
2. A 24VDC power supply for input/output signals can be shared by the servo amplifier and MR-J3-D01. In this case, secure the power supply capacity corresponding to the points of the input/output signals to be used.
3. P15R can be used as a power supply for TLA and VC. N12R can be used as a power supply for VC. The power voltage varies between -12V to -15V.
276
MR-J3-T04 Specifications (EtherCAT)
Model MR-J3-T04
Stocked Item S
Input / Output EtherCAT I/F
Structure Natural-cooling, open (IP00)
Vibration 5.9 [m/s²] or less at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y and Z axes)
Weight (g) 150
Functions Connecting to MR-J3-_T_

Point table No. selection 1 to 8 (DI0 to DI7), Servo-on (SON), Reset (RES), External torque limit selection (TL), Internal torque limit selection (TL1), Manual pulse
generator multiplication 1 and 2 (TP0, TP1), Override selection (OVR), Automatic/manual selection (MD0), Temporary stop/restart (TSTP), Proportional control
Digital Input
(PC), Forward rotation start (ST1), Reverse rotation start (ST2), Position data input 1 to 12 (POS00 to POS03, POS10 to POS13, POS20 to POS23), Position data
input symbol+ (POSP), Clear (CR), Position data input symbol- (POSN), Strobe (STRB), Speed selection 1 to 3 (SP0 to SP2), Gain changing (CDP) (*1)
Alarm code (ACD0 to ACD3), M code (MCD00 to MCD03, MCD10 to MCD13), Temporary stop (PUS), Positioning complete (MEND), Phase match (CPO),
In-position (INP), Position data request 1 and 2 (PRQ1, PRQ2), Zero speed (ZSP), Torque limit in effect (TLC), Warning (WNG), Electromagnetic brake interlock
Digital Output
(MBR), Dynamic brake interlock (DB), Battery warning (BWNG), Positioning range output (POT), Variable gain selection (CDPS), Command speed reached (SA),
Point table No. output 1 to 8 (PT0 to PT7) (*1)
Analog Input Override (VC) (-10 to +10VDC/0 to 200%) Analog torque limit (TLA) (0 to ±10VDC/maximum torque)
Analog Output Analog monitor output (MO1, MO2) (*2)
Functions Connecting to MR-J3-_A_-RJ040

Electric Gear Numerator Digital Input The electric gear numerator can be set arbitrarily in 5-digit BCD or 16-bit binary.
Position Control
Mode The torque limit can be set according to the rotating direction. TLAP: 0 to +10VDC/maximum torque; Resolution: 12-bit
High Resolution Analog Torque Limit
(Standard: 10-bit) TLAN: 0 to -10VDC/maximum torque; Resolution: 12-bit (Standard: 10-bit)
Digital Speed Command Input The speed command can be set arbitrarily in 5-digit BCD or 12-bit (16-bit) binary.
Speed Control
Mode The torque limit can be set according to the rotating direction. TLAP: 0 to +10VDC/maximum torque; Resolution: 16-bit
High Resolution Analog Torque Limit
(Standard: 14-bit) TLAN: 0 to -10VDC/maximum torque; Resolution: 16-bit (Standard: 14-bit)
Torque Control Digital Speed Limit Input The speed limit can be set arbitrarily in 5-digit BCD or 12-bit (16-bit) binary.
Mode High Resolution Torque Command Input External analog torque command (OTC) 0 to ±8VDC/maximum torque; Resolution: 12-bit (Standard: 10-bit)
Notes:
1. The signal assignment can be changed by setting the parameters. Refer to “MR-J3-_T MR-J3-D01 SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL” for details.
2. Analog monitor output can be selected by setting the parameter. Refer to “MR-J3-_T MR-J3-D01 SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL” for details.
B. Converter Unit (Required for 30KW ~ 55KW 200/400V Amplifiers)

Converter Unit Model MR-J3-CR55K (For 200VAC Only) MR-J3-CR55K4 (For 400VAC Only)
Stocked Item - -
Voltage/Frequency (*1, *2) 3-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz 3-phase 380 to 480VAC 50/60Hz
Main Circuit
Power Supply
Voltage/Frequency 1-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz 1-phase 380 to 480VAC 50/60Hz
Control Circuit Permissible Voltage Fluctuation 1-phase 170 to 253VAC 1-phase 323 to 528VAC
Regeneration overvoltage shutdown, regeneration fault protection, overload shutdown (electronic thermal),
Safety Features
undervoltage/sudden power outage protection
Notes:
unit. The current capacity can be stepped down according to the number of input/output points in use. Refer to “MR-J3-_A/B SERVO AMPLIFIER INSTRUCTION MANUAL” for details.

C. MR-J3 Servomotors
Standards
Rated Speed Rated Output Electromagnetic Protective
Motor Series Features Application Examples
(Max. r/min) Capacity (kW) Brake Available EN UL / cUL Degree
HF-KP • Belt Drive

• Robots
• Mounters
Low inertia: • Sewing Machines
perfect for • X-Y Tables
general industrial • Food Processing Machines
5 Types (200V) machines • Semiconductor
Small
3000 (6000) 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, x (*1) x x IP65 (*2) manufacturing devices
Capacity
0.4, 0.75 • Knitting and embroidery
machines
HF-MP Ultra-low inertia:
well suited for • Inserters
high frequency • Mounters
operation
HF-SP 6 Types (200V)
1000 (1500) 0.5, 0.85, 1.2, x x x IP67 (*2) Medium
2.0, 3.0, 4.2 inertia: suitable
7 Types (200V) for variable • Material Handling Systems
0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, applications three • Robots
3.5, 5.0, 7.0 models from low • X-Y Table
2000 (3000) x x x IP67 (*2) to high-speed are
7 Types (400V)
0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, available
3.5, 5.0, 7.0
Medium
Capacity HC-LP
Low inertia: • Roller feeder
5 Types (200V)
perfect for • Loader and unloader
2000 (3000) 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, x x x IP65 (*2)
general industrial • High frequency material
2.0, 3.0
machines handling systems
HC-RP
5 Types (200V) Ultra-low inertia:
• Ultra-high frequency material
3000 (4500) 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, x x x IP65 (*2) well suited for
handling systems
3.5, 5.0 high-frequency
HC-UP Flat type: well

2000
Flat, Small/ 5 Types (200V) suited for
(3000: 0.75 • Robots
Medium 0.75, 1.5, 2.0, x x x IP65 (*2) situations where
~ 2kW; 2500: • Food processing machines
Capacity 3.5, 5.0 the installation
3.5, 5kW)
space is restricted
HF-JP 7 Types (200V)
0.5, 0.75, 1.0,
1.5, 2.0, 3.5, 5.0
3000 (6000) x - - IP67
7 Types (400V)
0.5, 0.75, 1.0, Low inertia: • Food processing machines
1.5, 2.0, 3.5, 5.0 well suited for • Printing machines
high-throughput
2 Types (200V)
and high-
7.0, 9.0
3000 (5000) X - - IP67 acceleration/
2 Types (400V)
deceleration
7.0, 9.0
operations
2 Types (200V)
11, 15 • Injection molding machines
1500 (3000) x - - IP67
2 Types (400V) • Large press machines
11, 15
Medium/ HA-LP 8 Types (200V)
Large 6.0, 8.0, 12, 15,
Capacity 20, 25, 30, 37 x Low inertia:
1000 (1200) x (*4) x (*4) IP44 (*2)
8 Types (400V) (6.0 ~ 12kW only) suitable
6.0, 8.0, 12, 15, for variable
20, 25, 30, 37 applications three
6 Types (200V) models from low
• Injection molding machines
7.0, 11, 15, 22, to medium-speed
• Semiconductor
30, 37 x are available.
1500 (2000) x (*4) x (*4) IP44 (*2) manufacturing devices
8 Types (400V) (7.0 ~ 15kW only) As a standard,
• Large material handling
7.0, 11, 15, 22, 30kW and larger
systems
30, 37, 45, 50 capacities are
7 Types (200V) compatible with
5.0, 7.0, 11, 15, IP44 flange mounting
22, 30, 37 x (HA-LP or foot mounting
2000 (2000) x (*4) x (*4) (*3)
7 Types (400V) (11 ~ 22kW only) 502/702 =
11, 15, 22, 30, IP65) (*2)
37, 45, 55
Third Party Exlar Actuator models GSX20, GSX30, GSX40, GSX50, GSX60. Order directly through Exlar Corporation www.exlar.com Select Amplifiers and Cables
Motor from Mitsubishi
Notes:
1. “x” indicates the available product range.
3. Some motors from 15 to 25kW capacities can be mounted with the feet. Refer to the Motor Dimensions of this catalog.
4. Some motors are under application for EN, UL, and cUL standards. Contact MEAU for more details.
278
200V Motor Selection: (Example Part# = HF-SP102BK)
Stocked Motors
Not all options are available for every motor.
Symbol Special Specification Model Number Model Number Model Number
LR With enclosed regeneration resisitor (*1) HA-LP11K1MBK HF-JP53BK HF-MP053
H - P- - Without enclosed regeneration resisitor HA-LP11K2BK HF-JP53K HF-MP053B
LW
Note: HA-LP11K2K HF-JP73BK HF-MP13
1. Standard with MR-J3-B Safety 11kW and 15kW. HA-LP15K2BK HF-JP73K HF-MP13B
Symbol Shaft Shape HA-LP15K2K HF-JP103BK HF-MP23BK
HA-LP22K2BK HF-JP103K HF-MP23K
None Standard (Straight)
HA-LP22K2K HF-JP153B HF-MP43BK
K With Keyway (*1)
HF-JP153BK HF-MP43K
D D-Cut (*1) Model Number
HF-JP153K HF-MP73BK
Note: HC-RP103BK
HF-JP203BK HF-MP73K
1. Refer to Motor Shaft Detail in this section for HC-RP103K
Symbol Motor Series compatible models and specifications. HF-JP203K
HC-RP153K Model Number
HF-JP353BK
Symbol Oil Seal HC-RP353BK HF-SP51BK
HF-JP353K
Low inertia,
None None HC-RP353K HF-SP51K
HF-KP HF-JP503BK
small capacity J Oil Seal Installed (*1, *2) HC-RP503K HF-SP52BK
Note:
HF-JP503K
1. Dimensions for HF-KP/MP motors with oil seals Model Number HF-JP703BK HF-SP52K
Ultra-low inertia, are different than standard models. Contact HC-UP72BK HF-JP703K HF-SP81BK
HF-MP Mitsubishi for details. HF-SP81K
small capacity 2. Oil-Seal not available for the 0.05kW motors. HC-UP72K HF-JP903BK
HC-UP152BK HF-JP903K HF-SP102BK
Symbol Electromagnetic Brake HC-UP152K HF-SP102K
Medium inertia,
HF-SP
medium capacity None None HC-UP202BK Model Number HF-SP121BK
B With Brake HC-UP202K HF-KP053 HF-SP121K
HC-UP352BK HF-KP053B HF-SP152BK
Ultra-low inertia, Symbol Rated Speed (r/min) HF-KP13 HF-SP152K
HF-JP medium capacity HC-UP352K
1 1000 (*1)
HC-UP502BK HF-KP13B HF-SP202BK
1M 1500 (*1) HF-KP13D HF-SP202K
HC-UP502K
Low inertia, 2 2000 (*1) HF-KP23 HF-SP352BK
HC-LP 3 3000 (*1)
medium capacity HF-KP23BK HF-SP352K
Note:
1. Refer to motor specifications in this catalog for correct HF-KP23K HF-SP502BK
Ultra-low inertia, symbol to use for each servo motor. HF-KP43BK HF-SP502K
HC-RP
medium capacity Symbol Rated Output (kW) HF-KP43K HF-SP702BK
05 0.05 HF-KP73BK HF-SP702K
Flat type 1 to 8 0.1 to 0.85 HF-KP73K
HC-UP Small/medium 10 to 90 1.0 to 9.0
capacity
11K to 37K 11.0 to 37.0
Low inertia
HA-LP Medium/large
capacity
400V Motor Selection: (Example Part# = HF-SP524BK)

Not all options are available for every motor. Stocked Motors
Symbol Special Specification Model Number Model Number
LR With enclosed regeneration resisitor (*1) HA-LP701M4BK HF-JP534BK
HA-LP701M4K HF-JP534K
H - P- 4 - LW Without enclosed regeneration resisitor
HA-LP11K1M4K HF-JP734BK
Note:
HA-LP11K24BK HF-JP734K
1. Standard with MR-J3-B Safety 11kW and 15kW.
HA-LP11K24K HF-JP1034BK
Symbol Shaft Shape HA-LP15K1M4BK HF-JP1034K
400
VAC None Standard (Straight) HA-LP15K1M4K HF-JP1534BK
K With Keyway (*1) HA-LP15K24BK HF-JP1534K
HA-LP15K24K HF-JP2034BK
Note:
1. Refer to Motor Shaft Detail in this section for
HA-LP22K1M4K HF-JP2034K
Symbol Rated Output (kW) compatible models and specifications. HA-LP22K24BK HF-JP3534BK
5 0.5 HA-LP22K24K HF-JP3534K
Symbol Oil Seal HF-JP5034BK
10 to 90 1.0 to 9.0 Model Number
None None HF-JP5034K
11K to 55K 11.0 to 55.0 HF-SP524BK
J Oil Seal Installed (*1) HF-JP7034BK
HF-SP524K
Note: Note: HF-JP7034K
1. Refer to motor specifications in this catalog for correct HF-SP1024BK
symbol to use for each servo motor.
1. Oil-Seal not available for the 0.05kW motors. HF-JP9034BK
HF-SP1024K
HF-JP9034K
Symbol Motor Series HF-SP1524BK
Symbol Electromagnetic Brake HF-JP11K1M4K
HF-SP1524K
None None HF-JP15K1M4BK
HF-SP2024BK
HF-SP Medium inertia, medium capacity B With Brake HF-JP15K1M4K
HF-SP2024K
HF-SP3524BK
Symbol Rated Speed (r/min) HF-SP3524K
HF-JP Ultra-low inertia, medium capacity
1 1000 (*1) HF-SP5024BK
1M 1500 (*1) HF-SP5024K
HA-LP Low inertia, medum/large capacity HF-SP7024BK
2 2000 (*1)
HF-SP7024K
Note:
1. Refer to motor specifications in this catalog for correct
symbol to use for each servo motor.

HF-KP Series 200V Servomotor Specifications
Servomotor Model HF-KP_ 053(B) 13(B) 23(B) 43(B) 73(B)
20A(1)(-RJ070)/BS(1)/ 40A(1)(-RJ070)/BS(1)/ 70A(-RJ070)/
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_-_ 10A(1)(-RJ070)/BS(1)/T(1)/W-22B
T(1)/W-22B/W-44B T(1)/W-44B/W-77B BS/T/W-77B
Power Facility Capacity (kVA) (*1) 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.9 1.3
Rated Output (W) 50 100 200 400 750
Rated Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 0.16 (22.7) 0.32 (45.3) 0.64 (90.6) 1.3 (184) 2.4 (340)
Maximum Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 0.48 (68) 0.95 (135) 1.9 (269) 3.8 (538) 7.2 (1020)
Power Rate at Continuous Rated Torque (kW/s) 4.87 11.5 16.9 38.6 39.9
Rated Current (A) 0.9 0.8 1.4 2.7 5.2
Maximum Current (A) 2.7 2.4 4.2 8.1 15.6
Regenerative Braking Frequency (*2) (times/min) Refer to Manual Refer to Manual 448 249 140
Moment of Inertia Standard 0.052 (0.284) 0.088 (0.481) 0.24 (1.31) 0.42 (2.30) 1.43 (7.82)
J (x10-4kg•m²)
[J (oz•in²)] With Electromagnetic Brake 0.054 (0.295) 0.090 (0.492) 0.31 (1.69) 0.50 (2.73) 1.63 (8.91)
Recommended Load / Motor Inertia Moment Ratio (*3) 15 times maximum 24 times maximum 22 times maximum 15 times maximum
Speed/Position Detector 18-bit encoder (Resolution per encoder/servomotor rotation: 262144p/rev)
Attachments - Motors with an oil seal are available (HF-KP_J)
Environment
Elevation / Vibration 1000m or less above sea level/ X,Y:49m/s²
Standard 0.35 (0.78) 0.56 (1.3) 0.94 (2.1) 1.5 (3.3) 2.9 (6.4)
Weight kg (lb)
With Electromagnetic Brake 0.65 (1.5) 0.86 (1.9) 1.6 (3.6) 2.1 (4.7) 3.9 (8.6)
Notes:
2. The regenerative braking frequency shows the permissible frequency for decelerating the motor without a load and the optional regeneration unit from the rated speed to a stop.
HF-KP053 (B) (Note 1, 2, 3) HF-KP13 (B) (Note 1, 2, 3) HF-KP23 (B) (Note 1, 2, 3) HF-KP43 (B) (Note 1, 2, 3) HF-KP73 (B) (Note 1, 3)
84 0.6 140 1.0 280 2.0 560 4.0 1120 8.0
T o r q u e ( N • m)
Torque (N • m )
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Peak running range Peak running Peak running range

range Peak running range
Peak running range 105 0.75 210 1.5 420 3.0 840 6.0
56 0.4
70 0.5 140 1.0 280 2.0 560 4.0

Notes:
28 0.2 1. : For 3-phase 200VAC or 1-phase 230VAC.
35 0.25 70 2. : For 1-phase 100VAC.
0.5 140 1.0 280 2.0
Continuous running range Continuous running range Continuous running range Continuous running range Continuous running range This line is drawn only where differs from the
other two lines.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min)
HF-MP Series 200V Servomotor Specifications

Servomotor Model HF-MP_ 053(B) 13(B) 23(B) 43(B) 73(B)
20A(1)(-RJ070)/ BS(1)/ 40A(1)(-RJ070)/ BS(1)/ 70A(-RJ070)/BS/
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_-_ 10A(1)(-RJ070)/ BS(1)/T(1)/W-22B
T(1)/W-22B/W-44B T(1)W-44B/W-77B T/W-77B
Rated Output (W) 50 100 200 400 750
Rated Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 0.16 (22.7) 0.32 (45.3) 0.64 (90.6) 1.3 (184) 2.4 (340)
Rated Current (A) 1.1 0.9 1.6 2.7 5.6
Regen Braking Frequency (*2) (times/min) Refer to Manual Refer to Manual 1570 920 420
J (x10-4kg•m²)
[J (oz•in²)] With Electromagnetic Brake 0.025 (0.137) 0.039 (0.213) 0.12 (0.656) 0.18 (0.984) 0.70 (3.83)
Recommended Load / Motor Inertia Moment Ratio 30 times the servomotor’s inertia moment maximum (*3)
Speed / Position Detector 18-bit encoder (Resolution per encoder/servomotor rotation: 262144p/rev)
Attachments - - Motors with an oil seal are available (HF-MP_J)
Environment
Elevation / Vibration 1000m or less above sea level / X, Y: 49m/s²
Standard 0.35 (0.78) 0.56 (1.3) 0.94 (2.1) 1.5 (3.3) 2.9 (6.4)
Weight kg (lb)
With Electromagnetic Brake 0.65 (1.5) 0.86 (1.9) 1.6 (3.6) 2.1 (4.7) 3.9 (8.6)
Notes:
280
HF-MP Series 200V Servomotor Speed Torque Curves
HF-MP053 (B) (Note 1, 2, 3) HF-MP13 (B) (Note 1, 2, 3) HF-MP23 (B) (Note 1, 2, 3) HF-MP43 (B) (Note 1, 2, 3) HF-MP73 (B) (Note 1, 3)
84 0.6 140 1.0 280 2.0 560 4.0 1120 8.0
Torque (N • m )
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (oz • in)

Peak running range Peak running Peak running
range range Peak running range
105 0.75 210 1.5 420 3.0 840 6.0
56 0.4 Peak running range
70 0.5 140 1.0 280 2.0 560 4.0

Notes:
1. : For 3-phase 200VAC or 1-phase 230VAC.
28 0.2
35 0.25 70 0.5 140 1.0 280 2.0 3. : For 1-phase 200VAC.
Continuous running range Continuous running range Continuous running range Continuous running range Continuous running range
This line is drawn only where differs from the
other two lines.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min)
HF-SP 1000r/min Series 200V Servomotor Specifications

Servomotor Model HF-SP_ 51(B) 81(B) 121(B) 201(B) 301(B) 421(B)
60A(-RJ070)/ 100A(-RJ070)/ 350A(-RJ070)/ 500A(-RJ070)/
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_-_ 200A(-RJ070)/BS/T
60BS/T (*6) BS/T (*6) BS/T (*6) BS/T (*6)
Power Facility Capacity (kVA) (*1) 1.0 1.5 2.1 3.5 4.8 6.3
Rated Output (kW) 0.5 0.85 1.2 2.0 3.0 4.2
Rated Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 4.77 (675) 8.12 (1150) 11.5 (1630) 19.1 (2700) 28.6 (4050) 40.1 (5679)
Maximum Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 14.3 (2030) 24.4 (3460) 34.4 (4870) 57.3 (8110) 85.9 (12200) 120 (17000)
Power Rate at Continuous Rated Torque (kW/s) 19.2 37.0 34.3 48.6 84.6 104
Rated Current (A) 2.9 4.5 6.5 11 16 24
Maximum Current (A) 8.7 13.5 19.5 33 48 72
Regenerative Braking Frequency (Times/Min) (*2) 36 90 188 105 84 75
Moment of Inertia Standard 11.9 (65.1) 17.8 (97.3) 38.3 (290) 75.0 (410) 97.0 (530) 154 (842)
J (x10-4kg•m²)
[J (oz•in²)] With Electromagnetic Brake 14.0 (76.5) 20.0 (109) 47.9 (262) 84.7 (463) 107 (585) 164 (897)
Recommended Load/Motor Inertia Moment Ratio 15 times the servomotor’s inertia moment maximum (*3)
Attachments Motors with an oil seal are available (HF-SP_J)
Insulation Class Class F
Environment (*6) Atmosphere Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist or dust
1000m or less above sea level 1000m or less above sea level 1000m or less above sea level
Elevation / Vibration (*5)
X: 24.5m/s² Y: 24.5m/s² X: 24.5m/s² Y: 49m/s² X: 24.5m/s² Y: 29.4m/s²
Standard 6.5 (15) 8.3 (19) 12 (27) 19 (42) 22 (49) 32 (71)
Weight kg (lb)
With Electromagnetic Brake 8.5 (19) 10.3 (23) 18 (40) 25 (56) 28 (62) 38 (84)
Notes:
6. To use MR-J3-200A or smaller with the HF-SP 1000r/min series, the servo amplifier’s software version must be A4 or above.
X
Y
HF-SP51 (B) (Note 1, 2, 3) HF-SP81 (B) (Note 1) HF-SP121 (B) (Note 1) HF-SP201 (B) (Note 1)
2100 15 4200 30 5600 40 8400 60
in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Peak running
•
Torque (oz
Peak running 4200 30 Peak running range

Peak running range
1400 10 range 2800 20 range 5600 40
2800 20
700 5 1400 10 2800 20

1400 10
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
500 1000 1500 500 1000 1500 500 1000 1500 500 1000 1500
S p e e d ( r /m in ) S p e e d ( r /m in ) S p e e d ( r /m in ) Speed (r/min)
HF-SP301(B) (Note 1) HF-SP421(B) (Note 1)

12600 90 21000 150
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Peak running
range
Peak running
8400 60 14000 100
range
Notes:
4200 30 7000 50 2. : For 1-phase 230VAC.
Continuous running This line is drawn only where differs from the
Continuous running
range other two lines.
range
0 0 0 0
500 1000 1500 500 1000 1500
Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min)

Servomotor Model HF-SP_ 52(B) 102(B) 152(B) 202(B) 352(B) 502(B) 702(B)
60A(-RJ070)/ 100A(-RJ070)/ 350A(-RJ070)/ 500A(-RJ070)/ 700A(-RJ070)/
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_-_ 200A(-RJ070)/BS/T
BS/T BS/T BS/T BS/T BS/T
Power Facility Capacity (kVA) (*1) 1.0 1.7 2.5 3.5 5.5 7.5 10
Rated Output (kW) 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.5 5.0 7.0
Rated Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 2.39 (338) 4.77 (675) 7.16 (1010) 9.55 (1350) 16.7 (2360) 23.9 (3380) 33.4 (4730)
Maximum Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 7.16 (1010) 14.3 (2020) 21.5 (3040) 28.6 (4050) 50.1 (7090) 71.6 (10100) 100 (14200)
Power Rate Continuous Rated Torque (kW/s) 9.34 19.2 28.8 23.8 37.2 58.8 72.5
Rated Current (A) 2.9 5.3 8.0 10 16 24 33
Maximum Current (A) 8.7 15.9 24 30 48 72 99
Regenerative Braking Frequency (times/min) (*2) 60 62 152 71 33 37 31
Moment of inertia J Standard 6.1 (33.4) 11.9 (65.1) 17.8 (97.3) 38.3 (209) 75.0 (410) 97.0 (530) 154 (842)
(x10-4kg•m²) [J (oz•in²)] With Electromagnetic Brake 8.3 (45.4) 14.0 (76.5) 20.0 (109) 47.9 (262) 84.7 (463) 107 (585) 164 (897)
Speed/Position Detector 18-bit encoder (Resolution per encoder/servomotor rotation: 262144 p/rev)
Standard 4.8 (11) 6.5 (15) 8.3 (19) 12 (27) 19 (42) 22 (49) 32 (71)
Weight kg (lb)
With Electromagnetic Brake 6.7 (15) 8.5 (19) 10.3 (23) 18 (40) 25 (56) 28 (62) 38 (84)
Notes:
X
Y
HF-SP52 (B) (Note 1, 2, 3) HF-SP102 (B) (Note 1) HF-SP152 (B) (Note 1) HF-SP202 (B) (Note 1)
1260 9 2100 15 3360 24 4200 30
in)
m)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
•
Peak running
•
Peak running Peak running

Torque (N
Torque (oz
range
range range
840 6 Peak running
1400 10 2240 16 2800 20
range
420 3 700 5 1120 8 1400 10

0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 0 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000
HF-SP352 (B) (Note 1) HF-SP502 (B) (Note 1) HF-SP702 (B) (Note 1)

8400 60 10500 75 16800 120
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (oz • in)
Peak running
Peak running range Peak running
5600 40 range 7000 50 11200 80 range
Notes:
2800 20 5600 40 1. : For 3-phase 200VAC.
3500 25
Continuous running Continuous running Continuous running This line is drawn only where differs
range range range
0 0 0 from the other two lines.
0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000
282
Servomotor Model HF-SP_ 524(B) 1024(B) 1524(B) 2024(B) 3524(B) 5024(B) 7024(B)
60A4(-RJ070)/ 100A4(-RJ070)/ 350A4(-RJ070)/ 500A4(-RJ070)/ 700A4(-RJ070)/
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_-_ 200A4(-RJ070)/BS4/T4
BS4/T4 BS4/T4 BS4/T4 BS4/T4 BS4/T4
Power Facility Capacity (kVA) (*1) 1.0 1.7 2.5 3.5 5.5 7.5 10
Rated Output (kW) 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.5 5.0 7.0
Rated Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 2.39 (338) 4.77 (675) 7.16 (1010) 9.55 (1350) 16.7 (2360) 23.9 (3380) 33.4 (4730)
Maximum Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 7.16 (1010) 14.3 (2020) 21.5 (3040) 28.6 (4050) 50.1 (7090) 71.6 (10100) 100 (14200)
Power Rate Continuous Rated Torque (kW/s) 9.34 19.2 28.8 23.8 37.2 58.8 72.5
Rated Current (A) 1.5 2.9 4.1 5.0 8.4 12 16
Regenerative Braking Freq. (times/min) (*2) 90 46 154 72 37 34 28
Moment of inertia Standard 6.1 (33.4) 11.9 (65.1) 17.8 (97.3) 38.3 (209) 75.0 (410) 97.0 (530) 154 (842)
J (x10-4kg•m²) [J
(oz•in²)] With Electromagnetic Brake 8.3 (45.4) 14.0 (76.5) 20.0 (109) 47.9 (262) 84.7 (463) 107 (585) 164 (897)
Standard 4.8 (11) 6.7 (15) 8.5 (19) 13 (29) 19 (42) 22 (49) 32 (71)
Weight kg (lb)
With Electromagnetic Brake 6.7 (15) 8.6 (19) 11 (25) 19 (42) 25 (56) 28 (62) 38 (84)
Notes:
X
Y
HF-SP524 (B) (Note 1, 2) HF-SP1024 (B) (Note 1, 2) HF-SP1524 (B) (Note 1, 2) HF-SP2024 (B) (Note 1, 2)
1260 9 2100 15 3360 24 4200 30
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Peak Peak Peak

running range running range running range
840 6 Peak 1400 10 2240 16 2800 20
running range
420 3 700 5 1120 8 1400 10

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000
HF-SP3524 (B) (Note 1, 2) HF-SP5024 (B) (Note 1, 2) HF-SP7024 (B) (Note 1, 2)

8400 60 10500 75 16800 120
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (oz • in)
Peak
running range Peak
5600 40 Peak 7000 50 11200 80 running range
running range
2800 20 3500 25 5600 40
Continuous running Continuous running Continuous running Notes:

range range range 1. : For 3-phase 400VAC.
0 0 2. : For 3-phase 380VAC.
1000 2000 3000 0 0 1000 2000 3000 0 0 1000 2000 3000

HC-LP Series 200V Servomotor Specifications
Servomotor Model HC-LP_ 52(B) 102(B) 152(B) 202(B) 302(B)
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_-_ 60A(-RJ070)/BS/T 100A(-RJ070)/BS/T 200A(-RJ070)/BS/T 350A(-RJ070)/BS/T 500A(-RJ070)/BS/T
Rated Output (kW) 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0
Rated Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 2.39 (338) 4.78 (677) 7.16 (1010) 9.55 (1350) 14.3 (2020)
Power Rate At Continuous Rated Torque (kW/s) 18.4 49.3 79.8 41.5 56.8
Rated Current (A) 3.2 5.9 9.9 14 23
Maximum Current (A) 9.6 18 30 42 69
Regenerative Braking Frequency (Times/Min) (*2) 115 160 425 120 70
Moment of Inertia Standard 3.10 (16.9) 4.62 (25.3) 6.42 (35.1) 22.0 (120) 36.0 (197)
J (x10-4kg•m²) [J (oz•in²)] With Electromagnetic Brake 5.20 (28.4) 6.72 (36.7) 8.52 (46.6) 32.0 (175) 46.0 (252)
Environment
Elevation / Vibration (*5) 1000m or less above sea level X: 9.8m/s² Y: 24.5m/s² 1000m or less above sea level X: 19.6m/s² Y: 49m/s²
Standard 6.5 (15) 8.0 (18) 10 (22) 21 (47) 28 (62)
Weight kg (lb)
With Electromagnetic Brake 9.0 (20) 11 (25) 13 (29) 27 (60) 34 (75)
Notes:
bearing occurs easily when the motor stops, so maintain vibration to approximately one-half of the allowable value
X
Y
HC-LP052 (B) (Note 1, 2, 3) HC-LP102(B) (Note 1) HC-LP152(B) (Note 1)

1120 8 2800 20 4480 32
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Peak running
840 6 2100 15 3360 24
range
Peak running range
Peak running range
560 4 1400 10 2240 16
280 2 700 5 1120 8

Continuous running range Continuous running range
0 0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000
HC-LP202(B) (Note 1) HC-LP302(B) (Note 1)

5600 40 7840 56
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (N • m )
Torque (N • m)
4200 30 5880 42
Peak running range
Notes:
2800 20 Peak running range 3920 28 1. : For 3-phase 200VAC.
1400 10 1960 14 This line is drawn only where differs from the
Continuous running range other two lines.
0 0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000
284
HC-RP Series 200V Servomotor Specifications
Servomotor Model HC-RP_ 103(B) 153(B) 203(B) 353(B) 503(B)
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_-_ 200A(-RJ070)/BS/T 350A(-RJ070)/BS/T 500A(-RJ070)/BS/T
Rated Output (kW) 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.5 5.0
Rated Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 3.18 (450) 4.78 (677) 6.37 (902) 11.1 (1570) 15.9 (2250)
Power Rate At Continuous Rated Torque (kW/s) 67.4 120 176 150 211
Rated Current (A) 6.1 8.8 14 23 28
Maximum Current (A) 18 23 37 58 70
Regenerative Braking Frequency (times/min) (*2) 1090 860 710 174 125
J (x10-4kg•m²) [J (oz•in²)] With Electromagnetic Brake 1.85 (10.1) 2.25 (12.3) 2.65 (14.5) 11.8 (64.5) 15.5 (84.7)
Environment
Elevation/Vibration (*5) 1000m or less above sea level X, Y: 24.5m/s²
Standard 3.9 (8.6) 5.0 (11) 6.2 (14) 12 (27) 17 (38)
Weight kg (lb)
With Electromagnetic Brake 6.0 (14) 7.0 (16) 8.3 (19) 15 (33) 21 (47)
Notes:
3. Contact Mitsubishi if the load/motor of inertia moment ratio exceeds the value in the table
X
Y
HC-RP103(B) (Note 1) HC-RP153(B) (Note 1) HC-RP203(B) (Note 1)

1260 9 2100 15 2520 18
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)

840 6 1400 10 Peak running range 1680 12
420 3 700 5 840 6

0 0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500
HC-RP353(B) (Note 1) HC-RP503(B) (Note 1)

4200 30 6300 45
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Peak running range

Peak running range
2800 20 4200 30
1400 10 2100 15
Notes:
0 0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500

HC-UP Series 200V Servomotor Specifications
Servomotor Model HC-UP_ 72(B) 152(B) 202(B) 352(B) 502(B)
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_-_ 70A(-RJ070)/BS/T 200A(-RJ070)/BS/T 350A(-RJ070)/BS/T 500A(-RJ070)/BS/T
Continuous Running Rated Output (kW) 0.75 1.5 2.0 3.5 5.0
Duty Rated Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 3.58 (507) 7.16 (1010) 9.55 (1350) 16.7 (2360) 23.9 (3380)
Maximum Speed (r/min) 3000 2500
Permissible Instantaneous Speed (r/min) 3450 2875
Rated Current (A) 5.4 9.7 14 23 28
Regeneration Braking Frequency (times/min) (*2) 53 124 68 44 31
Moment of Inertia Standard 10.4 (56.9) 22.1 (121) 38.2 (209) 76.5 (418) 115 (629)
J (x10-4kg•m²)
[J (oz•in²)] With Electromagnetic Brake 12.5 (68.3) 24.2 (132) 46.8 (256) 85.1 (465) 124 (678)
Environment
Elevation / Vibration (*5) 1000m or less above sea level X, Y: 24.5m/s² 1000m or less above sea level X: 24.5m/s² Y: 49m/s²
Standard 8.0 (18) 11 (25) 16 (36) 20 (44) 24 (53)
Weight kg (lb)
With Electromagnetic Brake 10 (22) 13 (29) 22 (49) 26 (58) 30 (67)
Notes:
5. The vibration direction is shown in the right-side diagram. The numeric value indicates the maximum value of the component (commonly the bracket in the opposite direction of the motor shaft).
Fretting of the bearing occurs easily when the motor stops, so maintain vibration to approximately one-half of the allowable value.
X
Y
HC-UP72(B) (Note 1, 2, 3) HC-UP152(B) (Note 1) HC-UP202(B) (Note 1)

1680 12 3360 24 4200 30
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Peak running
Peak Peak running range range
running range
1120 8 2240 16 2800 20
560 4 1120 8 1400 10

0 0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000
HC-UP352(B) (Note 1) HC-UP502(B) (Note 1)

8400 60 11200 80
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (oz • in)
Peak running range

Peak running range 8400 60
5600 40
Notes:
5600 40
2800 20 3. : For 1-phase 200VAC.
2800 20 This line is drawn only where differs from the
Continuous running range Continuous running range other two lines.
0 0 0 0
1000 2000 2500 1000 2000 2500
286
HF-JP Series 200V Servomotor Specifications
Servomotor Model HF-JP_ 53(B) 73(B) 103(B) 153(B) 203(B) 353(B) 503(B) 703(B) 903(B) 11K1M(B) 15K1M(B)
700A/B 11KA/B 11KA/B/T-
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_-_ 60A/BS/T 70A/BS/T 100A/BS/T 200A/BS/T 350A/BS/T 500A/BS/T 15KA/B/T-LR
(-RJ006)/T (-RJ006)/T LR
Power Supply Capacity (kVA) (*1) 1.0 1.3 1.7 2.5 3.5 5.5 7.5 10 13 16 22
3.3 <3.5>
Rated Output (kW) 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 11 15
(*7)
Continuous
Running Duty 10.5 (1490)
Rated Torque
1.59 (225) 2.39 (338) 3.18 (450) 4.77 (675) 6.37 (902)
(*7) <11.1 15.9 (2250) 22.3 (3160) 28.6 (4050) 70 (9910) 95.5 (13500)
(N•m [oz•in])
(1570)>
Maximum Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 4.77 (675) 7.16 (1010) 9.55 (1350) 14.3 (2020) 19.1 (2700) 32.0 (4530) 47.7 (6750) 66.8 (9460) 85.8 (12100) 210 (29700) 286 (40500)
Rated Speed (r/min) 3000 3000 1500
Maximum Speed (r/min) 6000 5000 3000
Permissible Instantaneous Speed
6900 5750 3450
(r/min)
Power Rate at Continuous Rated
16.7 27.3 38.2 60.2 82.4 83.5 133 115 147 223 (204) 290 (271)
Torque (kW/s)
16.6
Rated Current (A) 3.0 5.6 5.6 10.6 10.6 27 34 41 60 76
<17.6>
Maximum Current (A) 9.0 17 17 32 32 51 81 103 134 200 246
Regenerative Braking Frequency
67 98 76 271 206 73 68 56 204 (*9) 143 162
(times/min) (*2)
Moment of 1.52
Standard 2.09 (11.4) 2.65 (14.5) 3.79 (20.7) 4.92 (26.9) 13.2 (72.2) 19.0 (104) 43.3 (237) 55.8 (305) 220 (1200) 315 (1720)
Inertia J (8.31)
(x10-4 kg•m²) With Electromagnetic
[J (oz•in²)] 2.02 (11.0) 2.59 (14.2) 3.15 (17.2) 4.29 (23.5) 5.42 (29.6) 15.4 (84.2) 21.2 (116) 52.9 (289) 65.4 (358) 240 (1310) 336 (1840)
Brake
Recommended Load/Motor Inertia
Maximum of 10 times the servomotor's inertia moment (*3)
Moment Ratio
Structure Totally enclosed non-ventilated (IP code: IP67) (*4)
Ambient Temperature 0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F) (non freezing), storage: -15 to 70°C (5 to 158°F) (non freezing)
Ambient Humidity 80% RH maximum (non condensing), storage: 90% RH maximum (non condensing)
Environment
(*6)
Elevation / Vibration (*5) 1000m or less above sea level
Vibration X: 24.5m/s² Y: 24.5m/s² X: 24.5m/s² Y: 29.4m/s² X: 24.5m/s² Y: 24.5m/s²
Standard 3.0 (6.7) 3.7 (8.2) 4.5 (10) 5.9 (13) 7.5 (17) 13 (29) 18 (40) 29 (64) 36 (80) 62 (140) 86 (190)
Weight kg (lb) With Electromagnetic
4.4 (9.7) 5.1 (12 ) 5.9 (13) 7.3 (16) 8.9 (20) 15 (33) 20 (44) 35 (78) 42 (93) 74 (165) 97 (215)
Brake
Compatible MR-J3- MR-J3- MR-J3- MR-J3- MR-J3- MR-J3- MR-J3-
Servo Amplifier 100A/ 200A/ 200A/ 350A/ 350A/ 500A/ 700A/ - - - -
Maximally Model B/T-U100 B/T-U101 B/T-U102 B/T-U103 B/T-U104 B/T-U105 B/T-U106
Increased Maximum
Torque (*8) 6.37 (902) 9.55 (1350) 12.7 (1800) 19.1 (2700) 25.5 (3610) 44.6 (6320) 63.7 (9020) - - - -
Torque (N•m [oz•in])
Maximum Current (A) 12 23 23 43 43 71 108 - - - -
Notes:
2. The regenerative braking frequency shows the permissible frequency when the motor, without a load and the optional regeneration unit, decelerates from the rated speed to a stop.
3. Contact Mitsubishi if the load to motor inertia moment ratio exceeds the value in the table.
5. The vibration direction is shown in the diagram to the right. The numeric value indicates the maximum value of the component (commonly the bracket in the opposite direction of the motor shaft).
X
Y
6. In the environment where the servomotor is exposed to oil mist, oil and/or water, a standard specification servomotor may not be usable. Contact Mitsubishi for more details.
7. Value indicated in < > is when connected to servo amplifier MR-J3-500A/B/T-U105.
8. Use servo amplifier MR-J3-_A/B/T-U_ for maximally increased torque.
9. The value is applicable when the external regenerative resistors, GRZG400-oΩ (standard accessory) are used with cooling fans (2 units of 92x92mm, minimum air flow: 1.0m3/min). Note that change
in parameter No. PA02 is required.
(*1, *2, *3) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1)
(*4) (*4) (*4) (*4)

(*4)
(*1) (*1) HF-JP703(B) (*1) HF-JP903(B) (*1) (*1) (*1)

75 12600 90
(*4) (*4)
Torque (N·m)
Torque (N·m)
50 8400 60
25 4200 30
Continuous running Continuous running

range range
0 0 0
2000 4000 5000 2000 4000 5000

HF-JP Series 400V Servomotor Specifications
Servomotor Model HF-JP_ 534(B) 734(B) 1034(B) 1534(B) 2034(B) 3534(B) 5034(B) 7034(B) 9034(B) 11K1M4(B) 15K1M4(B)
60A4/BS4/ 350A4/ 500A4/ 00A4/B4 11KA4/B4 11KA4/B4/ 15KA4/B4/
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_-_ 100A4/BS4/T4 200A4/BS4/4T
T4 BS4/T4 BS4/T4 (-RJ006)/T4 (-RJ006)/T4 T4-LR T4-LR
Power Supply Capacity (kVA) (*1) 1.0 1.3 1.7 2.5 3.5 5.5 7.5 10 13 16 22
Rated Output (kW) 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.3 <3.5> 5.0 7.0 9.0 11 15
Continuous
Running Duty 10.5
Rated Torque (1490) 15.9 22.3 28.6 95.5
1.59 (225) 2.39 (338) 3.18 (450) 4.77 (675) 6.37 (902) 70 (9910)
(N•m [oz•in]) <11.1 (2250) (3160) (4050) (13500)
(1570)>
7.16 9.55 14.3 19.1 32.0 47.7 66.8 85.8 210 286
Maximum Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 4.77 (675)
(1010) (1350) (2020) (2700) (4530) (6750) (9460) (12100) (29700) (40500)
Rated Speed (r/min) 3000 3000 1500
Maximum Speed (r/min) 6000 5000 3000
6900 5750 3450
(r/min)
Power Rate At Continuous Rated
16.7 27.3 38.2 60.2 82.4 83.5 133 115 147 223 (204) 290 (271)
Torque (kW/s)
Rated Current (A) 1.5 2.8 2.8 5.4 5.4 8.3 <8.8> 14 17 21 32 38
Maximum Current (A) 4.5 8.4 8.4 17 17 26 41 52 67 100 123

99 72 56 265 203 75 68 56 205 (*9) 143 162
(times/min) (*2)
Moment of 315
Standard 1.52 (8.31) 2.09 (11.4) 2.65 (14.5) 3.79 (20.7) 4.92 (26.9) 13.2 (72.2) 19.0 (104) 43.3 (237) 55.8 (305) 220 (1200)
Inertia J (1720)
(x10-4 kg•m²) With Electromagnetic
[J (oz•in²)] 2.02 (11.0) 2.59 (14.2) 3.15 (17.2) 4.29 (23.5) 5.42 (29.6) 15.4 (84.2) 21.2 (116) 52.9 (289) 65.4 (358) 240 (1310) 336 (1840)
Brake
Maximum of 10 times the servomotor's inertia moment (*3)
Moment Ratio
Structure Totally enclosed non-ventilated (IP code: IP67) (*4)
Environment
(*6)
Elevation / Vibration (*5) 1000m or less above sea level
Vibration X: 24.5m/s² Y: 24.5m/s² X: 24.5m/s² Y: 29.4m/s² X: 24.5m/s² Y: 24.5m/s²
Standard 3.0 (6.7) 3.7 (8.2) 4.5 (10) 5.9 (13) 7.5 (17) 13 (29) 18 (40) 62 (140) 86 (190)
4.4 (9.7) 5.1 (12 ) 5.9 (13) 7.3 (16) 8.9 (20) 15 (33) 20 (44) 74 (165) 97 (215)
Brake
Compatible MR-J3- MR-J3- MR-J3- MR-J3- MR-J3- MR-J3- MR-J3-
Servo Amplifier 100A4/B4/ 200A4/B4/ 200A4/B4/ 350A4/B4/ 350A4/B4/ 500A4/B4/ 700A4/B4/ - -
Maximally Model T4-U110 T4-U111 T4-U112 T4-U113 T4-U114 T4-U115 T4-U116
Increased Maximum 9.55 12.7 19.1 25.5 44.6 63.7
Torque (*8) 6.37 (902) - -
Torque (N·m [oz·in]) (1350) (1800) (2700) (3610) (6320) (9020)
Maximum Current (A) 6 12 12 22 22 36 34 - -
Notes:
2. The regenerative braking frequency shows the permissible frequency when the motor, without a load and the optional regeneration unit, decelerates from the rated speed to a stop.
3. Contact Mitsubishi if the load to motor inertia moment ratio exceeds the value in the table.
X
Y
6. In the environment where the servomotor is exposed to oil mist, oil and/or water, a standard specification servomotor may not be usable. Contact Mitsubishi for more details.
7. Value indicated in < > is when connected to servo amplifier MR-J3-500A/BS/T-U105.
8. Use servo amplifier MR-J3-_A/BS/T-U_ for maximally increased torque.
90
60
30
288
HA-LP 1000r/min Series 200V Servomotor Specifications
Servomotor Model HA-LP_ 601(B) 801(B) 12K1(B) 15K1 20K1 25K1 30K1 37K1
700A(-RJ070)/ 15KA(-RJ070)/ DU30KA DU37KA
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_-_ 11KA(-RJ070)/BS/T 22KA(-RJ070)/BS/T
BS/T BS/T (-RJ070)/BS (-RJ070)/BS
Power Facility Capacity (kVA) (*1) 8.6 12 18 22 30 38 48 59
Rated Output (kW) 6.0 8.0 12 15 20 25 30 37
Continuous
Running Duty Rated Torque
57.3 (8110) 76.4 (10800) 115 (16300) 143 (20200) 191 (2700) 239 (33800) 286 (40500) 353 (50000)
(N•m [oz•in])
Maximum Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 172 (24400) 229 (32400) 344 (48700) 415 (58800) 477 (67500) 597 (84500) 716 (101000) 883 (125000)
1380
(r/min)
313 265 445 373 561 528 626 668
Torque (kW/s)
Rated Current (A) 34 42 61 83 118 118 154 188
Maximum Current (A) 102 126 183 249 295 295 385 470
Regen Braking Frequency
158 354 (*6) 264 (*6) 230 (*6) 195 (*6) 117 (*6) - -
(times/min) (*2)
Moment of Standard 105 (574) 220 (1200) 295 (1610) 550 (3010) 650 (3550) 1080 (5900) 1310 (7160) 1870 (10200)
Inertia J With
(x10-4 kg•m²) Electromagnetic 113 (618) 293 (1600) 369 (2020) - - - - -
[J (oz•in²)] Brake
Recommended Load / Motor Inertia
10 times the servomotor’s inertia moment maximum (*3)
Moment Ratio
Structure Totally enclosed ventilated (protection level: IP44) (*4)
Ambient
0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F) (non-freezing), storage: -15 to 70°C (5 to 158°F) (non-freezing)
Temperature
Environment
Elevation/ Vibration 1000m or less above sea level
1000m or less above sea level X: 9.8m/s² Y: 9.8m/s²
(*5) X: 11.7m/s² Y: 29.4m/s²
Standard 55 (125) 95 (210) 115 (255) 160 (355) 180 (400) 230 (510) 250 (555) 335 (740)
Weight kg (lb) With
Electromagnetic 70 (155) 130 (290) 150 (335) - - - - -
Brake
1-phase 200 to
220VAC/50Hz
Voltage, Frequency 3-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz
Cooling Fan 1-phase 200 to
Power 230VAC/60Hz
42 (50Hz)/
Input (W) 62 (50Hz) / 76 (60Hz) 65 (50Hz) / 85 (60Hz) 120 (50Hz) / 175 (60Hz)
54 (60Hz)
0.21(50Hz)/
Cooling Fan Rated Current (A) 0.18 (50Hz) / 0.17 (60Hz) 0.20 (50Hz) / 0.22 (60Hz) 0.65 (50Hz) / 0.80 (60Hz)
0.25 (60Hz)
Notes:
X
Y
6. This applies when the GRZG400-_ Ω regeneration resistors are used as a standard accessory and parameter PA02 is changed with cooling fan (1.0m³/min, the _92x2 unit) installed.
HA-LP601 (B) (Note 1) HA-LP801 (B) (Note 1) HA-LP12K1 (B) (Note 1) HF-LP15K1 (B) (Note 1)
25200 180 42000 300 56000 400 63000 450
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Peak
running range 42000 300 Peak
16800 120 28000 200 Peak Peak 42000 300 running range
28000 200
8400 60 14000 100 21000 150
14000 100
Continuous running Continuous running Continuous running
Continuous running
range range range
range
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
500 1000 1200 500 1000 1200 500 1000 1200 500 1000 1200
HA-LP20K1 (B) (Note 1) HA-LP25K1 (B) (Note 1) HA-LP30K1 (B) (Note 1) HA-LP37K1 (B) (Note 1)
84000 600 112000 800 112000 800 126000 900
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Peak
84000 84000 Peak running range
600 600
56000 400 Peak Peak running range 84000 600
56000 400 56000 400
28000 200 42000 300
28000 200 28000 200 Continuous running Continuous running
Continuous running Continuous running range
range
range range Notes:
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1. : For 3-phase 200VAC.
500 1000 1200 500 1000 1200 500 1000 1200 500 1000 1200

Servomotor Model HA-LP_ 6014(B) 8014(B) 12K14(B) 15K14 20K14 25K14 30K14 37K14
700A4(-RJ070)/ 15KA4(-RJ070)/ 22KA4(-RJ070)/ DU37KA4
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_-_ 11KA4(-RJ070)/BS4/T4 DU30KA4(-RJ070)/BS4
BS4/T4 BS4(-RJ006)/ T4 BS4/T4 (-RJ070)/BS4
Power Facility Capacity (kVA) (*1) 8.6 12 18 22 30 38 48 59
Rated Output (kW) 6.0 8.0 12 15 20 25 30 37
Continuous
Running Duty Rated Torque 57.3 (8110) 76.4 (10800) 115 (16300) 143 (20200) 191 (27000) 239 (33800) 286 (40500) 353 (50000)
(N•m [oz•in])
1380
(r/min)
313 265 445 373 561 528 626 668
Torque (kW/s)
Rated Current (A) 17 20 30 40 55 70 77 95
169 354 (*6) 264 (*6) 230 (*6) 195 (*6) - - -
(times/min) (*2)
Moment of Standard 105 (574) 220 (1200) 295 (1610) 550 (3010) 650 (3550) 1080 (5900) 1310 (7160) 1870 (10200)
Inertia J (x10-
kg•m²) [J With Electromagnetic
113 (617.7) 293 (1601.7) 369 (2017.2) - - - - -
4
(oz•in²)] Brake
Moment Ratio
Environment
Elevation / Vibration (*5) 1000m or less above sea level X: 11.7m/s² Y: 29.4m/s² 1000m or less above sea level X: 9.8m/s² Y: 9.8m/s²
Standard 55 (125) 95 (210) 115 (255) 160 (355) 180 (400) 230 (510) 250 (555) 335 (740)
70 (155) 130 (290) 150 (335) - - - - -
Brake
1-phase 200 to
220VAC/50Hz 3-phase 380 to 440VAC 50Hz
Voltage, Frequency 3-phase 380 to 460VAC 50Hz; 3-phase 380 to 480VAC 60Hz
Cooling Fan 1-phase 200 to 3-phase 380 to 480 VAC 60Hz
Power 230VAC/60Hz
42 (50Hz)/
Input (W) 62 (50Hz)/76 (60Hz) 65 (50Hz)/85 (60Hz) 110 (50Hz)/150 (60Hz)
54 (60Hz)
0.21 (50Hz)/
Cooling Fan Rated Current (A) 0.14 (50Hz)/0.11 (60Hz) 0.12 (50Hz)/0.14 (60Hz) 0.20 (50Hz)/0.22 (60Hz)
0.25 (60Hz)
Notes:
X
Y
6. This applies when the GRZG400- _ Ω regeneration resistors are used as a standard accessory and parameter PA02 is changed with cooling fan (1.0m³/min, the _92 x 2 unit) installed.
HA-LP6014 (B) (Note 1, 2) HA-LP8014 (B) (Note 1, 2, 3) HA-LP12K14 (B) (Note 1, 2) HA-LP15K14 (B) (Note 1, 2)
25200 180 42000 300 56000 400 63000 450
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Peak Peak
running range 42000 300 Peak running range
16800 120 28000 200 Peak running range 42000 300
running range
28000 200
8400 60 14000 100 21000 150

14000 100
range range
range range
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
500 1000 1200 500 1000 1200 500 1000 1200 500 1000 1200
HA-LP20K14 (B) (Note 1, 2) HA-LP25K14 (B) (Note 1, 2) HA-LP30K14 (B) (Note 1, 2) HA-LP37K14 (B) (Note 1, 2)
84000 600 112000 800 112000 800 126000 900
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Peak
600 600
56000 400 Peak running range 84000 600
Peak
56000 400 56000 400
28000 200 42000 300 Continuous running

28000 28000 Notes:
200 200 Continuous running range
Continuous running Continuous running 1. : For 3-phase 400VAC.
range 2. : For 3-phase 380VAC.
range range
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3. The torque characteristics are
500 1000 1200 500 1000 1200 500 1000 1200 500 1000 1200 anticipated values.
290
Servomotor Model HA-LP_ 701M(B) 11K1M(B) 15K1M(B) 22K1M 30K1M 37K1M
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_-_ 700A(-RJ070)/BS/T 11KA(-RJ070)/BS/T 15KA(-RJ070)/BS/T 22KA(-RJ070)/BS/T DU30KA(-RJ070)/BS DU37KA(-RJ070)/BS
Power Facility Capacity (kVA) (*1) 10 16 22 33 48 59
Rated Output (kW) 7.0 11 15 22 30 37
Continuous
Running Duty Rated Torque 44.6 (6320) 70.0 (9910) 95.5 (13500) 140 (19800) 191 (27000) 236 (33400)
(N•m [oz•in])
Maximum Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 134 (19000) 210 (29700) 286 (40500) 350 (49600) 477 (67500) 589 (83400)
Power Rate at Continuous Rated Torque
189 223 309 357 561 514
(kW/s)
Rated Current (A) 37 65 87 126 174 202
Maximum Current (A) 111 195 261 315 435 505
Regen Braking Frequency (times/min)
70 158 (*6) 191 (*6) 102 (*6) - -
(*2)
Moment of Standard 105 (574) 220 (1200) 295 (1610) 550 (3010) 650 (3550) 1080 (5900)
inertia J
(x10-4kg•m²) With Electromagnetic 113 (618) 293 (1600) 369 (2020) - - -
Recommended Load / Motor Inertia
Moment Ratio
Environment
Elevation / Vibration (*5) 1000m or less above sea level X: 11.7m/s² Y: 29.4m/s² 1000m or less above sea level X: 9.8m/s² Y: 9.8m/s²
Standard 55 (125) 95 (210) 115 (255) 160 (355) 180 (400) 230 (510)
70 (155) 130 (290) 150 (335) - - -
Brake
1-phase 200 to
220VAC / 50 Hz
Cooling Fan Voltage, Frequency 3-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz
1-phase 200 to
Power 230VAC / 60Hz
Input (W) 42 (50Hz) / 54 (60Hz) 62 (50Hz) / 76 (60Hz) 65 (50Hz) / 85 (60Hz) 120 (50Hz) / 175 (60Hz)
0.21 (50Hz) / 0.65 (50Hz) /
Cooling Fan Rated Current (A) 0.18 (50Hz) / 0.17 (60Hz) 0.20 (50Hz) / 0.22 (60Hz)
0.25 (60Hz) 0.80 (60Hz)
Notes:
X
Y
6. This applies when the GRZG400-_Ω regeneration resistors are used as a standard accessory and parameter PA02 is changed with cooling fan (1.0m³/min, the _92 x 2 unit) installed.
HA-LP701M(B) (Note 1) HA-LP11K1M(B) (Note 1) HA-LP15K1M(B) (Note 1)

21000 150 33600 240 42000 300
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)

14000 100 22400 160 28000 200
7000 50 11200 80 14000 100

range range range
0 0 0 0 0 0
500 1000 1500 2000 500 1000 1500 2000 500 1000 1500 2000
HA-LP22K1M (Note 1) HA-LP30K1M (Note 1) HA-LP37K1M (Note 1)

56000 400 84000 600 105000 750
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
42000 Peak running range

300
56000 Peak running range 70000 Peak running range
400 500
Notes:
28000 200 1. : For 3-phase 200VAC.
28000 200 35000 250
14000 100 Continuous running Continuous running Continuous running
range range range
0 0 0 0 0 0
500 1000 1500 2000 500 1000 1500 2000 500 1000 1500 2000

Servomotor Model HA-LP_ 701M4(B) 11K1M4(B) 15K1M4(B) 22K1M4 30K1M4 37K1M4 45K1M4 50K1M4
700A4(-RJ070)/ 11KA4(-RJ070)/ 15KA4(-RJ070)/ 22KA4(-RJ070)/ DU30KA4 DU37KA4 DU45KA4 DU55KA4
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_-_
BS4/T4 BS4/T4 BS4/T4 BS4/T4 (-RJ070)/BS4 (-RJ070)/BS4 (-RJ070)/BS4 (-RJ070)/BS4
Power Facility Capacity (kVA) (*1) 10 16 22 33 48 59 71 80
Continuous Rated Output (kW) 7.0 11 15 22 30 37 45 50
Running Rated Torque
Duty 44.6 (6320) 70.0 (9910) 95.5 (13500) 140 (19800) 191 (27000) 236 (33400) 286 (40500) 318 (45000)
(N•m [oz•in])
2300
(r/min)
189 223 309 357 561 514 626 542
Torque (kW/s)
Rated Current (A) 18 31 41 63 87 101 128 143
75 158 (*6) 191 (*6) 102 (*6) - - - -
(times/min) (*2)
Moment Standard 105 (574) 220 (1200) 295 (1610) 550 (3010) 650 (3550) 1080 (5900) 1310 (7100) 1870 (10200)
of Inertia
J (x10-4 With Electromagnetic
kg•m²) [J 113 (618) 293 (1600) 369 (2020) - - - - -
Brake
(oz•in²)]
Recommended Load / Motor Inertia 10 times the servomotor’s inertia moment maximum (*3)
Moment Ratio
Insulation class Class F
Elevation / Vibration 1000m or less above sea level X: 11.7m/s² Y: 29.4m/s² 1000m or less above sea level X: 9.8m/s² Y: 9.8m/s²
(*5)
Standard 55 (125) 95 (210) 115 (255) 160 (355) 180 (400) 230 (510) 250 (555) 335 (740)
Weight kg
(lb) With Electromagnetic 70 (154.2) 130 (290) 150 (335) - - - - -
Brake
1-phase 200 to
220VAC/50Hz 3-phase 380 to 440VAC 50Hz 3-phase 380 to 460VAC 50Hz
Voltage, Frequency
Cooling Fan 1-phase 200 to 3-phase 380 to 480VAC 60Hz 3-phase 380 to 480VAC 60Hz
Power 230VAC/60Hz
42 (50Hz)/
54 (60Hz)
0.21 (50Hz)/
0.25 (60Hz)
Notes:
X
Y
HA-LP701M4(B) (Note 1, 2) HA-LP11K1M4(B) (Note 1, 2) HA-LP15K1M4(B) (Note 1, 2) HA-LP22K1M4 (Note 1, 2)

21000 150 33600 240 42000 300 56000 400
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Peak running range

Peak running range Peak running Peak running
42000 300
range range
14000 100 22400 160 28000 200
28000 200
7000 50 11200 80 14000 100

14000 100 Continuous running
range range
range range
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
500 1000 1500 2000 500 1000 1500 2000 500 1000 1500 2000 500 1000 1500 2000
HA-LP30K1M4 (Note 1, 2) HA-LP37K1M4 (Note 1, 2) HA-LP45K1M4 (Note 1, 2) HA-LP50K1M4 (Note 1, 2)

84000 600 105000 750 112000 800 126000 900
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)

84000 600
56000 Peak running range 70000 Peak running range 84000
400 500 600
Notes:
56000 400 1. : For 3-phase 400VAC.
28000 200 35000 250 42000 300
28000 200 Continuous running Continuous running
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
500 1000 1500 2000 500 1000 1500 2000 500 1000 1500 2000 500 1000 1500 2000
292
Servomotor Model HA-LP_ 502 702 11K2(B) 15K2(B) 22K2(B) 30K2 37K2
500A(-RJ070)/ 700A(-RJ070)/ 11KA(-RJ070)/ 15KA(-RJ070)/ 22KA(-RJ070)/ DU30KA(-RJ070)/ DU37KA(-RJ070)/
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_-_ BS/T BS/T BS/T BS/T BS/T BS BS
Power Facility Capacity (kVA) (*1) 7.5 10.0 16 22 33 48 59
Rated Output (kW) 5.0 7.0 11 15 22 30 37
Continuous
Running Duty Rated Torque 23.9 (3380) 33.4 (4730) 52.5 (7430) 71.6 (10100) 105 (14900) 143 (20200) 177 (25100)
(N•m [oz•in])
Maximum Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 71.6 (10100) 100 (14200) 158 (22400) 215 (30400) 263 (37200) 358 (50700) 442 (62600)
Power Rate at Continuous Rated Torque (kW/s) 77.2 118 263 233 374 373 480
Rated Current (A) 25 34 63 77 112 166 204
Maximum Current (A) 75 102 189 231 280 415 510
Regen Braking Frequency (times/min) (*2) 50 50 186 (*6) 144 (*6) 107 (*6) - -
Moment of Standard 74.0 (405) 94.2 (515) 105 (574) 220 (1200) 295 (1610) 550 (3010) 650 (3550)
Inertia
J (x10-4 kg•m²) With Electromagnetic - - 113 (618) 293 (1600) 369 (2020) - -
Recommended Load/Motor Inertia 10 times the servomotor’s inertia moment maximum (*3)
Moment Ratio
Totally enclosed non-ventilated
(protection level: IP65) (*4)
1000m or less above sea level
Elevation / Vibration 1000m or less above sea level X: 11.7m/s² Y: 29.4m/s² X: 9.8m/s² Y: 9.8m/s²
Standard 28 (62) 35 (78) 55 (125) 95 (210) 115 (255) 160 (355) 180 (400)
Weight kg (lb) With Electromagnetic - - 70 (155) 130 (290) 150 (335) - -
Brake
1-phase 200 to
220 VAC/50Hz
Voltage, Frequency (*5) - - 3-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz
Cooling Fan 1-phase 200 to
Power 230 VAC/60Hz
42 (50Hz) /
Input (W) - - 62 (50Hz) / 76 (60Hz) 65 (50Hz) / 85 (60Hz)
54 (60Hz)
0.21 (50Hz)/
Cooling Fan Rated Current (A) - - 0.18 (50Hz) / 0.17 (60Hz) 0.20 (50Hz) / 0.22 (60Hz)
0.25 (60Hz)
Notes:
X
Y
HA-LP502 (Note 1) HA-LP702 (Note 1) HA-LP11K2(B) (Note 1) HA-LP15K2(B) (Note 1)

11200 80 16800 120 28000 200 33600 240
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)

8400 60 Peak running range 21000 150 25200 180
5600 40 14000 100 16800 120
5600 40
2800 20 7000 50 8400 60
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 1000 2000 1000 2000 1000 2000
HA-LP22K2(B) (Note 1) HA-LP30K2 (Note 1) HA-LP37K2 (Note 1)

42000 300 56000 400 84000 600
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)

42000 300
28000 200 56000 400 Peak running range
Notes:
28000 200 1. : For 3-phase 200VAC.
14000 100 28000 200
Continuous running 14000 Continuous running
100 Continuous running
range range
range
0 0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 1000 2000 1000 2000

Servomotor Model HA-LP_ 11K24(B) 15K24(B) 22K24(B) 30K24 37K24 45K24 55K24
11KA4(-RJ070)/ 15KA4(-RJ070)/ 22KA4(-RJ070)/
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J3-_-_ DU30KA4/BS4 DU37KA4/BS4 DU45KA4/BS4 DU55KA4/BS4
BS4/T4 BS4/T4 BS4/T4
Power Facility Capacity (kVA) (*1) 16 22 33 48 59 71 87
Rated Output (kW) 11 15 22 30 37 45 55
Continuous
Running Duty Rated Torque
52.5 (7430) 71.6 (10100) 105 (14900) 143 (20200) 177 (25100) 215 (30400) 263 (37200)
(N•m [oz•in])
Maximum Torque (N•m [oz•in]) 158 (22400) 215 (30400) 263 (37200) 358 (50700) 442 (62600) 537 (76000) 657 (93000)
2300
Permissible Instantaneous Speed (r/min)
Power Rate at Continuous Rated Torque 263 233 374 373 480 427 526
(kW/s)
Rated Current (A) 32 40 57 83 102 131 143
Maximum Current (A) 96 120 143 208 255 328 358
186 (*6) 144 (*6) 107 (*6) - - - -
(times/min) (*2)
Moment of Standard 105 (574) 220 (1200) 295 (1610) 550 (3010) 650 (3550) 1080 (5900) 1310 (7160)
Inertia
J (x10 kg•m²) With Electromagnetic
-4
113 (618) 293 (1600) 369 (2020) - - - -
Recommended Load / Motor Inertia 10 times the servomotor’s inertia moment maximum (*3)
Moment Ratio
Elevation / Vibration 1000m or less above sea level X: 11.7m/s² Y: 29.4m/s² 1000m or less above sea level X: 9.8m/s² Y: 9.8m/s²
(*5)
Standard 55 (125) 95 (210) 115 (255) 160 (355) 180 (400) 230 (510) 250 (555)
Weight kg (lb) With Electromagnetic 70 (155) 130 (290) 150 (335) - - - -
Brake
1-phase 200 to
220 VAC / 50Hz 3-phase 380 to 440VAC 50Hz 3-phase 380 to 460VAC 50Hz
Voltage, Frequency
Cooling Fan 1-phase 200 to 3-phase 380 to 480VAC 60Hz 3-phase 380 to 480VAC 60Hz
Power 230 VAC / 60Hz
42 (50Hz) /
54 (60Hz)
0.21 (50Hz) /
0.25 (60Hz)
Notes:
X
Y
6. This applies when the GRZG400-_Ω regeneration resistors are used as a standard accessory and parameter PA02 is changed with cooling fan (1.0m³/min, the _92x2 unit) installed.
HA-LP11K24(B) (Note 1, 2) HA-LP15K24(B) (Note 1, 2) HA-LP22K24(B) (Note 1, 2) HA-LP30K24 (Note 1, 2)

28000 200 33600 240 42000 300 56000 400
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)

21000 150 25200 180 42000 300
Peak running range 28000 200
14000 100 16800 120 28000 200
14000 100
7000 50 8400 60 Continuous running 14000 100 Continuous running
Continuous running Continuous running range range
range range
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 1000 2000 1000 2000 1000 2000
HA-LP37K24 (Note 1, 2) HA-LP45K24 (Note 1, 2) HA-LP55K24 (Note 1, 2)

84000 600 84000 600 112000 800
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)
Torque (oz • in)

Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Torque (N • m)
Peak running range

56000 400 Peak running range 56000 400
Notes:
56000 400 1. : For 3-phase 400VAC.
28000 200 28000 200
Continuous running 28000 200 Continuous running
range range
0 0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 1000 2000 1000 2000
294
D. Cables and Connectors
MR-J3-A Type Amplifiers Cables and Connectors

MR-J3-_A/A1/A4 3.5kW or smaller (200V) and 2kW or smaller (400V)
Servo amplifier
QD70P Positioning
QD70D unit
QD75P
CNP1 CN5
QD75D
A1SD75P MR Configurator
CN6 (Setup software)
FX2N-20GM
MRZJW3-SETUP221E
FX2N-10GM Operation CN3
FX2N-10PG panel CNP2
FX2N-1PG CN1
CNP3
CN2
To servo motor encoder
To servo motor power supply
MR-J3-_A/A4 5kW to 22kW (200V) and 3.5kW to 22kW (400V)

Servo amplifier
QD70P Positioning
QD70D unit
QD75P
CN5
QD75D MR Configurator
A1SD75P CN6 (Setup software)
FX2N-20GM MRZJW3-SETUP221E
FX2N-10GM Operation CN3
FX2N-10PG panel
FX2N-1PG CN1
CN2
MR-J3-DU_A/A4
QD70P Positioning
QD70D unit
QD75P
QD75D MR Configurator
A1SD75P (Setup software)
MRZJW3-SETUP221E
FX2N-20GM
FX2N-10GM
Operation
FX2N-10PG panel
FX2N-1PG
Converter unit Drive unit
CNP1 CN1 CN6 12 CN5
CN40 CN6
CN3
CN3
13 CN40A
CN1
These connectors are
included with CN40B
converter unit.
CN2
14
MR-J3-_A-RJ158
10
11
Do not use this part. (CN3)
MR-J3-A-RJ158 MR-J3-T04
CN5
1 CN6
CN7
2 CN3
CN1
3 5 6 7 8
CN10A
Port A connector (CN10A) for RJ45 EtherCAT
4 communication. CATSE Supplied by Customer.
Input/output signal connector (CN1)
Port B connector (CN10B) for RJ45 EtherCAT
CN2 communication
To Servo Motor Encoder CN10B
To servo motor power supply Do not use this part. (CN2L)

CN2L

MR-J3-A Type Cables and Connectors (Refer to Chart on Previous Page)
CNP_ Connectors (Comes with J3 Amp Standard)
Protection
Item Model Number Stocked Lengths Description
Level
CNP1 Connector 1kW or Less (200VAC) 54928-0670 S -
CNP1 Connector 2kW - 3.5kW (200VAC)* PC4/6-STF-7.62 S -
1 CNP1 Connector 2kW (200V)
(Manufactured after January 2008)
721-207/026-000 S -
CNP1 Connector 2kW or Less (400VAC)
CNP2 Connector up to 3.5kW (200VAC)* 54927-0510 S -
CNP2 Connector 2kW (200V)
2 (Manufactured after January 2008) 721-205/026-000 S -
(Manufactured after January 2008) 721-203/026-000 S -
CNP1-2-3 Insertion Tool (200VAC) 54932-0000 S -
4
* Use this model for amplifiers manufactured prior to January 2008.
For CN1
Item Model Number Stocked Lengths Protection Description
Level
5 CN1 Connector (50 Pin) MR-J3CN1 S -
MR-J3CCN1CBL-_M
6 CN1 Pigtail Cable (50 Pin) 3, 5 -
_ = cable length 3, 5m
MR-J2M-CN1TBL_M (_ = cable
Junction Terminal Block Cable length 0.5, 1m) (For use with
MR-TB50 and MR-TB50MIN
05, 1 -
(With Ground Clamp)
Junction Terminal Block)
7 MR-J2M-CN1TBL_M-G
(_ = cable length 0.4, 1m)
Junction Terminal Block Cable (For use with MR-TB50 and 04, 1 -
(Without Ground Clamp) MR-TB50MIN Junction Terminal
Block)
MR-TB50 S -
8 Junction Terminal Block MR-TB50MIN (reduced size S -
- width = 145mm (5.71 in))
For CN3
Level
9 RS-232 to RS-485 Converter PC to CN3 (3M) SC-FRPC (Cable length 3m) S -
For CN5
Protection
Level
MR-J3USBCBL3M
10 Personal Computer Communication Cable - USB S -
Cable length 3m
For CN6A
Level
MR-J3CN6CBL1M
11 Monitor Cable S -
Cable length 1m
For CN40 (A/B)

Protection
Level
12 Protection Coordination Cable MR-J3CDL05M - -
13 Connector Set MR-J2CN1-A - -
14 Terminal Connector MR-J3-TM - -
296
MR-J3-B Type Amplifier Cables and Connectors
MR-J3-_BS/BS1/BS4 3.5kW or smaller (200V) and 2kW or smaller (400V)
18 19 18 19
MR Configurator
(Setup software)
MRZJW3-SETUP221E
9 Safety Logic Unit
MR-J3-D05
Servo amplifier Servo amplifier
Controller
Q173DCPU
5 6 7
Q172DCPU CN5 10 17 19
CN5
Q170MCPU CNP1 CNP1
CN3 CN3
QD75MH 1 11 17 19
LD77MH
FX3U-20SSC-H 2 CN8 12 CN8
MR-MQ100 CNP2 CN1A CNP2 CN1A
3 13
4 CN1B 5 6 7 CN1B
8
CN2 CN2
CNP3 CNP3
CN2L CN2L
CN4 CN4
To servo motor power supply Attach a cap to the unused
To servo motor encoder connector.
MR-J3-_BS/BS4 5kW to 22kW (200V) and 3.5kW to 22kW (400V)
18 19 18 19
MR Configurator
(Setup software) 9
MRZJW3-SETUP221E Safety Logic Unit
MR-J3-D05
Controller
Q173DCPU
Q172DCPU
Q170MCPU
10 11 12 13 CN5
17 19 CN5
QD75MH CN3 17 19 CN3

LD77MH 5 6 7
FX3U-20SSC-H CN8 CN8
MR-MQ100
CN1A CN1A
CN1B CN1B
8
CN2 CN2
5 6 7
CN2L CN2L
CN4 CN4
Attach a cap to the unused
connector.
MR-J3-DU_BS/BS4
Controller
18 19
Q173DCPU
Q172DCPU MR Configurator
Q170MCPU (Setup software)
QD75MH MRZJW3-SETUP221E 10 11 12 13
QD74MH
18 19
FX3U-20SSC-H
MR-MQ100
5 6 7
Safety Logic Unit
Drive unit MR-J3-D05 Converter unit Drive unit
Converter unit
CN5
CNP1 CN1 CN5 17 19 CNP1 CN1 CN6 14
CN6 14 CN3
CN3
17 19 CN40
CN40
CN40A CN8
CN8 CN40A
CN3 CN1A
CN1A
CN3 15 20 15
CN40B CN40B CN1B
CN1B
These connectors These connectors 8
are included with the are included with the CN2
CN2
converter unit. converter unit. CN2L
CN2L
16 16 CN4
CN4
5 6 7 Attach a cap to the unused
connector.

MR-J3-B Safety Type Cables and Connectors (Refer to Chart on Previous Page)


1
721-207/026-000 S -
4
For Controller, CN1A, CN1B B Safety Type Only

Stocked
Item Model Number Protection Level Description
Lengths
MR-J3BUS_M 015, 03, 05,
5 SSCNET III Cable (Standard Cord For Inside Panel) _ = cable length 0.15, 0.3, -
1, 3
0.5, 1, 3m
6 SSCNET III Cable (Standard Cable For Outside Panel) MR-J3BUS_M-A 5, 10, 20 -
_ = cable length 5, 10, 20m
MR-J3BUS_M-B
7 SSCNET III Cable (Long Distance Cable) 30 -
_ = cable length 30, 40, 50m
For CN1B
Connector comes with
8 Connector Cap for SSCNET III - -
ampliier standard
For CN5
Stocked Protection
Item Model Number Description
Lengths Level
MR-J3USBCBL3M
Cable length 3m
For CN3
Stocked
Lengths
10 CN3 Signal Connector (20 Pin) MR-J2CN1 S -
MR-CCN1CBL-_M
MR-J2HBUS_M
_ = Cable length 05, 1, 3, 5m 05, 1, 3, 5
12 Cable for PS7DW-20V14B-F Terminal Block -
20 Pin Terminal Block For J3-B Safety

13 PS7DW-20V14B-F S -
(TB20 Cannot be Used)
For CN40
Stocked
Lengths
MR-J3CDL05M
14 Protection Coordination Cable - -
Cable length: 0.5m
15 Connector Set MR-J2CN1-A - -
298
Connectors
16 Terminal Connector for CNB40 MR-J3-TM - -
For CN8 and D05

Model Number
Item Stocked Lengths Protection Level Diagram
(_=cable length in meters)
MR-D05UDL_M
17 STO Cable (for MR-J3-D05) 03, 1, 3 -
_ = cable length: 0.3, 1, 3m
STO Cable For Safety Control Device Other than

18 MR-D05UDL3M-B S -
MR-J3-D05) (*2)
STO Connector to make Cables 17 and 18 for Custom

19 MR-D05CON S -
Lengths (customer supplied cable)
Short-Circuit Connector (CN8A) 1971153-1 S -
20 I/O Connector (CN9) Included with Ampliier - -
I/O Connector (CN10) Included with Ampliier - -

MR-J3-T Type Amplifier Cables and Connectors
MR-J3-_T/T1/T4 3.5kW or smaller (200V) and 2kW or smaller (400V)
CC-Link
5
master unit
10
CNP1 CN5 CNP1 CN5
(Programmable CN1 Connector
controller) CN3 MR Configurator CN3
included with
amplifier
11 (Setup software)
MRZJW3-SETUP221E
CN1 CN1
1 2 3 4 CNP2 CNP2
CN1 Connector
included with
CN6 CN6 amplifier
CNP3 9 CNP3
6 7 Manual pulse
generator
CN2 CN2
MR-HDP01
8
To servo motor power supply
MR-J3-_T/T4 5kW to 22kW (200V) and 3.5kW to 22kW (400V)

10
CC-Link 5
master unit
CN5 CN5
(Programmable
controller) CN1 Connector
CN3 MR Configurator CN3
included with 11 (Setup software)
amplifier
CN1 MRZJW3-SETUP221E CN1
CN1 Connector
included with
CN6 CN6 amplifier
6 7 9 Manual pulse
CN2 generator CN2
MR-HDP01
8
MR-J3-D01 extension IO unit

Options for the servo amplifier are same as when the MR-J3-D01 is not used. Refer to the above illustrations.
Servo amplifier D01 I/O
14
15
CN20
CNP1 CN5
12 13
CN3
CN30
19
CN1
CNP2 18 22
CN10
CN6
CNP3
CN2 20
16 17
21
721-207/026-000 S -
4
300
MR-J3-T Type Cables and Connectors (Refer to Chart on Previous Page)
For CN5
MR-J3USBCBL3M
(Cable length 3m)
For CN6
6 CN6 Connector (26 Pin) MR-ECN1 S -
7 CN6 Pigtail Cable (26 Pin) MR-ECN1CBL-3M S -
MR-TBNATBL_M
(_ = Cable Length: 0.5, 1M)
For CN1 and CN3

10 CN1 CC-Link Replacement Connector 1781014 - -
11 RS-232 to RS-485 Converter PC to CN3 (3M) SC-FRPC (Cable length 3m) S -
For CN20
12 CN20 Signal Connector (20 Pin) CN1 S -
MR-CCN1CBL-_M
(_ = cable length 3, 5m)
MR-J2HBUS_M
(_ = cable length 05, 1, 3, 5m) 05, 1, 3, 5
14 Cable for PS7DW-20V14B-F Terminal Block -
15 20 Pin Terminal Block For J3-B (TB20 Cannot be Used) PS7DW-20V14B-F S -
For CN10
16 CN10 Connector (50 Pin) MR-J3CN1 S -
MR-J3CCN1CBL-_M
MR-J2M-CN1TBL_M (_ = cable
Junction Terminal Block Cable length 0.5, 1m) (For use with
MR-TB50 and MR-TB50MIN
05, 1 -
(With Ground Clamp)
Junction Terminal Block)
18 MR-J2M-CN1TBL_M-G
(_ = cable length 0.4, 1m)
Junction Terminal Block Cable (For use with MR-TB50 and 04, 1 -
(Without Ground Clamp) MR-TB50MIN Junction Terminal
Block)
MR-TB50 (reduced size - S -
width = 244mm (9.61 in))
19 Junction Terminal Block
MR-TB50MIN (reduced size - S -
width = 145mm (5.71 in))
Digital Switch Cables

Digital Switch Cable MR-DSCBL_M-G
(_=cable length: 3, 5, 10m) -
20 -
(for between MR-DS60 and MR-J3-D01)
MR-DSCBL_
Digital Switch Cable
21 (_ =cable length: 25, - -
(for between each MR-DS60) 100cm)
22 Digital Switch to Use Together With MR-J3-D01 MR-DS60 - -

MR-J3W-B Type Amplifier Cables and Connectors
Controller 7 8 9 Servo amplifier Servo amplifier

Q173DCPU 10
Q172DCPU
Q170MCPU MR Configurator
CNP1 CN5 CNP1 CN5
QD75MH
QD74MH
2 (Setup software)
MRZJW3-SETUP221E
CN3 11 12 CN3
FX3u-20SSC-H 3
1 CNP2 CN1A CNP2 CN1A
4 14
5 13
CNP3A CN1B CNP3A CN1B
CNP3B CNP3B
15
6 CN2A 7 8 9 CN2A
CN2B CN2B
CN4
16 CN4
To Servomotor
Power Supply
Attach a cap to the
(Note 2)
unused connector.
Battery case: MR-BTCASE
17 Battery: MR-BAT 8 pieces
To B-axis rotary/linear servo motor

To A-axis rotary/linear servo motor
Notes: 1. These connector sets are not included with the servo amplifier. Please purchase them separately.
2. Battery case (MR-BTCASE) and batteries (MR-BAT) are not required when configuring absolute position detection system with linear servo motor.
CNP1, CNP2-B(Y), CNP2-A(X) Cables

SC-EMP01CBL_M-L Terminal processing type: cut
1 CNP1 Main Circuit Power Supply Cable (_= cable length: 2, 5m) 2, 5 - L1
L2
(*1, *2) L3
SC-ECP01CBL_M-L Terminal processing type: cut
2 CNP2-B(Y) Control Circuit Power Supply Cable (_= cable length: 2, 5m) 2, 5 - L11
L21
(*1, *2)
CNP2-A(X) Built-In Regenerative Resistor Short P+
3 SC-ERG02CBL01M-L S -
Connector D
SC-ERG01CBL_M-L Terminal processing type: cut
4 CNP2-A(X) Optional Regeneration Unit Cable (_= cable length: 2, 5m) 2, 5 - P+

C
(*1, *2)
Note:
1. Unlisted length is also available per meter: up to 10m for servo amplifier power supply cable and up to 30m for motor power supply cable.
2. -H and -L indicate a bending life. -H indicates a long bending life, and -L indicates a standard bending life.
CNP1/CNP2,CNP3A/B Connectors
CNP1/CNP2 Main Circuit Power Supply Connector Set MR-J3WCNP12-DM

5 S -
(Crimp Type)
6 CNP3A/B Connector (Crimp Type) MR-J3WCNP3-DL S -
5 CNP1/CNP2/CNP3A/B Connector Set

MR-J3WCNP123-SP S -
6 (Spring Clamp Type with Open Tool included)
For Controller, CN1A, CN1B

MR-J3BUS_M
7 SSCNET III Cable (Standard Cord For Inside Panel) _ = cable length 0.15, 015, 03, 05, 1, 3 -
0.3, 0.5, 1, 3m
MR-J3BUS_M-A
8 SSCNET III Cable (Standard Cable For Outside Panel) _ = cable length 5, 10, 5, 10, 20 -
20m
MR-J3BUS_M-B
9 SSCNET III Cable (Long Distance Cable) _ = cable length 30, 30 -
40, 50m
For CN5
MR-J3USBCBL3M
Cable length 3m
302
MR-J3W-B Type Cables and Connectors Continued (Refer to Chart on Previous Page)
For CN3
11 CN3 Connector (26 Pin) MR-ECN1 S -
MR-TBNATBL_M
13 Junction Terminal Block Cable 05, -
_=cable length: 0.5, 1m
For CN1B
Connector comes with
15 Connector Cap for SSCNET III - -
ampliier standard
For CN4
MR-J3BT1CBL_M
16 Battery Connection Cable 03, 1 -
MR-J3BT2CBL_M
17 Battery Connection Relay Cable (*1) 03, 1 -
Note:
1. Up to 4 units (8 axes) of MR-J3W-_B servo amplifiers are connectable by using this cable.

MR-J3 Motor Cables and Connectors
HF-KP/HF-MP servo motor series: encoder cable length 10m or shorter
For leading the cables out in a direction of the motor shaft
Motor power supply cable 14
To servo amplifier’s CNP3 connector
(MR-J3W-B only) 18 20
29
Encoder cable
3 Battery connection To servo amplifier’s CN2 connector

relay cable
13
Servo motor
For leading the cables out in an opposite direction of the motor shaft
Motor power supply cable 15
29
Encoder cable
4 Battery connection To servo amplifier’s CN2 connector

relay cable
13
Servo motor
HF-KP/HF-MP servo motor series: encoder cable length over 10m

For leading the cables out in a direction of the motor shaft
Motor power supply cable (Wire size 0.75mm2 (AWG19))
16
(*2) (User supplied cable.)
Motor electromagnetic brake cable (Wire size 0.5mm2 (AWG20))

30
5 Encoder cable 7
(*1)
Encoder cable 8 To servo amplifier’s CN2 connector

5 9 Battery connection
relay cable
(*1)
13
10 11 12
Servo motor
For leading the cables out in an opposite direction of the motor shaft
Motor power supply cable (Wire size 0.75mm2 (AWG19))
17
Motor electromagnetic brake cable (Wire size 0.5mm2 (AWG20))
30
6 Encoder cable 7
(*1)
Encoder cable To servo amplifier’s CN2 connector

9 Battery connection
6 relay cable
(*1)
13
10 11 12
Servo motor
HF-SP servo motor series

1 24 25 26
To servo amplifier’s CNP3 connector (for 200V 3.5kW or smaller and 400V 2kW or smaller)
To servo amplifier’s TE1 terminal (for 200V 5kW or 7kW and 400V 3.5kW to 7kW)

2 31
32
(User supplied cable.)
9 Encoder cable
Battery connection
relay cable To servo amplifier’s CN2 connector
10 13
Servo motor 11 12
Notes:
1. This cable does not have a long bending life, so always fix the cable before using.
2. If the length exceeds 10m, relay a cable using MR-PWS2CBL03M-A1-L/-A2-L cable. This cable does not have a long bending life, so always fix the cable before using. Refer to “MR-J3 SERVO AMPLIFIER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL” for details on manufacturing the relay cable.
3. If the length exceeds 10m, relay a cable using MR-BKS2CBL03M-A1-L/-A2-L cable. This cable does not have a long bending life, so always fix the cable before using. Refer to “MR-J3 SERVO AMPLIFIER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL” for details on manufacturing the relay cable.
304
MR-J3 Motor Cables and Connectors (continued)
HF-JP servo motor series 5kW or smaller
Motor power supply connector set
1 24 25
Motor electromagnetic brake connector set
2 31
32
9 Encoder cable
Battery connection
10
13
Servo motor 11 12
HF-JP servo motor series 11kW and 15kW

To servo amplifier’s TE terminal
1 26
2 33
27 9 Encoder cable
Battery connection
10 12 13
Servo motor
HC-LP/HC-RP/HC-UP servo motor series or HA-LP502/702

1 26 28

2 33
(*1)
27 9 Encoder cable
Battery connection
10
13
Servo motor 11 12
Notes:
1. An electromagnetic brake connector set is not required for HC-RP series and 1.5kW or smaller of HC-LP/HC-UP series as the power supply connector has electromagnetic brake terminals.
HA-LP servo motor series (*1)

2
(*2)
27 9 Encoder cable
Battery connection
10 13
Servo motor 11 12
Notes:
1. HA-LP502 and 702 are excluded.
2. Servomotors with an electromagnetic brake are available in 12kW or smaller for HA-LP 1000r/min series, 15kW or smaller for HA-LP 1500r/min series and 11kW to 22kW for HA-LP 2000r/min series.
GSX Exlar actuator series

1 24 25
2 31
32
9 Encoder cable
Battery connection
10 13
11 12

HF-JP servo motor series 7kW and 9kW
1 26
2 31
32
9 Encoder cable
Battery connection
10
13
Servo motor 11 12
MR-J3 Cables and Connectors (Refer to Charts on Previous Page)

Power Cables for HA-LP, HC-LP, HC-RP, HC-UP, HF-SP and HF-JP Series Motors A-, B Safety & T-Type Amplifiers
Cable Number ( _ = Stocked Protection
Item Motor Model Number cable length 2, 5, 10, 15, Description
Lengths Level
20, 25, 30 meter)
HA-LP502 MR-J3HC5S-_M 2, 5, 10, IP65
HA-LP702 MR-J3P7-_M 20, 30
Hard Wired By
HA-LP ALL OTHERS N/A N/A
Customer
HC-LP52 MR-J3HC1S-_M
HC-LP52B MR-J3HC1SB-_M
HC-LP102~152 MR-J3HC2S-_M 2, 5, 10, IP65
HC-LP102B~152B MR-J3HC2SB-_M 20, 30
HC-LP202(B) (*1) MR-J3HC4S-_M
HC-LP302(B) (*1) MR-J3HC5S-_M
HC-RP103~153 MR-J3HC2S-_M
HC-RP103B~153B MR-J3HC2SB-_M
HC-RP203 MR-J3HC3S-_M 2, 5, 10, IP65
HC-RP203B MR-J3HC3SB-_M 20, 30
HC-RP353~503 MR-J3HC5S-_M
HC-RP353B~503B MR-J3HC5SB-_M
HC-UP72 MR-J3HC1S-_M
HC-UP72B MR-J3HC1SB-_M
HC-UP152 MR-J3HC2S-_M 2, 5, 10, IP65
HC-UP152B MR-J3HC2SB-_M 20, 30
Standard-Flex, HC-UP202(B) (*1) MR-J3HC4S-_M
Unshielded Type HC-UP352(B)~502(B) (*1) MR-J3HC5S-_M
1 Cables (Straight
Type Connector HF-SP51, HF-SP51B, HF-SP52, HF-SP52B, HF-SP524,
MR-J3P1-_M
Only) (*2) HF-SP524B, HF-SP1024, HF-SP1024B (*1)
HF-JP53, HF-JP53B, HF-JP534, HF-JP534B, HF-JP73, HF-
MR-J3P1-_M
JP73B, HF-JP734, HF-JP734B, HF-JP1034, HF-JP1034B (*1)
HF-SP81, HF-SP81B, HF-SP102, HF-SF102B, HF-SP152,
HF-SP 152B, HF-SP1524, HF-SP1524B, HF-JP103, HF-
MR-J3P2-_M
JP103B, HF-JP153, HF-JP153B, HF-JP1534, HF-JP1534B,
GSX20, GSX30 (*1)
HF-SP121, HF-SP121B, HF-201, HF-SP201B, HF-SP202,
MR-J3P4-_M
HF-SP202B, HF-SP2024, HF-2024B (*1)
HF-SP502, HF-SP502B, HF-5024, HF-SP502B, 2, 5, 10,
MR-J3P6-_M
GSX40, GSX50 (*1) 20, 30
HF-SP421, HF-SP421B, HF-SP702, HF-SP702B, IP65
HF-SP7024, HF-SP7024B, HF-JP703, HF-JP703B,
MR-J3P7-_M
HF-JP7034, HF-JP7034B, HF-JP9034, HF-JP9034B,
HF-JP11K1M4, HF-JP11K1M4B, GSX60 (*1)
MR-J3P8-_M
HF-JP3534, HF-JP3534B (*1)
HF-SP301, HF-SP301B, HF-SP352, HF-352B, HF-SP3524,
MR-J3P9-_M
HF-SP3524B, HF-JP353, HF-JP353B (*1)
HF-JP503, HF-JP503B (*1) MR-J3P10-_M
HF-JP5034, HF-JP5034B (*1) MR-J3P11-_M
HF-JP903, HF-JP903B, HF-JP11K1M, HF-JP11K1MB,
MR-J3P12-_M
HF-JP15K1M4, HF-JP15K1M4B (*1) -
HF-JP15K1M, HF-JP15K1MB (*1) MR-J3P13-_M
306
Lengths Level
20, 25, 30 meter)
HA-LP502 MR-J3HC5S-SH-_M
- IP65
HA-LP702 MR-J3PWS7-_M
Hard Wired By
HA-LP ALL OTHERS N/A N/A
Customer
HC-LP52 MR-J3HC1S-SH-_M
HC-LP52B MR-J3HC1SB-SH-_M
HC-LP102~152 MR-J3HC2S-SH-_M
- IP65
HC-LP102B~152B MR-J3HC2SB-SH-_M
HC-LP202(B) (*1) MR-J3HC4S-SH-_M
HC-LP302(B) (*1) MR-J3HC5S-SH-_M
HC-RP103~153 MR-J3HC2S-SH-_M
HC-RP103B~153B MR-J3HC2SB-SH-_M
HC-RP203 MR-J3HC3S-SH-_M
- IP65
HC-RP203B MR-J3HC3SB-SH-_M
HC-RP353~503 MR-J3HC5S-SH-_M
HC-RP353B~503B MR-J3HC5SB-SH-_M
HC-UP72 MR-J3HC1S-SH-_M
HC-UP72B MR-J3HC1SB-SH-_M
HC-UP152 MR-J3HC2S-SH-_M
- IP65
HC-UP152B MR-J3HC2SB-SH-_M
HC-UP202(B) (*1) MR-J3HC4S-SH-_M
High-Flex, HC-UP352(B)~502(B) (*1) MR-J3HC5S-SH-_M
Shielded Type
1 Cables (Straight HF-SP51, HF-SP51B, HF-SP52, HF-SP52B, HF-SP524,
Type Connector MR-J3PWS1-_M
HF-SP524B, HF-SP1024, HF-SP1024B (*1)
Only) (*2)
HF-JP53, HF-JP53B, HF-JP534, HF-JP534B, HF-JP73,
MR-J3PWS1-_M
HF-JP73B, HF-JP734, HF-JP734B, HF-JP1034, HF-JP1034B (*1)
HF-SP81, HF-SP81B, HF-SP102, HF-SF102B, HF-SP152,
HF-SP152B, HF-SP1524, HF-SP1524B, HF-JP103, HF-JP103B,
MR-J3PWS2-_M
GSX20, GSX30 (*1)
HF-SP121, HF-SP121B, HF-201, HF-SP201B, HF-SP202,
MR-J3PWS4-_M
HF-SP202B, HF-SP2024, HF-2024B (*1)
HF-SP502, HF-SP502B, HF-5024, HF-SP502B,
MR-J3PWS6-_M
GSX40, GSX50 (*1) 2, 5 10, 15,
HF-SP421, HF-SP421B, HF-SP702, HF-SP702B, HF-SP7024, 20, 30
HF-SP7024B, HF-JP703, HF-JP703B, HF-JP7034, HF-JP7034B, IP67
MR-J3PWS7-_M
HF-JP9034, HF-JP9034B, HF-JP11K1M4, HF-JP11K1M4B,
GSX60 (*1)
HF-JP203, HF-JP203B, HF-JP2034, HF-JP2034B, HF-JP3534,
MR-J3PWS8-_M
HF-JP3534B (*1)
HF-SP301, HF-SP301B, HF-SP352, HF-352B, HF-SP3524,
MR-J3PWS9-_M
HF-SP3524B, HF-JP353, HF-JP353B (*1)
HF-JP503, HF-JP503B (*1) MR-J3PWS10-_M
HF-JP5034, HF-JP5034B (*1) MR-J3PWS11-_M
HF-JP903, HF-JP903B, HF-JP11K1M, HF-JP11K1MB,
MR-J3PWS12-_M
HF-JP15K1M4, HF-JP15K1M4B (*1)
HF-JP15K1M, HF-JP15K1MB (*1) MR-J3PWS13-_M
-
HF-JP15K1M(B) (*1) MR-J3PWS13-_M
Note:
2. Standard-flex cables listed on previous page.
Brake Cables for - A-, B Safety & T-Type Ampliiers

Cable Number ( _ = cable length Protection
Item Motor Model Number Stocked Lengths Description
2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 Meter) Level
HA-LP ALL (B) SIZES
HC-LP202B, 302B
MR-J3HCBKS-_M IP65
Standard-Flex, HC-UP202B, 352B, 502B
Unshielded Type HF-JP11K1M(4)B~HF-JP15K1M(4)B 2, 5, 10, 20, 30
Cables HF-SP(4) ALL (B) SIZES
HF-JP53B~HF-JP9034B MR-J3BK-_M IP67
GSX Actuators
2
HA-LP ALL (B) SIZES
HC-LP202B, 302B
MR-J3HCBKS-SH-_M - IP65
HC-UP202B, 352B, 502B
High-Flex, Shielded HF-JP11K1M(4)B~HF-JP15K1M(4)B
Type Cables
HF-SP(4) ALL (B) SIZES
2, 5, 10, 15,
HF-JP53B~HF-JP9034B MR-J3BRKS1-_M IP67
20, 30
GSX Actuators

MR-J3 Cables and Connectors Continued (Refer to Chart on Previous Page)
Encoder Cables for A-, B Safety and T-Type

Stocked Protection
Item Model Description
Lengths Level
MR-J3ENCBL_M-A1-H
Encoder Cable For HF-MP/HF-KP 2, 5, 10 IP65
_ = cable length 2, 5, 10m (*1)
3 Series Motor Lead Out In Direction
of Motor Shaft MR-J3ENCBL_M-A1-L 2, 5, 10 IP65 Encoder Amplifier
10m or _ = cable length 2, 5, 10m (*1)
Shorter (Direct Side Side
MR-J3ENCBL_M-A2-H
Connection Type) 2, 5, 10 IP65
Encoder Cable For HF-MP/HF-KP _ = cable length 2, 5, 10m (*1)
4 Series Motor Lead Out In Opposite
Direction Of Motor Shaft MR-J3ENCBL_M-A2-L 2, 5, 10 IP65
_ = cable length 2, 5, 10m (*1)
Encoder Junction
MR-J3JCBL03M-A1-L S IP20 Side Connector
Encoder Cable For HF-MP/HF-KP Cable length 0.3m (*1)
5 Series Motor Lead Out In Direction
of Motor Shaft
MR-J3JSCBL03M-A1-L S IP67
Cable length 0.3m (*1, *3)
Encoder Junction
MR-J3JCBL03M-A2-L S IP20 Side Connector
Exceeding 10m Encoder Cable For HF-MP/HF-KP Cable length 0.3m (*1)
6 (Relay Type) Series Motor Lead Out In Opposite
Direction Of Motor Shaft
MR-J3JSCBL03M-A2-L S IP67
Cable length 0.3m (*1, *3)
MR-EKCBL_M-H
_ = cable length 20, 30, 40, 20, 30 IP20
Ampliier-Side Cable For HF-MP/ 50m (*1)
7 Use this in combination of 5 or 6.
HF-KP Series Motor
MR-EKCBL_M-L - IP20
_ = cable length 20, 30m (*1)
Junction Connector, Ampliier-Side Connector (*2)

8 MR-ECNM S IP20
For HF-MP/HF-KP Series Motor
MR-J3ENSCBL_M-H
_ = cable length 2, 5, 10, 20, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30 IP67
Encoder Cable For HF-SP, HC-RP, HC-UP, HC-LP, HA-LP, 30, 40, 50m (*1)
HF-JP53(B)~HF-JP9034(B) Series Motor,
GSX Actuators MR-J3ENSCBL_M-L
_ = cable length 2, 5, 10, 20, 2, 5 IP67
30m (*1)
9
MR-ENECBL_M-H
_= 2, 5, 10, 20, 30, 40, or 50 2, 5, 10 IP67
Encoder Cable for HF-JP11K1M, 15K1M, 11K1M4, (*1)
15K1M4, GSX Actuators MR-ENECBL_M-L
_= 2, 5, 10, 20, 30, 40, or 50 - IP67
(*1)
Encoder Connector Set for HF-SP/HC-LP/HC-RP/

HC-UP/HA-LP Series HF-JP53, 73, 103, 153, 203, 353, MR-J3SCNS S IP67
503, 703, 903534, 734, 1034, 1534, 2034, 3534, 5034, Encoder Side Amplifier Side
10 7034, 9034, GSX Actuators
Encoder Connector Set for HF-JP11K1M, 15K1M,

MR-ENECNS S IP67
11K1M4, 15K1M4, GSX Actuators
90° Encoder Connector Set for HF-SP/HC-LP/HC-RP/
HC-UP/HA-LP Series HF-JP53, 73, 103, 153, 203,
11 MR-J3SCNSA S IP67
353, 503, 703, 903534, 734, 1034, 1534, 2034, 3534,
5034, 7034, 9034, GSX Actuators
12 CN2 or CN2L Connector, GSX Actuators MR-J3CN2 S IP20
MR-J3BTCBL03M
13 Battery Connection Relay Cable, GSX Actuators S -
Cable length 0.3m
Notes:
2. The IP rating indicated is for the connector’s protection against ingress of dust and water when coupled to a servo amplifier/servomotor. If the IP rating of the servo amplifier/servomotor differs from that of these
connectors, overall IP rating depends on the lowest of all.
3. The encoder cable is rated IP65 while the junction connector is rated IP67.
308
Motor Power Supply Cables For CNP3 - A-, B Safety and T-Type
Stocked Protection
Item Model (*1) Description
Lengths Level
Power Supply Cable For HF-MP/ MR-PWS1CBL_M-A1-H 2, 5, 10 IP65
HF-KP Series Motor. Lead Out In (_ = cable length 2, 5, 10m)
Direction of Motor Shaft (Non- MR-PWS1CBL_M-A1-L 2, 5, 10 IP65
14 Shielded) (_ = cable length 2, 5, 10m _
Power Supply Cable For HF-MP/ MR-J3PS_M-A1 Non-shielded
HF-KP Series Motor. Lead Out In (_ = cable length 5, 10m)
5 IP65
10m or Direction of Motor Shaft (Shielded)
Shorter (Direct
Power Supply Cable For HF-MP/ MR-PWS1CBL_M-A2-H Shielded
Connection 2, 5, 10 IP65
Type HF-KP Series Motor. Lead Out In (_ = cable length 2, 5, 10m)
Opposite Direction of Motor Shaft MR-PWS1CBL_M-A2-L 2, 5, 10 IP65
(Non-Shielded) (_ = cable length 2, 5, 10m)
15
Power Supply Cable For HF-MP/
HF-KP Series Motor. Lead Out In MR-J3PS_M-A2
5, 10 IP65
Opposite Direction of Motor Shaft
(Shielded)
HF-KP Series Motor Lead Out In MR-PWS2CBL03M-A1-L S IP55
Direction of Motor Shaft (Non- (Cable length 0.3m)
16 Shielded)
Power Supply Cable For HF-MP/ MR-J3PS03M-A1
HF-KP Series Motor Lead Out In S IP55
(Cable length 0.3m)
Direction of Motor Shaft (Shielded)
Exceeding 10m
(Relay Type) Power Supply Cable For HF-MP/
HF-KP Series Motor Lead Out In MR-PWS2CBL03M-A2-L S IP55
Opposite Direction of Motor Shaft (Cable length 0.3m)
(Non-Shielded)
17
HF-KP Series Motor Lead Out In MR-J3PS03M-A2 S IP55
Opposite Direction of Motor Shaft (Cable length 0.3m)
(Shielded)
Note:
Power Supply Cable for HF-KP/HF-MP Rotary Servomotor Series (Direct Connection Type)
Stocked Protection
Lengths Level
Lead Out in Direction of Motor Shaft SC-EPWS1CBL_M-A1-L
18 - -
Standard Bending Life (_= cable length: 2, 5, 10m)
Lead Out in Opposite Direction of Motor Shaft SC-EPWS1CBL_M-A2-L

19 - -
Lead Out in Direction of Motor Shaft SC-EPWS1CBL_M-A1-H

20 2, 5, 10 -
Long Bending Life (_= cable length: 2, 5, 10m)
Lead out in Opposite Direction of Motor Shaft SC-EPWS1CBL_M-A2-H

21 2, 5, 10 -
Note:
Power Supply Cable for HF-SP/HC-LP/HC-UP Rotary Servomotor Series

Stocked Protection
Lengths Level
SC-EPWS2CBL_M-L
22 Standard Bending Life (_= cable length: 2, 5, 10, 20, - -
30m)
SC-EPWS2CBL_M-H
23 Long Bending Life (_= cable length: 2, 5, 10, 20, 2, 5, 10 -
30m)
Note:
1. A separate motor-side power supply connector (listed below) is required for HF-SP/HC-LP/HC-UP rotary servomotors.
Power Supply Connectors

Stocked Protection
Lengths Level
Power Supply Connector Set for HF-SP51, 81, 52,
102, 152, 524, 1024, 1524, HF-JP53, 73, 103, 153, MR-PWCNS4
24 S IP67
203, 534, 734, 1034, 1534, 2034, 3534, 5034, (straight type only)
GSX20, GSX30
Power Supply Connector Set for HF-SP121, 201, MR-PWCNS5
25 301, 202, 352, 502, 2024, 3524, 5024, HF-JP353, S IP67
503, GSX40, GSX50 (straight type only)
Power Supply Connector Set for HF-SP421, 702, MR-PWCNS3
26 7024, HF-JP703, 903, 7034, 9034, HF-JP11K1M, S IP67
(Straight type only)
15K1M,11K1M4, 15K1M4, HA-LP702, GSX60
Power Supply Connector Set for HC-LP52, 102, 152,

27 MR-PWCNS1 (Straight type) S IP67
HC-RP103, 152, 153, 203
Power Supply Connector Set for HC-LP202, 302,

28 MR-PWCNS2 (Straight type) S IP67
HC-RP353, 503, HC-UP202, 352, 502, HA-LP502

Motor Brake Cables

Item Diagram
(_=cable length in meters) Lengths Level
Lead Out in Direction of (_= 2, 5, or 10) (*1)
Brake Cable for Motor Shaft MR-BKS1CBL_M-A1-L
HF-KP/HF-MP Series - IP65
(_= 2, 5, or 10) (*1)
29 10m or Shorter
MR-BKS1CBL_M-A2-H
(Direct Connection 2, 5, 10 IP65
Lead Out in Opposite Direction (_= 2, 5, or 10) (*1)
Type)
of Motor Shaft MR-BKS1CBL_M-A2-L - IP65
_= 2, 5, or 10 (*1)
Brake Cable for Lead Out in Direction of MR-BKS2CBL03M-A1-L S IP55
HF-KP/HF-MP Series Motor Shaft (cable length 0.3) (*1)
30
Exceeding 10m Lead Out in Opposite Direction MR-BKS2CBL03M-A2-L S IP55
(Relay Type) of Motor Shaft (cable length 0.3) (*1)
Note:
Brake Connector Set

Stocked Protection
Lengths Level (*1)
Brake Connector Set for HF-SP Series,
HF-JP53B, 73B, 103B, 153B, 203B, 353B, 503B, MR-BKCNS1
31 S IP67
534B, 734B, 1034B,1534B, 2034B, 3534B, (straight type only)
5034B, 7034B, 9034B, GSX Actuators
Brake Connector Set for HF-SP Series,
HF-JP53B, 73B, 103B, 153B, 203B,353B, 503B,
32 MR-BKCNS1A (Angled type) S IP67
534B, 734B, 1034B, 1534B, 2034B, 3534B,
5034B, 7034B, 9034B, GSX Actuators
Brake Connector Set for HF-JP11K1MB, 15K1MB,
11K1M4B, 15K1M4B, HC-LP202B, 302B, HC-UP202B,
352B, 502B, HA-LP601B, 801B, 12K1B, 6014B,
33 MR-BKCN S IP65
8014B, 12K14B, 701MB,11K1MB, 15K1MB, 701M4B,
11K1M4B, 15K1M4B, 11K2B, 15K2B, 22K2B, 11K24B,
15K24B, 22K24B
Note:
1. The IP rating indicated is for the connector’s protection against ingress of dust and water when coupled to a servo amplifier/servomotor. If the IP rating of the servo amplifier/servomotor differs from that of these
310
E. Software and Manuals
MR-CONFIGURATOR2 • (MRZJW3-MOTSZ111E)
personal computer.
test mode menus.
Windows Communication Software MR-CONFIGURATOR2 S
Manuals
Hardware Description Model Number Stocked Item
MR-J3-A Instruction Manual SH(NA)030038 MEAU.com
MR-J3-B Safety Instruction Manual SH(NA)030051 MEAU.com
MR-J3-T Instruction Manual SH(NA)030058 MEAU.com
MR-J3-T / MR-J3-D01 Instruction Manual SH(NA)030061 MEAU.com
Servomotor Manual Volume 2 SH(NA)030041 MEAU.com
F. System Options
Extension I/O Unit Manual Pulse Generator
Servo Amplifier Type Model Number Stocked Item Description Servo Amplifier Type Model Number Stocked Item Description
MR-J3-T Only MR-J3-D01 S MR-J3-T Only MR-HDP01 S
20 Pin Terminal Block (*1)

MR-J3-B Safety Only MR-J3-D05 S Servo Amplifier Type Model Number Stocked Item Description
I/O Digital Switch MR-J3-B Safety Only PS7DW-20V14B-F S

Note: 1. MR-TB20 terminal block cannot be used for MR-J3-B Safety.
MR-J3-D01 Only MR-DS60 - Heat Sink Mounting Attachment

MR-J3-11K to 22KA/B
MR-J3ACN -
RS-422 Distributor (For Multidrop) Safety /T Only
MR-J3-A-RJ158 (EtherCAT)
MR-J3-A/B Safety/T BMJ-8 S
MR-J3-A Only MR-J3-T04 S

Battery
Item Number Model Number Description Stocked Item Description
The servomotor’s absolute value can be maintained by installing the battery

Battery MR-J3BAT in the servo amplifier. The battery is not required when the servo system is S
used in an incremental mode.
Use this relay cable to hold the absolute value when shipping the product
with the machine and servo amplifier removed. The servomotor HF series
MR-J3BTCBL03M does
Battery Connection not have a super capacitor (for holding an absolute value for short time) S
Relay Cable in the encoder. When this optional cable is used, the absolute value can be
held even when the encoder cable is disconnected from the servo amplifier,
making it easy to do maintenance on the servo amplifier.
Diagnostic Cable This cable is required when using the amplifier diagnostic function of MR
MR-J3ACHECK S
Only For MR-J3-A Type Configurator (Setup software). CN6 CN1 CN2
Line Noise Filter Radio Noise Filter

MR-J3-200A/B
Safety/T(4) or FR-BSF01 S All 200VAC J3 Models FR-BIF S
Smaller
MR-J3-350A/B Safety/
FR-BLF S All 400VAC J3 Models FR-BIF-H -
T(4) or Larger
Brake/Resistor Units (Must be used in conjunction with each other) External Dynamic Brake
Brake Unit Stocked Resistor Unit Stock Stocked
Servo Amplifier Model Servo Amplifier Type Model Number Description
Model Number Item Model Number Item Item
MR-J3-500A/BS/T to 700A/BS/T FR-BU2-15K S FR-BR-15K-UL S MR-J3-11KA/BS/T DBU-11K -
MR-J3-11KA/BS/T to 15KA/BS/T FR-BU2-30K S FR-BR-30K-UL S MR-J3-15KA/BS/T DBU-15K -
MR-J3-22KA/BS/T DBU-22K -
MR-J3-22KA/BS/T FR-BU2-55K - FR-BR-55K-UL -
MR-J3-11KA4/BS4/T4 DBU-11K-4 -
MR-J3-500 ~ 700A4/BS4/T4 FR-BU2-H15K S FR-BR-H15K-UL S
MR-J3-15K ~ 22KA4/BS4/T4 DBU-22K-4 S
MR-J3-11K ~ 15KA4/BS4/T4 FR-BU2-H30K S FR-BR-H30K-UL S MR-J3-DU30KBS ~ DU37KBS DBU-37K -
MR-J3-22KA4/BS4/T4 FR-BU2-H55K - FR-BR-H55K-UL S MR-J3-DU30KBS4 ~ DU55KBS4 DBU-55K-4 -
Power Regeneration Common Converter/Stand-Alone Reactor Power Regeneration Converter

(Must be used in conjunction with each other). Up to six servo Stocked
Servo Amplifier Type Model Number Description
amplifiers can be connected to one FR-CV, refer to manuals for details. Item
Common Converter Stocked Reactor Model Stock MR-J3-500A/BS/T FR-RC-15K -
Model Number Item Number Item MR-J3-700A/BS/T ~ 15KA/BS/T FR-RC-30K -
MR-J3-350A/B/T FR-CV-7.5K - FR-CVL-7.5K -
MR-J3-22KA/BS/T FR-RC-55K -
MR-J3-500A/B/T FR-CV-11K - FR-CVL-11K -
MR-J3-500A4/BS4/T4 FR-RC-H15K -
MR-J3-700A/B/T FR-CV-15K - FR-CVL-15K -
MR-J3-700 ~ 15KA4/BS4/T4 FR-RC-H30K -
MR-J3-11KA/B/T FR-CV-22K - FR-CVL-22K -
MR-J3-22KA4/BS4/T4 FR-RC-H55K -
FR-CV-30K - FR-CVL-30K -
MR-J3-15KA/B/T
MR-J3-22KA/B/T FR-CV-55K - FR-CVL-55K -
EMC Filter
Stock
Servo Amplifier Type Model Number
Item
MR-J3-100A/BS/T and less MF3F480-010.233MF S
MR-J3-200A/BS/T MF3F480-015.230MF3 S
MR-J3-350A/BS/T MF3F480-025.230MF3 S
MR-J3-500A/BS/T ~ 700A/BS/T MF3F480-050.230MF3 S
MR-J3-11KA/BS/T ~ 22KA/BS/T HF3100A-UN -
MR-J3-DU30 ~ 37KA/BS HF3200A-UN -
MR-J3-100A4/BS4/T4 and less MF3F480-010.233MF S
MR-J3-200A4/BS4/T4 MF3F480-015.230MF3 S
MR-J3-350A4/BS4/T4 MF3F480-015.233MF S
MR-J3-500A4/BS4/T4 ~ 700A4/BS4/T4 MF3F480-025.230MF3 S
MR-J3-11KA4/BS4/T4 ~ 15KA4/BS4/T4 MF3F480-035.230 -
MR-J3-22KA4/BS4/T4 MF3F480-050.230MF3 S
MR-J3-DU30 ~ 55KA4/BS4 TF3150C-TX -
312
200VAC Optional Regeneration Resistors
Standard Resistors Supplied with
Built-in Optional Regeneration Resistors/Tolerable Regenerative Power (W)
Amplifiers
Servo Regenerative
Amplifier Resistor/ GRZG400- MR-RB
Model MR-J3- Tolerable
_ Regenerative 1.5ΩX4 0.8ΩX4 0.9ΩX5 0.6ΩX5 032 12 30 31 32 50 51 5E 5R 9P 9F 137
139
(13Ω) (6.7Ω) (6Ω) (3.2Ω) (4.5Ω) (3Ω)
Power (W) (*2) (*2) (*2) (*2) (40Ω) (40Ω) (13Ω) (6.7Ω) (40Ω) (1.3Ω) (1.3Ω)
(*1) (*1) (*2) (*2) (*2) (*2) (*3)
Stocked Item - - - - S S S - S S S - - - - -
10A(1)/
- - - - - 30 - - - - - - - - - - - -
BS(1)/T(1)
20A(1)/
10 - - - - 30 100 - - - - - - - - - - -
BS(1)/T(1)
40A(1)/
10 - - - - 30 100 - - - - - - - - - - -
BS(1)/T(1)
60A/BS/T 10 - - - - 30 100 - - - - - - - - - - -
70A/BS/T 20 - - - - 30 100 - - 300 - - - - - - - -
100A/BS/T 20 - - - - 30 100 - - 300 - - - - - - - -
200A/BS/T 100 - - - - - - 300 - - 500 - - - - - - -
350A/BS/T 100 - - - - - - 300 - - 500 - - - - - - -
500A/BS/T 130 - - - - - - - 300 - - 500 - - - - - -
700A/BS/T 170 - - - - - - - 300 - - 500 - - - - - -
500 500
11KA/BS/T - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
(800) (800)
500 500
11KA/BS/T-LR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
(800) (800)
850 850
15KA/BS/T - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
(1300) (1300)
850 850
15KA/BS/T-LR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
(1300) (1300)
850 850
22KA/BS/T - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
(1300) (1300)
DU30KA/BS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1300 3900
DU37KA/BS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1300 3900
400VAC Optional Regeneration Resistors

Built-in Standard Resistors Supplied with
Optional Regeneration Resistors/Tolerable Regenerative Power (W)
Regenerative Amplifiers
Servo Amplifier Resistor/ GRZG400- MR-RB
Model MR-J3-_ Tolerable 3M-4 3G-4 34-4 5G-4 54-4 5K-4 6B-4 60-4 6K-4 138-4
Regenerative 5ΩX4 2.5ΩX4 2.5ΩX5 2ΩX5 1H-4 136-4
(120Ω) (47Ω) (26Ω) (47Ω) (26Ω) (10Ω) (20Ω) (12.5Ω) (10Ω) (5Ω)
Power (W) (*2) (*2) (*2) (*2) (82Ω) (5Ω)
(*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*2) (*2) (*2) (*2) (*3)
Stocked Item - - - - - S S S S S S - - - -
60A4/BS4/T4 15 - - - - 100 300 - - - - - - - - - -
100A4/BS4/T4 15 - - - - 100 300 - - - - - - - - - -
200A4/BS4/T4 100 - - - - - - 300 - 500 - - - - - - -
350A4/BS4/T4 100 - - - - - - 300 - 500 - - - - - - -
500A4/BS4/T4 130 (*4) - - - - - - - 300 - 500 - - - - - -
700A4/BS4/T4 170 (*4) - - - - - - - 300 - 500 - - - - - -
500 500
11KA4/BS4/T4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
(800) (800)
11KA4/BS4/ 500 500
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
T4-LR (800) (800)
850 850
15KA4/BS4/T4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
(1300) (1300)
15KA4/BS4/ 850 850
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
T4-LR (1300) (1300)
850 850
22KA4/BS4/T4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
(1300) (1300)
DU30KA4/BS4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1300 3900
DU37KA4/BS4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1300 3900
DU45KA4/BS4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1300 3900
DU55KA4/BS4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1300 3900
Notes:
1. Be sure to install cooling fans.
3. MR-RB137 is three resistance values combined.
4. MR-RB138-4 is three resistance values combined.
Dual Axis Optional Regeneration Resistors

Servo Amplifier Model Optional Regeneration Resistors/Tolerable Regenerative Power (W)
MR-J3-_ MR-RB14 (26Ω) MR-RB34 (26Ω)
MR-J3W-22B
100 -
MR-J3W-44B
MR-J3W-77B - 300

DC Power Improvement Reactor AC Power Factor Improvement Reactor
Servo Amplifier Type Model Number Stock Item Description Servo Amplifier Type Model Number Stock Item Description
MR-J3-10 ~ 20A/B/T DCA000402 - MR-J3-10A1/B1/T1 -
MRL-00204
MR-J3-40A/B/T - MR-J3-10 ~ 20A/B/T -
DCA000902
MR-J3-60 ~ 70A/B/T - MR-J3-20A1/B1/T1 -
MRL-00401
MR-J3-100A/B/T DCA001202 - MR-J3-40A/B/T -
MR-J3-200A/B/T DCA001802 - MR-J3-40A1/B1/T1 -
MRL-00801
MR-J3-350A/B/T DCA003202 - MR-J3-60 ~ 70A/B/T -
MR-J3-500A/B/T DCA005001 - MR-J3-100A/B/T MRL-01201 -
MR-J3-60A4/B4/T4 DCA000402 - MR-J3-200A/B/T MRL-01801 S
MR-J3-100A4/B4/T4 - MR-J3-350A/B/T MRL-03501 -
DCA000903
MR-J3-200A4/B4/T4 - MR-J3-500A/B/T MRL-04501 -
MR-J3-350A4/B4/T4 DCA001803 - MR-J3-700 ~ 11KA/B/T MRL-05501 -
MR-J3-500A4/B4/T4 DCA002503 - MR-J3-15KA/B/T MRL-08001 -
MR-J3-700 ~ 11KA/B/T DCA008002 - MR-J3-22KA/B/T MRL-10001 -
MR-J3-15KA/B/T DCA011003 - MR-J3-60A4/B4/T4
MRL-00402 S
MR-J3-22KA/B/T DCA012502 - MR-J3-100A4/B4/T4
MR-J3-700 ~ 11KA4/B4/T4 DCA003202 - MR-J3-200A4/B4/T4 MRL-00802 S
MR-J3-15KA4/B4/T4 DCA005004 - MR-J3-350A4/B4/T4 MRL-01802 S
MR-J3-22KA4/B4/T4 DCA008005 - MR-J3-500A4/B4/T4 MRL-02502 S
MR-J3-DU30KA/B MR-DCL30K - MR-J3-700 ~ 11KA4/B4/T4 MRL-03502 S
MR-J3-DU37KA/B MR-DCL37K - MR-J3-15KA4/B4/T4 MRL-04502 S
MR-J3-DU30KA4/B4 MR-DCL30K-4 - MR-J3-22KA4/B4/T4 MRL-05502 -
MR-J3-DU37KA4/B4 MR-DCL37K-4 -
MR-J3 Motor Shaft Details and Servomotor Dimensions
HF-KP / HF-MP Series: D-Cut Shaft (50W & 100W Motors Only)
25 (0.98)
21.5 (0.85)
1 (0.039)
20.5 (0.81)
0
ø8h6 (ø0.3150 -0.009 )
Unit: mm (inch)
Keyway With Key Included

R
Q

QK QL U Model (W)
A T S R Q W QK QL U Y
5 14h6 30 27 5 20 3 3 M4 Depth
W
200, 400
HF-KP_K (0.20) (0.554) (1.18) (1.06) (0.20) (0.79) (0.12) (0.12) 15 (0.59)
øS
HF-MP_K 6 19h6 40 37 6 25 5 3.5 M5 Depth

750
A T Y (0.24) (0.7480) (1.57) (1.46) (0.24) (0.98) (0.20) (0.14) 20 (0.79)
Cross Section
A-A
(Unit: mm)
314
HF-SP / HF-JP / HC-LP / HC-RP/ HC-UP / HA-LP Series
R
Q
R
QK QL U
A
r U
øS
W
Q
A
A r Y
øS
W
A-A
A
QK QL
A-A Y
Figure A (Unit: mm) Figure B (Unit: mm)
Keyway With No Key Supplied (Customer must supply key or order key part separately below)
Motor Capacity Variable Dimensions mm (in) Key Key Model

Fig. Stocked Item
Model (kW) S R Q W QK QL U r Y Dimensions Number
24h6 55 50 8-0.036
0 36 5 4+0.2 4 MTR KEY
0.5~1.5 0
8x7x28 S
HF-SP_K (0.9449-0.0005
0
) (2.17) (1.91) (0.315-0.001
0 ) (1.42) (0.20) (0.16+0.008
0 ) (0.16) 8-7-28
HC-LP_K
35h6+0.01 79 75 10-0.036
0
55 5 5+0.2 5 MTR KEY
2.0~7.0 0 0
10x8x45 S
(1.3780+0.0004
0 ) (3.11) (2.95) (0.394-0.001
0
) (2.17) (0.20) (0.20+0.008
0 ) (0.20) 10-8-45
1.0, 1.5, 24h6 45 40 8 0
25 5 4+0.2
4 MTR KEY
-0.036 0
8x7x16 S
2.0 (0.9449-0.0005
0 ) (1.77) (1.57) (0.315-0.001
0
) (0.98) (0.20) (0.16+0.008
0 ) (0.16) 8-7-16
HC-RP_K M8
28h6 63 58 8-0.036
0 53 3 4+0.2 4 Depth 20 MTR KEY
3.5, 5.0 0
8x7x45 S
(1.1024-0.0005
0
) (2.48) (2.28) (0.315-0.001
0 ) (2.09) (0.12) (0.16+0.008
0 ) (0.16) (0.79) 8-7-45
22h6 55 50 6-0.036
0 42 3 3.5+0.1 3 MTR KEY
0.75 0 6x6x36 S
(0.8661-0.0005
0
) (2.17) (1.97) (0.236-0.001
0
) (1.65) (0.12) (0.14+0.008
0 ) (0.12) 6-6-36
HC-UP_K 1.5 28h6 55 50 8-0.036

0 40 3 4+0.2 4 A MTR KEY
0 8x7x36 S
(1.1024-0.0005
0
) (2.17) (1.97) (0.315-0.001
0
) (2.09) (0.12) (0.16+0.008
0 ) (0.16) 8-7-36
2.0, 3.5, 35 +0.1 65 60 10-0.036
0 50 5 5+0.2 5 MTR KEY
0 0 10x8x45 S
5.0 (1.3780+0.0004
0 ) (2.56) (2.36) (0.394-0.001
0
) (1.97) (0.20) (0.20+0.008
0 ) (0.20) 10-8-45
40 30 25 2 2.5
0.5~2.0 16h6 5-0.030
0
3+0.1 M4 - - -
(1.57) (1.18) (0.98) (0.08) 0 (0.10)
28h6 55 50 8 -0.036
0 36 5 4+0.2 4 MTR KEY
3.5, 5 0
8x7x28 S
(1.1024 -0.0005
0
) (2.17) (1.97) (0.315-0.001
0
) (1.42) (0.20) (0.16+0.008
0 ) (0.16) 8-7-28
HF-JP_K M8
35 0
+0.1
79 75 10-0.036
0 55 5 5+0.2 5
7, 9 0
- - -
(1.3780+0.0004
0 ) (3.11) (2.95) (0.394-0.001
0
) (2.17) (0.20) (0.20+0.008
0 ) (0.20)
55M6 116 110 16-0.04

0 90 5 6 +0.2 8
11, 15 0
M10 - - -
(2.1654+0.0012
-0.0006 ) (4.57) (4.33) (0.63 -0.002 )
0
(3.54) (0.20) (0.24 +0.008
0 ) (0.31)
Keyway With No Key Supplied (Customer must supply key)
Motor Model Variable Dimensions mm (in)

Fig. Key Model Number
(HA-LP_K) S R Q W QK QL U r Y
601, 6014, 701M, 701M4, 42h6 85 80 12-0.04

0 70 5 5+0.2
0 6
502, 702, 11K2, 11K24 (1.6535-0.0006
0
) (3.35) (3.15) (0.47-0.002
0
) (2.76) (0.20) (0.2+0.008
0 ) (0.24)
801, 12K1, 8014, 12K14, A

11K1M, 15K1M, 11K1M4, 55m6 110 100 16-0.04
0 90 5 6+0.2
0 8
15K1M4, 15K2, 22K2, (2.1654+0.0012
-0.0006) (4.33) (3.94) (0.63-0.002
0
) (3.54) (0.20) (0.24+0.008
0 ) (0.31)
15K24, 22K24 Same as
15K1, 20K1, 15K14, Standard (N/A) Key to
60m6 140 140 18-0.04 128 6 9 motor’s be supplied by
20K14, 22K1M, 30K1M, 0
7+0.2
0
(2.3622+0.0012 straight customer.
22K1M4, 30K1M4, 30K2, -0.0006) (5.51) (5.51) (0.71-0.002 ) (5.04) (0.24) (0.28+0.008 ) (0.35)
0
37K2, 30K24, 37K24

0
shaft.
25K1, 30K1, 25K14, B
65m6 140 140 18-0.04
0 128 6 7+0.2 9
30K14, 37K1M, 37K1M4, 0
(2.5591+0.0012
-0.0006) (5.51) (5.51) (0.71-0.002
0
) (5.04) (0.24) (0.28+0.008 ) (0.35)
45K1M4, 45K24, 55K24 0
80m6 170 170 22-0.04

0 147 11 9+0.2 11
37K1, 37K14, 50K1M4 0
(3.1496-0.0006
0
) (6.69) (6.69) (0.87-0.002
0
) (5.79) (0.43) (0.35+0.008
0 ) (0.43)
Note: Not all key sizes are available to order from MEAU. If a key part is not listed, customer must supply.

HF-KP / HF-MP Series
HF-KP053(B), HF-KP13(B) (Unit: mm)
HF-MP053(B), HF-MP13(B)
2-ø4.5 pin assignment
L 25 mounting hole M 40
Use hexagonal Pin No. Signal name
20.5 20.7
5 2.5
cap head bolts. 45° 1
21.5 2 1 Earth
1
2 U
2
3
3
3 V
20.7
4
ø4 4
6 4 W
ø30h7
Brake connector
38.8 (Note 3)
21
1 pin assignment (Note 3)
37.1
36
Pin No. Signal name
ø8h6
1
2 1 B1
2
2 B2
Encoder 10.1
connector 9.5
4.9 11.7 11.7 18.4 19.2 Power supply connector 13.9 6.4
13.7
27.4 21.5 (Note 3) KL 27.5
58.3 (Note 3)
Brake <When the cables are led out in opposite direction of motor shaft>
connector Variable dimensions
(Note 3) Model
L KL
HF-KP053(B) 66.4
24.5
HF-MP053(B) (107.5)
7°
1 2
9°
HF-KP13(B) 82.4
13°
Encoder
connector Power supply 40.5
9.5 connector HF-MP13(B) (123.5)
11.7 11.7
58.3
(Note 3) 21.5 (Note 3) 18.4 Brake connector (Note 3)
(Note 3)
HF-KP23(B), HF-KP43(B) (Unit: mm)

HF-MP23(B), HF-MP43(B) Power supply connector
pin assignment
4-ø5.8
mounting hole M 60 Pin No. Signal name
L 30 1
Use hexagonal ° 1 Earth
7 3
cap head bolts. 45 2
1
2 U
2
3
3
3 V
4
4
ø7 4 W
0
ø50h7
Brake connector
47.1 (Note 3)
ø14h6
pin assignment (Note 3)

1
47.1
Pin No. Signal name
1
2 1 B1
2
2 B2
13.7 10 Encoder 10.1 9.5
connector 11.8 11.7 19.2 13.9
28.4 5.9
21.5 KL 27.8
Power supply
57.8 (Note 3) connector <When the cables are led out in opposite direction of motor shaft>
Variable dimensions
Brake Model
connector (Note 3)
L KL
HF-KP23(B) 76.6
39.3
HF-MP23(B) (116.1)
13.5°
7°
9°
HF-KP43(B) 98.5
61.2
18.3 9.5 HF-MP43(B) (138)
(Note 3) 11.8 11.7 Power supply connector
Encoder (Note 3)
connector 57.8
21.5 (Note 3) Brake connector (Note 3)
HF-KP73(B) (Unit: mm)

HF-MP73(B) 4-ø6.6
pin assignment
113.8 (157) 40 M 80 mounting hole
8 3 45° Use hexagonal 1
Pin No. Signal name
cap head bolts. 1 Earth
2
1
2 U
2
3
3
ø9 3 V
4
0 4
4 W
ø70h7
Brake connector
pin assignment (Note 3)
57.1
56

ø19h6
1 B1
1
Encoder 9.5 14 12 2 2 B2
2
13.7 11.5 connector

11.7 19.2
11.8 27.8
27.4 21.4 72.3
65.5 (Note 3) Power supply connector <When the cables are led out in opposite direction of motor shaft>
Brake connector (Note 3)
7°
7°
Encoder
connector
9.5
11.7 18.4
7°
11.8
21.4 (Note 3) Power supply connector
(Note 3) Brake connector (Note 3)
65.5 (Note 3)
Notes:
3. Only for the models with an electromagnetic brake. The electromagnetic brake terminals (B1, B2) do not have the polarity.
5. Dimensions for motors with an oil seal (HF-MP_J and HF-KP_J) are different from the above. Contact Mitsubishi for details.
316
HF-SP Series
HF-SP51(B), HF-SP81(B) (Unit: mm)
HF-SP52(B) to HF-SP152(B), HF-SP524(B) to HF-SP152(B)
L 55 M 130
50 4-ø9 mounting hole
38.2 (43.5) 45° Use hexagonal
12 3
cap head bolts.
(Note 3)
(Note 3)
ø24h6
54
ø1
ø110h7
(Note 3) (Note 3)
ø1
(Note 3)
79.9 (Note 3)
65
50.9
112.5
13
Encoder connector 59 (Note 3)

(Note 3) (Note 3)
CM10-R10P
Brake connector
20.9 13.5 29 (Note 3)
CM10-R2P (Note 3)
KL 58
MS3102A18-10P Model Variable dimensions
1000r/min 2000r/min L KL
W Earth
118.5
— HF-SP52(4)(B) 57.8
(153)
(Note 3)
Brake V U 140.5
HF-SP51(B) HF-SP102(4)(B) 79.8
(175)
162.5
Motor flange direction Motor flange direction HF-SP81(B) HF-SP152(4)(B) 101.8
(197)
HF-SP121(B) to HF-SP421(B) (Unit: mm)

HF-SP202(B) to HF-SP702(B), HF-SP2024(B) to HF-SP7024(B) HF-MP73(B)
L 79 M 176
4-ø13.5 mounting hole
38.5 75 Use hexagonal
(45.5) 18 3 45 cap head bolts.
°
4
+0.010
(Note 3)
4
0
2
ø35
2 0
ø2 ø20
-0.025
30
0
ø114.3
96.9 (Note 3)
50.9
(Note 3) (Note 3)
1 1
3
KB
13 3
(Note 3) 66.5 (Note 3)

Encoder connector (Note 3)
CM10-R10P
Brake connector KA 82
44
(Note 3) CM10-R2P (Note 3) KL
Model Variable dimensions
MS3102A22-22P (for 3.5kW or smaller and 5kW) 1000r/min 2000r/min L KL KA KB
MS3102A32-17P (for 4.2kW and 7kW) 143.5
W Earth HF-SP121(B) HF-SP202(4)(B) 79.8
(193)
(Note 3) 183.5
1, 2, 3 and 4 are screw holes for hanging bolt. HF-SP201(B) HF-SP352(4)(B) 119.8 24.8 140.9
Brake V U (233)
•For HF-SP201(B), HF-SP301(B), HF-SP352(4)(B),
HF-SP502 (4)(B): 3, 4
Brake connector Power supply connector 203.5
•For HF-SP421(B), HF-SP702(4)(B): 1, 2, 3, 4
pin assignment pin assignment HF-SP301(B) HF-SP502(4)(B) 139.8
(253)
Motor flange direction Motor flange direction
Notes: HF-SP421(B) HF-SP702(4)(B)
263.5
191.8 32 149.1
1. Use a friction coupling to fasten a load. (313)
3. Only for the models with an electromagnetic brake. The electromagnetic brake terminals do not have the polarity.
HF-JP Series
HF-JP53(B), HF-JP73(B), HF-JP103(B), HF-JP153(B), HF-JP203(B)

HF-JP534(B), HF-JP734(B), HF-JP1034(B), HF-JP1534(B), HF-JP2034(B)
(Unit: mm)
HF-JP353(B), HF-JP503(B)
Notes:
HF-JP3534(B), HF-JP5034(B)
318
HF-JP703 (B), HF-JP903 (B), HF-JP7034 (B), HF-JP9034 (B)
L 79 Use hexagonal cap head bolts. Variable Dimensions
38.5
M 176
Model
(45.5) 18 3 45° L KL
75
HF-JP703(B)
(*3) (Note 3)
*4 263.5 (313) 285.4
4 HF-JP7034(B)
ø35 +0.01
2 *2
0
HF-JP903(B)
ø114.3 –0.025
303.5 (353) 325.4
0
HF-JP9034(B)
0
50.9
(Note 3) (*3) ø20
(Note 3) Oil seal <Electromagnetic brake static friction torque>
96.9
1 *1
133.5 13
3 Model Brake static friction torque (N·m [oz·in])
163.3
*3
HF-JP703(4) B
44 (6230)
ø2
66.5
30
HF-JP903(4) B
(Note 3) Note: For detailed specification of the
44 28.5
Encoder connector
92.1 44
electromagnetic brake, refer to
CM10-R10P
(*3) Brake connector (*3)
MELSERVO-J3 catalog
KL 102.3
CM10-R2P (L(NA)03017-G).
V W
Power supply connector Main key
MS3102A32-17P position mark
B
Notes: 1. Use a friction coupling to fasten a load.
C
A D 2. Dimensions inside ( ) are for the models with an electromagnetic brake.
*1, *2, *3 and *4 are Brake 3. Only for the models with an electromagnetic brake. The electromagnetic
screw holes (M8) for (Note 3) U Key Earth
brake terminals do not have polarity.
eyebolt. Brake connector Power supply connector
pin assignment pin assignment 4. For dimensions where there is no tolerance listed, use general tolerance.
Motor flange direction (View from front of the connector) 5. For shaft end key way, and optional cables and connectors, refer to
MELSERVO-J3 catalog (L(NA)03017-G).
HF-JP11K1M(B), HF-JP15K1M(B), HF-JP11K1M4(B), HF-JP15K1M4(B)
Notes: 1. Use a friction coupling to fasten a load.

HC-LP Series
HC-LP52(B) to HC-LP152(B) (Unit: mm)
L 55 M 130 4-ø9 mounting hole
Use hexagonal
12 3 45° cap head bolts.
38 50
(Note 3) (Note 3)
ø24h6
ø110h7
(Note 3) (Note 3)
ø1
(Note 3) 45 65
ø1
50.9
Oil seal
S30457B
111
13
Encoder connector (Note 3)

CM10-R10P
Brake Variable dimensions
KL 44 Model
Earth L KL
Power supply connector E F
U 144
CE05-2A22-23P HC-LP52(B) 77
D H G (177)
C
B A
V 164
W HC-LP102(B) 97
(197)
pin assignment 191.5
HC-LP152(B) 124.5
Motor flange direction (224.5)

(Unit: mm)
HC-LP202(B), HC-LP302(B)
L 79 M 176
18 3 Use hexagonal
45° cap head bolts.
38 75
(Note 3) (Note 3)
ø2
30 00
ø35 +0.010
ø2
-0.025
0
ø114.3
50.9
(Note 3) (Note 3)
117 (Note 3) (Note 3) Oil seal
1 S40608B
1
2
142
13 2
(Note 3)
67.5
Encoder connector (Note 3) KL
CM10-R10P 46 Variable dimensions
Brake Earth U Model
Brake connector E F L KL
MS3102A10SL-4P (Note 3) Power supply connector (Note 3) A DG
B C A 198.5
CE05-2A24-10P
W
B
V HC-LP202(B) 123.5
(246.5)
pin assignment pin assignment 248.5
1 and 2 are screw holes (M8) for hanging bolt. Only for HC-LP302(B). HC-LP302(B) 173.5
Motor flange direction Motor flange direction (296.5)
Notes:
HC-RP Series
HC-RP103(B) to HC-RP203(B) (Unit: mm)
4-ø9 mounting hole
M 100 Use hexagonal
L 45 45° cap head bolts.
10 3
38 40
(Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3)

ø95h7
ø24h6
ø1
15 35
ø1
50.9
(Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) Oil seal

S30457B
96
(Note 3)
13 Brake
Earth
E F
D
H G
U
C A
KL B 44 Variable dimensions
V Model
Encoder connector Power supply connector W L KL
CM10-R10P CE05-2A22-23P
Power supply connector 145.5
pin assignment HC-RP103(B) 69.5
Motor flange direction (183.5)
170.5
HC-RP153(B) 94.5
(208.5)
195.5
HC-RP203(B) 119.5
(233.5)
HC-RP353(B), HC-RP503(B) 4-ø9 mounting hole

(Unit: mm)
Use hexagonal
L 63 M 130 cap head bolts.
12 3 45°
38 58
(Note 3)
ø28h6
ø110h7
(Note 3) (Note 3)
ø1
(Note 3) 45 65
ø1
50.9
Oil seal
S30457B
120
13
(Note 3)
Encoder connector Brake
CM10-R10P
Earth U
KL 46
Power supply connector E F Variable dimensions
D Model
CE05-2A24-10P C G A
B L KL
W V
215.5
HC-RP353(B) 148
Power supply connector (252.5)
pin assignment
Notes: Motor flange direction 272.5
HC-RP503(B) 205
1. Use a friction coupling to fasten a load. (309.5)
320
HC-UP Series
HC-UP72(B), HC-UP152(B) (Unit: mm)
L 55 M 176
13 3 Use hexagonal
40° 45° cap head bolts.
38 50
2-M6 screw
ø2
(Note 3)
15
(Note 3) ø2 00
30 ø2
øSh6
ø114.3 –0.025
0
(Note 3)
50.9
(Note 3) (Note 3)
Oil seal
S30457B
13
144
Encoder connector
CM10-R10P
(Note 3)
Brake 44
KL Earth Variable dimensions
E F
Model
Power supply connector D H G U L KL S
C
CE05-2A22-23P B A 109
W V HC-UP72(B) 38 22
(142.5)
pin assignment 118.5
HC-UP152(B) 47.5 28
Motor flange direction (152)
HC-UP202(B) to HC-UP502(B) (Unit: mm)
L 65 M 220 4-ø13.5 mounting hole

16 4 ° Use hexagonal
37.5 45° cap head bolts.
38 60 2-M8 screw
(Note 3)
ø2
(Note 3)
50
ø35 +0.010
35
0
ø27
0 ø2
ø200h7
(Note 3) (Note 3)
50.9
(Note 3)
Oil seal
139 (Note 3)
S40608B
13
165
(Note 3)
(Note 3) Encoder connector 53.5
CM10-R10P (Note 3)
42 Brake connector KL (Note 3) Earth 47 Variable dimensions

MS3102A10SL-4P (Note 3) Brake U Model
E F L KL
Power supply connector A D
B CG A 116.5
CE05-2A24-10P B
V HC-UP202(B) 42.5
W (159.5)
pin assignment pin assignment 140.5
HC-UP352(B) 66.5
Notes: Motor flange direction Motor flange direction (183.5)
1. Use a friction coupling to fasten a load. 164.5
90.5
HC-UP502(B)
2. Dimensions inside ( ) are for the models with an electromagnetic brake. (207.5)
HA-LP Series
HA-LP502 (Unit: mm)
CE05-2A24-10P
298 85 M 200 4-ø14.5 mounting hole

225 60 Use hexagonal
Encoder connector cap head bolts.
CM10-R10P 20 3
45°
13 Hanging bolt 80
Earth U
146
134
E F
D
15
CG A
ø2
B V
W
50.9

ø180h7
ø42h6
pin assignment
Motor flange direction
ø2
50
19.8 5.2
M8 screw
Oil seal
S50689B
Notes:
2. For dimensions where there is no tolerance listed, use general tolerance

HA-LP702
(Unit: mm)
CE05-2A32-17P
340 85 M 200 4-ø14.5 mounting hole

267 60 Use hexagonal
Encoder connector cap head bolts.
CM10-R10P 20 3 45°
13 80
Hanging bolt
W Earth
C D
146
146
15
B A
ø2
V U
50.9
ø180h7
ø42h6
pin assignment
ø2 Motor flange direction
50
19.8 5.2
M8 screw
Notes: Oil seal

1. Use a friction coupling to fasten a load. S50689B
2. For dimensions where there is no tolerance listed, use general tolerance
HA-LP601(B), HA-LP6014(B) (Unit: mm)

HA-LP701M(B), HA-LP701M4(B)
HA-LP11K2(B), HA-LP11K24(B) Encoder connector Brake connector Hanger screw hole
CM10-R10P MS3102A10SL-4P (Note 4) Bolt: M10 20 (Note 4)
6 206 6 480 (550) 85 M 200

146 12 426 (498) 4-ø14.5
262 (334) mounting hole
45° Use hexagonal cap
3-hanger*1 93 (Note 4) 55 head bolts.
20 3
Exhaust air
ø44 hole
(Note 4)
(Note 6)
(Note 4)
(Note 4)
171
80
ø42h6
102
Cooling fan ø215
ø180h7
rotating direction
Suction air 19.8 5.2

ø2
50
(Note 5)
M8 screw
Brake
1
30
(Note 4) Oil seal

A
B S50689B (standard)
S45629B (with electromagnetic brake)
Notes:
1. When using the motor without the hanger, plug the threaded hole with a bolt of M10 X 20 or shorter. Brake connector
2. The terminal block on the terminal box housing consists of M6 screws for the motor power supply pin assignment
(U, V, W), and M4 screws for the cooling fan (BU, BV) and for the thermal protector (OHS1, OHS2). Motor flange direction
HA-LP801(B), HA-LP12K1(B), HA-LP8014(B) (*7), HA-LP12K14(B) (Unit: mm)

HA-LP11K1M(B), HA-LP15K1M(B), HA-LP11K1M4(B) (*7), HA-LP15K1M4(B)
HA-LP15K2(B), HA-LP22K2(B), HA-LP15K24(B), HA-LP22K24(B)
Encoder connector Brake connector
CM10-R10P MS3102A10SL-4P (Note 4)
6 250 6 L 110 M 250
4-ø14.5
180 12 KL mounting hole
LT Use hexagonal cap
45° head bolts.
3-hanger *1 111.5
(Note 4)
25 5
ø44 hole
(Note 6)
Exhaust air
(Note 4)
205
Hanger screw hole

Bolt: M12 22 (Note 4)
ø55m6
100
145
Cooling fan
ø265
60
rotating direction
ø230h7
Suction air
60
20.4 6.6
(Note 5) ø3
M10 screw 00
6
37
Oil seal
S709513B (standard) Hanger screw hole
S60829B (with electromagnetic brake) Bolt: M12 22 (Note 4)
Brake
Model Variable dimensions (Note 4) Notes:
1000r/min 1500r/min 2000r/min L KL LT A 1. When using the motor without the hanger, plug the threaded hole
B
HA-LP801(B) HA-LP11K1M(B) HA-LP15K2(B) with a bolt of M12 X 20 or shorter.
HA-LP8014(B) HA-LP11K1M4(B) HA-LP15K24(B)
495 (610) 449 (560) 286 (397) 2. The terminal block on the terminal box housing consists of M8
Brake connector screws for the motor power supply (U, V, W), and M4 screws
HA-LP12K1(B) HA-LP15K1M(B) HA-LP22K2(B) pin assignment for the cooling fan (BU, BV, BW) and for the thermal protector
555 (670) 509 (620) 346 (457)
HA-LP12K14(B) HA-LP15K1M4(B) HA-LP22K24(B) Motor flange direction
(OHS1, OHS2).
Notes:
5. Leave a clearance of at least 100mm between the motor’s suction side and wall.
6. Make sure that oil, water and dust, etc., will not enter the motor from the lead-in hole.
7. Contact your dealer for the delivery schedule or the compatible servo amplifier’s software version.
322
HA-LP15K1, HA-LP20K1, HA-LP15K14, HA-LP20K14 (*7) (Unit: mm)
HA-LP22K1M, HA-LP22K1M4 (*7), HA-LP30K1M4
HA-LP30K24, HA-LP37K24
Encoder connector
CM10-R10P
6 286 6 L 140
128 KL 4-ø19
220 12 M 280 mounting hole
LT Use hexagonal cap
ø51 hole 45° head bolts.
1-hanger 25 5
(Note 5)
(Note 4)
Exhaust air
230
ø60m6
152
ø3
179
Cooling fan 140 50 00
rotating direction ø3
ø250h7
Suction air
25 8
160 -0.5
0
(Note 3)
M12 screw
20
Oil seal
S659013B 55
FA FA 108 127 127
FB 4-ø15 mounting hole 310

* The terminal block on the terminal box housing consists of M8 screws
for the motor power supply (U, V, W), and M4 screws for the cooling 1000r/min 1500r/min 2000r/min L KL LT FA FB
fan (BU, BV, BW) and for the thermal protector (OHS1, OHS2). HA-LP15K1 HA-LP22K1M
HA-LP30K24 605 426 386 105 260
HA-LP15K14 HA-LP22K1M4
HA-LP20K1
HA-LP30K1M4 HA-LP37K24 650 471 431 127 304
HA-LP20K14
HA-LP25K1, HA-LP30K1, HA-LP25K14, HA-LP30K14 (Unit: mm)

HA-LP37K1M, HA-LP37K1M4, HA-LP45K1M4
Encoder connector
CM10-R10P
6 352 6 L 140 M 350
4-ø19
266 12 138 KL mounting hole
Use hexagonal cap
LT head bolts.
ø63 hole 45°
(Note 5) 1-hanger 25 5
(Note 4)
Exhaust air
280
ø65m6
184
216
Cooling fan 140 ø4

rotating direction 00 0
ø35
ø300h7
Suction air
30 9
180 -0.5
0
(Note 3)
M16 screw
22
Oil seal 70
FA FA 121 S709513B
139.5 139.5
* The terminal block on the terminal box housing consists of M10 Model Variable dimensions
screws for the motor power supply (U, V, W), and M4 screws for the 1000r/min 1500r/min 2000r/min L LT KL FA FB
cooling fan (BU, BV, BW) and for the thermal protector (OHS1, OHS2).
HA-LP25K1 HA-LP37K1M
HA-LP45K24 640 399 439 101.5 262
HA-LP25K14 HA-LP37K1M4
HA-LP30K1
HA-LP45K1M4 HA-LP55K24 685 444 484 120.5 300
HA-LP30K14
Notes:
3. Leave a clearance of at least 150mm between the motor's suction side and wall.
4. When using the motor without the hanger, plug the threaded hole with a bolt of M16 X 20 or shorter.
6. When mounting the motor with the shaft horizontal, fix the motor either with the feet or the flange, keeping the feet downward. Note that when fixing the motor with the flange, also fix the feet to support the motor.
7. Contact your dealer for the delivery schedule or the compatible servo amplifier’s software version.

HA-LP30K1M (Unit: mm)
Encoder connector
CM10-R10P
6 286 6 L 140
4-ø19
266 12 138 KL M 280 mounting hole
ø63 hole LT Use hexagonal cap
45° head bolts.
(Note 4)
Exhaust air
260
ø60m6
160
ø3
192
Cooling fan 140 50 00
rotating direction ø3
ø250h7
Suction air
25 8
160 -0.5
0
(Note 3)
20
M12 screw
Oil seal 55
FA FA 108 S659013B 127 127

* The terminal block on the terminal box housing consists of M10 screws for the motor power supply (U, V, W),
and M4 screws for the cooling fan (BU, BV, BW) and for the thermal protector (OHS1, OHS2). 1500r/min 2000r/min L LT KL FA FB
– HA-LP30K2 615 381 421 105 260
HA-LP30K1M HA-LP37K2 660 426 466 127 304
HA-LP50K1M4 (Unit: mm)
Encoder connector
CM10-R10P
6 352 6 785 170 M 350 4-ø19
266 12 mounting hole
138 584 Use hexagonal cap
ø63 hole 544 head bolts.
45°
(Note 4)
Exhaust air
280
ø80m6
184
216
Cooling fan 170

rotating direction 0
ø35
ø300h7
ø4
Suction air 00
180 -0.5
30 9
0
(Note 3) M16 screw
25
Oil seal
S8511013B 70
178 178 121 139.5 139.5
* The terminal block on the terminal box housing consists of M10 screws for the
412 4-ø24 mounting hole 349
motor power supply (U, V, W), and M4 screws for the cooling fan (BU, BV, BW)
and for the thermal protector (OHS1, OHS2).
Notes:
3. Leave a clearance of at least 150mm between the motor's suction side and wall.
4. When using the motor without the hanger, plug the threaded hole with a bolt of M16 X 20 or shorter.
6. When mounting the motor with the shaft horizontal, fix the motor either with the feet or the flange, keeping the feet downward. Note that when fixing the motor with the flange, also fix the feet to support the motor.
324
MR-J3 Linear Servomotors and Amplifiers
MR Configurator Personal
(Servo computer
configuration E
CN5
Servo amplifier
CN3 Junction terminal F

block
Servo system
CN1A
D
CN1A or Cap
CN2
CN2L Encoder cable
D
Thermistor
Linear servo motor B Note:

Please consult product marketing
for all linear ampliier and motor
opportunities.
Linear encoder
A. MR-J3 Linear Amplifiers ............................................................................................................326

B. MR-J3 Linear Servomotors ........................................................................................................328
C. Linear Encoder ...........................................................................................................................334
D. MR-J3-Linear Cables and Connectors .......................................................................................335
E. Software and Manuals ................................................................................................................337
F. Optional Accessories ...................................................................................................................337

A. MR-J3 Linear Amplifiers
Amplifier Selection (*1)
Compatible Motors
MR-J3 B RJ004 U 500, 501, 502, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509, 510, 511,
512, 513, 514, 515, 516, 517, 518, 519, 520, 521, 522, 523,
524, 525, 526, 527, 528, 529, 530, 531, 532, 533
Refer to table below for proper motor-amp pairing.
Compatible with Linear Servo Motor
Mitsubishi General Symbol Power Supply

Purpose AC Servo
Amplifier None 3-phase 200VAC
4 3-phase 400VAC
SSCNET III Interface
Servo Amplifier Model Note:

Please consult product marketing for all linear
20, 40, 60, 70, 200, 350, 500, 700, 11K, 15K, 22K (*1)
ampliier and motor opportunities.
Note 1: Only 22K is compatible with 3-phase 400VAC.
Combination of Linear Servomotor and Servo Amplifier

Linear Servomotor
Stocked Servo Amplifier
Primary Side (Coil) Secondary Side (Magnet)
Item
LM-H2P1A-06M-4SS0 - LM-H2S10-288-4SS0, LM-H2S10-384-4SS0, LM-H2S10-480-4SS0, LM-H2S10-768-4SS0 MR-J340BRJ004U500
LM-H2P2A-12M-1SS0 - MR-J340BRJ004U501
LM-H2P2B-24M-1SS0 - MR-J370BRJ004U502
LM-H2S20-288-1SS0, LM-H2S20-384-1SS0, LM-H2S20-480-1SS0, LM-H2S20-768-1SS0
LM-H2 Series
LM-H2P2C-36M-1SS0 - MR-J3200BRJ004U503
LM-H2P2D-48M-1SS0 - MR-J3200BRJ004U504
LM-H2P3A-24M-1SS0 - MR-J370BRJ004U505
LM-H2P3B-48M-1SS0 - MR-J3200BRJ004U506
LM-H2S30-288-1SS0, LM-H2S30-384-1SS0, LM-H2S30-480-1SS0, LM-H2S30-768-1SS0
LM-H2P3C-72M-1SS0 - MR-J3350BRJ004U507
LM-H2P3D-96M-1SS0 - MR-J3500BRJ004U508
MR-J3200BRJ004U518 (for self-cooling)
LM-FP2B-06M-1SS0 -
MR-J3200BRJ004U519 (for liquid-cooling)
LM-FS20-480-1SS0, LM-FS20-576-1SS0 MR-J3500BRJ004U520 (for self-cooling)

LM-FP2D-12M-1SS0 -
LM-FP2F-18M-1SS0 -
LM-F Series
LM-FP4B-12M-1SS0 -
MR-J3700BRJ004U526 (for self-cooling
LM-FP4D-24M-1SS0 -
LM-FS40-480-1SS0, LM-FS40-576-1SS0
MR-J311KBRJ004U528 (for self-cooling)
LM-FP4F-36M-1SS0 -
MR-J311KBRJ004U529 (for liquid-cooling)
MR-J315KBRJ004U530 (for self-cooling)
LM-FP4H-48M-1SS0 -
MR-J315KBRJ004U531 (for liquid-cooling)
MRJ322KB4RJ004U532 (for self-cooling) (*1)
LM-FP5H-60M-1SS0 - LM-FS50-480-1SS0, LM-FS50-576-1SS0
MRJ322KB4RJ004U533 (for liquid-cooling) (*1)
LM-U2PAB-05M-0SS0 - MR-J320BRJ004U512
LM-U2PAD-10M-0SS0 - LM-U2SA0-240-0SS0, LM-U2SA0-300-0SS0, LM-U2SA0-420-0SS0 MR-J340BRJ004U513
LM-U2PAF-15M-0SS0 - MR-J340BRJ004U514
LM-U2 Series
LM-U2PBB-07M-1SS0 - MR-J320BRJ004U515
LM-U2PBD-15M-1SS0 - LM-U2SB0-240-1SS0, LM-U2SB0-300-1SS0, LM-U2SB0-420-1SS0 MR-J360BRJ004U516
LM-U2PBF-22M-1SS0 - MR-J370BRJ004U517
LM-U2P2B-40M-2SS0 - MR-J3200BRJ004U509
LM-U2P2C-60M-2SS0 - LM-U2S20-300-2SS0, LM-U2S20-480-2SS0 MR-J3350BRJ004U510
LM-U2P2D-80M-2SS0 - MR-J3500BRJ004U511
Note 1: Servo amplifiers MR-J3-22KB4-RJ004U_, are rated 400VAC. 200VAC class is not available.
326
Amplifier Specifications
Servo Amplifier Model 20B- 40B- 60B- 70B- 200B- 350B- 500B- 700B- 11KB- 15KB- 22KB4-
MR-J3-_-RJ004U_ RJ004U_ RJ004U_ RJ004U_ RJ004U_ RJ004U_ RJ004U_ RJ004U_ RJ004U_ RJ004U_ RJ004U_ RJ004U_
3-phase 380
3-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz or
Voltage/Frequency (*1) 3-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz to 480VAC
1-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz 50/650/60Hz
Main Circuit For 3-phase 200 to 230VAC: 3-phase 170 to
Power Permissible Voltage 3-phase 323
253VAC For 1-phase 200 to 230VAC: 1-phase 170 3-phase 170 to 253VAC
Supply Fluctuation to 528VAC
to 253VAC
±5% maximum
Fluctuation
1-phase 380
Voltage/Frequency 1-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz to 480VAC
50/60Hz
Control Permissible Voltage 1-phase 323
Circuit Power Fluctuation to 528VAC
Supply Permissible Frequency
±5% maximum
Fluctuation
Serial Interface Mitsubishi high-speed serial communication
Linear
Pulse Input Signal ABZ phase differential input signal
Encoder
Interface Train Minimum Phase
Interface Difference 200ns
Regenerative Built-In Regenerative

Resistor / 10 10 10 20 100 100 130 170 - - -
Resistor
Tolerable
Regenerative External Regenerative 500 850 850
Power (W) - - - - - - - -
(*4, *5) Resistor (*6) (800) (1300) (1300)
Dynamic Brake Built-in External option
Weight kg (lb) 0.8 (1.8) 1.0 (2.2) 1.0 (2.2) 1.4 (3.1) 2.3 (5.1) 2.3 (5.1) 4.6 (10) 6.2 (14) 18 (40) 18 (40) 19 (42)
Notes:
1. Rated thrust and speed of a linear servomotor are applicable when the servo amplifier, combined with the linear servomotor, is operated within the specified power supply voltage and frequency. Thrust drops
when the power supply voltage is below the specified value.
2. The MR-J3-350B-RJ004U_ or smaller servo amplifier can be installed closely. In this case, keep the ambient temperature within 0 to 45°C (32 to 113°F), or use them with 75% or less of the effective load rate.
3. 150mA is the value when all of the input/output points are used. The current capacity can be stepped down according to the number of input/output points in use.
4. Optimal regenerative resistor varies for each system.
5. Refer to the section “Selecting linear servo 3. Selecting optional regenerative unit” in this catalog for the tolerable regenerative power (W).
6. The value applies when the external regenerative resistors, GRZG400-MW, (standard accessory) are used with cooling fans (2 units of 92x92mm, minimum air flow: 1.0m3/min). Note that change in the parameter
No. PA02 is required.
Electrical wires, circuit breakers, magnetic contactors (example of selection)

The following are examples of wire sizes when 600V polyvinyl chloride insulated wires with a length of 30m are used.
Magnetic Electrical Wire Size (mm²)
Servo Amplifier Circuit Breaker
Contactor L1, L2, L3 L11, L21 U, V, W P, C THM1, THM2
MR-J3-20B-RJ004U_ 30A frame 5A
MR-J3-40B-RJ004U_ 30A frame 10A
S-N10 1.25 (AWG16
MR-J3-60B-RJ004U_ 2 (AWG14)
30A frame 15A
MR-J3-70B-RJ004U_ 2 (AWG14)
MR-J3-200B-RJ004U_ 30A frame 20A S-N18 2 (AWG14)
MR-J3-350B-RJ004U_ 30A frame 30A S-N20 3.5 (AWG12) 1.25 (AWG16) 3.5 (AWG12) 0.2 (AWG24)
MR-J3-500B-RJ004U_ (*1) 50A frame 50A S-N35 5.5 (AWG10) 5.5 (AWG10)
MR-J3-700B-RJ004U_ (*1) 100A frame 75A S-N50 8 (AWG8) 8 (AWG8) 3.5 (AWG12)
MR-J3-11KB-RJ004U_ (*1) 100A frame 100A S-N65 14 (AWG6) 22 (AWG4)
MR-J3-15KB-RJ004U_ (*1) 225A frame 125A S-N95 22 (AWG4) 30 (AWG2) 5.5 (AWG10)
MR-J3-22KB4-RJ004U_ (*1) 225A frame 125A S-N65 14 (AWG6) 22 (AWG4)
Note:
1. When connecting the wires to the terminal screws, be sure to use the screws attached to the terminal blocks.

B. MR-J3 Linear Servomotors
LM-H2 Linear Servomotor Selection
LM-H2P - M- (Primary side: Coil) LM-H2S 0- - (Secondary side: Magnet)
Symbol Maximum Speed Symbol Motor Model Symbol Motor Model

M 2m/s 4SS0 LM-H2P1A-06M LM-H2P10-288
LM-H2P2A-12M LM-H2P10-384
Symbol Rated Thrust 4SS0
LM-H2P2B-24M LM-H2P10-480
06 60N LM-H2P10-768
LM-H2P2C-36M
12 120N LM-H2P20-288
LM-H2P2D-48M
24 240N 1SS0 LM-H2P20-384
LM-H2P3A-24M
36 360N LM-H2P20-480
LM-H2P3B-48M
48 480N LM-H2P20-768
LM-H2P3C-72M 1SS0
72 720N LM-H2P330-288
LM-H2P3D-96M
96 960N LM-H2P30-384
Symbol Length (Nominal Dimension) LM-H2P30-480
A 128 mm LM-H2P30-768
B 224 mm
Symbol Length (Nominal Dimension)
C 320 mm
288 288 mm
D 416 mm
384 384 mm
Symbol Width (Nominal Dimension) 480 480 mm
1 50 mm 768 768 mm
2 70 mm
Symbol Width (Nominal Dimension)
3 110 mm
1 42 mm
2 65 mm
3 105 mm
LM-F Linear Servomotor Selection

LM-FP - M-1SS0 (Primary side: Coil)
Symbol Maximum Speed

M 2m/s
Rated Thrust
Symbol
Self-Cooling Liquid Cooling
Symbol Length (Nominal Dimension) 06 300N 600N
B 290 mm 12 600N 1200N
D 530 mm 18 900N 1800N
F 770 mm 24 1200N 2400N
H 1010 mm 36 1800N 3600N
48 2400N 4800N
60 3000N 6000N
2 120 mm
4 200 mm
5 240 mm
LM-FS 0- -1SS0 (Secondary side: Magnet)

480 480 mm
Symbol Width (Nominal Dimension) 576 576 mm
2 120 mm
4 200 mm
5 240 mm
328
LM-U2 (Medium Thrust) Linear Servomotor Selection
LM-U2P - M- (Primary side: Coil) LM-U2S 0- - (Secondary side: Magnet)
Symbol Maximum Speed Symbol Motor Model Symbol Motor Model

M 2m/s LM-U2PAB-05M LM-U2SA0-240
0SS0 LM-U2PAD-10M 0SS0 LM-U2SA0-300
Symbol Rated Thrust LM-U2PAF-15M LM-U2SA0-420
05 50N LM-U2PBB-07M LM-U2SB0-240
07 75N 1SS0 LM-U2PBD-15M 1SS0 LM-U2SB0-300
10 100N LM-U2PBF-22M LM-U2SB0-420
15 150N
22 225N Symbol Length (Nominal Dimension)
240 240 mm
300 300 mm
B 130 mm 420 420 mm
D 250 mm
F 370 mm
Symbol Width (Nominal Dimension) A 62 mm
A 66.5 mm B 82 mm
B 86.5 mm
LM-U2 (Large Thrust) Linear Servomotor Selection
L M-U 2 P 2 - M- (Primary side: Coil)
Symbol Maximum Speed

M 2m/s
Symbol Motor Model

Symbol Rated Thrust
LM-U2P2B-40M
40 400N
2SS0 LM-U2P2C-60M
60 600N
LM-U2P2D-80M
80 800N

B 286 mm
C 406 mm
D 526 mm
LM-U2S20- - (Secondary side: Magnet)
Symbol Motor Model

LM-U2S20-300
Symbol Length (Nominal Dimension) 2SS0
LM-U2S20-480
300 300 mm
480 480 mm

Servomotor Types
Motor Series Thrust Range (N) Features
LM-H2 Series 100 1000 10000 Structure
150 2400 The motor consists of the primary side (lam-
Laminated core inated core + motor coil) and the secondary
side (permanent magnets + mounting plate).
Maximum
The primary side has slots on the lami-
nated core. The motor coil is wound on
Continuous this laminated core, and the entire section
Molded
resin
(self-cooling) is molded by resin.
The secondary side has flat permanent mag-
60 960 nets positioned and fixed on the mounting
Motor coil
plate. The entire section is molded by resin.
Permanent Applications Features

magnet Semiconductor mounting system The thrust/volume ratio can be increased,
Mounting plate Wafer cleaning system allowing space-savings. (High thrust density)
Core Type
LCD assembly system (multi-head use) The attraction force functions as the pre-load on
the guide, allowing high-rigidity to be attained.
1800 18000
LM-F Series Structure
The basic structure is the same as the
Liquid-cooling pipe Maximum
LM-H2 series. However, LM-F series has a
Laminated 300 3000 liquid-cooling pipe in the primary side to
core
suppress heat generation.
Continuous
(self-cooling) Features
Continuous By circulating cooling liquid at 5 liter/min,
Molded (liquid-cooling)
resin the continuous thrust can be twice as
600 6000 much as that of self-cooling.
Motor coil
Applications
NC machine tools
Permanent magnet
Material handling
Mounting plate
150 3200
LM-U2 Series Structure
The motor consists of the primary side
Maximum (motor coil) and the secondary side (per-
Mounting plate manent magnets + mounting plate).
The primary side does not have a laminated
core. The motor coil is accurately positioned
Coreless Type
Continuous
(self-cooling) on the base and molded by resin.
On the secondary side, permanent magnets
50 800 are accurately positioned and fixed to face
Permanent each other in a U-shaped like mounting plate.
magnet
Features
Applications Speed fluctuations are very small due to
Screen printing system elimination of magnetic attraction force
Scanning exposure system and cogging.
Molded resin Motor coil Inspection system The guide life can be extended as there is
no attraction force.
330
LM-H2 Linear Motor Specifications
Linear Servomotor Model P1A-06M- P2A-12M- P2B-24M- P2C-36M- P2D-48M- P3A-24M- P3B-48M- P3C-72M- P3D-96M-
LM-H2 4SS0 1SS0 1SS0 1SS0 1SS0 1SS0 1SS0 1SS0 1SS0
Compatible Amplifier Model 40B- 40B- 70B- 200B- 200B- 70B- 200B- 350B- 500B-
MR-J3- RJ004U500 RJ004U501 RJ004U502 RJ004U503 RJ004U504 RJ004U505 RJ004U506 RJ004U507 RJ004U508
Power Facility Capacity (kVA) 0.9 0.9 1.3 3.5 3.5 1.3 3.5 5.5 7.5
Continuous (N) 60 120 240 360 480 240 480 720 960
Thrust
Maximum (N) 150 300 600 900 1200 600 1200 1800 2400
Maximum Speed (m/s) (*1) 2.0
Magnetic Attraction Force (N) 500 1000 1900 2700 3500 2000 3700 5300 7000
Primary Side (Coil) 0.9 (2.0) 1.4 (3.1) 2.5 (5.6) 3.6 (8.0) 4.7 (11) 2.4 (5.3) 4.3 (9.5) 6.2 (14) 8.1 (18)
288mm / piece:
Weight kg (lb)
0.6 (1.4)
384mm / piece: 288mm / piece: 1.1 (2.5) 288mm / piece: 3.2 (7.1)
0.8 (1.8) 384mm / piece: 1.4 (3.1) 384mm / piece: 4.3 (9.5)
Secondary Side (Magnet)
480mm / piece: 480mm / piece: 1.8 (4.0) 480mm / piece: 5.3 (12)
1.0 (2.2) 768mm / piece: 2.9 (6.4) 768mm / piece: 8.5 (19)
768mm / piece:
1.6 (3.6)
Secondary Side Model LM-H2 S10-_-4SS0 S20-_-1S20 S30-_-1SS0
Recommended Load / Motor
Maximum of 30 times the mass of the linear servomotor’s primary side
Mass Ratio
Structure Open (protection level: IP00)
Environment

Vibration 49m/s² maximum
Notes: 1. The linear servomotor’s maximum speed or linear encoder’s rated speed, whichever is smaller, is the upper limit value of the linear servomotor’s speed.
LM-H2P1A-06M-4SS0 (*1) LM-H2P2A-12M-1SS0 (*1) LM-H2P2B-24M-1SS0 (*1)

150 300 600
Peak running Peak running Peak running
range range range
Thrust (N)
Thrust (N)
Thrust (N)
100 200 400
60 120 240
50 100 200
range range range
0 0 0
1 2 1 2 1 2
Speed (m/s) Speed (m/s) Speed (m/s)
LM-H2P2C-36M-1SS0 (*2) LM-H2P2D-48M-1SS0(*2) LM-H2P3A-24M-1SS0 (*1)

900 1200 600
range range range
Thrust (N)
Thrust (N)
Thrust (N)
600 800 400
360 480 240

300 400 200
range range range
0 0 0
1 2 1 2 1 2
LM-H2P3B-48M-1SS0 (*2) LM-H2P3C-72M-1SS0 (*2) LM-H2P3D-96M-1SS0 (*2)

1200 1800 2400
range range range
Thrust (N)
Thrust (N)
Thrust (N)
800 1200 1600
480 720 960

400 600 800
range range range
0 0 0
1 2 1 2 1 2
Notes:
1. For 3-phase 200VAC or 1-phase 200VAC.
2. For 3-phase 200VAC.

LM-F Series Linear Motor Specifications
Linear Servomotor Model LM-F P2B-06M-1SS0 P2D-12M-1SS0 P2F-18M-1SS0 P4B-12M-1SS0 P4D-24M-1SS0 P4F-36M-1SS0 P4H-48M-1SS0 P5H-60M-1SS0 (*2)
Compatible Self-Cooling 200BRJ004U518 500BRJ004U520 700BRJ004U522 500BRJ004U524 700BRJ004U526 11KBRJ004U528 15KBRJ004U530 22KB4RJ004U532
Amplifier
MR-J3 Liquid-Cooling 200BRJ004U519 500BRJ004U521 700BRJ004U523 500BRJ004U525 700B-RJ004U527 11KBRJ004U529 15KBRJ004U531 22KB4RJ004U533
Power Facility Capacity (kVA) 3.5 5.5 10 7.5 18 18 18 22
Cooling Method Self-cooling or liquid-cooling
Continuous
300 600 900 600 1200 1800 2400 3000
(Self-Cooling) (N)
Thrust
Continuous
(Liquid-Cooling) 600 1200 1800 1200 2400 3600 4800 6000
(N)
Maximum (N) 1800 3600 5400 3600 7200 10800 14400 18000
Magnetic Attraction Force (N) 4500 9000 13500 9000 18000 27000 36000 45000
Primary Side (coil) 9 (20) 18 (40) 27 (60) 14 (31) 28 (62) 42 (93) 56 (125) 67 (150)
Weight kg
480mm / piece: 20.0

(lb)
Secondary Side 480mm / piece: 7.1 (16) 480mm / piece: 13.5 (30)
(44) 576mm / piece:
(Magnet) 576mm / piece: 9.0 (20) 576mm / piece: 16.0 (36)
26.0 (58)
Secondary Side Model LM-F S20-_-1SS0 S40-_-1SS0 S50-_-1SS0
Recommended Load /
Motor Mass Ratio
Ambient
0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F) (non-freezing), storage: -15 to 70°C (5 to 158°F) (non-freezing)
Temperature
Environment

Notes:
1. The linear servomotor’s maximum speed or linear encoder’s rated speed, whichever is smaller, is the upper limit value of the linear servomotor’s speed.
2. Use 400VAC rated servo amplifier.
LM-FP2B-06M-1SS0 (*1) LM-FP2D-12M-1SS0 (*1) LM-FP2F-18M-1SS0 (*1)

1800 3600 5400
Thrust (N)
Thrust (N)
Thrust (N)
1200 2400 3600

range range range
600 1200 1800
300 600 900
0 0 0
1 2 1 2 1 2
LM-FP4B-12M-1SS0 (*1) LM-FP4D-24M-1SS0 (*1) LM-FP4F-36M-1SS0 (*1)

3600 7200 10800
Thrust (N)
Thrust (N)
Thrust (N)
2400 4800 7200

range range range
1200 2400 3600
600 1200 1800
0 0 0
1 2 1 2 1 2
LM-FP4H-48M-1SS0 (*1) LM-FP5H-60M-1SS0 (*2)

14400 18000 Notes:
3. For continuous running range (liquid-cooling).
Thrust (N)
Thrust (N)
9600 12000 4. For continuous running range (self-cooling).

Peak running Peak running
range range
4800 6000
(Note 3) (Note 3)
2400 3000
(Note 4) (Note 4)
0 0
1 2 1 2
Speed (m/s) Speed (m/s)
332
LM-U2 Series Linear Motor Specifications
Linear Servomotor Model
PAB-05M-0SS0 PAD-10M-0SS0 PAF-15M-0SS0 PBB-07M-1SS0 PBD-15M-1SS0 PBF-22M-1SS0 P2B-40M-2SS0 P2C-60M-2SS0 P2D-80M-2SS0
LM-U2
20B- 40B- 40B- 20B- 60B- 70B- 200B- 350B- 500B-
Compatible Amplifier MR-J3-
RJ004U512 RJ004U513 RJ004U514 RJ004U515 RJ004U516 RJ004U517 RJ004U509 RJ004U510 RJ004U511
Power Facility Capacity (kVA) 0.5 0.9 0.9 0.5 1.0 1.3 3.5 5.5 7.5
Continuous (N) 50 100 150 75 150 225 400 600 800
Thrust
Maximum (N) 150 300 450 225 450 675 1600 2400 3200
Magnetic Attraction Force
0
(N)
0.3 (0.67) 0.6 (1.4) 0.8 (1.8) 0.4 (0.89) 0.8 (1.8) 1.1 (2.5) 2.9 (6.4) 4.2 (9.3) 5.5 (13)
Weight kg (lb)
Primary Side (Coil)

240mm / piece: 2.0 (4.4) 240mm / piece: 2.6 (5.8)
Secondary Side 300mm / piece: 9.6 (22)
300mm / piece: 2.5 (5.6) 300mm / piece: 3.2 (7.1)
(Magnet) 480mm / piece: 15.3 (34)
420mm / piece: 3.5 (7.8) 420mm / piece: 4.5 (10)
Secondary Side Model
SA0-_-0SS0 SB0-_-1SS0 S20-_-2SS0
LM-U2
Recommended Load / Motor
Mass Ratio
Environment

Notes:
1. The linear servomotor’s maximum speed or linear encoder’s rated speed, whichever is smaller, is the upper limit value of the linear servomotor’s speed.
LM-U2PAB-05M-0SS0 (*1) LM-U2PAD-10M-0SS0 (*1) LM-U2PAF-15M-0SS0 (*1)

180 360 540
150 300 450

120 240 range 360 range
Thrust (N)
Thrust (N)
Thrust (N)
range
60 120 180
50 100 150
range range range
0 0 0
1 2 1 2 1 2
LM-U2PBB-07M-1SS0 (*1) LM-U2PBD-15M-1SS0 (*1) LM-U2PBF-22M-1SS0 (*1)

300 540 720
675
450 Peak running
225
Peak running Peak running range
200 360 range 480
Thrust (N)
Thrust (N)
Thrust (N)
range
100 180 240

150 225
75 Continuous running
range range range
0 0 0
1 2 1 2 1 2
LM-U2P2B-40M-2SS0 (*2) LM-U2P2C-60M-2SS0 (*2) LM-U2P2D-80M-2SS0 (*2)

1800 3000 3600
1600 3200
Peak running 2400 Peak running
range Peak running range
1200 2000 2400
Thrust (N)
Thrust (N)
Thrust (N)
range
600 1000 1200

400 600 800
range range range
0 0 0
1 2 1 2 1 2
Notes:
1. For 3-phase 200VAC or 1-phase 230VAC.

C. Linear Encoder
Compatible Linear Encoders (*1, *2)
Effective
Rated Speed Measurement Communication Position
Linear Encoder Type Manufacturer Model Resolution
(*3) Length Method System
(Maximum)
AT343A 2.0m/s 3000mm
0.05µm
AT543A-SC 2.5m/s 2200mm
Mitutoyo Corporation 2-wire type
Absolute ST741A 0.5µm
4.0m/s 6000mm Absolute
Type ST743A (*7) 0.1µm
Heidenhain LC491M 2.0m/s 2040mm
0.05µm/ 0.01µm 4-wire type
Corporation LC192M 3.0m/s 4240mm
Mitsubishi SL710+PL101-R/RH
0.2µm (*4) 6.4m/s 3000mm
Serial Interface Sony Manufacturing +MJ830 or MJ831
Compatible Systems Corporation SH13
0.005µm (*4) 1.4m/s 1240mm
+MJ830 or MJ831 2-wire type
Incremental RGH26P 5µm 4.0m/s
Type
Renishaw Inc. RGH26Q 1µm 3.2m/s 70000mm
Incremental
RGH26R 0.5µm 1.6m/s
Heidenhain LIDA485+APE391M 0.005µm 30040mm
4.0m/s 4-wire type
Corporation LIDA487+APE391M (20/4096µm) 6040mm
ABZ Phase Within tolerable
Incremental Depends on Depends on linear Differential 3-pair
Differential Not designated - resolution range
Type linear encoder encoder type
Output Type (*5) (*6)
Notes:
1. Consult with the relevant linear encoder manufacturer for details on the linear encoder’s working environment and specifications.
2. The linear servomotor generates heat. Take the linear encoder’s working environment temperature into consideration when configuring the system.
3. The indicated values are the linear encoder’s rated speed when used in combination with the Mitsubishi linear compatible servo amplifier. The values may differ from each manufacturer’s specifications.
The linear servomotor’s maximum speed or linear encoder’s rated speed, whichever is smaller, is the upper limit value of the linear servomotor’s speed.
4. The resolution varies according to the setting value of the interpolator, MJ830/MJ831 manufactured by Sony Manufacturing Systems Corporation. Set the resolution between the minimum resolution
and 5mm.
5. Output the A-phase, B-phase and Z-phase signals in the differential line driver. The phase difference of A-phase pulse and B-phase pulse, and the width of Z-phase pulse must be 200ns or wider. Home
position return is not possible with a linear encoder which is not equipped with a Z-phase.
6. The tolerable resolution range is 0.005 to 5mm. Select the linear encoder within this range.
7. Servo amplifier with software version A1 or above is compatible with this linear scale.
LA
LAR
Phase difference 200ns or more
LB
LBR
1 Z phase pulse ... 200ns or more
LZ
LZR
334
D. MR-J3-Linear Cables and Connectors
Controller
Q173DCPU Q170MCPU MR Configurator
(Setup software)
Q172DCPU MR-MQ100 Software Version 5.00A or above (*1)
QD75MH
8 9 10
13
CNP1 CN5 CNP1 CN5
CN3 CN3
4 14 15 16 17
CN1A CN1A
CNP2 8 9 10 CNP2
5 CN1B CN1B
CNP3 CNP3
6 12
CN2 1 CN2
7
CN2L CN2L Attach the cap
to the unused
connector.
To thermistor terminal (CN2 connector)
LM-H2 Series 1 To CN2L connector

To power supply
Linear servo motor primary side (coil) terminal 1
Linear servo motor 3
secondary side (magnet)
(*1) 2 Note:
Contact each linear encoder
manufacturer for information on
(*1) the connector which is connec-
3 ted to the linear encorder head
Linear encoder head cable cable, or the interpolator con-
Linear encoder nector.
Sony Manufacturing Systems
Corporation interpolator (*1)
LM-F Series To Thermistor terminal

(CN2 connector) (*2)
To power supply
terminal
Linear servo motor primary side (coil)
Linear servo motor
secondary side (magnet)
To CN2L connector (Note 3)

Linear encoder
Head cable
LM-U2 Series To power supply

To thermistor terminal (CN2 connector) terminal
Linear servo motor Linear servo motor primary side (coil) The connection to the
secondary side (magnet) CN2 connector is the
same as for the LM-H2
Series.
Linear encoder The connection to the CN2L

connector is the same as for
the LM-H2 Series.
Linear encoder head cable
Notes:
1. Setup software MR- Configurator Software version 5.00A or above is planned to be compatible with MR-J3-_B-RJ004U_. Refer to the following for software versions of Q172HCPU and Q173HCPU compatible with
linear servo LM Series.
• Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU OS software (SW6RN-SV13MM /-SV22MM) Software version: 00D or above
• Integrated start-up support software MT Developer (SW6RNC-GSVPROE/-GSVSETE) Software version: 00N or above
2. The linear encoder, linear encoder head cable and encoder cable are not enclosed with the purchased linear servomotor and must be prepared by the user.
3. Use the recommended linear encoder manufacturer's products for the linear encoder and linear encoder head cable.
4. Consult with the linear encoder manufacturer regarding the working environment and specifications, and select the proper products.
*Cautions regarding the linear encoders
• Linear encoder, head cable and encoder cable are not supplied with the linear servomotor.
• Linear encoder and head cable, manufactured by the recommended manufacturers, must be used.
• Consult relevant manufacturers for details on linear encoder’s working environment and specifications.

MR-J3 Linear Servo Cables and Connectors
Stocked Lengths Protection
Item Model Diagram
(Meters) Level
1 CN2 or CN2L Connector MR-J3CN2 S IP20
MR-EKCBL_M-H
2 CN2 or CN2L Cable 2, 5, 10 IP20
(_ = cable length 2, 5, 20m)
3 CN2 or CN2L Connector Set MR-ECNM S IP20
CNP1 Connector 1kW or Less

54928-0670 S -
(Comes with J3 Amp Standard)
4 CNP1 Connector 2kW - 3.5kW
PC4/6-STF-7.62 S -
CNP2 Connector up to 3.5kW

5 54927-0510 S -
CNP3 Connector 1kW or Less

54928-0370 S -
6 CNP3 Connector 2kW - 3.5kW
PC4/3-STF-7.62 S -
CNP1-2-3 Insertion Tool (Comes
7 54932-0000 S -
with J3 Amp Standard)
SSCNETIII Cable MR-J3BUS_M
8 015, 03, 05, 1, 3 -
(Standard Cord for Inside Panel) (_ = cable length 0.15, 0.3, 0.5, 1, 3m)
SSCNETIII Cable (Standard Cable MR-J3BUS_M-A
9 5, 10, 20 -
for Outside Panel) (_ = cable length 5, 10, 20m)
SSCNETIII Cable (Long Distance MR-J3BUS_M-B
10 30 -
Cable) (_ = cable length 30, 40, 50m)
12 Connector Cap for SSCNETIII Connector comes with ampliier standard - -
Personal Computer Communication

13 MR-J3USBCBL3M (cable length 3m) S -
Cable USB Cable
CN10 or CN3 Signal Connector
14 MR-J2CN1 S -
(20 Pin)
MR-CCN1CBL-_M
15 CN10 or CN3 Pigtail Cable (20 Pin) 3, 5 -
20 Pin Terminal B Lock for J3-B

16 PS7DW-20V14B-F S -
Cable for PS7DW-20V14B-F MR-J2HBUS_M

17 05, 1, 3, 5 -
Terminal Block (_ = cable length 0.5, 1, 3, 5m)
336
E. Software and Manuals
MR Configurator2 • (MRZJW3-MOTSZ111E)
personal computer.
• Multiple monitor functions
Graphic display functions are provided to display the servomotor status
with the input signal triggers, such as the command pulse, droop pulse
and speed.
• Test operations with a personal computer
Test operation of the servomotors can be performed with a personal
computer using multiple test mode menus. Description Model Number Stocked Item
Windows Communication Software MR-CONFIGURATOR2 S
Manuals
Hardware Description Model Number Stock Item
MR-J3-B-RJ004 Instruction
SH(NA)030054 MEAU.com
Manual
F. Optional Accessories
RS-422 Distributor (For Multidrop) 20 Pin Terminal Block (*1)
MR-J3-B-RJ004 BMJ-8 S
MR-J3-B-RJ004 PS7DW-20V14B-F S
Note: MR-TB20 terminal block cannot be used for MR-J3-B.
Battery
Item Model Number Description Stock Item Description
The servomotor’s absolute value can be maintained by installing

Battery MR-J3BAT the battery in the servo amplifier. The battery is not required S
when the servo system is used in an incremental mode.
Use this relay cable to hold the absolute value when shipping
the product with the machine and servo amplifier removed.
The servomotor HF series does not have a super capacitor (for
Battery Connection
MR-J3BTCBL03M holding an absolute value for short time) in the encoder. When S
Relay Cable
this optional cable is used, the absolute value can be held even
when the encoder cable is disconnected from the servo amplifier,
making it easy to do maintenance on the servo amplifier.

MR-J3-200B-RJ004
FR-BSF01 S All 200VAC J3 Models FR-BIF S
or Smaller
MR-J3-350B-RJ400
FR-BLF S All 400VAC J3 Models FR-BIF-H -
or Larger
EMC Filter
Power Regeneration Converter
Stocked
Servo Amplifier Type Model Number
Item Servo Amplifier Type Model Number Stock Item Description
MR-J3-100A/BS/T and Less MF3F480-010.233MF S
MR-J3-200A/BS/T MF3F480-015.230MF3 S
MR-J3-500B-RJ004 FR-RC-15K -
MR-J3-350A/BS/T MF3F480-025.230MF3 S
MR-J3-500A/BS/T ~ 700A/BS/T MF3F480-050.230MF3 S
MR-J3-11KA/BS/T ~ 22KA/BS/T HF3100A-UN -
MR-J3-DU30 ~ 37KA/BS HF3200A-UN - MR-J3-700B-RJ004 ~
MR-J3-100A4/BS4/T4 and Less MF3F480-010.233MF S FR-RC-30K -
15K-RJ004
MR-J3-200A4/BS4/T4 MF3F480-015.230MF3 S
MR-J3-350A4/BS4/T4 MF3F480-015.233MF S
MR-J3-500A4/BS4/T4 ~ 700A4/BS4/T4 MF3F480-025.230MF3 S
MR-J3-11KA4/BS4/T4 ~ 15KA4/BS4/T4 MF3F480-035.230 - Power Regeneration Common Converter/Stand-Alone Reactor
MR-J3-22KA4/BS4/T4 MF3F480-050.230MF3 S (Must be used in conjunction with each other). Up to six servo
MR-J3-DU30 ~ 55KA4/BS4 TF3150C-TX - amplifiers can be connected to one FR-CV, refer to manuals for details.
Common Converter Stock Reactor Model Stock
Brake/Resistor Units (Must be used in conjunction with each other) Model Number Item Number Item
Brake Unit Stock Resistor Unit Stock MR-J3-350B-RJ004 FR-CV-7.5K - FR-CVL-7.5K -

Model Number Item Model Number Item MR-J3-500B-RJ004 FR-CV-11K - FR-CVL-15K -
MR-J3-500B-RJ004 ~ 700B-RJ004 FR-BU2-15K S FR-BR-15K-UL S MR-J3-700B-RJ004 FR-CV-15K - FR-CVL-11K -
MR-J3-11KB-RJ004 FR-CV-22K - FR-CVL-22K -
MR-J3-11KB-RJ004 ~ 15K-RJ004 FR-BU2-30K S FR-BR-30K-UL S
MR-J3-15KB-RJ004
DC Power Improvement Reactor
Servo Amplifier Type Model Number Stocked Item Diagram AC Power Factor Improvement Reactor
MR-J3-40B-RJ004 - Servo Amplifier Type Model Number Stock Item Description
DCA000902
MR-J3-70B-RJ004 - MR-J3-40B-RJ004 MRL-00401 -
MR-J3-200B-RJ004 DCA001802 - MR-J3-70B-RJ004 MRL-00801 -
MR-J3-350B-RJ004 DCA003202 - MR-J3-200B-RJ004 MRL-01801 S
MR-J3-500B-RJ004 DCA005001 - MR-J3-350B-RJ004 MRL-03501 -
MR-J3-700B-RJ004 ~
DCA008002 - MR-J3-500B-RJ004 MRL-04501 -
11K-RJ004
DCA011003 - MR-J3-700B-RJ004 ~
MR-J3-15K-RJ004 MRL-05501 -
11K-RJ004
MR-J3-22K4-RJ004 DCA008005 - MR-J3-15K-RJ004 MRL-08001 -
MR-J3-22K4-RJ004 MRL-05502 -
Built-in Optional Regeneration Resistors/Tolerable Regenerative Power (W)
External
Servo Amplifier Capacitor Regenerative
Inverse Regenerative MR-RB
Resistor/
Model Charging Efficiency Resistor/
Tolerable 50 51 5E 9P 6K-4
(MR-J3-) (J) (%) Standard 032 12 30 31 32
Regenerative (13W) (6.7W) (6W) (4.5W) (10W)
Accessory (40W) (40W) (13W) (6.7W) (40W)
Power (W) (*1) (*1) (*2) (*2) (*2)
Stocked Item N/A N/A - N/A S S S - S S S - - -
20B-RJ004U 9 70 10 - 30 100 - - - - - - - -
40B-RJ004U 11 85 10 - 30 100 - - - - - - - -
60B-RJ004U 11 85 10 - 30 100 - - - - - - - -
70B-RJ004U 18 80 20 - 30 100 - - 300 - - - - -
200B-RJ004U 40 85 100 - - - 300 - - 500 - - - -
350B-RJ004U 40 85 100 - - - 300 - - 500 - - - -
500B-RJ004U 45 90 130 - - - - 300 - - 500 - - -
700B-RJ004U 70 90 170 - - - - 300 - - 500 - - -
500
11KB-RJ004U 120 90 - 500 (800) - - - - - - - - -
(800)
850
15KB-RJ004U 170 90 - 850 (1300) - - - - - - - - -
(1300)
850
22KB4-RJ004U 250 90 - 850 (1300) - - - - - - - - -
(1300)
Notes:
1. Be sure to install cooling fans. The cooling fan must be prepared by the user.
2. The values in ( ) indicate when cooling fans (2 units of 92 x 92 mm, minimum air flow: 1.03/min) are installed, and the parameter No. PA02 is changed.
338
MR-J3 Direct Drive Servomotors and Amplifiers
Direct drive arrangement with the motor provides higher rigidity and in addition, the high-resolution encoder with the motor enables high
accuracy control. The motor’s low profile design contributes to compact construction and a low center of gravity for enhanced machine stability.
This motor is suitable for rotation and index tables used in semiconductor manufacturing, liquid crystal manufacturing and machine tool devices.
The direct drive motor and servo amplifier will be compatible with global standards (EN, UL and cUL standards).
MR Configurator Personal
computer
CN5 D
Servo amplifier
Junction
CN3 terminal
block
Servo system
CN1A

U
A V CN1A or Cap
W
CN2
Encoder connector
C
Note:
Please consult product marketing for
all direct drive motor opportunities.
Direct Drive
servo motor B
A. MR-J3-Direct Drive Amplifiers ...................................................................................................340

B. MR-J3-Direct Drive Servomotors...............................................................................................340
C. Cables ........................................................................................................................................343
D. Software and Manuals ...............................................................................................................345
E. System Options ..........................................................................................................................345

A. MR-J3-Direct Drive Amplifiers B. MR-J3-Direct Drive Servomotors
Amplifier Selection Motor Selection
MR-J3 - -B- TM-RFM -
Symbol Rated Speed (r/min)
Symbol Description Direct Drive 10 100
Motor Series 20 200
Direct drive motor compatible,
RJ080W
with a built-in dynamic brake
MELSERVO-J3 Motor Outer
Direct drive motor compatible,
Series RU080W Symbol Diameter (mm)
without a dynamic brake (*1) Frame Dimensions)
SSCNET II Conforms to Symbol Rated Torque (N•m)
Note 1: Dynamic brake does not work at alarm occurance C 130
Compatible or power failure. Take measures to ensure safety. the following 002 2
standards: EN, 004 4 E 180
UL, cUL 006 6 G 230
Compatible Motors 012 12 J 330
Symbol
TM-RFM 018 18
20 002C20 040 40
40 004C20 048 48
Conforms to 072 72
60 006C20, 006E20
the following 120 120
standards: EN, 70 012E20, 012G20, 040J10
240 240
UL, cUL 100 018E20
350 048G20, 072G20, 120J10
500 240J10
Amplifier Specifications
MR-J3-_-RJ080W 20B 40B 60B 70B 100B 350B 500B
Voltage / Frequency 3-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz or
3-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz
(*1,* 2) 1-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz
Main Circuit Permissible Voltage For 3-phase 200 to 230VAC: 3-phase 170 to 253VAC
Power Supply Fluctuation For 1-phase 200 to 230VAC: 1-phase 170 to 253VAC
±5% maximum
Fluctuation
Voltage / Frequency 1-phase 200 to 230VAC 50/60Hz
Permissible Voltage
Control Fluctuation
Circuit Power Permissible Frequency
Supply ±5% maximum
Fluctuation
Power
30 45
Consumption (W)
Interface Power Supply 24VDC±10% (required current capacity: 0.15A) (*3)
Dynamic Brake Built-in (*4, *5)
Overcurrent shutdown, regeneration overvoltage shutdown, overload shutdown (electronic thermal), direct drive motor overheat
Safety Features protection, encoder fault protection, regeneration fault protection, undervoltage/sudden power outage protection, overspeed protection,
excess error protection, magnetic pole detection protection, servo control error protection
Structure Natural-cooling, open (IP00) Fan-cooling, open (IP00)
Ambient Temperature (*6) 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) (non freezing), storage: -20 to 65°C (-4 to 149°F) (non freezing)
Environment Atmosphere Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inlammable gas, oil mist or dust
Vibration 5.9m/s² or less at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y and Z axes)
Weight kg (lb) 0.8 (1.8) 1.0 (2.2) 1.0 (2.2) 1.4 (3.1) 1.4 (3.1) 2.3 (5.1) 4.6 (10)
Notes:
1. Rated output and speed of a direct drive motor are applicable when the servo amplifier, combined with the direct drive motor, is operated within the specified power supply voltage and frequency. Torque drops
when the power supply voltage is below the specified value.
2. For torque characteristics when combined with a direct drive motor, refer to the section "Direct drive motor torque characteristics" in this catalog.
3. 0.15A is the value when all of the input/output points are used. The current capacity can be stepped down according to the number of input/output points in use. Refer to "MR-J3-_B SAFETY SERVO AMPLIFIER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL" for details.
4. When using the built-in dynamic brake, refer to "MR-J3-_B-RJ080W INSTRUCTION MANUAL" for the permissible load inertia moment ratio.
5. Special specification servo amplifiers without a dynamic brake are also available: MR-J3-_B-RU080W. When using the servo amplifier without a dynamic brake, the direct drive motor does not stop immediately
at alarm occurrence or power failure. Take measures to ensure safety in the entire system.
6. The following servo amplifiers can be mounted closely: MR-J3-20B-RJ080W, -40B-RJ080W, -60B-RJ080W, -70B-RJ080W, -100B-RJ080W and -350B-RJ080W. In this case, operate them at the ambient
temperature of 0 to 45°C (32 to 113°F) or at 75% or less of the effective load ratio.
340
Direct Drive Servomotor Specifications
Direct Drive Motor Model TM-RFM 002C20 004C20 006C20 006E20 012E20 018E20
Compatible Servo Ampliiers 20B 40B 60B 60B 70B 100B
Motor Outer Diameter
ø130 ø180
(Frame Dimensions) (mm)
Power Supply Capacity (kVA) (*1) 0.25 0.38 0.53 0.46 0.81 1.3
Continuous Rated Output (W) 42 84 126 126 251 377

Running Duty Rated Torque (N·m [oz·in]) 2 (283) 4 (566) 6 (850) 6 (850) 12 (1700) 18 (2550)
Maximum Torque (N·m [oz·in]) 6 (850) 12 (1700) 18 (2550) 18 (2550) 36 (5100) 54 (7650)
Power Rate at Continuous Rated Torque (kW/s) 3.7 9.6 16.1 4.9 12.9 21.8
Rated Current (A) 1.3 2.1 3.1 3.1 3.8 5.9
Maximum Current (A) 3.9 6.3 9.3 9.3 12 18
No limit 4600 2600 510 560 400
(times/min) (*2)
Moment of Inertia J (x10-4 kg•m²) [J (oz•in²)] 10.9 (59.6) 16.6 (90.8) 22.4 (122) 74.0 (405) 111 (607) 149 (815)
Recommended Load to Motor Inertia
Maximum of 50 times
Moment Ratio (*3)
Absolute Accuracy (s) ±15 ±12.5
Encoder Resolution 1048576p/rev (Absolute/incremental encoder) (*4)
Structure Totally enclosed non ventilated (IP rating: IP42) (*5)
Rotor Moment Load (N·m [oz·in]) 22.5 (3190) 70 (9910)
Permissible
Load (*8) Axial Load (N) 1100 3300
Environment Ambient Humidity 80% RH maximum (non condensing), storage: 90% RH maximum (non condensing)
(*7) Atmosphere Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inlammable gas, oil mist, dust or splash of oil or water
Vibration (*6) X: 49m/s² Y: 49m/s²
Weight (kg [lb]) 5.2 (12) 6.8 (15) 8.4 (19) 11 (25) 15 (33) 18 (40)
Notes:
2. The regenerative braking frequency shows the permissible frequency when the motor, without a load and optional regeneration unit, decelerates from the rated speed to a stop. When a load is connected; however,
to the square of (operating speed/rated speed). If the operating speed changes frequently or when the regeneration is constant (as with vertical feeds), find the regenerative heating value (W) in operation. Provi-
sions must be made to keep this heating value below the tolerable regenerative power (W). Optimal regenerative resistor varies for each system. Select the most suitable regenerative resistor by using the Servo
Support software. Refer to the section "Options Optional regeneration unit" in this catalog for details on the tolerable regenerative power (W).
4. Optional absolute position storage unit (MR-BTAS01) and battery (MR-J3BAT) are required for absolute position detecting system. Refer to "MR-J3-_B-RJ080W INSTRUCTION MANUAL" for details.
5. Connectors and gap between rotor and stator are excluded.
X
Y
7. In the environment where the direct drive motor is exposed to oil mist, oil and/or water, a standard specification direct drive motor may not be usable. Contact your local sales office for more details.
8. The following is calculation examples of axial and moment loads to the rotor (output shaft). The axial and moment loads must be maintained equal to or below the permissible value.
Motor Outer Diameter (mm)

Dimension A (mm)
(Frame Dimensions)
Ø130 19.1
Ø180 20.2
Axial load Axial load Axial load = load mass
= F + load mass = F + load mass Moment load = F x (L + A)
Moment load
=FxL Direct Drive Motor Machine Accuracy
The machine accuracy related to the direct drive motor’s
rotor (output shaft and instillation is indicated below.)
Item Measured Part Accuracy (mm)
Runout of Flange Surface About
a 0.05
Rotor (Output Shaft)
Runout of Fitting Outer Diameter
b 0.07
of Flange Surface
Runout of Rotor (Output Shaft) c 0.04
Runout of Rotor (Output Shaft) End d 0.02

Servomotor Specifications
Direct Drive Motor Model TM-RFM 012G20 048G20 072G20 040J10 120J10 240J10
Compatible Servo Ampliiers 70B 350B 70B 350B 500B
Motor Outer Diameter
Ø230 Ø330
(Frame Dimensions) (mm)
Continuous Rated Output (W) 251 1005 1508 419 1257 2513
Running Duty Rated Torque (N·m [oz·in]) 12 (1700) 48 (6800) 72 (10200 40 (5660) 120 (17000) 240 (34000)
Maximum Torque (N·m [oz·in]) 36 (5100) 144 (20400) 216 (30600) 120 (17000) 360 (51000) 720 (102000)
Rated Speed (r/min) 200 100
6.0 37.5 59.3 9.4 40.9 91.4
Torque (kW/s)
Rated Current (A) 3.4 10.9 16 4.3 11 20
Regenerative Braking
200 350 250 120 70 40
Frequency (*2) (times/min)
Moment of Inertia J (x10-4 kg•m²) [J (oz•in²)] 238 (1300) 615 (3360) 875 (4780) 1694 (9260) 3519 (19200) 6303 (34500)
Recommended Load to Motor Inertia
Maximum of 50 times
Moment Ratio (*3)
Absolute Accuracy (s) ±12.5 ±10
Encoder Resolution 1048576p/rev (Absolute/incremental encoder) (*4)
Structure Totally enclosed non ventilated (IP rating: IP42) (*5)
Rotor Moment Load (N·m [oz·in]) 93 (13200) 350 (49600)
Permissible
Load (*8) Axial Load (N) 5500 16000
Environment
Atmosphere Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inlammable gas, oil mist, dust or splash of oil or water
(*7)
Vibration (*6) X: 49m/s² Y: 49m/s² X: 24.5m/s² Y: 24.5m/s²
Weight (kg [lb]) 17 (38) 36 (80) 52 (115) 53 (120) 91 (205) 146 (325)
Notes:
2. The regenerative braking frequency shows the permissible frequency when the motor, without a load and optional regeneration unit, decelerates from the rated speed to a stop. When a load is connected; however,
to the square of (operating speed/rated speed). If the operating speed changes frequently or when the regeneration is constant (as with vertical feeds), find the regenerative heating value (W) in operation. Provi-
sions must be made to keep this heating value below the tolerable regenerative power (W). Optimal regenerative resistor varies for each system. Select the most suitable regenerative resistor by using the Servo
Support software. Refer to the section "Options Optional regeneration unit" in this catalog for details on the tolerable regenerative power (W).
4. Optional absolute position storage unit (MR-BTAS01) and battery (MR-J3BAT) are required for absolute position detecting system. Refer to "MR-J3-_B-RJ080W INSTRUCTION MANUAL" for details.
5. Connectors and gap between rotor and stator are excluded.
X
Y
7. In the environment where the direct drive motor is exposed to oil mist, oil and/or water, a standard specification direct drive motor may not be usable. Contact your local sales office for more details.
8. The following is calculation examples of axial and moment loads to the rotor (output shaft). The axial and moment loads must be maintained equal to or below the permissible value.
Motor Outer Diameter (mm)

Dimension A (mm)
(Frame Dimensions)
Ø230 24.4
Ø330 32.5
Axial load Axial load Axial load = load mass
= F + load mass = F + load mass Moment load = F x (L + A)
Moment load
=FxL Direct Drive Motor Machine Accuracy
The machine accuracy related to the direct drive motor’s
rotor (output shaft and instillation is indicated below.)
Item Measured Part Accuracy (mm)
Runout of Flange Surface About
a 0.05
Rotor (Output Shaft)
Runout of Fitting Outer Diameter of
b 0.07
Flange Surface
Runout of Rotor (Output Shaft) c 0.04
Runout of Rotor (Output Shaft) End d 0.02
342
C. Cables
Controller Servo Amplifier Servo Amplifier

• Q173DCPU
• 172DCPU 4 5 6
• Q170MCPU
• QD75MH CN5 9 CN5
CNP1 CNP1
• LD77MH
MR-Configurator
• MR-MQ100 CN3 CN3
(Setup software)
7 8 16 17
MRZJW3-SETUP221E
12 13 CN1A CN1A
CNP2 CNP2
14 15
CN1B CN1B
CNP3 4 5 6 CNP3
10
CN2 CN2
CN2L CN2L
Attach a cap to
For incremental system the unused
Motor power supply connector set connector.
1
11
2
Direct drive motor

18
For absolute position detecting system

To CN2 To CNP3 Motor power supply connector set
1
11
Direct drive motor

2 3
18 19
Absolute position storage unit
Cables
Cable Number
Stocked
Motor Model (_ = cable length Protection
Item Lengths Description
Number 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, Level
(m)
30 meter)
TM-RFM002C20
TM-RFM004C20 MR7S-_M 2, 5, 10
TM-RFM006C20
TM-RFM006E20
TM-RFM012E20 MR7S-_M 2, 5, 10
Power Cables for TM-RFM Series Direct Drive Motors
Standard-Flex,
Unshielded Type TM-RFM018E20
Cables (Straight IP65
TM-RFM012G20 MR-J3P1-_M
Type Connector 2, 5, 10,
Only) TM-RFM048G20
MR-J3P3-_M 20, 30
TM-RFM072G20
TM-RFM040J10
MR-J3P4-_M 2, 5, 10,
TM-RFM120J10
20, 30
TM-RFM240J10 MR-J3P7-_M
1
TM-RFM002C20
TM-RFM004C20 MR7S-SH-_M -
TM-RFM006C20
IP65
TM-RFM006E20
High-Flex, Shielded TM-RFM012E20 MR7S-SH-_M -
Type Cables TM-RFM018E20
(Straight Type TM-RFM012G20 MR-J3PWS1-_M
Connector Only) TM-RFM048G20
MR-J3PWS3-_M
TM-RFM072G20 2, 5, 10,
IP67
TM-RFM040J10 15, 20, 30
MR-J3PWS4-_M
TM-RFM120J10
TM-RFM240J10 MR-J3PWS7-_M

Cables continued
Stocked IP Rating
Model Description
Lengths (M) (*5)
Encoder Connector Cable (For Connecting
MR-J3DDCNSCBL-_M
2 Servo Ampliier and Direct Drive Motor, or
For Encoder
(_ = cable length 2, 5, 2, 5, 10, 20 IP67

for Connecting Servo Ampliier and Absolute
10, 20, 25, 30)
Position Storage Unit)
Encoder Connector Cable (For Connecting MR-J3DDSPSCBL-_M
3 Absolute Position Storage Unit and Direct (_= cable length 03, 03, 05, 1, 3 IP67
Drive Motor) 05, 1, 3)
MR-J3BUS_M
SSCNET III Cable (*1) 015, 03, 05,
For Controller, CN1A,
4 (_ = cable length: -
(Standard Cord for Inside Panel) 1, 3
015, 03, 05, 1, 3m)
MR-J3BUS_M-A
CN1B
SSCNET III Cable (*1)

5 (_ = cable length: 5, 5, 10, 20 -
(Standard Cable for Outside Panel)
10, 20m)
MR-J3BUS_M-B
SSCNET III Cable (*1)
6 (_ = cable length: 30, 30 -
(Long Distance Cable, Long Bending Life)
40, 50m) (*2)
MR-CCN1CBL-_M
For CN3
7 CN20 or CN3 Pigtail Cable (20 Pin) (_ = cable length 3, 3, 5 -

5m) (*3)
For CN3
8 Input/Output Signal Connector Set MR-J2CN1 (*4) S -

For CN5
Personal Computer Communication Cable - MR-J3USBCBL3M

9 S -
USB Cable length: 3m
CN1B
For
10 Connector Cap for SSCNET III (Standard accessory) - -
Power Supply Connector Set for TM-RFM_C20, MR-PWCNF

S IP67
TM-RFM_E20 (straight type)
For Motor Power Supply
MR-PWCNS4
Power Supply Connector set for TM-RFM_G20 S IP67
(straight type)
11 Power Supply Connector Set for MR-PWCNS5
S IP67
TM-RFM040J10, TM-RFM120J10 (straight type)
Power Supply Connector Set for MR-PWCNS3

S IP67
TM-RFM240J10 (straight type)

Power Connectors (Comes with J3
12
CNP1 Connector 2kW - 3.5kW (200VAC) (*6) PC4/6-STF-7.62 S -
Ampliier standard)
13 CNP2 Connector up to 3.5kW (200VAC) (*6) 54927-0510 S -

14
CNP3 Connector 2kW - 3.5kW (200VAC) (*6) PC4/3-STF-7.62 S -
15 CNP1-2-3 Insertion Tool (200VAC) 54932-0000 S -
20 Pin Terminal Block For J3-B

16 PS7DW-20V14B-F S -
For CN3
MR-J2HBUS_M
17 Cable for PS7DW-20V14B-F Terminal Block (_ = Cable length 0.5, 05, 1, 3, 5 -
1, 3, 5m)
Encoder Connector Set (For Connecting
Servo Ampliier and Direct Drive Motor, or
MR-J3DDCNS S IP67
For Encoder
18 for Connecting Servo Ampliier and Absolute

Position Storage Unit)
Encoder Connector Set (For Connecting
19 Absolute Position Storage Unit and Direct MR-J3DDSPS S IP67
Drive Motor)
Notes:
1. Look carefully through the precautions enclosed with the options before use.
2. Contact your local sales office for the cables with ultra-long bending life and/or for unlisted lengths.
3. Special tools are required. Contact your local sales office for details.
4. The connector and shell kit are soldered type. Models for press bonding type are 10120-6000EL (connector) and 10320-3210-000 (shell kit).
5. The IP rating indicated is for the connector’s protection against ingress of dust and water when coupled to a servo amplifier/direct drive motor. If the IP rating of the servo amplifier/direct drive motor differs from
that of these connectors, overall IP rating depends on the lowest of all.
6. Use this model for amplifiers manufactured prior to January 2008.
344
MR-CONFIGURATOR2 • (MRZJW3-MOTSZ111E)
personal computer.
test mode menus.
Manuals Stocked
Item
Hardware Description Model Number Stocked Item Windows Communication Software MR-CONFIGURATOR2 S
MR-J3-B-RJ080W - MEAU.com Communication Cable MR-J3USBCBL3M S
E. System Options
RS-422 Distributor (For Multidrop) 20 Pin Terminal Block (*1)
MR-J3-B BMJ-8 S MR-J3-B PS7DW-20V14B-F S
Note: MR-TB20 terminal block cannot be used for MR-J3-B.

MR-J3-200B
FR-BSF01 S
or Smaller
All 200VAC J3 Models FR-BIF S
MR-J3-350B or
FR-BLF S
Larger
EMC Filter
Servo Amplifier Type Model Number (*) Stocked Item Description
MR-J3-100B and less MF3F480-010.233MF -
MR-J3-200B ~ 350B MF3F480-015.230MF3 -
*Note: Contact MEAU for additional filter opportunities.

Battery
Model Number Description Stocked Item Description

MR-J3BAT in the servo amplifier. The battery is not required when the servo system is S
Absolute Position Storage Unit

Unit: mm
Model Number Description
0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) Non-freezing),
Ambient Temperature
Storage: -20 to 65°C (-4 to 149°F) non-freezing)
90% RH max. non-condensing)
Ambient Humidity
Storage: 90% RH max. (non-condensing)
Indoors (no direct sunlight): no corrosive gas,
Atmosphere inlammable gas, oil mist, dust or splash of
MR-BTAS01
oil/water)
When mounted on the surface AL 49m/s2 or less
(direction of X, Y and Z axes)
Vibration
When mounted on surface B: 5.9m/s2 or less
(directions of X, Y and Z axes)

Tolerable Regenerative Power (W) (*3)
Built-in
Optional Regeneration Unit (*1)
Servo Amplifier Regenerative
Resistor/(*1) MR-RB032 MR-RB12 MR-RB30 MR-RB31 MR-RB32 MR-RB50 MR-RB51 (6Ω)
(40Ω) (40Ω) (13Ω) (6.7Ω) (40Ω) (13Ω)(*2) (*2)
Stocked Item - S S S - S S S
MR-J3-20B-RJ080W 10 30 100 - - - - -
MR-J3-40B-RJ080W 10 30 100 - - - - -
MR-J3-60B-RJ080W 10 30 100 - - - - -
MR-J3-70B-RJ080W 20 30 100 - - 300 - -
MR-J3-100B-RJ080W 20 30 100 - - 300 - -
MR-J3-350B-RJ080W 100 - - 300 - - 500 -
MR-J3-500B-RJ080W 130 - - - 300 - - 500
Notes:
1. For external dimensions and connections of the built-in regenerative resistor and optional regeneration unit, refer to MELSERVO-J3 catalog.
2. Be sure to install a cooling fan. The cooling fan must be supplied by user.
3. The power values in this table are resistor-regenerated powers, not rated powers.
346
TM-RFM002C20, TM-RFM004C20, TM-RFM006C20
(Unit: mm)
TM-RFM006E20, TM-RFM012E20, TM-RFM018E20
Note: For dimensions where there is no tolerance listed, use general tolerance. The actual dimensions may be 1 to 3mm larger than the dimensions
listed. Make allowances for the tolerance when designing a machine.

TM-RFM002C20, TM-RFM004C20, TM-RFM006C20
(Unit: mm)
TM-RFM040J10, TM-RFM120J10, TM-RFM240J10
Note: For dimensions where there is no tolerance listed, use general tolerance. The actual dimensions may be 1 to 3mm larger than the dimensions
listed. Make allowances for the tolerance when designing a machine.
348
MR-J4 Servomotors and Amplifiers
With a capacity range of 50W to 30kW, both the amplifier and motor size is reduced. A high resolution encoder of 4 million pulse/rev, with a speed
frequency response of 2500Hz has been added. Additional features include advanced one-touch auto tuning and advanced vibration suppression
control II functions. The MR-J4 motors have the same flange size as J3 motors with the length of the motor being the same or smaller than the J3.
The same cables for power, encoder and brake can be used for the MR-J3 and MR-J4. Sizing and setup of servo systems is made easy with M-Size
sizing software and MR-Configurator configuration software..
Servo Amplifier
MR-J4-B MR-J4-B MR-J4W2-B Servo Amplifier
MR-J4W2-B
(2 axis)
Personal computer
D
Personal computer D USB cable
USB cable MR-J3USBCBL3M Setup software

MR Configurator2
MR-J3USBCBL3M Setup software
MR Configurator2
Main circuit
power supply Junction Terminal
Junction Terminal Block Cable
Block Cable
MR-TBNATBL_M
MR-TBNATBL_M
STO I/O Signal Connector

A STO I/O Signal Connector
MR-D05UDL3M-B
MR-D05UDL3M-B A
Controller
Controller MR-J3BUS_M,
MR-J3BUS_M, MR-J3BUS_M-A/-B cable • Q173DSCPU
• Q173DSCPU
MR-J3BUS_M-A/-B cable • Q172DSCPU
• Q172DSCPU
• QD77MS
• QD77MS
Control circuit
power supply
MR-J3BUS_M,
MR-J3BUS_M-A/-B cable MR-J3BUS_M,
MR-J3BUS_M-A/-B cable
Connects to CN1A, CN1B Connects to CN1A, CN1B

Servo amplifier
MR-J4-B, MR-J4W_-B
Servo amplifier
MR-J4-B, MR-J4W_-B
Encoder cable
Encoder cable C
C
Power cable
Power cable
B
B
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo Amplifier
MR-J4W3-B Servo Amplifier
MR-J4W3-B
MR-J4-A MR-J4-A
(3 axis)
Personal computer
D
USB cable
MR-J3USBCBL3M Personal computer D

Setup software
MR Configurator2 USB cable
MR-J3USBCBL3M
Setup software
Junction Terminal MR Configurator2
Block Cable
MR-TBNATBL_M
Analog Monitor Output Connector
MR-J3CN6CBL1M
STO I/O Signal Connector
A MR-D05UDL3M-B STO I/O Signal Connector

A
A
Controller MR-D05UDL3M-B
MR-J3BUS_M,
MR-J3BUS_M-A/-B cable • Q173DSCPU
• Q172DSCPU
• QD77MS
POWER
ERROR
MR-J3BUS_M,
START
DOG
X0 PGO
I/O Signal Connector X1 FP

FX 2N-10PG ø RP
ø CLR
MR-J3BUS_M-A/-B cable
MR-J2M-CN1TBL_M
Connects to CN1A, CN1B
Servo amplifier
MR-J4-B, MR-J4W_-B
Encoder cable
C
Encoder cable
Power cable
C
Power cable
Servo motor B
Servo motor B
A. MR-J4 Amplifiers ........................................................................................................................350

B. MR-J4 Rotary Servomotors ........................................................................................................360
C. Servo Amplifier Cables and Connectors ......................................................................................373
D. Software and Manuals.................................................................................................................383
E. System Options ...........................................................................................................................383
F. MR-J4-T20: Conversion Unit for SSCNET of MR-J2S-B ..............................................................385

A. MR-J4 Amplifiers X = Compatible
- = Not compatible
Amplifier Types
Interface Control Mode Compatible Motor Series
Rated Output (kW)

Fully Closed Loop
Power Supply
Control Axes
Analog Voltage
Number of
SSCNET III / H
Control (*2)
Pulse Train
Multi-Drop
TM-RFM
Position
(*1)
CC-Link
RS-422
HG-MR
HG-RR
HG-UR
Torque
HG-KR
HG-SR
LM-H3
LM-U2
LM-K2
HG-JR
Speed
Type
LM-F
MR-J4-B(-RJ) 0.1, 0.2, 0.4,
3-Phase 0.6, 0.75, 1, 2,
X - - - - X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
200VAC 3.5, 5, 7, 11,
1 axis 15, 22
3-Phase 0.6, 1, 2, 3.5,
X - - - - X X X X - - X X - - - X - - -
400VAC 5, 7, 11, 15, 22
SSCNET III/H interface
MR-J4W2-B
3-Phase 0.2, 0.4, 0.75,

X - - - - X X X X 2 axes X X X X - X X - X X X
200VAC 1
MR-J4W3-B
3-Phase
X - - - X X X - - (*3) 3 axes 0.2, 0.4 X X - - - - X - X X X
200VAC
MR-J4-B-
Network Interface
CC-Link IE Field
RJ010+MR-
with Motion
0.1, 0.2,
J3-T10 3-Phase 0.4,0.6, 0.75,
- X - - - X - - - 1 axis X X X X X X - - - - -
200 VAC 1,2, 3.5, 5,
7,11, 15, 22
MR-J4-A(-RJ) 0.1, 0.2, 0.4,

3-Phase 0.6, 0.75, 1, 2,
General Purpose
- - X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
200VAC 3.5, 5, 7, 11,
Interface
15, 22
1 axis
3-Phase 0.6, 1, 2, 3.5,
- - X X X X X X X - - X X - - - X - - -
400VAC 5, 7, 11, 15, 22
Notes:
1. The listed are the rated output of the servo amplifier. For the compatible servo motor capacities, refer to the MR-J4 Brochure for more details. 2. MR-J4-B/A servo amplifier is compatible only with two-wire
type serial linear encoder. For four-wire type serial linear encoder and pulse train interface (A/B/Z-phase differential output type), MR-J4-B-RJ/A-RJ servo amplifier is available. 3.Contact your local sales
office for more details.
1-Axis Servo Amplifier Selection Multi-Axis Servo Amplifier Selection

(Example Part No. = MR-J4-10B-ED) (Example Part No. = MR-J4W2-22B-ED)
Symbol Special Specification
MR-J4- - None
3-phase 200 VAC or M R -J 4W - B -ED
1-phase 200 VAC (*3)
4 3-phase 400 VAC (*4)
Symbol Options Mitsubishi General ED Without a dynamic brake (*1)
Mitsubishi General
None Standard Purpose AC Servo
Purpose AC Servo
Fully closed loop control Amplifier
Amplifier Symbol Interface Symbol Interface
RJ four-wire type/load-side encoder
A General-purpose A/B/Z-phase input compatible B SSCNET III/H
B SSCNET III/H (*7) CC-Link IE Field Network interface
RJ010 with Motion (*5) Rated Output [kW] (*2)
Symbol Rated Output [kW] Symbol
Without a dynamic brake (*1) A-Axis B-Axis C-Axis
ED
10 0.1 22 0.2 0.2 -
Without an enclosed
20 0.2 PX 44 0.4 0.4 -
regenerative resistor (*6)
40 0.4 77 0.75 0.75 -
MR-J4-_-RJ without
60 0.6 RU
a dynamic brake (*1) 1010 1 1 -
70 0.75 222 0.2 0.2 0.2
MR-J4-_-RJ without an enclosed
100 1 RZ regenerative resistor (*6) 444 0.4 0.4 0.4
200 2
MR-J4-_-RJ010 without
350 3.5 RU010 Symbol Number of Axes
a dynamic brake (*1)
500 5 W2 2 axes
MR-J4-_-RJ010 without
700 7 W3 3 axes
RZ010 an enclosed regenerative
11K 11 resistor (*6)
15K 15 SSCNET network interface with
RJ020
22K 22 motion (*8)
Notes:
1. When using the servo amplifier without a dynamic brake, the servo motor does not stop immediately at alarm occurrence or power failure. Take measures to ensure safety on the entire system.
2. A-axis, B-axis, and C-axis indicate names of axes of the multi-axis servo amplifier. The C-axis is available for the 3-axis servo amplifier.
3. MR-J4-70_ and smaller capacity servo amplifiers are available for 1-phase 200 VAC.
4. MR-J4-60_4 or larger capacity servo amplifiers are available.
5. CC-Link IE Field Network interface with Motion is available only with MR-J4-_B-RJ010. CC-Link IE Field Network interface unit (MR-J3-T10) is required.
6. Available in 11 kW to 22 kW servo amplifier. A regenerative resistor (standard accessory) is not enclosed.
7. MR-J4-_B-RJ010 has CC-Link IE Field Network interface with Motion.
8. MR-J4-T20 conversion unit for SSCNET of MR-J2S-B is required to make the servo amplifier be compatible with SSCNET interface. When MR-J4-B-RJ020 and MR-J4-T20 are combined, MR-J4-B-RJ020
is compatible with the following servo system controllers: A171SHCPU(N), A172SHCPU(N), A173UHCPU, A1SD75M, QD75M, Q172CPU(N), and Q173CPU(N)
350
Combinations of 1-Axis Servo Amplifier and Servomotor 200V
Servo Amplifier Stocked Item Rotary Servomotor Linear Servomotor (Primary Side) (*1) Direct Drive Motor
MR-J4-10B(-RJ) HG-KR053, 13
S - -
MR-J4-10A(-RJ) HG-MR053, 13
MR-J4-20B(-RJ) HG-KR23 LM-U2PAB-05M-0SS0
S TM-RFM002C20
MR-J4-20A(-RJ) HG-MR23 LM-U2PBB-07M-1SS0
LM-H3P2A-07P-BSS0
LM-H3P3A-12P-CSS0
MR-J4-40B(-RJ) HG-KR43
S LM-K2P1A-01M-2SS1 TM-RFM004C20
MR-J4-40A(-RJ) HG-MR43
LM-U2PAD-10M-0SS0
LM-U2PAF-15M-0SS0
MR-J4-60B(-RJ) HG-SR51, 52 TM-RFM006C20
S LM-U2PBD-15M-1SS0
MR-J4-60A(-RJ) HG-JR53 TM-RFM006E20
LM-H3P3B-24P-CSS0
HG-KR73
LM-H3P3C-36P-CSS0 TM-RFM012E20
MR-J4-70B(-RJ) HG-MR73
S LM-H3P7A-24P-ASS0 TM-RFM012G20
MR-J4-70A(-RJ) HG-JR73
LM-K2P2A-02M-1SS1 TM-RFM040J10
HG-UR72
LM-U2PBF-22M-1SS0
MR-J4-100B(-RJ) HG-SR81, 102
S - TM-RFM018E20
MR-J4-100A(-RJ) HG-JR53 (*2), 103
LM-H3P3D-48P-CSS0
HG-SR121, 201, 152, 202 LM-H3P7B-48P-ASS0
MR-J4-200B(-RJ) HG-JR73 (*2), 103 (*2), 153, 203 LM-H3P7C-72P-ASS0
S -
MR-J4-200A(-RJ) HG-RR103, 153 LM-FP2B-06M-1SS0
HG-UR152 LM-K2P1C-03M-2SS1
LM-U2P2B-40M-2SS0
HG-SR301, 352 LM-H3P7D-96P-ASS0
TM-RFM048G20
MR-J4-350B(-RJ) HG-JR153 (*2), 203 (*2), 353 LM-K2P2C-07M-1SS1
S TM-RFM072G20
MR-J4-350A(-RJ) HG-RR203 LM-K2P3C-14M-1SS1
TM-RFM120J10
HG-UR202 LM-U2P2C-60M-2SS0
LM-FP2D-12M-1SS0
HG-SR421, 502
LM-FP4B-12M-1SS0
MR-J4-500B(-RJ) HG-JR353 (*2), 503
S LM-K2P2E-12M-1SS1 TM-RFM240J10
MR-J4-500A(-RJ) HG-RR353, 503
LM-K2P3E-24M-1SS1
HG-UR352, 502
LM-U2P2D-80M-2SS0
MR-J4-700B(-RJ) HG-SR702 LM-FP2F-18M-1SS0
S -
MR-J4-700A(-RJ) HG-JR503 (*2), 703 LM-FP4D-24M-1SS0
MR-J4-11KB(-RJ)
S HG-JR903, 11K1M LM-FP4F-36M-1SS0 -
MR-J4-11KA(-RJ)
MR-J4-15KB(-RJ)
S HG-JR15K1M LM-FP4H-48M-1SS0 -
MR-J4-15KA(-RJ)
MR-J4-22KB(-RJ)
S HG-JR22K1M - -
MR-J4-22KA(-RJ)
Notes:
1. Models of the linear servo motor primary side are listed in this page. For compatible models of the secondary side, refer to MR-J4 Brochure.
2. The maximum torque can be increased from 300% to 400% of the rated torque with this combination.
Combinations of 1-Axis Servo Amplifier and Servomotor with MR-J4-B-RJ010 Servo Amplifier (200V)
Servo Amplifier Stocked Item Rotary Servomotor
MR-J4-10B-RJ010 S HG-KR053, 13; HG-MR053, 13

MR-J4-20B-RJ010 S HG-KR23; HG-MR23
MR-J4-40B-RJ010 S HG-KR43; HG-MR43
MR-J4-60B-RJ010 S HG-SR51, 52; HG-JR53
HG-KR73; HG-MR73
MR-J4-70B-RJ010 S
HG-JR73; HG-UR72
MR-J4-100B-RJ010 S HG-SR81, 102; HG-JR53 (*1), 103
HG-SR121, 201, 152, 202
MR-J4-200B-RJ010 S HG-JR73 (*1), 103 (*1), 153, 203
HG-RR103, 153; HG-UR152
HG-SR301, 352; HG-JR153 (*1), 203 (*1), 353; HG-RR203
MR-J4-350B-RJ010 S
HG-UR202
HG-SR421, 502; HG-JR353 (*1), 503; HG-RR353, 503
MR-J4-500B-RJ010 S
HG-UR352, 502
MR-J4-700B-RJ010 S HG-SR702; HG-JR503 (*1), 703
MR-J4-11KB-RJ010 - HG-JR903, 11K1M
MR-J4-15KB-RJ010 - HG-JR15K1M
MR-J4-22KB-RJ010 - HG-JR22K1M
Note:

Combinations of 1-Axis Servo Amplifier and Servomotor 400V
MR-J4-60B4(-RJ) HG-SR524
S - -
MR-J4-60A4(-RJ) HG-JR534
MR-J4-100B4(-RJ) HG-SR1024
S - -
MR-J4-100A4(-RJ) HG-JR534 (*2), 734, 1034
HG-SR1524, 2024
MR-J4-200B4(-RJ)
S HG-JR734 (*2), 1034 (*2), 1534, - -
MR-J4-200A4(-RJ)
2034
MR-J4-350B4(-RJ) HG-SR3524
S - -
MR-J4-350A4(-RJ) HG-JR1534 (*2), 2034 (*2), 3534
MR-J4-500B4(-RJ) HG-SR5024
S - -
MR-J4-500A4(-RJ) HG-JR3534 (*2), 5034
MR-J4-700B4(-RJ) HG-SR7024
S - -
MR-J4-700A4(-RJ) HG-JR5034 (*2), 7034
MR-J4-11KB4(-RJ)
S HG-JR9034, 11K1M4 - -
MR-J4-11KA4(-RJ)
MR-J4-15KB4(-RJ)
S HG-JR15K1M4 - -
MR-J4-15KA4(-RJ)
MR-J4-22KB4(-RJ)
S HG-JR22K1M4 LM-FP5H-60M-1SS0 -
MR-J4-22KA4(-RJ)
Note:
Combinations of Multi-Axis Servo Amplifier and Servomotor

With MR-J4W2-B Servo Amplifier
HG-KR053, 13, 23 LM-U2PAB-05M-0SS0
MR-J4W2-22B S TM-RFM002C20
HG-MR053, 13, 23 LM-U2PBB-07M-1SS0
LM-H3P2A-07P-BSS0
LM-H3P3A-12P-CSS0
LM-K2P1A-01M-2SS1
HG-KR053, 13, 23, 43 TM-RFM002C20
MR-J4W2-44B S LM-U2PAB-05M-0SS0
HG-MR053, 13, 23, 43 TM-RFM004C20
LM-U2PAD-10M-0SS0
LM-U2PAF-15M-0SS0
LM-U2PBB-07M-1SS0
LM-H3P2A-07P-BSS0
LM-H3P3A-12P-CSS0
LM-H3P3B-24P-CSS0
TM-RFM004C20
HG-KR43, 73 LM-H3P3C-36P-CSS0
TM-RFM006C20
HG-MR43, 73 LM-H3P7A-24P-ASS0
TM-RFM006E20
MR-J4W2-77B S HG-SR51, 52 LM-K2P1A-01M-2SS1
TM-RFM012E20
HG-JR53, 73 LM-K2P2A-02M-1SS1
TM-RFM012G20
HG-UR72 LM-U2PAD-10M-0SS0
TM-RFM040J10
LM-U2PAF-15M-0SS0
LM-U2PBD-15M-1SS0
LM-U2PBF-22M-1SS0
LM-H3P2A-07P-BSS0
LM-H3P3A-12P-CSS0
LM-H3P3B-24P-CSS0 TM-RFM004C20
HG-KR43, 73 LM-H3P3C-36P-CSS0 TM-RFM006C20
HG-MR43, 73 LM-H3P7A-24P-ASS0 TM-RFM006E20
MR-J4W2-1010B S HG-SR51, 81, 52, 102 LM-K2P1A-01M-2SS1 TM-RFM012E20
HG-JR53 (*2), 73, 103 LM-K2P2A-02M-1SS1 TM-RFM018E20
HG-UR72 LM-U2PAD-10M-0SS0 TM-RFM012G20
LM-U2PAF-15M-0SS0 TM-RFM040J10
LM-U2PBD-15M-1SS0
LM-U2PBF-22M-1SS0
Notes:
With MR-J4W3-B Servo Amplifier

HG-KR053, 13, 23 LM-U2PAB-05M-0SS0
MR-J4W3-222B S TM-RFM002C20
HG-MR053, 13, 23 LM-U2PBB-07M-1SS0
LM-H3P2A-07P-BSS0
LM-H3P3A-12P-CSS0
LM-K2P1A-01M-2SS1
HG-KR053, 13, 23, 43 TM-RFM002C20
MR-J4W3-444B S LM-U2PAB-05M-0SS0
HG-MR053, 13, 23, 43 TM-RFM004C20
LM-U2PAD-10M-0SS0
LM-U2PAF-15M-0SS0
LM-U2PBB-07M-1SS0
Note:
352
MR-J4-B(-RJ) (SSCNET III/H Interface) Specifications (200V)
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J4-_(-RJ) 10B 20B 40B 60B 70B 100B 200B 350B 500B 700B 11KB 15KB 22KB
Stocked Item S S S S S S S S S S S S S
Rated Voltage 3-phase 170 VAC
Output
Rated Current (A) 1.1 1.5 2.8 3.2 5.8 6.0 11.0 17.0 28.0 37.0 68.0 87.0 126.0
3-phase or 1-phase 200 VAC to 240 VAC,
Voltage/Frequency (*1) 3-phase 200 VAC to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
50 Hz/60 Hz
Main Circuit
Power Rated Current (A) 0.9 1.5 2.6 3.2 (*8) 3.8 5.0 10.5 16.0 21.7 28.9 46.0 64.0 95.0
Supply Permissible Voltage Fluctuation 3-phase or 1-phase 170 VAC to 264 VAC 3-phase 170 VAC to 264 VAC
Voltage/Frequency 1-phase 200 VAC to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Rated Current (A) 0.2 0.3
Control
Circuit Power Permissible Voltage Fluctuation 1-phase 170 VAC to 264 VAC
Interface Power Supply 24 VDC ±10% (required current capacity: 0.3 A (including CN8 connector signal))
Control Method (*8) Sine-wave PWM control/current control method
Built-in Regenerative Resistor
Tolerable - 10 10 10 20 20 100 100 130 170 - - -
(*2, *3) (W)
Regenerative
External Regenerative Resistor (W) 500 850 850
Power - - - - - - - - - -
(Standard Accessory) (*2, 3, 11, 12) (800) (1300) (1300)
Dynamic Brake Built-in (*4) External option (*13)
SSCNET III/H Command Communication Cycle (*10) 0.222 ms, 0.444 ms, 0.888 ms
Communication Function USB: Connect a personal computer (MR Configurator2 compatible)
Encoder Output Pulse Compatible (A/B/Z-phase pulse)
Analog Monitor 2 channels
Fully Closed MR-J4-B Two-wire type communication method (*9)

Loop Control MR-J4-B-RJ Two-wire/four-wire type communication method
Load-Side MR-J4-B Mitsubishi high-speed serial communication
Encoder
Interface MR-J4-B-RJ Mitsubishi high-speed serial communication, A/B/Z-phase differential input signal
Overcurrent shut-off, regenerative overvoltage shut-off, overload shut-off (electronic thermal), servomotor overheat protection,
Protective Functions encoder error protection, regenerative error protection, undervoltage protection, instantaneous power failure protection,
overspeed protection, error excessive protection, magnetic pole detection protection, linear servo control fault protection
Safety Function (*10) STO (IEC/EN 61800-5-2)
Standards Certified by CB EN ISO 13849-1 Category 3 PL d, EN 61508 SIL 2, EN 62061 SIL CL 2, EN 61800-5-2 SIL 2
Response Performance 8 ms or less (STO input OFF - energy shut-off)
Test Pulse Input (STO) (*7) Test pulse frequency: 1 Hz to 25 Hz; Test pulse off time: 1 ms maximum
Safety
Mean Time to Dangerous
Performance 100 years or longer
Failure (MTTFd)
Diagnostic Coverage (DC) Medium (90% to 99%)
Probability of Dangerous
1.68 × 10-10 [1/h]
Failure Per Hour (PFH)
CE: EN 61800-5-1, EN 61800-3, EN ISO 13849-1 Category 3 PL d/EN 61508 SIL 2/ EN 62061 SIL CL 2/EN 61800-5-2 SIL 2;
Compliance to Standards
RoHS compliant; UL: UL508C
Structure (IP Rating) Natural cooling, open (IP20) Force cooling, open (IP20) Force cooling, open (IP20) (*5)
Close Mounting Possible (*6) Not possible
Ambient Temperature 0 °C to 55 °C (non-freezing), storage: -20 °C to 65 °C (non-freezing)
Ambient Humidity 90 %RH maximum (non-condensing), storage: 90 %RH maximum (non-condensing)
Environment Ambience Indoors (no direct sunlight); no corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist or dust
Altitude 1000 m or less above sea level
Vibration Resistance 5.9 m/s2 at 10 Hz to 55 Hz (directions of X, Y and Z axes)
Weight (kg) 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.4 1.4 2.1 2.3 4.0 6.2 13.4 13.4 18.2
Notes:
1. Rated output and speed of a rotary servo motor and a direct drive motor; and continuous thrust and maximum speed of a linear servo motor are applicable when the servo amplifier, combined with the servo
motor, is operated within the specified power supply voltage and frequency.
2. Select the most suitable regenerative option for your system with our capacity selection software.
3. Refer to "Regenerative Option" in this catalog for the tolerable regenerative power [W] when regenerative option is used.
4. When using the built-in dynamic brake, refer to "MR-J4-_B(-RJ) Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual" for the permissible load to motor inertia ratio and the permissible load to mass ratio.
5. Terminal blocks are excluded.
6. When the servo amplifiers are closely mounted, keep the ambient temperature within 0 °C to 45 °C, or use them with 75% or less of the effective load ratio.
7. The test pulse is a signal for the external circuit to perform self-diagnosis by turning off the signals to the servo amplifier instantaneously at regular intervals.
8. The rated current is 2.9 A when the servo amplifier is used with UL or CSA compliant servo motor.
9. Fully closed loop control is compatible with the servo amplifiers with software version A3 or later.
10. 1The command communication cycle depends on the controller specifications and the number of axes connected.
11. The value in brackets is applicable when cooling fans (2 units of 92 mm 5 92 mm, minimum air flow: 1.0 m3/min) are installed, and then [Pr. PA02] is changed.
12. Servo amplifiers without an enclosed regenerative resistor are also available. Refer to "1-Axis Servo Amplifier Model Designation" in this catalog for details.
13. Use an optional external dynamic brake with the servo amplifier. Without the external dynamic brake, a servo motor does not stop immediately at emergency stop and falls in free-run status, causing an accident
such as machine collision, etc. Take measures to ensure safety on the entire system when not using the dynamic brake.

MR-J4-B4(-RJ) (SSCNET III/H Interface) Specifications (400V)
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J4-_(-RJ) 60B4 100B4 200B4 350B4 500B4 700B4 11KB4 15KB4 22KB4
Output
Rated Current (A) 1.5 2.8 5.4 8.6 14.0 17.0 32.0 41.0 63.0
Voltage/Frequency (*1) 3-phase 380 VAC to 480 VAC, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Main Circuit Rated Current (A) 1.4 2.5 5.1 7.9 10.8 14.4 23.1 31.8 47.6
Power
Supply Permissible Voltage Fluctuation 3-phase 232 VAC to 528 VAC
Control
Tolerable 15 15 100 100 130 (*11) 170 (*11) - - -
(*2, *3) (W)
Regenerative
Power - - - - - -
Fully Closed MR-J4-B4 Two-wire type communication method

Loop Control MR-J4-B4-RJ Two-wire/four-wire type communication method
Load-Side MR-J4-B4 Mitsubishi high-speed serial communication
Encoder
Interface MR-J4-B4-RJ Mitsubishi high-speed serial communication, A/B/Z-phase differential input signal
Safety Function (*10) STO (IEC/EN 61800-5-2)
Standards Certified by CE EN ISO 13849-1 Category 3 PL d, EN 61508 SIL 2, EN 62061 SIL CL 2, EN 61800-5-2 SIL 2
Safety
Failure (MTTFd)
1.68 × 10-10 [1/h]
Natural cooling, open
Structure (IP Rating) Force cooling, open (IP20) Force cooling, open (IP20) (*5)
(IP20)
Close Mounting Not Possible Not possible
Ambient Temperature 0°C to 55°C (non-freezing), storage: -20°C to 65°C (non-freezing)
Weight (kg) 1.7 1.7 2.1 3.6 4.3 6.5 13.4 13.4 18.2
Notes:
1. Rated output and speed of a rotary servo motor, and continuous thrust and maximum speed of a linear servo motor are applicable when the servo amplifier, combined with the servo motor, is operated within the
specified power supply voltage and frequency.
4. When using the built-in dynamic brake, refer to "MR-J4-_A4(-RJ) MR-J4-_B4(-RJ) Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual" for the permissible load to motor inertia ratio and the permissible load to mass ratio.
7. The command communication cycle depends on the controller specifications and the number of axes connected.
11. The servo amplifier built-in regenerative resistor is compatible with the maximum torque deceleration when the servo motor is used within the rated speed and the recommended load to motor inertia ratio.
Contact your local sales office if the operating motor speed or the load to motor inertia ratio exceed the rated speed or the recommended ratio.
354
MR-J4W2-B (2-Axis, SSCNET III/H Interface) Specifications (200V)
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J4W2- 22B 44B 77B 1010B
Output
Rated Current (Each Axis) (A) 1.5 2.8 5.8 6.0
3-phase 200 VAC to 240 VAC,
Voltage/Frequency (*1) 3-phase or 1-phase 200 VAC to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
Main Circuit Rated Current (A) 2.9 5.2 7.5 9.8
Power Supply 3-phase 170 VAC to
Permissible Voltage Fluctuation 3-phase or 1-phase 170 VAC to 264 VAC
264 VAC
Rated Current (A) 0.4
Control
Control Method Sine-wave PWM control/current control method
Reusable Regeneration Energy (J)
17 21 44
(W) (*5)
Moment of Inertia (J) Equivalent
to Permissible Charging Amount 3.45 4.26 8.92
Capacitor
(× 10-4 kg•m²) (*6)
Regeneration
Mass Equivalent LM-H3 3.8 4.7 9.8
to Permissible
Charging Amount LM-K2
8.5 10.5 22.0
(kg) (*7) LM-U2
Tolerable Regenerative Power of the Built-in
20 100
Regenerative Resistor (*2, *3) (W)
Encoder Output Pulse Compatible (A/B-phase pulse)
Analog Monitor None
Fully Closed Loop Control (*11) Available (*12)
Load-Side Encoder Interface (*9) Mitsubishi high-speed serial communication
Overcurrent shut-off, regenerative overvoltage shut-off, overload shut-off (electronic thermal), servo motor overheat protection,
Safety Function STO (IEC/EN 61800-5-2) (*10)
Response Performance 8 ms or less (STO input OFF — energy shut-off)
Safety Mean Time to Dangerous
100 years or longer
Performance Failure (MTTFd)
Average Diagnostic Coverage
Medium (90% to 99%)
(DCavg)
1.68 × 10-10 [1/h]
Structure (IP Rating) Natural cooling, open (IP20) Force cooling, open (IP20)
Close Mounting Possible
Weight (kg) 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0
Notes:
4. When using the built-in dynamic brake, refer to "MR-J4W_-_B Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual" for the permissible load to motor inertia ratio and the permissible load to mass ratio.
5. Reusable regenerative energy is equivalent to the energy generated under the following conditions. For rotary servo motor: the energy that is generated when the machine, whose moment of inertia is equivalent
to the permissible charging amount, decelerates from the rated speed to a stop. For linear servo motor: the energy that is generated when the machine, whose mass is equivalent to the permissible charging
amount, decelerates from the maximum speed to a stop. For direct drive motor: the energy that is generated when the machine, whose moment of inertia is equivalent to the permissible charging amount,
decelerates from the rated speed to a stop.
6. This value is the moment of inertia when the rotary servo motor decelerates from the rated speed to a stop. When two axes are simultaneously decelerated, the permissible charging amount is equivalent to the
total moments of inertia of the two axes. Otherwise, the permissible charging amount is equivalent to the moment of inertia of each axis. The value also applies to the direct drive motor.
7. This value is the mass when the linear servo motor decelerates from maximum speed to a stop. Mass of primary side (coil) is included. When two axes are simultaneously decelerated, the permissible charging
amount is equivalent to the total masses of the two axes. Otherwise, the permissible charging amount is equivalent to the mass of each axis.
9. Not compatible with pulse train interface (A/B/Z-phase differential output type).
10. STO is common for all axes.
11. The load-side encoder and the servo motor encoder are compatible only with two-wire type communication method.
12. 12. Fully closed loop control is compatible with the servo amplifiers with software version A3 or later.
13. 13. The command communication cycle depends on the controller specifications and the number of axes connected.

MR-J4W3-B (3-Axis, SSCNET III/H Interface) Specifications (200V)
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J4W3- 222B 444B
Stocked Item S S
Output
Voltage/Frequency (*1) 3-phase or 1-phase 200 VAC to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Main Circuit Rated Current (A) 4.3 7.8
Power Supply Permissible Voltage Fluctuation 3-phase or 1-phase 170 VAC to 264 VAC
Control Rated Current (A) 0.4
Reusable Regenerative Energy (J)
21 30
(*5)
Moment of inertia (J) Equivalent
to Permissible Charging Amount 4.26 6.08
Capacitor (× 10-4 kg•m²) (*6)
Regeneration
Mass Equivalent LM-H3 4.7 6.7
to Permissible
Charging Amount LM-K2
10.5 15.0
(kg) (*7) LM-U2
Tolerable Regenerative Power of the Built-in
30
Regenerative Resistor (*2, *3) (W)
SSCNET III/H Command Communication Cycle (*10) 0.222 ms (*11) , 0.444 ms, 0.888 ms
Encoder Output Pulse Not compatible
Analog Monitor None
Fully Closed Loop Control Not compatible
Safety Function (*10) STO (IEC/EN 61800-5-2) (*9)
Performance Failure (MTTFd) 100 years or longer
Diagnostic Coverage (DCavg) Medium (90% to 99%)

1.68 × 10-10 [1/h]
Compliance to Standards LVD: EN 61800-5-1; EMC: EN 61800-3; MD: EN ISO 13849-1, EN 61800-5-2, EN 62061
Structure (IP Rating) Forced cooling, open (IP20)
Close Mounting Possible
Weight (kg) 1.9 1.9
Notes:
4. When using the built-in dynamic brake, refer to "MR-J4W_-_B Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual" for the permissible load to motor inertia ratio and the permissible load to mass ratio.
5. Reusable regenerative energy is equivalent to the energy generated under the following conditions. For rotary servo motor: the energy that is generated when the machine, whose moment of inertia is equivalent
to the permissible charging amount, decelerates from the rated speed to a stop. For linear servo motor: the energy that is generated when the machine, whose mas is equivalent to the permissible charging
amount, decelerates from the maximum speed to a stop. For direct drive motor: the energy that is generated when the machine, whose moment of inertia is equivalent to the permissible charging amount,
decelerates from the rated speed to a stop.
6. This value is the moment of inertia when the rotary servo motor decelerates from the rated speed to a stop. When three axes are simultaneously decelerated, the permissible charging amount is equivalent to the
total moments of inertia of the three axes. Otherwise, the permissible charging amount is equivalent to the moment of inertia of each axis. The value also applies to the direct drive motor.
7. This value is the mass when the linear servo motor decelerates from maximum speed to a stop. Mass of primary side (coil) is included. When three axes are simultaneously decelerated, the permissible charging
amount is equivalent to the total masses of the three axes. Otherwise, the permissible charging amount is equivalent to the mass of each axis.
9. STO is common for all axes.
10. The command communication cycle depends on the controller specifications and the number of axes connected.
11. Servo amplifier with software version A3 or later is compatible with the command communication cycle of 0.222 ms. However, note that the following functions are not
12. available when 0.222 ms is used: auto tuning (real time, one-touch, and vibration suppression control), adaptive filter II, vibration tough drive, and power monitoring.
356
MR-J4-B-RJ010 (CC-Link IE Field Network interface with Motion) * Available in the future
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J4-_(-RJ) 10B 20B 40B 60B 70B 100B 200B 350B 500B 700B 11KB* 15KB* 22KB*
Stocked Item S S S S S S S S S S - - -
Output
Rated Current (A) 1.1 1.5 2.8 3.2 5.8 6.0 11.0 17.0 28.0 37.0 68.0 87.0 126.0
50 Hz/60 Hz
Main Circuit
Power Rated Current (A) 0.9 1.5 2.6 3.2 (*8) 3.8 5.0 10.5 16.0 21.7 28.9 46.0 64.0 95.0
Control
Tolerable - 10 10 10 20 20 100 100 130 170 - - -
(*2, *3) (W)
Regenerative
Power - - - - - - - - - -
Load-Side Encoder Interface Not compatible
overspeed protection, error excessive protection
Safety Function STO (IEC/EN 61800-5-2)
Safety
Failure (MTTFd)
1.68 × 10-10 [1/h]
Weight (kg) 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.4 1.4 2.1 2.3 4.0 6.2 13.4 13.4 18.2
Notes:
1. Rated output and speed of a rotary servo motor are applicable when the servo amplifier, combined with the rotary servo motor, is operated within the specified power supply voltage and frequency.
4. When using the built-in dynamic brake, refer to "MR-J4-_B(-RJ) Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual" for the permissible load to motor inertia ratio.
such as machine collision, etc. Take measures to ensure safety on the entire system when not using the dynamic brake

MR-J4-A(-RJ) (General-purpose Interface) Specifications (200V)
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J4-_(-RJ) 10A 20A 40A 60A 70A 100A 200A 350A 500A 700A 11KA 15KA 22KA
Stocked Item S S S S S S S S S S S S S
Output
Rated Current (A) 1.1 1.5 2.8 3.2 5.8 6.0 11.0 17.0 28.0 37.0 68.0 87.0 126.0
Voltage/Frequency (*1) 3-phase or 1-phase 200VAC to 240VAC, 50/60 Hz 3-phase 200 VAC to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Main Circuit
Rated Current (A) 0.9 1.5 2.6 3.2 (*8) 3.8 5.0 10.5 16.0 21.7 28.9 46.0 64.0 95.0
Power
Control Rated Current (A) 0.2 0.3
Tolerable - 10 10 10 20 20 100 100 130 170 - - -
(*2, *3) (W)
Regenerative
External Regenerative Resistor 500 850 850
Power - - - - - - - - - -
Communication Function USB: Connect a personal computer (MR Configurator2 compatible); RS-422: 1 : n communication (up to 32 axes) (*10)
Maximum Input Pulse Frequency 4 Mpps (when using differential receiver), 200 kpps (when using open-collector)
Positioning Feedback Pulse Encoder resolution: 22 bits
Position
Command Pulse Multiplying Factor Electronic gear A/B multiple, A: 1 to 16777215, B: 1 to 16777215, 1/10 < A/B < 4000
Control
Mode Positioning Complete Width Setting 0 pulse to ±65535 pulses (command pulse unit)
Torque Limit Set by parameters or external analog input (0 VDC to +10 VDC/maximum torque)
Speed Analog Speed Command Input 0 VDC to ±10 VDC/rated speed (Speed at 10 V is changeable with [Pr. PC12])
Control ±0.01% maximum (load fluctuation 0% to 100%), 0% (power fluctuation: ±10%)
±0.2% maximum (ambient temperature: 25°C ± 10°C) only when using analog speed command
Torque Analog Torque Command Input 0 VDC to ±8 VDC/maximum torque (input impedance: 10 kΩ to 12 kΩ)
Control Mode Speed Limit Set by parameters or external analog input (0 VDC to ± 10 VDC/rated speed)
Fully Closed MR-J4-A Two-wire type communication method
Loop Control MR-J4-A-RJ Two-wire/four-wire type communication method
Load-Side MR-J4-A Mitsubishi high-speed serial communication
Encoder
Interface MR-J4-A-RJ Mitsubishi high-speed serial communication, A/B/Z-phase differential input signal
1.68 × 10-10 [1/h]
Weight (kg) 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.4 1.4 2.1 2.3 4.0 6.2 13.4 13.4 18.2
Notes:
4. When using the built-in dynamic brake, refer to "MR-J4-_A(-RJ) Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual" for the permissible load to motor inertia ratio and the permissible load to mass ratio.
9. Fully closed loop control is compatible with the servo amplifiers with software version A5 or later.
10. RS-422 communication is compatible with the servo amplifiers with software version A3 or later.
358
MR-J4-A(-RJ) (General-purpose Interface) Specifications (400V)
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J4-_(-RJ) 60A4 100A4 200A4 350A4 500A4 700A4 11KA4 15KA4 22KA4
Output
Rated Current (A) 1.5 2.8 5.4 8.6 14.0 17.0 32.0 41.0 63.0
Voltage/Frequency (*1) 3-phase or 1-phase 200VAC to 240VAC, 50/60 Hz
Main Circuit
Rated Current (A) 1.4 2.5 5.1 7.9 10.8 14.4 23.1 31.8 47.6
Power
Control Rated Current (A) 0.1 0.2
Tolerable 15 15 100 100 130 (*10) 170 (*10) - - -
(*2, *3) (W)
Regenerative
Power - - - - - -
Communication Function USB: Connect a personal computer (MR Configurator2 compatible); RS-422: 1 : n communication (up to 32 axes)
Maximum Input Pulse Frequency 4 Mpps (when using differential receiver), 200 kpps (when using open-collector)
Positioning Feedback Pulse Encoder resolution: 22 bits
Position
Command Pulse Multiplying Factor Electronic gear A/B multiple, A: 1 to 16777215, B: 1 to 16777215, 1/10 < A/B < 4000
Control
Mode Positioning Complete Width Setting 0 pulse to ±65535 pulses (command pulse unit)
Speed Analog Speed Command Input 0 VDC to ±10 VDC/rated speed (Speed at 10 V is changeable with [Pr. PC12])
Control ±0.01% maximum (load fluctuation 0% to 100%), 0% (power fluctuation: ±10%)
±0.2% maximum (ambient temperature: 25°C ± 10°C) only when using analog speed command
Torque Analog Torque Command Input 0 VDC to ±8 VDC/maximum torque (input impedance: 10 kΩ to 12 kΩ)
Control Mode Speed Limit Set by parameters or external analog input (0 VDC to ± 10 VDC/rated speed)
Fully Closed MR-J4-A4 Two-wire type communication method
Loop Control MR-J4-A4-RJ Two-wire/four-wire type communication method
Load-Side MR-J4-A4 Mitsubishi high-speed serial communication
Encoder
Interface MR-J4-A4-RJ Mitsubishi high-speed serial communication, A/B/Z-phase differential input signal
1.68 × 10-10 [1/h]
Close Mounting NOT Possible
Weight (kg) 1.7 1.7 2.1 3.6 4.3 6.5 13.4 13.4 18.2
Notes:
1. Rated output and speed of a rotary servo motor, and continuous thrust and maximum speed of a linear servo motor are applicable when the servo amplifier, combined with the servo motor, is operated within the
specified power supply voltage and frequency.
4. When using the built-in dynamic brake, refer to "MR-J4-_A4(-RJ) MR-J4-_B4(-RJ)Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual" for the permissible load to motor inertia ratio and the permissible load to mass ratio.
Contact your local sales office if the operating motor speed or the load to motor inertia ratio exceed the rated speed or the recommended ratio.

X = Available
B. MR-J4 Rotary Servomotors - = Not Available
Rated Output Servomotor Type Protective

Rated Speed Compatible
Rotary Servomotor Series Capacity (kW) Electromagnetic With Reducer With Reducer Degree Features Application Examples
(Max. r/min) Series
(*1) Brake Available (G1) (*2) (G5, G7) (*2) (*3)
• Belt Drive
HG-KR • Robots
• Mounters
• Sewing Machines
Low inertia,
• X-Y Tables
5 Types perfect for
• Food Processing
3000 (6000) 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, X X X IP65 HF-KP general
Machines
0.4, 0.75 industrial
• Semiconductor
machines
manufacturing
Small Capacity
devices
• Knitting and
embroidery machines
HG-MR
Ultra-low inertia
5 Types
Well suited for • Inserters
3000 (6000) 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, X - - IP65 HF-MP
high-throughput • Mounters
0.4, 0.75
operations
HG-SR
6 Types
1000 (1500) 0.5, 0.85, 1.2, X - - IP67
2.0, 3.0, 4.2
Medium Capacity
Medium inertia
• Material handling
This series is
14 types systems
HF-SP available with
0.5, 1.0, 1.5, • Robots
two rated
2.0, 3.5, • X-Y tables
speeds
2000 (3000) 5.0, 7.0 X X X IP67
0.5, 1.0, 1.5,
2.0, 3.5,
5.0, 7.0
18 types
HG-JR
0.5, 0.75, 1.0,
1.5, 2.0,
Medium/large capacity
3000 3.5, 5.0, 7.0, Low inertia • Food packaging

(6000: 0.5~5 kW 9.0 X - - IP67 Well suited for machines
5000: 7, 9 kW) 0.5, 0.75, 1.0, high-throughput • Printing machines
1.5, 2.0, HF-JP
and high-
3.5, 5.0, 7.0, acceleration/
9.0 deceleration
operations
1500 6 types • Injection molding
(3000: 11~15 kW 11, 15, 22 X (*5) - - IP67 (*4) machines
2500: 22 kW_) 11, 15, 22 • Press machines
HG-RR
Medium Capacity
Ultra-low inertia
5 types • Ultra-high-throughput
3000 Well suited for
1.0, 1.5, 2.0, X - - IP65 HC-RP material handling
(4500) high-throughput
3.5, 5.0 systems
operations
Flat type
Medium capacity, flat type
HG-UR
The flat design
makes
this unit well
2000 5 types • Robots
suited for
(3000: 0.75~2 kW 0.75, 1.5, 2.0, X - - IP65 HC-UP • Food processing
situations
2500: 3.5, 5 kW) 3.5, 5.0 machines
where the
installation
space is
limited
Notes:
1. For 400 V.
2. G1 for general industrial machines. G5 and G7 for high precision applications.
3. The shaft-through portion is excluded. Refer to the asterisk 7 of "Annotations for Rotary Servo Motor Specifications" on p. 2-27 in this catalog for the shaft-through portion. For
geared servo motor, IP rating of the reducer portion is equivalent to IP44.
4. 22 kW of HG-JR series is rated IP44.
5. The servo motor with electromagnetic brake is not available for 22 kW of HG-JR series.
360
Servomotor Selection 200V (Example Part No. = HG-KR053BG1)
Not all options available for every motor.
HG-
Symbol Shaft End

None Standard (Straight shaft)(*7)
Symbol Reducer (*5) K Key shaft (with/without key)(*8)
None None
D D-cut shaft (*8)
With reducer for general
Symbol Oil Seal G1 industrial machines,
None None(*9) flange mounting
J Installed (*2, *3, *4) With reducer for general
G1H industrial machines, foot
mounting (*6)
Symbol Electromagnetic Brake With flange-output type
None None reducer for high precision
G5
applications, flange
B Installed (*1)
mounting
With shaft-output type
reducer for high precision
Symbol Rated Speed [r/min] G7
1 1000
mounting
1M 1500
2 2000
3 3000 Stocked Motors
Model Number Model Number
Symbol Rated Output [kW] HG-KR053(B) HG-SR52(B)
05 0.05 HG-KR13(B) HG-SR102(B)
1 to 8 0.1 to 0.85 HG-KR23(B) HG-SR152(B)
10 to 70 1.0 to 7.0 HG-KR43(B) HG-SR202(B)
11k to 22k 11 to 22 HG-KR73(B) HG-SR352(B)
HG-KR053(B)D HG-SR-502(B)
Symbol Inertia/Capacity HG-KR13(B)D HG-SR702(B)
HG-KR Low inertia, small capacity HG-KR23(B)K HG-SR52(B)K
HG-MR Ultra-low inertia, small capacity HG-KR43(B)K HG-SR102(B)K
HG-SR Medium inertia, medium capacity HG-KR73(B)K HG-SR152(B)K
HG-JR Low inertia, medium-large capacity HG-MR053(B) HG-SR202(B)K
HG-RR Ultra low inertia, medium capacity HG-MR13(B) HG-SR502(B)K
HG-UR Flat type, medium capacity HG-MR23(B) HG-SR702(B)K
HG-MR43(B)
Model Number
Notes: HG-MR73(B)
1. Refer to electromagnetic brake specifications of each servo motor series in this catalog for the available models and detailed specifications. HG-MR053(B)D HG-RR103(B)K
2. Available in 0.1 kW or larger HG-KR/HG-MR series and all HG-SR series. HG-RR153(B)K
3. Oil seal is not installed in the geared servo motor. HG-MR13(B)D
HG-MR23(B)K HG-RR353K
4. Dimensions for HG-KR/HG-MR series with oil seal are different from those for the standard models. Contact your local sales office for more details.
5. Refer to "Geared Servo Motor Specifications" in this catalog for the available models and detailed specifications. HG-MR43(B)K HG-RR503K
6. Available only in HF-SR 2000 r/min series.
7. Standard HG-SR G1/G1H has a key shaft (with key). HG-MR73(B)K Model Number
8. Refer to special shaft end specifications of each servo motor series in this catalog for the available models and detailed specifications.
HG-UR72(B)K
9. Oil seal is installed in HG-JR, HG-RR, and HG-UR series as a standard Model Number
HG-UR152(B)K
HG-JR53(B)K
HG-UR202(B)K
HG-JR73(B)K
HG-UR352(B)K
HG-JR103(B)K
HG-UR502(B)K
HG-JR153(B)K
HG-JR153K
HG-JR203(B)K
HG-JR353(B)K
HG-JR503(B)K
HG-JR703(B)K
HG-JR903(B)K

Servomotor Selection 400V (Example Part No. = HG-KR0534BG1)
Not all options available for every motor.
HG- 4
Symbol Shaft End

None Standard (Straight shaft)(*6)
Symbol Reducer (*5)
K Key shaft (with/without key)(*7)
None None
With reducer for general
Symbol Oil Seal G1 industrial machines,
None None(*9) flange mounting
J Installed (*2, *3) With reducer for general
G1H industrial machines, foot
mounting
Symbol Electromagnetic Brake With flange-output type
None None reducer for high precision
G5
B Installed (*1)
mounting
With shaft-output type
400V reducer for high precision
G7
Symbol Rated Speed [r/min] mounting
1 1000
2 2000
3 3000 Stocked Motors
Symbol Rated Output [kW] HG-KR053(B) HG-SR52(B)
5 0.5 HG-KR13(B) HG-SR102(B)
10 to 90 1.0 to 9.0 HG-KR23(B) HG-SR152(B)
11k to 22k 11 to 22 HG-KR43(B) HG-SR202(B)
HG-KR73(B) HG-SR352(B)
Symbol Inertia/Capacity HG-KR053(B)D HG-SR-502(B)
HG-SR Medium inertia, medium capacity HG-KR13(B)D HG-SR702(B)
HG-JR Low inertia, medium-large capacity HG-KR23(B)K HG-SR52(B)K
HG-KR43(B)K HG-SR102(B)K
HG-KR73(B)K HG-SR152(B)K
HG-MR053(B) HG-SR202(B)K
HG-MR43(B)
Notes: HG-MR73(B)
1. Refer to electromagnetic brake specifications of each servo motor series in this catalog for the available models and detailed specifications.
2. Available in HG-SR series. HG-MR053(B)D
3. Oil seal is not installed in the geared servo motor. HG-MR13(B)D
4. Oil seal is installed in HG-JR series as a standard. HG-MR23(B)K
5. Geared servo motor is available only in HG-SR 2000 r/min series. Refer to "Geared Servo Motor Specifications" in this catalog for the available models
and detailed specifications. HG-MR43(B)K
6. Standard HG-SR G1/G1H has a key shaft (with key). HG-MR73(B)K
7. Refer to special shaft end specifications of each servo motor series in this catalog for the available models and detailed specifications.
Model Number
HG-JR534(B)K
HG-JR734(B)K
HG-JR1034(B)K
HG-JR1534(B)K
HG-JR5034(B)K
HG-JR7034(B)K
HG-JR9034(B)K
HG-JR11K1M4K
HG-JR15K1M4(B)K
HG-JR15K1M4(B)K
362
HG-KR Series (Low Inertia, Small Capacity) Specifications 200V
Servomotor Model HG-KR_ 053(B) 13(B) 23(B) 43(B) 73(B)
MR-J4-_
Servo Amplifier Model Refer to "Combinations of Servomotor and Servo Amplifier" in this selection guide
MR-J4W_-_
Power Supply Capacity (kVA) (*1) 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.9 1.3
Rated Output (W) 50 100 200 400 750
Rated Torque (N•m) (*3) 0.16 0.32 0.64 1.3 2.4
Maximum Torque (N•m) 0.56 1.1 2.2 4.5 8.4
Standard (kW/s) 5.63 13.0 18.3 43.7 45.2
Power Rate Continuous
Rated Torque With Electromagnetic
5.37 12.1 16.7 41.3 41.6
Brake (kW/s)
Rated Current (A) 0.9 0.8 1.3 2.6 4.8
Maximum Current (A) 3.2 2.5 4.6 9.1 17
Regenerative Braking MR-J4- (times/min) (*4) (*4) 453 268 157
Frequency (*2) MR-J4W_- (times/min) 2500 1350 451 268 393
Moment of inertia Standard 0.0450 0.0777 0.221 0.371 1.26
J (x10-4kg•m²) With Electromagnetic Brake 0.0472 0.0837 0.243 0.393 1.37
Recommended Load/Motor Inertia Ratio (*1) 17 times or less 26 times or less 25 times or less 17 times or less
Speed/Position Detector Absolute/incremental 22-bit encoder (resolution: 4194304 pulses/rev)
Oil Seal None None (Servomotors with oil seal are available. (HG-KR_J))
Insulation Class 130 (B)
Structure Totally enclosed, natural cooling (IP rating: IP65) (*2)
Environment (*3)
Elevation / Vibration (*4) 1000 m or less above sea level; X: 49 m/s² Y: 49 m/s²
Vibration Rank V10 (*6)
Permissible L (mm) 25 25 30 30 40
Load for the Radial (N) 88 88 245 245 392
Shaft (*5) Thrust (N) 59 59 98 98 147
Standard 0.34 0.54 0.91 1.4 2.8
Weight kg
With Electromagnetic Brake 0.54 0.74 1.3 1.8 3.8
Notes:
1. Contact your local sales office if the load to motor inertia ratio exceeds the value in the table.
2. The shaft-through portion is excluded. IP67 for the servomotor with oil seal. Equivalent to IP44 for the reducer portion on the geared servomotor. Refer to this guide for the shaft-through portion.
3. When unbalanced torque is generated, such as in a vertical lift machine, it is recommended that the unbalanced torque of the machine be kept under 70% of the servomotor rated torque.
4. When the servomotor decelerates to a stop from the rated speed, the regenerative frequency will not be limited if the effective torque is within the rated torque range.
When the servomotor decelerates to a stop from the maximum speed, the regenerative frequency will not be limited if the following requirements are met.
• HG-KR053(B): The load to motor inertia ratio is 8 times or less, and the effective torque is within the rated torque range.
• HG-KR13(B): The load to motor inertia ratio is 4 times or less, and the effective torque is within the rated torque range.
5. The vibration direction is shown in the diagram below. The numeric value indicates the maximum value of the component (commonly the bracket in the opposite direction of the motor shaft). Fretting of the
X
Y
6. Refer to the MR-J4 Servo Amplifier and Motors brochure for more detailed specifications.
HG-KR Series Electromagnetic Brake Specifications (*1)

Servomotor Model HG-KR_ 053B 13B 23B 43B 73B
Type Spring actuated type safety brake
0
Rated Voltage 24 VDC -10 %
Power Consumption (W) at 20 °C 6.3 6.3 7.9 7.9 10
Electromagnetic Brake Static Friction Torque (N•m) 0.32 0.32 1.3 1.3 2.4
Permissible Braking Per Braking (J) 5.6 5.6 22 22 64
Work Per Hour (J) 56 56 220 220 640
Electromagnetic Brake Number of Times (Times) 20000
Life (*2) Work Per Braking (J) 5.6 5.6 22 22 64
Notes:
1. The electromagnetic brake is for holding. It should not be used for deceleration applications.
2. Brake gap is not adjustable. Electromagnetic brake life is defined as the time period until the readjustment is needed.
HG-KR053(B) (* 1, *2) HG-KR13(B) (*1, *2) HG-KR23(B) (*1, *2) HG-KR43(B) (*1, *2) HG-KR73(B) (*1, *2)
0.6 1.25 2.5 5.0 10.0

Short-duration running range
1.0 2.0 4.0 8.0
Short-duration Short-duration Short-duration
0.4 running range running range running range Short-duration
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
0.75 1.5 3.0 6.0 running range

Notes: 1. : For 3-phase 200 VAC or
0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0
0.2 1-phase 230 VAC.
2. : For 1-phase 200 VAC.
Continuous 0.25 0.5 1.0 2.0
Continuous Continuous running Continuous running Continuous 3. Torque drops when the power supply
running range running range range range running range voltage is below the specified value.
0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min]

HG-MR Series (Ultra Low Inertia, Small Capacity) Specifications 200V
Servomotor Model HG-MR_ 053(B) 13(B) 23(B) 43(B) 73(B)
MR-J4-_
MR-J4W_-_
Rated Output (W) 50 100 200 400 750
Rated Torque (N•m) (*3) 0.16 0.32 0.64 1.3 2.4
Standard (kW/s) 15.6 33.8 46.9 114.2 97.3
11.3 28.0 37.2 98.8 82.1
Brake (kW/s)
Rated Current (A) 1.0 0.9 1.5 2.6 5.8
Regenerative Braking MR-J4- (times/min) (*4) (*4) 1180 713 338
Frequency (*2) MR-J4W_- (times/min) 7310 3640 1170 710 846
Moment of Inertia J Standard 0.0162 0.0300 0.0865 0.142 0.586
(x10-4kg•m²) With Electromagnetic Brake 0.0224 0.0362 0.109 0.164 0.694
Recommended Load/Motor Inertia Ratio (*1) 35 times or less 32 times or less
Oil Seal None None (Servomotors with oil seal are available. (HG-MR_J))
Insulation Class 130 (B)
Environment (*3)
Elevation / Vibration (*4) 1000 m or less above sea level; X: 49 m/s² Y: 49 m/s²
L (mm) 25 25 30 30 40
Permissible Load for the
Radial (N) 88 88 245 245 392
Shaft (*5)
Thrust (N) 59 59 98 98 147
Standard 0.34 0.54 0.91 1.4 2.8
Weight kg
With Electromagnetic Brake 0.54 0.74 1.3 1.8 3.8
Notes:
2. The shaft-through portion is excluded. IP67 for the servomotor with oil seal. Refer to Rotary Servomotor Specifications Manual for more information.
4. When the servomotor decelerates to a stop from the rated speed, the regenerative frequency will not be limited if the effective torque is within the rated torque range.
When the servomotor decelerates to a stop from the maximum speed, the regenerative frequency will not be limited if the following requirements are met.
• HG-MR053(B): The load to motor inertia ratio is 24 times or less, and the effective torque is within the rated torque range.
• HG-MR13(B): The load to motor inertia ratio is 12 times or less, and the effective torque is within the rated torque range.
X
Y
HG-MR Series Electromagnetic Brake Specifications (*1)

Servomotor Model HG-MR_ 053B 13B 23B 43B 73B
0
Power Consumption (W) at 20°C 6.3 6.3 7.9 7.9 10
Electromagnetic Brake Static Friction Torque (N•m) 0.32 0.32 1.3 1.3 2.4
Per Braking (J) 5.6 5.6 22 22 64
Permissible Braking Work
Per Hour (J) 56 56 220 220 640
Life (*2) Work Per Braking (J) 5.6 5.6 22 22 64
Notes:
HG-MR053(B) (*1, *2) HG-MR13(B) (*1, *2) HG-MR23(B) (*1, *2) HG-MR43(B) (*1, *2) HG-MR73(B) (*1, *2)
0.6 1.0 2.0 4.0 8.0
Short-duration Short-duration
0.75 running range 1.5 Short-duration 3.0 Short-duration 6.0 running range
0.4 running range running range
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0

Notes: 1. : For 3-phase 200 VAC or
0.2 1-phase 230 VAC.
0.25 0.5 1.0 2.0 2. : For 1-phase 200 VAC.
Continuous Continuous running Continuous running Continuous running Continuous
running range range range range running range 3. Torque drops when the power supply
0 0 0 0 0 voltage is below the specified value.
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
364
HG-SR 1000 Series (Medium Inertia, Medium Capacity) Specifications 200V
Servomotor Model HG-SR_ 51(B) 81(B) 121(B) 201(B) 301(B) 421(B)
MR-J4-_
MR-J4W_-_
Rated Output (kW) 0.5 0.85 1.2 2.0 3.0 4.2
Rated Torque (N•m) (*3) 4.8 8.1 11.5 19.1 28.6 40.1
Maximum Torque (N•m) 14.3 24.4 34.4 57.3 85.9 120
Standard (kW/s) 19.7 41.2 28.1 46.4 82.3 107
16.5 36.2 23.2 41.4 75.3 99.9
Brake (kW/s)
Rated Current (A) 2.8 5.2 7.1 9.4 13 19
Maximum Current (A) 9.0 17 23 30 42 61
Regenerative Braking MR-J4- (times/min) 77 114 191 113 89 76
Frequency (*2) MR-J4W_- (times/min) 392 286 - - - -
Moment of Inertia Standard 11.6 16.0 46.8 78.6 99.7 151
J (x10-4kg•m²) With Electromagnetic Brake 13.8 18.2 56.5 88.2 109 161
Recommended Load/Motor Inertia Ratio (*1) 17 times or less 15 times or less
Oil Seal None (Servomotors with oil seal are available. (HG-SR_J))
Insulation Class 155 (F)
Elevation 1000 m or less above sea level
Vibration (*4) X: 24.5 m/s² Y: 24.5 m/s² X: 24.5 m/s² Y: 49 m/s² X: 24.5 m/s² Y: 29.4 m/s²
L (mm) 55 55 79 79 79 79
Radial (N) 980 980 2058 2058 2058 2058
Shaft (*5)
Thrust (N) 490 490 980 980 980 980
Standard 6.2 7.3 11 16 20 27
Weight kg
With Electromagnetic Brake 8.2 9.3 17 22 26 33
Notes:
X
Y
HG-SR 1000 Series Electromagnetic Brake Specifications (*1)

Servomotor Model HG-SR_ 51B 81B 121B 201B 301B 421B
0
Power Consumption (W) at 20°C 20 20 34 34 34 34
Electromagnetic Brake Static Friction Torque (N•m) 8.5 8.5 44 44 44 44
Per Braking (J) 400 400 4500 4500 4500 4500
Per Hour (J) 4000 4000 45000 45000 45000 45000
Life (*2) Work Per Braking (J) 200 200 1000 1000 1000 1000
Notes:
HG-SR51(B) (*1, *2, *3) HG-SR81(B) (*1) HG-SR121(B) (*1) HG-SR201(B) (*1) HG-SR301(B) (*1) HG-SR421(B) (*1)
15 30 40 60 90 150
30 Short-duration running range running range
Short-duration Short-duration 40 60 100 Short-duration
10 20 Notes: 1. : For 3-phase 200 V AC.
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
running range
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]

2. : For 1-phase 230 V AC.
20
5 10 20 30 50 This line is drawn only where differs
10 from the other two lines.
Continuous running Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous
4. Torque drops when the power supply voltage is
range running range running range running range running range running range
0 0 0 0 0 0 below the specified value.
500 1000 1500 500 1000 1500 500 1000 1500 500 1000 1500 500 1000 1500 500 1000 1500
Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min]

Servomotor Model HG-SR_ 52(B) 102(B) 152(B) 202(B) 352(B) 502(B) 702(B)
MR-J4-
Servo Amplifier Model Refer to "Combinations of Servomotor and Servo Amplifier" in this guide.
MR-J4W_-_
Power Supply Capacity (kVA) (*1) 1.0 1.7 2.5 3.5 5.5 7.5 10
Continuous Running Rated Output (kW) 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.5 5.0 7.0
Duty Rated Torque (N•m) (*3) 2.4 4.8 7.2 9.5 16.7 23.9 33.4
Maximum Torque (N•m) 7.2 14.3 21.5 28.6 50.1 71.6 100
Standard (kW/s) 7.85 19.7 32.1 19.5 35.5 57.2 74.0
Rated Torque (kW/s) With Electromagnetic
6.01 16.5 28.2 16.1 31.7 52.3 69.4
Brake (kW/s)
Rated Current (A) 2.9 5.6 9.4 9.6 14 22 26
Regenerative Braking MR-J4- (times/min) 31 38 139 47 28 29 25
Frequency (*2) MR-J4W_- (times/min) 154 96 - - - - -
Moment of Inertia Standard 7.26 11.6 16.0 46.8 78.6 99.7 151
J (x10-4kg•m²) With Electromagnetic Brake 9.48 13.8 18.2 56.5 88.2 109 161
Recommended Load/Motor Inertia Ratio (*1) 15 times or less 17 times or less 15 times or less
L (mm) 55 55 55 79 79 79 79
Radial (N) 980 980 980 2058 2058 2058 2058
Shaft (*5)
Thrust (N) 490 490 490 980 980 980 980
Standard 4.8 6.2 7.3 11 16 20 27
Weight kg
With Electromagnetic Brake 6.7 8.2 9.3 17 22 26 33
Notes:
X
Y

Servomotor Model HG-SR_ 52B 102B 152B 202B 352B 502B 702B
0
Power Consumption (W) at 20 °C 20 20 20 34 34 34 34
Electromagnetic Brake Static Friction Torque (N•m) 8.5 8.5 8.5 44 44 44 44
Per Braking (J) 400 400 400 4500 4500 4500 4500
Per Hour (J) 4000 4000 4000 45000 45000 45000 45000
Life (*2) Work Per Braking (J) 200 200 200 1000 1000 1000 1000
Notes:
HG-SR52(B) (*1, *2, *3) HG-SR102(B) (*1) HG-SR152(B) (*1) HG-SR202(B) (*1) HG-SR352(B) (*1) HG-SR702(B) (*1)
HG-SR502(B) (*1)
9 15 24 30 60 120 75
Short-duration
running range running range running range Short-duration
40 Short-duration 80 running range
6 Short-duration 10 16 20
Torque [N•m]
running range
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
50
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
3 5 8 10 20 40 25
Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous
running range running range running range running range running range running range running range
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000
Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min]
Notes: 1. : For 3-phase 200 V AC.

This line is drawn only where differs
from the other two lines.
4. Torque drops when the power supply voltage is
below the specified value.
366
Servomotor Model HG-SR_ 524(B) 1024(B) 1524(B) 2024(B) 3524(B) 5024(B) 7024(B)
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J4- Refer to "Combinations of Servomotor and Servo Amplifier" in this guide.
Power Supply Capacity (kVA) (*1) 1.0 1.7 2.5 3.5 5.5 7.5 10
Continuous Running Rated Output (kW) 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.5 5.0 7.0
Duty Rated Torque (N•m) (*3) 2.4 4.8 7.2 9.5 16.7 23.9 33.4
Maximum Torque (N•m) 7.2 14.3 21.5 28.6 50.1 71.6 100
Standard (kW/s) 7.85 19.7 32.1 19.5 35.5 57.2 74.0
6.01 16.5 28.2 16.1 31.7 52.3 69.4
Brake (kW/s)
Rated Current (A) 1.5 2.8 4.7 4.9 7 11 13
MR-J4- (times/min) 46 29 139 47 34 29 25
Frequency (*2)
Moment of Inertia Standard 7.26 11.6 16.0 46.8 78.6 99.7 151
J (x10-4kg•m²) With Electromagnetic Brake 9.48 13.8 18.2 56.5 88.2 109 161
Recommended Load/Motor Inertia Ratio (*1) 15 times or less 17 times or less 15 times or less
L (mm) 55 55 55 79 79 79 79
Radial (N) 980 980 980 2058 2058 2058 2058
Shaft (*5)
Thrust (N) 490 490 490 980 980 980 980
Standard 4.8 6.2 7.3 11 16 20 27
Weight kg
With Electromagnetic Brake 6.7 8.2 9.3 17 22 26 33
Notes:
X
Y
HG-SR 2000 Series (400V) Electromagnetic Brake Specifications (*1)

Servomotor Model HG-SR_ 524B 1024B 1524B 2024B 3524B 5024B 7024B
0
Power Consumption (W) at 20°C 20 20 20 34 34 34 34
Electromagnetic Brake Static Friction Torque (N•m) 8.5 8.5 8.5 44 44 44 44
Per Braking (J) 400 400 400 4500 4500 4500 4500
Per Hour (J) 4000 4000 4000 45000 45000 45000 45000
Life (*2) Work Per Braking (J) 200 200 200 1000 1000 1000 1000
Notes:
HG-SR524(B) (Note 1, 2) HG-SR1024(B) (Note 1, 2) HG-SR1524(B) (Note 1, 2) HG-SR2024(B) (Note 1, 2) HG-SR3524(B) (Note 1, 2) HG-SR5024(B) (Note 1, 2) HG-SR7024(B) (Note 1, 2)
9 15 24 30 60 75 120
Short-duration Short-duration Short-duration Short-duration
running range running range running range Short-duration running range Short-duration
Short-duration
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
6 10 16 20 40 running range 50 80 running range

running range
3 5 8 10 20 25 40
Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous
Continuous
running range running range running range running range running range running range
running range
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000
Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min]

3. Torque drops when the power supply voltage is below the specified value.

HG-JR 3000 Series (Low Inertia, Medium Capacity) Specifications 200V
Servomotor Model HG-JR_ 53(B) 73(B) 103(B) 153(B) 203(B) 353(B) 503(B) 703(B) 903(B)
MR-J4-
Servo Amplifier Model Refer to "Combinations of Servomotor and Servo Amplifier" in this guide.
MR-J4W_-_
Power Supply Capacity (kVA) (*1) 1.0 1.3 1.7 2.5 5.5 3.5 7.5 10 13
3.3 <3.5>
Rated Output (kW) 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 5.0 7.0 9.0
Continuous Running (*4)
Duty 10.5 <11.1>
Rated Torque (N•m) (*3) 1.6 2.4 3.2 4.8 6.4 15.9 22.3 28.6
(*4)
Maximum Torque (N•m) 4.8 <6.4> 7.2 <9.6> 9.6 <12.7> 14.3 <19.1> 19.1 <25.5> 32.0 <44.6> 44.7 <63.7> 66.8 85.8
Standard (kW/s) 16.7 27.3 38.2 60.2 82.4 83.5 133 115 147
12.5 22.0 32.2 53.1 74.8 71.6 119 93.9 125
Brake (kW/s)
Rated Current (A) 3.0 5.6 5.6 11 11 17 <18> (*4) 27 34 41
Maximum Current (A) 9.0 <12> 17 <23> 17 <23> 32 <43> 32 <43> 51 <71> 81 <108> 103 134
Regenerative Braking MR-J4- (times/min) 67 <137> 98 <511> 76 <396> 271 <271> 206 <206> 73 <98> 68 <89> 56 204 (*6)
Frequency (*2) MR-J4W_- (times/min) 328 <328> 237 186 - - - - - -
Moment of Inertia Standard 1.52 2.09 2.65 3.79 4.92 13.2 19.0 43.3 55.8
J (x10-4kg•m²) With Electromagnetic Brake 2.02 2.59 3.15 4.29 5.42 15.4 21.2 52.9 65.4
Recommended Load/Motor Inertia Ratio (*1) 10 times or less
Oil Seal Attached
Vibration (*4) X: 24.5 m/s² Y: 24.5 m/s² X: 24.5 m/s² Y: 29.4 m/s²
L (mm) 40 40 40 40 40 55 55 79 79
Radial (N) 323 323 323 323 323 980 980 2450 2450
Shaft (*5)
Thrust (N) 284 284 284 284 284 490 490 980 980
Standard 3.0 3.7 4.5 5.9 7.5 13 18 29 36
Weight kg
With Electromagnetic Brake 4.4 5.1 5.9 7.3 8.9 15 20 35 42
Notes:
X
Y
HG-JR 3000 Series (200V) Electromagnetic Brake Specifications (*1)

Servomotor Model HG-SR_ 53B 73B 103B 153B 203B 353B 503B 703B 903B
0
Power Consumption (W) at 20°C 11.7 11.7 11.7 11.7 11.7 23 23 34 34
Electromagnetic Brake Static Friction Torque (N•m) 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6 16 16 44 44
Per Braking (J) 64 64 64 64 64 400 400 4500 4500
Per Hour (J) 640 640 640 640 640 4000 4000 45000 45000
Electromagnetic Brake Number of Times (Times) 5000 20000
Life (*2) Work Per Braking (J) 64 64 64 64 64 400 400 1000 1000
Notes:
HG-JR53(B) (Note 1, 2, 3) HG-JR73(B) (Note 1) HG-JR103(B) (Note 1) HG-JR153(B) (Note 1) HG-JR203(B) (Note 1) HG-JR353(B) (Note 1) HG-JR503(B) (Note 1) HG-JR703(B) (Note 1) HG-JR903(B) (Note 1)
9 12 15 21 30 54 75 75 90
(Note 4) (Note 4) (Note 4) (Note 4) (Note 4)
(Note 4)
(Note 4) Short-duration
50 Short-duration
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
60 running range
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
6 8 10 14 20 36 50
Short-duration Short-duration running range Short-duration
Short-duration running range running range
3 running range 4 5 7 10 18 25 25 30
Continuous Continuous
Continuous running range Continuous running range Continuous running range Continuous running range Continuous running range Continuous running range Continuous running range
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2000 4000 6000 2000 4000 6000 2000 4000 6000 2000 4000 6000 2000 4000 6000 2000 4000 6000 2000 4000 6000 2000 4000 5000 2000 4000 5000
Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min]

This line is drawn only where differs from the other two lines.
4.This value is applicable when the torque is maximally increased. Refer to MR-J4 Brochure for more specifications.
368
HG-JR 3000 Series (Low Inertia, Medium Capacity) Specifications 400V
Servomotor Model HG-JR_ 53(B) 73(B) 103(B) 153(B) 203(B) 353(B) 503(B) 703(B) 903(B)
Power Supply Capacity (kVA) (*1) 1.0 1.3 1.7 2.5 3.5 5.5 7.5 10 13
Rated Output (kW) 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0
3.3 <3.5> (*4) 5.0 7.0 9.0
Continuous Running
Duty 10.5 <11.1>
Rated Torque (N•m) (*3) 1.6 2.4 3.2 4.8 6.4 15.9 22.3 28.6
(*4)
Maximum Torque (N•m) 4.8 <6.4> 7.2 <9.6> 9.6 <12.7> 14.3 <19.1> 19.1 <25.5> 32.0 <44.6> 47.2 <63.7> 66.8 85.8
Standard (kW/s) 16.7 27.3 38.2 60.2 82.4 83.5 133 115 147
12.5 22.0 32.2 53.1 74.8 71.6 119 93.9 125
Brake (kW/s)
Rated Current (A) 1.5 2.8 2.8 5.4 5.4 8.3 <8.8> (*4) 14 17 21
Maximum Current (A) 4.5 <6.0> 8.4 <12> 8.4 <12> 17 <22> 17 <22> 26 <36> 41 <54> 52 67
MR-J4- (times/min) 99 <100> 72 <489> 56 <382> 265 <275> 203 <209> 75 <98> 68 <89> 56 205 (*6)
Frequency (*2)
Moment of Inertia Standard 1.52 2.09 2.65 3.79 4.92 13.2 19.0 43.3 55.8
J (x10-4kg•m²) With Electromagnetic Brake 2.02 2.59 3.15 4.29 5.42 15.4 21.2 52.9 65.4
Oil Seal Attached
Vibration (*4) X: 24.5 m/s² Y: 24.5 m/s² X: 24.5 m/s² Y: 29.4 m/s²
L (mm) 40 40 40 40 40 55 55 79 79
Radial (N) 323 323 323 323 323 980 980 2450 2450
Shaft (*5)
Thrust (N) 284 284 284 284 284 490 490 980 980
Standard 3.0 3.7 4.5 5.9 7.5 13 18 29 36
Weight kg
With Electromagnetic Brake 4.4 5.1 5.9 7.3 8.9 15 20 35 42
Notes:
X
Y
HG-JR 3000 Series (400V) Electromagnetic Brake Specifications (*1)

Servomotor Model HG-SR_ 534B 734B 1034B 1534B 2034B 3534B 5034B 7034B 9034B
0
Power Consumption (W) at 20°C 11.7 11.7 11.7 11.7 11.7 23 23 34 34
Electromagnetic Brake Static Friction Torque (N•m) 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6 16 16 44 44
Per Braking (J) 64 64 64 64 64 400 400 4500 4500
Per Hour (J) 640 640 640 640 640 4000 4000 45000 45000
Electromagnetic Brake Number of Times (Times) 5000 20000
Life (*2) Work Per Braking (J) 64 64 64 64 64 400 400 1000 1000
Notes:
HG-JR534(B) (Note 1, 2) HG-JR734(B) (Note 1, 2) HG-JR1034(B) (Note 1, 2) HG-JR1534(B) (Note 1, 2) HG-JR2034(B) (Note 1, 2) HG-JR3534(B) (Note 1, 2) HG-JR5034(B) (Note 1, 2) HG-JR7034(B) (Note 1, 2) HG-JR9034(B) (Note 1, 2)
9 12 15 21 30 54 75 75 90
(Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3)
(Note 3)
(Note 3)
Short-duration
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
50 Short-duration
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
6 8 10 14 20 36 50 60 running range
Short-duration running range Short-duration
running range running range Short-duration
Short-duration running range running range
3 running range 4 5 7 10 18 running range 25 25 30
Continuous running range Continuous running range Continuous running range Continuous running range Continuous running range Continuous running range Continuous running range
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2000 4000 6000 2000 4000 6000 2000 4000 6000 2000 4000 6000 2000 4000 6000 2000 4000 6000 2000 4000 6000 2000 4000 5000 2000 4000 5000
Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min]

3. This value is applicable when the torque is maximally increased. Refer to "Combinations of HG-JR Servo Motor Series and
Servo Amplifier (400 V Class) for Increasing the Maximum Torque to 400% of the Rated Torque" on p. 2-6 in this catalog.

HG-JR 1500 Series (Low Inertia, Large Capacity) Specifications 200V / 400V
Servomotor Model HG-JR_ 11K1M(B) 15K1M(B) 22K1M(B) 11K1M4(B) 15K1M4(B) 22K1M4(B)
Power Supply Capacity (kVA) (*1) 16 22 33 16 22 33
Continuous Running Rated Output (kW) 11 15 22 11 15 22
Duty Rated Torque (N•m) (*3) 70.0 95.5 140 70.0 95.5 140
Maximum Torque (N•m) 210 286 420 210 286 420
Maximum Speed (r/min) 3000 2500 3000 2500
Permissible Instantaneous Speed (r/min) 3450 2875 3450 2875
Standard (kW/s) 223 290 401 223 290 401
204 271 - 204 271 -
Brake (kW/s)
Rated Current (A) 61 76 99 31 38 50
MR-J4- (times/min) 143 162 104 143 162 104
Frequency (*2)
Moment of Inertia Standard 220 315 489 220 315 489
J (x10-4kg•m²) With Electromagnetic Brake 240 336 - 240 336 -
Oil Seal Attached
Totally enclosed, Totally enclosed,
Totally enclosed, natural cooling Totally enclosed, natural cooling
Structure (*2) forcedl cooling forcedl cooling
(IP rating: IP67) (IP rating: IP67)
(IP rating: IP44) (IP rating: IP44)
Vibration (*4) X: 24.5 m/s² Y: 24.5 m/s²
L (mm) 116 116 140 116 116 140
Radial (N) 2940 2940 3234 2940 2940 3234
Shaft (*5)
Thrust (N) 980 980 1470 980 980 1470
Standard 62 86 120 62 86 120
Weight kg
With Electromagnetic Brake 74 97 - 74 97 -
3-phase 3-phase
200 VAC to 380 VAC to
Voltage/Frequency - - - -
230 VAC, 480 VAC,
50 Hz/60 Hz 50 Hz/60 Hz
Cooling Fan
60 (50 Hz)/ 58 (50 Hz)/
Input - - - -
80 (60 Hz) 72 (60 Hz)
0.20 (50 Hz)/ 0.12 (50 Hz)/
Rated Current - - - -
0.27 (60 Hz) 0.14 (60 Hz)
Notes:
X
Y
Servomotor Model HG-SR_ 11K1MB 15K1MB 11K1M4B 15K1M4B
0
Power Consumption (W) at 20°C 32
Electromagnetic Brake Static Friction Torque (N•m) 126
Per Braking (J) 5000
Per Hour (J) 45200
Life (*2) Work Per Braking (J) 400
Notes:
1. The electromagnetic brake is for holding. It should not be used for deceleration applications. 2. Brake gap is not adjustable. Electromagnetic brake life is defined as the time period until the readjustment is needed.
200 V Class 400 V Class
HG-JR11K1M(B) (Note 1) HG-JR15K1M(B) (Note 1) HG-JR22K1M (Note 1) HG-JR11K1M4(B) (Note 2, 3) HG-JR15K1M4(B) (Note 2, 3) HG-JR22K1M4 (Note 2, 3)
240 300 450 240 300 450
Short-duration Short-duration 2. : For 3-phase 400 V AC.
180 Short-duration running range Short-duration
180 Short-duration running range Short-duration 3. : For 3-phase 380 V AC.
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
running range 200 300 running range 200 300

running range running range 4. Torque drops when the power supply voltage is below the specified value.
120 120
100 150 100 150

60 Continuous Continuous 60 Continuous Continuous
running range running range running range running range
0 0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 2500 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 2500
Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min] Speed [r/min]
370
HG-RR Series (Ultra-Low Inertia, Medium Capacity) Specifications 200V
Servomotor Model HG-RR_ 103(B) 153(B) 203(B) 353(B) 503(B)
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J4-_ Refer to "Combinations of Servomotor and Servo Amplifier" in this selection guide
Rated Output (kW) 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.5 5.0
Rated Torque (N•m) (*3) 3.2 4.8 6.4 11.1 15.9
Standard (kW/s) 67.4 120 176 150 211
54.8 101 153 105 163
Brake (kW/s)
Rated Current (A) 6.1 8.8 14 23 28
MR-J4- (times/min) 1090 860 710 174 125
Frequency (*2)
Moment of Inertia Standard 1.5 1.90 2.30 8.30 12.0
J (x10-4kg•m²) With Electromagnetic Brake 1.85 2.25 2.65 11.8 15.5
Oil Seal Attached
Vibration (*4) X: 24.5 m/s² Y: 24.5 m/s²
L (mm) 45 45 45 63 63
Radial (N) 686 686 686 980 980
Shaft (*5)
Thrust (N) 196 196 196 392 392
Standard 3.9 5.0 6.2 12 17
Weight kg
With Electromagnetic Brake 6.0 7.0 8.3 15 21
Notes:
X
Y
HG-RR 1000 Series Electromagnetic Brake Specifications (*1)

Servomotor Model HG-SR_ 103B 153B 203B 353B 503B
0
Power Consumption (W) at 20°C 19 19 19 23 23
Electromagnetic Brake Static Friction Torque (N•m) 7.0 7.0 7.0 17 17
Per Braking (J) 400
Per Hour (J) 4000
Life (*2) Work Per Braking (J) 200
Notes:
HG-RR103(B) (Note 1) HG-RR153(B) (Note 1) HG-RR203(B) (Note 1) HG-RR353(B) (Note 1) HG-RR503(B) (Note 1)
9 15 18 30 45
Short-duration
Short-duration Short-duration running range Short-duration
Torque [N•m]
running range
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
6 running range 10 Short-duration 12 20 30 running range

running range
3 5 6 10 15
Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous
running range Continuous
running range
0 0 0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500


HG-UR Series (Flat Type, Medium Capacity) Specifications 200V
Servomotor Model HG-UR_ 72(B) 152(B) 202(B) 352(B) 502(B)
MR-J4-_
MR-J4W-_
Rated Output (kW) 0.75 1.5 2.0 3.5 5.0
Rated Torque (N•m) (*3) 3.6 7.2 9.5 16.7 23.9
Standard (kW/s) 12.3 23.2 23.9 36.5 49.6
10.3 21.2 19.5 32.8 46.0
Brake (kW/s)
Rated Current (A) 5.4 9.7 14 23 28
Regenerative Braking MR-J4- (times/min) 53 124 68 44 31
Frequency (*2) MR-J4W_- (times/min) 107 - - - -
Moment of Inertia Standard 10.4 22.1 38.2 76.5 115
J (x10-4kg•m²) With Electromagnetic Brake 12.5 24.2 46.8 85.1 124
Oil Seal Attached
Vibration (*4) X: 24.5 m/s² Y: 24.5 m/s² X: 24.5 m/s² Y: 49 m/s²
L (mm) 55 55 65 65 65
Radial (N) 637 637 882 1176 1176
Shaft (*5)
Thrust (N) 490 490 784 784 784
Standard 8.0 11 16 20 24
Weight kg
With Electromagnetic Brake 10 13 22 26 30
Notes:
X
Y
HG-UR 1000 Series Electromagnetic Brake Specifications (*1)

Servomotor Model HG-SR_ 72B 152B 202B 352B 502B
0
Power Consumption (W) at 20°C 19 19 34 34 34
Electromagnetic Brake Static Friction Torque (N•m) 8.5 8.5 44 44 44
Per Braking (J) 400 400 4500 4500 4500
Per Hour (J) 4000 4000 45000 45000 45000
Life (*2) Work Per Braking (J) 200 200 1000 1000 1000
Notes:
HG-UR72(B) (Note 1, 2, 3) HG-UR152(B) (Note 1) HG-UR202(B) (Note 1) HG-UR352(B) (Note 1) HG-UR502(B) (Note 1)
12 24 30 60 80
Short-duration
running range Short-duration 60 running range
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
Torque [N•m]
8 16 20 40 running range
40
4 8 10 20
Continuous 20
Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous
0 0 0 0
1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 1000 2000 3000 0 1000 2000 2500 1000 2000 2500

This line is drawn only where differs from the other two lines.
372
C. Servo Amplifier Cables and Connectors
MR-J4-B Type Ampliier Cables and Connectors

For 3.5 kW or smaller
27 28 26 28
MR Configurator2
(Setup software) 24
MR-J3-D05
Controller
7 8 9
CN5 CN5
Q173DSCPU
Q172DSCPU
CNP1
CN3 26 27 CNP1
CN3
1 26 27
QD77MS 11 12
2 CN8
15 16 17
CN8
CNP2 CN1A CNP2 CN1A
3 18 19
CN1B 7 8 9 CN1B
4
10
CN2 CN2
CNP3 CNP3
CN4 CN4
To servo motor power supply Attach a cap to the unused
To servo motor encoder connector
For 5 kW or larger
26 27 28
26 28
MR Configurator
(Setup software) 24
MR-J3-D05
Controller 16 17
Q173DSCPU 11 18 19 CN5 CN5
Q172DSCPU CN3
26 27 CN3
QD77MS 7 8 9
CN8 15 CN8
CN1A 26 27 CN1A
CN1B CN1B
10
CN2 CN2
7 8 9
CN4 22 23 CN4
Attach a cap to the unused
connector.
Note: Attach a SSCNET III connector cap to the unused connector.
MR-J4W2-B and MR-J4W3-B Type Ampliier Cables and Connectors
24
Controller
26 28
MR Configurator
Q173DSCPU (Setup software)
Q172DSCPU MRZJW3-SETUP221E 13 14 20 21
26 28
QD77MS
7 8 9
Safety Logic Unit
Drive unit MR-J3-D05 Drive unit
CN5
CN5 26 27
CN3
CN3
26 27
CN40A CN8
CN8 CN40A
CN1A
CN1A
CN40B CN40B CN1B
CN1B
10
CN2
CN2
CN2L
CN2L
CN4
CN4
7 8 9 Attach a cap to the unused
connector.

MR-J4-A Type Ampliier Cables and Connectors
For 3.5 kW or smaller
Controller Servo amplifier

QD70P
QD70D
QD75P_N 24
CN5 Setup software
QD75D_N 3 4 CNP1
MR Configurator2
LD75P CN6
LD75D
CN3
25
FX 2N -20GM 15
FX 2N -10GM
CNP2 CN8
FX 2N -10PG
5 1 RS-422/RS-232C conversion cable (*2)
FX 2N -1PG CN1
26
8 CNP3
27
Junction terminal block

MR-TB50 (*1) CN2

To servo motor power CN4
For 5 kW or larger
Servo amplifier
Controller
QD70P 3 4
QD70D CN5 24 Setup software
QD75P_N MR Configurator2
QD75D_N CN6
25
LD75P CN3
LD75D 15
FX 2N -20GM CN8
FX 2N -10GM 26
5 RS-422/RS-232C conversion cable (*2)
FX 2N -10PG CN1
FX 2N -1PG
8 27
Junction terminal block

MR-TB50 (*1) CN2

CN4
Notes:
1. Refer to "Junction Terminal Block" in this selection guide.
2. Refer to "Products on the Market for Servo Ampliiers" in the MR-J4 catalog.
For CNP1, CNP2, CNP3

CNP1 CNP2 CNP3 Open tool
Servo Ampliier Power Connector Set (Insertion connector connector connector
Type) For MR-J4-100A or Smaller/MR-J4-100B or Supplied with Ampliier - -
Smaller (*1, *2)
1
CNP1 CNP2 CNP3 Open tool
connector connector connector
Servo Ampliier Power Connector Set (Insertion
Type) For MR-J4-200A/MR-J4-200B/MR-J4-350A/ Supplied with Ampliier - -
MR-J4-350B (*1, *2)
CNP1 CNP2 CNP3A/CNP3B/ Open tool

connector connector CNP3C connector
Servo Ampliier Power Connector Set (Insertion
2 Supplied with Ampliier - -
Type) For MR-J4W2-B/MR-J4W3-B (*2, *3)
Notes:
1. This connector set is not required for 5 kW or larger servo amplifiers since terminal blocks are mounted. Refer to servo amplifier dimensions in this catalog for more details.
2. The wire size shows wiring specification of the connector. Refer to "Selection Example in HIV Wires for Servomotors" in this catalog for examples of wire size selection.
3. Press bonding type is also available. Refer to "MR-J4W_-_B Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual" for details.
374
For CN1
Level
3 Connector Set For MR-J4-A MR-J3CN1 S -
MR-J3CCN1CBL-_M
Junction Terminal Block Cable MR-J2M-CN1TBL_M

5 05, 1 -
For Connecting MRJ4-A and MR-TB50 (_ = cable length 0.5, 1m)
MR-TB50 S -
6 Junction Terminal Block MR-TB50MIN (reduced
size - width = 145mm S -
(5.71 in))
For Controller, CN1A, CN1B

Level
SSCNET III Cable (Standard Cord for Inside Cabinet)
MR-J3BUS_M _ (= cable
7 Compatible With SSCNET III(/H) length 0.15, 0.3, 0.5, 1, 3m)
S -
For MR-J4-B/MR-J4W2-B/MR-J4W3-B (*1)
SSCNET III Cable (Standard Cable for Outside MR-J3BUS_M-A
8 cabinet) Compatible With SSCNET III(/H) (_ = cable length 5, 10, 20m)
S -
For MR-J4-B/MR-J4W2-B/MR-J4W3-B (*1)
SSCNET III Cable (Long Distance Cable, Long
MR-J3BUS_M-B
9 Bending Life) Compatible With SSCNET III(/H) For S -
(_ = cable length 30, 40, 50m)
MR-J4-B/MR-J4W2-B/MR-J4W3-B (*1, *2)
SSCNET III Connector Cap. Compatible With SSCNET
10 Supplied with Ampliier S -
III(/H). For MR-J4-B/MR-J4W2-B/MR-J4W3-B
Notes:
1. Read carefully through the precautions enclosed with the options before use.
2. When SSCNET III/H is used, refer to "Products on the Market for Servo Amplifiers" in this catalog for cables over 50 m or with ultra-long bending life.
For CN3
Protection
Item Model Number Stocked Item Description
Level
11 Connector Set For MR-J4-B MR-CCN1 - -
Connector Set (Qty: 1 pc) For MR-J4W2-B/
12 MR-J2CMP2 S -
MR-J4W3-B
13 Connector Set For MR-J4W2-B/MR-J4W3-B MR-ECN1 S -
Junction Terminal Block Cable For Connecting MR-TBNATBL_M

14 S -
MR-J4W2-B/MR-J4W3-B and MR-TB26A _ = cable length 0.5, 1m
SC-FRPC
15 RS-232 to RS-485 Converter PC to CN3 (3M) S -
(Cable length 3m)
16 CN10 or CN3 Signal Connector (20 pin) MR-J2CN1 S -
MR-CCN1CBL-_M
17 CN10 or CN3 Pigtail Cable (20 pin) 3, 5 -
18 Cable for PS7DW-20V14B-F Terminal Block MR-J2HBUS_M 05, 1, 3, 5 -
20 Pin Terminal B Lock for J4-B

19 PS7DW-20V14B-F S -
(TB20 cannot be used)
21 Junction Terminal Block (For use with Cable No. 14) MR-TB26A S -

For CN4
Level
Battery Cable For Connecting MR-J4W2-B/ MR-BT6V1CBL_M
22 _ = cable length 0.3, 1m
S -
MR-J4W3-B and MR-BT6VCASE
MR-BT6V2CBL_M
23 Junction Battery Cable For MR-J4W2-B/MR-J4W3-B S -
_ = cable length 0.3, 1m
For CN5 and CN6

Level
CN5 Personal Computer Communication Cable
24 (USB cable) For MR-J4-A/MR-J4-B/MR-J4W2-B/ MR-J3USBCBL3M 3m -
MR-J4W3-B
25 CN6 Monitor Cable For MR-J4-A MR-J3CN6CBL1M 1m -
For CN8
Level
Short-Circuit Connector For MR-J4-A/MR-J4-B/
26 Supplied with Ampliier - -
MR-J4W2-B/MR-J4W3-B
MR-D05UDL-_M
27 STO Cable 0.3, 1, 3
_ = cable length 0.3, 1, 3m
STO Cable For Connecting Servo Ampliier with
28 MR-J4-D05UDL3M-B 3m -
MRJ3-D05 or Other Safety Control Device
For CN9 AND CN10

Level
(Standard accessory of
29 CN9 Connector - -
MR-J3-D05)
(Standard accessory of
30 CN10 Connector 3m -
MR-J3-D05)
376
C. Servomotor Cables and Connectors
For HG-KR/HG-MR Servomotor Series: Encoder Cable Length 10m or Shorter

For leading the cables out in direction of load side (*1)
Power cable
To servo amplifier CNP3/CNP3A/CNP3B/CNP3C connector
17
(MR-J4W2-B, MR-J4W3-B only) 24 26
Electromagnetic brake cable

32
Encoder cable
30 31 To servo amplifier CN2/CN2A/CN2B/CN2C connector
11 12
1
Servo motor
For HG-KR/HG-MR Servomotor Series: Encoder Cable Length 10m or Shorter

For leading the cables out in opposite direction of load side (*1)
Power cable
18
Electromagnetic brake cable
33
Encoder cable
30 31 To servo amplifier CN2/CN2A/CN2B/CN2C connector
11 12 2
Servo motor
Note: Cables for leading two different directions may be used for one servomotor.
For HG-KR/HG-MR Servomotor Series: Encoder Cable Length Over 10m

For leading the cables out in direction of load side (*4)
19 Power cable
(*2)
32 Electromagnetic brake cable
(*3)
Encoder cable
(*1) 5
3 To servo amplifier CN2/CN2A/CN2B/CN2C
connector
7
Encoder cable
8 (*1) 10
30 31 12
11 12
Servo motor
Notes:
1. This cable does not have a long bending life. Thus, be sure to ix the cable before using.
2. Relay a cable using MR-PWS2CBL03M-A1-L or MR-PWS2CBL03M-A2-L. This cable does not have a long bending life. Thus, be sure to ix the cable before using.
3. Relay a cable using MR-BKS2CBL03M-A1-L or MR-BKS2CBL03M-A2-L. This cable does not have a long bending life. Thus, be sure to ix the cable before using.
5. Cables drawn with dashed lines need to be fabricated by user. Refer to relevant Servomotor Instruction Manual for fabricating the cables.

For HG-KR/HG-MR Servomotor Series: Encoder Cable Length Over 10m
For leading the cables out in opposite direction of load side (*4)
20 Power cable
(*2)
33 Electromagnetic brake cable
(*3)
Encoder cable
4 (*1) 5 To servo amplifier CN2/CN2A/CN2B/CN2C

connector
7
Encoder cable
9 (*1) 10
12
Servo motor
Notes:
1. This cable does not have a long bending life. Thus, be sure to ix the cable before using.
2. Relay a cable using MR-PWS2CBL03M-A1-L or MR-PWS2CBL03M-A2-L. This cable does not have a long bending life. Thus, be sure to ix the cable before using.
3. Relay a cable using MR-BKS2CBL03M-A1-L or MR-BKS2CBL03M-A2-L. This cable does not have a long bending life. Thus, be sure to ix the cable before using.
5. Cables drawn with dashed lines need to be fabricated by user. Refer to relevant Servomotor Instruction Manual for fabricating the cables.
For HG-SR Servomotor Series

Power connector set
To servo amplifier CNP3/CNP3A/CNP3B connector
16 21 22 23
Electromagnetic brake connector set
34 35 36 38
37
Encoder cable
To servo amplifier
10 CN2/CN2A/CN2B connector
15
13 14 15
Servo motor
For HG-RR and HG-UR Servomotor Series

Power connector set
To servo amplifier CNP3/TE4/CNP3A/CNP3B connector (Note 5, 6)
31 32
Electromagnetic brake connector set (Note 7)
41
Encoder cable
To servo amplifier
11 12
Servo motor 13 14
Notes:
1. Contact the relevant liner encoder manufacturers for connectors to connect with the head cables.
2. Cables drawn with dashed lines need to be fabricated by user. Refer to relevant Servo Motor Instruction Manual for fabricating the cables.
3. Connections other than mentioned are the same as those for each rotary servo motor. Refer to cables and connectors for relevant servo motors in this catalog.
4. Necessary encoder cables vary depending on the servo motor series. Refer to cables and connectors for relevant servo motors in this catalog.
5. The connector for U, V, and W varies depending on the servo ampliier capacities. Refer to the dimensions of the relevant servo ampliier in this catalog for details.
6. HG-RR series is compatible only with the 1-axis servo ampliier.
7. An electromagnetic brake connector set is not required for HG-RR series and 1.5 kW or smaller of HG-UR series as the power connector has electromagnetic brake terminals.
378
For HG-JR Servomotor Series: (9 kW or smaller)
Power connector set

To servo amplifier CNP3/TE4/TE1/TE1-1/CNP3A/CNP3B connector (Note 2)
28 29 30
37 38
39 40
Encoder cable
To servo amplifier
11 12
Servo motor 13 14
For HG-JR Servomotor Series: (11 kW and 15 kW)
Power connector set

To servo amplifier TE1-1 connector
30
41
Encoder cable
To servo amplifier CN2 connector
15
16
Servo motor
Note: Cables for leading two different directions may be used for one servomotor.
For HG-JR Servomotor Series: (22 kW)
Encoder cable
To servo amplifier CN2 connector
15
16
Servo motor
Notes:
1. Cables drawn with dashed lines need to be fabricated by user. Refer to relevant Servo Motor Instruction Manual for fabricating the cables.
2. The connector for U, V, and W varies depending on the servo ampliier capacities. Refer to the dimensions of the relevant servo ampliier in this catalog for details.

Encoder Cables and Connectors
Item Diagram
(_ =cable length in meters) Lengths Level
Lead Out in Direction of Motor _= 2, 5 or 10 (*1)
1 Encoder Cable 10m Shaft For HG-KR/HG-MR MR-J3ENCBL_M-A1-L 2, 5, 10 IP65 Encoder connector Servo amplifier connector
or Shorter (Direct _= 2, 5, or 10 (*1)
Connection Type) MR-J3ENCBL_M-A2-H
Lead Out in Opposite Direction _= 2, 5, or 10 (*1) 2, 5, 10 IP65
(*2)
2 of Motor Shaft For HG-KR/
MR-J3ENCBL_M-A2-L
HG-MR 2, 5, 10 IP65
_= 2, 5, or 10 (*1)
Lead Out in Direction of Motor MR-J3JCBL03M-A1-L
3 Encoder Cable. S IP20
Shaft For HG-KR/HG-MR cable length 0.3 (*1) Encoder connector Junction connector
(Junction Type) Use
Lead Out in Opposite Direction
This In Combination MR-J3JCBL03M-A2-L
4 of Motor Shaft For HG-KR/ S IP20
With (5) or (7). (*2) cable length 0.3 (*1)
HG-MR
MR-EKCBL_M-H
Encoder Cable. Use 20, 30 IP20
For HG-KR/HG-MR _= 20, 30, 40, or 50 (*1, *3) Junction connector Servo amplifier connector
5 This In Combination
(Junction Type) MR-EKCBL_M-L
With (3) or (4). - IP20
_= 20 or 30 (*1, *3)
Junction connector Servo amplifier connector
For Connecting Ampliier-Side Connector
7 MR-ECNM S IP20
Linear Encoder (*5) (Junction Type)
Exceeding 10m For HG-KR/HG-MR MR-J3JSCBL03M-A1-L
8 S IP65 (*4)
(Relay Type) (Junction Type) Cable length 0.3m (*1, *3) Encoder connector Junction connector
Use this in
combination with For HG-KR/HG-MR MR-J3JSCBL03M-A2-L
9 S IP65 (*4)
(10) or (11). (Junction Type) Cable length 0.3m (*1)
Encoder Cable (*2)
For HG-KR/HG-MR (Junction Type) MR-J3ENSCBL_M-H 2, 5, 10,
For HG-SR (Direct Connection Type) _ = cable length 2, 5, 10, 20, IP67
20, 30
Use this in combination with (8) or (9) for HG-KR/ 30, 40, 50m (*1) Junction connector or Servo amplifier
HG-MR Series. encoder connector connector
10
HG-SR524(B)~HG-SR7024(B) Series Motor,
HG-JR 534(B)~HG-JR9034(B) Series Motor, MR-J3ENSCBL_M-L
HG-JR11K1M4(B), HG-JR15K1M4(B), HG-JR22K1M4 _ = cable length 2, 5, 10, 20, 2, 5 IP67
HG-RR103~ HG-RR503 Series Motors 30m (*1)
HG-UR72~HG-UR502 Series Motors
Encoder Connector Set (One-Touch Connection Type)
For HG-KR/HG-MR (Junction Type)
For HG-SR (Direct Connection Type) (Straight Type)
11 HG-SR524(B)~HG-SR7024(B), MR-J3SCNS S IP67
HG-JR 534(B)~HG-JR9034(B), HG-JR11K1M4(B),
HG-JR15K1M4(B), HG-JR22K1M4, Encoder Side Amplifier Side
HG-UR72~HG-UR502, HG-RR103~HG-RR503
Encoder Connector Set (Screw Type) (*2, *3, *6, *7)
For HG-SR (Straight Type)
HG-SR524(B)~HG-SR7024(B),
12 MR-ENCNS2 S IP67
HG-JR15K1M4(B), HG-JR22K1M4,
Encoder Connector Set (One-Touch Connection Type)
For HG-SR (Angle Type) (*2, *7)
HG-SR524(B)~HG-SR7024(B),
13 MR-J3SCNSA S IP67
Encoder Connector Set (Screw Type) (*2, *3, *6, *7)
For HG-SR (Angle Type)
14 HG-SR524(B)~HG-SR7024(B), MR-ENCNS2A S IP67
Notes:
1. The IP rating indicated is for the connector's protection against ingress of dust and water when coupled to a servo amplifier/servomotor. If the IP rating of the servo amplifier/servomotor differs
from that of these connectors, overall IP rating depends on the lowest of all.
3. This encoder cable is available in four-wire type. Parameter setting is required to use the four-wire type encoder cable. Refer to relevant Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual for more details.
4. The encoder cable is rated IP65 while the junction connector itself is rated IP67.
5. MR-EKCBL_M-H and MR-ECNM can be connected to an output cable for Mitutoyo Corporation scale AT343A, AT543A-SC or AT545A-SC.
6. A screw thread is cut on the encoder connector of HG-SR series, and the screw type connector can be used.
7. Cable clamps and bushings for cable OD of 5.5 mm to 7.5 mm and of 7.0 mm to 9.0 mm are included in the set.
380
Lengths Level
20, 25, 30 meter)
HG-SR51(B), HG-SR52(B) (*1) MR-J3P1-_M
HG-SR81(B), HG-SR102(B), HG-SR152(B), HG-SR524(B),
HG-SR1024(B), HG-SR1524(B), HG-JR 534(B), HG-JR734(B),
MR-J3P2-_M
HG-JR1034(B), HG-JR1534(B), HG-JR2034(B), HG-JR3534(B),
HG-JR5034(B) (*1)
HG-SR121(B), HG-SR201(B), HG-SR202(B), HG-SR2024(B) (*1) MR-J3P4-_M
Standard-Flex, 2, 5, 10,
Unshielded Type HG-SR502(B), HG-SR5024(B) (*1) MR-J3P6-_M 20, 30
Cables (Straight HG-SR421(B), HG-SR702(B), HG-SR7024(B), HG-JR7034(B), IP65
Type Connector MR-J3P7-_M
HG-JR9034(B) (*1)
Only) (*2)
HG-SR301(B), HG-SR352(B), HG-SR3524(B) (*1) MR-J3P9-_M
HG-JR11K1M4(B) MR-J3P12-_M
HG-JR15K1M4(B) MR-J3P13-_M
HG-RR103, 153, 203; HG-UR72, 152 MR-P14SLN-_M
2, 5, 10
16 HG-RR353, 503; HG-UR202, 352, 502 MR-P15SLN-_M
HG-SR51(B), HG-SR52(B), HG-SR152(B) (*1) MR-J3PWS1-_M
HG-SR81(B), HG-SR102(B), HG-SR1024(B), HG-SR1524(B),
HG-JR 534(B), HG-JR734(B), HG-JR1034(B), HG-JR1534(B), MR-J3PWS2-_M
HG-JR2034(B), HG-JR3534(B), HG-JR5034(B) (*1)
HG-SR121(B), HG-SR201(B), HG-SR202(B), HG-SR2024(B) (*1) MR-J3PWS4-_M
High-Flex, HG-SR502(B), HG-SR5024(B) (*1) MR-J3PWS6-_M 2, 5 10,
Shielded Type 15, 20, 30
Cables (Straight HG-SR421(B), HG-SR702(B), HG-SR7024(B), HG-JR7034(B), IP67
MR-J3PWS7-_M
Type Connector HG-JR9034(B) (*1)
Only) (*2) HG-SR301(B), HG-SR352(B), HG-SR3524(B) (*1) MR-J3PWS9-_M
HG-JR11K1M4(B) MR-J3PWS12-_M
HG-JR15K1M4(B) MR-J3PWS13-_M
HG-RR103, 153, 203; HG-UR72, 152 MR-P14SHS-_M
2, 5, 10
HG-RR353, 503; HG-UR202, 352, 502 MR-P15SHS-_M
Notes:
2. -H and -L indicate a bending life. -H indicates a long bending life, -L indicates a standard bending life.

Stocked Protection
Item Model Number Description
Lengths Level (*1)
MR-PWS1CBL_M-A1-H
Power Supply Cable For HG-KR/ 2, 5, 10 IP65
(_ = cable length 2, 5, 10m) (*1)
17 HG-MR. Lead Out In Direction Of
10m Or MR-PWS1CBL_M-A1-L
Motor Shaft (Non-Shielded) (*2) 2, 5, 10 IP65
Shorter (Direct (_ = cable length 2, 5, 10m) (*1)
Connection Power Supply Cable For HG-KR/ MR-PWS1CBL_M-A2-H 2, 5, 10 IP65
Type HG-MR. Lead Out In Opposite (_ = cable length 2, 5, 10m) (*1)
18 Direction of Motor Shaft (Non- MR-PWS1CBL_M-A2-L 2, 5, 10 IP65
Shielded) (*2) (_ = cable length 2, 5, 10m) (*1)
Power Supply Cable For HG-KR/
HG-MR (Junction Type) Motor Lead MR-PWS2CBL03M-A1-L
19 S IP55
Out In Direction Of Motor Shaft (Cable length 0.3m)
Exceeding 10m (Non-Shielded) (*2)
(Relay Type) Power Supply Cable For HG-KR/
HG-MR (Junction Type) Motor Lead MR-PWS2CBL03M-A2-L
20 S IP55
Out In Opposite Direction Of Motor (Cable length 0.3m)
Shaft (Non-Shielded) (*2)
Power Connector Set For HG-SR51, 81, 52, 102,
152, HG-SR524(B), HG-SR1024(B), HG-SR1524(B),
21 HG-JR 534(B), HG-JR734(B), HG-JR1034(B), MR-PWCNS4 (*2) - IP67
HG-JR1534(B), HG-JR2034(B), HG-JR3534(B),
HG-JR5034(B)
Power Connector Set For HG-SR121, 201, 301, 202,
352, 502, HG-SR2024(B), HG-SR3524(B),
22 MR-PWCNS5 (*2) - IP67
HG-SR5024(B), HG-SR7024(B), HG-JR7034(B),
HG-JR9034(B), HG-JR11K1M4(B), HG-JR15K1M4(B)
Power Connector Set For HG-SR421, 702 MR-PWCNS3 (*2) - IP67
Power Connector Set For HG-UR202, HG-UR352,
23 MR-PWCNS2 IP67
HG-UR502, HG-RR353, HG-RR503
Power Connector Set For, HG-UR72, HG-UR152, MR-PWCNS1 IP67
HG-RR103, HG-RR153, HG-RR203
Notes:
1. The IP rating indicated is for the connector's protection against ingress of dust and water when coupled to a servo amplifier/servomotor. If the IP rating of the servo amplifier/servomotor differs
from that of these connectors, overall IP rating depends on the lowest of all.
Power Supply Cable for HF-KP/HF-MP Rotary Servomotors (Direct Connection Type)
Stocked Protection
Lengths Level
Lead Out in Direction of Motor Shaft SC-EPWS1CBL_M-A1-L
24 - -
Lead Out in Opposite Direction of Motor Shaft SC-EPWS1CBL_M-A2-L

25 - -
Lead Out in Direction of Motor Shaft SC-EPWS1CBL_M-A1-H

26 2, 5, 10 -
Lead out in Opposite Direction of Motor Shaft SC-EPWS1CBL_M-A2-H

27 2, 5, 10 -
Power Supply Cable for MR-J4W2 and MR-J4W3

Stocked Protection
Lengths Level
SC-EPWS2CBL_M-L
28 Standard Bending Life (_= cable length: 2, 5, 10, 20, - -
30m)
SC-EPWS2CBL_M-H
29 Long Bending Life (_= cable length: 2, 5, 10, 20, 2, 5, 10 -
30m)
Motor Brake Cables for HG-KR/HG-MR Rotary Servomotors

Item Diagram
(_=cable length in meters) Lengths Level (*1)
Brake Cable for Lead Out in Direction of (_= 2, 5, or 10) (*1)
30
HG-KR/HG-MR Motor Shaft MR-BKS1CBL_M-A1-L - IP65
Series 10m or (_= 2, 5, or 10) (*1)
Shorter (Direct MR-BKS1CBL_M-A2-H 2, 5, 10 IP65
Connection Type) Lead Out in Opposite Direction (_= 2, 5, or 10) (*1)
31 (*2) of Motor Shaft MR-BKS1CBL_M-A2-L - IP65
_= 2, 5, or 10 (*1)
Brake Cable for Lead Out in Direction of MR-BKS2CBL03M-A1-L
32 S IP55
HG-KR/HG-MR Motor Shaft (cable length 0.3) (*1)
Series Exceeding
Lead Out in Opposite Direction MR-BKS2CBL03M-A2-L
33 10m (Relay Type) S IP55
of Motor Shaft (cable length 0.3) (*1)
(*2)
Notes:
1. The IP rating indicated is for the connector's protection against ingress of dust and water when coupled to a servo amplifier/servomotor. If the IP rating of the servo amplifier/servomotor differs from that of
these connectors, overall IP rating depends on the lowest of all.
382
Brake Cables for HG-SR/JR/RR/UR Servomotor Series
2, 5, 10,
Standard-Flex, Unshielded Type Cables MR-J3BK-_M IP65
20, 30
34
2, 5, 10, 15,
High-Flex, Shielded Type Cables MR-J3BRKS1-_M IP65
20, 30
Brake Connector Set

Stocked Protection
Lengths Level (*1)
Electromagnetic Brake Connector Set (One-Touch
35 Connection Type) For HG-SR (Straight Type) MR-BKCNS1 S IP67
HG-SR_4(B), HG-JR_4(B), HG-UR_4(B), HG-RR_4(B)
Electromagnetic Brake Connector Set (Screw Type) For
36 HG-SR (Straight Type) (*2) MR-BKCNS2 S IP67
Electromagnetic Brake Connector Set (One-Touch
37 Connection Type) For HG-SR (Angle Type) MR-BKCNS1A S IP67
Electromagnetic Brake Connector Set (Screw Type) For
38 MR-BKCNS1A S IP67
HG-SR (Angle Type) (*2)
Notes:
1. The IP rating indicated is for the connector's protection against ingress of dust and water when coupled to a servo amplifier/servomotor. If the IP rating of the servo amplifier/servomotor differs from that of these
2. A screw thread is cut on the electromagnetic brake connector of HG-SR Series and the screw type connector can be used.

Servo Support Software • (MRZJW3-MOTSZ111E) Manuals
This software makes it easy to perform setup, tuning, monitor display, Hardware Description Model Number Stocked Item
diagnostics, reading and writing of parameters, and test operations MR-J4B Instruction Manual SH(NA)030106-A MEAU.com
with a personal computer. User-friendly functions that enable the MR-J4A Instruction Manual SH(NA)030107-A MEAU.com
balance with the machine system, optimum control and short start up MR-J4W Instruction Manual SH(NA)030105-A MEAU.com
time are available.
personal computer. Description Model Number Stocked Item
• Multiple monitor functions. Graphic display functions are provided Windows Communication Software MR-CONFIGURATOR2 S
to display the servomotor status with the input signal triggers, such Communication Cable MR-J3USBCBL3M S
as the command pulse, droop pulse and speed.
servomotors can be performed with a personal computer using
multiple test mode menus.
• Further advanced tuning is possible with the improved advanced
functions.
E. System Options
MR-J4_
For Wire Size 3.5mm² FR-BSF01 S
(AWG12) or Smaller
All J4 Models FR-BIF S
MR-J4_
For Wire Size 5.5mm² FR-BLF S
(AWG10) or Larger
Manual Pulse Generator

Extension I/O Unit
MR-J4-B Only MR-J3-D05 S MR-J4-A Only MR-HDP01 S

EMC Filter (*1) Power Factor Improving DC Reactor
Servo Amplifier Type Model Number Stocked Item Description Stocked
Item
MR-J4-10A/B to 100A/B
MR-J4-10A/B, MR-J4-20A/B FR-HEL-0.4K -
MR-J4W2-22B HF3010A-UN (*1) -
MR-J4W3-222B MR-J4-40A/B FR-HEL-0.75K -
MR-J4-60A/B, MR-J4-70A/B FR-HEL-1.5K -
MR-J4W2-44B HF3010A-UN2 (*1) -
MR-J4-100A/B FR-HEL-2.2K -
MR-J4-200A/B, 350A/B MR-J4-200A/B FR-HEL-3.7K -
MR-J4W2-77B, 1010B HF3030A-UN (*1) - MR-J4-350A/B FR-HEL-7.5K -
MR-J4W3-444B
MR-J4-500A/B FR-HEL-11K -
MR-J4-700A/B FR-HEL-15K -
MR-J4-500A/B, 700A/B HF3040A-UN (*1) -
Note: Contact MEAU for additional filter opportunities.

Power Factor Improving AC Reactor
1. Manufactured by Soshin Electric Co., Ltd. A surge protector is separately required to use this EMC Stocked
filter. Refer to EMC Installation Guidelines.
Item
MR-J4-10A/B, MR-J4-20A/B FR-HAL-0.4K -
MR-J4-40A/B FR-HAL-0.75K -
20 Pin Terminal Block (*1) MR-J4-60A/B, MR-J4-70A/B FR-HAL-1.5K -
Servo Amplifier Type Model Number Stocked Item Description MR-J4-100A/B FR-HAL-2.2K -
MR-J4-500A/B FR-HAL-11K -
MR-J4-700A/B FR-HAL-15K -
MR-J3-B Safety Only PS7DW-20V14B-F S
Note: MR-TB20 terminal block cannot be used for MR-J3-B Safety.
Battery
Item Number Model Number Description Stocked Item Description

Battery MR-BAT6V1SET in the servo amplifier. The battery is not required when the servo system is S
The battery case and the batteries are required when configuring absolute
position detection system using the rotary servomotor or the direct drive
Battery MR-BAT6V1 motor. MR-BT6VCASE is a case that stores 5 pieces of MR-BAT6V1 batteries S
by connecting the connectors. Up to 8 axes of MR-J4W_-_B servo amplifiers
are able to be connected to this battery case. Use optional MR-BT6V2CBL_M
junction battery cable for branching off the connection when connecting
multiple servo amplifiers. MR-BT6VCASE and MR-BAT6V1 are not required
when using the linear servomotor or when configuring incremental system
Battery Case MR-BT6VCASE with the MR-J4W_-B servo amplifier. MR-BAT6V1 is not included with S
MR-BT6VCASE. Please purchase the batteries separately.

Optional Regeneration Resistors/Tolerable Regenerative Power (W) (*2)
Built-in Regenerative
Servo Amplifier MR-RB
Resistor/Tolerable
Model MR-J4-_ Regenerative Power (W)
032 (40Ω) 12 (40Ω) 30 (13Ω) 3N (9Ω) 31 (6.7Ω) 32 (40Ω) 50 (13Ω) 5N (9Ω) 51 (6.7Ω) 14 (26Ω) 34 (26Ω)
(*1) (*1) (*1)
Stocked Item - S S S S S S S S S - -
MR-J4-10A/B - 30 - - - - - - - - - -
MR-J4-20A/B 10 30 100 - - - - - - - - -
MR-J4-40A/B 10 30 100 - - - - - - - - -
MR-J4-60A/B 10 30 100 - - - - - - - - -
MR-J4-70A/B 20 30 100 - - - 300 - - - - -
MR-J4-100A/B 20 30 100 - - - 300 - - - - -
MR-J4-200A/B 100 - - 300 - - - 500 - - - -
MR-J4-350A/B 100 - - - 300 - - - 500 - - -
MR-J4-500A/B 130 - - - - 300 - - - 500 - -
MR-J4-700A/B 170 - - - - 300 - - - 500 - -
MR-J4W2-22B 20 - - - - - - - - - 100 -
MR-J4W2-44B 20 - - - - - - - - - 100 -
MR-J4W2-77B 100 - - - 300 - - - - - - -
MR-J4W2-1010B 100 - - - 300 - - - - - - -
MR-J4W3-222B 30 - - - - - - - - - 100 300
MR-J4W3-444B 30 - - - - - - - - - 100 300
Notes:
1. Be sure to cool the unit forcibly with a cooling fan (92 mm × 92 mm, minimum air flow: 1.0 m³/min). The cooling fan must be prepared by user.
2. The power values in this table are resistor-generated powers, not rated powers
384
MR-J4-T20: Conversion Unit for SSCNET of MR-J2S-B
By using the conversion unit for SSCNET of MR-J2S-B, MR-J4 series servo amplifier can be connected to the
SSCNET of MR-J2S-B compatible servo system controller.
SSCNET of MR-J2S-B Compatible Controller

MR-J4 B -

Mitsubishi General RJ020 Conversion unit for SSCNET of MR-J2S-B compatible (*5)
Purpose AC Servo RU020 MR-J4-_B-RJ020 without dynamic brake (*4)
Amplifier
Symbol Power Supply
None 3-phase 200 VAC or 1-phase 200 VAC (*1)
4 3-phase 400 VAC (*2)
Symbol Interface
B SSCNET III/H (*3)
Symbol Rated Output [kW] (*2)
10 0.1
MR-J4-B-RJ020 20 0.2
MR-J4-T20
40 0.4
60 0.6
70 0.75
100 1
200 3
350 3.5
500 5
700 7
Notes
1. MR-J4-70B-RJ020 or smaller servo amplifiers are available for 1-phase 200 VAC.
HG Series
2. MR-J4-60B4-RJ020 or larger servo amplifiers are available.
3. SSCNET III/H interface is not available in the J2S compatibility mode.
4. Available in 7 kW or less servo amplifier without a built-in dynamic brake. When using the servo
amplifier without a dynamic brake, the servo motor does not stop immediately at an alarm
occurrence or power failure. Take measures to ensure safety on the entire system. When the
following servo motors are used, the electronic dynamic brake may operate at an alarm occurrence.
HG-KR053, HG-KR13, HG-KR23, HG-KR43, HG-MR053, HG-MR13, HG-MR23, HG-MR43, HG-SR51,
and HG-SR52 Disable the electronic dynamic brake by setting [Pr. 56] to "2_ _ _."
5. MR-J4-T20 conversion unit for SSCNET of MR-J2S-B is required to make the servo amplifier be
compatible with SSCNET interface. When MR-J4-B-RJ020 and MR-J4-T20 are combined,
MR-J4-B-RJ020 is compatible with the following servo system controllers: A171SHCPU(N),
A172SHCPU(N), A173UHCPU, A1SD75M, QD75M, Q172CPU(N), and Q173CPU(N)
Combinations of Servo Amplifier and Servomotor 200 VAC Combinations of Servo Amplifier and Servomotor 400 VAC
Servo Amplifier Stocked Item Servomotor Servo Amplifier Stocked Item Servomotor
HG-KR053, 13 HG-SR524
MR-J4-10B-RJ020 S MR-J4-60B4-RJ020 S
HG-MR053, 13 HG-JR534
HG-KR23 HG-SR1024
MR-J4-20B-RJ020 S MR-J4-100B4-RJ020 S
HG-MR23 HG-JR534 (*1), 734, 1034
HG-KR43 HG-SR1524, 2024
MR-J4-40B-RJ020 S
HG-MR43 MR-J4-200B4-RJ020 S HG-JR734 (*1), 1034 (*1), 1534,
HG-SR51, 52 2034
MR-J4-60B-RJ020 S
HG-JR53 HG-SR3524
MR-J4-350B4-RJ020 S
HG-KR73 HG-JR1534 (*1), 2034 (*1), 3534
HG-MR73 HG-SR5024
MR-J4-70B-RJ020 S MR-J4-500B4-RJ020 S
HG-JR73 HG-JR3534 (*1), 5034
HG-UR72 HG-SR7024
MR-J4-700B4-RJ020 S
HG-SR81, 102 HG-JR5034 (Note1), 7034
MR-J4-100B-RJ020 S
HG-JR53 (*1), 103
Note:
HG-SR121, 201, 152, 202 1. The maximum torque can be increased from 300% to 400% of the rated torque with this combination.
HG-JR73 (*1), 103 (*1), 153, 203
MR-J4-200B-RJ020 S
HG-RR103, 153
HG-UR152
HG-SR301, 352
HG-JR153 (*1), 203 (*1), 353
MR-J4-350B-RJ020 S
HG-RR203
HG-UR202
HG-SR421, 502
HG-JR353 (*1), 503
MR-J4-500B-RJ020 S
HG-RR353, 503
HG-UR352, 502
HG-SR702
MR-J4-700B-RJ020 S
HG-JR503 (*1), 703

MR-J4-B-RJ020 (Interface for SSCNET of MR-J2S-B) Specifications (200V)
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J4-_-RJ020 10B 20B 40B 60B 70B 100B 200B 350B 500B 700B
Stocked Item S S S S S S S S S S
Output
Rated Current (A) 1.1 1.5 2.8 3.2 5.8 6.0 11.0 17.0 28.0 37.0
50 Hz/60 Hz
Main Circuit
Power Rated Current (A) 0.9 1.5 2.6 3.2 (*7) 3.8 5.0 10.5 16.0 21.7 28.9
Control
Interface Power Supply 24 VDC ±10% (required current capacity: 0.1 A)
Tolerable
Regenerative - 10 10 10 20 20 100 100 130 170
(*2, *3) (W)
Power
Communication Function USB: not for use in the J2S compatibility mode
overspeed protection, error excessive protection
Safety Function Not compatible
Compliance to Standards LVD: EN 61800-5-1, EMC: EN 61800-3, MD: EN ISO 13849-1, EN 61800-5-2, EN 62061; UL 508C; CSA C22.2 No.14
Force cooling, open
Structure (IP Rating) Natural cooling, open (IP20) Force cooling, open (IP20)
(IP20) (*5)
Weight (kg) 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.4 1.4 2.1 2.3 4.0 6.2
Notes:
3. Refer to "MR-J4-_B_-RJ020 MR-J4-T20 Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual" for the tolerable regenerative power [W] when regenerative option is used.
4. When using the built-in dynamic brake, refer to "MR-J4-_B_-RJ020 MR-J4-T20 Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual" for the permissible load to motor inertia ratio.
8. The value is applicable for MR-J4-_B-RJ020 servo amplifier only.
386
MR-J4-B4-RJ020 (Interface for SSCNET of MR-J2S-B) Specifications (400V)
Servo Amplifier Model MR-J4-_(-RJ) 60B4 100B4 200B4 350B4 500B4 700B4
Output
Rated Current (A) 1.5 2.8 5.4 8.6 14.0 17.0
Voltage/Frequency (*1) 3-phase 380 VAC to 480 VAC, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Main Circuit Rated Current (A) 1.4 2.5 5.1 7.9 10.8 14.4
Power
Control
Interface Power Supply 24 VDC ±10% (required current capacity: 0.1 A)
Tolerable 15 15 100 100 130 (*6) 170 (*6)
(*2, *3) (W)
Regenerative
External Regenerative Resistor (W)
Power - - - - - -
(Standard Accessory) (*2, 3)
Communication Function USB: not for use in the J2S compatibility mode
Overcurrent shut-off, regenerative overvoltage shut-off, overload shut-off (electronic thermal), servo motor overheat
Protective Functions protection, encoder error protection, regenerative error protection, undervoltage protection, instantaneous power failure
protection, overspeed protection, error excessive protection
Safety Function Not compatible
Compliance to Standards LVD: EN 61800-5-1, EMC: EN 61800-3, MD: EN ISO 13849-1, EN 61800-5-2, EN 62061; UL 508C; CSA C22.2 No.14
Close Mounting Not Possible
Weight (kg) 1.7 1.7 2.1 3.6 4.3 6.5
Notes:
3. Refer to "MR-J4-_B_-RJ020 MR-J4-T20 Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual" for the tolerable regenerative power [W] when regenerative option is used.
4. When using the built-in dynamic brake, refer to "MR-J4-_B_-RJ020 MR-J4-T20 Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual" for the permissible load to motor inertia ratio.
Contact your local sales office if the operating motor speed or the load to motor inertia ratio exceeds the rated speed or the recommended ratio.
Conversion Unit for SSCNET of MR-J2S-B (MR-J4-T20)

Model MR-J4-T20
Stocked Item
Control Circuit Voltage 5 VDC (Control circuit power for the conversion unit for SSCNET of MR-J2S-B is supplied from the servo amplifier.)
Power Supply
Input Rated Current (A) 0.1
Network Interface SSCNET interface (CN10A and CN10B connectors)
Communication Function RS-232C: Connect a personal computer (MR Configurator (MRZJW3-SETUP161E) compatible) (CN30 connector)
Structure (IP Rating) Natural-cooling, open (IP00)
Vibration Resistance 5.9 [m/s²] at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y and Z axes)
Weight (g) 140

MR-J4 Motor Shaft Details and Servomotor Dimensions
HG-KR / HG-MR Series: D-Cut Shaft (50W & 100W Motors Only)
25 (0.98)
21.5 (0.85)
1 (0.039)
20.5 (0.81)
0
ø8h6 (ø0.3150 -0.009 )
Unit: mm (inch)
Keyway With Key Included Motor Capacity Variable Dimensions

Model (W) T S R Q W QK QL U Y
R
Q 23(B) 5 14h6 30 5 20 3 3 M4 Depth
26
43(B) (0.20) (0.554) (1.18) (0.20) (0.79) (0.12) (0.12) 15 (0.59)
HG-KR_K
6 19h6 40 6 25 5 3.5 M5 Depth
73(B) 36
QK QL U (0.24) (0.7480) (1.57) (0.24) (0.98) (0.20) (0.14) 20 (0.79)
A
W
øS

A T Y Model (W) T S R Q W QK QL U Y
Cross Section
23(B) 5 14h6 30 5 20 3 3 M4 Depth
A-A 26
(Unit: mm) 43(B) (0.20) (0.554) (1.18) (0.20) (0.79) (0.12) (0.12) 15 (0.59)
HG-MR_K
6 19h6 40 6 25 5 3.5 M5 Depth
73(B) 36
(0.24) (0.7480) (1.57) (0.24) (0.98) (0.20) (0.14) 20 (0.79)
HG-SR Series 200V

Variable Dimensions
Motor Capacity
Model (W) Key Key Model Stocked
R S R Q W QK QL U r Y
Dimensions Number Item
Q
51(B) 14h6 5 +0.2 MTR KEY
55 50 0
8 -0.030 36 4 8x7x28 S
81(B) (0.554) (0.20) 4 0 8-7-28
QK QL U M8
A
screw
HG-SR_K 121(B)
depth
201(B) 5 MTR KEY
øS
+0.2
W
+0.01 79 75 0 20
301(B) 35 0 10 -0.030 55 (0.20) 5 0
5 10x8x45
10-8-45
S
A r A-A
Y 421(B)
Variable Dimensions
Motor Capacity
S R Q W QK QL U r Y
52(B)
24h6 5 +0.2 MTR KEY
102(B) 55 50 0
8 -0.030 36 4 8x7x28 S
(0.554) (0.20) 4 0 8-7-28
152(B) M8
screw
HG-SR_K 202(B) depth
352(B) +0.01 79 0 5 +0.2 20 MTR KEY
35 0 75 10 -0.030 55 5 10x8x45 S
502(B) (0.20) 5 0 10-8-45
702(B)
HG-SR Series 400V

R
Q Variable Dimensions
Motor Capacity
S R Q W QK QL U r Y
QK QL U Dimensions Number Item
A 524(B)
24h6 5 +0.2 MTR KEY
1024(B) 55 50 0
8 -0.036 36 4 8x7x28 S
(0.554) (0.20) 4 0 8-7-28
øS
W
1524(B) M8
A r A-A
Y
screw
HG-SR_K 2024(B) depth
3524(B) +0.01 79 0 5 +0.2 20 (N/A) Key to be supplied by
[Unit: mm] 35 0 75 10 -0.036 55 5
5024(B) (0.20) 5 0 customer.
7024(B)
General Notes
1. The servo motors with special shaft end are not suitable for frequent start/stop applications.
2. A key is not supplied with the servo motor. The key shall be installed by the user.
388
HG-JR 3000 Series 200V
Variable Dimensions
Motor Capacity
R S R Q W QK QL U r Y
Q
53(B)
M8
73(B)
+0.1 screw (N/A) Key to be supplied by
U 103(B) 16h6 40 30 0
5 -0.030 25 2 4
QK QL
3 0 depth customer.
A
153(B)
15
203(B)
øS
W
A 353(B) (N/A) Key to be supplied by

r A-A
Y
HG-JR_K 18h6 55 50 0
8 -0.036 36 5 4 +0.2
503(B) 0 customer.
M8
[Unit: mm] screw
depth
703(B) +0.01 79 0 +0.2 20 (N/A) Key to be supplied by
35 0 75 10 -0.036 55 5 5 0 5
903(B) customer.
HG-JR 3000 Series 400V

R Variable Dimensions
Motor Capacity
Q
S R Q W QK QL U r Y
534(B)
QK QL U
M8
A 734(B)
+0.1 screw (N/A) Key to be supplied by
1034(B) 16h6 40 30 0
5 -0.030 25 2 2.5
3 0 depth customer.
1534(B)
øS
W
15
2034(B)
A r Y
A-A
3534(B) MTR KEY
HG-JR_K 28h6 55 50 0
8 -0.036 36 5 4 +0.2 4 8x7x28 S
5034(B) 0 8-7-28
M8
screw
Figure A (Unit: mm) depth
7034(B) +0.01 79 0 +0.2 20 (N/A) Key to be supplied by
35 0 75 10 -0.036 55 5 5 0 5
9034(B) customer.
HG-JR 1500 Series 200/400V

R
Motor
Capacity (W) Key Key Model Stocked
Model S R Q W QK QL U r Y
U
QK QL
A 11K1M(B) M8
15K1M(B) 5 +0.2 screw (N/A) Key to be supplied by
55m6 116 110 16 0 90 8
(0.20) 6 0
øS
W
11K1M4(B) -0.040 depth customer.

A r Y 15K1M4(B) 27
A-A
HG-JR_K
M8
22K1M 5 +0.2 screw (N/A) Key to be supplied by
65m6 140 130 18 0 120 9
(0.20) 7 0
[Unit: mm]
22K1M4 -0.040 depth customer.
25
General Notes

HG-RR Series 200V

R
Motor
U
QK QL
A 103(B)
+0.2 (N/A) Key to be supplied by
153(B) 24h6 45 40 0
8 -0.036 25 5 4 0 4
customer.
øS
W
203(B) M8
A r A-A
Y screw
HG-RR_K
depth
353(B) 0 +0.2 20 MTR KEY
28h6 63 58 8 -0.036 53 3 4 0 4 8x7x45 S
503(B) 8-7-45
[Unit: mm]
HG-UR Series 200V

R
Motor
U
QK QL
A
+0.1 (N/A) Key to be supplied by
72(B) 22h6 55 50 0
6 -0.036 42 3 3.5 0 3 customer.
øS
W
A r A-A
Y
0 +0.2 M8 MTR KEY
152(B) 28h6 55 50 8 -0.036 40 3 4 0 4 8x7x36 S
screw 8-7-36
HG-UR_K
[Unit: mm] depth
20
202(B)
+0.01 +0.2 MTR KEY
352(B) 35 0 65 60 10 0 50 5 5 0 5 10x8x45
10-8-45
S
502(B) -0.036
General Notes
390
HG-KR/HG-MR Series Dimensions (*1, *5, *6)
HG-KR053(B), HG-KR13(B)
HG-MR053(B), HG-MR13(B)
Power connector
Pin No. Signal name
1
L 25 40 2
1 (PE)
1
2
20.5 20.7 5 2.5 Use hexagonal cap 2 U
45° 3
3
21.5 head bolts.
4
4 3 V
20.7
4 W
ø4
6
ø30h7
Electromagnetic brake connector (Note 2)
Pin No. Signal name
ø8h6
38.8 (Note 3)
21
1 1 B1
36
37.1
1
2 2 B2
2
10.9 Power connector
Encoder connector
11.7 11.7 9.9 Electromagnetic brake connector 13.9 6.4 Variable
13.7 4.9 21.7 19.2 (Note 3) 27.5
27.4 58.8 (Note 3) 18.4 KL Model dimensions (Note 4)
(Note 3) When the cables are led out in opposite direction of load side L KL
HG-KR053(B) 66.4
23.8
HG-MR053(B) (107)
(Note 3) Power HG-KR13(B) 82.4

7°
connector 39.8
11.7 11.7 18.4 9.9 HG-MR13(B) (123)
9°
13°
Encoder (Note 3)
connector 58.8 (Note 3) Electromagnetic brake
connector (Note 3)
21.7
[Unit: mm]
HG-KR23(B), HG-KR43(B))
HG-MR23(B), HG-MR43(B) Power connector
Pin No. Signal name
1
L 30 4-ø5.8 mounting hole 60 2
1 (PE)
1
7 3 Use hexagonal cap 45° 2 U
2
head bolts. 3
3
26
4
4 3 V
ø7 4 W
0
ø50h7

47.1 (Note 3)
ø14h6
Pin No. Signal name

47.1
1
46
1
1 B1
2
2
2 B2
Encoder
connector 10.9 9.5 Power connector
13.7 10 11.8 11.7 13.9 5.9
19.2 Variable
28.4 21.7 27.8
KL Model dimensions (Note 4)
57.8 (Note 3)
Electromagnetic brake When the cables are led out in opposite direction of load side
Peripheral Equipment
L KL
connector (Note 3)
HG-KR23(B) 76.6
36.4
HG-MR23(B) (113.4)
Power
(Note 3) connector
9°
13.5°
Encoder 11.8 11.7 9.5 HG-KR43(B) 98.3

7°
18.3
connector 58.1
(Note 3) Electromagnetic brake HG-MR43(B) (135.1)
57.8 (Note 3) connector (Note 3)
21.7
[Unit: mm]
HG-KR73(B) Power connector

HG-MR73(B) 1
Pin No. Signal name
112 (152.3) (Note 4) 40 80 2
1 (PE)
1
8 3 45°
2
Use hexagonal cap 3 2 U

3
36 head bolts.
4
4 3 V
ø9 4 W
0
ø70h7

56
57.1
2 1 B1
2
ø19h6
Encoder connector 2 B2
10.7 9.5 Power 14 12
13.7 11.5 11.8 11.7 19.2 connector
27.8
27.4 21.7 69.6
63.1 (Note 3) When the cables are led out in opposite direction of load side
Electromagnetic brake
connector (Note 3)
(Note 3) Power
Encoder
7°
connector
7°
connector
7°
11.8 11.7 18.4 9.5

(Note 3)
63.1 (Note 3)
connector (Note 3)
21.7
[Unit: mm]
Notes:
1. For dimensions without tolerance, general tolerance applies.
2. The electromagnetic brake terminals (B1, B2) do not have polarity.
3. Only for the models with electromagnetic brake.
4. Dimensions in brackets are for the models with electromagnetic brake.
6. Servo motors with oil seal (HG-KR_J and HG-MR_J) have different dimensions. Contact your local sales office for more details.

HG-SR Series Dimensions (*1, *5)
HG-SR51(B), HG-SR81(B)
HG-SR52(B), HG-SR102(B), HG-SR152(B)
HG-SR524(B), HG-SR1024(B), HG-SR1524(B)
L 55 130 4-ø9 mounting hole
38.2 (43.5) 12 3 Use hexagonal cap
45°
(Note 4) 50 head bolts.
(Note 3)
ø24h6
45
ø1
ø110h7
ø1
79.9 (Note 3) (Note 3) 65
50.9
112.5
Encoder connector 13
CMV1-R10P 59 (Note 3) (Note 3)
Electromagnetic brake connector
(Note 3) 29 20.9 13.5
CMV1-R2P (Note 3)
(Note 3) KL 58
Power connector
MS3102A18-10P
W (PE)
Main key
Key
Variable
Position mark Model
C D
dimensions (Note 4)
A B
(Note 2) 1000 r/min 2000 r/min L KL
Electromagnetic brake V U
Electromagnetic brake connector Power connector HG-SR52(B)
Servo motor flange direction Servo motor flange direction
- HG-SR524(B)
118.5 (153) 57.8
HG-SR102(B)
HG-SR51(B) 132.5 (167) 71.8
HG-SR1024(B)
HG-SR152(B)
HG-SR81(B) 146.5 (181) 85.8
HG-SR1524(B)
HG-SR121(B), HG-SR201(B), HG-SR301(B), HG-SR421(B)

L 79 176
38.5 18 3 45° Use hexagonal cap
(45.5) 75 head bolts.
(Note 4)
(Note 3) *1
+0.010
*1
0
0
ø20
*6 *4 *4 *6
ø35
-0.025
0
ø114.3
96.9 (Note 3)
50.9
(Note 3) ø23
0
*3 *5 *3 *5
KB
*2 *2
Encoder connector 13 (Note 3)

CMV1-R10P 66.5
(Note 3)
(Note 3) 44 Electromagnetic brake connector KA 82
(Note 3) CMV1-R2P (Note 3) KL
Power connector
MS3102A22-22P (3.5 kW or smaller, and 5 kW)
MS3102A32-17P (4.2 kW and 7 kW) W (PE)
Main key Model Variable dimensions (Note 4)
Key
Position mark
(Note 2) C D
A B
1000 r/min 2000 r/min L KL KA KB
Electromagnetic
brake HG-SR202(B) 138.5
HG-SR121(B)
V U
74.8
Electromagnetic brake connector Power connector HG-SR2024(B) (188)
Servo motor flange direction Servo motor flange direction
HG-SR352(B) 162.5
*1, *2, *3, *4, *5 and *6 are screw holes (M8) for eyebolt. HG-SR201(B) 98.8 24.8 140.9
•HG-SR201(B), 301(B), 352(4)(B), 502(4)(B): *1, *2 HG-SR3524(B) (212)
•HG-SR421(B), 702(4)(B): *3, *4, *5, *6
HG-SR502(B) 178.5
HG-SR301(B) 114.8
HG-SR5024(B) (228)
HG-SR702(B) 218.5
HG-SR421(B) 146.8 32 149.1
HG-SR7024(B) (268)
[Unit: mm]
Notes:
2. The electromagnetic brake terminals do not have polarity.
392
HG-JR Series Dimensions (*1, *5)
HG-JR53(B), HG-JR73(B), HG-JR103(B), HG-JR153(B), HG-JR203(B)
HG-JR534(B), HG-JR734(B), HG-JR1034(B), HG-JR1534(B), HG-JR2034(B) 4-ø6.6 mounting hole
Use hexagonal cap
head bolts.
L 40 90
38.2 (38) 7.5 5
45°
ø1
(Note 4) 4.5
18
30 ø1
00
ø16h6
ø80h7
ø41
50.9
Oil seal
93.8
(Note 3)
Variable
(Note 3) Model dimensions (Note 4)

57.4
L KL
HG-JR53(B) 127.5
Power connector 76
35°
KL from the flange surface HG-JR534(B) (173)
MS3102A18-10P
Main key
66.5 Position mark V W HG-JR73(B) 145.5
94
42
(Note 3) HG-JR734(B) (191)
.2
13 25.7
B C
HG-JR103(B) 163.5
21
(Note 2)
A D
112
Encoder connector
.8 Electromagnetic
HG-JR1034(B) (209)
CMV1-R10P 36 U (PE)
brake
Key HG-JR153(B) 199.5
16 148
(Note 3) Electromagnetic brake connector Power connector HG-JR1534(B) (245)
Servo motor flange direction (View from front of
15
the connector) HG-JR203(B) 235.5

184
HG-JR2034(B) (281)
10.6
(Note 3)
CMV1-R2P
[Unit: mm]
HG-JR353(B), HG-JR503(B)
4-ø9 mounting hole
Use hexagonal cap
head bolts. Main key
L 55 130 Position mark V W
38.2 (43.5) 12 3 45°
(Note 4) 50 B C
A D
(Note 2)
ø1 Electromagnetic brake U (PE)
65
Key
(Note 3) (Note 3)
Electromagnetic brake connector Power connector
ø28h6

the connector)
ø110h7
(Note 3) (Note 3)
(Note 3)
79.9 (Note 3)
Variable
50.9
Model dimensions (Note 4)

95.8
(Note 3)
116.8
13 Oil seal
L KL
45
63 213
ø1
HG-JR353(B) 228
(Note 3) (Note 3) (251.5)
29
267
15.5 34 Encoder connector 80 HG-JR503(B) 282
(305.5)
71 CMV1-R10P KL
Power connector
MS3102A22-22P
[Unit: mm]
(Note 3)
CMV1-R2P
HG-JR3534(B), HG-JR5034(B)
4-ø9 mounting hole

KL from the flange surface
Use hexagonal cap 35°
head bolts. 63 25.7
L 55 130 13 (Note 3)
42
Power connector
.2
38.2 (43.5) 12 3 MS3102A18-10P

45°
21
(Note 4) 50
.8
Encoder connector
13.5
CMV1-R10P 36
ø1
65
(Note 3)
(Note 3) (Note 3)
29
ø28h6

13.1
(Note 3)
ø110h7
(Note 3) (Note 3) CMV1-R2P

(Note 3)
79.9 (Note 3)
Main key
50.9
Position mark V W
Oil seal
114.8
B C Variable
A D
dimensions (Note 4)
5
(Note 3)
Model
4
ø1
(Note 2) (PE)
Electromagnetic brake U L KL
Key
Electromagnetic brake connector Power connector 213
Servo motor flange direction (View from front of HG-JR3534(B) 161
the connector) (251.5)
267
HG-JR5034(B) 215
(305.5)
Notes:
1. For dimensions without tolerance, general tolerance applies. [Unit: mm]

HG-JR Series Dimensions (*1, *5)
HG-JR703(B), HG-JR903(B)
HG-JR7034(B), HG-JR9034(B) 4-ø13.5 mounting hole
Use hexagonal cap
head bolts.
L 79 176
38.5 (45.5) 18 3 45°
(Note 4) 75
(Note 3) *4
+0.010
*4 (Note 3)
0
*2 *2
ø35
-0.025
0
ø114.3
96.9 (Note 3)
0
50.9
(Note 3) (Note 3) ø20
(Note 3)
Oil seal
*1 *1
13
133.5
*3
Variable
163.3
*3
ø2
30
66.5 L KL
(Note 3)
HG-JR703(B) 263.5
285.4
Encoder connector HG-JR7034(B) (313)
44 28.5 92.1 44
CMV1-R10P HG-JR903(B) 303.5
(Note 3) KL 102.3 325.4
Electromagnetic
brake connector (Note 3)
HG-JR9034(B) (353)
CMV1-R2P Main key
Power connector Position mark V W
[Unit: mm]
MS3102A32-17P
B C
A D
(Note 2)
Electromagnetic brake U (PE)
Key
Electromagnetic brake connector Power connector *1, *2, *3, and *4 are screw holes (M8) for eyebolt.
the connector)
HG-JR11K1M(B), HG-JR15K1M(B)
HG-JR11K1M4(B), HG-JR15K1M4(B) 4-ø13.5 mounting hole
Use hexagonal cap
head bolts. (PE)
W
L 116 220 Key Key
40 20 4 A C D
° 45° B A
37.5
B
110
2-M8 screw V U
(Note 2)
Electromagnetic
(Note 3) *1,2
27 brake
ø55m6
*1 *2
ø2
Electromagnetic brake connector Power connector

50
ø27 Servo motor flange direction Servo motor flange direction

(Note 3) 0
ø200h7
Variable
136.2 (Note 3)
(Note 3) 35
(Note 3) ø2
81
M10 screw Model dimensions (Note 4)

171.1
*4 (Note 3) *3 Oil seal L KL

*3,4
HG-JR11K1M(B) 339.5
265.5
19.5 HG-JR11K1M4(B) (412)
HG-JR15K1M(B) 439.5
MS3102A20-29P (Note 3) 32 4 54 365.5
(Note 3)
HG-JR15K1M4(B) (512)
Electromagnetic brake connector (Note 3) KL
82
MS3102A10SL-4P
Power connector [Unit: mm]
MS3102A32-17P
*1, *2, *3, and *4 are screw holes (M10) for eyebolt.
HG-JR22K1M
HG-JR22K1M4
Power lead hole

ø63 hole (Note 7)
101 107 476 140 352
(37) Key
439
Cooling fan connector 250 (Flange)
Encoder connector 230 174 Do not use this. BU
CE05-2A14S-2P 235 (Red)
MS3102A20-29P ø63 227 D A
45°
35 5 C B
4-ø24 mounting hole BW BV
Exhaust 130 Use hexagonal cap (Black) (White)
head bolts.
Cooling fan connector
(View from front of the connector)
220
Cooling fan
190
ø65m6
Servo motor flange direction

154
ø3
154
rotating 25 8 30
direction 65
163
Intake ø2
ø230h7
(Note 6)
125
M12 screw
Oil seal
4 eyebolts *1
Notes: [Unit: mm]
6. Leave a clearance of at least 150 mm between the intake side of the servo motor and wall.
7. Prevent oil, water, dust, and other foreign matter from entering the servo motor through the lead hole.
8. A washer is placed between the eyebolt and the servo motor to adjust the bolt angle.
394
HG-RR Series Dimensions (*1, *5)
HG-RR103(B), HG-RR153(B), HG-RR203(B)
4-ø9 mounting hole
Use hexagonal cap
head bolts.
L 45 100
38 10 3 45°
40
ø24h6
ø95h7
ø1
35
15
ø1
50.9
Oil seal
94.8
CMV1-R10P
Power connector KL 44
CE05-2A22-23P
(Note 2)
Variable
(PE) Key
E F
D H G
C
B
A
L KL
U
W V 145.5
HG-RR103(B) 69.5
Power connector
(183)
Servo motor flange direction
170.5
HG-RR153(B) 94.5
(208)
195.5
HG-RR203(B) 119.5
(233)
[Unit: mm]
HG-RR353(B), HG-RR503(B)
4-ø9 mounting hole

Use hexagonal cap
head bolts.
L 63 130
42 12 3
45°
58
(Note 3) (Note 3)
ø28h6
ø110h7
(Note 3) (Note 3) ø1
65
(Note 3) 45
ø1
50.9
Oil seal
117.4
CMV1-R10P
CE05-2A24-10P
(Note 2)
(PE) Key
D
E
F
Variable
G
C
B
A
U
V L KL
W
Power connector 215.5

Servo motor flange direction HG-RR353(B) 147.5
(252)
272.5
HG-RR503(B) 204.5
(309)
[Unit: mm]
Notes:

HG-UR Series Dimensions (*1, *5)
HG-UR72(B), HG-UR152(B)
L 55 176 4-ø13.5 mounting hole
40 13 3 Use hexagonal cap
40° 45° head bolts.
50 2-M6 screw
ø2
15
ø2
(Note 3) (Note 3) 30 00
ø2
øSh6
ø114.3 -0.025
0
50.9
Oil seal
141.3
13
Encoder connector
CMV1-R10P
CE05-2A22-23P
(Note 2)
Variable dimensions (Note 4)
(PE) Key Model
E F
L KL S
D H G
C A
B
U 109
HG-UR72(B) 38 22
V
(142.5)
W
Power connector 118.5
Servo motor flange direction HG-UR152(B) 47.5 28
(152)
[Unit: mm]
HG-UR202(B), HG-UR352(B), HG-UR502(B)
L 65 220
39.2 16 4 4-ø13.5 mounting hole
° Use hexagonal cap
37.5 45
° head bolts.
60 2-M8 screw
(Note 3)
ø2
(Note 3)
50
+0.010
35
ø2
0
ø27
0
ø35
ø200 -0.046
0
50.9

138.7 (Note 3)
Oil seal
13
164.9
Encoder connector
CMV1-R10P
connector (Note 3) 53.5
MS3102A10SL-4P (Note 3)
42 KL 47
Power connector
(Note 3)
CE05-2A24-10P
Variable
Key (PE) Key Model dimensions (Note 4)
E
A D
G
F L KL
B C A
B
U 116.5
Electromagnetic W HG-UR202(B) 42.5
V (159.5)
brake (Note 2)
Electromagnetic brake connector Power connector 140.5
HG-UR352(B) 66.5
Servo motor flange direction Servo motor flange direction (183.5)
164.5
HG-UR502(B) 90.5
(207.5)
[Unit: mm]
Notes:
396
Variable Frequency Drives
Variable Frequency Drives
A700
A700 1/4 - 800 Hp

FUNCTION / PERFORMANCE
F700
F700 1 - 1000 Hp
E700 1/8 - 20 Hp
E E
E500
E560 1 - 10 Hp
D700 1/8 - 10 Hp
CAPACITY
Variable Frequency Drives Family .....................................................................................................398

D700 Series ......................................................................................................................................399
E700 Series .......................................................................................................................................405
E560 Series .......................................................................................................................................411
F700 Series .......................................................................................................................................414
A700 Series ......................................................................................................................................424
A701 Series ......................................................................................................................................435
V500 Series ......................................................................................................................................439
Engineered Solutions ........................................................................................................................443
General Options ................................................................................................................................452
when we are out of stock due to unexpected large requirements. All stock product will be indicated in this book by an “S” in the
Stocked Item columns/rows.
Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Variable Frequency Drives 397

n VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Variable Frequency Drives Family

Standard Features:
• RS-485 serial communications • Soft PWM
(Mitsubishi VFD protocol) • Engineered solutions available
• PID control Setup Software available
• Adjustable carrier frequency (Low Noise) • User selectable Sink (default) / Source I/O
up to 14.5kHz
Model Series D700 E560 E700 F700 A700

Voltage Range (VAC) 115 1Ø 240 1Ø 240 480 600 115 1Ø 240 1Ø 240 480 240 480 240 480 600
Constant Torque 1/2~125 1/2~800 1~650
Range
1/8~1 1/8~3 1/8~10 1/2~10 1~10 1/8~1 1/8~3 1/8~20 1/2~20 1~200 1~1000
HP
Variable Torque 1~200 1~1000 2~850

Open-Loop Flux
Yes Yes Yes No Yes
Control Algorithm
Vector Speed
Open-Loop Torque No No No No Yes
Closed-Loop Speed No No No No Yes
Closed-Loop Torque No No No No Yes
Closed-Loop Position No No No No Yes
Digital Inputs 5 (2 additional for Safety) 7 7 (expandable) 12 (expandable) 12 (expandable)
0~5 / 10VDC Yes Yes Yes No No
0~±5 / ±10VDC No No No Yes Yes
Inputs
4~20mA No Yes No No No
4~20mA or 0~5/10VDC Yes No Yes Yes (2 ports) Yes (2 ports)
Pulse (Speed) No No No No Yes
Digital Outputs 1 2 2 (expandable) 5 (expandable) 5 (expandable)
Relay Outputs 1 1 1 (expandable) 2 (expandable) 2 (expandable)
Outputs
0~10VDC Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (expandable)

0~20mA No No No Yes (optional)
Pulse No No No No Yes
Modbus RTU Standard No Standard Standard Standard
CC-Link No Option Option Option Option
DeviceNet No Option Option Option Option
Profibus-DP No Option Option Option Option
LonWorks No Option Option Option Option
Communications
SSCNETIII No No No No Option
ControlNET No No No No Option
Metasys N2 Option Option Option Option Option
Siemens FLN Option Option Option Option Option
BACnet/MS/TP Standard Option Option Option Option
EtherNet/IP Option Option Option Option Option (2 types)
Modbus TCP/IP Option Option Option Option Option
BACnet/IP No No Option Option Option
Brake Transistor Yes (1/2HP and above) Yes Yes (1/2HP and above) No Up to 30HP
Up to
Brake Resistor Option Option Option No Up to 10HP
5HP
EMC Filter Option No Option Standard Standard No
DC Reactor Option No Option Option (standard 100HP and above)
Safety Stop Function Standard No Option No No
1
Communications Ports 1 (RS-485) 2 (RS-485 & USB) 2 (RS-485) 3 (2x RS-485 & USB)
(RS485)
Plug-in Option Ports 0 1 1 1 3
Operator Interface Standard Option Standard Standard Standard
FR-PU07
Alpha/Numeric Keypad Option FR-PU07 FR-PU04 FR-PU07 FR-PU07
FR-PU07-01
Alarm History Last 8 Last 8 Last 8 Last 8 Last 8
398
D700 Series
Low cost micro VFD with Mitsubishi Electric quality.
• Simple to use: The D700 is perfect for a wide range • 150% torque at 1Hz and 200% torque at 3Hz using
of applications General-purpose Magnetic Flux Vector Control
• Simple to set up: The integrated digital setting dial • Optimum Excitation Control for increased energy
with display makes configuration fast and easy savings when motor is not loaded
• Simple operation: Control remotely or with the • Frequency search function for catching a
built-in digital control spinning load
• Simple to choose: Low cost and with Mitsubishi • Dancer control allows position signal to control
Electric quality ensuring long operation life roll tension
• Capacity from 1/8 to 10 HP • Password function for parameter setting protection
• Safety stop function meets EN954-1 Category 3 and • Internal diagnostics function for monitoring status
IEC60204-1 Stop Category 0 of critical components
• Integrated brake chopper circuit • RoHS compliant
• Modbus RTU included as standard via the RJ45 port • 10 year maintenance free design
Voltage
115 1/8 – 1 Hp
1 Phase
FR-D720 – 008 – NA
240 1/8 – 3 Hp
1 Phase
240
1/8 – 10 Hp
Symbol Voltage Class 3 Phase
Inverter capacity
D710W 1-phase 115V class 480
amperage / 10 1/2 – 10 Hp
D720S 1-phase 240V class 3 Phase
(008 = 0.8A
D720 3-phase 240V class
output)
D740 3-phase 480V class Horsepower
D700 Series
Rating (CT & VT) IP20 Open Chassis Dimensions in inches (mm)
Weight Lbs (kg) Stocked Item
HP Rated Amps Model Number Height Width Depth
1-Phase 100~120VAC Input / 3-Phase 200~240VAC Output
1/8 0.8 FR-D710W-008-NA 5.0 (128) 2.7 (68) 3.2 (80.5) 1.1 (0.5) S
1/4 1.4 FR-D710W-014-NA 5.0 (128) 2.7 (68) 4.4 (110.5) 1.3 (0.6) S
1/2 2.5 FR-D710W-025-NA 5.0 (128) 2.7 (68) 5.6 (142.5) 2.0 (0.9) S
1 4.2 FR-D710W-042-NA 5.0 (128) 4.3 (108) 5.9 (149.5) 3.1 (1.4) S
1/8 0.8 FR-D720S-008-NA 5.0 (128) 2.7 (68) 3.2 (80.5) 1.1 (0.5) S
1/4 1.4 FR-D720S-014-NA 5.0 (128) 2.7 (68) 3.2 (80.5) 1.3 (0.6) S
1/2 2.5 FR-D720S-025-NA 5.0 (128) 2.7 (68) 5.6 (142.5) 2.0 (0.9) S
1 4.2 FR-D720S-042-NA 5.0 (128) 2.7 (68) 6.5 (162.5) 2.5 (1.1) S
2 7 FR-D720S-070-NA 5.0 (128) 4.3 (108) 6.2 (155.5) 3.3 (1.5) S
3 10 FR-D720S-100-NA 5.9 (150) 5.5 (140) 5.7 (145) 4.4 (2.0) S
3-Phase 200~240VAC Input & Output
1/8 0.8 FR-D720-008-NA 5.0 (128) 2.7 (68) 3.2 (80.5) 1.1 (0.5) S
1/4 1.4 FR-D720-014-NA 5.0 (128) 2.7 (68) 3.2 (80.5) 1.1 (0.5) S
1/2 2.5 FR-D720-025-NA 5.0 (128) 2.7 (68) 4.5 (112.5) 1.8 (0.8) S
1 4.2 FR-D720-042-NA 5.0 (128) 2.7 (68) 5.3 (132.5) 2.2 (1.0) S
2 7 FR-D720-070-NA 5.0 (128) 4.3 (108) 5.4 (135.5) 3.1 (1.4) S
3 10 FR-D720-100-NA 5.0 (128) 4.3 (108) 5.4 (135.5) 3.1 (1.4) S
5 16.5 FR-D720-165-NA 5.0 (128) 6.7 (170) 5.6 (142.5) 4.0 (1.8) S
7 1/2 23.8 FR-D720-238-NA 5.9 (150) 8.7 (220) 6.1 (155) 8.0 (3.6) S
10 31.8 FR-D720-318-NA 5.9 (150) 8.7 (220) 6.1 (155) 8.0 (3.6) S
1/2 1.2 FR-D740-012-NA 5.0 (128) 4.3 (108) 5.1 (129.5) 2.9 (1.3) S
1 2.2 FR-D740-022-NA 5.0 (128) 4.3 (108) 5.1 (129.5) 2.9 (1.3) S
2 3.6 FR-D740-036-NA 5.0 (128) 4.3 (108) 5.4 (135.5) 3.1 (1.4) S
3 5 FR-D740-050-NA 5.0 (128) 4.3 (108) 6.2 (155.5) 3.3 (1.5) S
5 8 FR-D740-080-NA 5.0 (128) 4.3 (108) 6.6 (165.5) 3.3 (1.5) S
7 1/2 12 FR-D740-120-NA 5.9 (150) 8.7 (220) 6.1 (155) 7.3 (3.3) S
10 16 FR-D740-160-NA 5.9 (150) 8.7 (220) 6.1 (155) 7.3 (3.3) S

D700 General Specifications
Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control (V/F control, General-purpose magnetic flux vector control, Optimum excitation
Control Method
control can be selected)
Output Frequency Range 0.2 to 400Hz
Frequency Setting Analog Input 0.06Hz/60Hz (terminal2, 4: 0 to 10V/10bit) 0.12Hz/60Hz (terminal2, 4: 0 to 5V/9bit) 0.06Hz/60Hz (terminal4: 0 to 20mA/10bit)
Resolution Digital Input 0.01Hz
Within ±1% of the max. output frequency (25°C ±10°C)
Frequency Analog Input

Accuracy Digital Input Within 0.01% of the set output frequency
Voltage/Frequency Characteristics Base frequency can be set from 0 to 400Hz. Constant torque/variable torque pattern can be selected
Starting Torque 150% or more (at 1Hz) when General-purpose magnetic flux vector control and slip compensation is set
Torque Boost Manual torque boost
Accel. /Decel. Time Setting 0.01 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode can be selected.
FR-D720-008 and 014, FR-D720S-008 and 014, FR-D710W-008 and 014 ... 150%, FR-D720-025 and 042, FR-D740-012 and 022,
Regeneration
FR-D720S-025 and 042, FR-D710W-025 and 042 ... 100%, FR-D720-070, FR-D740-036, FR-D720S-070 ... 50%, FR-D720-100 or
(*1)
Braking Torque more, FR-D740-050 or more, FR-D720S-100 ... 20%
DC Injection
Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10s), operation voltage (0 to 30%) variable
Brake
Stall Prevention Operation Level Operation current level can be set (0 to 200% adjustable), whether to use the function or not can be selected
Two points
Frequency Setting Analog Input Terminal 2: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V can be selected
Signal Terminal 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 4 to 20mA can be selected
Digital Input Entered from operation panel and parameter unit. Frequency setting increments is selectable.
Start Signal Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.
Five points. You can select from among multi-speed selection, remote setting, second function selection, terminal 4 input selection,
JOG operation selection, PID control valid terminal, external thermal input, PU-external operation switchover, V/F switchover, output
Input Signal
stop, start self-holding selection, forward rotation, reverse rotation command, inverter reset, PU-NET operation switchover, external-
NET operation switchover, command source switchover, inverter operation enable signal, and PU operation external interlock
Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection, automatic restart after
Operation Specifications
instantaneous power failure operation, forward/reverse rotation prevention, remote setting, second function, multi-speed operation,
Operational Functions
regeneration avoidance, slip compensation, operation mode selection, offline auto tuning function, PID control, computer link
operation (RS-485), Optimum excitation control, power failure stop, speed smoothing control, Modbus-RTU
Open Collector
Output Signal One point
Output
Points
Relay Output One point
You can select from among inverter operation, up-to-frequency, overload alarm, output frequency detection, regenerative brake
prealarm, electronic thermal relay function prealarm, inverter operation ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID
Output Signal
Operating Status lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward/reverse rotation output, fan alarm (*3), heatsink overheat pre-alarm, deceleration at an
instantaneous power failure, PID control activated, PID output interruption, during retry, life alarm, current average value monitor,
remote output, alarm output, fault output, fault output 3, and maintenance timer alarm
For Meter
Analog Output 0 to 10VDC: one point
Output Points
You can select from among output frequency, output current (steady), output voltage, frequency setting, converter output voltage,
regenerative brake duty, electronic thermal relay function load factor, output current peak value, converter output voltage peak value,
For Meter
reference voltage output, motor load factor, PID set point, PID measured value, output power, PID deviation, motor thermal load
factor, inverter thermal load factor 0 to 10VDC
You can select from among output frequency, output current (steady), output voltage, frequency setting, cumulative energization time,
actual operation time, converter output voltage, regenerative brake duty, electronic thermal relay function load factor, output current
Operation Panel Operating Status
peak value, converter output voltage peak value, motor load factor, PID set point, PID measured value, PID deviation, inverter I/O
Parameter Unit terminal monitor, output power, cumulative power, motor thermal load factor, inverter thermal load factor, PTC thermistor resistance.
(FR-PU07)
Indication
Fault definition is displayed when the fault occurs and the past 8 fault definitions (output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative
Fault Definition
energization time right before the fault occurs) are stored
Additional Display Operating Status Not used
By The Parameter Fault Definition Output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization time immediately before the fault occurs
Unit (FR-PU04/ Interactive
FR-PU07) Only Function (help) for operation guide
Guidance
Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during deceleration, overvoltage during acceleration,
overvoltage during constant speed, overvoltage during deceleration, inverter protection thermal operation, motor protection thermal
operation, heatsink overheat, input phase loss (*5, *6), output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent at start (*5), output phase loss,
Protective Functions
external thermal relay operation (*5), PTC thermistor operation (*5), parameter error, PU disconnection, retry count excess (*5), CPU
fault, brake transistor alarm, inrush resistance overheat, analog input error, stall prevention operation, output current detection value
exceeded (*5), safety circuit fault
Fan alarm (*3), overcurrent stall prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, PU stop, parameter write error, regenerative brake prealarm
Warning Functions (*5), electronic thermal relay function prealarm, maintenance output (*5), undervoltage, operation panel lock, password locked,
inverter reset, safety stop
Surrounding Air Temperature -10°C to +50°C (14°F to 122°F) (non-freezing) (*4)
Environment
Ambient Humidity 90%RH maximum (non-condensing)

Storage Temperature (*2) -20°C to +65°C (-4°F to 149°F)
Atmosphere Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt, etc.)
Altitude/Vibration Maximum 1000m (3280.80 feet) above sea level, 5.9m/s2 or less at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
Notes:
1. The braking torque indicated is a short-duration average torque (which varies with motor loss) when the motor alone is decelerated from 60Hz in the shortest time and is not a continuous regenerative
torque. When the motor is decelerated from the frequency higher than the base frequency, the average deceleration torque will reduce. Since the inverter does not contain a brake resistor, use the
optional brake resistor when regenerative energy is large. A brake unit (FR-BU2) may also be used.
2. Temperatures applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
3. As the FR-D720-042 or less, FR-D740-022 or less, FR-D720S-042 or less, FR-D710W-042 or less are not provided with the cooling fan, this alarm does not function.
4. When using the inverters at the surrounding air temperature of 40°C (104°F) or less, the inverters can be installed closely attached (0cm clearance).
5. This protective function does not function in the initial status.
6. This protective function is available with the three-phase power input specification model only.
400
D700 Series Terminal Connection Diagram
*1. DC reactor (FR-HEL) *6 Terminal P1 is not available for single-

Sink logic When connecting a DC reactor, remove the phase 100V power input model.
jumper across P1-P/+
Main circuit terminal Single-phase 100V power input model is not *7 A brake transistor is not built-in to the
Control circuit terminal compatible with DC reactor. FR-D720-008, 014 and FR-D720S-008,
Single-phase power input 014 and FR-D710W-008, 014.
Brake unit
MCCB MC (Option)
*8 Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS type, MYS
Single-phase *1 type)
R/L1 R
Install a thermal relay to prevent an
AC power Earth
S/L2 (Ground) *8 overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.
supply (The brake resistor can not be connected
Jumper PR N/- to the FR-D720-008, 014 and FR-D720S-
008, 014 and FR-D710W-008, 014.)
P1 P/+ *7
MCCB MC
*6 U Motor
Three-phase R/L1
Inrush current
AC power S/L2 V
limit circuit IM
supply T/L3 W
Earth Main circuit

(Ground) Earth (Ground)
Control circuit
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed) C Relay output
Forward STF
Terminal functions vary rotation start Terminal functions vary
B by Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal
with the input terminal Reverse STR Relay output
assignment (Pr. 178 to rotation start (Fault output) function selection
A
Pr. 182) RH
High
speed
RM Open collector output
Multi-speed selection Middle
SOURCE
speed Terminal functions vary by

RUN
SINK
*2 When using terminals PC-

Low RL
SD as a 24VDC power Running Pr. 190 RUN terminal function
supply, take care not to
speed selection
SD
short across terminals 24V
PC-SD. Contact input common
PC *2 SE Open collector output common
24VDC power supply Sink/source common
(Common for external power supply transistor)
Frequency setting signals (Analog)

3 10(+5V)
*3 Terminal input specifications Frequency
can be changed by analog setting
input specifications 2 2 0 to 5VDC *3
switchover (Pr. 73). potentiometer (0 to 10VDC) AM (+)
Terminal 10 and terminal 2 1/2W1kΩ Analog signal output
are used as PTC input *5 (0 to 10VDC)
terminal (Pr. 561). 5(Analog common) 5 (-)
1
*4 Terminal input
specifications can be Terminal 4 PU
changed by analog input input (+) 4 4 to 20mADC connector
specifications switchover (Current (-) 0 to 5VDC
0 to 10VDC *4
(Pr. 267). Set the
voltage/current input input)
switch in the "V" position
to select voltage input (0 V I
to 5V/0 to10V) and "I"
(initial value) to select Voltage/current
current input (4 to 20mA). input switch *4
*5 It is recommended to use 2W1kΩ
when the frequency setting signal
is changed frequently.
Safety stop signal Shorting

wire S1 SO
Output shutoff (Line 1) For manufacturer
Safety setting
monitor output *8
Output shutoff
S2 *8 Common terminal of
Output shutoff (Line 2) circuit terminal SO is terminal SC.
SC (Connected to terminal SD
Common terminal inside of the inverter.)
Terminal Block Layout

Recommended wire size:
0.3mm² 0.75mm²

D700 Series Options
FR-PU07 Alpha-Numeric multi-language keypad S
FR-PA07 Panel mount basic keypad S
FR-CONFIGURATOR Programming and diagnostic software S
SC-FRPC Serial communications cable S
FR-CB201 Remote cable for connecting keypad 1 meter cable S
FR-ABR-_ _ K External braking resistor S
FR-RJ45-HUB4 Serial Network Hub - 2 Stations -
FR-RJ45-TR Terminating Resistor for FR-RJ45-HUB -
Note: _ _ represents KW rating.
Input Radio Noise Filter Brake Resistors

This filter is connected to the input of the drive and helps to reduce W 500 +200
radiated noise in the radio frequencies. W1 ±1
W2 A1
B1
Leakage Dimensions mm (in)
Drive Kit Model φd1
Current Stocked Item
Voltage Number L W D A2 A1
(mA)
5.3
208 - 230 FR-BIF 4 58 (2.3) 44 (1.8) 42 (1.7) S Glass-braided cable
B2
2.0mm2 white
460 FR-BIF-H 4 58 (2.3) 44 (1.8) 42 (1.7) - φd2
D
A2
H
Line Noise Filter
2.5
Provides a toroid for line noise reduction. Brake Resistor Model Dimensions (mm)
Kit Model Dimensions mm (in) W W1 W2 D H
Drive Hp Stocked Item
Number L W D 200V Class
FR-ABR-0.4K 140 125 100 40 21
0.5 - 5 FR-BSF01 110 (4.33) 22.5 (0.89) 65 (2.56) S
FR-ABR-0.75K 215 200 175 40 21
0.5 - 75 FR-BLF 180 (7.07) 31.5 (1.24) 83 (3.27) S FR-ABR-2.2K 240 225 200 50 26
FR-ABR-3.7K 215 200 175 61 33
FR-ABR-5.5K 335 320 295 61 33
D700 EMC Filters FR-ABR-7.5K 400 385 360 80 40
FR-ABR-11K 400 385 360 100 50
This attachment allows the VFD to be mounted onto the filter.
FR-ABR-15K (*1) 300 285 260 100 50
Model Number Drive Model Stocked Item 400V Class
FFR-CS-050-14A-RF1 D720S-008 to 042 - FR-ABR-H0.4K 115 100 75 40 21
FFR-CS-080-20A-RF1 D720S-070 - FR-ABR-H0.75K 140 125 100 40 21
FR-ABR-H1.5K 215 200 175 40 21
FFR-CS-110-26A-RF1 D720S-100 -
FR-ABR-H2.2K 240 225 200 50 26
FFR-CSH-036-8A-RF1 D740-012 to 036 - FR-ABR-H3.7K 215 200 175 61 33
FFRCSH-080-16A-RF1 D740-050 to 080 - FR-ABR-H5.5K 335 320 295 61 33
FFRMSH-170-30A-RF1 D740-120 to 160 - FR-ABR-H7.5K 400 385 360 80 40
FR-ABR-H11K 400 385 360 100 50
FR-ABR-H15K (*2) 300 285 260 100 50
Notes:
DIN Rail Mounting Attachment 1. For the 15K, connect the two supplied resistors (18 ohms) in parallel
This attachment allows the D700 Series inverter to mount on a 35mm DIN rail. 2. For the H15K, connect the two supplied resistors (18 ohms) in series.
Drive Model
Model Number Stocked Item
D710W D720S D720 D740 D700 Conduit Kits
FR-UDA01 008-025 008-042 008-042 - S
Kit Model Part Number Stocked
FR-UDA02 042 070 070-100 012-080 S
Number FR-D710W- FR-D720S- FR-D720- FR-D740- Item
FR-UDA03 - - 165 - -
FR-E7FN-01 008/014 008/014 008/014 - S
FR-E7FN-02 - - 025 - S
D700 Demonstration Unit FR-E7FN-03 - - 042 - S
FR-E7FN-04 - - 070/100 036 S
FR-E7FN-06 - - - - S
Includes E720 and D720 1HP, pre-wired digital input FR-E7FN-07 - - 165 - S
VFD-MICRO-DEMO S
switches, led outputs and speed potentiometer
FR-E7FN-08 - - 238/318 120/160 S
Includes 1/2HP motor with quick connection to
VFD-MOTOR-DEMO S FR-E7FN-11 - - - 012/022 -
VFD-MICRO-DEMO
FR-E7FN-12 - - - 050/080 -
402
D700 Heatsink Extension Kits D700 Building Management Options
Kit Model Part Number ETH-1000 XLTR-1000
Stocked Item Network Type / Model
Number (*2, *3) (*2, *3)
FR-D710W- FR-D720S- FR-D720- FR-D740-
BACnet/IP X -
FR-E7CN-02 025 025 025 - S
EtherNet/IP X -
FR-E7CN-03 - 042 042 - S Gateway Modbus/TCP X -
FR-E7CN-04 - 070 070/100 036 to 080 S Communication Profinet IO X -
FR-E7CN-06 - 100 - - S BACnet MS/TP X X
Metasys N2 X X
FR-E7CN-07 - - 165 - S
Stocked Item - -
FR-E7CN-08 042 - 238/318 120/160 S
Notes:
FR-E7CN-11 - - - 012/022 - 1. For additional information, visit www.iccdesigns.com
2. Communication to multiple VFD’s is possible
3. Mounted and powered external to VFD
D700 Series Watt Loss and Efficiency Data

115VAC 1-Phase Input 240VAC 1-Phase Input 240VAC 3-Phase Input 480VAC 3-Phase Input
Model Model Model Model
HP-CT Rated Watts Rated Watts Rated Watts Rated Watts
Number Efficiency Number Efficiency Number Efficiency Number Efficiency
Watts Loss Watts Loss Watts Loss Watts Loss
FR-D710W- FR-D720S- FR-D720- FR-D740-
1/8 008 100 14 86% 008 100 14 86% 008 100 14 86% - - - -
1/4 015 200 20 90% 015 200 20 90% 014 200 20 90% - - - -
1/2 030 400 38 91% 030 400 32 92% 025 400 32 92% 012 400 40 90%
1 050 750 50 93% 050 750 50 93% 042 750 50 93% 022 750 55 93%
2 - - - - 070 1500 80 95% 070 1500 80 95% 036 1500 90 94%
3 - - - - 100 2200 110 95% 100 2200 100 95% 050 2200 100 95%
5 - - - - - - - - 165 3700 160 96% 080- 3700 180 95%
7.5 - - - - - - - - 238 5500 270 95% 120 5500 240 96%
10 - - - -- - - - - 318 7500 360 95% 160 7500 280 96%
General Notes:
1. The amount of heat generated by the inverter is based on one inverter connected to one motor of the same capacity.
2. The amount of heat generated in the above table is the amount of heat generated when the inverter is operated at its rated current.
3. The amount of heat generated will decrease according to the motor load and usage (duty).
D700 Standby Power

Stand-By Power Stand-By Power Model Stand-By Power Model Stand-By Power
HP-CT Model Number Model Number
Consumption Consumption Number Consumption Number Consumption
FR-D710W- Min Max FR-D720S- Min Max FR-D720- Min Max FR-D740- Min Max
1/8 008 5.5 10.5 008 5.5 10.5 008 5.5 10.5 - - -
1/4 015 5.5 10.5 015 5.5 10.5 014 5.5 10.5 - - -
1/2 030 5.5 10.5 030 5.5 10.5 025 5.5 10.5 012 10.5 15
1 050 5.5 10.5 050 5.5 10.5 042 5.5 10.5 022 10.5 15
2 - - - 070 5.5 14 070 5.5 14 036 10.5 17
3 - - - 100 5.5 14 100 5.5 14 050 10.5 17
5 - - - - - - 165 6 15 080 10.5 17
7.5 - - - - - - 238 13 22.5 120 13.5 22.5
10 - - - - - - 318 13 22.5 160 13.5 22.5
General Notes:
1. The maximum is generated with PC terminal operating 100mA load, external parameter unit, and cooling fan operating.
2. The minimum is generated with no load on PC terminal, no external parameter unit, and cooling fan off.

D700 Dynamic Braking
All Mitsubishi Electric VFDs have some inherent braking capability. During controlled deceleration, motor regenerative losses are
dissipated in the motor, wire, and VFD circuitry. The built-in DC injection braking allows for low speed braking and stopping.
When the above capabilities are inadequate for an application, it is necessary to add a power transistor brake unit and resistor unit in
series across the DC bus. Motor regeneration causes the DC bus voltage to increase, and when the voltage exceeds a specified threshold,
the transistor turns on to pass current through the resistor. Motor kinetic energy is converted to heat energy. VFD overcurrent and
overvoltage protective circuits are active at all times, and will fault-trip the VFD if the brake size is inadequate.
Two main factors must be considered when sizing the brake, the effective duty cycle (%ED) and the short time duty rating. The
effective duty cycle is increased when an external resistor is added. It is preferable to profile the effective duty cycle of the units of time.
With this information, the short time duty is known and the %ED can be calculated, as shown in the below example.
%ED = Braking time / total time for complete operating cycle *100
Example: Complete cycle is:

5 sec: Acceleration time to reach set speed
60 sec: Run time at set speed
3 sec: Deceleration time to come to a complete stop
12 sec: Time period motor remains stopped
%ED = 3 / (5 + 60 + 3 + 12) * 100 = 3.6%

The tables shown assume 100% brake torque, when brake torque is represented by its percentage to the rated torque of the applied motor.
Torque (kg.m) = 974 * Power (kW) / Speed (rpm).
240VAC Dynamic Braking Resistor at 100% Braking Torque

Continuous Drive Model
Resistor Kit Model Weight Resistance
Permissible Motor (Hp) D710W and Stocked Item
Number kg (lbs) (Ohms) % ED
Power (W) D720(S)
FR-ABR-0.4K 0.2 (0.5) 200 60 1/2 025 10% S
FR-ABR-0.75K 0.4 (0.9) 100 80 1 042 10% S
FR-ABR-2.2K 0.5 (1.1) 60 120 2 and 3 070 / 100 10% S
FR-ABR-3.7K 0.8 (1.8) 40 155 5 165 10% S
FR-ABR-5.5K 1.3 (2.9) 25 185 7 1/2 238 10% S
FR-ABR-7.5K 2.2 (4.9) 20 340 10 318 10% S

Permissible Motor (Hp) Stocked Item
Number kg (lbs) (Ohms) D740 % ED
Power (W)
FR-ABR-H0.4K 0.2 (0.5) 1200 45 1/2 012 10% S
FR-ABR-H0.75K 0.2 (0.5) 700 75 1 022 10% S
FR-ABR-H1.5K 0.4 (0.9) 350 115 2 036 10% S
FR-ABR-H2.2K 0.5 (1.1) 250 120 3 050 10% S
FR-ABR-H3.7K 0.8 (1.8) 150 155 5 080 10% S
FR-ABR-H5.5K 1.3 (2.9) 110 185 7 1/2 120 10% S
FR-ABR-H7.5K 2.2 (4.9) 75 340 10 160 10% S
404
E700 Series
The cost-effective variable speed control solution for general purpose applications.
• Available in 115V, 240V and 480V up • Standard RS-485 serial communications

to 20HP supporting Modbus® RTU
• Advanced Magnetic Flux Vector Control • Sink / Source selectable I/O
for improved starting torque and smooth • Supports remote I/O function via network
low speed motor operation
• Built-in PID Control
• Auto-tuning allows improved
performance using virtually any • Delivers rated current at 50°C and
manufacturer’s motor 14.5kHz carrier frequency with minimal
de-rating
• All capacities include built-in brake
chopper • 200% overload for 3 seconds
• Safety Stop function meets • 0 to 10V analog output
EN954-1 Category 3 and IEC60204-1 Stop • CC-Link®, DeviceNet™, Profibus-DP,
Category 0 LonWorks®, EtherNet/IP
• USB communications allow fast • Standard 5 year warranty
commissioning and troubleshooting
FR-E720 – 175SC – NA Voltage
115 1/8 – 1 Hp
1 Phase
Symbol Voltage Class Inverter Safety Version 240

1/8 – 3 Hp
1 Phase
E710W* Single-phase 115V class capacity 3 Phase Only
208/230
E720S* Single-phase 240V class Amperage/10 3 Phase 1/8 – 20 Hp
E720 Three-phase 200V class (175 = 460

3 Phase 1/2 – 20 Hp
E740 Three-phase 400V class 17.5A output)
* Contact MEAU for SC Version availablitiy.
Horsepower
E700 Series
Dimensions in inches (mm)
HP Output Amps Model Number Weight Lbs (kg) Stocked Item
Height Width Depth
1/8 0.8 FR-E710W-008-NA 5.0 (128) 2.7 (68) 3.2 (80.5) 1.1 (0.5) S
1/4 1.5 FR-E710W-015-NA 5.0 (128) 2.7 (68) 4.4 (110.5) 1.3 (0.6) S
1/2 3 FR-E710W-030-NA 5.0 (128) 2.7 (68) 4.5 (112.5) 2.0 (0.9) S
1 5 FR-E710W-050-NA 5.0 (128) 6.7 (170) 6.1 (155) 7.5 (3.4) S
1/8 0.8 FR-E720S-008-NA 5.0 (128) 2.7 (68) 3.2 (80.5) 1.1 (0.5) S
1/4 1.5 FR-E720S-015-NA 5.0 (128) 2.7 (68) 3.2 (80.5) 1.1 (0.5) S
1/2 3 FR-E720S-030-NA 5.0 (128) 2.7 (68) 6.2 (157.6) 1.3 (0.6) S
1 5 FR-E720S-050-NA 5.0 (128) 4.3 (108) 5.4 (135.5) 3.1 (1.4) S
2 8 FR-E720S-080-NA 5.0 (128) 4.3 (108) 6.4 (161) 3.1 (1.4) S
3 11 FR-E720S-110-NA 5.9 (150) 5.5 (140) 6.2 (155.5) 4.2 (1.9) S
1/8 0.8 FR-E720-008SC-NA S
5.0 (128) 2.7 (68) 3.4 (87) 1.1 (0.5)
1/4 1.5 FR-E720-015SC-NA S
1/2 3 FR-E720-030SC-NA 5.0 (128) 2.7 (68) 4.7 (120) 1.6 (0.7) S
1 5 FR-E720-050SC-NA 5.0 (128) 2.7 (68) 5.5 (139) 2.2 (1.0) S
2 8 FR-E720-080SC-NA S
5.0 (128) 4.3 (108) 5.6 (142) 3.1 (1.4)
3 11 FR-E720-110SC-NA S
5 17.5 FR-E720-175SC-NA 5.0 (128) 6.7 (170) 5.9 (149) 3.8 (1.7) S
7 1/2 24 FR-E720-240SC-NA S
10.3 (260) 7.1 (180) 6.9 (171) 9.5 (4.3)
10 33 FR-E720-330SC-NA S
15 47 FR-E720-470SC-NA S
10.3 (260) 8.7 (220) 7.7 (196) 19.9 (9)
20 60 FR-E720-600SC-NA S
1/2 1.6 FR-E740-016SC-NA S
5.9 (150) 5.5 (140) 4.7 (120) 3.1 (1.4)
1 2.6 FR-E740-026SC-NA S
2 4 FR-E740-040SC-NA S
3 6 FR-E740-060SC-NA 5.9 (150) 5.5 (140) 5.6 (142) 4.2 (1.9) S
5 9.5 FR-E740-095SC-NA S
7 1/2 12 FR-E740-120SC-NA S
5.9 (150) 8.7 (220) 6.0 (153) 7.1 (3.2)
10 17 FR-E740-170SC-NA S
15 23 FR-E740-230SC-NA S
10.3 (260) 8.7 (220) 7.7 (196) 19.9 (9)
20 30 FR-E740-300SC-NA S

E700 General Specifications
Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, General-purpose magnetic
Control Method
flux vector control, Optimum excitation control are available)
0.06Hz/60Hz (terminal2, 4: 0 to 10V/10bit)
Frequency Setting Analog Input 0.12Hz/60Hz (terminal2, 4: 0 to 5V/9bit)
Resolution 0.06Hz/60Hz (terminal4: 0 to 20mA/10bit)

Digital Input 0.01Hz
Analog Input Within ±0.5% of the max. output frequency (25°C ±10°C)
Frequency Accuracy
Digital Input Within 0.01% of the set output frequency
Voltage/Frequency Characteristics Base frequency can be set from 0 to 400Hz, Constant-torque/variable torque pattern can be selected
Starting Torque 200% or more (at 0.5Hz) when Advanced magnetic flux vector control is set (3.7K or less)
Accel/Decel Time Setting 0.01 to 360s, 0.1 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern accel/decel modes are available.
DC Injection Brake Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10s), operation voltage (0 to 30%) can be changed.
Two terminals
Analog Input Terminal 2: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V can be selected
Frequency Setting Terminal 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 4 to 20mA can be selected
Signal The signal is entered from the operation panel or parameter unit.
Digital Input Frequency setting increment can be set.
4 digit BCD or 16bit binary data (when the option FR-A7AX E kit is used)
The following signals can be assigned to Pr. 178 to Pr.184 (input terminal function selection): multi-speed selection, remote setting,
Input Signal Standard (Control circuit
stop-on contact selection, second function selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG operation selection, PID control valid terminal,
terminal model: Seven terminals
brake opening completion signal, external thermal input, PU-External operation switchover, V/F switchover, output stop, start self-
Safety stop function model: Six
holding selection, forward rotation, reverse rotation command, inverter reset, PU-NET operation switchover, External-NET operation
terminals)
switchover, command source switchover, inverter operation enable signal, and PU operation external interlock
Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection, automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure operation, forward/reverse rotation prevention, remote setting, brake sequence, second function, multi-
Operational Functions
speed operation, stop-on contact control, droop control, regeneration avoidance, slip compensation, operation mode selection, offline
auto tuning function, PID control, computer link operation (RS-485)
Safety stop function (*1) Safety shutoff signal can be input from terminals S1 and S2. (compliant with EN954-1 Cat.3)
Open Collector
Output Signal Two terminals
Output
Points
Relay Output One terminal
The following signals can be assigned to Pr.190 to Pr.192 (output terminal function selection): inverter operation, upto-frequency,
overload alarm, output frequency detection, regenerative brake prealarm, electronic thermal relay function prealarm, inverter operation
ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward/reverse rotation output, brake
Output Signal
Operating Status
opening request, fan alarm, heatsink overheat prealarm, deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, PID control activated, safety
monitor output (*1), safety monitor output2 (*1), during retry, life alarm, current average value monitor, remote output, alarm output,
fault output, fault output 3, and maintenance timer alarm
For Meter
Analog Output 0 to 10VDC: one terminal
Output Points
The following signals can be assigned to Pr.158 AM terminal function selection: output frequency, motor current (steady), output
voltage, frequency setting, motor torque, converter output voltage, regenerative brake duty, electronic thermal relay function load
For Meter
factor, output current peak value, converter output voltage peak value, reference voltage output, motor load factor, PID set point, PID
measured value, output power 0 to 10VDC
The following operating status can be displayed: output frequency, motor current (steady), output voltage, frequency setting,
cumulative energization time, actual operation time, motor torque, converter output voltage, regenerative brake duty, electronic
Operating
thermal relay function load factor, output current peak value, converter output voltage peak value, motor load factor, PID set point,
Status
PID measured value, PID deviation, inverter I/O terminal monitor, I/O terminal option monitor, output power, cumulative power, motor
Indication
Operation Panel
Parameter Unit thermal load factor, and inverter thermal load factor.
(FR-PU07) Fault definition is displayed when the fault occurs and the past 8 fault definitions (output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative
Fault Definition
energization time right before the fault occurs) are stored
Interactive
Function (help) for operation guide (*2)
Guidance
overvoltage during constant speed, overvoltage during deceleration, inverter protection thermal operation, motor protection thermal
operation, heatsink overheat, input phase failure (*4), output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent at start (*4), output phase failure,
Protective Function
external thermal relay operation (*3), option fault (*3), parameter error, internal board fault, PU disconnection, retry count excess (*4),
CPU fault, brake transistor alarm, inrush resistance overheat, communication error, analog input error, USB communication error,
brake sequence error 4 to 7 (*3), safety circuit fault (*1)
Fan alarm, overcurrent stall prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, PU stop, parameter write error,
Warning Function regenerative brake prealarm (*3), electronic thermal relay function prealarm, maintenance output (*3), undervoltage,
operation panel lock, password locked, inverter reset, safety stop (*1)
Ambient Temperature -10°C to +50°C (14°F to 122°F) (non-freezing) (*5)
Environment

Storage Temperature (*6) -20°C to +65°C (-4°F to 149°F)
Atmosphere Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.)
Altitude/Vibration Maximum 1000m (3280.80 feet) above sea level, 5.9m/s2 or less at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
Notes:
1. This function is only available for the safety stop function model.
2. This operation guide is only available with option parameter unit (FR-PU07).
4. This protective function is available with the three-phase power input model only.
5. When using the inverters at the surrounding air temperature of 40°C (104°F) or less, the inverters can be installed closely attached (0cm clearance).
6. Temperatures applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
406
E700 Series Terminal Connection Diagram
One-phase 100V power input
Three-phase 200V power input
Three-phase 400V power input
Sink logic
Main circuit terminal *1. DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Control circuit terminal When connecting a DC reactor, remove the *6 A brake transistor is not built-in to the
jumper across P1-P/+ FR-E720-008SC and 015SC, FR-E720S-
Single-phase power input 008SC and 015SC.
Brake unit
MCCB MC (Option)
*7 Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS type)
*1 Install a thermal relay to prevent an
Single-phase R/L1 R
AC power Earth overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.
S/L2 (Ground) *7
supply (The brake resistor can not be connected
Jumper PR N/- to the FR-E720-008SC and 015SC, FR-
E720S-008SC and 015SC.)
MCCB MC P1 P/+ *6
Motor
Three-phase R/L1 U
Inrush current
AC power S/L2 V
limit circuit IM
supply T/L3 W
Earth
(Ground)
Main circuit Earth (Ground)
Control circuit
Safety stop function model
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)
Forward STF C Relay output
Terminal functions vary rotation start Terminal functions vary
with the input terminal Reverse STR B
Relay output by Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal
assignment (Pr. 178 to rotation start function selection
Pr. 184) RH (Fault output)
High A
speed
Multi-speed selection RM
Middle
speed Open collector output
*2 When using terminals PC-SD Low RL
RUN Terminal functions vary with
as a 24VDC power supply, speed
SOURCE
Running the output terminal assignment

RES
SINK
take care not to short across

terminals PC-SD. Reset (Pr. 190 and Pr. 191)
SD FU
Contact input common 24V Frequency detection
24VDC power supply PC *2
(Common for external power supply transistor)
Safety stop input common terminal SE Open collector output common
S1 Sink/source common
Safety stop input (Line 1) Output shutoff
S2 circuit
Safety stop input (Line 2)
Shorting wire
Frequency setting signals (Analog) (+)
AM
3 10(+5V) Analog signal output
*3 Terminal input specifications Frequency (0 to 10VDC)
can be changed by analog setting 5 (-)
input specifications 2 2 0 to 5VDC *3
switchover (Pr. 73). potentiometer (0 to 10VDC)
1/2W1kΩ
PU
*4 It is recommended to use 2W1kΩ *4 5(Analog common)
when the frequency setting signal 1 connector
Terminal 4 input (+) 4 4 to 20mADC
(Current input) (-) 0 to 5VDC
*5 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog 0 to 10VDC *5 USB
input specifications switchover (Pr. 267). Set the connector
voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select
voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to10V) and "I" (initial value) to V I
select current input (4 to 20mA).
To use terminal 4 (initial setting is current input), set "4" Voltage/current
in any of Pr.178 to Pr.184 (input terminal function selection) input switch *5
to assign the function, and turn ON AU signal.
Connector for
plug-in option connection Option connector

E700 Series Plug-In Options E700 Series External Options
Model Number Description Stocked Item Model Number Description Stocked Item
FR-A7NC E KIT SC CC-Link Network Option S FR-PU07 Alpha-Numeric multi-language keypad S
FR-A7ND E KIT SC DeviceNet Network Option S Battery powered Alpha-Numeric multi-language
FR-PU07BB-L S
keypad
FR-A7NP E KIT SC Profibus-DP Network Option S
FR-CB20 Keypad extension cable S
FR-A7NL E KIT SC LonWorks Network Option S
SC-FRPC Serial communications cable S
FR-A7AX E KIT SC Additional 16-bit Digital Input S
FR-A7AY E KIT SC Additional Analog & Digital Output S FR-ABR- K External brake resistor S
FR-A7AR E KIT SC Additional Relay Output S FR-RJ45-HUB4 Serial Network Hub - 2 Stations -
Multidrop for Serial FR-RJ45-HUB10 Serial Network Hub - 8 Stations -
FR-E7TR S
Communication
FR-RJ45-TR Terminating Resistor For FR-RJ45-HUB -
Note: FR-E7TR ia not compatible with safety version of E700.
Note: _ _ represents drive kW rating
E700 Dynamic Braking

All Mitsubishi Electric VFDs have some inherent braking capability. During controlled deceleration, motor regenerative losses are
series across the DC bus. Motor regeneration causes the DC bus voltage to increase, and when the voltage exceeds a specified threshold,
the transistor turns on to pass current through the resistor. Motor kinetic energy is converted to heat energy. VFD overcurrent and
overvoltage protective circuits are active at all times, and will fault-trip the VFD if the brake size is inadequate.
%ED = Braking time / total time for complete operating cycle *100

%ED = 3 / (5 + 60 + 3 + 12) x 100 = 3.6%

Torque (kg.m) = 974 x Power (kW) / Speed (rpm).

Permissible Motor (Hp) E710W and Stocked Item
Number kg (lbs) (Ohms) % ED
Power (W) E720(S)
FR-ABR-0.4K 0.2 (0.5) 200 60 1/2 030 10% S
FR-ABR-0.75K 0.4 (0.9) 100 80 1 050 10% S
FR-ABR-2.2K 0.5 (1.1) 60 120 2&3 080 / 110 10% S
FR-ABR-3.7K 0.8 (1.8) 40 155 5 175 10% S
FR-ABR-5.5K 1.3 (2.9) 25 185 7 1/2 240 10% S
FR-ABR-7.5K 2.2 (4.9) 20 340 10 330 10% S
FR-ABR-11K 3.4 (7.5) 13 560 15 470 6% S
FR-ABR-15K 2.4 (5.3) x 2 9 (18 / 2) 805 20 600 6% S
(2 resistors in parallel)

Number kg (lbs) (Ohms) E740 % ED
Power (W)
FR-ABR-H0.4K 0.2 (0.5) 1200 45 1/2 016 10% S
FR-ABR-H0.75K 0.2 (0.5) 700 75 1 026 10% S
FR-ABR-H1.5K 0.4 (0.9) 350 115 2 040 10% S
FR-ABR-H2.2K 0.5 (1.1) 250 120 3 060 10% S
FR-ABR-H3.7K 0.8 (1.8) 150 155 5 095 10% S
FR-ABR-H5.5K 1.3 (2.9) 110 185 7 1/2 120 10% S
FR-ABR-H7.5K 2.2 (4.9) 75 340 10 170 10% S
FR-ABR-H11K 3.4 (7.5) 52 530 15 230 6% S
FR-ABR-H15K 2.4 (5.3) x 2 36 (18 x 2) 870 20 300 6% S
(2 resistors in series)
408
Brake Resistors
Dimensions (mm) W 500 +200
Brake Resistor Model
W W1 W2 D H W1 ±1
200V Class W2 A1
B1
FR-ABR-0.4K 140 125 100 40 21 φd1
FR-ABR-0.75K 215 200 175 40 21 A2 A1
5.3
FR-ABR-2.2K 240 225 200 50 26
FR-ABR-3.7K 215 200 175 61 33 Glass-braided cable
B2
FR-ABR-5.5K 335 320 295 61 33 2.0mm2 white
φd2
FR-ABR-7.5K 400 385 360 80 40 D
A2
FR-ABR-11K 400 385 360 100 50
H
FR-ABR-15K (*1) 300 285 260 100 50
2.5
400V Class
FR-ABR-H0.4K 115 100 75 40 21
FR-ABR-H0.75K 140 125 100 40 21
FR-ABR-H1.5K 215 200 175 40 21
FR-ABR-H2.2K 240 225 200 50 26
FR-ABR-H3.7K 215 200 175 61 33
FR-ABR-H5.5K 335 320 295 61 33
FR-ABR-H7.5K 400 385 360 80 40
FR-ABR-H11K 400 385 360 100 50
FR-ABR-H15K (*2) 300 285 260 100 50
Notes:
1. For the 15K, connect the two supplied resistors (18 ohms) in parallel.
2. For the H15K, connect the two supplied resistors (18 ohms) in series.
Input Radio Noise Filter

E740 EMC Filters
This filter is connected to the input of the drive and helps to reduce
This attachment allows the VFD to be mounted onto the filter.
radiated noise in the radio frequencies.
Model Number Drive Model Stocked Item
Leakage Dimensions mm (in)
Drive Kit Model Stocked
Current FFR-MSH-040-8A-RF1 E740-016 to 040 -
Voltage Number L W D Item
(mA)
FFRMSH-095-16A-RF1 E740-060/095 -
208 - 230 FR-BIF 4 58 (2.3) 44 (1.8) 42 (1.7) S
FFRMSH-170-30A-RF1 E740-120/170 -
460 FR-BIF-H 4 58 (2.3) 44 (1.8) 42 (1.7) -
FFRMSH-300-50A-RF1 E740-230/300 -
Line Noise Filter

Provides a toroid for line noise reduction. Building Management Options
Dimensions mm (in) Stocked Internal Mount - Powered by VFD
Drive Hp Kit Model Number External Mount
L W D Item Safety Version Regular Version
Network Type / Model FR-A7N- FR-A7N- FR-A7N- FR-A7N- ETH- XLTR-
0.5 - 5 FR-BSF01 110 (4.33) 22.5 (0.89) 65 (2.56) S ETH XLT ETH XLT 1000 1000
0.5 - 75 FR-BLF 180 (7.07) 31.5 (1.24) 83 (3.27) S (*1, *2) (*1,*3,) (*1,*3) (*1,*3,) (*4,*5,) (*4,*5)
BACnet/IP X - X - X -
X - X - X -
Communication
EtherNet/IP
X - X - X -
Gateway
DIN Rail Mounting Attachment Modbus TCP

PROFINET IO X - X - X -
This attachment allows the E700 Series inverter to mount on a 35mm BACnet MS/TP - X - X X X
DIN rail. Metasys N2 - X - X X X
Drive Model Siemens FLN - X - X - -
Model Number Stocked Item Stocked Item S S S S - -
E720 (*1)
Notes:
FR-UDA01 008-050 S For additional information, visit www.iccdesigns.com
1. Cable E700-NET-CBL required accessory
FR-UDA02 080-110 S 2. Deeper cover required A7A-EKITCVR-SCSP
3. Deeper cover A7A-EKITCVR-SC required accessory
FR-UDA03 175 - 4. Communication to multiple VFDs is possible
Notes:
1. Not available for 400V models.

Installation Interchange Attachment
This attachment allows the E700 Series inverter to be mounted using the installation holes from the previous series VFDs.
Installation Model Previous Model
Model Number Stocked Item
E700 Series E500 Series A0x4 Series Z024 Series A200E Series
E720-008 FR-A024-0.1K-UL FR-Z024-0.1K-UL -
E720-015 FR-A024-0.2K-UL FR-Z024-0.2K-UL -
FR-E5T-10 S
E720-030 FR-A024-0.4K-UL FR-Z024-0.4K-UL -
E720-050 FR-A024-0.75K-UL - -
E720-050 - FR-Z024-0.75K-UL -
FR-E5T-11 -
E720-080 FR-A024-1.5K-UL FR-Z024-1.5K-UL -
E720-110 FR-A024-2.2K-UL FR-Z024-2.2K-UL -
FR-E5T Direct -
E720-175 FR-A024-3.7K-UL FR-Z024-3.7K-UL -
Replacement
E720-240 - - FR-A220E-5.5K-UL
FR-E5T-02 -
E720-330 - - FR-A220E-7.5K-UL
E740-016 FR-A044-0.4K-UL - -
Direct Attachment -
E740-026 FR-A044-0.75K-UL - -
E740-040 FR-A044-1.5K-UL - -
FR-E5T-14 E740-060 FR-A044-2.2K-UL - - -
E740-095 FR-A044-3.7K-UL - -
E700 Installation Interchange Attachment

This attachment allows the E700 Series inverter to be mounted at a 90° angle so that the depth is reduced to 80 mm.
Installation Model Previous Model
Model Number Stocked item
E700 Series E500 Series A0x4 Series Z024 Series
E720-030 FR-A024-0.4K-UL FR-Z024-0.4K-UL -
FR-E5T-L Direct Replacement
E720-050 FR-A024-0.75K-UL - -
E700 Series Watt Loss and Efficiency Data

HP-CT Part Part Part Part
Number Rated Watts Rated Watts Rated Watts Rated Watts
Efficiency Number Efficiency Number Efficiency Number Efficiency
Watts Loss Watts Loss Watts Loss Watts Loss
FR-E710W- FR-E720S- FR-E720- FR-E740-
1/8 008 100 14 86% 008 100 14 86% 008 100 14 86% - - - -
1/4 015 200 20 90% 015 200 20 90% 015 200 20 90% - - - -
1/2 030 400 38 91% 030 400 32 92% 030 400 32 92% 016 400 45 89%
1 050 750 50 93% 050 750 50 93% 050 750 50 93% 026 750 50 93%
2 - - - - 080 1500 80 95% 080 1500 80 95% 040 1500 85 94%
3 -- - - - 110 2200 110 95% 110 2200 100 95% 060 2200 100 95%
5 - - - - - - - - 175 3700 160 96% 095 3700 160 96%
7.5 - - - - - - - - 240 5500 290 95% 120 5500 310 94%
10 - - - - - - - - 330 7500 380 95% 170 7500 420 94%
15 - - - - - - - - 470 11000 520 95% 230 11000 560 95%
20 - - - - - - - - 600 15000 600 96% 300 15000 640 96%
General Notes:
Conduit Kits E700 Heatsink Extension Kits

Model Number Description Stocked Item Model Number Description Stocked Item
FR-E7FN-01 Conduit kit for E720-008/015 S FR-E7CN-02 Heatsink Extension kit for E720-030 S
FR-E7FN-02 Conduit kit for E720-030 S FR-E7CN-03 Heatsink Extension kit for E720-050 S
FR-E7FN-03 Conduit kit for E720-050 S FR-E7CN-04 Heatsink Extension kit for E720-080/110 S
FR-E7FN-04 Conduit kit for E720-080/110 S FR-E7CN-05 Heatsink Extension kit for E740-016/026 S
FR-E7FN-05 Conduit kit for E740-016/026 S FR-E7CN-06 Heatsink Extension kit for E740-040/060/090 S
FR-E7FN-06 Conduit kit for E740-040/060/090 S FR-E7CN-07 Heatsink Extension kit for E720-175 S
FR-E7FN-07 Conduit kit for E720-175 S FR-E7CN-08 Heatsink Extension kit for E740-120/170 S
FR-E7FN-08 Conduit kit for E740-120/170 S FR-E7CN-09 Heatsink Extension kit for E720-240/330 S
FR-E7FN-09 Conduit kit for E720-240/330 S Heatsink Extension kit for E720-470/600
FR-A7CN02 S
E740-230/300
Conduit kit for E720-470/600
FR-E7FN-10 S
E740-230/300
E700 Demonstration Unit

VFD-MICRO-DEMO Includes E720 and D720 1HP, pre-wired digital input switches, led outputs and speed potentiometer S
VFD-MOTOR-DEMO Includes 1/2HP motor with quick connection to VFD-MICRO-DEMO S
410
E560 Series
The cost-effective variable speed control solution for general purpose applications.
• Up to 10 Hp at 600VAC • UL and cUL listed / CE marked

• Advanced Magnetic Flux Vector Control • Open-network communication options
• Auto-tuning - DeviceNet
• 50°C maximum ambient temperature - CC-Link
• RS-485 serial communication (standard) - Profibus DP
• Selectable cooling fan operation mode • Brake Transistor
• Built-in PID control
• Adjustable carrier frequency (0.7kHz to
14.5kHz)
• Optional keypad interface (FR-PA02-02)
• Compatible with FR-PU04 user interface
FR-E560 – 3.7 K – NA
Voltage
Symbol Voltage Class Inverter
capacity
E560 Three-phase 600V class “kW” 600 1 – 10 Hp
Horsepower
E560 Series
Rating (CT & VT) IP20 Open Chassis Dimensions
Output Current Stocked Item
Hp Model Number H x W x D mm (in) Weight kg (lbs)
Amps
3-Phase 575 - 600VAC Input / Output
1 1.7 FR-E560-0.75K-NA 150 x 140 x 136 (5.9 x 5.5 x 5.4) 1.8 (4.0) S
2 2.7 FR-E560-1.5K-NA 150 x 140 x 136 (5.9 x 5.5 x 5.4) 2.0 (4.7) S
3 4.0 FR-E560-2.2K-NA 150 x 140 x 136 (5.9 x 5.5 x 5.4) 2.0 (4.7) S
5 6.1 FR-E560-3.7K-NA 150 x 220 x 148 (5.9 x 8.7 x 5.8) 3.8 (8.4) S
7.5 9.0 FR-E560-5.5K-NA 150 x 220 x 148 (5.9 x 8.7 x 5.8) 3.8 (8.4) S
10 12 FR-E560-7.5K-NA 150 x 220 x 148 (5.9 x 8.7 x 5.8) 3.8 (8.4) S

E560 General Specifications
Soft-PWM control / high carrier frequency PWM control can be selected. V / F control or general-purpose magnetic
Control Method
lux vector control can be selected.
Output Frequency Range 0.2 to 400Hz (starting frequency variable between 0 and 60Hz)
Analog Input Across terminals 2-5: 1/500 of maximum set frequency (5VDC input), 1/1000 (10VDC, 4-20mADC input)
Frequency Control
Digital Input 0.01Hz (less than 100Hz), 0.1Hz (100Hz or more) when digital setting is made using the control panel
Analog Input Within ±0.5% of maximum output frequency (25°C ±10°C) / 59°F to 95°F
Frequency Precision
Digital Input Within 0.01% of set output frequency when setting is made from control panel
Control Speciications
Voltage / Frequency Characteristics Base frequency set as required between 0 and 400Hz. Constant torque or variable torque pattern can be selected
150% or more (at 1Hz), 200% or more (at 3Hz) when general-purpose magnetic lux vector control or slip
Starting Torque
compensation is selected
Torque Boost Manual torque boost, 0 to 30% may be set
0.01, 0.1 to 3600 sec. (accel. and decel. can be set individually), linear or S-pattern accel./decel. mode can be
Acceleration / Deceleration Time Setting
selected
0.1K, 0.2K...150% or more, 0.4K, 0.75K... 00% or more, 1.5K...50% or more, 2.2K, 3.7K, 5.5K, 7.5K ... 20% or
Regenerative
Braking Torque more (*1)
DC Dynamic Brake Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10 s), operation voltage (0 to 30%) variable
Stall Prevention Operation Level Operation current level can be set (0 to 200% variable), presence or absence can be selected
Voltage Stall Prevention Operation Level Operation level is ixed, presence or absence can be selected
Fast-Response Current Limit Level Operation level is ixed, presence or absence can be selected
Frequency Setting Analog Input 0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC, 4 to 20mADC
Signal Digital Input Entered from control panel (FR-PA02-02)
Starting Signal Forward and reverse rotation, start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected
Alarm Reset Used to reset alarm output provided when protective function is activated
Up to 15 speeds can be selected. (Each speed can be set between 0 and 400Hz, running speed can be changed
Multi-Speed Selection
during operation from the control panel)
Used to select second functions (accel. time, decel. time, torque boost, freq., electronic overcurrent
Second Function Selection
protection)
Output Stop Instantaneous shut-off of inverter output (frequency, voltage)
Current Input Selection Used to select input of frequency setting signal 4 to 20mADC (terminal 4)
Use
Input Signals
Start Signal Automatic Self-Holding Selection Used to select start signal automatic self-holding input(3-wire input) Pr. 180
External Thermal Relay Input Thermal relay contact input for use when the inverter is stopped by the external thermal relay to
Pr. 183
PU Operation-External Operation Switching Used to switch between PU operation and external operation from outside the inverter
for
V/F-General-Purpose Magnetic Flux Switching Used to switch between V/F control and general-purpose magnetic lux vector from outside the inverter selection.
Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input
selection, automatic restart operation after instantaneous power failure, forward/reverse rotation
Operation Functions
prevention, slip comp., operation mode selection, off-line auto tuning function, PID control, computer
link operation (RS-485)
2 open collector output signals can be selected from inverter running, up to frequency, frequency detection,
overload alarm, zero current detection, output current detection, PID upper limit, PID lower limit, PID forward/
Operation Status
reverse rotation, operation ready, minor fault and alarm, and 1 contact output (230VAC 0.3A, 30VDC 0.3A)
Output Signals can be selected
1 signal can be selected from output frequency, motor current and output voltage. Pulse train output
For Meter
(1440 pulses/second/full scale)
Operating Status Output voltage, output current, set frequency, running
Display
Control Panel Display

Alarm Deinition Alarm deinition is displayed when protective function is activated. 4 alarm deinitions are stored
LED Display Power application (POWER)
Overcurrent shut-off (during acceleration, deceleration, constant speed), regenerative overvoltage shut-off,
undervoltage (*2) , instantaneous power failure (*2), overload shut-off (electronic overcurrent protection), brake
Protective And Warning Functions
transistor alarm, output short circuit, stall prevention, brake resistor overheat protection, fan overheat, fan failure,
parameter error, PU disconnection, ground fault protection
Ambient Temperature Constant torque: -10°C to +50°C (non-freezing) 14°F to 122°F
Ambient Humidity 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Environment
Storage Temperature (*3 ) -20°C to +65°C / -4°F to 149°F

Atmosphere Indoors, no corrosive and lammable gases, oil mist, dust and dirt
Maximum 1000m (3300 ft.) above sea level for standard operation. After that derate by 3% for every extra 500m
Altitude
up to 2500m (91%)
Vibration 5.9 m/s2 (0.6G max.) based on JIS C 0911
Notes:
1. The braking torque indicated is a short-duration average torque (which varies with motor loss) when the motor alone is decelerated from 60Hz in the shortest time and is not a continuous regenerative torque.
When the motor is decelerated from the frequency higher than the base frequency, the average deceleration torque will reduce. Since the inverter does not contain a brake resistor, use the optional brake
resistor when regenerative energy is large. (The optional brake resistor cannot be used with 0.1K and 0.2K.) A brake unit (BU) may also be used.
2. When undervoltage or instantaneous power failure has occurred, alarm display or alarm output is not provided but the inverter itself is protected. Overcurrent, regenerative overvoltage or other protection may
be activated at power restoration according to the operating status (load size, etc.).
3. Temperature applicable for a short period in transit, etc.
412
E500 Series Terminal Connection Diagram Terminal Block Layout
MCCB MC Motor 600V class
3-phase AC R(L 1) U RH A
V IM
power supply S(L2) W RM B
T(L 3 ) Ground
24VDC power output and RL C
external transistor common PC P1 Jumper MRS 10
Note 4 Remove this jumper when RES 2
(+)P
using the optional power-factor SD 5
PR improving DC reactor. AM 4
Forward rotation start STF
(-)N PC SD
Brake resistor connection
Reverse rotation start STR SE STF
High RH RUN STR
Multi-speed selection A FU SD
Middle RM
B Alarm
Low RL
output
Output stop MRS C
Reset RES
Contact input common SD RUN Running
Note 3
FU Frequency detection Open
Control input signals
(No voltage input allowed) SE Open collector output common collector outputs
Note 2 Sink/source common
Frequency setting signals (Analog)
(Note 1) 3 10(+5V)
Frequency 2
2 0 to 5VDC Selected
setting 0 to 10VDC
potentiometer 1 5(Common)
1/2W1kΩ Current input(-) Note 3
SD
4 to 20mADC(+) 4(4 to 20mADC) Note 2
AM (+) Analog signal
When using current input as the output
frequency setting signal, set "4" in 5 (- )
any of Pr.180 to Pr.183 (input (0 to 10VDC)
terminal function selection) and PU connector Ground Main circuit terminal
assign AU (current input selection) (RS-485) Control circuit input terminal
to any of terminal RH, RM, RL, or
MRS, then turn the AU signal on. Control circuit output terminal
Notes:
1. If the potentiometer is to be operated often use a 2W1kΩ potentiometer.
2. Terminals SD and SE are electrically isolated.
3. Terminals SD and 5 are common. Do not connect them to each other or to ground.
4. To avoid damage to the VFD, do not allow a short circuit between terminals PC and SD. If they are shorted, the VFD will be damaged
E500 Series Options

FR-PA02-02 Keypad for E500 VFD For mounting on E500 VFD S
FR-E5P Keypad Panel Mounting Adapter For use only on FR-PA02-02 and FR-CB20 S
FR-DU04 LED Parameter Unit Also used with A500(L). S
FR-PU04 LCD Parameter Unit Also used with A500(L). S
FR-E5ND E560 DeviceNet Interface Plug-in Option. Not for use with E520 or E510W. -
FR-E5NP E560 Profibus DP Interface Plug-in Option. Not for use with E520 or E510W. S
FR-E5NC E560 CC-Link Interface Plug-in Option. Not for use with E520 or E510W. -
FR-E5NL E560 LonWorks Interface Plug-in Option. Not for use with E520 or E510W. -
FR-CB201 Remote cable 1m cable S
FR-CB203 Remote Cable 3m cable S
FR-CB205 Remote Cable 5m cable S
SH(NA)3193 FR-A500 / E500 Technical Manual Only available for download. -
IB(NA)0600003 FR-E5NC, CC-Link Instruction Manual Only available for download. -
IB(NA)0600006 FR-E5ND, DeviceNet Instruction Manual Only available for download. -
IB(NA)0600007 FR-E5NP, Profibus Instruction Manual Only available for download. -
IB(NA)0600204 FR-E560 Instruction Manual Only available for download. -
SC-FRPC Serial Communication Cable S

F700 Series
The truly fantastic specifications of the F700, make this VFD from Mitsubishi Electric an absolute must for your drive systems.
• NEMA 1 UL Type 1 Enclosure Designs: • Energy Savings: Optimum

Drive can be mounted as a stand-alone Excitation Control
unit where required. (Plenum rated) • 3 user programmable skip frequencies
• Built-in BACnet MS/TP or Modbus RTU • Windmill start: Catch a reverse
communications spinning load
• Built-in PLC; programs using • Pre-charge mode
GX Developer
• PID sleep mode
• Two I/O cards can be installed
simultaneously • Second PID function
• Remote I/O capability: All the drive I/O can • Regeneration avoidance
be read or controlled over a network • Built-in EMC filter: Conforms to
• Optional FR-PU07-01 keypad can be EN61800-3 2nd environmental
mounted remotely, display HAND/AUTO, • UL Listed for single phase input
and display the value of three monitors
Voltage
208/230 3/4 – 200 Hp
480 3/4 – 1000 Hp
Horsepower
F700 Ratings 200-240V Class

Input: 1 Phase/3 Phase - Output Voltage: 3 Phase 200-240V at 60Hz
Voltage Tolerance: 170-264V at 60Hz Available Braking Torque: 15% Torque Continuous
SLD (40°C) LD
110% OL / 1min 120% OL / 1min Protective
Model Number (*4) Frame Size Cooling Method Stocked Item
Rating
120% OL / 3 sec 150% OL / 3 sec
Hp (*1) FLA Hp (*1) FLA
1 4.6 1 4.2 FR-F720-00046-NA A S
Self Cooling
2 7.7 2 7 FR-F720-00077-NA B S
3 10.5 3 9.6 FR-F720-00105-NA C S
5 16.7 5 15.2 FR-F720-00167-NA C S
7.5 25 7.5 23 FR-F720-00250-NA C UL Type 1 - S
10 34 10 31 FR-F720-00340-NA D Plenum Rated S
15 49 15 45 FR-F720-00490-NA D S
20 63 20 58 FR-F720-00630-NA E S
25 77 25 70 FR-F720-00770-NA F S
30 93 30 85 FR-F720-00930-NA F S
40 125 40 114 FR-F720-01250-NA F S
Forced Air
50/60 154 50 140 FR-F720-01540-NA G S
Cooled IP00 (*2)
60 187 60 170 FR-F720-01870-NA H S
75 233 75 212 FR-F720-02330-NA H S
40 125 40 114 FR-F720-01250-NAN1 F -
50/60 154 50 140 FR-F720-01540-NAN1 G -
NEMA 1
60 187 60 170 FR-F720-01870-NAN1 H -
75 233 75 212 FR-F720-02330-NAN1 H -
100/125 316 100 288 FR-F720-03160-NA K S
150 380 125 346 FR-F720-03800-NA K IP00 (*2) S
200 475 150 432 FR-F720-04750-NA K -
Notes: See next page.
414
F700 Ratings 480V Class
Input: 1 Phase / 3 Phase • Output Voltage: 3 Phase 380-480V at 50/60Hz
Voltage Tolerance: 323-528V at 50/60Hz • Available Braking Torque: 15% Torque Continuous
SLD (40°C) LD
110% OL / 1min 120% OL / 1min Frame Cooling Protective Stocked

Model Number (*4)
120% OL / 3 sec 150% OL / 3 sec Size Method Rating Item

1 2.3 1 2.1 FR-F740-00023-NA C S
2 3.8 2 3.5 FR-F740-00038-NA C S
3 5.2 3 4.8 FR-F740-00052-NA C Self Cooling S
5 8.3 5 7.6 FR-F740-00083-NA C S
7.5 12.6 7.5 11.5 FR-F740-00126-NA C S
UL Type 1 -
10 17 10 16 FR-F740-00170-NA D S
Plenum rated
15 25 15 23 FR-F740-00250-NA D S
20 31 20 29 FR-F740-00310-NA E S
25 38 25 35 FR-F740-00380-NA E S
30 47 30 43 FR-F740-00470-NA F S
40 62 40 57 FR-F740-00620-NA F Forced Air S
50/60 77 50 70 FR-F740-00770-NA G Cooled S
60 93 60 85 FR-F740-00930-NA H IP00 (*3) S
75 116 75 106 FR-F740-01160-NA H S
50/60 77 50 70 FR-F740-00770-NAN1 G -
60 93 60 85 FR-F740-00930-NAN1 H NEMA 1 -
75 116 75 106 FR-F740-01160-NAN1 H -
Notes: See below.
Input: 1 Phase / 3 Phase • Output Voltage: 3 Phase 380-480V at 50/60Hz • Voltage Tolerance: 323-550V at 50/60Hz
Available Braking Torque: 15% Torque Continuous • DC Link Choke is Included With The VFD
SLD (40°C) LD
110% OL / 1min 120% OL / 1min

Model Number Frame Protective Stocked
Fan
(*4) Size Rating Item
120% OL / 3 sec 150% OL / 3 sec
100/150 180 100 144 FR-F740-01800-NA H S

150 216 150 180 FR-F740-02160-NA J S
200 260 150 216 FR-F740-02600-NA J S
250 325 200 260 FR-F740-03250-NA K S
300 361 250 325 FR-F740-03610-NA K S
IP00 (*2)
350 432 300 361 FR-F740-04320-NA L S
400 481 350 432 FR-F740-04810-NA L S
Forced Air
450 547 400 481 FR-F740-05470-NA M S
Cooled
500 610 450 547 FR-F740-06100-NA M S
550 683 500 610 FR-F740-06830-NA M S
650 770 550 683 FR-F740-07700-NA N S
700 866 650 770 FR-F740-08660-NA N S
800 962 700 866 FR-F740-09620-NA P IP000 (*3) S
900 1094 800 962 FR-F740-10940-NA P -
1000 1212 900 1094 FR-F740-12120-NA P -
Notes:
1. Motor ratings shown are intended as guidelines only - based on 4 pole standard induction motors.
2. NEMA 1 conduit adapter option required for types 01250 - 04750 200V class product.
3. NEMA 1 conduit adapter option required for types 00770 - 06830 400V class product.
4. For single phase input, derate output current by 40% (Models up to F720-03800-NA, F740-04810-NA.)

F700 General Specifications
Control System High carrier frequency PWM control (V/F control)/optimum excitation control/simple magnetic flux vector control
0.015Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V/12bit); 0.03Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 5V/11bit, 0 to 20mA/approx. 11bit,
Frequency Setting Analog Input
terminal 1: -10V to +10V/11bit); 0.06Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 1: 0 to ±5V/10bit)
Resolution
Digital Input 0.01Hz
Frequency Analog Input Within ±0.2% of the max. output frequency (25°C ± 10°C)
Voltage/Frequency Characteristics Base frequency can be set from 0 to 400Hz. Constant torque/variable torque pattern or adjustable 5 points V/F can be selected
Starting Torque 120% (3Hz) when set to simple magnetic flux vector control and slip compensation
Acceleration/Deceleration
0 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode can be selected.
Time Setting
DC Injection Brake Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10s), operation voltage (0 to 30%) variable
Frequency Setting Analog Input Terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 4 to 20mA can be selected. Terminal 1: -10 to +10V, -5 to 5V can be selected.
Signal Digital Input Four-digit BCD or 16-bit binary using the setting dial of the operation panel (when used with the option FR-A7AX)
Start Signal Available individually for forward and reverse rotation. Start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.
Select any twelve signals using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) from among multi-speed selection, second func-
tion selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG operation selection, selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure,
external thermal relay input, HC connection (inverter operation enable signal), HC connection (instantaneous power failure detection),
Input Signals
PU operation/external interlock signal , PID control enable terminal, PU operation, external operation switchover, output stop, start
self-holding selection, forward rotation command, reverse rotation command, inverter reset, PTC thermistor input, PID forward reverse
operation switchover, PU-NET operation switchover, NET-external operation switchover, command source switchover.
Max. and min. frequency settings, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection, polarity reversible operation, automatic
Operational Functions restart after instantaneous power failure operation, continuous operation at an instantaneous power failure, commercial power supply,
inverter switchover operation, forward/reverse rotation prevention, operation mode selection, PID control, computer link operation (RS-485).
Select any seven signals using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) from among inverter running, up-to-speed, instanta-
neous power failure/undervoltage, overload warning, output frequency detection, second output frequency detection, electronic thermal
relay function pre-alarm, PU operation mode, inverter operation ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit,
PID upper limit, PID forward rotation reverse rotation output, commercial power supply-inverter switchover MC1, commercial power
Operating Status supply-inverter switchover MC2, commercial power supply-inverter switchover MC3, fan fault output, heatsink overheat pre-alarm, inverter
Output running start command on, deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, PID control activated, during retry, during PID output suspen-
Signals sion, life alarm, input MC stop signal, power savings average value update timing, current average monitor, alarm output 2, maintenance
timer alarm, remote output, minor failure output, alarm output. Open collector output (5 points), relay output
(2 points) and alarm code of the inverter can be output (4 bit) from the open collector.
When Used With The Select any seven signals using Pr. 313 to Pr. 319 (extension output terminal function selection) from among control circuit
FR-A7AY (Option) capacitor life, main circuit capacitor life, cooling fan life, inrush current limit circuit life.
Select from output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting value, running speed, converter
output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter, reference
Analog Output
voltage output, motor load factor, energy saving effect, PID set value, PID process value using Pr. 54 “CA terminal function selection
(analog current output)” and Pr. 158 “AM terminal function selection (analog output)”.
Output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, alarm indication, frequency setting, running speed, converter out-
put voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal load factor, input voltage, output voltage, road meter, cumulative energization time,
Operating Status actual operation time, motor load factor, cumulative energization power, power saving effect, cumulative saving power, PID set point, PID
Parameter process value, PID deviation value, inverter I/O terminal monitor, input terminal option monitor (*1), output terminal option monitor (*1),
Display
Unit (FR- option fitting status monitor (*2), terminal assignment status (*2)
DU07/
FR-PU04) Alarm definition is displayed when the protective function is activated, the output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization time
Alarm Definition
right before the protection function was activated and the past 8 alarm definitions are stored.
Interactive Guidance Operation guide/troubleshooting with a help function. (*2)
overvoltage during constant speed, overvoltage during deceleration, inverter protection thermal operation, heatsink overheat, instanta-
neous power failure occurrence, undervoltage, input phase failure, motor overload, output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent, output
phase failure, external thermal relay operation, PTC thermistor operation, option alarm, parameter error, PU disconnection, retry count
Protective/Warning Function
excess, CPU alarm, power supply short for operation panel, 24VDC power output short, output current detection value over, inrush resis-
tance overheat, communication alarm (inverter), analog input alarm, internal circuit alarm (15V power supply), fan fault, overcurrent stall
prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, electronic thermal prealarm, PU stop, maintenance timer alarm (*1), parameter write error, copy
operation error, operation panel lock.
Ambient Temperature -10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
Environment
Ambient Humidity 90% RH or less (non-condensing)

Storage Temperature (*3) -20°C to +65°C
Atmosphere Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt, etc.)
Altitude, Vibration Maximum 1000m above sea level, 5.9m/s2 or less (conforms to JIS C 0040)
Notes:
1. Can be displayed only on the operation panel (FR-DU07).
2. Can be displayed only on the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
416
F700 Series Terminal Connection Diagram
F700 Control Terminal Layout
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 10E 10 2 5 4
RL RM RH RT AU STOP MRS RES SD CA AM 1
SE RUN SU IPF OL FU SD SD STF STR JOG CS PC

F700 Factory Supplied DC Link Chokes
Standard With VFD Dimensions inches (mm) Approx.
Weight
FR-F700 Series DC Link Model Number mH Amps Watt Loss Height Width Depth lb (kg)
FR-F740-01800-NA FR-HEL-H90K 0.3 191 130 13.4 (340) 5.9 (150) 7.5 (190) 20 (44)
FR-F740-02160-NA FR-HEL-H110K 0.246 233 130 13.4 (340) 5.9 (150) 7.7 (195) 22 (48)
FR-F740-02600-NA FR-HEL-H132K 0.204 281 140 15.9 (405) 6.9 (175) 7.9 (200) 26 (57)
FR-F740-03250-NA FR-HEL-H160K 0.171 335 140 15.9 (405) 6.9 (175) 8 (205) 28 (62)
FR-F740-03610-NA FR-HEL-H185K 0.148 389 170 15.9 (405) 6.9 (175) 9.4 (240) 29 (64)
FR-F740-04320-NA FR-HEL-H220K 0.124 462 230 15.9 (405) 6.9 (175) 9.4 (240) 30 (66)
FR-F740-04810-NA FR-HEL-H250K 0.109 524 240 17.3 (440) 7.5 (190) 9.8 (250) 35 (77)
FR-F740-05470-NA FR-HEL-H280K 0.098 585 270 17.3 (440) 7.5 (190) 10 (255) 38 (84)
FR-F740-06100-NA FR-HEL-H315K 0.087 658 300 19.5 (495) 8.3 (210) 9.8 (250) 42 (92)
FR-F740-06830-NA FR-HEL-H355K 0.077 742 360 19.5 (495) 8.3 (210) 9.8 (250) 46 (101)
FR-F740-07700-NA FR-HEL-H400K 0.069 836 360 19.7 (500) 8.7 (220) 9.8 (250) 50 (110)
FR-F740-08660-NA FR-HEL-H450K 0.061 940 450 19.7 (500) 8.7 (220) 10.6 (270) 57 (125)
FR-F740-09620-NA FR-HEL-H500K 0.055 1045 450 17.8 (455) 8.5 (215) 13.6 (345) 67 (1147)
FR-F740-10940-NA FR-HEL-H560K 0.049 1170 470 18.1 (460) 8.5 (215) 14.2 (360) 85 (187)
FR-F740-12120-NA FR-HEL-H630K 0.044 1317 500 18.1 (460) 8.5 (215) 14.2 (360) 95 (209)
F700 Frame Size

Dimensions inches (mm) Weight Without Reactor
Frame Size
Height Width Depth lbs (kg)
A 10.2 (260) 4.3 (110) 4.3 (110) 4.2 (1.9)
B 10.2 (260) 4.3 (110) 4.9 (125) 5 (2.3)
C 10.2 (260) 5.9 (150) 5.5 (140) 9.3 (4.2)
D 10.2 (260) 8.7 (220) 6.7 (170) 17.7 (8)
E 11.8 (300) 8.7 (220) 7.5 (190) 19.4 (8.8)
F 15.8 (400) 9.8 (250) 7.5 (190) 32.6 (14.8)
G 21.7 (550) 12.8 (325) 7.7 (195) 77.1 (35)
H 21.7 (550) 17.1 (435) 9.8 (250) 134.4 (61)
J 27.6 (700) 18.3 (465) 9.8 (250) 134.4 (61)
K 29.1 (740) 18.3 (465) 14.2 (360) 244.5 (111)
L 39.8 (1010) 19.6 (498) 15 (380) 378.9 (172)
M 39.8 (1010) 26.8 (680) 15 (380) 385 (175)
N 52.4 (1330) 31.1 (790) 17.3 (440) 572 (260)
P 62.2 (1580) 39.2 (995) 17.3 (440) 814 (370)
418
F700 Series Options Instruction Manuals
Stocked
Item
FR-F700 Installation Manual - Contains instructions
Conduit Attachments for installer and parameter list. (Included with VFD, IB(NA)0600218 -
plus CD with all versions of VFD and option manuals.)
Drive Model Length Weight Stocked
Model Number
(in) (*4) (lbs) Item FR-F700-NAPLC Function Programming Manual IB(NA)0600420 -
F720 (*1) F740 (*1)
FR-A7FN05 (*3) 01250 - 5.9 5 - FR-F700 Basic Manual - Contains wiring details, VFD
IB(NA)0600216 -
FR-A7FN06 (*3) 01540 00770 6.2 5 S layout drawings, alarm definitions and parameter list.
FR-A7FN07 (*3) 01870, 02330 00930, 01160 9 15 S FR-F700 Applied Manual - Contains wiring details,
FR-A7FN-10 (*2) - 01800 24 37 S VFD layout drawings, alarm definitions and complete IB(NA)0600217 -
parameter list with definitions and setting examples.
FR-A7FN-11 (*2) - 02160, 02600 24 41 S
03160, 03800, FR-PU07 Manual - Contains complete instruction
FR-A7FN-12 (*2) 03250, 03610 24 45 S IB(NA)0600240 -
04750 sets and screen definitions.
FR-A7FN-13 (*2) - 04320, 04810 26 50 S Manuals available for download at www.meau.com
05470, 06100,
FR-A7FN-14 (*2) - 26 64 S
06830
Notes: Parameter Units / Parameter Copy Units
1. For FR-F700s smaller than listed above, they are UL Type 1, and conduit attachment is standard.
2. Mounting hardware included for standard DC chokes which ship with VFD. Kits are powder coated
Parameter units are used for operator control, reading and
similar to VFD, charcoal gray. writing parameters, and drive monitoring. Parameter Copy
3. Kits are coated zinc clear. Units also read the drive parameter settings and copy them into
4. Width and depth of kit match the associated VFD.
non-volatile memory, and can write them into other drives.
Stocked
External Heatsink Attachment Item
FR-CB201 Extension cable straight plugs on both ends - 1M S
Model Number Drive Model
Stocked Item FR-CB203 Extension cable straight plugs on both ends - 3M S
(*1) F720 F740
FR-A7CN01 00105 to 00250 00023 to 00126 S
FR-DU07 Control Panel for F700 S
FR-A7CN02 00340, 00490 00170, 00250 S LCD Multi-lingual Parameter Copy Unit (English,
FR-A7CN03 00630 00310, 00380 S French, Spanish, German, Italian, Swedish, Finnish,
FR-A7CN04 00770 to 01250 00470, 00620 S FR-PU07 Japanese) for operator control, parameter read/write and S
monitoring. Stores settings in non-volatile memory.
FR-A7CN05 01540 - S Built-in parameter copy capability. (F/A700 based)
FR-A7CN06 - 00770 S FR-PU07-01 PU07 with hand/auto and enhanced display functions S
FR-A7CN07 01870, 02330 00930, 01160, 01800 S FR-ADP FR-DU07 panel mounting adapter S
FR-A7CN08 - 02160 - LCD Multi-lingual Parameter Copy Unit (English, French,
FR-A7CN09 - 02600 - FR-PU04 Spanish, German, Italian, Swedish, Finnish, Japanese) for S
operator control, parameter read/write and monitoring.
FR-A7CN10 03160, 03800, 04750 03250, 03610 -
Note: FR-PU07BB-L Battery powered PU07 S
1. Kits are coated zinc clear.
FR-RJ45-HUB4 Serial network hub - 2 stations -
Option Cards FR-RJ45-TR Terminating resistor for FR-RJ45-HUB -
Model No. Stocked Item

Relay Output FR-A7AR S
Building Management Options
Function
12 Bit Digital Input FR-A7AX S

FR-A7N-ETH FR-A7N-XLT ETH-1000 XLTR-1000
Network Type / Model
Digital Output (*1,*2) (*1,*2) (*3,*4) (*3,*4)
FR-A7AY S BACnet/IP X - X -
Ext. Analog Output
X - X -
Communication
EtherNet/IP
FR-A7NC S
Communication
CC-Link X - X -
Gateway
Modbus TCP
DeviceNet FR-A7ND S PROFINET IO X - X -
BACnet MS/TP (*5) - X X X
LonWorks FR-A7NL S
Metasys N2 - X X X
Profibus DP FR-A7NP S Siemens FLN - X - -
Notes:
For additional information, visit www.iccdesigns.com
F700 Demonstration Unit 1. Physically mounts within VFD and powered by VFD
2. FR-E7TR option recommended. (PU connector not available for use)
Model Number Description Stocked Item 4. Mounted and powered external to VFD
5. BACnet MS/TP is built in to F700. Gateway required for pre August 2010 production.
Includes F720 1HP, pre-wired digital
VFD-F700-DEMO-2 input switches, LED outputs, speed S
potentiometer and analog meter Software
Includes 1/2HP motor with quick
VFD-MOTOR-DEMO S Programming and diagnostic
connection to VFD-F700-DEMO FR-CONFIGURATOR S
software

Parameter Unit/Cable Reference List
A700 Extension cables
VFD Model E560 D700 E700 1 = Direct mount
F700 2 = FR-CB201, FR-CB203, FR-CB205 - Where 1, 3, 5 indicate length in meters
FR-PA02 1/2b - - - 3 = SC-FRPC
FR-PA02-02 1/2b - - - Notes:
FR-DU04 2a - 2a 2a 1. a = Will not mount directly on drive’s cover - cable required.
2a 2a 2a 2a 2. b = To remote mount on the enclosure panel, an extension cable and gender change
Parameter FR-PU04 adapter (FR-E5P for E500,
Unit FR-DU07 - 2a 2a c SD-54258-8811 for F700) are required.
FR-PU07 - 2a 2a 1 3. c = Included standard with VFD.
FR-PU07BB-L - - 2a 2a
FR-PA07 - 2a 2a 2a
Software FR-CONFIGURATOR 3 3 3 3
Dynamic Braking Options

Select the brake unit according to the motor capacity.
To obtain braking torque greater than 200%, use a larger inverter capacity.
Up to 10 FR-BU2 brake units can be connected in parallel for increased braking capacity.
%ED or Time at Short-Time Rating When Braking Torque is 100%

Stocked Brake Resistor Stocked Motor Capacity (HP)
Brake Unit Model No.
Item Model No. Item 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75
FR-BU2-1.5K S BU-1500-TEIKOUKI - 30 s - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FR-BU2-3.7K S BU-3700-TEIKOUKI - - 30 s - - - - - - - - - - - -
FR-BU2-7.5K S BU-7.5K-TEIKOUKI - - - 30 s 30 s - - - - - - - - - -
230V
FR-BU2-15K S FR-BR-15K-UL S - - - - 80% 40% 15% 10% - - - - - -
FR-BU2-30K S FR-BR-30K-UL S - - - - - - 65% 30% 25% 15% 10% - - -
FR-BU2-55K - FR-BR-55K-UL - - - - - - - - - 90% 60% 30% 20% 15% 10%
FR-BU2-H7.5K S 2 x BU-3700-TEIKOUKI - - - 30 s 30 s - - - - - - - - - -
FR-BU2-H15K S FR-BR-H15K-UL S - - - - 80% 40% 15% 10% - - - - - -
460V
FR-BU2-H30K S FR-BR-H30K-UL S - - - - - - 65% 30% 25% 15% 10% - - -
FR-BU2-H55K S FR-BR-H55K-UL S - - - - - - - - 90% 60% 30% 20% 15% 10%

Item Model No. Item 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800
FR-BU2-H75K S MT-BR5-H75K - 10% 5% - - - - - - - - - - -
2 x FR-BU2-H75K S 2 x MT-BR5-H75K - 40% 25% 15% 10% 5% - - - - - - - -
3 x FR-BU2-H75K S 3 x MT-BR5-H75K - 90% 60% 40% 20% 14% 10% 5% 5% - - - - -
4 x FR-BU2-H75K S 4 x MT-BR5-H75K - - 95% 70% 40% 25% 15% 13% 10% 5% 5% - - -
460V
5 x FR-BU2-H75K S 5 x MT-BR5-H75K - - - - 60% 40% 25% 20% 15% 12% 10% 5% 5% -
6 x FR-BU2-H75K S 6 x MT-BR5-H75K - - - - 90% 55% 40% 25% 25% 15% 14% 10% 5% 5%
7 x FR-BU2-H75K S 7 x MT-BR5-H75K - - - - - 80% 55% 40% 35% 20% 15% 13% 10% 5%
8 x FR-BU2-H75K S 8 x MT-BR5-H75K - - - - - - 70% 50% 45% 30% 25% 15% 13% 10%
420
Braking Torque (%) at Short-Time Rating of 30 Sec. for 5HP and Less
Braking Torque (%) at Short-Time Rating of 15 Sec. for 7.5HP and Larger

Item Model No. Item 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75
FR-BU2-1.5K S BU-1500-TEIKOUKI - 100% 50% - - - - - - - - - - - -
FR-BU2-3.7K S BU-3700-TEIKOUKI - - 100% 50% 50% - - - - - - - - - -
FR-BU2-7.5K S BU-7.5K-TEIKOUKI - - - 100% 100% - - - - - - - - - -
230V
FR-BU2-15K S FR-BR-15K-UL S - - - - 280% 200% 120% 100% 80% 70% - - - -
FR-BU2-30K S FR-BR-30K-UL S - - - - - - 260% 180% 160% 130% 100% 80% 70% -
FR-BU2-55K - FR-BR-55K-UL - - - - - - - - - 300% 250% 180% 150% 120% 100%
FR-BU2-H15K S FR-BR-H15K-UL S - - - - 280% 200% 120% 100% 80% 70% - - - -
460V FR-BU2-H30K S FR-BR-H30K-UL S - - - - - - 260% 180% 160% 130% 100% 80% 70% -

Item Model No. Item 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800
FR-BU2-H75K S MT-BR5-H75K - 100% 80% 65% 50% 40% 30% 28% 26% 22% 20% - - -
2 x FR-BU2-H75K S 2 x MT-BR5-H75K - 200% 165% 135% 100% 80% 65% 55% 53% 44% 40% 33% 28% 25%
3 x FR-BU2-H75K S 3 x MT-BR5-H75K - 300% 250% 200% 150% 120% 100% 85% 80% 65% 60% 50% 43% 37%
4 x FR-BU2-H75K S 4 x MT-BR5-H75K - - 300% 270% 200% 160% 135% 115% 105% 85% 80% 65% 55% 50%
460V
5 x FR-BU2-H75K S 5 x MT-BR5-H75K - - - 300% 250% 200% 170% 140% 130% 110% 100% 83% 70% 62%
Dynamic Braking Unit and Resistor Specifications
Stocked Brake Resistor Stocked Weight Continuous Permissible

Brake Unit Model No. Resistance (Ohms) Rated (Watts)
Item Model No. Item kg / lbs Power (Watts)
FR-BU2-1.5K S BU-1500-TEIKOUKI - - 50 300 100

FR-BU2-3.7K S BU-3700-TEIKOUKI - - 30 900 300
FR-BU2-7.5K S BU-7.5K-TEIKOUKI - - 20 1800 600
230V
FR-BU2-15K S FR-BR-15K-UL S 15 / 33 8 4000 990
FR-BU2-30K S FR-BR-30K-UL S 30 / 66 4 8000 1990
FR-BU2-55K - FR-BR-55K-UL - 70 / 154 2 16000 3910
FR-BU2-H7.5K S 2 x BU-3700-TEIKOUKI - - 60 1800 600
FR-BU2-H15K S FR-BR-H15K-UL S 15 / 33 32 4000 990
460V FR-BU2-H30K S FR-BR-H30K-UL S 30 / 66 16 8000 1990
FR-BU2-H75K S MT-BR5-H75K - 70 / 154 6.5 30000 7500

F700 Dynamic Braking Units and Resistors - UFS Series
• A more economical solution to regenerative braking applications
• Internal Form-C relay
• Adjustable DC bus brake turn-on voltage
• Configurable master / slave brake configuration. Allows connection of up to 5 brake units (1 master / 4 slaves)
240V Series
Motor Capacity
Braking HP 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75
Torque kW 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
100% For Brake Unit UFS22J UFS40J 2 x UFS40J
15 Secs. Brake Resistor RUFC15J RUFC22J RUFC40J 2 x RUFC40J
Continuous Permissible Power (W) UFS22J - 1500W UFS40J - 2000W 2ea x UFS40J - 4000W
Electrical
Resistance (Overall) RUFC15J - 24ohms RUFC22J - 12ohms RUFC40J - 7.5ohms 2ea x RUFC40J - 3.75ohms
Data
Continuous Current (Amps) 7A 10A 14.6A 29.2A
460V Series
Motor Capacity
Braking HP 7.5 10 15 25 30 40 50 60 75
Torque kW 5.5 7.5 11 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
100% For Brake Unit UFS22 UFS40
15 Secs. Brake Resistor RUFC15/480 RUFC22/480 RUFC40/480
Continuous Permissible Power (W) UFS22 - 2000W UFS40 - 4000W
Electrical
Resistance (Overall) RUFC15/480 - 44ohms RUFC22/480 - 27ohms RUFC40/480 - 15ohms
Data
Continuous Current (Amps) 6A 7.7A 14.6
Motor Capacity
Braking HP 100 125 150 175 215 300 375
Torque kW 75 90 110 132 160 220 280
100% For Brake Unit UFS110 2 X UFS110
15 Secs. Brake Resistor RUFC110/480 2 X RUFC110/480
Continuous Permissible Power (W) UFS110 - 8000W 2 x UFS110 - 16000W
Electrical
Resistance (Overall) RUFC110/480 - 6.8ohms 2 x RUFC110/480 - 3.4ohms
Data
Continuous Current (Amps) 30.7A 61.4A
Dimensions
Approximate
Height Width Depth Stocked
Model Number Weight
Item
mm inches mm inches mm inches kg lbs
UFS20J S
250 9.8 175 6.9 2.5 5.5
UFS40J S
240V RUFC15J 240 9.5 100 3.9 2.8 6.2 S
RUFC22J 310 12.2 75 3 3.5 7.7 S
RUFC40J 365 14.4 4.3 9.5 S
UFS22 S
100 3.9 175 6.9 2.5 5.5
UFS40 250 9.8 S
UFS110 107 4.2 195 7.7 3.9 8.6 S
480V RUFC15/480 310 12.2 3.5 7.7 S
100 3.9 75 3
RUFC22/480 365 14.4 4.2 9.3 S
RUFC40/480 2 x 365 2 x 14.4 2 x 100 2 x 3.9 2 x 75 2x3 8.7 19.2 S
RUFC110/480 4 x 365 4 x 14.4 4 x 100 4 x 3.9 4 x 75 4x3 17.3 38.1 S
422
F700 VFD Efficiency Values
240VAC 3-Phase Input 480VAC 3-Phase Input
Rated Watts Efficiency Watts Efficiency Rated Watts Efficiency Watts Efficiency
Watts Loss SLD SLD Loss LD LD Watts Loss SLD SLD Loss LD LD
FR-F720-00046-NA 750 70 91% 60 92% FR-F740-00023-NA 750 60 92% 50 93%
FR-F720-00077-NA 1500 110 93% 100 93% FR-F740-00038-NA 1500 80 95% 80 95%
FR-F720-00105-NA 2200 140 94% 130 94% FR-F740-00052-NA 2200 100 95% 90 96%
FR-F720-00167-NA 3700 210 94% 190 95% FR-F740-00083-NA 3700 160 96% 140 96%
FR-F720-00250-NA 5500 300 95% 260 95% FR-F740-00126-NA 5500 190 97% 180 97%
FR-F720-00340-NA 7500 370 95% 340 95% FR-F740-00170-NA 7500 240 97% 220 97%
FR-F720-00490-NA 11000 590 95% 530 95% FR-F740-00250-NA 11000 340 97% 310 97%
FR-F720-00630-NA 15000 660 96% 580 96% FR-F740-00310-NA 15000 390 97% 350 98%
FR-F720-00770-NA 18500 910 95% 810 96% FR-F740-00380-NA 18500 490 97% 440 98%
FR-F720-00930-NA 22000 1050 95% 940 96% FR-F740-00470-NA 22000 580 97% 520 98%
FR-F720-01250-NA 30000 1540 95% 1370 95% FR-F740-00620-NA 30000 810 97% 710 98%
FR-F720-01540-NA 37000 1490 96% 1320 96% FR-F740-00770-NA 37000 1000 97% 930 97%
FR-F720-01870-NA 45000 1680 96% 1490 97% FR-F740-00930-NA 45000 1170 97% 1030 98%
FR-F720-02330-NA 55000 2210 96% 1950 96% FR-F740-01160-NA 55000 1510 97% 1320 98%
FR-F720-03160-NA 75000 2825 96% 2500 96% FR-F740-01800-NA 75000 2700 96% 2250 97%
FR-F720-03800-NA 90000 3165 96% 2800 96% FR-F740-02160-NA 90000 3300 96% 2700 97%
FR-F720-04750-NA 110000 4070 96% 3600 96% FR-F740-02600-NA 110000 3960 96% 3300 97%
- - - - - - FR-F740-03250-NA 132000 4800 96% 3960 97%
- - - - - - FR-F740-03610-NA 160000 5550 97% 4800 97%
- - - - - - FR-F740-04320-NA 185000 6600 96% 5550 97%
- - - - - - FR-F740-04810-NA 220000 7500 97% 6600 97%
- - - - - - FR-F740-05470-NA 250000 8400 97% 7500 97%
- - - - - - FR-F740-06100-NA 280000 9450 97% 8400 97%
- - - - - - FR-F740-06830-NA 315000 10650 97% 9450 97%
- - - - - - FR-F740-07700-NA 355000 12000 97% 10650 97%
- - - - - - FR-F740-08660-NA 400000 13500 97% 12000 97%
- - - - - - FR-F740-09620-NA 450000 15000 97% 13500 97%
- - - - - - FR-F740-10940-NA 500000 16800 97% 15000 97%
- - - - - - FR-F740-12120-NA 560000 18900 97% 16800 97%
General Notes:
4. When using the external heat sink attachment watt loss decreases by 60%.

A700 Series
Mitsubishi Electric’s RSV technology gives you class-leading power, control and flexibility.
• Wide speed range: 200:1 operating range is • Brake Transistor Circuit: Included in all sizes
possible - even when the drive is used ‘open loop’ up to 30 Hp
• PLC feature: A700 programmability provides true • Integral Radio Filter: Limits Radio Noise
intelligence inside the drive - a simple emissions to meet EU Directive - all sizes of drive
solution for complex applications • Speed control: with or without torque limit allows
• Easy gain tuning: Compensates automatically for 200:1 Speed range, driving or overhauling
changes in load inertia to ensure smooth and • Open Loop Torque Control: including torque at
consistent operation zero speed
• Fast response: Up to 300 radians / second speed • UL Listed for single-phase input
response means lightning fast reaction to sudden
load changes
• USB port: Allows simple connection to the new
FR-Configurator Software for quick and easy
commissioning Voltage
• Power down braking: Keeps the motor under
control even if the supply power is lost 240 3/4 – 200 Hp
• Remote I/O capability: All of the drive I/O can be
read or controlled over a network 480 3/4 – 800 Hp
600 1 – 650 Hp
Horsepower
A700 Ratings 240V Class

Output voltage: 3 phase 200-240V at 60Hz - Voltage Tolerance 170-264V at 60Hz
ND (50°C) HD (50°C) LD (50°C) SLD (40°C)
Regenerative
150% OL / 1 min 200% OL / 1 min 120% OL / 1 min 110% OL / 1 min
Frame Cooling Protective Braking Torque Stocked
200% OL / 3 sec 250% OL / 3 sec 150% OL / 3 sec 120% OL / 3 sec Model Number (*6)
Size Method Rating / Max Value Item
Hp (*1) FLA Hp (*1) FLA Hp (*1) FLA Hp (*1) FLA (Permissible Duty)
1/2 3 1/4 1.5 1 4.2 1 4.6 FR-A720-00030-NA A S
Self 150% torque /
1 5 1/2 3 2 6.5 2 7.1 FR-A720-00050-NA B S
Cooling 3% ED
2 8 1 5 3 9.6 3 10.5 FR-A720-00080-NA C S
3 11 2 8 5 15.2 5 16.7 FR-A720-00110-NA C NEMA 1 S
100% torque /
(*2)
5 17.5 3 11 7.5 24 7.5 25 FR-A720-00175-NA C Forced Air 3% ED S
7.5 24 5 17.5 10 31 10 34 FR-A720-00240-NA D Cooling 100% torque / S
10 33 7.5 24 15 45 15 49 FR-A720-00330-NA D 2% ED S
1/2 3 1/4 1.5 1 4.2 1 4.6 FR-A720-00030-N4 A (*5) -
Self 150% torque /
1 5 1/2 3 2 6.5 2 7.1 FR-A720-00050-N4 B (*5) -
Cooling 3% ED
2 8 1 5 3 9.6 3 10.5 FR-A720-00080-N4 C (*5) -
3 11 2 8 5 15.2 5 16.7 FR-A720-00110-N4 C (*5) 100% torque / -
5 17.5 3 11 7.5 24 7.5 25 FR-A720-00175-N4 C (*5) 3% ED -
UL Type
7.5 24 5 17.5 10 31 10 34 FR-A720-00240-N4 D (*5) 1 - Plenum 100% torque / -
10 33 7.5 24 15 45 15 49 FR-A720-00330-N4 D (*5) Rated 2% ED -
15 46 10 33 20 58 20 63 FR-A720-00460-NA E S
20 61 15 46 25 70 25 77 FR-A720-00610-NA F Forced Air 20% torque / S
Cooling continuous (brake
25 76 20 61 30 85 30 93 FR-A720-00760-NA F transistor included) S
30 90 25 76 40 114 40 125 FR-A720-00900-NA F S
40 115 30 90 50 140 50/60 154 FR-A720-01150-NA G S
50 145 40 115 60 170 60 187 FR-A720-01450-NA H 20% torque / S
IP00 (*3)
60 175 50 145 75 212 75 233 FR-A720-01750-NA H continuous S
75 215 60 175 100 288 100/125 316 FR-A720-02150-NA JA S

Output voltage: 3 phase 200-240V at 60Hz - Voltage Tolerance 170-264V at 60Hz - DC Link Choke is included with the VFD
ND (50°C) HD (50°C) LD (50°C) SLD (40°C)
Regenerative
150% OL / 1 min 200% OL / 1 min 120% OL / 1 min 110% OL / 1 min Model Number Frame Cooling Protective Braking Torque
Stocked Item
200% OL / 3 sec 250% OL / 3 sec 150% OL / 3 sec 120% OL / 3 sec (*6) Size Method Rating / Max Value
(Permissible Duty)
Hp FLA Hp FLA Hp FLA Hp FLA
100 288 75 215 125 346 150 380 FR-A720-02880-NA K Forced Air 10% torque / -
IP00 (*3)
125 346 100 288 150 432 200 475 FR-A720-03460-NA K Cooling continuous -
424
Output voltage: 3 phase 380-480V at 60Hz - Voltage Tolerance 323-528V at 60Hz.
ND (50°C) HD (50°C) LD (50°C) SLD (40°C) Regenerative
150% OL / 1 min 200% OL / 1 min 120% OL / 1 min 110% OL / 1 min Braking Torque
Frame Cooling Protective
Model Number (*6) / Max Value Stocked Item
200% OL / 3 sec 250% OL / 3 sec 150% OL / 3 sec 120% OL / 3 sec Size Method Rating
(Permissible
Hp (*1) FLA Hp (*1) FLA Hp (*1) FLA Hp (*1) FLA Duty)
1/2 1.5 1/4 0.8 1 2.1 1 2.3 FR-A740-00015-NA C S

Self
1 2.5 1/2 1.5 2 3.5 2 3.8 FR-A740-00025-NA C S
Cooling
2 4 1 2.5 3 4.8 3 5.2 FR-A740-00040-NA C S
NEMA 1 100% torque /
3 6 2 4 5 7.6 5 8.3 FR-A740-00060-NA C S
(*2) 2% ED
5 9 3 6 7.5 11.5 7.5 12.6 FR-A740-00090-NA C Forced Air S
7.5 12 5 9 10 16 10 17 FR-A740-00120-NA D Cooling S
10 17 7.5 12 15 23 15 25 FR-A740-00170-NA D S
1/2 1.5 1/4 0.8 1 2.1 1 2.3 FR-A740-00015-N4 C (*5) -
Self
1 2.5 1/2 1.5 2 3.5 2 3.8 FR-A740-00025-N4 C (*5) -
Cooling
2 4 1 25 3 4.8 3 5.2 FR-A740-00040-N4 C (*5) -
100% torque /
3 6 2 4 5 7.6 5 8.3 FR-A740-00060-N4 C (*5) -
2% ED
5 9 3 6 7.5 11.5 7.5 12.6 FR-A740-00090-N4 C (*5) -
UL Type 1
7.5 12 5 9 10 16 10 17 FR-A740-00120-N4 D (*5) - Plenum -
Rated
10 17 7.5 12 15 23 15 25 FR-A740-00170-N4 D (*5) -
15 23 10 17 20 29 20 31 FR-A740-00230-NA E S
20% torque /
20 31 15 23 25 35 25 38 FR-A740-00310-NA E Forced Air continuous S
25 38 20 31 30 43 30 47 FR-A740-00380-NA F Cooling (brake transis- S
tor included)
30 44 25 38 40 57 40 62 FR-A740-00440-NA F S
40 57 30 44 50 70 50/60 77 FR-A740-00570-NA G S
50 71 40 57 60 85 60 93 FR-A740-00710-NA H 20% torque / S
IP00 (*4)
60 86 50 71 75 106 75 116 FR-A740-00860-NA H continuous S
75 110 60 86 100 144 100/150 180 FR-A740-01100-NA H S
Notes: See below.

Output voltage: 3 phase 380-480V at 60Hz - Voltage Tolerance 323-528V at 60Hz - DC Link Choke is included with the VFD.
ND (50°C) HD (50°C) LD (50°C) SLD (40°C)
Regenerative
150% OL / 1 min 200% OL / 1 min 120% OL / 1 min 110% OL / 1 min Braking Torque
Frame Cooling Protective
Model Number (*6) / Max Value Stocked Item
200% OL / 3 sec 250% OL / 3 sec 150% OL / 3 sec 120% OL / 3 sec Size Method Rating
(Permissible
Duty)
Hp (*1) FLA Hp (*1) FLA Hp (*1) FLA Hp (*1) FLA
100 144 75 110 150 180 150 216 FR-A740-01440-NA J S
150 180 100 144 150 216 200 260 FR-A740-01800-NA J S
150 216 150 180 200 260 250 325 FR-A740-02160-NA K S
200 260 150 216 250 325 300 361 FR-A740-02600-NA K S
250 325 200 260 300 361 350 432 FR-A740-03250-NA L IP00 (*4) S
300 361 250 325 350 432 400 481 FR-A740-03610-NA L S
350 432 300 361 400 481 450 547 FR-A740-04320-NA M Forced Air 10% torque / S
400 481 350 432 450 547 500 610 FR-A740-04810-NA M Cooling continuous S
450 547 400 481 500 610 550 683 FR-A740-05470-NA M S
500 610 450 547 550 683 650 770 FR-A740-06100-NA N -
550 683 500 610 650 770 700 866 FR-A740-06830-NA N -
650 770 550 683 700 866 800 962 FR-A740-07700-NA P IP00 -
700 866 650 770 800 962 900 1094 FR-A740-08660-NA P -
800 962 700 866 900 1094 1000 1212 FR-A740-09620-NA P -
Notes:
1. Motor ratings shown are intended as guidelines only - based on 4 pole standard inductions motors.
2. UL Type 1 version drives are available - replace “-NA” suffix with “-N4”.
3. Conduit adapter option required for types 01150 - 03460.
4. Conduit adapter option required for types 00570 - 05470.
5. Depth is slightly extended to meet UL Type 1 requirements.
6. For single phase input, derate output current by 40% (Models up to FR-A720-02880-NA and FR-A740-03610-NA)

Output voltage: 3 phase 525-600V at 60Hz - Voltage Tolerance 472-660V at 60Hz
ND (40°C) HD (40°C) LD (40°C) SLD (40°C) (30°C
200% OL / 1 min for 00040 or less) Regenerative
150% OL / 1 min 120% OL / 1 min Braking Torque
250% OL / 3 sec. 110% OL / 1 min Frame Cooling Protective DC Link Stocked
Model Number / Max Value
280% OL / 0.5 Size Method Rating Reactor Item
200% OL / 3 sec. 150% OL / 3 sec. 120% OL / 3 sec. (Permissible
sec. Duty)
HP (*1) FLA HP (*1) FLA HP (*1) FLA HP (*1) FLA
Self cool-
1 1.7 1/2 1.0 1 1/2 2.5 2 2.7 FR-A760-00017-NA -
ing UL Type 1 100% torque /
3 4.0 2 2.7 3 5.6 5 6.1 FR-A760-00040-NA C (*3) 2% ED S
5 6.1 3 4.0 5 8.2 7 1/2 9.0 FR-A760-00061-NA S
10 12 7 1/2 9.0 10 16 15 17 FR-A760-00120-NA D 20% torque / Option S
Forced air continuous
20 22 10 16 25 27 30 32 FR-A760-00220-NA E UL Type 1 S
cooling (brake transistor
30 33 20 24 40 41 40 45 FR-A760-00330-NA F included) S
50 55 40 41 60 62 60 68 FR-A760-00550-NA 20% torque / S
H IP00 (*4)
75 84 60 63 100 99 (*2) 100 108 (*2) FR-A760-00840-NA continuous S
ND (50°C) HD (40°C) LD (50°C)

SLD (40°C)
200% OL / 1 min Regenerative
150% OL / 1 min 120% OL / 1 min Braking Torque
250% OL / 3 sec. 110% OL / 1 min Frame Cooling Protective DC Link Stocked
Model Number / Max Value
Size Method Rating Reactor Item
200% OL / 3 sec. 280% OL / 0.5 sec. 150% OL / 3 sec. 120% OL / 3 sec. (Permissible
HP Duty)
FLA HP (*1) FLA HP (*1) FLA HP (*1) FLA
(*1)
100 104 75 84 125 131 150 144 FR-A760-01040-NA S
125 131 100 104 150 152 150 167 FR-A760-01310-NA J S
150 152 125 131 200 221 250 243 FR-A760-01520-NA S
IP00 (*4)
200 221 150 152 250 255 300 289 FR-A760-02210-NA S
L Forced air 20% torque /
250 255 200 202 300 304 350 336 FR-A760-02550-NA Standard -
cooling continuous
300 304 250 255 400 402 450 442 FR-A760-03040-NA M S
400 402 300 304 500 496 550 545 FR-A760-04020-NA N -
500 496 400 402 600 589 650 647 FR-A760-04960-NA IP00 S
P
650 663 600 589 750 773 850 850 FR-A760-06630-NA -
Notes:
1. Motor ratings shown are intended as guidelines only - based on 4 pole standard induction motors.
2. To utilize these ratings, DC Link reactor is required.
3. These models supplied with an externally connected brake resistor. When the external brake resistor is used, protective rating is open type (NEMA1).
4. Conduit adapter option required for types 00550-03040.
426
A700 Terminal Connection Diagram
A700 Control Terminal Layout
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 10E 10 2 5 4
RL RM RH RT AU STOP MRS RES SD FM AM 1

A700 General Specifications
Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control (selectable from among V/F control, advanced magnetic flux vector control and
Control Method real sensorless vector control) / vector control (when used with option FR-A7AP) (*1)
Frequency 0.015Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V/12 bit); 0.03Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 5V/11 bit, 0 to 20mA/about 11 bit, terminal 1: 0 to
Analog Input
Setting ±10V/12 bit) 0.06Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 1: 0 to ±5V/11 bit)
Frequency Analog Input Within ±0.2% of the max. output frequency (25°C ±10°C)
Voltage / Frequency Base frequency can be set from 0 to 400Hz Constant torque/variable torque pattern or adjustable 5 points V/F can be selected
Characteristics
Starting Torque 200% 0.3Hz (up to frame size C), 150% 0.3Hz (Frame Size D and above) (under real sensorless vector control or vector control)
Acceleration / Deceleration 0 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode, backlash mea-
Time Setting sures acceleration/deceleration can be selected.
Stall Prevention Operation Operation current level can be set (0 to 220% adjustable), whether to use the function or not can be selected
Level
Torque Limit Level Torque limit value can be set (0 to 400% variable)
Frequency Analog Input Terminal 2: 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 4 to 20mA can be selected • Terminal 1:-10 to +10V, -5 to +5V can be selected
Setting
Signal Digital Input Input using the setting dial of the operation panel or parameter unit. Four-digit BCD or 16 bit binary (when used with option FR-A7AX)
Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.
Start Signal
Select any twelve signals using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) from among multi speed selection, remote setting, stop-on-contact,
second function selection, third function selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG operation selection, selection of automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure, flying start, external thermal relay input, inverter operation enable signal (FR-HC/FR-CV connection), FR-HC connection (instantaneous
power failure detection), PU operation/external inter lock signal, external DC injection brake operation start, PID control enable terminal, brake opening
Input Signal completion signal, PU operation/external operation switchover, load pattern selection forward rotation reverse rotation boost, V/F switching, load torque
high-speed frequency, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switchover, pre-excitation, output stop, start self-holding selection, control mode changing,
torque limit selection, start-time tuning start external input, torque bias selection 1, 2 (*1), P/PI control switchover, forward rotation command, reverse
rotation command, inverter reset, PTC thermistor input, PID forward reverse operation switchover, PU-NET operation switchover, NET-external operation
switchover, and command source switchover, conditional position pulse train sign (*1), conditional position droop pulse clear (*1).
Pulse Train Input 100kpps
Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection, polarity reversible operation, automatic
restart after instantaneous power failure operation, commercial power supply-inverter switchover operation, forward/reverse rotation prevention,
remote setting, brake sequence, second function, third function, multi-speed operation, original operation continuation at instantaneous power
Operational Functions failure, stop-on-contact control, load torque high speed frequency control, droop control, regeneration avoidance, slip compensation, operation
mode selection, offline auto tuning function, online auto tuning function, PID control, computer link operation (RS-485), motor end orientation
(*1), machine end orientation (*1), pre-excitation, notch filter, machine analyzer (*1), easy gain tuning, speed feed forward, and torque bias (*1)
Select any signals using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) from among inverter running, up-to-frequency, instantaneous
power failure/undervoltage, overload warning, output frequency (speed) detection, second output frequency (speed) detection, third output
frequency (speed) detection, regenerative brake prealarm, electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU operation mode, inverter operation
ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward rotation reverse rotation output, commercial
power supply-inverter switchover MC1, commercial power supply-inverter switchover MC2, commercial power supply-inverter switchover MC3,
Operating orientation completion (*1), brake opening request, fan fault output, heatsink overheat pre-alarm , inverter running/start command on, deceleration
Status
Output at an instantaneous power failure, PID control activated, during retry, PID output interruption, life alarm, alarm output 1, 2, 3 (power-off signal),
Signals power savings average value update timing, current average monitor, maintenance timer alarm, remote output, forward rotation output (*1),
reverse rotation output (*1), low speed output, torque detection, regenerative status output (*1), start-time tuning completion, in-position
completion (*1), minor failure output and alarm output. Open collector output (5 points), relay output (2 points) and alarm code of the inverter
can be output (4 bit) from the open collector.
Using FR-A7AY, In addition to the above, select any signals using Pr. 313 to Pr. 319 (extension output terminal function selection) from among control circuit
FR-A7AR capacitor life, main circuit capacitor life, cooling fan life, inrush current limit circuit life (only positive logic can be set for extension terminals of the
(optional) FR-A7AR).
Select any signals using Pr. 54 FM terminal function selection (pulse train output) and Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection (analog output) from
among output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, operation speed, motor torque, converter output
Pulse / Analog Output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter, motor excitation current,
reference voltage output, motor load factor, power saving effect, regenerative brake duty, PID set point, PID measured value, motor output, torque
command, torque current command, and torque monitor.
Output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, running speed,motor torque, overload, converter
output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter, motor excitation
Operating current, cumulative energization time, actual operation time, motor load factor, cumulative power, energy saving effect, cumulative saving power,
Status regenerative brake duty, PID set point, PID measured value, PID deviation, inverter I/O terminal monitor, input terminal option monitor (*2), output
Indication
PU (FR-
DU07 / terminal option monitor (*2), option fitting status (*3), terminal assignment status (*3), torque command, torque current command, feed back
FR-PU07 / pulse (*1), motor output
FR-PU04) Alarm Alarm definition is displayed when the protective function is activated, the output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization time right
Definition before the protection function was activated and past 8 alarm definitions are stored.
Interactive Operation guide/trouble shooting with a help function (*3)
Guidance
Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during deceleration, overvoltage during acceleration, overvoltage
during constant speed, overvoltage during deceleration, inverter protection thermal operation, motor protection thermal operation, heatsink
overheat, instantaneous power failure occurrence, undervoltage, input phase failure, motor overload, output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent,
output short circuit, main circuit element overheat, output phase failure, external thermal relay operation, PTC thermistor operation, option alarm,
parameter error, PU disconnection, retry count excess, CPU alarm, operation panel power supply short circuit, 24VDC power output short circuit,
Protective / Warning Function output current detection value excess, inrush current limit circuit alarm, communication alarm (inverter), USB error, opposite rotation deceleration
error, analog input error, fan fault, overcurrent stall prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, regenerative brake prealarm, electronic thermal relay
function prealarm, PU stop, maintenance timer alarm (*2), brake transistor alarm, parameter write error, copy operation error, operation panel
lock, parameter copy alarm, speed limit indication, encoder no-signal (*1), speed deviation large (*1), overspeed (*1), position error large (*1),
encoder phase error (*1)
Environment

Altitude / Vibration Maximum 1000m above sea level, 0.6 G or less (conforms to JIS C 60068-2-6) (*5)
Notes:
1. Available only when the option (FR-A7AP) is mounted
5. 2.9m/s2 or less for the FR-A740-03250 or more.
428
Instruction Manuals
A700 Options
FR-A700 Installation Manual - Contains instructions for
Function / Options installer and parameter list. (Included with VFD, plus CD with IB(NA)0600254
all versions of VFD and option manuals.)
Model No. Stocked Item FR-A700 Basic Manual - Contains wiring details, VFD
IB(NA)0600225
120VAC Control Input FR-A7AC S layout drawings, alarm definitions and parameter list.
Analog I/O FR-A7AN S FR-A700 Applied Manual - Contains wiring details, VFD layout
drawings, alarm definitions and complete parameter list with IB(NA)0600255
Encoder Feedback FR-A7AP S
definitions and setting examples.
Encoder Pulse Dividing Output FR-A7AL S
FR-A700 PLC Programming Manual - Contains
Relay Output FR-A7AR S IB(NA)0600262
Function
complete instruction sets for PLC feature.

12 Bit Digital Input FR-A7AX S
FR-PU07 Manual - Contains complete instruction sets
Digital Output IB(NA)0600240
FR-A7AY S and screen definitions.
Ext. Analog Output Manuals available for download at www.meau.com
BiPolar Analog Output
High Res Analog Input FR-A7AZ -
Building Management Options
Motor Thermistor
CC-Link FR-A7NC S Network Type / Model
(*1,*2) (*1,*2) (*3,*4) (*3,*4)
ControlNET FR-A7NCN S BACnet/IP X - X -
Communication
FR-A7ND S X - X -
Communication
DeviceNet EtherNet/IP
X - X -
Gateway
EtherNet/IP FR-A7NE S Modbus TCP
PROFINET IO X - X -
LonWorks FR-A7NL S
BACnet MS/TP (*5) - X X X
Profibus DP FR-A7NP S
Metasys N2 - X X X
SSCNET III FR-A7NS S Siemens FLN - X - -
Notes:
For additional information, visit www.iccdesigns.com
External Heatsink Attachment 1. Physically mounts within VFD and powered by VFD
Drive Model Model Stocked 3. Communication to multiple VFD’s is possible
A720 A740 A760 Number Item 4. Mounted and powered external to VFD
5. BACnet MS/TP is built in to F700. Gateway required for pre August 2010 production.
00017, 00040,
00080 to 00175 00025 to 00090 FR-A7CN01 S
00061
00240, 00330 00120, 00170 00120 FR-A7CN02 S
00460 00230, 00310 00220 FR-A7CN03 S Conduit Attachments
00610 to 00900 00380, 00440 00330 FR-A7CN04 S Drive Model Length
Weight Stkd.
01150 - FR-A7CN05 S Model Number A720 A740 A760 (in)
(lbs) Item
00570 - FR-A7CN06 S (*1, *2) (*1, *2) (*1, *2) (*5)
01450, 01750 00710 to 01100 00550, 00840 FR-A7CN07 S FR-A7FN05 (*4) 00900 - - 5.9 5 -
01040, 01310, FR-A7FN06 (*4) 01150 00570 - 6.2 5 S
01440 FR-A7CN08 -
01520
01450, 00710 to 00550,
01800 - FR-A7CN09 - FR-A7FN07 (*4) 9 15 S
01750 01100 00840
03160, 03800,
02160, 02600 - FR-A7CN10 - 01440, 01040 to
04750 FR-A7FN-11 (*3) - 24 41 S
01800 01520
02150 - FR-A7CN11 -
02880, 02160,
FR-A7FN-12 (*3) - 24 45 S
03460 02600
03250, 02210,
Software FR-A7FN-13 (*3) -
03610 02550
26 50 S
Model Number Description Stocked Item 04320 to
FR-A7FN-14 (*3) - 03040 26 64 S
FR-CONFIGURATOR Programming and diagnostic software S 05470
Notes:
1. FR-A720-00460 to 00760 & FR-A740-00230 to 00440 are UL Type 1: the conduit adapter is
included as standard.
2. FR-A700 smaller than listed above, the UL Type 1 version (conduit adapter standard) is a
A700 Demonstration Unit special type: Change from suffix -NA to -N4.
3. Mounting hardware included for standard DC chokes which ship with VFD. Kits are powder
Model Stocked coated similar to VFD charcoal gray.
Description 4. Kits are coated zinc clear.
Number Item
5. Width and depth of kit match the asscociated VFD
VFD-A700- Includes A720 1/2HP, pre-wired digital input switches, LED out-
S
DEMO puts, two potentiometers, analog meter and encoder option
VFD-MOTOR- Includes 1/2HP motor and encoder with quick connections to
S
ENC-DEMO VFD-A700-DEMO

Factory Supplied DC Link Chokes
Standard With VFD Dimensions inches (mm)
Approx Weight lb (kg)
Drive Model DC Link Model No. mH Amps Height Width Depth
FR-A740-01440-NA FR-HEL-H110K 0.246 233 13.4 (340) 5.9 (150) 7.7 (195) 22 (48)
FR-A740-01880-NA FR-HEL-H132K 0.204 281 15.9 (405) 6.9 (175) 7.9 (200) 26 (57)
FR-A740-02160-NA FR-HEL-H160K 0.171 335 15.9 (405) 6.9 (175) 8 (205) 28 (62)
FR-A740-02600-NA FR-HEL-H185K 0.148 389 15.9 (405) 6.9 (175) 9.4 (240) 29 (64)
FR-A740-03250-NA FR-HEL-H220K 0.124 462 15.9 (405) 6.9 (175) 9.4 (240) 30 (66)
FR-A740-03610-NA FR-HEL-H250K 0.109 524 17.3 (440) 7.5 (190) 9.8 (250) 35 (77)
FR-A740-04320-NA FR-HEL-H280K 0.098 585 17.3 (440) 7.5 (190) 10 (255) 38 (84)
FR-A740-04810-NA FR-HEL-H315K 0.087 658 19.5 (495) 8.3 (210) 9.8 (250) 42 (92)
FR-A740-05470-NA FR-HEL-H355K 0.077 742 19.5 (495) 8.3 (210) 9.8 (250) 46 (101)
FR-A740-06100-NA FR-HEL-H400K 0.069 836 19.7 (500) 8.7 (220) 9.8 (250) 50 (110)
FR-A740-06830-NA FR-HEL-H450K 0.061 940 19.7 (500) 8.7 (220) 10.6 (270) 57 (125)
FR-A740-07700-NA FR-HEL-H500K 0.055 1045 17.8 (455) 8.5 (215) 13.6 (345) 67 (147)
FR-A740-08660-NA FR-HEL-H560K 0.049 1170 18.1 (460) 8.5 (215) 14.2 (360) 85 (187)
FR-A740-09620-NA FR-HEL-H630K 0.044 1317 18.1 (460) 8.5 (215) 14.2 (360) 95 (209)
A700 Frame Size

Drive Height x Width x Depth
Frame Weight Without Reactor
Dimensions inches (mm)
Size lbs (kg)
Height Width Depth
A 10.2 (260) 4.3 (110) 4.3 (110) 4.2 (1.9)
B 10.2 (260) 4.3 (110) 4.9 (125) 5 (2.3)
C 10.2 (260) 5.9 (150) 5.5 (140) 9.3 (4.2)
D 10.2 (260) 8.7 (220) 6.7 (170) 17.7 (8)
E 11.8 (300) 8.7 (220) 7.5 (190) 19.4 (8.8)
F 15.8 (400) 9.8 (250) 7.5 (190) 32.6 (14.8)
G 21.7 (550) 12.8 (325) 7.7 (195) 77.1 (35)
H 21.7 (550) 17.1 (435) 9.8 (250) 134.4 (61)
JA 27.6 (700) 18.3 (465) 9.8 (250) 134.4 (61)
J 24.4 (620) 18.3 (465) 11.8 (300) 176.2 (80)
K 29.1 (740) 18.3 (465) 14.2 (360) 244.5 (111)
L 39.8 (1010) 19.6 (498) 15 (380) 378.9 (172)
M 39.8 (1010) 26.8 (680) 15 (380) 385 (175)
N 52.4 (1330) 31.1 (790) 17.3 (440) 572 (260)
P 62.2 (1580) 39.2 (995) 17.3 (440) 814 (370)
Parameter Units / Parameter Copy Units

Parameter units are used for operator control, reading and writing parameters, and
drive monitoring. Parameter Copy Units also read the drive parameter settings and
copy them into non-volatile memory, and can write them into other drives.
FR-DU07 Control Panel for A700 S
LCD Multi-lingual Parameter Copy Unit (English, French, Spanish,
German, Italian, Swedish, Finnish, Japanese) for operator control,
FR-PU07 S
parameter read/write and monitoring. Stores settings in non-volatile
memory. Built-in parameter copy capability. (F/A700 based)
FR-ADP FR-DU07 panel mounting adapter S
LCD Multi-lingual Parameter Copy Unit (English, French, Spanish,
FR-PU04 German, Italian, Swedish, Finnish, Japanese) for operator control, S
parameter read/write and monitoring
SC-FRPC Serial communication cable S
FR-PU07BB-L Battery powered PU07 S
FR-RJ45-TR Terminating resistor For FR-RJ45-HUB -
430
A700 Dynamic Braking
All Mitsubishi Electric VFD’s have some inherent braking capability. During controlled deceleration, motor regenerative losses are
series across the DC bus.
Motor regeneration causes the DC bus voltage to increase, and when the voltage exceeds a specified threshold, the transistor turns on to
pass current through the resistor. Motor kinetic energy is converted to heat energy. VFD overcurrent and overvoltage protective circuits are
active at all times, and will fault-trip the VFD if the brake size is inadequate.
%ED = Braking time / total time for complete operating cycle x 100

%ED = 3 / (5 + 60 + 3 + 12) x 100 = 3.6%

Torque (kg.m) = 974 x Power (kW) / Speed (rpm).

Resistor Kit Model Weight kg Resistance
Number (lbs) (Ohms) A720 % ED
Power (W)
FR-ABR-0.4K 0.2 (0.5) 200 60 1/2 00030 10% S
FR-ABR-0.75K 0.4 (0.9) 100 80 1 00050 10% S
00080 &
FR-ABR-2.2K 0.5 (1.1) 60 120 2 and 3 10% S
00110
FR-ABR-3.7K 0.8 (1.8) 40 155 5 00175 10% S
FR-ABR-5.5K 1.3 (2.9) 25 185 7 1/2 00240 10% S
FR-ABR-7.5K 2.2 (4.9) 20 340 10 00330 10% S
FR-ABR-11K 3.4 (7.5) 13 560 15 00460 6% S
FR-ABR-15K
2.4 (5.3) x 2 9 (18 / 2) 805 20 00610 6% S
(2 resistors in parallel)
FR-ABR-22K 25 00760 6%
3.3 (6.6) x 2 6.5 (13 / 2) 1120 S
(2 resistors in parallel) 30 00900 6%

Resistor Kit Model Resistance
Weight Permissible Motor (Hp) Stocked Item
Number (Ohms) A740 % ED
Power (W)
FR-ABR-H0.4K 0.2 (0.5) 1200 45 1/2 00015 10% S
FR-ABR-H0.75K 0.2 (0.5) 700 75 1 00025 10% S
FR-ABR-H1.5K 0.4 (0.9) 350 115 2 00040 10% S
FR-ABR-H2.2K 0.5 (1.1) 250 120 3 00060 10% S
FR-ABR-H3.7K 0.8 (1.8) 150 155 5 00090 10% S
FR-ABR-H5.5K 1.3 (2.9) 110 185 7 1/2 00120 10% S
FR-ABR-H7.5K 2.2 (4.9) 75 340 10 00170 10% S
FR-ABR-H11K 3.4 (7.5) 52 530 15 00230 6% S
FR-ABR-H15K
2.4 (5.3) x 2 36 (18 x 2) 870 20 00310 6% S
(2 resistors in series)
FR-ABR-22K 25 00380 6%
3.3 (6.6) x 2 26 (52 / 2) 1060 S
(2 resistors in parallel) 30 00440 6%
Instruction Manuals
Model Model Number Stocked Item
FR-ABR(H) IB(NA)66891 -
FR-BU2 IB(NA)0600292 -
FR-BU2-C IB(NA)0600379 -
UFS NT348E05 -

Dynamic Braking Options
Select the brake unit according to the motor capacity.
To obtain braking torque greater than 200%, use a larger inverter capacity.
Up to 10 FR-BU2 brake units can be connected in parallel for increased braking capacity.
%ED or Time at Short-Time Rating When Braking Torque is 100%

Brake Unit Model Number
Item Model Number Item 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75
FR-BU2-1.5K S BU-1500-TEIKOUKI - 30 s - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FR-BU2-3.7K S BU-3700-TEIKOUKI - - 30 s - - - - - - - - - - - -
FR-BU2-7.5K S BU-7.5K-TEIKOUKI - - - 30 s 30 s - - - - - - - - - -
230V
FR-BU2-15K S FR-BR-15K-UL S - - - - 80% 40% 15% 10% - - - - - -
FR-BU2-30K S FR-BR-30K-UL S - - - - - - 65% 30% 25% 15% 10% - - -
FR-BU2-55K - FR-BR-55K-UL - - - - - - - - - 90% 60% 30% 20% 15% 10%
FR-BU2-H7.5K S 2 x BU-3700-TEIKOUKI - - - 30 s 30 s - - - - - - - - - -
FR-BU2-H15K S FR-BR-H15K-UL S - - - - 80% 40% 15% 10% - - - - - -
460V
FR-BU2-H30K S FR-BR-H30K-UL S - - - - - - 65% 30% 25% 15% 10% - - -
FR-BR-C3.7K - - - 30% 10% - - - - - - - - - -
FR-BU2-C22K S FR-BR-C7.5K - - - - 40% 20% 10% - - - - - - - -
600V FR-BR-C22K - - - - - - 85% 40% 20% 15% 10% - - - -
2 x FR-BU2-C22K S 2 x FR-BR-C22K - - - - - - - - - - - - 15% - -
3 x FR-BU2-C22K S 3 x FR-BR-C22K - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 15%

Item Model Number Item 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800
FR-BU2-H75K S MT-BR5-H75K - 10% 5% - - - - - - - - - - -
2 x FR-BU2-H75K S 2 x MT-BR5-H75K - 40% 25% 15% 10% 5% - - - - - - - -
3 x FR-BU2-H75K S 3 x MT-BR5-H75K - 90% 60% 40% 20% 14% 10% 5% 5% - - - - -
4 x FR-BU2-H75K S 4 x MT-BR5-H75K - - 95% 70% 40% 25% 15% 13% 10% 5% 5% - - -
460V
5 x FR-BU2-H75K S 5 x MT-BR5-H75K - - - - 60% 40% 25% 20% 15% 12% 10% 5% 5% -
Braking Torque (%) at Short-Time Rating of 30 Sec. for 5HP and Less
Braking Torque (%) at Short-Time Rating of 15 Sec. for 7.5HP and Larger
Item Model Number Item 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75
FR-BU2-1.5K S BU-1500-TEIKOUKI - 100% 50% - - - - - - - - - - - -
FR-BU2-3.7K S BU-3700-TEIKOUKI - - 100% 50% 50% - - - - - - - - - -
FR-BU2-7.5K S BU-7.5K-TEIKOUKI - - - 100% 100% - - - - - - - - - -
230V
FR-BU2-15K S FR-BR-15K-UL S - - - - 280% 200% 120% 100% 80% 70% - - - -
FR-BU2-30K S FR-BR-30K-UL S - - - - - - 260% 180% 160% 130% 100% 80% 70% -
FR-BU2-55K - FR-BR-55K-UL - - - - - - - - - 300% 250% 180% 150% 120% 100%
FR-BU2-H15K S FR-BR-H15K-UL S - - - - 280% 200% 120% 100% 80% 70% - - - -
460V FR-BU2-H30K S FR-BR-H30K-UL S - - - - - - 260% 180% 160% 130% 100% 80% 70% -
FR-BR-C3.7K - - - 170% 100% - - - - - - - - - -
FR-BU2-C22K S FR-BR-C7.5K - - - 340% 200% 130% 100% - - - - - - - -
600V FR-BR-C22K - - - - - - 300% 200% 145% 120% 100% - - - -
2 x FR-BU2-C22K S 2 x FR-BR-C22K - - - - - - - - - - - - 120% - -
3 x FR-BU2-C22K S 3 x FR-BR-C22K - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 120%
Note: FR-BU2-C22K is not UL or cUL listed for use with the FR-BR-C resistor. If UL or cUL is required, use the ASC-RES-C22K in place of FR-BR-C22K.
Stocked Brake Resistor Model Stocked Motor Capacity (HP)

Item Number Item 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800
FR-BU2-H75K S MT-BR5-H75K - 100% 80% 65% 50% 40% 30% 28% 26% 22% 20% - - -
2 x FR-BU2-H75K - 2 x MT-BR5-H75K - 200% 165% 135% 100% 80% 65% 55% 53% 44% 40% 33% 28% 25%
3 x FR-BU2-H75K - 3 x MT-BR5-H75K - 300% 250% 200% 150% 120% 100% 85% 80% 65% 60% 50% 43% 37%
4 x FR-BU2-H75K - 4 x MT-BR5-H75K - - 300% 270% 200% 160% 135% 115% 105% 85% 80% 65% 55% 50%
460V
5 x FR-BU2-H75K - 5 x MT-BR5-H75K - - - 300% 250% 200% 170% 140% 130% 110% 100% 83% 70% 62%
6 x FR-BU2-H75K - 6 x MT-BR5-H75K - - - - 300% 240% 200% 170% 160% 130% 120% 100% 85% 75%
7 x FR-BU2-H75K - 7 x MT-BR5-H75K - - - - - 280% 235% 200% 185% 155% 140% 115% 100% 85%
8 x FR-BU2-H75K - 8 x MT-BR5-H75K - - - - - - 270% 230% 210% 175% 160% 130% 110% 100%
432
Dynamic Braking Unit & Resistor Specifications
Continuous
Weight Resistance
Brake Unit Model Number Stocked Item Brake Resistor Model Number Stocked Item Rated (Watts) Permissible
kg / lbs (Ohms)
Power (Watts)
FR-BU2-1.5K S BU-1500-TEIKOUKI - n/a 50 300 100
FR-BU2-3.7K S BU-3700-TEIKOUKI - n/a 30 900 300
FR-BU2-7.5K S BU-7.5K-TEIKOUKI - n/a 20 1800 600
230V
FR-BU2-15K S FR-BR-15K-UL S 15 / 33 8 4000 990
FR-BU2-30K S FR-BR-30K-UL S 30 / 66 4 8000 1990
FR-BU2-55K - FR-BR-55K-UL - 70 / 154 2 16000 3910
FR-BU2-H7.5K S 2 x BU-3700-TEIKOUKI - n/a 60 1800 600
460V FR-BU2-H30K S FR-BR-H30K-UL S 30 / 66 16 8000 1990
FR-BU2-H75K S MT-BR5-H75K - 70 / 154 6.5 30000 7500
A700 Dynamic Braking Units and Resistors - UFS Series

• A more economical solution to regenerative braking applications.
• Internal Form-C relay
• Adjustable DC bus brake turn-on voltage
• Configurable master / slave brake configuration. Allows connection of up to 5 brake units (1 master / 4 slaves)
240V Series
Motor Capacity
Braking Hp 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75
Torque kW 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
100% for Brake Unit UFS22J UFS40J 2 x UFS40J
15 secs. Brake Resistor RUFC15J RUFC22J RUFC40J 2 x RUFC40J
Continuous Permissible Power (W) UFS22J - 1500W UFS40J - 2000W 2ea x UFS40J - 4000W
Electrical
Resistance (Overall) RUFC15J - 24ohms RUFC22J - 12ohms RUFC40J - 7.5ohms 2ea x RUFC40J - 3.75ohms
Data
Continuous Current (Amps) 7A 10A 14.6A 29.2A
460V Series
Motor Capacity
Braking Hp 7.5 10 15 25 30 40 50 60 75
Torque kW 5.5 7.5 11 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
100% for Brake Unit UFS22 UFS40
15 secs. Brake Resistor RUFC15/480 RUFC22/480 RUFC40/480
Continuous Permissible Power (W) UFS22 - 2000W UFS40 - 4000W
Electrical
Resistance (Overall) RUFC15/480 - 44ohms RUFC22/480 - 27ohms RUFC40/480 - 15ohms
Data
Continuous Current (Amps) 6A 7.7A 14.6A
Motor Capacity
Braking Hp 100 125 150 175 215 300 375
Torque kW 75 90 110 132 160 220 280
100% for Brake Unit UFS110 2 X UFS110
15 secs. Brake Resistor RUFC110/480 2 X RUFC110/480
Continuous Permissible Power (W) UFS110 - 8000W 2 x UFS110 - 16000W
Electrical
Resistance (Overall) RUFC110/480 - 6.8ohms 2 x RUFC110/480 - 3.4ohms
Data
Continuous Current (Amps) 30.7A 61.4A
Dimensions
Height Width Depth Approximate Weight Stocked
Model Number
mm inches mm inches mm inches kg lbs Item
UFS20J S
250 9.8 175 6.9 2.5 5.5
UFS40J S
240V RUFC15J 240 9.5 100 3.9 2.8 6.2 S
RUFC22J 310 12.2 75 3 3.5 7.7 S
RUFC40J 365 14.4 4.3 9.5 S
UFS22 S
100 3.9 175 6.9 2.5 5.5
UFS40 250 9.8 S
UFS110 107 4.2 195 7.7 3.9 8.6 S
480V RUFC15/480 310 12.2 3.5 7.7 S
100 3.9 75 3
RUFC22/480 365 14.4 4.2 9.3 S
RUFC40/480 2 x 365 2 x 14.4 2 x 100 2 x 3.9 2 x 75 2x3 8.7 19.2 S
RUFC110/480 4 x 365 4 x 14.4 4 x 100 4 x 3.9 4 x 75 4x3 17.3 38.1 S

A700 VFD Efficiency Values • ND Rating Based
240VAC 3-Phase Input 480VAC 3-Phase Input 600VAC 3-Phase Input
Factory Factory
Supplied Supplied
Rated Watts Rated Watts Rated Watts
Model Number Efficiency Model Number Efficiency DC Choke Model Number Efficiency DC Choke
Watts Loss Watts Loss Watts Loss
Watts Watts
Loss Loss
FR-A720-00030-NA 400 50 88% FR-A740-00015-NA 400 50 88% - FR-A760-00017-NA 750 40 95% -
FR-A720-00610-NA 15000 670 96% FR-A740-00310-NA 15000 400 97% - FR-A760-01040-NA 75000 1500 98% 100
FR-A720-02880-NA 75000 2530 97% FR-A740-01440-NA 75000 1900 97% 130 FR-A760-04960-NA 355000 6000 98% 340
FR-A720-03460-NA 90000 3110 97% FR-A740-01800-NA 90000 2400 97% 130 FR-A760-06630-NA 400000 7500 98% 390
- - - - FR-A740-02160-NA 110000 2500 98% 140 - - - - -
- - - - FR-A740-02600-NA 132000 3000 98% 140 - - - - -
- - - - FR-A740-03250-NA 160000 4000 98% 170 - - - - -
- - - - FR-A740-03160-NA 185000 4200 98% 230 - - - - -
- - - - FR-A740-04320-NA 220000 5000 98% 240 - - - - -
- - - - FR-A740-04810-NA 250000 5500 98% 270 - - - - -
- - - - FR-A740-05470-NA 280000 6500 98% 300 - - - - -
- - - - FR-A740-06100-NA 315000 7000 98% 360 - - - - -
- - - - FR-A740-06830-NA 355000 8000 98% 360 - - - - -
- - - - FR-A740-07700-NA 400000 9000 98% 450 - - - - -
- - - - FR-A740-08660-NA 450000 10500 98% 450 - - - - -
- - - - FR-A740-09620-NA 500000 11500 98% 470 - - - - -
General Notes:
2. The amount of heat generated in the above table is the amount of heat generated when the inverter is operated at it’s rated current.
4. When using the external heat sink attachment watt loss decreases by 60%.
434
A701 Series
Vector VFD with built-in Line Regeneration.
• Ideal for applications with continuous • 5 programmable digital outputs

overhauling or large inertia loads (sink/source selectable)
• Capacity up to 75HP for 240V and 480V • 2 form C relays
applications • 3 analog inputs
• Braking Torque • Terminal 2 (0~5VDC, 0~10VDC,
- 100% continuous 0~20mA selectable)
- 150% for up to 60 sec. • Terminal 1 (0 to +/-5VDC or
• Vector mode with encoder allows Speed, 0 to ±10VDC selectable)
Torque and Position control • Terminal 4 (0~5VDC, 0~10VDC,
• Real Sensorless mode allows Speed and 4~20mA selectable)
Torque control without encoder • 2 analog outputs (0~10VDC and
• Starting torque of 150% at 0.3Hz pulse train out)
• 2 serial ports (RS485) and 1 USB port • Modbus RTU and Mitsubishi VFD
serial protocol communications
• 3 option ports for plug-in network or
function expansion options • UL and cUL listed. CE marked
(480V version only)
• 12 programmable digital inputs
(sink/source selectable)
FR-A721 – 5.5K Voltage
240V 7.5 – 75 Hp
Symbol Voltage Class Inverter capacity
A721 Three phase 240V class in kilowatts 480V 7.5 – 75 Hp
A741 Three phase 480V class 5.5K = 5.5KW
0.746kW = 1HP Horsepower
A701 Ratings
Note: There is no PLC function as included in the standard A700
Rating (CT & VT) IP00 Open Chassis Dimensions in inches (mm)
Weight Lbs (kg) Stocked Item
HP Rated Amps Model Number Height Width Depth
7 1/2 24 FR-A721-5.5K 18.5 (470) 9.9 (250) 10.7 (270) 44.1 (20) -
10 33 FR-A721-7.5K 18.5 (470) 9.9 (250) 10.7 (270) 48.5 (22) -
15 46 FR-A721-11K 21.6 (540) 11.9 (300) 11.6 (294) 72.7 (33) -
20 61 FR-A721-15K 21.6 (540) 11.9 (300) 11.6 (294) 77.1 (35) -
25 76 FR-A721-18.5K 23.7 (600) 15.4 (390) 12.6 (320) 110.2 (50) -
30 90 FR-A721-22K 23.7 (600) 15.4 (390) 12.6 (320) 114.6 (52) -
40 115 FR-A721-30K 27.6 (700) 17.8 (450) 13.4 (340) 152.0 (69) -
50 145 FR-A721-37K 27.6 (700) 18.5 (470) 14.5 (368) 191.7 (87) -
60 175 FR-A721-45K 27.6 (700) 18.5 (470) 14.5 (368) 198.3 (90) -
75 215 FR-A721-55K 35.5 (900) 23.7 (600) 16.0 (405) 264.4 (120) -
7 1/2 12 FR-A741-5.5K 18.5 (470) 9.9 (250) 10.7 (270) 55.1 (25) -
10 17 FR-A741-7.5K 18.5 (470) 9.9 (250) 10.7 (270) 57.3 (26) -
15 23 FR-A741-11K 21.6 (540) 11.9 (300) 11.6 (294) 81.5 (37) -
20 31 FR-A741-15K 21.6 (540) 11.9 (300) 11.6 (294) 88.1 (40) -
25 38 FR-A741-18.5K 23.7 (600) 14.2 (360) 12.6 (320) 105.8 (48) -
30 44 FR-A741-22K 23.7 (600) 14.2 (360) 12.6 (320) 108.0 (49) -
40 57 FR-A741-30K 27.6 (700) 17.8 (450) 13.4 (340) 143.2 (65) -
50 71 FR-A741-37K 27.6 (700) 18.5 (470) 14.5 (368) 176.3 (80) -
60 86 FR-A741-45K 27.6 (700) 18.5 (470) 14.5 (368) 182.9 (83) -
75 110 FR-A741-55K 35.5 (900) 23.7 (600) 16.0 (405) 253.3 (115) -

A701 General Specifications
Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control (selectable from among V/F control, advanced magnetic flux vector control and
Control Method real sensorless vector control) / vector control (*1)
Output Frequency Range 0.2 to 400Hz (The maximum frequency is 120Hz under real sensorless vector control and vector control.) (*1)
Frequency 0.015Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V/12bit); 0.03Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 5V/11bit, 0 to 20mA/about 11bit, terminal 1: 0 to ±10V/12bit)
Analog Input
Setting 0.06Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 1: 0 to ±5V/11bit)
Frequency Analog Input Within ±0.2% of the max. output frequency (25°C ±10°C)
Voltage / Frequency Base frequency can be set from 0 to 400Hz Constant torque/variable torque pattern or adjustable 5 points V/F can be selected
Characteristics
Starting Torque 150% 0.3Hz (under real sensorless vector control or vector control) (*1)
Acceleration / Deceleration 0 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode, backlash
Time Setting measures acceleration/deceleration can be selected.
Stall Prevention Operation Operation current level can be set (0 to 220% adjustable), whether to use the function or not can be selected
Level
Torque Limit Level Torque limit value can be set (0 to 400% variable)
Frequency Analog Input Terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 4 to 20mA (0 to 20mA) can be selected • Terminal 1: -10 to +10V, -5 to +5V can be selected
Setting
Signal Digital Input Input using the setting dial of the operation panel or parameter unit; Four-digit BCD or 16 bit binary (when used with option FR-A7AX)
You can select any twelve signals using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) from among multi speed selection, remote setting, stop-
on-contact, second function selection, third function selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG operation selection, selection of automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure, flying start, external thermal relay input, PU operation/external inter lock signal , external DC injection brake operation start, PID
control enable terminal, brake opening completion signal, PU operation/external operation switchover, load pattern selection forward rotation reverse rotation
Input Signal boost, V/F switching, load torque high-speed frequency, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switchover, pre-excitation, output stop, start self-holding
selection, control mode changing, torque limit selection, start-time tuning start external input, torque bias selection 1, 2 (*1), P/PI control switchover, forward
rotation command, reverse rotation command, inverter reset, PTC thermistor input, PID forward reverse operation switchover, PU-NET operation switchover,
NET-external operation switchover, and command source switchover, conditional position pulse train sign (*1), conditional position droop pulse clear (*1),
magnetic flux decay output shutoff.
Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection, polarity reversible operation, automatic
restart after instantaneous power failure operation, electronic bypass operation, forward/reverse rotation prevention, remote setting, brake sequence,
second function, third function, multi-speed operation, original operation continuation at instantaneous power failure, stop-on-contact control,
Operational Functions load torque high speed frequency control, droop control, regeneration avoidance, slip compensation, operation mode selection, offline auto tuning
function, online auto tuning function, PID control, computer link operation (RS-485), motor end orientation (*1), pre-excitation, notch filter, easy gain
tuning, speed feed forward, and torque bias (*1)
You can select any signals using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) from among inverter running, up-to-frequency, instantaneous
power failure/undervoltage, overload warning, output frequency (speed) detection, second output frequency (speed) detection, third output frequency
(speed) detection, electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU operation mode, inverter operation ready, output current detection, zero current
detection, PID lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward rotation reverse rotation output, electronic bypass MC1, electronic bypass MC2, electronic
Operating bypass MC3, orientation complete (*1), brake opening request, fan fault output, heatsink overheat pre-alarm , inverter running/start command on,
Status deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, PID control activated, during retry, PID output interruption, life alarm, fault output 1, 2, 3 (power-off
signal), power savings average value update timing, current average monitor, maintenance timer alarm, remote output, forward rotation output (*1),
Output reverse rotation output (*1), low speed output, torque detection, regenerative status output (*1), start-time tuning completion, in-position completion
Signals (*1), alarm output and fault output. Open collector output (5 points), relay output (2 points) and alarm code of the inverter can be output (4 bit) from
the open collector.
When used
with the In addition to the above, you can select any signals using Pr. 313 to Pr. 319 (extension output terminal function selection) from among control circuit
FR-A7AY, capacitor life, main circuit capacitor life, cooling fan life, inrush current limit circuit life. (only positive logic can be set for extension terminals of the
FR-A7AR FR-A7AR)
(optional)
Select any signals using Pr. 54 FM terminal function selection (pulse train output) and Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection (analog output)
from among output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, operation speed, motor torque, converter
Pulse / Analog Output output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter, motor excitation current,
reference voltage output, motor load factor, power saving effect, PID set point, PID measured value, motor output, torque command, torque current
command, and torque monitor.
Output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, running speed, motor torque, overload, converter output
voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter, motor excitation current,
Operating cumulative energization time, actual operation time, motor load factor, cumulative power, energy saving effect, cumulative saving power, PID set
Status
Indication
PU (FR- point, PID measured value, PID deviation, inverter I/O terminal monitor, input terminal option monitor (*2), output terminal option monitor (*2),
DU07 / option fitting status (*3), terminal assignment status (*3), torque command, torque current command, feed back pulse (*1),motor output
FR-PU07 /
FR-PU04) Fault Fault definition is displayed during the fault occurs, the output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization time right before the
Definition fault occurs and past 8 fault definitions are stored.
Interactive Operation guide/trouble shooting with a help function (*3)
Guidance
Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during deceleration, overvoltage during acceleration, overvoltage
during constant speed, overvoltage during deceleration, inverter protection thermal operation, motor protection thermal operation, heatsink overheat,
instantaneous power failure occurrence, undervoltage, input phase failure, motor overload, output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent, output
short circuit, main circuit element overheat, output phase failure, external thermal relay operation (*5), PTC thermistor operation (*5), option alarm,
parameter error, PU disconnection, retry count excess (*5), CPU alarm, operation panel power supply short circuit, 24VDC power output short
Protective / Warning Function circuit, output current detection value excess (*5), inrush current limit circuit alarm, communication alarm (inverter), opposite rotation deceleration
error*5, analog input error, fan fault, overcurrent stall prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, electronic thermal relay function prealarm, PU stop,
maintenance timer alarm (*2) (*5), parameter write error, copy operation error, operation panel lock, parameter copy alarm, speed limit indication,
signal loss detection (*1) (*5), speed deviation large (*1) (*5), overspeed (*1) (*5), excessive position error (*1) (*5), brake sequence error (*5),
encoder phase error (*1) (*5), regeneration converter overcurrent, regeneration converter circuit fault, regeneration converter transistor protection
thermal
Environment

Altitude / Vibration Maximum 1000m above sea level, 5.9m/s2 or less
Notes:
1. Available only when the option (FR-A7AP) is mounted
436
A701 Terminal Connection Diagram
Sink logic
Main circuit terminal P/+ N/-
Control circuit terminal *6 *6
MCCB MC
R/L1 Inrush current
Three-phase AC S/L2 limit circuit
power supply U Motor
T/L3
V
IM
R1/L11 W
Jumper
*1 S1/L21 Earth (Ground)
*1. To supply power to the
control circuit separately, Main circuit *6. Do not connect any options to P/+ and
remove the jumper across Earth N/-.
R1/L11 and S1/L21. (Ground) Control circuit
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed) C1 Relay output
Forward STF
Terminal functions vary with rotation
the input terminal B1 Terminal functions
start Relay output 1 vary with the output
assignment (Pr. 178 to Pr. 189) Reverse STR
rotation (Fault output) terminal assignment
A1
start STOP (Pr. 195, Pr. 196)
Start self-
holding selection C2
RH
High speed
B2
Multi-speed Middle RM Relay output 2
selection speed A2
RL
*2. JOG terminal can be used
Low speed
as pulse train input terminal. Open collector output
Use Pr. 291 to select JOG *2 RUN
JOG/pulse. Jog mode Running
Terminal functions
RT SU
Second function selection Up to frequency vary with the output
terminal assignment
*3. AU terminal can be MRS IPF Instantaneous (Pr. 190 to Pr. 194)
Output stop power failure
used as PTC input
terminal. RES *3 OL
Reset Overload
AU
Terminal 4 input selection AU FU
(Current input selection) Frequency detection
SOURCE
Selection of automatic restart CS PTC SE Open collector output common

SINK
after instantaneous
power failure SD Sink/source common
Contact input common 24V *7. It is not necessary when *8. FM terminal can be
calibrating the indicator used for pulse train
24VDC power supply PC output of open
from the operation panel.
PU collector output
(Common for external power supply transistor) using Pr.291.
*4 Voltage/current connector
input switch *9. Because the FR Configurator has not
worked with the FR-A701 series, a USB
Frequency setting signal (Analog) 10E(+10V) 4 2 connector can not be used.
ON USB +
10(+5V) OFF - Indicator
3 connector
Frequency setting FM (Frequency meter, etc.)
2 0 to 5VDC (Initial value) *8
potentiometer 2 0 to 10VDC selected Calibration
*9 Moving-coil type
1/2W1kΩ 0 to 20mADC
*4 SD resistor *7
5 1mA full-scale
*5 1
(Analog common)
*4. Terminal input specifications AM (+) Analog signal output
can be changed by analog
5 (0 to 10VDC)
input specifications 0 to ±10VDC (Initial value) (-)
switchover (Pr. 73, Pr. 267). Auxiliary (+) 1
Set the voltage/current input input (-) 0 to ±5VDC selected *4
switch in the OFF position to TXD+ RS-485 terminals
Terminal 4 to 20mADC (Initial value)
select voltage input (0 to 5V/0
4 input (+) 4 0 to 5VDC selected *4 TXD- Data transmission
to10V) and ON to select
current input (4 to 20mA).
(Current (-) 0 to 10VDC
input) RXD+
Connector RXD- Data reception
for plug-in option
Option connector 1
connection SG
Option connector 2 GND
*5. It is recommended to use 2W1kΩ
when the frequency setting signal Option connector 3
Terminating
resistor VCC 5V (Permissible load
current 100mA)
A701 Control Terminal Layout

A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 10E 10 2 5 4
RL RM RH RT AU STOP MRS RES SD FM AM 1

A701 Options
Function/Options Instruction Manuals
Model No. Stocked Item Description Model Number

FR-A701 Applied Manual - Contains wiring details, VFD layout
120VAC Control Input FR-A7AC S
drawings, alarm definitions and complete parameter list with IB(NA)0600337
Analog I/O FR-A7AN S definitions and setting examples
Encoder Feedback FR-A7AP S FR-A701 Basic Manual - Contains wiring details, VFD layout
IB(NA)0600331
Encoder Pulse Dividing Output FR-A7AL S drawings, alarm definitions and parameter list
Relay Output FR-A7AR S FR-PU07 - Contains complete instruction sets and screen
Function
IB(NA)0600240
12 Bit Digital Input FR-A7AX S definitions
Digital Output Manuals available for download at www.meau.com
FR-A7AY S
Ext. Analog Output
BiPolar Analog Output Building Management Options
High Res Analog Input FR-A7AZ -
Motor Thermistor Network Type / Model
(*2,*3,*4) (*2,*3,*4) (*5,*6) (*5,*6)
CC-Link FR-A7NC S BACnet/IP X - X -
X - X -
Communication
ControlNET (*1) FR-A7NCN S EtherNet/IP
Communication
X - X -
Gateway
Modbus TCP
DeviceNet FR-A7ND S
PROFINET IO X - X -
EtherNet/IP (*1) FR-A7NE S BACnet MS/TP - X X X
LonWorks FR-A7NL S Metasys N2 - X X X
Profibus DP FR-A7NP S Siemens FLN - X - -
SSCNET III FR-A7NS S Stocked Item S S - -
Notes:
Note: 1. A701 series supports only the above listed plug-in options. 1. For additional information, visit www.iccdesigns.com
Those options not listed cannot be used with the A701 series. 2. Physically mounts within VFD and powered by VFD
3. Deep control cover is required
Parameter Units / Parameter Copy Units

Parameter units are used for operator control, reading and writing
parameters, and drive monitoring. Parameter Copy Units also read the
drive parameter settings and copy them into non-volatile memory, and
can write them into other drives.
Stocked
Item
FR-CB201 Extension cable straight plugs on both ends - 1 meter S
FR-CB203 Extension cable straight plugs on both ends - 3 meters S
FR-CB205 Extension cable straight plugs on both ends - 5 meters S
FR-DU07 Control Panel for F700 S
LCD Multi-lingual Parameter Copy Unit (English, French,
Spanish, German, Italian, Swedish, Finnish, Japanese)
FR-PU07 for operator control, parameter read/write and moni- S
toring. Stores settings in non-volatile memory. Built-in
parameter copy capability. (F/A700 based)
FR-ADP FR-DU07 panel mounting adapter S
LCD Multi-lingual Parameter Copy Unit (English, French,
FR-PU04 Spanish, German, Italian, Swedish, Finnish, Japanese) for S
operator control, parameter read/write and monitoring.
FR-PU07BB-L Battery Powered PU07 S
FR-RJ45-TR Terminating Resistor for FR-RJ45-HUB -
Software
Programming and diagnostic software
FR-CONFIGURATOR S
(ver. 3.20 or greater)
438
V500 Series
Variable Frequency Drives True, Closed Loop Vector Control
This series achieves high precision and fast response that exceeds the performance of conventional
general-purpose inverters. They can be used in specialized applications such as line control and elevators.
By incorporating our original all-digital vector control, • 4-Quadrant torque control standard
high starting torque and high speed response have • Multiple parameters for tailoring to a wide variety
been made possible for both velocity and torque control of applications
modes.
• Simple positioning included as standard
• 2 to 75 Horsepower at 240V • DC Link Reactor standard (V500L)
• 2 to 75 Horsepower at 480V • Peripheral devices such as power regenerative
• 100% continuous torque at Zero speed converter (FR-CV, FR-RC, MT-RC) available
• Auto Tuning to other manufacturer’s constant torque • Communications options: DeviceNet, Profibus DP,
motor with encoder CC-Link, Modbus Plus, SSCNet
• Easy to use Parameter Unit
Constant Torque Constant Torque

Model Number Stocked Item Model Number Stocked Item
Hp Output Amps Hp Output Amps
3-Phase 240VAC Input / Output 3-Phase 480VAC Input / Output
2 9.0 FR-V520-1.5K-NA S 2 4.5 FR-V540-1.5K-NA S
3 13.0 FR-V520-2.2K-NA S 3 6.5 FR-V540-2.2K-NA S
5 20.0 FR-V520-3.7K-NA S 5 10.0 FR-V540-3.7K-NA S
7.5 28.5 FR-V520-5.5K-NA - 7.5 14.5 FR-V540-5.5K-NA -
10 37.5 FR-V520-7.5K-NA - 10 18.5 FR-V540-7.5K-NA -
15 54 FR-V520-11K-NA - 15 27.5 FR-V540-11K-NA S
20 72.8 FR-V520-15K-NA - 20 35.5 FR-V540-15K-NA S
25 88 FR-V520-18.5K-NA - 25 44.0 FR-V540-18.5K-NA -
30 103.5 FR-V520-22K-NA S 30 51.8 FR-V540-22K-NA -
40 126.5 FR-V520-30K-NA - 40 67.0 FR-V540-30K-NA -
50 166.8 FR-V520-37K-NA - 50 86.0 FR-V540-37K-NA S
60 198.0 FR-V520-45K-NA - 60 99.0 FR-V540-45K-NA S
75 264.0 FR-V520-55K-NA - 75 132.0 FR-V540-55K-NA -
V500 Ratings 240V Class 1.5K - 55K

Model FR-V520-_ _K-NA 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
Horsepower Rating (Hp) 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75
Rated Current (A) 9.0 13.0 20.0 28.5 37.5 54.0 72.8 88.0 103.5 126.5 166.0 198.0 264.0
Overload Current Rating (*1) 150% 60 sec., 200% 0.5 sec. (inverse time characteristics)
Output
Voltage (*2) 3-Phase 200-220V 50 Hz, 200-240V 60 Hz 3-Phase 200-220V 50 Hz, 200-230V 60 Hz
Max. Time 100%/5 sec. 20% (*5)

Regenerative
Breaking Torque Tolerable
3% ED (*5) 2% ED (*5) Continuous (*5)
Work Rate
Rated Input, AC Volt. and

3-Phase 200-220 V 50 Hz, 200-240V 60 Hz 3-Phase 200-220 V 50 Hz, 200-230V 60 Hz
Frequency
Tolerable AC Voltage Fluctuation 170-242V 50 Hz, 200-264V 60 Hz 170-242V 50 Hz, 170-253V 60 Hz

Power
Supply Tolerable Frequency Fluctuation ±5%
Amount of Instantaneous Voltage

When operated at or above 165 V continuously and voltage falls from rated voltage to under 165 V, 15 ms of continuous operation
Drop that can be Withstood
Supply (kVA) (*3) 5.0 6.5 10 14 19 23 33 39 48 57 77 90 123
Protective Structure (JEM 1030) Enclosed type (IP20) (*4) Open type (IP00)
Cooling Method Forced air cooling
kg 3.5 3.5 6 6 6 14 14 21 30 40 40 55 58
Approximate Weight
lbs 7.7 7.7 13.2 13.2 13.2 30.8 30.8 46.2 66 88 88 121 128
mm 150 150 220 220 250 250 250 250 340 450 450 480 480
Width
inches 5.9 5.9 8.7 8.7 9.9 9.9 9.9 9.9 13.4 17.7 17.7 18.9 18.9
mm 260 260 260 260 400 400 400 400 550 550 550 700 700
Height
inches 10.2 10.2 10.2 10.2 15.8 15.8 15.8 15.8 21.7 21.7 21.7 27.6 27.6
mm 163 163 193 193 218 218 218 218 195 250 250 250 270
Depth
inches 6.4 6.4 7.6 7.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 7.7 9.9 9.9 9.9 10.6
V500 Ratings 480V Class 1.5K - 55K
Model FR-V540-_ _K-NA 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
Horsepower Rating (Hp) 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75
Rated Current (A) 4.5 6.5 10.0 14.5 18.5 27.5 35.5 44.0 51.8 67.0 86.0 99.0 132.0
Overload Current Rating (*1) 150% 60 sec., 200% 0.5 sec. (inverse time characteristics)
Output Voltage (*2) 3-Phase 380-480V 50 Hz/60 Hz
Max. Time 100% / 5 sec. 20% (*5)
Regenerative
Breaking Torque Tolerable 2% ED (*5) Continuous (*5)
Work Rate
Rated Input, AC Volt. and
3-Phase 380-480 V 50 Hz/60 Hz
Frequency
Tolerable AC Voltage Fluctuation 323-528V 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power
Tolerable Frequency Fluctuation ±5%
Supply
Amount of Instantaneous Voltage
When operated at or above 320 V continuously and voltage falls from rated voltage to under 320 V, 15 ms of continuous operation
Drop that can be Withstood
Supply (kVA) (*3) 5.0 6.5 10.2 14 19 23 33 39 48 57 77 90 123
Protective Structure (JEM 1030) Enclosed type (IP20) (*4) Open type (IP00)
Cooling System Forced air cooling
kg 3.5 3.5 6 6 14 14 14 14 30 35 35 36 65
Approximate Weight
lbs 7.7 7.7 13.2 13.2 30.8 30.8 30.8 30.8 66 77 77 79 143
mm 150 150 220 220 250 250 250 250 340 450 450 480 480
Width
inches 5.9 5.9 8.7 8.7 9.9 9.9 9.9 9.9 13.4 17.7 17.7 18.9 18.9
mm 260 260 260 260 400 400 400 400 550 550 550 700 700
Height
inches 10.2 10.2 10.2 10.2 15.8 15.8 15.8 15.8 21.7 21.7 21.7 27.6 27.6
mm 163 163 193 193 218 218 218 218 195 250 250 250 270
Depth
inches 6.4 6.4 7.6 7.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 7.7 9.9 9.9 9.9 10.6
Notes:
1. The overload current % value indicates the percentage to the inverter’s rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inventer and motor to return to or below the temperature when at
100% load.
2. The maximum output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be set below the power supply voltage.
3. The power capacity will vary according to the power supply side impedance (including input reactor and power lines) value.
4. When the wiring cover for the network option is removed and built-in options are installed, the protective structure will become open type (IP00).
5. For inverter capacities 1.5K to 15K, using the optional high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) will provide 100% torque/10% ED.
Dedicated Options V500 Series

Model
Description Installation Manual Stocked Item
Number
Parameter unit used for operation control, reading and writing parameters, drive monitoring, parameter copy and
FR-PU04V IB(NA)0600079 S
multi-language
FR-V5AP Pulse train input for advanced position control. Differential line receiver: 500kpps, open collector 200kpps IB(NA)0600087 S
FR-V5AX 6 additional multi-function digital inputs and high resolution analog input (16-bit) IB(NA)0600083 -
FR-V5AY 3 additional multi-function digital outputs and encoder pulse ratio output (differential or open collector output) IB(NA)0600085 -
FR-V5AM When used with additional encoder, machine side orientation can be performed IB(NA)0600089 -
FR-V5NS SSCNET motion control network operation IB(NA)0600106E S
FR-V5NE Ethernet option for inverter setup and monitoring using LAN IB(NA)0600108E -
FR-V5AH 3-digit BCD or 12-bit binary code input for high accuracy speed control IB(NA)0600110E -
T-TRC50 Memory option used with setup software (FR-SW1-SETUP-WE) to analyze internal inverter trace data Contact MEAU -
SSCNET II Cables Instruction Manuals

Model Number Length Description Stocked Item Model Model Number
FR-V5NSCBL005 0.5 meter S FR-V520 Basic IB(NA)06000064
FR-V5NSCBL01 1 meter S FR-V540 Detailed IB(NA)06000065
Connection of Q172CPU
FR-V5NSCBL05 5 meters to FR-V5NS, FR-V5NS to S Basic IB(NA)0600134
FR-V560
FR-V5NSCBL10 10 meters FR-V5NS - Detailed IB(NA)0600135
Basic IB-T7311
FR-V5NSCBL20 20 meters - FR-V500L
Detailed IB-T7312
440
V500 General Specifications
Control Speciications
Control System Soft- PWM control or high carrier frequency sine-wave PWM control can be selected. Vector control or V/F control can be selected.
Control Mode Speed control, torque control, position control
Analog
0.03% of maximum set speed
Frequency Control Input
Resolution Digital
0.003% against maximum settings (0.1 rpm units for minimum setting)
Input
Acceleration / Deceleration Time 0 to 3600 sec (0.1 second increments)
Acceleration / Deceleration
Linear, S pattern (3 types) or backlash compensation acceleration/deceleration can be selected
Pattern
Torque Restriction Level Torque restriction value can be set (0 to 400% variable)
Input Signal
Terminal No. Setting Range Speed Control Torque Control
0 to 10V
2 Main speed setting Speed restriction
(resolution 0.03%)
Auxiliary speed setting, magnetic
Analog Setting Signal 0 to ±10V Speed restriction compensation, magnetic lux command,
1 lux command regenerative torque
(resolution 0.05%) driving side speed restriction
restriction
0 to ±10V
3 Torque restriction (Torque bias) Torque command
(resolution 0.05%)
Main speed setting (in this case,
0 to ±10V Speed restriction (at this time, terminal 2 is invalid)
With Option FR-V5AX 6 terminals 1 and 2 are invalid)
(resolution 0.003%) Torque command (at this time, terminal 3 is valid)
Torque restriction
Environment
3 ixed function
Forward rotation command, alarm reset, external thermal relay
terminals
Contact Signal
5 multi-function Selection can be made from reverse rotation command, multi-speed setting (max. 15 speeds), remote setting, jog operation,
terminals second function selection, third function selection, output stop, three-wire control, pre-excitation, control mode switchover,
torque restriction selection, S pattern switchover, PID control terminal, orientation command, brake opening completion
6 multi-function signal, PU operation/external operation switchover, torque bias selection 1, torque bias selection 2, P control selection, servo
With Option (FR-V5AX)
terminals on, HC connection, PU/external interlock, external DC brake start, and commanded position selection
1 Form C Relay
Contact Signal (230VAC 0.3A,
30VDC 0.3A) Selection con be made from inverter running, up to speed, instantaneous power failure (undervoltage) speed detection,
3 multi-function second speed detection, third speed detection, PU operation mode, overload alarm, regenerative brake pre-alarm,
Open Collector Signal
terminals electronic thermal relay pre-alarm, output current detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit, PID upper limit,
3 multi-function PID forward /reverse output, operation ready, operation ready 2. brake opening request, fan fault output, in overheat
With Option (FR-V5AY)
terminals pre-alarm, orientation in-position, forward rotation output, reverse rotation output, low speed output, torque detection,
1 multi-function regenerative status output, minor fault output, alarm output, maintenance timer output, remote output, speed detection,
With Option (FR-V5AM) in-position and trace status
terminal
7 multi-function
With Option (FR-A5AY)
terminals
0 to ±10V, 12 bits x
Analog Output 1CH 0 to 10V, 12 bits
x 1CH Selection can be made from speed, output current, output voltage, preset speed, output frequency, motor torque, converter
output voltage, regenerative brake duty, electronic thermal relay load factor, output current peak value, converter output
0 to ±10V, 10 bits x voltage peak value, load meter, motor exciting current, motor output, reference voltage
With Option (FR-A5AY) 1CH 0 to 20mA, 10
bits x 1CH
Encoder Pulse Output Option
A phase, B phase, Z phase, (A and B phases can be divided) Open collector/differential line driver
(FR-V5AY)
Maximum/minimum speed setting, speed jump, external thermal relay input selection, polarity reversible operation, override function, automatic
restart operation after instantaneous power failure, forward/reverse operation prevention, operation mode selection, ofline auto tuning function,
Operational Functions online auto tuning function, easy gain tuning, computer link operation, remote setting, brake sequence, second function, third function, multi-speed
operation, coasting to stop, power failure stop, PID control, speed feed forward, model adaptive speed control, master/slave, torque bias, 12-bit
digital command (FR-A5AX option), pulse train input (FR-A5AP option), motor thermistor interface (FR-V5AX option), and simple positioning
Ambient Temperature -10°C to +50°C (Non-freezing) / 14°F to 122°F
Ambient Humidity 90% RH or less (Noncondensing)
Storage Temperature (*1) -20°C to +65°C / -4°F to 149°F
Atmosphere For indoor use; no corrosive gasses, lammable gasses, oil mist, dust or dirt present
Attitude 1000m above sea level. Contact factory for higher altitude deratings.
Vibration 5.9 m/s² (0.6G max.) based on JIS C 0911
Display
Selection can be made from speed, output current, output voltage, preset speed, output frequency, motor torque, converter output voltage,
Parameter Unit (FR-DU04-1/ regenerative brake duty, electronic thermal relay load factor, output current peak value, converter output voltage, peak value, input terminal
FR-PU04V) status (PU04V), load meter, motor exciting current, position pulse, cumulative energization time, actual operation time, motor load factor, torque
command, torque current command, feedback pulse, motor output, trace status
Alarm deinition is displayed when protective function is activated. 8 past alarm deinitions are stored.
Alarm Deinition
(Only 4 alarm deinitions are stored in the DU04-1)
Overcurrent shut-off (acceleration, deceleration, constant speed), regenerative overvoltage shut-off (acceleration, deceleration, constant speed),
undervoltage, instantaneous power failure, overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay), brake transistor alarm, earth (ground) fault current, power
Protective Functions output short circuit, stall prevention, external thermal relay, in overheat, fan fault, option alarm, parameter error, PU disconnection, encoder
no-signal, large speed deviation, overspeed large position error, CPU error, encoder phase error, output phase loss excessive retries,
brake sequence error
Note:
1. Temperature that can be applied for short times, such as in transit.

V500 Series Terminal Connection Diagram
Notes:
1. Terminal PR is provided on the 15kW and smaller capacities, and terminal PX is provided on the 5.5kW and smaller capacities.
2. When using FR-ABR with the 5.5kW or smaller capacity, remove this jumper.
3. Remove this jumper when using FR-BEL for 55kW and smaller capacities. DC link reactor included with 75kW and larger.
4. The converter’s life will be shortened by repeated in-rush currents when the power is turned ON, so do not turn the power ON and OFF frequently.
5. Prepare a ± 10V external power supply for terminals 1 and 3.
6. When using a motor without a thermal protector, set Pr.876 “Thermal protector input” to 0 and set Pr.9 (Pr.452) “Electronic thermal (2nd electronic thermal).
7. The terminal functions can be changed with the input terminal function selection (Pr.180 to Pr.183, Pr.187)
8. The terminal functions can be changed with the output terminal function selection (Pr.190 to Pr.192, Pr.195)
9. Change the connector according to the encoder power supply specifications.
10. The sink logic and source logic will change when the connector is changed.
11. Use of the 2W1kW is recommended when the settings are changed frequently.
12. Always ground the inverter and motor.
442
Engineered Solutions
Manufactured to the highest standards in UL approved facilities, The Engineered Solutions program takes Mitsubishi’s high performance control
products and engineers them into ready-to-use form.
Standard Engineered Solutions

Based on many years of practical industry experience, Standard Engineered Solutions are pre-engineered to meet the needs of a wide range of
different applications within industrial, agricultural and commercial sectors, ensuring low cost and quick delivery.
Custom Engineered Solutions

Mitsubishi designs and constructs fully customized Engineered Solutions that meet the most exacting speciications. A Custom Packaged
Solution could be anything from a single enclosure to a complete shipping container full of pre-commissioned control equipment, and can be
made to US requirements or to meet the standards of any other country around the world
Every Package is supplied with full documentation and is backed up with a comprehensive 2 year warranty.
Custom Engineered Solutions Offer:

• Competitive and innovative designs • Designs archived for future reference or repeat orders
• Solutions built to your exact specifications • Field installation and start-up services
• Integrated VFD panels from 1/8th HP to 1000 HP • A full range of Mitsubishi Electric equipment integrated
• Support from factory trained engineers with 3rd party products
• Help with interpreting specfications • Technical support and advice from beginning to end
• Global standards compliance - UL, cUL, CSA, CE • Complete solutions covered by 2 year warranty
• Full documentation including AutoCAD drawings
Custom Engineered Solutions offer the performance and reliability of Mitsubishi products in
packages tailored to your exact speciication.

FR-F700 Based VFD Complete Bypass System - NEMA 1, NEMA 12, NEMA 3R
Base System Includes:
• PowerGate bypass controller with LCD display • UL / cUL508
• 3 contactor bypass with TEST mode • Hardware options:
• Auto / Manual bypass versions - Input reactor (3 or 5%)
• Bi-directional Coasting Motor Restart (anti-windmill) - Damper Vane Actuator relay
• Adjustable Class 20 overload relay - Extended Analog Output
• Programming / display keypad and speed setting dial - Hand-Off-Auto with potentiometer
• DC link choke as standard - Alphanumeric Keypad
• Choice of fused disconnect, non-fused disconnect or • Extended communications:
circuit breaker - Metasys N2
• Control transformer, fused primary and secondary - LonWorks
• Terminal blocks for control connections - Siemens FLN (P1)
• RS-485 Modbus RTU and BACnet MS/TP as standard - EtherNet/IP
• Complete standard Mitsubishi testing - BACnet/IP
• 2 year warranty - Modbus TCP/IP
• Mitsubishi ‘Energy Oprimization’ System - PROFINET
• 5 second Power Dip Ride Through • For NEMA 3R systems:
• 2 independent PID loops - Thermostatic cabinet control
• AutoCAD documentation package - Screened entrance for cooling air
• Instruction manuals for VFD and controller
Part Number Structure - Sized up to 40HP (208-240V) and 75HP (380 - 480V)
F1
Symbol Horsepower Rating Symbol Choke/Reactor Type Symbol Options

001 - 250 1 - 250 HP* D DC Link Choke Damper vane actuator
S1
relay fitted
* Maximum HP varies according to voltage and 3 3% Input Reactor (option)
enclosure type. Hand-Off-Auto switch with
S2
5 5% Input Reactor (option) potentiometer
Symbol Input Voltage S3 Extended analog output
2V 208 - 240V Symbol Bypass Type S4 Alphanumeric keypad
4V 380 - 480V B Manual 3 contactor bypass S5 Drive trip/run relay (non-bypass only)
N Non bypass S6 100kA SCCR rating (fused types)

Symbol Disconnect Type Up to 3 options may be selected.
A Auto bypass
C UL 489 Circuit Breaker
Symbol Network Type
D Non-Fused Disconnect (option) Enhanced RS-485 capability
F Fused Disconnect (200kA) (option) Siemens FLN, Metasys N2
RS
(Modbus RTU and BACnet,
MS/TP are standard.)
Symbol Enclosure Type
LN Lonworks
1 NEMA 1
Ethernet Communications
2 NEMA 12 ET (Ethernet IP, Modbus TCP/IP,
3 NEMA 3R BACnet IP, ProfiNET)
Select one option if required.
444
FR-F700 Based VFD Complete Bypass System - NEMA 1
Standard Product with
Circuit Breaker & 3 Contactor 208V Based VFD System Panel 460V Based VFD System Panel
Bypass VFD System Size Size
HP KW Model Number Stk. Item Amps Model Number Stk. Item Amps
1 0.75 F1C2V001BD - 4.2 N1A F1C4V001BD - 2.1 N1A
2 1.5 F1C2V002BD S 7 N1A F1C4V002BD S 3.5 N1A
3 2.2 F1C2V003BD S 9.6 N1A F1C4V003BD S 4.8 N1A
5 3.7 F1C2V005BD S 15.2 N1A F1C4V005BD S 7.6 N1A
7.5 5.5 F1C2V007BD S 23 N1B F1C4V007BD S 11.5 N1A
10 7.5 F1C2V010BD S 31 N1B F1C4V010BD S 16 N1A
15 11 F1C2V015BD S 45 N1B F1C4V015BD S 23 N1B
20 15 F1C2V020BD S 58 N1B F1C4V020BD S 29 N1B
25 18.5 F1C2V025BD S 70 N1C F1C4V025BD S 35 N1C
30 22 F1C2V030BD S 85 N1C F1C4V030BD S 43 N1C
40 30 F1C2V040BD S 114 N1D F1C4V040BD S 57 N1C
50 - - - - - F1C4V050BD S 70 N1D
60 - - - - - F1C4V060BD S 85 N1D
75 - - - - - F1C4V075BD S 106 N1D
Panel Lbs H (in) W (in) D (in)

N1A 70 32.3 12.5 10.8
N1B 150 50 16.5 13
N1C 200 60.3 25.5 13.8
N1D 285 65.7 25.5 15.3
Floor
850 78 47.25 20
Mount
FR-F700 Based VFD Complete Bypass System - NEMA 12

Circuit Breaker and 3 Contactor 208V Based VFD System Panel 460V Based VFD System Panel
1 1 F2C2V001BD - 4.2 N12A F2C4V001BD - 2.1 N12A
2 1.5 F2C2V002BD - 7 N12A F2C4V002BD - 3.5 N12A
3 2.2 F2C2V003BD - 9.6 N12A F2C4V003BD - 4.8 N12A
5 3.7 F2C2V005BD - 15.2 N12A F2C4V005BD - 7.6 N12A
7.5 5.5 F2C2V007BD - 23 N12A F2C4V007BD - 11.5 N12A
10 7.5 F2C2V010BD - 31 N12B F2C4V010BD - 16 N12B
15 11 F2C2V015BD - 45 N12B F2C4V015BD - 23 N12B
20 15 F2C2V020BD - 58 N12B F2C4V020BD - 29 N12C
25 18.5 F2C2V025BD - 70 N12C F2C4V025BD - 35 N12C
30 22 F2C2V030BD - 85 N12C F2C4V030BD - 43 N12C
40 30 F2C2V040BD - 114 N12C F2C4V040BD - 57 N12C
50 37 F2C2V050BD - 140 N12D F2C4V050BD - 70 N12D
60 45 F2C2V060BD - 170 N12F F2C4V060BD - 85 N12D
75 55 F2C2V075BD - 212 N12F F2C4V075BD - 106 N12E
100 75 F2C2V100BD - 288 N12F F2C4V100BD - 144 N12E
125 - - - - - F2C4V125BD - 180 N12E
150 - - - - - F2C4V150BD - 216 N12F
200 - - - - - F2C4V200BD - 260 N12F
250 - - - - - F2C4V250BD - 325 N12F
Panel Lbs H (in) W (in) D (in) Type

N12A 88 29 22 10 Wall
N12B 121 31 24 11.5 Wall
N12C 174 38 32 12 Wall
N12D 394 49 36 18 Wall
N12E 562 60 36 24 Wall
N12F 779 77 32 29 Floor

FR-F700 Based VFD Complete Bypass System - NEMA 3R
Circuit Breaker & 3 Contactor 208V Based VFD System 460V Based VFD System
Bypass VFD System Panel Size Panel Size
1 1 F3C2V001BD - 4.2 N3A F3C4V001BD - 2.1 N3A
2 1.5 F3C2V002BD - 7 N3A F3C4V002BD - 3.5 N3A
3 2.2 F3C2V003BD - 9.6 N3A F3C4V003BD - 4.8 N3A
5 3.7 F3C2V005BD - 15.2 N3A F3C4V005BD - 7.6 N3A
7.5 5.5 F3C2V007BD - 23 N3A F3C4V007BD - 11.5 N3A
10 7.5 F3C2V010BD - 31 N3B F3C4V010BD - 16 N3B
15 11 F3C2V015BD - 45 N3C F3C4V015BD - 23 N3B
20 15 F3C2V020BD - 58 N3C F3C4V020BD - 29 N3C
25 18.5 F3C2V025BD - 70 N3D F3C4V025BD - 35 N3C
30 22 F3C2V030BD - 85 N3D F3C4V030BD - 43 N3C
40 30 F3C2V040BD - 114 N3D F3C4V040BD - 57 N3C
50 37 F3C2V050BD - 140 N3E F3C4V050BD - 70 N3D
60 45 - - - - F3C4V060BD - 85 N3D
75 55 - - - - F3C4V075BD - 106 N3E
100 75 - - - - F3C4V100BD - 144 N3E
125 90 - - - - F3C4V125BD - 180 N3E

N3A 88 29 22 10 Wall
N3B 121 31 24 11.5 Wall
N3C 174 38 32 12 Wall
N3D 394 49 36 18 Wall
N3E 562 60 36 24 Wall
446
C1-D Enclosed Drives for Commercial Pump and Fan Control – NEMA 1
C 1 -D F V
Symbol Input Voltage Symbol Bypass Symbol DC Link

2 208 - 230V B Bypass Type D DC Link
4 460 - 480V N Non-Bypass Type None No DC Link
Symbol Enclosure Type Symbol Horsepower Rating
NEMA 1, UL-1 01 1HP

C1-DF
Fused Disconnect 02 2HP
03 3HP
05 5HP
07 7.5HP
10 10HP
15 15HP
20 20HP From Power Supply
Standard Features
• FR-D700 VFD with PWM control and carrier frequency up to 14.5kHz
• VFD parameter unit for keypad entry and display
• Emergency stop circuit with provision for N/C contacts
• Internal control transformer
• Panel mounted master control switch for bypass changeover (*1)
• Conduit knock-out points for power entry and exit – bottom of enclosure
• DC link reactor to improve power quality VFD
• All internal wiring is individually marked, numbered and clearly labelled
• 5 year VFD warranty, 2 year fully inclusive warranty for entire controller
To Motor
Bypass System Non-Bypass System

Thermal
Disconnect DC Link Disconnect DC Link
Size (HP) Drive Type AIC Overload Size (HP) Drive Type AIC
Fuse Rating Reactor Fuse Rating Reactor (*1)
Rating
208-230V 208-230V
1 C1-DF2V01BD 6A 200kA 4A 12mH 1.7 - 2.5A 1 C1-DF2V01BN 6A 200kA 4A 12mH
2 C1-DF2V02BD 10A 200kA 12A 2.1mH 5.2 - 8.0A 2 C1-DF2V02BN 10A 200kA 12A 2.1mH
7.5 C1-DF2V07BD 40A 200kA 32A 0.85mH 18-26A 7.5 C1-DF2V07BN 40A 200kA 32A 0.85mH
10 C1-DF2V10BD 40A 200kA 40A 0.75mH 24-34A 10 C1-DF2V10BN 40A 200kA 40A 0.75mH
15 C1-DF2V15BD 60A 200kA 62A 0.32mH 43-65A 15 C1-DF2V15BN 60A 200kA 62A 0.32mH
460-480V 460-480V
7.5 C1-DF4V07BD 15A 200kA 18A 3.75mH 9.0 - 13.0A 7.5 C1-DF4V07BN 15A 200kA 18A 3.75mH
15 C1-DF4V15BD 40A 200kA 25A 1.75 mH 18-26A 15 C1-DF4V15BN 40A 200kA 25A 1.75 mH
20 C1-DF4V20BD 40A 200kA 32A 1.62 mH 24-34A 20 C1-DF4V20BN 40A 200kA 32A 1.62 mH
Note:
1. When supplied.

F3IP Agricultural Pump Drive Solutions
A3IP is a dedicated controller for agricultural irrigation systems allowing the intelligent control and scheduling of multiple pumps. Available in
sizes up to 150HP (230V) and 600HP (480V), units are supplied in NEMA 3R wall-mounted cabinets. A door-mounted display screen allows
simple operation and display of critical information.
Part Number Structure
F3IP
Symbol Input Voltage Symbol Choke/Reactor Type Symbol Options

2V 208 - 240V D DC Link Choke S4 Alphanumeric keypad
4V 380 - 480V 3 3% Input Reactor (option)
5 5% Input Reactor (option) Symbol Network Type
Symbol Enclosure Type Enhanced RS-485 Capability
Mitsubishi NEMA 3R Symbol Horsepower Rating (BACnet, Siemens FLN,
RS
A3IP Irrigation Pump Drive A700-NA5 Metasys N2)
001 1HP Modbus RTU is standard
PLC
002 2HP LN Lonworks
003 3HP Ethernet Communications
ET (Ethernet IP, Modbus TCP/IP,
005 5HP
BACnet IP, ProfiNET)
007 7.5HP
110 10HP
015 15HP
020 20HP
025 25HP
030 30HP
(motor frame sizes up to 600HP)
F3IP Agricultural Pump Drive Solutions - 600 600HP
NEMA 3R
Circuit Breaker & 3 Contactor 208V Based VFD System Panel 460V Based VFD System Panel
1 1 F3IPC2V001ND - 4.2 N3A F3IPC4V001ND - 2.1 N3A
2 1.5 F3IPC2V002ND - 7 N3A F3IPC4V002ND - 3.5 N3A
3 2.2 F3IPC2V003ND - 9.6 N3A F3IPC4V003ND - 4.8 N3A
5 3.7 F3IPC2V005ND - 15.2 N3A F3IPC4V005ND - 7.6 N3A
7.5 5.5 F3IPC2V007ND - 23 N3A F3IPC4V007ND - 11.5 N3A
10 7.5 F3IPC2V010ND - 31 N3B F3IPC4V010ND - 16 N3B
15 11 F3IPC2V015ND - 45 N3B F3IPC4V015ND - 23 N3B
20 15 F3IPC2V020ND - 58 N3B F3IPC4V020ND - 29 N3B
25 18.5 F3IPC2V025ND - 70 N3C F3IPC4V025ND - 35 N3B
30 22 F3IPC2V030ND - 85 N3C F3IPC4V030ND - 43 N3C
40 30 F3IPC2V040ND - 114 N3C F3IPC4V040ND - 57 N3C
50 37 F3IPC2V050ND - 140 N3D F3IPC4V050ND - 70 N3D
100 75 F3IPC2V100ND - 288 N3E F3IPC4V100ND - 144 N3D
125 93 F3IPC2V125ND - 346 N3E F3IPC4V125ND - 180 N3D
150 112 F3IPC2V150ND - 432 N3E F3IPC4V150ND - 216 N3E
200 149 - - - - F3IPC4V200ND - 260 N3E
250 187 - - - - F3IPC4V250ND - 325 N3E
300 225 - - - - F3IPC4V300ND - 361 N3F
350 261 - - - - F3IPC4V350ND - 432 N3F
400 299 - - - - F3IPC4V400ND - 481 N3F
450 336 - - - - F3IPC4V450ND - 547 N3G
500 373 - - - - F3IPC4V500ND - 610 N3G
550 410 - - - - F3IPC4V550ND - 683 N3G
650 485 - - - - F3IPC4V650ND - 770 N3G
700 522 - - - - F3IPC4V700ND - 866 N3H

N3A 88 29 22 10 Wall
N3B 121 31 24 11.5 Wall
N3C 174 38 32 12 Wall
N3D 394 49 36 18 Wall
N3E 562 60 36 24 Wall
N3F 779 72 32 24 Floor
N3G 1025 84 39 24 Floor
N3H 1225 90 48 24 Floor
448
F8 Type 18 Pulse Controllers
F8 controllers are intended for the control of pumps and fans. 18 pulse technology is used to ensure that the quality of the site power supply
is maintained. These 460VAC Drives (10-800 HP) are LD rated at 120% overload for one minute, available in both bypass and non-bypass
configurations in NEMA 12 Ventilated Floor mounted cabinets. UL508A rated to meet IEEE519-1992 standards.
Base System Includes:
• NEMA 12 ventilated construction • RS-485, Modbus RTU Communication standard, EMI / RFI
• Standard Hoffman ANSI 61 gray paint filter standard
• 18 Pulse Clean Power Design Technology • AutoCAD documentation packet
• 3 contactor bypass with TEST mode • Instruction manuals for VFD and controller
• Choice of bypass or non-bypass units • UL / cUL 508A
• Catch a spinning load / windmill start activated • Hardware options: Damper vane actuator relay, extended analog
output, hand-off autoswitch with potentiometer, PU07 keypad /
• Adjustable overload relay, class 20 equivalent display door mounted
• Programming / display keypad and speed setting dial • Communications Options: BACnet® MS/TP, Metasys® N2,
• Choice of fused disconnect or circuit breaker (standard) LonWorks®, Siemens® FLN(P1), EtherNet/IP™, BACnet® IP,
• Control transformer, fused primary and secondary Modbus® TCP/IP, PROFINET
• Terminal blocks for control connections • 2 year warranty
Part Number Structure
F8 4V
Symbol Horsepower Rating Symbol Network Type Symbol Options

010 10HP Enhanced RS-485 capability Damper vane actuator
S1
(BACnet, Siemens FLN, relay fitted
015 15HP RS
Metasys N2) Hand Off autoswitch with
Modbus RTU is standard S2
020 20HP potentiometer
025 25HP LN Lonworks S3 Extended analog output
030 30HP Ethernet Communications S4 Alphanumeric keypad

ET (Ethernet IP, Modbus TCP/IP, S5 Drive trip/run relay (non-bypass only)
040 40HP BACnet IP, ProfiNET)
(Motor frame sizes up to 800HP) Up to 3 options may be selected.
800 800HP
Symbol Bypass Type
B Manual 3 contactor bypass
Symbol Input Voltage
N 3 contactor non-bypass (option)
4V 380 - 480V
Symbol Disconnect Type

C UL 489 circuit breaker
F Fused disconnect (100kA) (option)
Symbol Enclosure Type

8 18 Pulse NEMA 12V
For further information, please refer to our website, www.MEAU.com

Type CK Conduit Mounting Kits
The CK range of Type 1 Conduit Mounting Kits is intended for use with D700 and E700 Series VFDs. This kit allows the drive to be
mounted outside of a normal enclosure.
Main Features • Units available from stock

• Available for all 3 phase D700 and E700 VFDs • 7 frame sizes
• Provides conduit holes on both sides and the • Drive mounting screws provided
bottom • Ample box area for easy wiring with generous wire
• Knockout conduits provided bend radius
• Supplied as a kit to be installed in the ield • Suitable for 208/230V and 460/480V drives
Conduit Kit Selection Chart

D700 Series VFD Model Number E700 Series VFD Model Number
FR-D720-008-NA FR-E720-008
FR-D720-025-NA FR-E720-015
FR-D720-042-NA CKDE1 FR-E720-030
CKDE1
FR-D720-070-NA FR-E720-050
FR-D720-100-NA FR-E720-080
FR-D720-165-NA CKDE3 FR-E720-110
FR-D720-238-NA FR-E720-175 CKDE3
CKDE4
FR-D720-318-NA FR-E720-240
FR-D740-012-NA FR-E720-330
CKDE5
FR-D740-022-NA FR-E720-470
FR-D740-036-NA CKDE1 FR-E720-600
FR-D740-050-NA FR-E740-016
FR-D740-080-NA FR-E740-026
FR-D740-120-NA FR-E740-040 CKDE2
CKDE4
FR-D740-160-NA FR-E740-060
FR-E740-095 * Drive not included
FR-E740-120
CKDE4
FR-E740-170
FR-E740-230
CKDE5
FR-E740-300
Type G General Purpose Controllers

For D700 and E700 VFD – NEMA 12 or NEMA 3R Construction
Type G controllers are general purpose
G
packaged drives suitable for a wide range of
applications where a remote mounted VFD is
required. Any Mitsubishi VFD up to 700HP can
be configured into a type G package with either
a NEMA 12 or NEMA 3R enclosure.
Symbol Input/Output Voltage Symbol Choke/Reactor Type Symbol Options
2V 3/60/208 (230/240)VAC D DC Link Choke S4 Alphanumeric keypad
Base System Includes: 4V 3/60/460 (480)VAC 3 3% Input Reactor (option)
• RAL 7035 light gray paint 5 5% Input Reactor (option)
• Bottom mounted inlet and exhaust vents Symbol Input Voltage

C Circuit Breaker Symbol Horsepower Rating
• D700 controller with LCD keypad / display F Fused Disconnect 001 1HP
• Rated 150% overload for one minute, 002 2HP

Symbol Input Voltage 003
200% for 3 seconds 3HP
2 NEMA 12 Ventilated 005 5HP
• DC Link Choke included as standard 3 NEMA 3R 007 7.5HP
• Thermostatically controlled space heater Disconnect Type

010 10HP
Symbol
• Choice of fused disconnect or UL 489 D D700 Drive
circuit breaker (standard) E E700 Drive
• Modbus RTU Communication standard Symbol Enclosure Type
• AutoCAD documentation package G General Purpose
• VFD instruction manual

• UL / cUL 508
• Hardware options: Input reactor, (3% or
5%), door mounted PU07 keypad / display
• 2 year warranty
450
For A700 and F700 VFD – NEMA 12 or NEMA 3R Construction
Base System Includes: G
• RAL 7035 light gray paint
• Bottom mounted inlet and exhaust vents
• F700 controller with LCD keypad / display
• LD Rated 120% overload for one minute Symbol Input/Output Voltage Symbol Choke/Reactor Type Symbol Options
• DC Link Choke included as standard 2V 3/60/208 (230/240)VAC D DC Link Choke S4 Alphanumeric keypad
4V 3/60/460 (480)VAC 3 3% Input Reactor (option)
• Choice of fused disconnect or UL 489 circuit 5 5% Input Reactor (option) Symbol Network Type
breaker (standard) Symbol Input Voltage

Symbol Horsepower Rating
LN Lonworks (FR-A7NL)
C Circuit Breaker
ET Ethernet (FR-A7NE)
• RS-485, Modbus RTU Communication F Fused Disconnect 001 1HP
RS RS485 (FR-A7N-XLT)
standard, EMI/RFI filter standard 002 2HP
CC CC-Link (FR-A7NC)
Symbol Input Voltage 003 3HP
• AutoCAD documentation package 2 NEMA 12 Ventilated 005 5HP
DN DeviceNet (FR-A7ND)
DP Profibus (FR-A7NP)
• Instruction manuals for VFD and controller 3 NEMA 3R 007 7.5HP
101 10HP
• UL / cUL 508 Symbol Disconnect Type
015 15HP
A
• Hardware options: Input reactor, (3% or
A700 Drive
020 20HP
F F700 Drive
5%), PU07 keypad / display 025 25HP
Symbol Enclosure Type 030 30HP
• Communications Options: BACnet® MS/ G General Purpose
(motor frame sizes up to 700HP)
TP, Metasys® N2, LonWorks®, Siemens® 700 700HP
FLN(P1), EtherNet/IP™, BACnet® IP,

Modbus® TCP/IP, CC-Link®, DeviceNet™,
PROFIBUS-DP
• 2 year warranty

General Options
Recommended Peripheral Devices For VFDs
Input / Output Reactors (*1) DC Link Choke Input Circuit Breaker Passive Harmonic Sine Wave
Motor HP Input Contactor
3% 5% (*2) (UL489) Filter (*3) Output Filter (*3)
208-230V
1/4 MRL-00201 MRL-00202 DCA000204 NF50-SVFU3P5A S-N10 - -
1/2 MRL-00205 MRL-00201 DCA000402 NF50-SVFU3P5A S-N10 - -
1 MRL-00401 MRL-00402 DCA000902 NF50-SVFU3P10A S-N10 - -
7.5 MRL-02501 MRL-02502 DCA003201 NF50-SVFU3P50A S-N20 - -
10 MRL-03501 MRL-03502 DCA004002 NF125-SVU3P60A S-N25 - -
60 MRL-16001 MRL-16002 DCA020002 NF-SKW3P300A S-N180 - -
75 MRL-20001B14 MRL-20002B14 Standard NF-SKW3P400A S-N200 - -
200 MRL-50001 MRL-50002 Standard NF-SLW3P500A S-N400 - -
460-480V
1/2 MRL-00201 MRL-00103 DCA000204 NF100-HRU3P5A S-N10 -
1 MRL-00201 MRL-00202 DCA000204 NF100-HRU3P5A S-N10 - SWAP0009D
2 MRL-00402 MRL-00403 DCA000402 NF100-HRU3P10A S-N10 - SWAP0009D
3 MRL-00402 MRL-00403 DCA000903 NF100-HRU3P10A S-N10 MDP0006D SWAP0009D
5 MRL-00802 MRL-00803 DCA000903 NF125-SVU3P20A S-N10 MDP0008D SWAP0009D
7.5 MRL-01202 MRL-01203 DCA001804 NF125-SVU3P30A S-N20 MDP0011D SWAP0012D
75 MRL-10002 MRL-20002B14 Standard NF250-SVU3P200A S-N80 MDP0103D SWAP0110D
100 MRL-13002 MRL-13003 Standard NF250-SVU3P225A S-N95 MDP0128D SWAP0130D
125 MRL-16002 MRL-16003 Standard NF250-SVU3P225A S-N150 MDP0165D SWAP0160D
150 MRL-20002B14 MRL-20003B14 Standard NF250-SVU3P225A S-N180 MDP0208D SWAP0200D
200 MRL-25002B14 MRL-25003B14 Standard NF-SKW3P400A S-N220 MDP0240D SWAP0250D
350 MRL-50002 MRL-50003 Standard NF-SLW3P500A S-N400 MDP0482D SWAP0415D
500 MRL-60002 MRL-60003 Standard - S-N600 MDP0636D SWAP0600D
550 MRL-75002 MRL-75003 Standard - S-N600 MDP0786D SWAP0720D
600 MRL-75002 MRL-75003 Standard - S-N800 MDP0786D -
700 MRL-85002 MRL-85003 Standard - - - -
800 MRL-100002 MRL-100013 Standard - - - -
600V
1 MRL-00202 MRL-00203 DCA000204 - S-N10 - -
3 MRL-00403 MRL-00404 DCA000904 NF125-HVU3P15A S-N20 - -
100 MRL-10002 MRL-10003 Standard NF250-HVU3P175A S-N65 - -
350 MRL-40002B14 MRL-40013B14 Standard NF-SLW3P600A S-N300 - -
450 MRL-50002 MRL-40013B14 Standard NF-SLW3P600A S-N400 - -
550 MRL-60002 MRL-60003 Standard - S-N600 - -
700 MRL-75002 MRL-75003 Standard - S-N600 - -
Notes:
1. Part numbers for input reactors are for OPEN types. Change the second from last digit to a '1' for NEMA 1 types (e.g. MRL-00201 becomes MRL-00211)
2. DC Link chokes are OPEN type and at least 3% inductance
3. Part numbers for passive and sine wave filters are for OPEN types. Designed to limit THDi to 5%. Change the P to a G for NEMA 2 enclosures (e.g. MDP0006D becomes MDG006D,
SWAP0009D becomes SWAG0009D)
452
Line / Load Reactor Electrical Data
Model Number Watts Loss Wire Range (AWG) Terminal Torque (in / lbs) Ind. mH Fund Amps Max Amps
MRL-00201 8 22 14 4.5 12 2 3
MRL-00202 12 22 14 4.5 20 2 3
MRL-00203 16 22 14 4.5 32 2 3
MRL-00204 11 22 14 4.5 6 2 3
MRL-00401 15 22 14 4.5 3 4 6
MRL-00402 20 22 14 4.5 6.5 4 6
MRL-00403 20 22 14 4.5 9 4 6
MRL-00404 21 22 14 4.5 12 4 6
MRL-00801 20 22 14 4.5 1.5 8 12
MRL-00802 29 22 14 4.5 3 8 12
MRL-00803 26 22 14 4.5 5 8 12
MRL-00804 28 22 14 4.5 7.5 8 12
MRL-01201 26 22 5 16 1.25 12 18
MRL-01202 31 22 5 16 2.5 12 18
MRL-01203 41 22 5 16 4.2 12 18
MRL-01801 36 22 5 16 0.8 18 27
MRL-01802 43 22 5 16 1.5 18 27
MRL-01803 43 22 5 16 2.5 18 27
MRL-02501 48 22 5 16 0.5 25 37.5
MRL-02502 52 22 5 16 1.2 25 37.5
MRL-02503 61 22 5 16 1.8 25 37.5
MRL-03501 49 22 5 16 0.4 35 52.5
MRL-03502 54 22 5 16 0.8 35 52.5
MRL-03503 54 18 4 20 1.2 35 52.5
MRL-04501 54 18 4 20 0.3 45 67.5
MRL-04502 62 18 4 20 0.7 45 67.5
MRL-04503 65 18 4 20 1.2 45 67.5
MRL-05501 64 6 0 6-4(45) & 2-0(50) 0.25 55 82.5
MRL-05502 67 6 0 6-4(45) & 2-0(50) 0.5 55 82.5
MRL-05503 71 6 0 6-4(45) & 2-0(50) 0.85 55 82.5
MRL-08001 82 6 0 6-4(45) & 2-0(50) 0.2 80 120
MRL-08002 86 6 0 6-4(45) & 2-0(50) 0.4 80 120
MRL-08003 96 6 0 6-4(45) & 2-0(50) 0.7 80 120
MRL-10001 94 6 0 6-4(45) & 2-0(50) 0.15 100 150
MRL-10002 84 6 0 6-4(45) & 2-0(50) 0.3 100 150
MRL-10003 108 6 0 6-4(45) & 2-0(50) 0.45 100 150
MRL-13001 108 2 0000 150 0.1 130 195
MRL-13002 180 2 0000 150 0.2 130 195
MRL-13003 128 2 0000 150 0.3 130 195
MRL-16001 116 2 0000 150 0.075 160 240
MRL-16002 149 2 0000 150 0.15 160 240
MRL-16003 138 2 0000 150 0.23 160 240
MRL-20001B14 124 Copper tab Not Applicable 0.055 200 300
MRL-50001 266 Copper tab Not Applicable 0.025 500 750
For additional information visit http://www.mtecorp.com/lineload.html

DC Choke Electrical Data
Model No. DC Amps mH Watts Lug Size Torque Unit Weight (lbs)
DCA000204 2 50 5 22-14 4.5 2
DCA000402 4 12 5 22-14 4.5 2
DCA000403 4 15 6 22-14 4.5 2
DCA000404 4 25 9 18-4 20 4
DCA000902 9 3.22 7 22-14 4.5 2
DCA000903 9 7.5 11 18-4 20 4
DCA000904 9 11.5 16 18-4 20 7
DCA001201 12 1 5 22-14 4.5 1
DCA001202 12 1 7 18-4 20 2
DCA001203 12 4 11 18-4 20 4
DCA001204 12 6 14 18-4 20 7
DCA001801 18 0.65 5 18-4 20 2
DCA001802 18 1.375 9 18-4 20 4
DCA001803 18 2.75 16 18-4 20 7
DCA001804 18 3.75 17 18-4 20 8
DCA001805 18 6 20 18-4 20 13
DCA002503 25 1.275 13 18-4 20 7
DCA002504 25 1.75 13 18-4 20 5
DCA002505 25 4 16 18-4 20 13
DCA003201 32 0.85 11 18-4 20 5
DCA003202 32 1.62 14 18-4 20 10
DCA003203 32 2.68 21 18-4 20 14
DCA004001 40 0.5 14 18-4 20 5
DCA004002 40 0.75 15 18-4 20 7
DCA004003 40 1 17 18-4 20 8
DCA004004 40 2 29 18-4 20 21
DCA005001 50 0.625 18 18-4 20 8
DCA005003 50 1.35 21 18-4 20 15
DCA005004 50 2 30 6-0 6-4(45) &2-0 25
DCA006201 62 0.32 17 6-0 6-4(45) &2-0 8
DCA006202 62 0.61 20 6-0 6-4(45) &2-0 14
DCA008002 80 0.4 25 6-0 6-4(45) & 2-0(50) 14
DCA008005 80 1.25 25 6-0 6-4(45) & 2-0(50) 35
DCA009201 92 0.2 19 6-0 6-4(45) & 2-0(50) 10
DCA009202 92 0.6 34 6-0 6-4(45) & 2-0(50) 23
DCA009203 92 1 48 6-0 6-4(45) & 2-0(50) 32
DCA011002 110 0.3 38 6-0 6-4(45) & 2-0(50) 22
DCA011003 110 0.45 45 6-0 6-4(45) & 2-0(50) 22
DCA012502 125 0.22 27 6-0 6-4(45) & 2-0(50) 23
DCA015002 150 0.22 36 2-0000 150 23
DCA015004 150 0.65 66 2-0000 150 52
DCA020002 200 0.21 50 2-0000 150 39
For additional information, visit http://www.mtecorp.com/dclink.html
454
Micro MAX™ AC Inverter Duty Motor
1000:1 Constant Torque (TENV) • 20:1 Constant Torque (TEFC)
Designed for direct replacement of PMDC or any other variable speed application where up to a 1000:1 constant torque speed range
is required. Typical uses include: machine tools, conveyors, packaging machines, batching machines and printing equipment.
• Replaces 90 and 180 volt PMDC motors when used with • Continuous duty at 40°C ambient
AC variable frequency drives • “Quick Connect” terminal board as noted
• Constant torque operation from 0 to base speed (TENV ratings) • Top mounted conduit box with pigtail leads
• Constant torque operation from 1/20 speed to base speed (TEFC and 1.5Hp TENV)
(TEFC ratings) • UL recognized and CSA certified
• Constant horsepower to twice base speed (RPM) • Three year warranty
• Class H insulation with CR200 magnetic wire
C-Face with Rigid Base

Hp RPM Volts Encl. Frame Catalog No. F.L.A. Weight Notes
1/8 1800 230 TENV 56C Y605 * 1.0 18 N, Q
1/4 1800 230 TENV 56C Y500 * 1.0 18 N, Q
1/3 1800 230 TENV 56C Y502 * 1.2 18 N, Q
1800 230 TENV 56C Y504 * 1.8 20 N, Q
1/2 1800 230/460 TENV 56C Y360 * 1.8/0.9 20 N
1800 575 TENV 56C Y361 * 0.7 20 N, Q
1800 230 TEFC 56C Y506 * 2.8 23 -
3/4 1800 230/460 TEFC 56C Y362 * 2.8/1.4 23 -
1800 575 TEFC 56C Y363 1.1 23 -
1800 230 TEFC 56C Y508 * 3.2 28 -
1 1800 230/460 TEFC 56C Y364 * 3.2/1.6 28 -
1800 575 TEFC 56C Y365 * 1.3 28 -
1800 230 TENV 145TC Y522 * 4.8 49 N, 6
1 1/2 1800 230/460 TENV 145TC Y366 * 4.8/2.4 49 N, 6
1800 575 TENV 145TC Y367 * 1.9 49 N, 6
1800 230 TEFC 145TC Y523 * 5.8 50 6
2 1800 230/460 TEFC 145TC Y368 * 5.8/2.9 50 6
1800 575 TEFC 145TC Y369 * 2.3 50 6
1800 230 TEFC 182TC Y998 8.4 70 -
3 1800 230/460 TEFC 182TC Y999 * 8.4/4.2 70 -
1800 575 TEFC 182TC Y270 3.5 70 -
1800 230/460 TEFC 184TC Y372 * 13.4/6.7 88 6
5
1800 575 TEFC 184TC Y373 5.4 88 6
1800 230/460 TEFC 213TC Y994 * 21.4/10.7 125 -
7 1/2
1800 575 TEFC 213TC Y995 8.5 125 -
1800 230/460 TEFC 215TC Y996 * 28.0/14.0 135 -
10
1800 575 TEFC 215TC Y997 11.2 135 -
General Notes:
* Marathon Motors stock item.
For additional information visit www.marathonelectric.com/motors/search.asp
C-Face Footless
1/8 1800 230 TENV 56C Y606 * 1.0 17 N, Q
1/4 1800 230 TENV 56C Y501 * 1.0 17 N, Q
1/3 1800 230 TENV 56C Y503 * 1.2 17 N, Q
1800 230 TENV 56C Y505 * 1.8 19 N, Q
1/2 1800 230/460 TENV 56C Y374 * 1.8/0.9 19 N
1800 575 TENV 56C Y375 * 0.7 19 N, Q
1800 230 TEFC 56C Y507 * 2.8 23
3/4 1800 230/460 TEFC 56C Y376 * 2.8/1.4 23
1800 575 TEFC 56C Y377 1.1 23
1800 230 TEFC 56C Y521 * 3.2 27
1 1800 230/460 TEFC 56C Y378 * 3.2/1.6 27
1800 575 TEFC 56C Y379 * 1.3 27
General Notes:
N: Totally Enclosed Non Ventilated; Q: “Quick Connect” terminal board; 6: Bolt-on, removable base for footless mounting option.

Black MAX™ Vector Duty
1000:1 Constant Torque
Designed for inverter or vector duty applications where up to a 1000:1 constant torque speed range is required. Typical uses include:
material handling, machine tools, conveyors, crane & hoist, metal processing and other industrial machinery installed in dusty or
dirty environments.
• Class F MAX GUARD insulation system • Ball bearing

• Constant torque operation from 0 to base speed • Removable Base on some models as noted
on vector drive • F1 standard, field reversible to F2 (except where noted)
• Constant horsepower to twice base speed (RPM) • Encoder and brake provisions included on opposite drive end
• Continuous duty at 40°C ambient (maximum 10 lb-ft brake)
• Optimized for operation with IGBT inverter (NEMA Design A) • UL recognized and CSA certified
• Class F N/C thermostats • Three year warranty
Totally Enclosed Non-Ventilated, C-Face with Rigid Base

Hp RPM Volts Frame Catalog No. F.L.A. Weight Notes
1/4 1800 230/460 56C Y592 * 1.2/0.6 19 N, S, 13
1800 230/460 56C Y534 * 1.6/0.8 28 N, S, 6, 13
1/2
1800 575 56C Y555 * 0.6 28 N, S, 6, 13
1800 230/460 56C Y535 * 3.0/1.5 39 N, S, 6, 13
1800 575 56C Y556 * 1.2 40 N, S, 6, 13
1
1800 230/460 143TC Y536 * 3.0/1.5 43 N, S, 6, 13
1200 230/460 145TC Y537 * 3.8/1.9 49 N, S, 6, 13
1 1/2 1800 230/460 145TC Y538 * 4.8/2.4 50 N, S, 6, 13
1800 230/460 145TC Y551 * 6.0/3.0 70 N
2 1800 575 145TC Y557 * 2.4 70 N
1200 230/460 184TC Y540 * 6.6/3.3 88 N, AL
1800 230/460 182TC Y541 * 8.4/4.2 93 N, AL
3 1800 575 182TC Y558 * 3.4 98 N, AL
1200 230/460 213TC Y542 * 9.4/4.7 118 N, AL
1800 230/460 184TC Y543 * 14.0/7.0 103 N, AL
5 1800 575 184TC Y559 * 5.4 103 N, AL
1200 230/460 215TC Y544 * 15.4/7.7 128 N, AL
1800 230/460 213TC Y545 * 21.0/10.5 146 N, AL
7 1/2 1800 575 213TC Y560 * 8.4 150 N, AL
1200 230/460 254TC Y546 * 22.0/11.0 209 N, AL
1800 230/460 215TC Y547 * 27.0/13.5 159 N, AL
10 1800 575 215TC Y561 * 10.8 159 N, AL
1200 230/460 256TC Y548 * 28.0/14.0 275 N, AL
1800 230/460 254TC Y549 * 40.0/20.0 250 N, AL, I
15
1800 575 254TC Y562 * 16.0 250 N, AL, I
1800 230/460 256TC Y552 * 50.0/25.0 320 N, I
20
1800 575 256TC Y563 * 20.0 320 N, I
1800 230/460 284TC Y553 * 62.0/31.0 525 N, I
25
1800 575 284TC Y567 * 24.8 525 N, I
30 1800 230/460 286TC Y393 * 80.0/40.0 575 N, I
General Notes:
* Marathon Motors stock item. Shaded areas are cast iron frames.
AL: Aluminum Frame Construction; N: Totally Enclosed Non-Ventilated; I: Intermittent duty from 90-120Hz operation; S: Steel Frame Construction; 6: Bolt-on, removable base for footless
mounting option; 13: F1 Mounting only, cannot modify to F2.
Black MAX™ Vector Duty: Encoders through Mod Center

Brand Model PPR Catalog No. Notes
1024 A746*
HS25A Optical Hollow Shaft, MS connector
2048 A747*
1024 A736*
2048 A739*
Avtron
1024 A742*
HS35M Magnetic Hollow Shaft, EPIC connector
2048 A744
M3 1024 A753* Optical Hollow Shaft, EPIC connector
M56 1024 A793* Magnetic Modular Style, EPIC connector
1024 A772*
Dynapar HS35 Shaft mount, 5-26VDC, with 10 pin connector
2048 A776*
1024 A779*
BEI HS35 Shaft mount, 5-26VDC, with 10 pin connector
2048 A780*
General Notes:
456
Blue MAX™ 2000 Vector Duty
2000:1 Constant Torque
Designed for inverter or vector duty applications where up to a 2000:1 constant torque speed range is required. Typical uses
include: material handling, machine tools, conveyors, crane & hoist, metal processing, test stands, pumps, compressors, textile
processing and other industrial machinery installed in dusty or dirty environments where cast iron construction is required.
• Class H MAX GUARD insulation system • Ball bearing (roller bearing available 360 frame and larger)
• Constant torque operation from 0 to base speed on vector • Cast iron frame and brackets
drive, including TEFC (on V/Hz drives, TEFC motors are • Patented “fracket” design (TEBC enclosure)
limited to 20:1 Constant Torque)
• “B” temperature rise on Blower-Cooled motors
• Constant horsepower to twice base speed (143-254 frame);
1.5 times base (all others) • F1 standard, field reversible to F2
• Continuous duty at 40°C ambient • Encoder and brake provisions included on opposite drive end
• Optimized for operation with IGBT inverter (NEMA Design A) • UL recognized and CSA certified
• C-Face foot mount through 100 Hp as noted • Three year warranty
• Class F N/C thermostats
Totally Enclosed Rigid Base, and C-Face with Rigid Base

1 1800 230/460 TENV 143TC Y525 * 3.0/1.5 61 NEMA Design B
1 1/2 1800 230/460 TENV 145TC Y590 * 4.6/2.3 68
2 1800 230/460 TENV 145TC Y526 * 6.0/3.0 70
3 1800 230/460 TENV 182TC Y527 * 8.0/4.0 110
5 1800 230/460 TENV 184TC Y564 * 13.4/6.7 117 NEMA Design B
1800 230/460 TEFC 213TC Y595 * 19.4/9.7 191
7 1/2
1800 230/460 TENV 213TC Y565 * 21.0/10.5 180
1800 230/460 TEFC 215TC Y596 * 25.4/12.7 211
10
1800 230/460 TENV 215TC Y566 * 26.0/13.0 290
1800 230/460 TEFC 254TC Y597 * 37.0/18.5 339
15 1800 230/460 TENV 254TC Y509 * 40.4/20.2 350
1200 230/460 TEBC 284TC Y395 * 40.0/20.0 480
1800 230/460 TEFC 256TC Y598 * 52.0/26.0 375
20 1800 230/460 TENV 256TC Y510 * 50.0/25.0 380
1200 230/460 TEBC 286TC Y582 52.4/26.2 500 NEMA Design B
1800 230/460 TEFC 284T Y569 * 63.0/31.5 492
25 1800 230/460 TEBC 284TC Y511 * 63.0/31.5 500
1200 230/460 TEBC 324TC Y583 * 67.0/33.5 620 NEMA Design B
1800 230/460 TEFC 286T Y570 * 77.0/38.5 594
30 1800 230/460 TEBC 286TC Y512 * 74.0/37.0 520
1200 230/460 TEBC 326TC Y584 * 82.0/41.0 686 NEMA Design B
1800 230/460 TEFC 324T Y571 * 100/50.0 540
40 1800 230/460 TEBC 324TC Y513 * 100/50.0 620
1200 230/460 TEBC 364TC Y585 * 104/52.0 1050
1800 230/460 TEFC 326T Y572 * 121/60.5 540
50 1800 230/460 TEBC 326TC Y514 * 120/60.0 640
1200 230/460 TEBC 365TC Y586 130/65.0 1100
General Notes:
1. B: NEMA Design B.
2. For additional information visit www.marathonelectric.com/motors/search.asp

Totally Enclosed Rigid Base, and C-Face with Rigid Base (continued)
1800 230/460 TEFC 364T Y573 * 147/73.5 965
60 1800 230/460 TEBC 364TC Y515 * 147/73.5 1062
1200 230/460 TEBC 404TC Y587 * 142/71.0 1380
1800 230/460 TEFC 365T Y574 * 184/92.0 1006
75 1800 230/460 TEBC 365TC Y516 * 180/90.0 1106
1200 230/460 TEBC 405TC Y588 * 180/90.0 1450 NEMA Design B
1800 230/460 TEFC 405T Y575 * 230/115 1308
100 1800 230/460 TEBV 405TC Y517 * 230/115 1429
1200 230/460 TEBC 444TC Y589 * 250/125 2150
1800 460 TEFC 444T Y576 * 143 2062
125
1800 460 TEBC 444T Y518 * 138 2110 NEMA Design B
1800 460 TEFC 445T Y577 * 170 2246
150
1800 460 TEBC 445T Y519 * 170 2321
1800 460 TEFC 445T Y578 * 230 2404
200
1800 460 TEBC 445T Y520 * 230 2457
1800 460 TEFC 449T Y579 295 2800
250
1800 460 TEBC 449T Y531 * 295 2880
1800 460 TEFC 449T Y580 330 2890 20:1
300
1800 460 TEBC 449T Y532 * 327 2950
350 1800 460 TEBC 449T Y533 * 385 3075
General Notes:
B: NEMA Design B.
Blue MAX™ 2000 Vector Duty / Encoders Through Mod Center

Encl. Brand Model PPR Catalog No. Notes
1024 A746*
2048 A747*
1024 A736*
2048 A739*
Avtron
1024 A742*
2048 A744
TENV
M3 1024 A753* Optical Hollow Shaft, EPIC connector
1024 A772*
2048 A776*
1024 A779*
2048 A780*
1024 A737*
2048 A740
Avtron 1024 A742*
2048 A744
TEFC M3 1024 A754* Optical Hollow Shaft, EPIC connector
1024 A774*
2048 A777*
1024 A783*
2048 A784*
1024 A738*
2048 A741*
Avtron 1024 A743*
2048 A745
TEBC
1024 A775*
2048 A778*
1024 A781*
2048 A782*
- - - A801* Encoder Conduit box
General Notes:
458
Robots
Robots
RV Series
6 Axis Model
Payload: 2 - 20 KG
Reach: 504 - 1503 mm
REACH
RH Series
4 Axis Models
Payload: 6 - 20 KG
Reach: 350 - 1000 mm
P A Y L O AD
Mitsubishi Robotics Overview .........................................................................................................460

RV Series .........................................................................................................................................461
RH Series .........................................................................................................................................465
Controllers .......................................................................................................................................468
System Configuration ......................................................................................................................470
Configuration Options ......................................................................................................................471
Software...........................................................................................................................................474
when we are out of stock due to unexpected large requirements. All stock product will be indicated in this book by an “S” in the
Stocked Item columns/rows.
product is non-returnable and non-cancelable. Product listed as non-stock may change to stock product subject to increases in
sales and usage. All non-stock product will be indicated in this book by a dash “-” in the Stocked Item columns/rows.
Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Robots 459

n ROBOTS
Mitsubishi Robotics Overview
Mitsubishi Electric’s line of robots covers a wide spectrum of configurations and capacities that are ideal for small to medium
robot applications. As part of the Mitsubishi Electric family of world class automation products, Mitsubishi robots integrate
directly to complete a single-source automation solution.
Quality and reliability have proven to be the standard for Mitsubishi robots which have been globally accepted and performing
with maximum up-time since 1980.
Mitsubishi robots are built to the meticulous standards that have become synonymous with Mitsubishi Electric.
Available in 4 or 6 axis configurations, all units come standard with an impressive list of features and utilities that simplify
design and commissioning. MELFA 64 bit RISC processor controllers are compact but robust with great flexibility and
communication options. The programming software is very comprehensive in its abilities including, simulation, CAD to
program conversion, diagnosis and monitoring.
Mitsubishi Robots Feature:
• Payload capacities up to 20 kg • Additional axis control (iQ only)
• General environment ratings of IP67 • Sensorless collision detection
oil-mist and clean room models • Individual axis torque monitoring
available • Load-based acceleration optimization
• AC servo motors with absolute • Singularity point control routines
encoders and brakes • Compliance control
• Internal accessory wiring and piping • Multi-tasking program environment
• Superior repeatability and cycle time • Position restoration tool
• Conveyor tracking function • Maintenance forecast function
• Simplified vision interface tools
Vertically Articulated (RV)

Model Number RV-2F RV-4F RV-4FL RV-7F RV-7FL RV-7FLL RV-13F RV-13FL RV20F
Maximum Load Capacity (kg) 2 4 4 7 7 7 13 13 20
Maximum Reach Radius (mm) 504 515 649 713 908 1,503 1,094 1,388 1,094
Standard IP30 IP40 IP40 IP40 IP40 IP40 IP40 IP40 IP40
Environmental
Oil Mist – IP67 IP67 IP67 IP67 IP67 IP67 IP67 IP67
Specifications
Clean – ISOclass3 ISOclass3 ISOclass3 ISOclass3 ISOclass3 ISOclass3 ISOclass3 ISOclass3
Controller CR750-D/Q; CR750-MB IP54 controller protection box available
Horizontally Articulated
SCARA (RH)
RH-3SQHR
Model Number RH-3FH35 RH-3FH45 RH-3FH55 RH-6FH35 RH-6FH45 RH-6FH55 RH-12FH55 RH-12FH70 RH-12FH85 RH-20FH85 RH-20FH100
RH-3SDHR
Maximum Load Capacity (kg) 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 12 12 12 20 20
Maximum Reach Radius (mm) 350 350 450 550 350 450 550 550 700 850 850 1000
Standard IP20 IP20
Environmental
Oil Mist – – IP65
Specifications
Clean – – ISOclass3
CR2QA-7_ _,
Controller (*1) CR750-D/Q CR750-D/Q; CR750-MB IP54 controller protection box available
CR2DA-7_ _
Note:
1. 7_ _ in controller type names differ according to the robot arm.
460
F-Series Part Number Configuration
RV-o F o o-o-Soo RH-o FH o o o-o-Soo

Compliance Specification
Sxx (Non-Optional)
CE specification for CR750 and
15 CR751 controller
Symbol Arm Length Non-CE specification for CR751
11 Symbol Vertical Stroke Compliance Specification
Blank Standard specifications controller Sxx
12 120mm (Non-Optional)
Long arm: Applies to RV-4, KC specification for CR751
L 19 15 150mm CE specification for CR750 and
RV-7, RV-13 (Korean market) 15
20 200mm CR751 controller
Extended long arm: Applies
LL SHXXxx Internal Wiring Specifications Non-CE specification for
to RV-7 34 340mm 11
(Optional) CR751 controller
Blank No internal wiring 35 350mm
KC specification for CR751
45 450mm 19
Symbol Series 01, 02, (See table on page 473 for (Korean market)
F F Series 03, 04, definitions) IP54 controller protection box
05 M
Symbol Arm Length for CR750 controller
Symbol Maximum Load Capacity Note: Underlined characters are integrated into 35 350mm
compliance specification above.
2 2kg (EXAMPLE: S15 compliance spec with internal wiring spec 45 450mm Symbol Controller Type
4 4kg 02 = SH1502) 55 550mm D1 CR750-D Q1: CR750-Q
7 7kg 70 700mm CR750-D Q: CR750-Q (When
D
Symbol Controller Type 85 850mm SM protection box designated)
13 13kg
D1 CR750-D Q1: CR750-Q 100 1000mm CR751-D 1Q1: CR751-Q
20 20kg 1D1 (For CE)
1D1 CR751-D 1Q1: CR751-Q (For CE)
CR751-D 1Q: CR751-Q (For CR751-D 1Q: CR751-Q
1D 1D
Symbol Robot Structure Non-CE) Symbol Series (For Non-CE)
RV Vertical, multiple joint FH F Series
Symbol Environment Symbol Environment
Blank Standard specifications Symbol Maximum Load Blank Standard specifications
Capacity M Oil mist specifications
M Oil mist specifications
3 3kg C Clean specifications
C Clean specifications
6 6kg
12 12kg
20 20kg
Symbol Robot Structure

RV Series RH Horizontal multiple
joint type
RV-2F
Model Number RV-2F(B)
Environmental Speciications Standard
Protection Degree IP30
Installation Floor type, ceiling type, (wall-mounted type) (*2)
Structure Vertical, multiple-joint type
Degrees of Freedom 6
Drive System (*1) AC servo motor (J2, J3 and J5: with brake)
Position Detection Method Absolute encoder
Maximum Load Capacity (Rating) kg 2
Arm Length (mm) 230 + 270
Maximum Reach Radius (mm) 504
J1 480 (±240)
J2 240 (-120 to +120)
J3 160 (-0 to +160)
Operating Range (deg)
J4 400 (±200)
J5 240 (-120 to +120)
J6 720 (-360 to +360)
J1 300
J2 150
J3 300
Maximum Speed (deg/sec)
J4 450
J5 450
J6 720
Maximum Composite Speed (mm/sec) (*3) 4955
Cycle Time (sec) (*4) 0.6
Position Repeatability (mm) ±0.02
Ambient Temperature (°C) 0 to 40
Weight (kg) 19
J4 4.17
Tolerable Moment (Nm) J5 4.17
J6 2.45
J4 0.18
Tolerable Amount of Inertia (kgm²) J5 0.18
J6 0.04
Tool Wiring Hand: 4 input points/4 output points; Signal cable for the multi-function hand
Tool Pneumatic Pipes ø4 x 4
Machine Cable 5m (connector on both ends)
Connected Controller CR750-D/Q; CR750-MB IP54 controller protection box available (CR750: Europe, U.S.; CR751: Japan, Asia)
Notes:
1. The standard model does not have a brake on the J1, J4, or J6 axis. There are models available with brakes included for all axes. (RV-2FB)
2. The wall-mounted specification is a custom specification where the operating range of the J1-axis is limited.
3. This is the value at the surface of the mechanical interface when all axes are composited.
4. The cycle time is based on back-and-forth movement over a vertical distance of 25 mm and horizontal distance of 300 mm when the load is 1 kg.

n ROBOTS
RV-4F • RV-4FL
Model Number RV-4F(M)(C) RV-4FL(M)(C)
Environmental Speciications Standard / Oil mist / Clean
Protection Degree IP40 (standard) / IP67 (oil mist) (*1) / ISOclass3 (*6)
Drive System (*1) AC servo motor
Arm Length (mm) 240 + 270 245 + 300
Maximum Reach Radius (mm) 515 649
J1 480 (±240)
J2 240 (-120 to +120)
J3 161 (-0 to +161) 164 (-0 to +164)
J4 400 (±200)
J5 240 (-120 to +120)
J6 720 (±360)
J1 450 420
J2 450 336
J3 300 250
J4 540 540
J5 623 623
J6 720 720
Maximum Composite Speed (mm/sec) (*3) 9027 9048
Cycle Time (sec) (*4) 0.36 0.36
Weight (kg) 39 41
J4 6.66
J6 3.96
J4 0.2
J6 0.1
Tool Wiring Hand: 8 input points/8 output points; Signal cable for the multi-function hand and sensors; LAN X 1 <100 BASE-TX> (8-pin) (*5)
Tool Pneumatic Pipes Primary: Ø6 x 2; Secondary: Ø4 x 8, Ø4 x 4 (from base portion to forearm)
Connected Controller CR750-D/Q CR750-D/Q; CR750-MB IP54 controller protection box available (CR750: Europe, U.S.; CR751: Japan, Asia)
Notes:
1. Please contact Mitsubishi Electric dealer since the environmental resistance may not be secured depending on the characteristics of oil you use. Air will need to be purged from the lines. For details,
refer to the specifications sheet.
5. Can also be used as a spare line (0.2 sq. mm, 4-pair cable) for conventional models.
6. Preservation of cleanliness levels depends on conditions of a downstream flow of 0.3 m/s in the clean room and internal robot suctioning. A Ø8-mm coupler for suctioning is provided at the back of
the base.
462
RV-7F • RV-7FL • RV-7FLL
Model Number RV-7F(M)(C) RV-7FL(M)(C) RV-7FLL(M)(C)
Environmental Speciications Standard / Oil mist / Clean
Protection Degree IP40 (standard) / IP67 (oil mist) (*1) / ISOclass3 (*6)
Drive System (*1) AC servo motor
Arm Length (NO1 am) 340 + 360 430 + 465 565 + 805
Maximum Reach Radius (mm) 713 908 1503
J1 480 (±240)
J2 240 (-115 to +125) 240 (-110 to +130) 240 (-90 to +150)
J3 156 (-0 to +156) 162 (-0 to +162) 167.5 (-10 to +157)
J4 400 (±200)
J5 240 (-120 to +120)
J6 720 (±360)
J1 360 288 254
J2 401 321 164
J3 450 360 219
J4 337 337 375
J5 450 450 450
J6 720 720 720
Maximum Composite Speed (mm/sec) (*3) 11064 10977 15,300
Cycle Time (sec) (*4) 0.32 0.35 0.63
Position Repeatability (mm) ±0.02 ±0.06
Weight (kg) 65 67 130
J4 16.2
J6 6.86
J4 0.45
J6 0.10
Hand: 8 input points/8 output points (20 pins total); Serial signal cable for parallel I/O (2-pin + 2-pin power line);
Tool Wiring
LAN X 1 <100 BASE-TX> (8-pin)) (*5)
Tool Pneumatic Pipes Primary: Ø6 x 2; Secondary: Ø4 x 8, Ø4 x 4 (from base portion to forearm)
Connected Controller CR750-D/Q; CR750-MB IP54 controller protection box available (CR750: Europe, U.S.; CR751: Japan, Asia)
Notes
1. Please contact Mitsubishi Electric dealer since the environmental resistance may not be secured depending on the characteristics of oil you use. Air will need to be purged from the lines. For details, refer to the
specifications sheet.
6. Preservation of cleanliness levels depends on conditions of a downstream flow of 0.3 m/s in the clean room and internal robot suctioning. A Ø8-mm coupler for suctioning is provided at the back of the base.

n ROBOTS
RV-13F • RV-13FL• RV20F
Model Number RV-13F(M)(C) RV-13FL(M)(C) RV-20F(M)(C)
Environment Standard / oil mist / clean
Protection Degree IP40 (standard), IP67 (oil mist) (*1), ISO Class 3 (*2)
Mounting Position The loor, the ceiling suspension (hanging wall) (*3)
Structure Vertical articulated
Degree of Freedom 6 axis
Drive System AC servo motor
Maximum Payload (Rated) kg 13 20
Arm Length (mm) 400 + 550 565 + 960 410 + 550
Maximum Reach Radius (mm) 1,094 1,388 1,094
J1 380 (±190)
J2 240 (-90 to +150)
J3 167.5 (-10 to +157.5)
J4 400 (±200)
J5 240 (±120)
J6 720 (±360)
J1 290 234 110
J2 234 164 110
J3 312 219 110
J4 375 375 124
J5 375 375 125
J6 720 720 360
Synthetic Maximum Speed (mm/sec) (*4) 10,450 9,700 4,200
Cycle Time (sec) (*5) 0.53 0.68 0.70
Weight (kg) Approx. 120 Approx. 125 Approx. 120
J4 19.3 49.0
Allowable Movement (Nm) J5 19.3 49.0
J6 11 11
J4 0.47 1.40
Allowable Inertia (KGM2) J5 0.47 1.40
J6 0.14 0.14
Tool Wiring Hand: 8 input points / 8 output points, multifunction hand dedicated signal line LAN x 1 (100BASE-TX)
Tool Pneumatic Pipes Primary: ø6 x 2 Secondary: 8 ø 6 x 4 this ø 4 x (wrist interior at the time)
Connection Controller CR750-D/Q; CR750-MB IP54 controller protection box available (CR750: Europe, U.S.; CR751: Japan, Asia) (*6)
Notes:
1. Depending on the nature of the oil to be used by the customer, please contact your dealer because there is a case to withstand environment performance can not be ensured.
2. Robot internal suction and low down 0.3m/s of clean room condition becomes the protection of cleanliness. I am prepared to back the base joint of Ø8 to suction.
3. Wall specification is a special specification that limits the J1 axis operating range.
4. This is the value on the mechanical interface of the surface when all axes are combined.
5. In reciprocating motion up and down 25mm, horizontal 300mm, is the value of the load 5kg.
6. Controller, please select one according to the application type. CR750-D: stand alone. CR750-Q: iQ Platform compatible type.
464
RH Series
RH-3SQHR • RH-3SDHR
Model Number RH-3SQHR-S_ • RH-3SDHR-S_
Machine Class Standard
Protection Degree IP20
Installation Ceiling type
Structure Horizontal, multiple-joint type
Drive System AC servo motor (J1, J2 and J4: with no brake, J3: with brake)
Maximum Load Capacity (Rating) kg 3 (1)
NO1 Arm 175
Arm Length (mm)
NO2 Arm 175
Maximum Reach Radius (NO1 + NO 2) (mm) 350
J1 Deg. 450 (±225)
J2 Deg. 450 (±225)
J3 (Z) mm 150 (0 to 150)
J4 (ø) Deg 1440 (±720)
J1 Deg/sec 672
J2 Deg/sec 708
J3 mm/sec 1500
J4 Deg/sec 3146
Maximum Composite Speed 6267
Cycle Time 0.32
X-Y Composite mm ±0.01
Position Repeatability (mm) J3 (Z) mm ±0.01
J4 (ø) Deg ±0.01
Weight (kg) Approx. 24
Tool Wiring Hand: 8 input points / 0 output points, 8 spare lines (8 output points by options)
Tool Pneumatic Pipes Primary: ø6 x 2 Secondary: ø4 x 8
Connected Controller CR2QA-781 / CR2DA-781
RH-3FH
Model Number RH-3FH3515/12C RH-3FH4515/12C RH-3FH5515/12C
Machine Class Standard / Clean
Protection Degree (*1) IP20 / ISOclass3 (*5)
Installation Floor type
Maximum Load Capacity (Rating) kg Maximum 3 (rating 1)
NO1 Arm 125 225 325
Arm Length (mm)
NO2 Arm 225
Maximum Reach Radius (NO1 + NO2) (mm) 350 450 550
J1 Deg. 340 (±170)
J2 Deg. 290 (±145)
J3 (Z) mm 150 (Clean speciication : 120) (*1)
J4 (ø) Deg 720 (±360)
J1 Deg/sec 420
J2 Deg/sec 720
J3 mm/sec 1100
J4 Deg/sec 3000
Maximum Composite Speed (*2) 6800 7500 8300
Cycle Time (*3) 0.41 0.46 0.51
X-Y Composite mm ±0.010 ±0.010 ±0.012
J4 (ø) Deg ±0.004
Weight (kg) 29 29 32
Rating (kg) 0.005
Tolerable Amount of Inertia
Maximum (kgm²) 0.06
Tool Wiring
LAN X 1 <100 BASE-TX> (8-pin)) (*4)
Connected Controller (*5) CR750-D/Q; CR750-MB IP54 controller protection box available (CR750: Europe, U.S.; CR751: Japan, Asia)
Notes:
1. The range for vertical movement listed in the environmental resistance specifications (C: Clean specifications) for the RH-3FH is narrower than for the standard model. Keep this in mind when working with the
RH-3FH. The environment-resistant specifications are factory-set custom specifications.
2. The value assumes composition of J1, J2, and J4.
3. Value for a maximum load capacity of 2 kg. The cycle time may increase if specific requirements apply such as high work positioning accuracy, or depending on the operating position. (The cycle time is based on
back-and-forth movement over a vertical distance of 25 mm and horizontal distance of 300 mm.)
5. Preservation of cleanliness levels depends on conditions of a downstream flow of 0.3 m/s in the clean room and internal robot suctioning. A ø8-mm coupler for suctioning is provided at the back of the base.

n ROBOTS
RH-6FH
Model Number RH-6FH35XX/M/C RH-6FH45XX/M/C RH-6FH55XX/M/C
Machine Class Standard / Oil mist / Clean
Protection Degree (*1) IP20 / IP65 (*6) / ISO3 (*7)
Maximum Load Capacity (Rating) kg Maximum 6 (rating 3)
NO1 Arm 125 225 325
Arm Length (mm)
NO2 Arm 225
Maximum Reach Radius (NO1 + NO2) (mm) 350 450 550
J1 Deg. 340 (±170)
J2 Deg. 290 (±145)
J3 (Z) mm xx = 20 : 200/ xx = 34 : 340
J4 (ø) Deg 720 (±360)
J1 Deg/sec 400
J2 Deg/sec 670
J3 mm/sec 2400
J4 Deg/sec 2500
Maximum Composite Speed (*2) 6900 7600 8300
Cycle Time (*3) 0.29
X-Y Composite mm ±0.010 ±0.010 ±0.012
J4 (ø) Deg ±0.004
Weight (kg) 36 36 37
Rating (kg) 0.01
Maximum (kgm²) 0.12
Tool Wiring
LAN X 1 <100 BASE-TX> (8-pin)) (*4)
Notes:
1. The range of vertical movement listed in the environmental resistance specifications (M: Oil mist specifications, C: Cleanroom specifications) for the RH-6FH is factory-set custom specifications.
3. Value for a maximum load capacity of 2 kg. The cycle time may increase if specific requirements apply such as high work positioning accuracy, or depending on the operating position. (The cycle time is based
on back-and-forth movement over a vertical distance of 25 mm and horizontal distance of 300 mm.)
5. Select either controller according to your application. CR751-D: Standalone type, CR751-Q: iQ Platform compatible type.
6. Please contact Mitsubishi Electric dealer since the environmental resistance may not be secured depending on the characteristics of oil you use. Direct jet to the bellows is excluded.
7. Preservation of cleanliness levels depends on conditions of a downstream flow of 0.3 m/s in the clean room and internal robot suctioning. A Ø8-mm coupler for suctioning is provided at the back of the base.
466
RH-12FH
Model Number RH-12FH55XX/M/C RH-12FH70XX/M/C RH-12FH85XX/M/C RH-20FH85XX/M/C RH-20FH100XX/M/C
Machine Class Standard / Oil mist / Clean
Protection Degree (*1) IP20 / IP65 (*6) / ISO3 (*7)
Maximum Load Capacity (Rating) kg Maximum 12 (rating 3) Maximum 20 (rating 5)
NO1 Arm 225 375 525 525 525
Arm Length (mm)
NO2 Arm 325 325 475
Maximum Reach Radius (NO1 + NO2) (mm) 550 700 850 850 1000
J1 Deg. 340 (±170)
J2 Deg. 290 (±145) 306 (±153) 306 (±153)
J3 (Z) mm xx = 35 : 350/ xx = 45 : 450
J4 (ø) Deg 720 (±360)
J1 Deg/sec 420 280 280
J2 Deg/sec 450
J3 mm/sec 2800 2400
J4 Deg/sec 2400 1700
Maximum Composite Speed (*2) 11435 12535 11350 11372 13283
Cycle Time (*3) 0.30 0.30 0.36
X-Y Composite mm ±0.012 ±0.015 ±0.015 ±0.015 ±0.02
J4 (ø) Deg ±0.005
Weight (kg) 65 67 69 75 77
Rating (kg) 0.025 0.065
Maximum (kgm²) 0.3 1.05
Tool Wiring
LAN X 1 <100 BASE-TX> (8-pin)) (*4)
Tool Pneumatic Pipes Primary: ø6 x 2; Secondary: ø6 x 8
Notes:
1. The environment-resistant specifications (C: Clean specification, M: Mist specification) are factory-set custom specifications.
3. Value for a maximum load capacity of 2 kg. The cycle time may increase if specific requirements apply such as high work positioning accuracy, or depending on the operating position. (The cycle time is based
on back-and-forth movement over a vertical distance of 25 mm and horizontal distance of 300 mm.)
5. Select either controller according to your application. CR751-D: Standalone type, CR751-Q: iQ Platform compatible type.
6. Please contact Mitsubishi Electric dealer since the environmental resistance may not be secured depending on the characteristics of oil you use. Direct jet to the bellows is excluded.
7. Preservation of cleanliness levels depends on conditions of a downstream flow of 0.3 m/s in the clean room and internal robot suctioning. A Ø-mm coupler for suctioning is provided at the back of the base.

n ROBOTS
Controllers
FQ Series FD Series
FD Series
Controller configuration Controller configuration
MELFA Controller MELFA Controller
Q Type (iQ Platform compatible) D Type (Standlone)
CR750-Q CR750-D
Robot CPU
Q172DRCPU
MR-J4-B
Ethernet MR-J3-BS
Ethernet
SSCNET III
(optical
Controller communications)
Robot CPU
Additional axis function CRnD-7xx
USB Drive unit Controller
communication Pulse encoder
SSCNET III
(optical communications)
MR-J4-B
Additional axis function
MR-J3-BS USB
Encoder input function communication
CR750-Q
Model Number
CR750-D
Stocked Item Included with Robot part numbers
Robot CPU FQ Series: Q172DRCPU
Path Control Method PTP control and CP control
Number of Axes Controlled Maximum 6 axes
Robot Language MELFA-BASIC IV/V
Position Teaching Method Teaching method, MDI method
Number of Teaching Points FQ Series: 13,000; FD Series: 39,000
Memory Capacity Number of Steps FQ Series: 26,000; FD Series: 78,000
Number of Programs (Unit) FQ Series: 256; FD Series: 512
FQ Series: 8192 input points/8192 output points with the multiple CPU common device
General-Purpose I/O
FD Series: 0 input/0 output (Up to 256/256 when options are used)
Dedicated I/O FQ Series: Assigned to multiple CPU common device; SD Series: Assigned to general-purpose I/O
Hand Open/Close 8 input / 8 output
Emergency Stop Input 1 (redundant)
External Input/ Door Switch Input 1 (redundant)
Output (Points)
Enabling Device Input 1 (redundant)
Emergency Stop Output 1 (redundant)
Mode Output 1 (redundant)
Robot Error Output 1 (redundant)
Sync.of Additional Axes 1 (redundant)
RS-422 1 (Teaching pendant: dedicated T/B)
FQ Series: 1 (dedicated teaching pendant port) 10BASE-T
Ethernet
FD Series: 1 (dedicated teaching pendant port), 1 (for customer) 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
FQ Series: 1 (USB port of programmable controller CPU unit can be used)
USB
Interface FD Series: (Ver. 2.0 device functions only, mini B terminal)
Hand Dedicated Slot 1 (dedicated for pneumatic hand interface)
Additional-Axis Interface 1 (SSCNET III)
Extension Slot (*1) FQ Series: – ; FD Series: 2
Encoder Input (Chanels) FQ Series: Q173DPX (Sold separately); FD Series: 2
Ambient Temperature (°C) FQ Series: 0 to 40 (drive unit) / 0 to 55 (Robot CPU); SD Series: 0 to 40
Relative Humidity (%RH) 45 to 85
RV-2F/4F, RH-3FH/6FH: Single-phase AC 180 V to 253 V
Input Voltage Range (V) (*2)
RV-7, RH-12FH/20FH: Three-phase AC 180 V to 253 V or Single-phase AC 207 V to 253 V
Power Supply RV-2F, RH-3FH: 0.5
RV-4F, RH-6FH: 1.0
Power Capacity kVA (*3)
RH-12FH/20FH: 1.5
RV-7F: 2.0
External Dimensions (including legs) mm
430 x 425 x 174
(W x D x H)
Weight (kg) Approx. 16
Structure (Protective Speciication) Self-contained loor type/open structure (Vertical and horizontal position can be placed) [IP20]
Grounding Ω (*4) 100 or less (class D grounding)
Notes:
1. For installing option interface.
2. The rate of power-supply voltage fluctuation is within 10%.
3. The power capacity indicates the rating for normal operation. Take note that the power capacity does not include the currentbeing input when the power is turned on. The power capacity is only a rough guide
and whether or not operation can be guaranteed depends on the input power-supply voltage.
4. Grounding works are the customer’s responsibility.
468
Drive unit CR750-Q Controller protection box (IP54)
Controller CR750-D Drive unit CR750-MB
The controller protection box is used to protect the controller
from oil mist and other usage environments. (For CR750) The
front panel of the protection box has a mode switch and teaching
box connector. It also contains a display window for viewing the
controller operation panel.
Cable cover
(70.3)
(92.5)
(40)
100
(80)
Drain hole
510
725
520
Controller installation location
260
425
(122.5)
100
Rubber feet for vertical
85
(10) 505 (10)

(45) 160 (45) mounting screws
72.5 365
(Four)
(21.7)
164
250
158
174
55
(25)
(85) 330 (85)
500
(30) 370 (30)
430
Multiple CPU Environment

Unit Type
High-speed standard base between
multiple CPU
Base • Q35DB: 5 slots
• Q38DB: 8 slots
• Q312DB: 12 slots
Power Supply Q61P, Q62P, Q63P, Q64PN
Universal model (CPU that can transmit by
multiple CPU high speed transmission)
• Q03UD(E)CPU
• Q04UD(E)HCPU
Programmable • Q06UD(E)HCPU
Controller CPU • Q10UD(E)HCPU
• Q13UD(E)HCPU
• Q20UD(E)HCPU
• Q26UD(E)HCPU
• Q100UD(E)HCPU

n ROBOTS
FQ Series
Robot Arm Options Ethernet
Vision System
Hand curl tube GOT
Encoder
interface
Hand output cable Standard Devices Insert
Q173DPX
M EL SEC Q172DRCPU
POWER Q01CPU Q41X
Q6xP
RUN
ERR SW
STOP RUN
DISPLAY I/F
EMI
Robot CPU
CN1
PULL
▼
TU I/F
PULL
Hand input cable
CN2
RS-232
▼
MITSUBISHI
iQ Platform-Compatible NC
Cable for Robot
CPU-to-DU connection Programmable Controller
Drive unit
Solenoid valve set
Internal wiring and

Machine Cable Controller Servo
piping set for hand
External user wiring Robot

and piping box
GOT
Teaching pendant Pulse Encoder
(option)
Software Options
USB Cable SSCNETIII
USB Additional
communication axis function Servo
(MR-J3-BS/MR-J4-B)
MELFA-Works RT ToolBox2
FD Series
Robot Arm Options Pulse encoder
Hand curl tube

GOT Vision system
Hand output cable
Encoder NC
interface
Ethernet
Hand input cable Remote parallel External I/O
Controller I/O unit cable
Controller Options
Servo
Solenoid valve set
Internal wiring and Machine cable Additional-axis

piping set for hand interface
On-board parallel External I/O
External user wiring I/O interface cable Programmable
Robot USB
and piping box communication controller
Teaching pendant CC-Link GOT

(optional) interface
Network base card

Software Options (EtherNet/IP)
USB
MELFA-Works cable
SSCNETIII
Servo
(MR-J3-BS/MR-J4-B)
MELFA-Works RT ToolBox2
470
Configuration Options
RV RH
Name Model Number 13F
4F 7F 12FH Functional Specification
2F 7FLL 13FL 3FH 6FH
4FL 7FL 20FH
20FLL
1E-VD0_ (Sink) 1 to 2 valves, with solenoid valve output cable
X - - - - - - -
1E-VD0_E (Source) _ indicates the number of solenoid valves (1 or 2 valves)
1F-VD0_-02 (Sink)
- X X X - - - - 1 to 4 valves, with solenoid valve output cable.
1F-VD0_E-02 (Source)
_ indicates the number of solenoid valves
1F-VD0_-03 (Sink) (1, 2, 3, or 4 valves)
Solenoid Valve Set - - - - X - - -
1F-VD0_-01 (Sink)
- - - - - X X - 1 to 4 valves, with solenoid valve output cable.
_ indicates the number of solenoid valves
1S-VD0_-01 (Sink) (1, 2, 3, or 4 valves)
- - - - - - - X
1S-VD0_E-01 (Source)
Straight cable for 2-solenoid valve systems, total length of 300 mm,
1E-GR35S X - - - - - - -
with a robot connector on one side and unterminated on the other side
1F-GR35S-02 - X X X X - - -
Hand Output Cable with a robot connector on one side and unterminated on the other side
1F-GR60S-01 - - - - - X X X with a robot connector on one side and unterminated on the other side,
equipped with a splash-proof grommet
4-point type, with a robot connector on one side and unterminated on
1S-HC30C-11 X - - - - - - -
the other side
8-point type, total length of 1000 mm, with a robot connector on one
1F-HC35S-02 - X X X X - - -
side and unterminated on the other side
Hand Input Cable 8-point type, total length of 1650 mm (includes a 350-mm-long curled
1F-HC35C-01 - - - - - X X - section), with a robot connector on one side and unterminated on the
other side, equipped with a splash-proof grommet
8-point type, total length of 1800 mm (includes a 350-mm-long curled
1F-HC35C-02 - - - - - - - X section), with a robot connector on one side and unterminated on the
other side, equipped with a splash-proof grommet
Compatibility with Ø4-4 solenoid valve systems (2, 4, 6, 8) RV-2F is
1E-ST040_C X X X X - - - -
only 2, 4 (L = 300 mm) _ indicates the number of solenoid valves
Hand (Curl) Tube 1E-ST0408C-300 - - - - - X X - Compatibility with Ø4-4 solenoid valve systems (L = 300 mm)
1N-ST0608C-01 - - - - X - - X Compatibility with Ø6-4 solenoid valve systems
Used for the forearm. External wiring box used for connecting the
External Wiring Set 1
1F-HB01S-01 - X X X X - - - hand input cable, the Ethernet cable, and the electrical hand and force
for the Forearm
sensor cable
External Wiring Set 2 Used for the forearm. External wiring box used for connecting the
1F-HB02S-01 - X X X X - - -
for the Forearm force sensor, the electrical hand, and the Ethernet cable.
Used for the base. External wiring box used for connecting the
External Wiring Set 1 communications output for the electrical hand, the electrical hand
1F-HA01S-01 - X X X X - - -
for the Base and force sensor cable, and the Ethernet cable. There are hand input
connection available.
Used for the base. External wiring box used for connecting the
External Wiring Set 2 communications output for the electrical hand, the electrical hand, the
1F-HA02S-01 - X X X X - - -
for the Base force sensor cable, and the Ethernet cable. No hand input connection
available.
Wiring and piping set for internal mounting in the tip axis (Compatible
1F-HS604S-01 - - - - - - - X with 8 input points for hand systems +Ø6-2 solenoid valve systems)
For 350mm Z-axis stroke
1F-HS604S-02 - - - - - - - X with 8 input points for hand systems + Ø6-2 solenoid valve systems)
Internal Wiring and Wiring and piping set for internal mounting in the tip axis (Compatible
Piping Set for Hand 1F-HS408S-01 - - - - - - X - with 8 input points for hand systems + Ø4-4 solenoid valve systems)
1F-HS408S-02 - - - - - - X - with 8 input points for hand systems + Ø4-4 solenoid valve systems)
1F-HS304S-01 - - - - - X - -
with 4 input points for hand systems +Ø3-2solenoid valve systems)
External User Wiring 1F-UT-BOX - - - - - X X -
Box for external wiring of user wiring (hand I/O, hand tube)
and Piping Box 1F-UT-BOX-01 - - - - - - - X
Machine Cable 1S-02UCBL-01 - X X X X - X X
2M long cables for securement purposes (2-wire set with power
(Replacement for
1F-02UCBL-01 - - - - - X - - supply and signal)
Shorter 2M Type) (*1)
1S-_ _CBL-11 X - - - - - - - Extension type, extended length 5M, 10M, 15M
(2 wires set with power and signal wires)
Machine Cable, For 1S-_ _CBL-01 - X X X X - X X _ _indicates the length of cables (5M, 10M, 15M)
Extension/Fixed
Direct type, 10M, 15M, 20M (2 wires set with power and signal wires)
1F-_ _UCBL-02 - - - - - X - -
_ _ indicates the length of cables (10M, 15M, 20M)
Note:
1. This is a special specification for shipping. Inquire for delivery and prices.

n ROBOTS
Coniguration Options (continued)
RV RH
Name Model Number 13F Functional Specification
4F 7F 12FH
2F 7FLL 13FL 3FH 6FH
4FL 7FL 20FH
20FLL
Extention type, extended length 5M, 10M,
1S-_ _LCBL-11 X - - - - - - - 15M (2 wires set with power and signal
wires) _ _ indicates the length of cables
Machine Cable, For (5, 10, 15M)
1S-_ _LCBL-01 - X X X X - X X
Extension/Flexible
Direct type, 10M, 15M, 20M (2 wires set
1F-_ _LUCBL-02 - - - - - X - - with power and signal wires) _ _ indicates
the length of cables (10, 15, 20M)
1S-DH-11J1 X - - - - - - -
1F-DH-05J1 - - - X X - - -
Stopper for Changing 1F-DH-04 - - X - - - - -
the J1-Axis Operating Range 1F-DH-03 - X - - - - - -
1F-DH-02 - - - - - - - X Stopper for making changes, changed as
1F-DH-01 - - - - - X X - needed for customer installations
Stopper for Changing

1S-DH-11J2 X - - - - - - -
the J2-Axis Operating Range
Stopper for Changing
1S-DH-11J3 X - - - - - - -
the J3-Axis Operating Range
CR750 CR751
Name Type Functional Specification
Q Type D Type Q Type Q Type
Standard Teaching Pendant (7M, 15M) R32TB(-_) X X - - 7M: Standard / 15M: Custom
High-Function Teaching Pendant (7M, 15M) R56TB(-_) X X - - (“-15” is specified in the model name) For CR-750-_
Standard Teaching Pendant (7M, 15M) R33TB(-_) - - X X 7M: Standard / 15M: Custom
High-Function Teaching Pendant (7M, 15M) R57TB(-_) - - X X (“-15” is specified in the model name) For CR-751-_
2A-RZ361 (Sink) - X - X 32 input/output points (12/24VDC: 0.1A/1 point)
On-Board Parallel I/O Interface
2A-RZ371 (Source) - X - X 32 input/output points (12VDC: 3mA, 24VDC: 7mA)
Remote Parallel I/O Cable (5M, 15M) 2A-CBL_ _ - X - X CBL05: 5M; CBL15: 15M. One end not treated, for 2A-RZ361/371
On-Board Parallel I/O Interface 2D-TZ368 (Sink) - X - X 32 input/output points (12/24VDC: 0.1A/1 point)
(Installed Internally) 2D-TZ378 (Source) - X - X 32 input/output points (12VDC: 3mA, 24VDC: 7mA)
Remote Parallel I/O Cable (5M, 15M) 2D-CBL_ _ - X - X CBL05: 5M; CBL15: 15M. One end not treated, for 2D-TZ368/378
Additional Memory PCB 2MB 2D-TZ454 - X - X Memory expansion for D Series controllers
Network Base Card 2D-TZ535 - X - X Ethernet I/P option to connect Q Series robots to PLCs (*2)
CC-Link Interface 2D-TZ576 - X - X CC-Link intelligent device station, Version 2.0, 1 to 4 stations
DeviceNet Interface 2D-TZ571 - X - X DeviceNet interface card for D Series controllers
Ethernet IP Card 2D-TZ600EIP - X - X Ethernet interface card for D Series controllers
Profibus Interface 2D-TZ577 - X - X Profibus interface card for D Series controllers
Set of devices required for the force control function including a force
Force Sensor Set 4F-FS001-W200 X X X X
sensor and interface unit
Terminal block replacement tool for the wiring for the external input/
Terminal Block Replacement Tool for the
2F-CNUSR01M - - X X output, such as emergency input/output, door switch input, and
User Wiring
enabling device input
Connection terminal for the AC power supply input connector.
AC Power Supply Connection Cable 2F-ACIN_P01M - - X X
In _ 1 indicates the single phase and 3 indicates three phases
Conversion cable to connect the controller to R32TB CR-751
Teaching Box Replacement Cable 2F-32CON03M X - X -
3M cable length
iQ CPU to amplifier connection CABLE SET. (Replacement/Custom
Robot CPU Unit Connection Cable Set 2Q-RC-CBL_ _M X - X - length) Includes: TU, DISP, EMI, and SSCNET; _ _ = 05 (5M), 20 (20M),
30 (30M)
Robot CPU-TU communication cable for iQ
Robot Dedicated TU Cable (M) 2Q-TUCBL_ _M X - X -
_ _ = 05, 20, 30M length (Replacement/Custom length)
Robot CPU-DISP communication cable for iQ
Robot Dedicated DISP Cable 2Q-DISPCBL_ _M X - X -
_ _ = 05, 20, 30M length (Replacement/Custom length)
CPU to Amp emergency stop input cable for iQ
Robot-Only EMI Cable 2Q-EMICBL_ _M X - X -
_ _ = 05, 20, 30M cable length (Replacement/Custom length)
SSCNET to Amp cable for iQ; _ = 05, 20M cable length.
MR-J3BUS_M-A X - X -
SSCNET Cable (Replacement/Custom length)
MR-J3BUS30M-B X - X - SSCNET to Amp cable for iQ 30M (Replacement)
With a built-in CR750-D/Q for improved dust-proofing to IP54
Controller Protection Box (*1) CR750-MB X X - -
(Dedicated CR750)
Personal Computer Support Software 3D-11C-WINJ(E) X X X X With simulation function (CD-ROM)
Personal Computer Support Software - Mini 3D-12C-WINJ(E) X X X X Lite version (CD-ROM)
Layout study/Takt time study/Program debug. Add-in software for
Simulator (MELFA-Works) 3F-21D-WINJ(E) X X X X
Solidworks® (*3)
Three-dimensional camera head and control unit, set the necessary
MELFA-3D Vision 4F-3DVS2-PKG1 X X X X equipment to three-dimensional vision sensor function (Compatible
models: RV-F series)
Notes:
1. For CR-750. 2. Users need to provide the HMS EtherNet/IP module (AB6314-B) themselves. 3. SolidWorks® is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation (USA).
472
RV-4F/RV-7F Series Tooling Device Configuration
Required Device
Robot
Hand Configuration Wiring Format External Wiring Set for External Wiring Set Remarks
Specifications
the Forearm for the Base (*3)
Air hoses: Up to 2 systems
Interior equipment SHxx01 - (*1) -
(4 mm diameter x 4 mm); 8 input signals
Air-Hand + Hand Input Signal

Product Selection Guide Whole Book

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Product Selection Guide Whole Book

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PRODUCT

PROGRAMMABLE AUTOMATION CONTROLLERS

QS Safety PAC ....................................................................................... 80

Distributed I/O ....................................................................................... 87

WS Safety Controller ............................................................................. 127

L Series Programmable Logic Controllers .................................................... 131

FX Family .......................................................................................... 149

Human Machine Interfaces ...................................................................... 183

Motion Controllers ................................................................................ 209

Servomotors and Ampliiers .................................................................... 233

Variable Frequency Drives ...................................................................... 397

Robots .............................................................................................. 459

Computerized Numerical Controls ............................................................. 477

Energy Products and Solutions ................................................................. 523

Software ............................................................................................ 533

Low Voltage Switchgear ......................................................................... 543

Demonstration Kits ............................................................................... 549

Index ................................................................................................ 551

Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Table of Contents I

USA / Canada Toll Free: 1 (800) 950-7781

24/7 USA / Canada Toll Free: 1 (888) 701-7999

International Support: +1 (847) 478-2100

Website: www.meau.com/contactus • Email: tsg@meau.com

Extended Support and Service Programs (ESSPSM)

Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Support and Services 3

Standard Product Training

Standard Classes Offered

For a complete listing of current courses visit www.meau.com/training/industrial_automation

Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Support and Services 5

QS Safety PLC 12-1024

Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Programmable Automation Controller / PAC 7

Multiple CPU System Configuration

Sequence Motion CNC Robot WINCPU

Extension base unit

Modular CPUs ............................................................................................................................................................................. 9

iQ Platform CPU Configuration

CON0 CON0 CON0 CON0 CON0 CON0 CON0 CON0 CON0

1st CPU 2nd – 4th CPU

Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Programmable Automation Controller / PAC 9

Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Programmable Automation Controller / PAC 11

Model Number Q173DCPU Q172DCPU

0.44ms / 1 to 6 axes; 0.88ms / 7 to 18 axes

Manual Pulse Generator Operation

Internal Current Consumption (5VDC) [A] 1.25 1.14

iQ Platform Robot CPU Key Features:

Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Programmable Automation Controller / PAC 13

Model Number Q10WCPU-W1-E Q10WCPU-W1-CFE

Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Programmable Automation Controller / PAC 15

Model Number Q12DCCPU-V

Q Series Process Control CPUs

Process Control CPUs

Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Programmable Automation Controller / PAC 17

Model Number Description Contents Included? Stocked Item

Overview, System Configuration, Tracking cable, Procedure for starting

Redundant power supply configuration

System A - System B - Standby

Mitsubishi Electric Automation | Programmable Automation Controller / PAC 19

iQ Platform Base Units

Q Series Base Units

DIN Rail Adapters

DIN Rail Mounting Adapters

Extension Base Units

D. Power Supply Modules

Model Number Q61P Q61P-D Q62P Q63P Q64PN Q63RP Q64RP